JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—QG-—

WOE. ENE.

PART II. (NATURAL HisToRY, &c.)

(Nos. I. to V.—1887.)

EDITED BY

JHE NaTURAL ftisTORY PECRETARY.

~~. sense 00 eee eee sc 0—_ Oo ees

‘¢Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science

in different parts of Asza will commit their observations to writing, and send them to

the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long

intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.” SIR WM. JONES.

PDOs ess ee eee OOO eer

CALCUTTA: AO!

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

KX PRINTED BY G. H. ROUSE, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, -

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREBT. ut

1888, RS

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

—@—

Atkinson, HE. T.;—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota: Heteroptera

MM oa thst id 2 dala bs chime cleaned disse nae cee hvsea tes nem es mans

——— ;—Notes on Indian Rhynchota : snibinhii

NNR 5 taceicarsantiin ss k cals saoimctule e's Sous namo ir mamak ba oa lee es Seas

Barctay, A.;—A apes pe of the Peadinns occurring in the

Becbhairhoad : Simla (Western Himalaya). (Plates XII.—

Buanvorn, ars BR ate He Dei of adios Bacaite on the

Faiegall.. (WV ith. a Wood-cnt),.- sos rancssvesnpsssccsesvsccesepneeses

Carpenter, AtrreD ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s tees

Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED

Carpenter, BR. N., Commanding. No. 7. The Mean Tempera-

twre of the Deep Waters of the Bay of Bengal. (Plate X.),...

Exuson, Samuet R. ;—On the changes observed in the Density of the

Surface Sea-water, coincident with, and due to Aerial Distur-

bances, and consequent Alteration of Baric Pressure over adja-

cent Sea Areas: and onthe Usefulness of a more exact measure-

ment of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water: more specially with

Reference to the Waters near and about the Hooghly River

Pilot Station. (Diagram—Plate IX.), wicscerccccscescveccesse sas

Footr, R. Bruce ;—Notes on some recent Neolithic and Palcoli-

thic Finds in South India. (With a Map—Plate XI.), ......

Gitts, G. M. ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine

Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER,

R. N., Commanding. No. 6. On Six new Amphipods from

the Bay of Bengal. (Plates ITT.—VIIL.),........cccecsccscsecces

Jones, E. J.;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine

Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER,

&. N., Commanding. No. 5. On some Nodular Stones obtained

by trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water. (Plate II),

Kine, Grorce ;—A second series of New Species of Ficus from

New Guined,... 1 cee Pansantie ajar Sinaia Saleen

ON some 5 Mets ree of Pied Taain Sumatra, .

;—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perse

Page

145

300

230

259

212

209

iv List of Contributors.

Movxnorapnyay, AsutosH ;—On the Differential rea a of a

Trajectory. (With a Wo0d-cut), ....:..ccccresovavvcresceceravecan ses

—— —— ;—On ee Differ nite “aviation to

all Conics,.... a cree , et ot

——_——_—___— ae Maibiro on ; Plone Bait yi Gamma

(With three Wood-cuts), .........

Scutty, J.;—On the Mammals and Bide eee an ‘Capa

C. E. Yats, C.S.1., of the Afghan Boundary Commission,......

— ;—On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bts-

muth on the Ductility of Silver,. Piven psnWeeaeasete estes

;—On the Chiroptera of ees, A is\siusiniteliclestslehi-teslaleniae ats

Smon, H. ;—H’ tude sur les Arachnides de 1 Aste méridionale faisant

partie des collections de V Indian Musewm (Calcutta), .......s000

— ;—LH’ tude sur les Arachnides del Asie méridionale faisant

partie des collections deV Indian Musewm (Calcutta), .......00008

Woop-Mason, J. ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian

Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED

CarPENntTER, f., N. Commanding. No. 4. Description of a new

Species of Crustacea belonging to the pie aead Family

Hammiag.’ Chlnte Dy). .02. sistas cesssvere nes

;—Natural History Noise From H. Mw s tale

Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED

Carpentrer, &. N., Commanding. No. 8. Description of a new

Species of the Brachyurous Genus Lyreidus from the Depths

of the Andaman Sed, sessreeceerere

Peeeeeesevese are ake eos ateateser one 188

eae eee eee

Page

116

134

288

121

233

101

282

206

376

Dates of issue of the different numbers of the Journal,

Part I7,-1887.

No. I.—Containing pp. 1—120, with Plate IX, was issued on July

23rd, 1887.

No. II.—Containing pp. 121—232, with Plates I, II, III, IV, V, VI,

VII, & VIII, was issued on November 2nd, 1887.

No. III.—Containing pp. 233—349, with Plates X & XI, was issued on

January 30th, 1888.

No. IV.—Containing pp. 349—376, with Plates XII, XIII, XIV, & XV,

was issued on March 18th, 1888.

No. V.—Containing Title-page, Index, &c., to the Volume.

LIST OF PLATES.

I. Lyreidus channert.

II. Barium nodules from 675 fathoms off Colombo.

III. Phronima bucephala and Phronimella hippocephala.

IV. Rhabdosoma investigatoris.

V. Amphipronoé longicornuta.

VI. Lestrigonus bengalensis.

VII. ” ”

VIII. LHurystheus hirsutus.

IX. Diagram for Corrections for Temperature of Fresh Water.

X. Chart shewing Mean Temperature of the Deep Waters of the

Bay of Bengal.

XI. Map of South India shewing the chief localities at which Neolli-

thic and Paleolithic Remains have been found.

RET.

XIII. { Uredines occurring in the Neighbourhood of Simla (Western

XIV. Himalaya).

i n

“f), "a iy ee

e e ’ a

California Academy of Sciences

Presented a eee

April ra ; 1908.

’ ¥ 7 »

a ft

. tor «p< eiezus f

} 7 _ ik) I

* 2 en Oe ary afi

Pf ie He , ; iii

—_ — ee

{

if !

ry : iV te

+ ° his es | i

ds : ; f f Fg =~ - :

Seti A s* Tr. & ul LO) ppc) oth vi ERD am, hey ny

toe © . ‘% P ° 7 o e c ‘

Fe OL OUR ee, ab: Gy Deo een

din, Sts te . SP,

eT oh 4s. hh SAMOS. a) i «at ‘ veg ay ;

‘ 4s,

fat on i ii) oy [ Ot Geni th Rtee ye :

ERRATA.

Page 74, line 27, for m1 ead my

Po Nino 28, Ye ceed a

» line 29, for m8 ead ms:

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—@—

Part II1.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. I.—1887.

T—On the Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall—By Henry

F. Buanrorp, F. R. S., Meteorological Reporter to the Government of

India.

[Received Jan. 20th ;—Read Feb. 2nd, 1887. ]

(With a Woodcut.)

The following paper is an extract from the yet unpublished manu-

script of the second part of a paper on the Rainfall of India; the first

part of which has already been issued as an official publication in the

Indian Meteorological Memoirs. In consideration of the great economic

importance of the subject treated of, and also with a view to encourage

and assist further enquiries, whenever favourable opportunities may

offer, it has seemed desirable to publish this discussion in an independent

form, and in anticipation of its appearance in the Indian Meteorological

Memoirs; where it will form but a small and subordinate part of a

memoir dealing with a subject of much wider range.

In an instructive paper originally communicated to Petermann’s

Mittesilungen, and subsequently published in translation in the Quarterly

Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, M. Woeikoff appeals em-

phatically to the evidence afforded by the Indian rainfall registers, in

support of his contention that the action of forests is to increase the

rainfall of a country. His appeal is directed chiefly to the contrast

afforded by the Assam rainfall with that of the Gangetic valley plain,

in about the same latitude and the same distance from the sea; and he

] 5

2 H.F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

apparently attributes the great difference displayed by these two pro-

vinces, wholly or mainly, to the fact that, while the former is extensively

covered with forest, the latter, up to the Terai, is a broad sheet of field

cultivation.

In this view I am unable to coincide. Without denying or even

questioning the effect of forests as one element of the result, the con-

clusion thus formulated seems to me far too sweeping. M. Woeikoff

considers, and I think rightly, the action of forests in enhancing the

rainfall to be twofold. Firstly, they help to store water, by protecting

the soil, and to keep up a constant evaporation ; and secondly, by check-

ing and obstructing the movement of the wind, they prevent the evapo-

rated vapour being carried away, and tend to produce that calm state

of the atmosphere that is favourable to ascending currents and local

precipitation. But swamps, such as occupy large tracts of the Assam

valley, and the numerous broad river channels that intersect it, must

contribute a not unimportant quota to the vapour constituent of the

local atmosphere ; and the comparative stagnation of the air in the Assam

valleys and the exclusion of those dry westerly winds which play so im-

portant a part in the meteorology of the Gangetic plain are certainly

due, in far larger measure, to the fencing in of the Assam valley by the

Patkoi, Naga, Khasi, and Garo hills, and, as regards Upper Assam, to the

interception of westerly currents by the mid-valley obstruction of the

Mekhir hills, than to any retardation of wind movement that can be

effected by the forests. Furthermore, the action of the surrounding

hills in setting up a diurnal convection of the humid-atmosphere, and

its consequent dynamic cooling and precipitation, an action which also

takes place in the much less humid hill tracts of the peninsula, is a very

important item in the causes which contribute to produce the heavy

spring rainfall of Assam ; a precipitation not very greatly inferior to that

of the summer monsoon. The other or passive effect of hills in enhan-

cing rainfall, namely, the forced ascent of horizontal air currents, is less

important in Upper Assam (the tract more particularly referred to by

M. Woeikoff), although exhibited by the southern face of the Khasi

hills, overlooking Sylhet, in a degree without parallel elsewhere in the

world. But to the other causes above specified must certainly be attri-

buted by far the larger part of that prevailing high humidity and copious

rainfall which foster the exuberant vegetation of the province; render-

ing it, in the rich variety of its flora and its prolific insect life, compar-

able with the teeming productiveness of the Malay region.

The difficulty so conspicuously illustrated in the foregoing example,

namely, of disentangling the combined effects of a number of causes all

favourable to increased rainfall or the reverse, is one which renders it

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 3

almost hopeless to seek for decisive evidence of the influence of forests

by any comparison of the rainfall of different provinces, or of areas suffi-

ciently large to display the contrasted effects in a striking and convin-

cing manner. The best and perhaps only satisfactory kind of evidence,

were it obtainable, would be the comparison of the rainfall of one and

the same tract (one of at least some hundreds of square miles in ex-

tent) for many years, first while covered with forest, and again for

many years after clearing. It is, however, not until a tract of virgin

forest has been brought under the destructive operation of civilizing

agencies, that, as a general rule, any attempt is made to record its rain-

fall ; and when, therefore, the conditions necessary to obtain one term of

the comparison are rapidly disappearing. The reversal of this order of

things, the conversion of bare or at least partially wasted tracts into

protected forest, is one, however, of which India already furnishes some

examples, and with the progress of forest protection may yet furnish

more ; and if due advantage be taken of these as they present themselves,

it may yet be possible to obtain rainfall data which may afford valuable

and indeed practically onclusive evidence on the point in question,

even if not fulfilling in all respects the rigorous conditions of the logical

method of differences.

One instance of the kind, on a scale large enough for all reasonable

demand, has lately been brought to my notice by Mr. Ribbentrop, and

has been quoted in my Report on the Administration of the Meteorolo-

gical Department in 1885-86; and despite some shortcomings in the

due verification of the data it furnishes, shortcomings which it is now

impossible to make good, it will probably, in the course of some years,

as nearly fulfil the conditions of a test case as we are likely to attain to

in an experiment of such magnitude. In some respects, indeed, the

circumstances of this case are unusually favourable. The vicissitudes —

of the rainfall of the Central Provinces are smaller, proportionally, than

those of any other province of an equally moderate average, and of the

22 stations, the rainfall registers of which will be brought in evidence,

not less than 10 are regular meteorological observatories, working under

the Meteorological Department of the Government of India.

The region referred to in the Ist part of my Memoir on the Rainfall

of India as the Central Provinces south, has been described as a hilly

and jungle clad country, including some extensive fertile plains, especially

that which surrounds Raipur. The northern portion consists of the

range of broken tablelands and hills here spoken of as the Satpuras,

and these are largely clothed with forest. According to the most recent

report of the Officiating Inspector General of Forests, the area of forest

in the Central Provinces is estimated at 54,600 square miles, of which

4 H.F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

about nine-tenths are either in or to the south of the Satpura range.

The area of the Central Provinces south is about 61,000 square miles,

Hence about five-sixths of the whole are under forest. Now, prior

to the year 1875, these forests were systematically wasted by the

destructive method of cultivation practised by the hill tribes of Gond-

wana, as of other wild tracts in India and Burma. It is known under

various local names, such as Kumri, or in the Central Provinces déhya

cultivation, and is thus described by Dr. Brandis: ‘‘ A few acres of

forest are felled one year, the wood is burnt and acrop of grain raised

on the clearing; the next year this is abandoned, a fresh piece of forest

is felled elsewhere, a crop is raised, and it too is abandoned in its turn;

and so on, a fresh clearing being made every year.”’

It will be readily understood how under such a system, in the

course of some years, extensive forests may be devastated, even by a

_ sparse hill population of nomad habits. And accordingly, in the intro-

duction of the Central Provinces Gazetteer, published in 1870, Mr. C.

Grant speaks of the state of the forests in the following terms: “‘ The

tree forests of the Central Provinces have, however, been so much ex-

hausted, mainly owing to the destructive dahya system of cultivation

practised by the hill tribes, that, except in one or two localities, the

labours of the Forest Officers will, for many years, be limited to guard-

ing against further damage, and thus allowing the forests to recover

themselves by rest. By far the greater part of the uncultivated lands

belonging to Government are stony wastes, incapable of producing a

strong straight growth of timber.”

In 1875,* the suppression of déhya cultivation was taken systemati-

cally in hand, and in the course of a few years, with such success, that

Mr. Ribbentrop writes in 1886, “ My attention was directed during a

recent visit to the Central Provinces, to the extensive growth of young

forests in areas formerly under Aumri cultivation. Ten or fifteen years

ago, such temporary cultivation was practised throughout the country,

and thousands of square miles were thereby laid barren year after year.

Since then, this method of cultivation was stopped, and though a great

part of the area affected was subject to annual fires, a more or less dense

forest growth has sprung up. I concluded that this must have had an

influence on the rainfall, sufficiently appreciable to be gauged by meteo-

* I understand from Mr. CG: E. Elliott who worked as Settlement Officer in the

Central Provinces prior to 1875, that endeavours were then in progress to check

ddhya cultivation, so that the statement in the text which I make on the authority

of Mr. Ribbentrop must not be taken as rigorously exclusive. The interpretation

of the evidence here adduced will not, however be appreciably affected by this

correction,

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 5

rological records. The results gathered from such records are beyond

expectation and shew that, with the exception of stations situated in the

cultivated valley of the Nerbudda, a steady increase of rainfall has taken

place during the last ten years, and, as might be expected, especially

during the last period of five years.” .

In dealing with the evidence of the rainfall registers, I shall, in the

first place, compare the averages-of the 9 or in some cases 10 or 11 years

ending with 1875 (the year in which the suppression of the dahya

cultivation is stated to have been taken in hand) with those of the ten

subsequent years, 1876—1885; and this I shall do separately for the

stations within the area immediately affected by the forest preservation

and for those at a greater or less distance therefrom. These latter are

Saugor and Damoh, the forests near which have not been frequented by

dahya cultivators, or which are surrounded by native states in which no

change of system has been attempted, Jubbulpore, Narsinghpur, Ho-

shangabad, and Khandwa in the fertile and highly cultivated valley of

the Nerbudda, and where the tendency of late years has been towards

an extension of permanent cultivation, and Raipur in the centre of the

great wheat-growing district of Chattisgarh.

Comparison of the Average Rainfall of 9 to 11 years of Déhya Cultiva-

tion with that of 10 years of Protected Forests.

A, In affected areas.

Forests ; Forests I

unprotected. | protected. | “Crease.

STATIONS, !

Inches: Inches

Period. | Rain- ; Period. |} Rain- | Inches.

fall. } fall.

Badnur 5 os ... | 1867-75 | 39°83 | 1876-85 | 47°83 | + 8:00

Chhindwara : YS ... | 1865-75 | 41°43 | 1876-85 | 48°48 | + 7:05

Seoni mae ... | 1865-75 | 52°07 | 1876-85 | 54°76 | + 2°69

Mandla ; sah ... | 1867-75 | 53°58 | 1876-85 | 56°32 | + 2°74

Burha ; ie ... | 1867-75 | 64°51 | 1876-85 | 71°65 | + 7:14

Bilaspur : vee ... | 1865-75 | 41°85 | 1876-85 | 54°81 | +1296

Sambalpur wa ase ... | 1867-75 | 54°80 | 1876-85 | 67°93 | +1313

Dhamtari ; a ... | 1867-75 | 48°83 ' 1876-85 | 46°90 | — 1:93

Bhandara a ... | 1867-75) 49°90 | 1876-85 | 57°79 | + 7°89

Nagpur re, : ... | 1866-75 | 41°54 | 1876-85 | 51°85 | +10°31

Wardha os - ... | 1866-75 | 36°10 | 1876-85 ; 46°63 | +10°53

Brahmapuri es ... | 1867-75 | 53°95 | 1876-85 | 57°48 | + 3°53

Chanda “f “a ... | 1866-75 | 47:14 | 1876-85 | 54°29 | + 7:15

Sironcha os ; vw ) 1867-75 | 44°17 gene 48°38 | + 4°21

| Mean | +

6 H. F. Blanford—Injluence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

B. In unaffected areas.

Saugor Sa Soc ... | 1866-75 | 55°97 | 1876-85 | 40°62 { —15-35

Damoh vee eee ... | 1867-75 | 54°76 | 1876-85 | 46°82 | — 7:94

Jubbulpore eee vee ... | 1866-75 | 60°66 | 1876-85 | 56:28 | — 4:38

Narsinghpur a ... | 1866-75 | 55°46 | 1876-85 | 50:40 | — 5-06

Hoshangabad__... oe .-. | 1866-75 | 47-08 | 1876-85 | 57°73 | +10°65

Khandwa eee one .. | 1867-75 | 34°74 ) 1876-85 | 33°32 |! — 1:42

Raipur eee ees .. | 1866-75 | 51°59 | 1876-85 | 54°47 | + 2-92

| Mean | — 2°94

The contrast, thus shewn, is sufficiently striking; but taken as

they stand, it can hardly be said that the figures do more than afford a

certain presumption in favour of the view that the difference shewn by

the two series of stations is to be attributed to the preservation of the

forests. In the first place, as I shall shew elsewhere, the probable error

of a ten years’ rainfall average of a station in the Central Provinces is

about 5 per cent., and this may be either in excess or defect. In the

extreme case of the errors being in opposite directions in the two decen-

nial periods compared, the greater part of the apparent increase of list

A would vanish. And, in the second place, the majority of the stations

in the second list lie to the north of the Satpura range, those of the first

list either on the range itself or to the south of it; and, as this range

about coincides with the southern margin of the tract commonly followed

by the cyclonic storms of the summer monsoon, the distribution of the

rainfall might be much affected by the fact of a series of such storms

following a more southerly or more northerly path, or by the western

branch of the monsoon, which brings nearly the whole rainfall to the

region south of the Nerbudda valley, being in several years, relative-

ly to its normal average, stronger and more rainy than the eastern

branch, which contributes to the rainfall north of that river.

But there is another way of dealing with the facts which will not

be open to such objection. Any effect really due to forest protection

must necessarily have been progressive. Some few years were passed

in inducing the jungle tribes to take to settled cultivation; again, the

reproduction of the forest growth on the tracts formerly denuded is a

process requiring many years for its accomplishment; and, finally, the

protection of the forests from destruction by annual fires in the dry

season has been steadily extended year by year. If, then, it should

appear, on comparing the rainfall of the affected tract in successive

years, that the increase has been steadily progressive and on the whole

in a degree commensurate with the average difference of the two decen-

nial periods above compared, the probability of such increase having

been brought about by the protection of the forests will be enormously

enhanced.

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 7

The data for this comparison are afforded by the following table

which exhibits, in the second column, the mean rainfall of the 14 stations,

enumerated in the A list of the previous table, in each year from

1867 to 1885. The third column gives what may be termed progres-

Sive averages. Hach average is that of 5 years, obtained by the formula,

at46b+6c+4d+e

, A et ear eae

wherein a, b, c, d, e, represent the mean rainfall in any five conce-

cutive years and c, the progressive average for the third year of the series.

As a standard of comparison, I give, in the fourth column, the average

rainfall of the whole Indian area (with the omission of unrepresented

tracts). The average rainfall is taken at 42 inches. Lastly, the fifth

column shews the progressive averages of the rainfall of India computed

from column four.

Comparative Table of the Mean Annual Rainfall of the Forest Region in

the Central Provinces and of India from 1867 to 1885.

Central Provinces. India.

Year. Condition. Annual |Progressive} Annual Progressive

mean average. mean. average.

Inches. Inches. Inches. Inches.

1867 | 55:08 sipptilbe 44:8 40°2

68 if ENGL us Sealer Se 35°4 40°3

69 B 47°97 45°28 42:4, 41-0

"0 ‘a 50°42 47°71 43°5 42°6

val es 45°52 48°45 42°9 43°0

"3 & 53°31 47°47 44°3 41:7

r3 qi 39°18 47-02 37°5 42:2

4, sa 50°48 48°85 46'6 424

"5 56°60 50°15 44:4, 42°4,

"6 42°32 49°58 37°5 40'5

"7 % 52°50 50°40 37°7 41:1

"8 52°47 52°60 48°3 43°3

"9 55°67 53°85 43°7 43°5

80 3 51°83 54:50 40°4 424,

81 = 57°90 65°31 42:1 424,

82 a. 54°22 56°52 44:6 43-0

83 iS) 57°73 58°57 41‘9 43°1

84, Pa 64°63 Sh a Ein ase pig ‘

85 | 57°43 eee eee 43°1 eee ree

8 H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

The variations exhibited in this table are represented graphically

in the following figure.

Gueeccseegele

coisa Eta Buen al ae ES

: Pek ed

EprLL Ae

| A AG A (5a Se SASSER

5° + le, [|

aes ee ao do Progr. av.

Now the third column of this table shews, not only that the in-

creased rainfall of the protected forest region has been on the whole

progressive since 1876 (the year after protection was systematically

enforced), but that its progression has been commensurate with the

increase of the decennial average shewn in the previous table; a very

important point. As compared with the general average of the pe-

riod antecedent to 1875, a rainfall of 48 inches, in integral figures,

had risen to 58 inches in 1883, an increase of more than 20 per cent.

Whether this increase will be sustained at its full amount by the results

of future years is, however, very questionable. The rainfall of 1884 was

extraordinarily high, and whereas, as may be observed in the graphic

representation of these changes, the rainfall of the Central Provinces

rises and falls pari passu with that of the whole of Iudia in a somewhat

remarkable degree (having regard to the comparative smallness of

its area), the pregressive average rainfall of India as a whole for 1883

was nearly 3 per cent. above the general average between 1867 and 1875.

But after making all due allowances, in so far as any legitimate con-

clusion can be drawn from the experience of the last ten years, it would

seem that, owing to some local cause, the mean rainfall of the afforested

region of the Central Provinces here considered, an area of nearly

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 9

50,000 square miles, has been increased in a very remarkable degree,

and I am unable to assign any other probable cause for this than that of

the protection and consequent restoration of the formerly wasted forests.

The evidence thus afforded in favour of the influence of forests on

rainfall appears to me to be of considerable weight and importance, in

virtue both of the magnitude of the area yielding it and of the apparent

distinctness of the result. With one exception and one only, it fulfils

all the conditions of a rigorous test case. The area is one and the same ;

the history of the changes to which it has been subject are definitely

and accurately known; and, as will be shewn elsewhere, the rainfall

registers, if but few in proportion to the area, are sufficient to afford a

datum the probable error of which is small in comparison with the mag-

nitude of the effect shewn. The only remaining points to which excep-

tion may conceivably be taken are the trustworthiness of the records

used, and the sufficiency of the periods compared to yield valid averages.

On the first of these points, I can add but little to what has been

already written in the introduction of Vol. III, Part I, of the Indian

Meteorological Memoirs. Speaking from recollection (for I have been

unable to obtain the desired verification of the fact from official records),

I believe that new rain-gauges, of Glaisher’s pattern, from one of the

principal London makers, were furnished to all the stations the registers

of which are here dealt with, about the year 1867, at all events before

1870, that is to say, at or near the beginning of the period for which the

registers are complete, and there are therefore no grounds for suspecting

that the increase of the registered rainfall during the last ten years has

been influenced by a change in the instruments used. And this is the

most important consideration. With respect to the registering agency,

as far as I have information, it has been the same throughout. Dr. S.C.

Townshend, who was Sanitary Commissioner of the Central Provinces,

and who in 1868 established the observatories, which, in 1875, were

incorporated in the Imperial system, took much personal interest in

all the meteorological work of the province, and there is no doubt that

his action was attended with beneficial results. But this change, like

that of the instruments, dates from the beginning of the period now under

consideration ; at all events from 7 or 8 years anterior to 1875.

On the second point, namely, the sufficiency of the periods compared

to yield valid averages, I have ascertained that a ten years’ register of

the Central Provinces’ stations, Jubbulpore and Nagpur, has a probable

error of 5 per cent., namely, in the case of Jubbulpore of 2°7 inches, in

that of Nagpur of 2:2 inches, and these may be taken as fairly illustrative

examples of the whole province. These, however, are the probable errors

of individual stations, and, as will be further demonstrated elsewhere, the

10 H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

mean rainfall of a whole province is much less variable than that of a

single station. For, if we take the average of either the first ten years

or the last ten years of the figures in the third column of the table,

on page 7, we have an average of 1867—1876, 47°45 ins. probable

error + 1:56; average of 1876—1885, 54°67 ins. probable error + 1°22,

which is but little more than half the probable error of either Jubbul-

pore or Nagpur for an equal period. This is small in comparison with

the difference of the two averages, namely, 7°22 inches. Assuming the

extreme case, that the first average is 1°56 inches below the real mean

and the second 1°22 inches about it, these differences being both due to

fortuitous and not steadily progressive causes, there would still remain

444, inches of increase unaccounted for. This is perhaps not such as to

warrant conviction that the average rainfall of the Central Provinces

south of the Nerbudda has really increased by that amount; still less

~ does it warrant the positive assertion that such increase, assumed as

real, is due to the preservation of the forests; but at least, in so far as

any inference is admissible from such data, the evidence seems to afford

much support to that view.

Direct observations of a character similar to those of Prof. Ebermeyer

in Bavaria, namely, comparative measurements of the rainfall at pairs

of stations near the margin of forests, the one within, the other without

the forest, have been carried on in Dehra Din and Ajmere, during the

last year or two, by officers of the Forest Department. Some of the

results of these were given in the Administration Report of the Meteo-

rological Department for 1885—86, and I have since visited the Dehra

Dun stations and some of those in Ajmere. In the case of the former,

the conditions are satisfactory, in so far that the forest on the site of

the observatories is a vigorous growth of chiefly Sal coppice* with a well-

defined boundary, and the observatory stations are, in the one case, well

within the forest, in an opening only just large enough to prevent the

gauge being sheltered, or its contents unduly added to by the drip of

the trees; in the other, in an open maidan of coarse grass and scrub,

with only a rare tree here and there. But the interval between the two

* As testifying to the importance of this condition, I extract the following

from a letter lately received from Dr. D. Brandis, for many years Inspector-General

of Forests in India; “I would draw your attention to a point which I used to

urge in India, whenever I wrote on the subject; viz., that forests, in order to

exercise an effect (on the rainfall), must be dense, and must not consist of a few

bushes and trees, here and there. Fire protection alone has the effect of making

the forest grow up dense, and I am disposed to think that the large extent of fire

protected forest in the Central Provinces may, in course of time, affect the rain-

fall.’

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 11

stations of each pair is hardly enough to shew the full influence of forest

in the one case, or to exclude it in the other; and it can only be expected

that, under such circumstances, any difference depending on that influence

will be very small.

There are two such pairs within about 6 miles of Dehra Din, on the

skirts of the Sivalik forests, the one at the Ramgarh, the other at the

Rajah’s forest. In the case of the Ramgarh forest, at which the obser-

vatories have been longest in existence, the two observatories are 750

yards apart; the outer 400 yards from the forest boundary, the inner

350 yards from it. At each station, there are two rain-gauges, the one

on the ground, the other at a height of 60 feet, being perched on the

summit of a scaffold, which raises it above the tops of the neighbouring

trees. The rain-gauges are Symon’s pattern, 5 inches in diameter, and

the measurements are all made with the same measure glass. The

observer has been regularly trained in his duties (which include keeping

4 registers of temperature and humidity, under corresponding condi-

tions), and his work seems to have been regularly performed. The

results for the years 1884 and 1885 are given in the following table :—

Lower gauges. Upper gauges.

Months. : .

Outer. | Inner. ra Outer. | Inner. a

ee |

June 1884 ... 5 3°66 4:07 3°88 | +027

July Sf) aclu! Sauk] MEGS )) 26746 26°44, | +1°72

August ‘ ore aa 21°18 21°74 21°23 +1°35

September , .. ‘Pe 17°53 18°78 18°01 | +082

October Risky Gun BEE 0°28 0°39 0°37 | +011

November _,, ais sas 0 0 0 0

December ,,_... = 0 0 0 0

Total 68°29 71°44 69°63 | +4°27

January 1885 ... Py) 4°20 448 | +0°28 4°56 4°63 | +0°07

February ,, ane én 0°85 0-70 | —O15 0-77 0°67 | —0:10

March - tae ans 0°48 0°39 | —0°09 0°42 0°36 | — 0°06

April Bae iy. pain 1 Seah 9 OBER oh OeRt 0-45 | 050] 40:05

May ea cys aed. abe Ee |) ag GOA tO Get 606] 6791 +073

June eon EOS! toe | Ob 975 | 1061 | +0:86

July y ” aae sos 9°81 9°90 + 0°09 9°27 9°88 + O°6L

August a ee soe 44°64 44°91 + 0°27 43°56 44°45 +0°89

September ,, _... aan 6°24 551 | — 0°73 6:06 547 | —0°59

October ‘i ake ave 0) e) 8) 0 8) a)

November ,, ae Jen 0 0 0 0 0 0

December ,, Ain eat 3°45 3°49 | +0°04 3°48 3°52 | + 0°04:

Total ...| 85°77] 8688} +091 ] 8338] 85:88 | + 2°50

12 H.F-. Blanford—Iufluence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

The observations at the Rajah’s forest extend over a shorter period.

The stations are less than a mile distant from the former, and the

arrangements are similar; the surrounding conditions of each of the

pair being being strongly contrasted. The outer observatory is 1,750

yards from the forest boundary, the inner 1,000 within the forest, which

is of the same character as the Ramgarh forest.

Lower Ganges. Upper Gauges.

Months. . ‘

Outer. | Inner. aie Outer. | Inner. Spe

March PESO sss waa P 0°27 P 0°21 0°23 | +0°02

April ay lei LA 0°06 0°42 | +0°36 0°32 0°36 | +0°04

May nel hos a 4°69 3:99 | —0°70 4°36 4:04 | — 0°32

June daphne ne 10°47 11:70 | +1:23 10°07 11°42 | +1°35

July eattee™, we ve 9°81 10°63 | +0°82 9°47 9°88 | +0°41

August ae Whine sie 47°50 45°87 | — 1°63 46°99 45°87 | —112

September ,, we nae 2°43 2°46 | +0°03 2°40 2°41 | +0°01

October pes S Yh 0 0 0 0 0 0

November ,, “ae 7 0 0 0 0 0 0)

December ,, «. ca 3°40 3°54 | +0°14 3°43 3°45 | +0°02

Total ie 78°36 78°88 | +0°25 77°25 77°66 | +0°41

Tn this case, while, in most months, the rainfall at the inner station

is appreciably higher than at the outer station, as shewn both by the

elevated and ground level gauges, this gross excess appears to have

been nearly neutralized by falls in May and August, which were in

excess at the outer station. The result of the evidence is therefore

doubtful. But in the case of the Ramgarh station there does appear to

be a decided balance of rainfall in favour of the inner station.

I do not give the results of the Ajmere observations, because the

difference of the conditions within and without the boundary of the

forest, as far as I have seen them, depend much more on the form

and slope of the ground than on the density of the forest growth, and

I do not think the comparative observations have much bearing on

the question at issue. :

There remains one case which, although dependant on purely arti-

ficial conditions, might yet afford evidence of some weight in connection

with the present subject, could we only be sure that the observations

had been taken with the care and precaution indispensible to any

valid comparison.* In the very heart of the plain between the Ravi

* For the following information I am indebted to Col. Home, R.E., late

‘Secretary to the Punjab Government in the Irrigation Department of the Public

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 13

and the Jhelum (two of the five rivers of the Punjab), and about 50 miles

to the south of Lahore, a vigorous forest has been established, by

planting and irrigating the planted land from the Bari doab canal.

The forest area covers 315 square miles and has now been established

16 years.* Outside the forest and to the east and south-east are lands

which are cultivated, also with irrigation from the canal; and on the

margin of this tract, four miles from the forest, is the small civil station

of Chunian. Since 1864, a rainfall register has been kept regularly

at Vahn (within the forest, half a mile distant from the nearest forest

boundary), and also at Chunian; and since 1870, a third register has

been kept at Bhambeh, a station on the Bari doab canal, in a position

very similar to Chunian, but 13 miles to the north-east of the forest

boundary and 19 miles north-east from Ghanga Manga or Vahn.

The rainfall chart of the Punjab shews that, in this part of the

province, there is a steady increase of rainfall in a north-east direction

or from Chunian to Bhambeh; steady, that is to say, apart from the

influence of purely local conditions, and therefore, were the whole

surface of the tract such as it is immediately around Chunian and

Bhambeh, it might be anticipated that the mean rainfall of any inter-

mediate station should be intermediate between those of Chunian

and Bhambeh, in inverse proportion to their respective distances. The

mean rainfall of Bhambeh, deduced from 17 years’ registers, is 17°27

inches; that of Chunian, deduced from the same period, is 14°05

ins. If, then, Vahn, which is 19 miles from the former and 63

miles from the latter station, had a rainfall intermediate between the

Works and now Secretary to the Government of India. ‘“ Two gauges are placed

side by side, the receivers are 43 feet above the ground. One is an ordinary

tube gauge, measurements made with a graduated rod. The other a Watsen’s

continuous self-registering gauge, which is taken to pieces, cleaned and re-adjusted

on the 1st April yearly. The bearings of the gauge are silver plated copper tubes

and with very ordinary care in adjustment, they register very correctly. Instruc-

tions about registering rainfall are very distinct and I believe they are obeyed.”

| * Mr. H. C. Hill, Conservator of Forests in the Punjab, writes, “ Changa

Manga is a compact block of 20,242 acres, of which 8,399 are wooded with planted

Sissoo (Dalbugia Sissoo). The remainder is under ordinary scrub. The age of the

plantation dates back to 1866-67, but little was done for 3 years and the age of the

forest may be taken as 16 years. The trees (excepting those in the canal avenue

averaging 63 feet) of our best compartments average 50, 51 and 53 feet in height

and all compartments have an average of 40 or more.”

“The watering of the forest begins in April and goes on more or legs till

September. Very little of it ever gets a second watering in the year, but that

given is a good soaker of 3 or 4 feet depth of water. The ground to the east and

_ south except where 2 rahhs are touched, is all under cultivation and irrigated.

Irrigation mostly from June to April,

14 H. F. Blanford—Inflwence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

above amounts, in inverse proportion to the distances of the ‘two

stations, the average of the same 17 years would be 14°85 inches.

It is actually 15°76 ins., or nearly 1 inch above the computed pro-

portion.

I am far from considering this result as conclusive on the point

at issue. In some years, the deviation from the mean proportions is

very large, and the average of the last three years (which, in this part

of the Punjab, have been characterized by a remarkably low rainfall)

shows that the Vahn rainfall has been almost exactly in the inverse ratio

of the relative distances of the two outer stations. Still, the evidence,

so far as it goes, favours the idea that the forest increases the rainfall.

The general conclusion to be drawn from the facts set forth in

the foregoing pages is that, while no one of the instances cited fulfils

the requirements of scientific proof, the tendency of the evidence they

afford is uniformly favourable to the idea that the presence of forest

increases the rainfall.

The evidence is of three kinds. First, we have that of a large

province some five-sixths of which have always been a forest wilderness,

but in which, for the first ten years of the period of registration, the forest

growth was greatly devastated; partly by dahya cultivation, which

completely destroyed the forest for the time being, whenever it was

carried on, and partly by annual forest fires, which destroyed the

under-growth and injured the larger trees. For the next ten years,

these destructive operations were suppressed and the visible result is

a forest growth of such vigour and luxuriance as to attract the atten-

tion of the Inspector-General, when on his tour of inspection, to the

question of its probable effect on the rainfall. During these last ten

years the rainfall of the province has progessively increased until it

would appear to amount to 20 per cent. more than the average of the

first ten years.

The second instance is that of two pairs of comparative obser-

vatories, established on the Ebermeyer plan, in near proximity to each

other on the boundary of a protected forest; one of each pair being

within, the other without the forest, on open grouud. Notwithstanding

their proximity, in most months the outer observatories shew a slight

excess over the inner. At each observatory there are two gauges ; one

at 60 feet above the ground, the other on the ground; and both afford

consistent results. In the case of one pair of observatories, the total

of 18 months’ register shew an excess in the inner high level gauge of 4

per cent., in the lower of two per cent. In the case of the other pair, the

registers of 12 months only shew an inappreciable net difference of

the totals, although, in most months, the forest-gauges shew a slightly

enhanced fall.

S.R.ELSON, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 18877, Vol. LVI, Pt.IL

taf i.

es ee

100°

80. eS be ee | 80°

; ee

60° oe 60°

00 & i6-ths,

WWewman & C° Lt Li:

Caterttw.

ON Ha, Va

mt i a

ie boa wae

| ais r Rr i st

Pe wan! Sve Pa Je hes

cis? Ie hak

1887.] S. R. Elson—On the Density of Surface Sea-water, Se. 15

Lastly, we have the case of a forest artificially produced by irriga-

tion (during the two driest months of the year) in a region so dry

that cultivation is rendered possible only by irrigation. Seventeen

years’ registers at a station within the forest shew an excess of 6 per

cent. over the probable rainfall of that station, as computed from the

registers of two stations, one of which is 4 miles, the other 13 miles

distant from the forest, and both on the borders of the cultivation.

The evidence is, then, in kind, not rigorously conclusive, and it

must be admitted that in no case has it been guarded by those special

precautions which are demanded by strict scientific enquiry. But I

have no reason to believe that it is not as trustworthy as observations

made under the general supervision of intelligent and educated men

usually are; and such as it is, it tends to support and confirm the

conclusions drawn a priort from general physical considerations. It

justifies, I think, at least, the view I have already expressed elsewhere,

namely, that I can no longer regard the long suspected influence of

forests on rainfall as a question of equally balanced probabilities.

eer

II.—On the Changes observed in the Density of the Surface Sea-water, coin-

cident with, and due to Aerial Disturbances, and consequent Alteration

of Baric Pressure over adjacent Sea Areas: and on the Usefulness of a

more exact Measurement of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water : more

especially with Reference to the Waters near, and about, the Hooghly

River Pilot Station —By Samusrt R. Exson.

[Received March ;—Read February 2nd, 1887. ]

(With Pl. IX.)

In a work which I published some years since, entitled ‘ The

Hooghly Sandheads Sailing Directory,’ on the strength of observations

made with a small glass instrument, the stem of which was graduated

to two thousandths only, I asserted, that the sea water at the Hooghly

River Pilot Station contained more salt at low water than it did at high

water. But this seeming paradox requires some slight modification, for,

I have since then found, with a soda-water bottle hydrometer, which

readily weighs the sixteenth of a thousandth of salt in the water, that,

in every case, on the least tendency of the sea thereabouts to set to the

westward, in response, as I suppose, to aerial disturbances which lessen

the baric pressure over the sea area to the southward, the water shows

at once a decrease in salinity, consequently, the relative degree of saltness

16 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

between these westward flowing waters outside, and those situated

under the lee of Saugor and Edmonstone Islands, and their continua-

tions, as outlying, partially dry, sands, to the northwards, will be alter-

ed, as I shall presently endeavour to show.

As an instance out of many I have known of the suddenness of a

change of this sort :—At 1:30 p. m. of the 10th of August last, I found

the sea at the Pilot Station registered a specific gravity of 1:024: but

only four days afterwards, at the same hour with regard to the tide, and

almost in the same position, it was only 1:013.8, or was ‘010.8; less

salt. But gradually, during these four days, a westward set of the sea

hereabouts had got up, which steadily increased until it was running -

at the rate of two miles an hour or more, and, as is always the case, its

presence was unmistakably announced by a rather sudden change in the

colour and appearance of the sea (in fact, it was this marked change

that induced me to test the water again), the water changing from a

wholesome sea-green to a yellowish (but not muddy or turbid) hue, or

of the colour of stagnant ditch, or tank water.

But, generally speaking, after the westward set has run for some

time, this sickly looking water changes its appearance for the more

natural green. And, so far as my limited and solitary observations go

to show, the amount of salt increases as the westward set slackens.

Therefore, these intermittent incursions of greater or less supplies of

fresher water from, I suppose, the great easterly mouths of the Ganges,

must be taken into consideration, when making comparisons as to the

relative amounts of salt contained in the sea-water off, and in, the differ-

ent parts of the outlet channels of the Hooghly and its estuary.

As [have said before, in a paper read before your Society some time

back, entitled ‘ The Tides and Currents of the Hooghly &c., &c.,’ none, or

but very little, of the water from the river Hooghly can possibly reach

the Pilot Station, situated as it is about 36 miles 8. 8S. EH. from Saugor

Roads, seeing that, by the direction vessels ride when at anchor, in all the

lower part of the river, from Mud Point to Saugor, the ebb tide sets

S. W. and 8S. S. W. away towards Balasore Roads, or Bay, which is an

extensive circular and shallow basin some 40 miles broad. Therefore,

Saugor Island and its outlying, partially dry reef, called Saugor Sand,

running down as it does over 22 miles S. S. H. from the tail end of

Savgor Island, whilst the over-active sun’s rays are copiously extract-

ing vapour therefrom, must, and undoubtedly does, afford efficient shelter

to the muddier and semi-opaque, and therefore, warmer water on its

immediate westward side, from an early incursion of the above-men-

tioned drift of fresher waters, from the eastward, as, doubtless, the

following serial observations, carefully taken for the purpose, show.

EOP 7-

1887. | of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 17

Temperature. Specific gravity,

Air. Water.

June 18th, 1886 Saugor Roads (bound out) 84°5° 85°5° =—102334

» 20th ,, Hastern Channel Light. W.

by N., 4 miles 85'4° 86° 1:018

» 2lst ,, Eastern Channel Lig't.

North, 9 miles S55") (86°49), BOZE

» 22nd ,, Intermediate Light (bound

in) sé a icf 86:5°| « 1;020.%.

» 9» 9 Lower Gasper Light lis f 86°5°... 1021

» 9» 9, Upper Gasper Light us, vad 865?) 102322.

nus -3,° Sangor Roads bit ss 86°50: (j 210234

Note :—The Saugor Roads observation of the 18th was taken on the

last quarter flood, and that of the 22nd on the last quarter ebb.

By this we have an accumulation of salt in Saugor Roads of

"0054, over and above what was found in the water at the Eastern

Channel Light Station, thirty-six miles farther seawards, only a day

or two previous. There was a set to the westward of the yellowish

green water at the Sandheads, or Eastern Channel Light Station, on the

20th and 21st June, which would probably account for some of the above

great differences in the relative specific gravity, though not for all. We

also see by the above observations that at a distance of eight or nine

miles dead to seaward of the above station, and well out in the 20 fathom

line of soundings, there was an increase in the density of the sea water

of ‘003, this indicating that the induced lateral stream of fresher water

from the eastward was not of necessity a very broad one: the reason of

which I will attempt to explain further on, when I come to speak of

the influence which the Swatch of no Ground doubtless has upon this

westward set of the outside waters of the littoral. But even out there,

we see the density did not exceed that of the sheltered muddy waters

at the Lower Gasper Light Station, thirty-three miles farther north, and

that it fell far short of that of Saugor Roads.

With reference to this very interesting question of the increased

specific gravity of these inshore waters of the littoral during the dry

months of the year, it is worthy of note that our late senior pilot, Mr.

C. Smyth, used to say his long experience led him to believe that the

reason vessels so seldom ‘felt the ground,’ or ‘bumped,’ in the Gasper

- Channel,—when their known draft of water, depth given by the charts,

height of sea-surface above ‘ lowest low water,’ or zero, as given by the

tide table, and allowance for swell running, showed they had apparently

not much water to spare under their keels,—was, that some sort of

meeting of the tidal currents piled up the water, as it were, about

18 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

this spot, on the ebb tide. He was evidently not far wrong in his sur-

mises as to there being a something which assisted vessels to cross the

Gasper bar in safety.

Ever anxious to learn something more of the causes of these freaks,

as some would call them, of the currents at the Sandheads, and of the vary-

ing specific gravity of its waters, on the 13th of November last I gladly

availed myself of an unexpected opportunity for further investigation

by taking serial observations of the sea-surface temperature and density

on some one line, or compass bearing, right off from the turbid water

of the Pilot, or Eastern Channel Light Station, out into the deep blue

sea of the Bay of Bengal.. Nor, for my purpose, could it have occurred

at a better time, with regard to the relative state of the weather, when

going and returning, as will be seen. I went off S. EH. towards Ran-

goon as acting special pilot in the B. I. S. N. Company’s 6 S. S. Sirsa and,

commencing at the Lower Saugor Sand buoy, which is about 5 miles

farther inshore and towards the land than the Eastern Channel Light

Vessel, I took observations with the bottle hydrometer, and thermo-

meter, every two hours, with the following results :—

Temperature. Specific gravity.

Air. Sea.

November 13th, 1886 Noon, 2 miles S. W.

from Lower Saugor Sand buoy »» 86°. 83° 1:00938

At 2p. m. 20 miles 8. HE. of EH. C. Light

Station cd ae ous oe «835°: 10098.

At 3:30 p. um. Passed through a frothy

line of demarcation running EH. and

_W. between light and dark green co-

loured water.

At 4 p.m. 45 milesonsameline .,, 81° 83° 1:021,%

At 5°30 p.m. 60 miles on same line iia 24 bee 2 102212

November 14th 6 30 a. mu. 200 miles on same

line or in 19° 80’ N. 91° 2’ E. 3. pli tn Ba 1:022.6.

At Noon 265 miles miles on same line ... 81° 81°5° 1,022.5.

At 5°30 p. mu. 320 miles on same line Sai) ii vedios Bete 1:02322

On this outward trip the ordinary fine weather of the winter mon-

soon prevailed, following a rather heavy cyclonic disturbance down the

bay: but on the return journey on the 20th, 21st, and 22nd of the same

month there was a hard cyclone prevailing to the south, and then

southwest of the Hooghly Pilot Station; and a strong set of the

sea up along the eastern side and, I suppose, the centre of the Bay

of Bengal, carrying the vessel I was on board of, the B. I. S. N. Company’s

1887. ] of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 19

S. 8. “ Nowshera,” onwards to the N. W., some three or four miles an

hour faster over the ground than her dead reckoning showed her to be

going through the water, on her N. W. course towards the Pilot Station

and Hooghly River Sandheads, even all the way from the Alguada

Reef, and I found the following :—

Temperature. Specific gravity.

Air. Sea,

November 22nd, 1886 7 4. m. Sea indigo.

55 miles S. H. of Hastern Channel

Light Station 81° 83°—s« 102333

Note :—This temperature SRS with, wad

the specific gravity exceeds what we

had found at a distance of 200 miles,

when bound the other way, only eight

days before.

At 8°30 a. mw. 14 miles S. E. of E. C. Light

Vessel. Sea dark green eee ries) POO ab ae

At 10°104.m. 2miles N. N. BE. of E. C.

Light Vessel. 1st quarter ebb SP Se RN i eden 0) oot

Note :—This gives a difference of — 3°°5 in

temperature and of + 0063; in the

specific gravity from what prevailed

at, and near about the same _ spot,

on the 13th inst. or only eight days

before.

At 11°30 a. uw. at Intermediate Light Sta-

tion. Half ebb. ave ye~ pea OPO), ) EOI.

At 3 Pp. mM. 2 miles above Saugor Light

House 8. W. ... ae fest Ot. (PER 1:007

We will now take the observations which were made at a position

near the Hastern Channel Light Station, and compare them, to show

what changes of density and temperature of the sea are there due to

these fitful changes and disturbances of weather in the bay, during this

month of November last. |

Temperature. Specific gravity.

Air, Sea,

On the 3lst October 1886, 2 miles N. E. of

K. C. Light, and just previous to a

cyclonic whirl in the Bay, with its

usual precursory westward set of the

sea at the Sandheads.. {es0 cOAtDS cB6707 5.3, da.

20 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

Temperature. Specific gravity,

Air, Sea,

(After this I was absent from Sandheads

until the 13th.)

On 13th November 1886, in nearly same

position, just after the cessation of the

strong westward set caused by a cy-

clonic whirl down the Bay, and all

was again quieted oe ae, 66; — Se". TOES

On 22nd November, in same _ position,

during a severe and widespread cy-

clonic disturbance farther down the

Bay which had been some days in

existence: and when a strong north

westward set of the sea was pouring

in towards this position from, and

across, and most likely out of, the

depths of the peculiar sub-marine ra-

vine, or gut of deep, and (as Com-

mander Carpenter has told us) cold

water, called ‘The Swatch of No

Ground* _,.. Sir ee, Oe. VOD” gener

From the above, and what has been shown before, it seems the

fresher water setting from the eastward, off and on, ever since the 31st

of October (on the evening of which day the changed colour and appear-

ance of the sea alongside led me to test it, and I found a slight dimi-

nution in its density, even then), or for half a month, was completely

crowded out, as it were, by the last mentioned north-westward moving

current of the 20th, 21st, and 22nd of November: which the S. 8. Now-

shera’s log book furnishes ample proofs of; and, as a consequence, the

salinity of the water at the station increased too, and probably, for a

while, exceeded its normal: but, on this point, the few observations I have

had opportunity to make and record will not permit me to write with

that degree of assurance that I should like to do.

Maury says of the hydrometer :—‘ In the physical machinery of the

universe there is no compensation to be found that is more exquisite or

beautiful than that which, by means of this little instrument has been

discovered in the sea between its salts, the air, and the sun: but Maury

could hardly have meant the instrument commonly found on shipboard,

* For a description of which see paper by Commander Carpenter, R. N. (read

before your Society some time back).

1887.1] of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 21

which can only be guessed at, if read to less than the nearest ‘002,

but, if so, what an amount of really valuable information may be got out

of an instrument, which, although a rough and rude one, is so much more

exact: the one is as different from the other as was the old cross staff of

Christopher Columbus’ time from the double reflecting sextant of to-day.

Our forefathers were content to find their vessel’s position to the nearest

two or three miles, but modern navigators are not satisfied unless they

get it to the fraction of a mile.

Doubtless, the energy which brings the waters up from the ever-

frigid bed of the deep sea :—the energy of attraction and repulsion ;—of

contraction and expansion, or, of deadweight and buoyancy :—this energy

of motion, under different states and circumstances, of the chemi-

cally suspended salt atoms, contained in each ocean drop, will yet

be made to divulge its partially hidden and secret treasures to the prac-

tical scientist for the navigator’s benefit : as has been the case with the

latent energy of that other heat vehicle and prime motor of the hurricane

blast, as well as of the gentle zephyr—the invisible water-vapour glo-

bule in the air strata aloft. All that is required is the aid of willing work-

ers and their faithful records : for all the facts as set forth above, meagre

as have been the opportunities for observing them, go far to prove that

the hydrometer, when constructed to show minute aggregation, or segra-

tion of salt atoms in the water, must prove to be no mean aid to the

sailor, more especially to the coasting navigator, since it is near coasts

that the currents generally are more capricious, or disguised by others

which have never been properly explained. It will aid him either as a

monitor of his vessel’s proximity to land; of her being caught in the

toils of some abnormal current, which may be hurrying his vessel on to

her destruction (as was nearly the case during the cyclone in the Bay of

the 19th, 20th, 21st and 22nd of November last, with the ship “‘ Airlie :”

which vessel was found to have been driven by the storm-impelled cur-

rent 140 miles to the N. W., out of her dead reckoning, right through the

dangerous South Preparis Channel, and actually had an oyster shell

washed up on to her deck); or its indications may be made even to

warn the watchful shipmaster of the on-coming, though yet distant,

cyclone ; let alone its probable use to scientists, in more ways than one.

My instrument, a rather large soda-water bottle, when ballasted,

or weighted, so as just to float with its wire pedestal (or support and cup

or pan for weights) in water at a temperature of 95° (which is the

warmest of any sea water), happens to havea fluid displacement, or,

which is the same thing, weighs in air exactly 10,000 grains—a _ con-

venient figure for calculating the several counterbalancing weights by.

The weights are made by dividing and subdividing 320 grains weight

22 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

of copper wire: the whole 320 grains being, of course, equivalent to

1-032, or thirty-two thousandths—a figure far above any degree of salt-

ness of sea water, but chosen on account of its convenience of divisa-

bility :—thus, the 320 grains of wire doubled, straightened out and cut,

gives ‘016, or sixteen one-thousandths : of which make sixteen coils, or

loops to denote it, of one piece. The other piece doubled as before and

cut gives ‘008, and so on, until the one-sixteenth of a thousandth is

arrived at,—a fraction which will be found to readily sink the bottle, or

‘turn the scale’ of this frictionless balance.

Below is added a diagram (PI. IX) for corrections for temperature

of fresh water ; and a suitable table of corrections for temperature of sea

water will be found in ‘ Maury’s Physical Geography of the Sea,’ and in

many other books of a like character, for those who like to seek out for

themselves the “ exquisite and beautiful compensations”? which as a part

of its machinery the sea salts provide in the physical economy of the

Ocean.

I1I.— Notes on Indian Rhynchota: Hererorrera, No. 1.

By EH. T. Arxtyson, B. A., PRESIDENT.

[Received and Read December 1, 1886.]

Order Ruyncnota, Burmeister.

Hemiptera, Linn.: Rhyngota Fabr.: Proboscidea, Scop.: Dermaptera, Retz.

Insects with an incomplete metamorphosis, not exhibiting the mark-

ed changes from larva to pupa and imago observable in the Lepidoptera :

furnished with a mouth or rostrum which is fitted for piercing and

sucking. The rostrum is usually 3—4-jointed and contains four seta that

arise from the anterior portion of the lower surface of the head and

represent the maxille and mandibles of other orders of insects. An-

tenne with 3—5 joints, rarely more; the wings are usually four in

number, but are sometimes abbreviated or altogether wanting.

Suborder Hemiptera, Latreille.

The first pair of wings (hemelytra) are horizontal, with the veins

arranged differently from those of the second pair (wings), and usually

comprise a basal coriaceous portion (coriwm and clavus), and a mem-

branous portion (membrane) at the apex. This membrane is sometimes

entirely absent. The wings are entirely membranous and are sometimes

absent.

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 23

GymNnoceRATA, Fieber, Reuter.

Cimex, Linn.: Cimicides, Latr.: Geocorise, Latr.: Geocores, Burm., Dallas: Auro-

corisa, Westw.: Terrestria, Leach: Geocorise and Amphibicorise, L. Dufour, Spin.,

Sahlb. et auct.

Antenne exserted, at least as long as the head, joints without lateral

processes: rostrum 3—4-jointed, rising from the anterior and usually the

upper part of the head, at the base remote from the first pair of coxee :

feet not adapted for swimming: antenne with 4—5 joints rarely with

only three joints.

Fam. Prentatomip#, Kolenati.

Pentatoma, pt. Olivier, En. Méth. iv, p. 25 (1789) : Cimeza, pt. Fabr. Ent. Syst.

iv, p. 79 (1794) : Scutati, Burm. Handb. Ent. ii (i), p. 343 (1835): Longiscuti, Am.

and Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 19 (18438): Scutata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 2

(1851) : Pentatomide, Kolenati, Mel. Ent. iv, (1846); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 3 (1876):

Pentatomida, pt., Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 32 (1864).

Head very often clypeated, rostrum 4-jointed, inserted usually near

the labrum towards the apex of the head, seldom towards the base of

the head: antennw with 4—5 joints, inserted on the lower side of the

head below the lateral margins: scutellum very large, reaching at least

the base of the membrane.

Subfam. Prataspina, Stal.

Enum. Hem. vy, p. 3 (1876) :—Plataspide, Dallas, List Hem. B. M.i p. 61 (1851):

Plataspidina, Stal, Ofvers. K. V. A. Forh., p. 611 (1870): Arthropteride, Fieber, °

Eur. Hem. p. 27 (1861) ; Arthropterida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 1 (1864).

Head clypeated: rostrum 4-jointed, inserted towards the base of

the head, remote from the source of the labrum: scutellum very large,

covering the entire abdomen: hemelytra longer than the body, with the

apical half folded inwards: longitudinal veins of membrane simple :

tarsi 2-jointed, the first joint very short.

Genus Taricuna, Stal.

A. 8. E. F. (48.) v, p. 163 (1865) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 6 (1876) : Walker, Cat.

Het. i, p. 10 (1867).

Body very broadly ovate, above very much convex, beneath some-

what flat: head clypeate, very broadly rounded ‘before the eyes, juga

contiguous before the tylus: eyes slightly transverse : ocelli more dis-

tant from each other than from the eyes: lateral margins of thorax

roundly dilated : scutellum covering entire abdomen, abruptly amplified

at the base : feet somewhat short (Stal).

24 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. },

1. TaricHEa NITENS, Dallas.

Plataspis nitens, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 74 (1851).

Tarichea nitens, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4 8.) v, p. 163 (1865); En. Hem. v, p. 6

(1876) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 111 (1867).

9. Above brassy, very smooth and shining, rather thickly and finely

punctured: head, disc of abdomen, anus, sutures and stigmata, black :

pectus dull black: eyes reddish : abdomen bright red, shining: legs

bright orange-red: head beneath black with an orange spot in the mid-

dle of the base: rostrum pitchy red, with the basal joint orange-red :

antenne orange-red, with the two (?) apical joints black (Dallas). Body

long 93 mill.

Reported from N. India.

Genus Caracta, Stal.

A. 8. E. F. (48.) v, p. 163 (1866) : En. Hem. v, p. 6 (1876).

Body very broadly ovate or oval, rather convex, flat beneath : head

produced before the eyes, somewhat amplified forwards, truncated at

the apex; juga contiguous before the middle ; eyes transverse, oblique ;

ocelli almost twice as distant from each other as from the eyes: lateral

margins of thorax roundly amplified, anterior angles produced to the

apex of the head, rounded : scutellum covering the entire abdomen, not

abruptly amplified at the base: costal margin of hemelytra, broadly

lobate at the base : feet somewhat short (Stal).

2. CaALACTA RUFO-NoTATA, Stal.

Calacta rufo-notata, Stal, A. 8. EH. F. (48.) v, p. 164 (1865); En. Hem. v, p. 6

(1876).

3. Broadly oval, moderately convex, remotely and finely punctu-

late: disc of thorax and scutellum very finely punctulate: eyes rufous-

piceous: small spots, one marginal near the posterior angles of the

thorax, another on the basal lobe of the hemelytra, two marginal dorsal

before the middle of the abdomen, sanguineous: tarsi weakly testaceous

flavescent: anteocular part of the head re amplified forwards (Stal).

Long, 6; broad 2} mill.

Reported from Siam.

Genus Oncyrzaspis, Stal.

Hem. Afric. i, p, 2 (1864) ; En. Hem. v. p. 4, 6 (1876).

Body depressed, rather strongly convex: head broad, slightly or

moderately bending forwards; vertex about thrice broader than the

eyes which are transverse, oblique, narrowed inwards, deeply immersed.

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 25

very slightly prominulous beyond the sides of the head: ocelli remote

from the eyes: antenne inserted in the middle or almost in the middle

between the eyes and the rostrum, the first joint somewhat equal in

length to the two following : pronotum about twice as broad as the head,

anterior margin gradually rather strongly sinuated behind the entire

head; anterior angles obtuse, distinct, not rounded: feet generally

short: sixth ventral segment in ¢ produced forwards in an acute angle

reaching the base of the fifth segment ; forming anteriorly (in ? ) a less

produced right or somewhat obtuse angle (Stal).

Type, P. ruficeps, Dallas.

3. ONCYLASPIS RUFICEPS, Dallas.

Plataspis ruficeps, Dallas, List Hem. i, 73, (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 110

(1867).

Oncylaspis ruficeps, Stal, En. Hem. v. p. 6 (1876).

$, ¢. Above brassy black, shining, very finely punctured, with the

head and the anterior angles of the thorax reddish brown: coriaceous

portion of the hemelytra brown: membrane brownish, semitransparent,

with dark brown veins. Body beneath reddish brown, shining, finely

punctured ; the anal apparatus and the middle of the dise of the abdomen,

black: legs, antenne and rostrum reddish brown, the latter rostrum with

the tip pitchy (Dalias). Body long 9—10 mill.

Reported from Burma, Tenasserim.

Genus Posripon, Vollenhoven.

Tijdschr. Ent. Ned. viii, p. 63 (1865).

Body elliptical, rather broader, a little tumid above, shining : head

in the g, broad, anteriorly with three horns which are channeled, the

lateral pair curved inwards in the Q, the head is broad, semicircular, the -

juga unite at the tip of the tylus: antennz inserted below the head,

5-jointed ; the first very long, cylindrical, rather broad, the second very

small, only one-eighth of the length of the first, the third neither so

long nor so stout as the first, slightly clavate, the rest gradually decreas-

ing in length and thickness: eyes pyriform, very distant ; ocelli much

nearer to each other than to the eyes: rostrum extending beyond the

posterior coxee, the second and third joints of equal length: lateral mar-

gins of pronotum arched: scutellum scarcely emarginate posteriorly in

the 6: venter flat, with, in 2, a short longitudinal groove on the first

segment: feet rather short and stout (Voll.)

26 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. fNo.'t,

4, PosErpON MALAYANUS, Vollenhoven.

Poseidon malayanus, Voll., Tijds. Ent. Ned. viii, p. 64, t.1, f. 3-5 (1865).

3, @. Bronzed black above: eyes brownish-white : two spots and

two lines encircling the tylus, these lines in the ¢ are in the middle of

the median cephalic horn: two small spots near the anterior margin of

the pronotum, a thin line along its entire lateral margin and two round

spots on the scutellum near, and a fine line around, the anterior margin,

orange: scutellum rather strongly and pronotum more weakly punc-

tured, head smooth: hemelytra piceous-brown : antenn weakly pilose,

black, with the joints whitish: rostrum ferruginous: body beneath

shining black, except pectus which is dull cinereous: each segment of

the abdomen in the 9g has two small orange spots on each side on the

margin: feet black, tarsi brownish (Voll.). g, long, 15; 9, long, 18

mill.

Reported from Malacca, India ?

Genus Bracuyeiatrys, Boisduval.

Voy. Astrolabe, Ent. ii, p. 627 (1832) : Westwood in Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat.

Hist. ii, p. 26 (1838) ; White, id., iii, p. 539 (1839) : Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 61 (1851);

Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 98 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 8 (1864) ; En. Hem. v, p. 4,

7 (1876) :—Includes Coptosoma, subg. Platycephala, Lap., Ess. Hém, p. 74 (1832).

Body very broadly ovate, generally slightly convex above, flat

beneath : head foliaceous, transverse, broad, broadly rounded at the

-apex; vertex 4-5 times broader than the eyes; antenne remote from the

eyes, the first joint not longer than the third, almost equal in length:

eyes slightly transverse, not oblique, slightly immersed, strongly pro-

minulous beyond the sides of the head, narrowed outwards: ocellia little

more distant from each other than from the eyes: pronotum about one

half broader than the head, sinuated at the apex behind the vertex,

truncated behind the eyes, anterior angles obtuse, rounded at the apex,

not produced. As pointed out by Westwood, the scutellum in the @, in,

both Brachyplatys and Coptosoma, is notched and in the ?, entire. In

the former the sixth ventral segment, in the o, is produced forwards in

an acute angle reaching the base of the fifth segment, and in the 2,

forms anteriorly a less produced right or somewhat obtuse angle: in

Coptosoma, the same segment forms an obtuse, or very obtuse angle, or

is merely obtusely rounded. In Brachyplatys, the first joint of the

last tarsi is nearly as long as the second, and in Ooptosoma is much

shorter.

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Nofes on Indian Rhynchota, 27

5. BRACHYPLATYS VAHLIT, Fabricius.

Cimex vahlii, Fabr. Mant. Ins. ii, p. 283 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 89 (1794)

Coquebert, Ill. ii, p. 79, t. 18, f. 14 (1801) ; Wolff, Ic. Cim. p. 96, t. 9, f. 99 (1802) ?

Tetyra vahlii Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 142 (1803).

Thyreocoris vahlii, var. Germar, Zeitsch. i (i) p. 38 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff. Wanz

Ins. v. p. 31, 33 (1839).

Plataspis vahlii, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 64 (1843).

Brachyplatys vahlii, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 70 (1851) excl. syn. pt.; Walker, Cat.

Het. i, p. 100 (1867) ; Stal. Ofvers K. V.-A. Férh. p. 611 (1870) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 7

(1876): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Head, thorax, scutellum and abdomen, black: two large marks on

the head, the margin of the thorax and a small oblique line before the

margin, also the margin of the scutellum, flavescent: thorax gibbous,

shining: two lines on each segment of the abdomen on both sides and

which unite at the apex, also the feet, yellow (C. vahlii, Fabr.).

3, @. Head with yellow transverse lines: pronotum With a sinuated

transverse line on the anterior margin, abruptly curved before the an-

terior angle, before reaching the posterior angle ; an arcuate line on the

border of each anterior angle and another similar -intramarginal line

around the scutellum, below which is another slender line; margins

of abdomen, transverse lines on each side of the venter, rostrum, feet

and antenne, yellow: some specimens have a small yellow dot on each

side of the disc cf the pronotum and another like it on each side at the

base of the scutellum (P. vahlit, Am. and Serv.) Long 5-6 mill.

Differs from B. radians, Voll., in its smaller size and having the intra-

marginal flavescent line on the scutellum punctured fuscous. Differs

from B. nigriventris, Westw. in having transverse yellow lines on the

head.

Reported from Philippines, Cochin-China, Assam: not uncommon

in Sikkim.

6. BRACHYPLATYS RADIANS, Vollenhoven.

Brachyplatys radians, Voll., Faune Ent. Arch. Ind. Néerl. i, p. 52 (1863) :

Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 527 (1868) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 8 (1876).

Var. Brachyplatys vahlii, Voll., 1. c. p. 52 (1863).

Brassy-black: head spotted yellow; anterior margin of thorax and

oblique submarginal line yellow: two marginal lines on scutellum of

which the interior line is the broader: venter yellow, with a large discal

radiating patch (Voll.). Long 7 mill. Vollenhoven suggests that this is

only a variety of his B. vahlw. Itis a little larger: over almost the

entire head extends a broad yellow patch in which winds a black streak

that has its outline twice interrupted: the marginand yellow spots on

the pronotum are broader and brighter: the venter black, with the

28 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

yellow spots on the margin of a conical shape or it may be said that the

venter is yellow with a broad black discal patch emitting rays towards

the margin. Stal suggests that Vollenhoven’s figure (l. c.) t. 4, f. 8

should be referred to this species: the yellow rays from the venter vary

much in length and he has never seen specimens in which the small

discoidal spots on the pronotum and the basal spots on the scutellum are

wanting.

Reported from Philippines, Celebes, Sumatra, Amboina, Ternate,

India (?).

7. BRACHYPLATYS SILPHOIDES, Fabricius.

Cimex silphoides, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 86 (1794).

Tetyra silphoides, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 141 (1803) : Schiédte in Kroyer’s Nat,

Tids. iv, p. 301 (1842), excl. syn. Burmeister.

Brachyplatys silphoides, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 71 (1851), excl. syn. pt : Walker,

Cat. Het. i, p. 100 (1867) : Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 5 (1868) ; En. Hem. v, p. 8, 1876).

Body entirely glabrous, brassy-black, immaculate: margin of ab-

domen broadly white with a row of black dots: wings lineated: feet

yellow (Fabr.)

3, 2. Aenescent-black, very distinctly and rather densely punc-

tured, head somewhat rugose, four small spots on head, lateral sub-

marginal line and line obliquely drawn from lateral angles towards the

interior part of the eyes and here confluent with the intramarginal line,

also two small spots placed before the middle and very distant from each

other, elevated margin of scutellum and intramarginal line, also four

basal spots, yellow-testaceous: ventral limbus emitting on each seg-

ment two somewhat short flavescent rays of which the anterior is marked

by a small black spot: feet flavescent (Stal). Long 6—8 ; broad, 5—6

mill.

Reported from India, Panjab, Ceylon, China. Westermann records

its occurrence on rice (Serampore P).

8. BRACHYPLATYS SUBZNEUS, Westwood.

Plataspis subenea, Westw., in Hope Cat. Hem. i. p. 17 (1837).

Thyreocoris septus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 32 (1839).

Brachyplatys subenea, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 70 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune

Ent. Arch. Ind. Néerl. i, p. 54 (1863), excl. t. 4, f.8: Walker. Cat. Het. i, p, 100

(1867) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 8 (1876).

Brassy: head with a broad submarginal line and four dots on the’

rhombus (between the eyes), anterior and lateral margins of thorax and

an angulated sublateral line and margin of scutellum, fulvous: feet pale-

1887.) K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 29

ly luteous : abdomen brassy, marked by very many transverse conical

spots on the sides (Westw.). Long 6} mill.

Reported from China, Philippines, Ceylon, Malacca, Burma, Assam,

India.

9. BRACHYPLATYS BURMEISTERI, Distant.

Thyreocoris silphoides, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 384 (1835) : Stal, En. Hem. vy, p.

8 (1876).

Brachyplatys burmeisteri, Distant, A. M. N. H. (5s.) iii, p. 46 (1879).

Brassy-black: entire margin, the feet and marginal spots on the

abdomen Iuteous (Burm.). Long 6-8 mill. Can be at once distin-

guished from B. vahlit, Fabr. and B. silphoides, Fabr. by its uniform co-

loration above and absence of luteous markings on the head and prono-

tum : the luteous abdominal radial streaks are as in B. radians, Voll.

Reported from Tranquebar, Noa-Dehing valley and Sadiya (Assam).

10. BracHypLatys niTipus, Westwood.

Plataspis nitidus, Westw., in Hope Cat. Hem. i, p. 17 (1837) ; Walker, Cat. Het.

i, p. 110 (1867).

Thyreocoris nitidus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 35 (1839).

Brachyplatys nitidus, Stal, Hn. Hem. v. p. 9 (1876),

Altogether black, shining, finely punctured: head broad ; scutel-

‘lum posteriorly emarginate (Westw.). Long, 6% mill.

Reported from India.

11. Bracuyenatys Birstrica, Walker.

Brachyplatys bistriga, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 100 (1867).

| Aeneous, finely punctured: head about two-thirds of the breadth

of the thorax : antenna, legs, marginal line on pronotum on each side

which does not extend to the posterior angle, a very short line connect-

ing the marginal line with the posterior angle, border of scutellum, mar-

ginal transverse lanceolate streaks on venter, each containing a black

point, and the corium, pale luteous: costa of hemelytra black: wings

blackish cinereous (Walker). Long 5% mill.

Reported from Bangalore.

12. BracHypnatys coanata, Walker,

Seeehyplatys cognata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 101 (1867).

Aeneous-black, minutely punctured: head about two-thirds of the ?

breadth of the thorax: an irregular interrupted line near the fore

border of the head, a twice interrupted line between the eyes and a dot

30 HK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

with a small longitudinal line on each side in the middle, the legs, an-

tennse, a waved line on pronotum which diverges on each side from the

anterior margin to the posterior angle, a marginal line on each side end-

ing near the posterior angle, sides of scutellum and transverse streaks

on each side of the venter, luteous: scutellum slightly excavated at the

tip (Walker). Long 4—5 mill.

Reported from Burma.

13. BRACHYPLATYS ADJuNOTA, Walker.

Brachyplatys adjuncta, Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 101 (1867).

Aeneous, minutely punctured: head about two-thirds of the breadth

of the thorax: a mark on the disc of the head between two transyerse

interrupted lines and the lines themselves, antenne, legs, a transverse

undulating line on the thorax which extends along the foreborder and

diverges on each side to the posterior angle and two marginal lines

which do not extend to the posterior angle, border of scutellum, border

of venter which emits short streaks to the disc, luteous: scutellum ex-

cavated at the tip (Walker). Body long, 4; mill.

Reported from Burma.

Genus Coptosoma, Laporte.

Coptosoma. subg. Coptosoma, Lap., Ess. Hém. p. 73 (1832) :—Coptosoma, Dallas,

List. Hem. i, p. 61 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 83 (1867) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p.

1, 9 (1864) ; En, Hem. v, p. 4, 10 (1876). Includes Globocoris, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. ii.

p. 40 (1834). 7

Body very broadly ovate, above moderately convex, beneath some-

what flat or very slightly convex: head usually small and perpendi-

cularly, or somewhat so, deflexed, narrower than the pronotum; ty-

lus not reflexed anteriorly, lying entirely in the same plane: eyes

rather prominulous ; ocelli nearer to the eyes than to each other: an-

tenne inserted at the eyes : lateral margins of thorax posteriorly sinuate,

before the sinus, usually distinctly amplified and foliaceous: scutellum

somewhat amplified hindwards: feet somewhat short.

14. CopTosoMA DUODECIMPUNCTATA, Germar.

Thyreocoris duodecimpunctatus, Germar, Zeitsch. i (i) p. 30 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff.

Wanz. Ins. v, p. 14, t. 150, f. 474 (1839),

Coptosoma duodecimpunctatum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 62 (1851).

Coptosoma duodecimpunctata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86 (1867): Stal, En. Hem.

v, p. 10 (1876) : Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Body brassy-black : border of thorax and venter; eight spots on

the thorax (four on anterior margin, one on each lateral margin, and one

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 31

in each lateral one-third) and four spots on the scutellum, red (Germar).

The feet are cinnamon-colour, brown towards the base; the broad red

border of the abdomen is bidentate on each segment and has large black

spiracula: scutellum with a yellow line within the free black border.

Long, 6 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Assam: the Indian Museum has speci-

mens from Sikkim and Samaguting (Assam).

15.. CoprosoMA CORIBRARIA, Fabricius.

Cimesx cribrarius, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 531 (1798).

Tetyra cribraria, Fabr. Syst. Rhyng. p. 143 (1803) : Schiéddte in Kréyer’s Nat.

Tidsskr. iv, p. 305 (1842).

Thyreocoris ‘cribraria. Burm. Handb. ii (i) p. 384 (1835) : Germar, Zeitschr i, (i)

p. 26 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff. Wanz. iv, p. 84, t. 134, f. 416 (1834) and v, p. 31 (1839).

Coptosoma cribrariwm, Am, & Sery. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 66, t. 2, f. 4, (1843) ;

Dallas, List Hem. B. M.i, p. 67 (1851 ; Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Néer.

i, p. 50 (1863) ; Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868).

Coptosoma atomariwm, pt. Vollen. 1. c. i, p. 50 (1863) g.

Coptosoma cribraria, Walker, Cat. Het. B. M. i, p. 87 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem.

v, p. 12 (1876) : Scott, A.M. N. H. (48.) xiv, p. 289 (1874) ; Distant, Trans. Ent.

Soc. p, 414 (1883).

Body small, somewhat round : thorax and scutellum flavescent, with

very numerous impressed fuscous spots : scutellum somewhat emarginate

at the tip: abdomen dull black in the middle; feet yellow (Fabr.).

Long 33—5 mill.

Vollenhoven’s C. atomarium (nec Germar) is the ¢ of C. cribraria

and is of a greyish or greenish-yellow, irregularly covered with deep

black punctures on the posterior portion of the pronotum and on the

scutellum: the head is small with an extremely fine edging of black on

the anterior margin, a crescent-shaped black line on the vertex extend-

ing from one eye to the other: antenne yellow, with the tip of the last

joint brownish: eyes red: pronotum divided into two unequal parts by

a row of excavated brown points, in front of this row there is sometimes

a waved brown line; the posterior is punctured black: basal elevation

on scutellum not tumid, excavated points larger but more distant than

those on the thorax; beneath, head and pronotum yellow: meso- and

meta-thorax slaty-grey ; abdomen shining black with a broad yellow

margin in which are the finely black-irised stigmata : feet yellow, last joint

of tarsi, brown. Vollenhoven makes C. cribraria differ from his (. ato-

mariwm in its usually greater size, colour egg-yellow or greenish-yellow :

punctuation blacker and smaller, the row of points on the pronotum is

not so straight; scutellum throughout with a submarginal black line

except on the basal clevation: abdomen yellow, with a large black patch

32 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ Nowd,

in the middle from which proceed black rays running along the anterior

margins of the segments and between these rays are small transverse

black lines (Voll.). Long 3—4 mill. g ; 4—4 3 mill. ¢.

Reported from Japan, Cochin-China, Burma, India, Ceylon, Timor,

Sumatra; the Indian Museum has examples from Java, Calcutta, Sib-

sigar and Dikrang valley (Assam). The Sumatran specimens have the

yellow inclined to orange, those from Bengal are paler.

16. CoprosoMA PARDALINA, Stal.

En. Hem. y, p. 13 (1876).

Yellow: pronotum behind the middle and on the impressions, finely,

punctured, the scutellum rather more strongly punctured, the punctures

on the scutellum confluent in subreticulate and irregularly confluent

masses and small lines, posteriorly less numerous, finer on the basal

half: head semicircularly rounded before the eyes, margin narrow

tylus and two triangular spots black: pronotum with the two typical,

black transverse lines before the middle: pectus and venter black ;

ventral limbus and double row of lateral spots on each segment, flaves-

cent; the anterior spot large, subtransverse, posterior spot small, some-

times very minute. Lasily distinguished from QO. cribraria by the head

anteriorly more gradually rounded, dorsal punctuation stronger, marking

blacker and more extended and the absence of lateral spots produced in

long rays on the venter. Very like C. lyncew, Stal, from Australia, differs

in the punctuation and the black dorsal marking also in the sparingly

punctulate base of scutellum and the ventral marking (Stal) Long, 4 ;

breadth of pronotum, 35 mill,

Reported from India.

17. CoprosoMA NEPALENSIS, Westwood.

_ Coptosoma nepalensis, Westwood, Hope Cat. Hem. i, p. 17 (1837) : Stal. En.

Hem. v, p. 13 (1876). }

Thyreocoris nepalensis, Germar, Zeitschr, i, (i), p. 28 (1839).

Thyreocoris circumscriptus, Germar, l. c. p. 29 (1839).

Coptosoma nepalense, Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 63 (1851).

Coptosoma circumseriptum, Dallas, 1. c. p. 63 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86

(1867).

Coptosoma cinctum, Vollenhoyen, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 46 (1863).

Brassy black, very shining, punctured : head small, with two whit-

ish cuneate spots before the eyes: pronotum with a very slender lateral

and anterior border (interrupted in the middle), and a sublateral, an-

gulated line, whitish ; two small basal dots and a slender border on the

scutellum, whitish; antenne pale fuscous: feet whitish; femora fus-

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 33

cescent at the base; abdomen seneous; margin and sublateral spots,

whitish (Westw.). Body long, 4 mill.

Reported from Nepal. The Indian Museum has specimens from

Sikkim.

18. Coprosoma cinctTa, Esch.

Scutellera cincta, Esch. Dorpat Abh. i, p. 161 (1822) ; Entomographia, p. 105

1822).

cori seminulum, Burm. Nov. Ac. Ac. Leop. xvi, Sup. i, p. 290 (1834).

Thyreocoris variegatus, Herr. Schiff. Wanz. Ins. iv, p. 83, t. 134, f. 414 (1839).

Thyreocoris cinctus, Germar, Zeitschr. i, (i), p. 27 (1839).

Coptosoma cinctum, Dallas, List Hem.i, p. 64 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.

89 (1867) ; Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 613 (1870).

Coptosoma cincta, Stal, Hn. Hem. vy, p. 13 (1876).

Head somewhat longer than broad, forming anteriorly a stout

angle, yellow; a median line, dark brown: eyes large, yellow : antennz

as long as the thorax, yellow, second joint shortest: thorax twice as broad

as long, strongly excised anteriorly and much narrower than behind,

sides weakly excised, surface convex, thickly punctured, black-brown :

entire side-border yellow (with a brown longitudinal line on the anterior

half), sides of fore-borders, a transverse line interrupted in the middle

on the anterior half, and another irregular line in the middle towards the

posterior margin: scutellum broad as long, posteriorly entirely obtuse,

anteriorly convex, sloped posteriorly, grossly punctured, black-brown ;

the broad fore-border and the narrow outer margin smooth, yellow; with

yellow dots in the middle: hemelytra yellow at the base: beneath and

pectus pale grey: abdomen black, shining, punctured, the margin of

each segment with a stout three-cornered yellow spot: feet yellow

(Esch.). Long, 23;—3; broad, 2—2% mill.

Reported from Philippines. Specimens most probably representing

this species come from Assam and Ceylon. Differs from C. nepalensis,

Westw. in its smaller size and proportionately larger and more numerous

yellow marks above.

19, CoprosoMA SPH@RULA, Germar.

Thyreocoris spherula, Germar, Zeitschr. ; (i) p. 25 (1839) ; Herr. Schaff. Wanz

v, p. 15 and 30, t. 150, f. 476 (1839).

Coptosoma spherulum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 64 (1851).

Coptosoma spherula, Vollenhoven, Faune, Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 47 (1863) ;

Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86 (1867) ; Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 14 (1873).

Bronzed black, shining, finely punctured: head without a spot;

antennz brownish-yellow : pronotum with a fine double border, yellow,

extending from the anterior almost up to the posterior angles: scutellum

34. KE. T. Atkinson—Nofes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

bordered with yellow, except at its base: hemelytra brown with a broad

yellow border. Beneath, head black, pectus dull black with a transparent

yellow border at the anterior angles: abdomen shining bronzed black,

with a slight edging and with small sub-costal lines, yellow: feet

yellowish-brown, deeper towards the coxee (Voll.). Long, 2—3 mills.

Reported from Java, China, Ceylon, N. Bengal.

20. CoprosoMA PARYULA, Dallas.

Coptosoma parvulum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 65 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.

87 (1867).

Coptosoma parvula, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 15 (1876).

3, %. Black, shining, convex, broader behind, very finely and dense-

ly punctured : head with a small reddish spot on each side before the

eyes; the tylus reaching the anterior margin: eyes reddish brown:

thorax with a faint transverse furrow across the middle; the anterior

portion of the lateral margins yellow: scutellum wider behind, with a

distinct transverse impressed line, near the base: hemelytra margined

with yellow at the base: body beneath black: abdomen with the outer

margin and a submarginal spot on each side of each segment, orange :

legs pale brownish orange, with the base of the femora brown: antennz

pale brownish orange, with the apical joint darker. (Dallas.) Long,

3—s mill.

Reported from India.

21. CoprosoMA CICATRICOSA, Dallas.

Coptosoma cicatricosum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 66 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i,

p. 87 (1867).

Coptosoma cicatricosa, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 15 (1876).

&. Body and abdomen black, shining, punctured: head rugose,

eyes red: the lateral margins of the thorax much dilated, distinctly

emarginate in front of the lateral angles; a strong transverse punctured

furrow across the disc before the middle: scutellum with a strong trans-

verse furrow at the base, the included space not elevated; the whole

surface covered with smooth reddish, elevated spots, with the interstices

thickly punctured: pectus grey, obscure: legs black: rostrum pitchy

red with the apex black: antennze black (Dallas). Long, 6; mill.

Reported from N. India.

22. CoprTosoMA XANTHOCHLORA, Walker.

Coptosoma wanthochlora, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 87 (1867).

Luteous, thinly and largely punctured, a little longer than broad :

head about one-third of the breadth of the pronotum, with an abbreviated

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 35

transverse black line onthe hind border and with two short piceous

longitudinal lines in front: pronotum with a large green patch on each

side of the posterior margin: scutellum green, except the fore-part where

there is a distinct abbreviated transverse furrow : pectus with a black

disc : abdomen beneath, with black points on each side (Walker). Body

long, 45—53 mill.

Reported from India.

23. CoprosoMA INTEGRA, Walker.

Coptosoma integra, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 88 (1867).

A§neous-black, largely punctured: head a little more than one-

third of the breadth of the pronotum, luteous along each side in front:

pronotum with a luteous transverse line which extends along the anterior

border and is dilated on each side where it includes a slender black

streak: scutellum with the border luteous, not excavated at the tip, with

a transverse furrow in front: abdomen beneath, Iuteous on each side:

legs luteous (Walker). Body long, 23—3 mill.

Reported from India.

24. CoptTosoMA BREVIS, Walker.

Coptosoma brevis, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 89 (1867).

Black, very minutely punctured, not longer than broad: head one-

third of the breadth of the thorax with a broad curved yellow stripe on

each side in front: eyes red: antenne tawny: pronotum with two

yellow lateral stripes which are interlined with black; the forepart

with two narrow, yellow, slightly interrupted and undulating bands:

scutellum bordered with yellow, except in front, where there is a yellow

band: abdomen beneath, yellow on each side; legs yellow. Differs

from OC. spherula, Germ. in the continuous band at the base of the

scutellum and from C. hilaris, Walker, by the speckled scutellum

(Walker). Body long, 3—3%¢ mill.

Reported from Burma.

The following species of this sub-family may be noted as likely to

occur in India.

Tarichea chinensis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 74 (1851). China.

Calacta lugubris, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4:s.) v, p. 163 (1865). Hongkong.

Coptosoma tigrina, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 18 (1876). Cochin-China.

Coptosoma punctiventris, Stal, l.c., p. 13. Malacca.

25. CoprosoMA ASSAMENSIS, Atkinson.

Proc. A. 8. B. p. 174 (1886).

Bronzed-black, shining, very closcly and finely punctured: juga

36 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. No.4,

yellow, with a very fine blackish external limbus: eyes large, pro-

minulous, deep castaneous: lateral margins of pronotum (enclosing

anteriorly a black longitudinal streak) broadly forward, narrowly hind-

ward, also four oblong transverse spots (2 and 2) on anterior part, the

pair nearest anterior margin smaller, and a broadly oval spot at each

posterior basal angle, yellow: the third basal part of scutellum, black

arcuate hindward, with two yellow, oblong, transverse elongate spots

before the basal impression: sides very broadly and apical two-thirds

rather sordid yellow, thickly and coarsely punctured fuscous, with a

large rounded black spot in the middle of each posterior angle : abdomen

beneath shining black ; feet sordid flavescent. Long, 23—38,; broad, 25

mill.

Reported from N. E. Assam.

Subfam, Cypnina, Stal.

En. Hem. vy, p.17 (1876) :— Cydnida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p.18 (1864) : Cydnini,

Schiddte, Nat. Tidsskr. p. 454 (1849) : Cydnide, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 109 (1851) ;

Walker, Cat. Het, i, p. 147 (1867) : Cydnides, Signoret, A. 8. HE. F. (6 8.) i, p. 25

(1881).

Antennz remote from the lateral margins of the head, inserted near

the base of the head, or not more remote therefrom than the anterior

margin of the eyes, 4-5 jointed: rostrum 4-jointed, rising near the

labrum and apex of the head: scutellum variable, moderate or very

large: costal margin of corium prominulous beyond the lateral margins

of the body throughout its entire length, or at least for half its length :

first ventral segment, or at least the sides, covered by the metastethium,

the extreme posterior margin only visible: lateral margins of venter

completely entire, not incised between the segments, the angles of the

segments not prominulous: tibie spinose : propleura convex, posteriorly

depressed (Stal).

Sec. I CypnipEs, Signoret.

A. 8. E. F. (68.) i, p. 25 (1881) ; iii, p. 521 (1883) : Cydnida, Stal, Hem. Afric.

i, p. 11 (1864).

Having piliferous points on the vertex and the pronotum both in

front near the anterior margin and also on the disc near the transverse

impression and above. These piliferous points exist almost in the same

places in all species—four on the disc of the head, of which two are

situate above the eyes, one on each side, and two towards the tip of the

lateral lobes (juga) ; six on the pronotum of which four are situate on

the anterior margin, and two lateral on the disc near the transverse

impression. Where the pile or hairs are wanting, their existence is

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 37

indicated by points or dots which do not occur amongst the second

section comprising the Sehirides. The generic characters of the Cydnides

are chiefly drawn from the piliferous points or dots other than those men-

tioned which are especially found along the lateral margins of the

head, the pronotum or the hemelytra.

Genus CrpHaLocteus, Leon Dufour.

A. 8. E. F. (1 8.) iii, p. 342 (1834) ; Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 94

(1843) ; Fieber. Eur. Hem. p. 83, 362 (1861) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 163 (1867) ;

Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876) ; Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 38 (1881) :—Cephaloc-

tenus, Schiddte, Kroyer’s Tidsskr. iv, p. 330 (1843) ; (28s. ) ii, p. 449 (1849).

Eyes hardly visible, composed only of a small tubercle surmounted

by one or two others ; ocelli absent: head longer than broad, spinulose,

ciliated on the margin and the vertex ; the juga are longer than the tylus

which is, however, free in front: antennse 5-jointed, the first joint is the

longest, the two last shortest, globose: rostrum reaching the interme-

diate pair of feet: the second joint stoutest and longest: pronotum

twice as broad as long, very pilose on the sides and on part of the disc:

scutellum longer than broad, acuminate: hemelytra shorter than the

abdomen, membrane very short, veinless, also the corium which is bor-

dered with numerous hairs and has some on the disc: wings rudimen-

tary: feet short and stout ; femora amplified ; the intermediate and last

tibise much ciliated over their whole surface; the first pair with ten

spines on the outer side, apparently mobile, and increasing in length and

breadth from base to tip, the internal side furnished with four spines

having very long hairs ; tarsi long and slender; claws with appendages

in the form of bristles: abdomen with numerous hairs on the disc and

on the sides, the ostiolar canal more or less confused in the mesosternal

groove with the ostiole towards the middle and forming an oblique open-

ing with a distinct margin at the base and almost none at the tip (Sign.).

26. CEPHALOCTEUS MELOLONTHOIDES, Schiddte.

Cephaloctenus melolonthoides, Schiddte, in Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. iv, p. 332

(1843).

Cephalocteus melolonthoides, Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Sign, A. S. E. F. (6

s.) i, p. 40 (1881).

Fuscous or piceous, with ferruginous hairs ; scutellum and hemely-

tra at the apex of a weaker colour, membrane albescent at the apex: an-

tenne and rostrum ferruginous: neck pale yellow: feet rufous; pos-

terior tibize piceous, spines fuscous ; all the tarsi pale. Head occupying

almost one-sixth of the length of the body, broader than long by one half,

somewhat convex, impressed towards the sides with some unequal punc-

38 BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

tures ; anterior margin of the head between the somewhat exserted eyes.

broadly rounded, deeply incised in the middle: sides of clypeus con-

verging towards the apex, united by a small transverse furrow behind

the middle: pronotum at least twice as broad as its median length,

scarcely twice as long as the head, narrower than the basal breadth by

one-third at apex, convex, the convexity transverse, almost the third part

of a circle; disc often flatly impressed in the middle, convexly sloped

anteriorly and at the sides; densely and minutely punctured, somewhat

smooth towards the anterior angles: scutellum almost twice as long as

the pronotum, longer by a fourth than the basal breadth, somewhat con-

vex, densely punctured ; anterior angles very acute; lateral margins,

straight, apex broadly rounded : hemelytra as broad as half of the an-

terior margin of the scutellum, densely punctured, somewhat convex,

sides convexly sloped, externally rounded: venter somewhat smoothish,

with ferruginous hairs (Schiddie). Long, 3¢ mill. |

Reported from Travancore.

Genus Strparopus, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 111, 125 (1851) : Walker Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867) : Stal, En.

Hem. v, p. 13 (1876): Sign. A. S. EH. F.(6 8.) i, p. 43 (1881). Includes Pachyc-

nemis, Jakowleff, Hém. Cauc., Trudy Russ. Ent. Obch, viii, p. 54 (1875).

Head very little longer than broad, rounded in front, with the apex.

very slightly emarginate ; the margins closely set with spines, the juga

meeting beyond the tylus; eyes of moderate size, globose, prominent :

ocelli very large, distant, placed close to the anterior margin of the pro-

notum : antenne short, not twice the length of the head, five-jointed, gra-

dually increasing in thickness from the base to the apex; basal joint.

short, second very small, third longest, gradually thickened towards the

apex, fourth and fifth ovate: rostrum slender, reaching the posterior

coxee, inserted close to the apex of the head ; basal and third joints about.

equal, second and fourth also about equal, longer than the others, fourth

thinnest: body oblong-ovate: thorax a little broader than long, almost

semicircular in front: scutellum rather longer than broad, with the apex

broad. Membrane well developed, passing beyond the apex of the abdo-

men, with longitudinal veins: anterior tibie compressed, cheliform,

slightly curved, with tbe basal half of the outer margin spinose, the in-

ner margin fringed with hairs, especially at the apex; tarsi inserted at

about one-third of the length of the tibie from the apex, very long and

slender, three-jointed; basal joint very long, forming more than half

the tarsus, second shortest, third about half as long as the first; inter-

mediate tibiee somewhat clavate, strongly curved, thickly set with spines

on the outside, especially towards the apex; tarsi inserted at the apex

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 39

of the tibie, rather short, three-jointed, apical joint longest, second short-

est; posterior legs very stout, rather short; femora very broad, some-

what compressed ; tibie very short, sparingly spinous on the outside,

much enlarged and abruptly truncated at the extremity, forming a large

oval disc, surrounded by closely set spines ; these spines at the extremity

of the inner margin run in a single oblique line across the inner surface

of the tibie, towards the upper margin and in the angle formed by

this row of spines with the truncated posterior margin, the tarsi are

inserted, and lie so concealed by the ring of spines surrounding this mar-

gin as to elude detection except upon a very close examination; the

tarsi are short, three-jointed, the apical joint largest, the basal joint very

little longer than the second (Dallas).

27. STIBAROPUS LATIPES, Westwood.

Cydnus latipes, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 18 (1837): Stal, En. Hem. v,

p. 26 (1876).

Stibaropus brunneus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 125, t. 3, f. 1 (1851) ; Walker, Cat.

Het. i, p. 166 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876).

Stibaropus latipes, Signoret, A. 8. H. F. (6 8.) i, p. 44, t. 1, f. 4 (1881).

9. Head, thorax and scutellum pitchy castaneous, more or less trans-

versely rugose: head castaneous in front with the vertex pitchy: ocelli

red : thorax with a shallow furrow across about the middle, in front of

which is a distinct, transverse, elevated line; the portion of the thorax

behind the furrow is finely transversely rugose as also the scutellum

which is furnished with a few scattered punctures. Corium and clavus

castaneous-brown, finely and densely punctured ; membrane pale brown-

ish-yellow, semitransparent: body beneath pale castaneous, impunctate ;

abdomen clothed with short hairs and with the apex pitchy: legs pale

castaneous, with the posterior tibie, darker; anterior tibie with the

apex black; tarsi reddish: rostrum and antenne reddish testaceous ,

antenne darker (S. brunneus, Dallas., Long, 105 mill.

Reported from N. India.

28. Sriparopus moueinus, Schiddte.

Scaptocoris molginus, Schiédte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr (2s.) ii, p. 458 (1849).

Stibaropus molginus, Stal, En. Hem. v, p, 17 (1876) : Sign. A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) i, p.

45 (1881).

Suboval: rostrum as long as the pectus: second joint of the an-

tennze longer by half than the third: scutellum transversely rugose,

broadly rounded at the apex: hemelytra punctured, piceous-castaneous ;

vertex and anterior part of pronotum, black piceous: clavus and exterior

margin of corium on the hemelytra, castaneous-rufous: beneath with

40 EK. T. Atkinson-- Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

feet castaneous: pleura piceous; first pair of tibie black at the

apex. Head very densely rugulose: last joint of the antenne oblong-

oval, as large as the third : second joint of the rostrum a little thickened,

distinctly curved: anterior part of the pronotum minutely reticulose,

the reticulation unequal, posterior part transversely rugulose, the wrink-

lets equal, very dense, punctulate : scutellum as long as the pronotum,

rugulose like the posterior part of the pronotum, exceeding by one-sixth

the basal breadth ; a little dilated at the extreme tip, broadly rounded,

almost truncated, margin broadly depressed : hemelytra distinctly punc-

tured ; exterior area of corium divided into two parts by a straight

stria; marginal part narrow, puuctulate, the anterior part broad, very

smooth: membrane flavescent (Schiddte). Long, 94—10% mill.

Reported from Rangpur (Bengal) : a single specimen from Jalpai-

gori.

29. STIBAROPUS TABULATUS, Schiddte.

Scaptocoris tabulatus, Schiddte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (2 s.) ii, p. 459 (1849).

Stibaropus tabulatus, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S. EH. F. (6 s.)

i, p. 45 (1881).

Briefly obovate: rostrum as long as the pectus: second joint of

antennse one-fourth longer than the third: scutellum transversely stria-

ted, acutely rounded at the apex: hemelytra smooth. Weakly fulvous-

castaneous ; a double somewhat ring-shaped patch on the anterior part

of the pronotum and the humeral protuberances, piceous: first pair of

tibize fuscous at the apex; a transversely linear black spot near the pos-

terior margin of the fifth ventral segment, somewhat triangularly dilated

forwards in the middle of the segment: last ventral segment in ¢,

piceous. Head strongly rugose: last joint of the antennez elongate.

Sovate, one fourth longer than the third : second joint of rostrum curved

as regards the form of the anterior sete : pronotum more distinctly con-

stricted than in S. molginus and more narrowed towards the apex, an-

terior part more deeply reticulose, posterior part transversely striated,

the strie robust, here and there confluent : scutellum scarcely longer than

the pronotum, exceeding by one sixth the basal breadth, transversely

striated, the strie rather regular, deep, gradually more distant towards

the apex; apex scarcely dilated, acutely rounded, margin narrowly de-

pressed : hemelytra smooth or very obsoletely punctured, exterior area

of corium divided by an inwardly arched stria; marginal part broad,

interior part narrow, linear, dilated towards the apex: membrane flaves-

cent (Schiddte). Long, 7 mill.

Reported from Travancore.

———

1887. ] BK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 41

30. Srrparopus CALLipus, Schiddte.

Scaptocoris callidus, Schiddte, Nat. Tidsskr. (1 s.) ii, p. 460 (1849).

Stibaropus callidus, Stal, En. Hem. vy, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S. E. F. (6s.)

i, p. 46 (1881).

Obovate : rostrum as long as the prosternum: second joint of the

antenne as long as the third: scutellum somewhat convex, rugosely

punctured, rounded at the apex : hemelytra minutely punctured. Ferru-

ginous-castaneous, anterior part of the pronotum and base of the scutel-

lum and hemelytra more obscure: apices of femora usually piceous, first

pair of tibie fuscous at the apex: last ventral segment in ¢@ with a

blackish spot. Head densely punctured, punctuation rugose: last joint

of antennee oval, one-fourth longer than the third: second joint of ros-

trum straight, third roundly dilated above: anterior part of pronotum

very minutely reticulose, the reticulation unequal, disc usually somewhat

smooth, posterior part deeply and densely punctured, the punctures trans-

verse, here and there confluent: scutellum one-fourth longer than the

pronotum, longer by half than the basal breadth, punctures transverse,

very dense at the base, here and there confluent, more distant towards —

the apex and gradually decreasing in size; apex scarcely dilated, obso-

letely margined, broadly rounded: the hemelytra minutely punctured ;

exterior area of corium without a dividing line; with a longitudinal im-

pression at the base, deeply punctured, remotely and very minutely punc-

tured towards the apex: membrane whitish (Schiddte). Long, 5—5z mill

Reported from Serampur (Bengal). Found flying in the evening

on the banks of the Hughli river.

31. SrIBaRorus FLAVIDUS, Signoret.

Stibaropus fiavidus, Sign., A. S. H. F. (6 8.) i, p. 47, t. 2, f. 6 (1881).

Yellow, rugose: head semi-horizontal, semi-perpendicular, the tylus

shorter than the juga, with two bristles at the tip, the juga with six:

eyes very prominent ; ocelli almost pedunculate or at least borne on a

small tubercle: rostrum reaching the insertion of the intermediate feet,

the first joint very long: the second joint of the antennz very short,

the third thrice as long as the second, the first almost as long as the third:

pronotum rugose, twice as broad behind as in front, the anterior border

_ marginate; a transverse groove beyond the middle; lateral margins

pubescent: scutellum longer than broad, rugose, almost carinate in the

middle, broadly rounded at the tip: hemelytra long, finely punctured;

membrane broad, white, with five veins: feet robust, pubescent, spinose,

the anterior small; tibiz curved, concave beneath, having the tarsi

inserted before the tip; the posterior very stout, the tibiz ending ina

A2 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

robust, spinose stump : abdomen pubescent ; ostiolar canal much grooved,

reaching three-fourths of the metasternum and ending in a rounded lobe

with the odoriferous aperture invisible. Allied to S. callidus. Schiddte,

differs in having the second joint of the antenne shorter than the third;

and the rostrum being longer (Sign.). Long, 6; broad, 23 mill.

Reported from N. India.

32. Srrparopus (?) minor, Walker.

Stibaropus minor, Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867).

Piceous, elliptical, convex, shining ; head slightly rugulose, about

one-third of the breadth of the thorax: rostrum, antenne and legs fer-

ruginous: thorax minutely punctured in front of the antemedial trans-

verse furrow; hind part transversely rugulose : scutellum minutely rugu-

lose, with a transverse impression very near the tip: legs incrassated ;

tibie clavate, setose; tarsi slender: hemelytra minutely punctured ;

membrane pale cinereous (Walker). Long, 5; mill.

Reported from Burma. ~ ;

33. STIBAROPUS (?) TESTACEUS, Walker.

‘Stibaropus testaceus, Walker; Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867).

Testaceous, oval, thick, convex, shining: head somewhat conical,

slightly rugulose, about one-third of the breadth of the thorax which is

thickly and minutely punctured, with a transverse median furrow:

scutellum transversely and minutely rugulose: legs short ; tibie setose ;

anterior femora and tibie thick ; hind femora and tibis much incras-

sated: hemelytra very minutely punctured; membrane pale cinereous

(Walker). Long, 5; mill.

Reported from India.

Genus Lactistes, Schiddte.

Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (28.) ii, p. 456 (1849); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876),

Sign. A. 8. E. F. (5 8.) ix, p. clxxii (1879) ; 1. c. (68.) i, p. 48 (1881).

In this genus, as in the preceding, the anterior tarsi appear to be

inserted before the end of the tibiew, due to a prolongation of the end’ of

the tibia (which is itself more or less emarginate) arising from the

union of the apical spines. Head normally ciliated : juga inclosing the

tylus: vertex more or less rugulose ; eyes spinose at the base: prono-

tum much narrower in front, with a median transverse impression :

corium almost twice as long as the membrane, the latter extending

slightly beyond the abdomen : ostiolar canal more or less rugose, with

the ostiole in an emargination beneath and usually accompanied by a

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. AZ

small hook-shaped tongue (Sign.). In Stibaropus, the posterior tibia

are thickened; in Lactistes, they are slender; in Scoparipes, they have

a longitudinal row of brush-shaped hairs, and in Adrisa, they are cylin-

drical. Schiddte separates Cephalocteus and Lactistes thus :—

Cephalocteus. Lactistes.

Tarsi equal, very minute. Pos- Tarsi unequal, first pair longer,

terior tibize clavate, setose, exter- last tibie narrow, compressed,

nally very spiny. First tibie pec- spiny. First tibie pectinate,

tinate, truncate. hamate.

34. LACTISTES RASTELLUS, Schiddte.

Lactistes rastellus, Schiddte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (2 s.) ii, p. 457 (1849) :

Stal, Overs. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 614 (1870) ; En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S.

E. F. (6 s.) i, p. 49, t. 2, f. 8 (1881).

Blackish-brown, shining, oval: first pair of tibiee rounded internally

before the apex: third joint of antenne one-fourth shorter than the

second which is cylindrical. One-half longer than its greatest breadth

before the base of the pronotum ; somewhat convex, shining, castaneous,

the antenne and feet of a weaker colour. Head shorter by one-third

than its greatest breadth through the eyes, rugosely punctured, flattish,

margin somewhat elevated, minutely incised in the middle, frontal striae

converging from the median length : rostrum reaching the intermediate

cox, second joint straight above: antenne exceeding the head by one-

fifth, first and second joints of the same length, cylindrical, the second twice

as slender, third obconical, last two equal, ovate, one-fourth longer than the

third: pronotum one-sixth longer than the anterior breadth, shorter by

half than the basal breadth, convex, somewhat flatly sloped towards the

apex, distinctly constricted behind the middle, densely punctured, pos-

terior margin and anterior protuberances very smooth; sides sinuated

behind the middle; anterior angles obtuse, posterior angle somewhat

straight, callous, prominulous beyond the margin of the hemelytra :

scutellum as long as the pronotum, scarcely exceeding the basal breadth,

rather densely punctured, apex somewhat deflexed, somewhat obtuse:

hemelytra densely punctured, membrane hyaline (Schiédte). Long,

+ mill.

Reported from Serampur (Bengal), Philippines.

35. LACTISTES VICINUS, Signoret.

Lactistes vicinus, Sign., A. S. H. F. (6 8s.) i, p. 50 t. 2, f. 9 (1881).

2. Close to L. rastellus, Schiddte, but differs from it in the much

shorter, broad, and rounded tip of the tibiz, in the internal edge of the

44 BK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

tibie being without tubercles, whilst the external edge has 5-6 robust

spines or teeth. Head rounded, emarginate in front, juga united with the

tylus, borders with a rim ; less rugose: pronotum punctured, margins

ciliated: hemelytra with three piliferous points: abdomen punctured :

the ostiolar canal more sinuous in front and behind, ending in a lobe

more angularly rounded, with a small tooth at the emargination: smooth

part of the mesosternum punctured: third joint of antennz oval, as

long as the second but stout; 4-5 joints are equal and longest (Sign.)-

Long, 7+; broad, 33 mill.

Reported from N. India.

36. LAcTISTES TRUNCATO-SERRATUS, Signoret.

Lactistes truncato-serratus, Sign., A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) i, p. 51, t. 2, f. 10 (1881).

@. In colour and form like L. vicinus, Sign., but differs especially

in the dilated prolongation of the posterior tibie which is short and

presents at the last spine of the external side two emarginations that

form three rounded teeth: the tarsi are very long. Head rounded,

emarginate in front, the tylus shorter than the juga but free, the juga

not touching at the tip: pronotum more punctured, with two irregular

smooth spaces on the anterior dise: scutellum less densely punctured :

hemelytra without piliferous points: abdomen punctured on the sides,

on the mesosternum in the glossy lateral part, and on part of the metaster-

num and near the insertion of the posterior femora: the episternum

much punctured: the ostiolar canal very irregular, ending in a small

lobe, rounded, with a valveless emargination, not a tooth (Szgn.). Long,

73; broad, 35 mill.

Reported from N. India.

Genus Scopariprrs, Signoret.

B. 8. E. F. (5 s.) ix, p. clxxii (1879); lc. p. 235 (1879): 1. c. (6 8.) i, p.

202 (1881).

Distinguished by the form of the posterior tibie in the $ which

are long, flattened, more narrow at the base and at the tip and have on

the internal surface a line or edge furnished with short, stiff hairs very

close, and the same line but with a few hairs only in the @ ; on the

external surface, there are spines as in the other genera of this section.

Head more or less rounded and furnished on the margin with hairs and

rather stout spinules; antenng 5-jointed of which the third is shorter

than the second: ostiolar canal broad, grooved transversely and ending

in a broad lobe with the lower opening surrounded by a kind of hood

(Sign.).

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. AS

37. ScOPARIPES LONGIROSTRIS, Signoret.

Scoparipes ? longirostris, Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 s.) i, p. 205, t. 7, f. 24 (1881).

Brown-black; somewhat parallel, elongate: rostrum and tarsi,

yellowish : two first joints of the antenne, black, the rest brownish.

Head rounded in front, striated, finely punctured, spinulose, and ciliated

on the margin : second joint of the antennz longer than the third: ros-

trum very long, reaching the second ventral segment, the joints almost

equal, the second joint much arched: pronotum almost square, anterior

angles rounded, anterior border much emarginate, and strongly im-

pressed, finely punctured, also the lateral margins and on the median

transverse line ; much ciliated on the borders: scutellum rounded, im-

pressed at the tip and very concave; disc punctured: hemelytra shorter

and narrower than the abdomen, finely punctured, with 7-8 piliferous

points on the external side; membrane brown: feet black: anterior

tibiz, broad, with the usual spines: abdomen glossy in the middle,

punctured and striated on the sides (Szgn.). Long, 12; broad, 6 mill.

Reported from India P |

Genus Aprisa, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 89 (1843): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 20 (1876) : Signoret.

A.S. EH. F. (6 s.) i, p. 205 (1881). Includes Acatalectus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 110,

122 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 64 (1867) and Geobia, Montr. Ann, Soc. Linn. Lyon.

(2 s.) v, p. 245 (1858).

Distinguished by its 4-jointed antenne, due to the union of the

second and third joints ; first joint short, not extending beyond the ante-

rior margin of the head, second scarcely oras long as the third and fourth

together, second joint gradually thickened from base to tip and a little

pubescent, third and fourth almost of equal length and very pubescent :

second joint of rostrum thickest and longest, the fourth is shortest ,

almost as long as the first; body oval, a little convex; corium twice as

large as the membrane: scutellum angular at the tip: the meso-and

meta-sternal plaques mates very large, the upper reaching the lateral

margin above the mesosternal furrow: the ostiolar canal which reaches

the middle of the metasternal space is more or less waved and ends in a

tubercle or rounded or angulated lobe; it is emarginate beneath with a

lage valvule varying with the species: feet and abdomen normal (Sign ).

38. AprisaA macna, Uhler.

Acatalectus magnus, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 222 (1860) ; Stal, En.

Hem. v, p. 27 (1876).

Adrisa magna, Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 206, t. 7, f£. 25 (1881).

@. Black, shining, much punctured, the punctuation more or less

46 BH. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

confluent, head rounded, emarginate, with the anterior margin narrowly

recurved, juga meeting by a point of their surface in front of the tylus,

coarsely and deeply rugosely punctured: eyes testaceous, ocelli reddish :

antenne piceous, pubescent, terminal joints paler; rostrum pitchy black,

second joint thickened ; thorax subquadrate, anterior angles a little

oblique and rounded, behind the head, a slightly elevated, irregularly

crescent-formed surface, smooth and impunetate, remaining surface very

deeply, coarsely and confluently punctured, a series of very fine punc-

tures along the lateral margins, basal margin subtruncate, smooth, with

a very few coarse punctures: scutellum shining, rugosely punctured,

impunctate at the apex: corium subopaque, very finely and closely

punctured ; membrane fuliginous, somewhat opaque, freckled with spots

of yellow, beneath scabrescently punctured, venter densely so, its disc

shining, impunctate, margins trenchant; legs deep black, shining,

anterior and middle femora ciliated beneath, with a row of long slender

spines, those upon the posterior pairs very short, tibise densely spinose

(Uhler). Long, 19; breadth of abdomen, 103 mill.

Reported from Hong-Kong.

39. ApRISA (P) CLARA, Walker.

Acatalectus clarus, Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 535 (1868).

Black, elliptical, rather flat: sides of the head and of the thorax

with a few bristles: head hardly punctured ; sides and fore border very

slightly reflexed: eyes, rostrum, antenne and legs, piceous: rostrum

extending to the middle coxe: 1-4 joints of the antenne successively

increasing in length: thorax sparingly aud minutely punctured, smooth,

except on each side in front of a transverse middle furrow; a ferru-

ginous patch on each hind angle: scutellum rather thinly punctured,

smooth at the base, with a narrow ferruginous border on each side:

legs stout ; femora slightly dentate beneath ; tibize spinose: hemelytra

piceous, more thickly punctured than the thorax, with two veins near

the costa and with four near the hind border; membrane colourless

(Walker). Long, 104 mill.

Reported from India.

Genus Alruvs, Dallas.

Pt., List Hem. i. p. 110 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het, i, p. 148 (1867) : Stal, Hem.

Afric. i, p. 19, 20 (1864) ; En; Hem. v, p. 18 (1876) : Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.) i, p.

423 (1881). Includes Cydnus, Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 83, 363 (1861).

Body oval or ovate, slightly convex ; margins at least of the head,

pilose or setose: head rounded at the apex, juga and tylus equally long ;

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 47

buccule continued through, slightly elevated : first joint of the rostrum

not extending posteriorly beyond the buccule: antenne 5-jointed, very

often somewhat short and furnished with subfusiform apical joints;

scutellum triangular, longer than broad, frena extended almost to the

apex: corium longer than the scutellum, with the apical margin

straight : prosternum longitudinally impressed: feet moderate, femora

sparingly setose, tibiee very spinose, first pair much compressed, upper

margin spinosely pectinate (Stal).

Signoret (l. c.) restricts thus, to those species of Dallas which

have the head spinulose and ciliated and in which the ostiolar canal does

not end in a cornet or ear-shaped opening of which the borders are more

or less flattened.

40. AirHus InDICcUS, Westwood.

Cydnus indicus, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 19 (1837); Stal, En. Hem.

v. p. 26 (1876) ; Sign. An. Mus. Gen. xvi, p. 632 (1880) ; Lethierry, 1, c. xviii, p. 649

1883).

a perosus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 214 (1853) ; Hem. Afric. i, p. 23

(1864) ; Ofvers. K. V.-A. p. 614 (1870) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 18 (1876).

Aithus impressicollis, Signoret, A. S. HE. F. (3 8.) viii, p. 923 (1861).

Aithus indicus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 114 (1851) ; Walker. Cat. Het. i, p. 155

(1867) ; Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 28, t.1, £. 69 (1882).

Small, black, shining, ovate, punctured: antenne moderate ; sides

of body setose : feet moderate, black: anterior tibiz, broad, spinose, four

posterior setiferous (Westwood). Body long 6 mill.

8, 2. Oval or ovate, black-piceous: head somewhat obtusely round-

ed, rarely somewhat semicirenlar, distinctly punctured, the base and the

tylus smooth, margin slightly reflexed, remotely pilose: antenne

fuscous-piceous, apical joints of a weaker colour, somewhat short, three

last joints somewhat incrassate, second a little shorter than the third :

thorax convex, in d, impressed before the middle, rather densely and

distinctly punctured, the base and transverse space before the middle,

smooth, lateral margins remotely pilose: scutellum moderately densely

punctured: hemelytra distinctly punctured ; membrane sordid hyaline

or very slightly infuscate: sides of venter sparingly punctured: tarsi

yellow piceeus (Z/. porosus, Stal). Long, 5;—6 ; broad, 3—3} mill.

Reported from S. Africa, Madagascar, Flores, Celebes, Borneo, Java,

China, Burma, India, Bombay.

4], Aituus BoRREI, Signoret.

Aithus borrei, Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 32, t. 2, f. 73 (1882).

$. Brown, oval, shining, sparingly and strongly punctured: rog-

48 HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. PMond;

trum, antenne coxe and feet, yellow; tarsi of a lighter colour; spines

on feet, black. Head rounded, emarginate in the middle, the tylus

shorter than the juga, the latter inclosing it, the borders also defined

and posteriorly with 13-14 piliferous points on each side: vertex almost

smooth, obsoletely striated : three ocelli near the eyes : rostrum reaching

the intermediate cox, antennz short, the second joint shorter than the

third: pronotum very convex, with a strong line of dots behind the

emargination and a slight impression; others at the anterior angles

and on the transverse impression; the lateral margins sinuate and

with 13-14 ciliated points: scutellum with the tip angularly rounded,

rugosely and sparingly punctured on the disc, the base smooth : hemely-

tra strongly punctured ; the marginal side visible to the tip but indis-

tinct from the middle of the corium, and appearing crenulated, due to

the presence of nine piliferous points or dots: the internal radial vein

ending in the middle of the corium: membrane very long, of a lght

yellow hyaline and extending from near its half beyond the abdomen ;

feet yellow, with black spines ; anterior tibie very broad, with seven

stout spines, the sixth and seventh almost united as in Lactistes : abdo-

men smooth, impressed on the sides, in the space occupied by the ciliated

points and the stigmata : plaques mates striated and punctured, the up-

per ending in a point on the suture, the lower separated from the smooth

lateral space by an almost straight line; the ostiolar canal not reaching

the middle of the metasternum and ending in a reniform lobe, with a

valvular tooth in the indentation. Differs from Ae. indicus, Westw. by

its much broader head, almost smooth, and the tylus shorter than the

juga which inclose it. In Ae. indicus, the head is longer than broad be-

tween the eyes and the tylus is very narrow in front and as long as the

juga which almost inclose it (Sign.). ong, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from Silhet.

42, ANTHUS PERPUNOTATUS, Signoret.

Aithus ? perpunctatus, Sign., An. Mus. Gen. xvi, p. 634 (1881); A. S. E. F.

(6 s.) ii, p. 34, t. 2, f. 75 (1882).

Black: broadly oval, convex, much punctured over its entire sur-

face, much ciliated on the head and pronotum: two glossy spaces on the

anterior disc of the pronotum, at the basal angles of the scutellum and

a median line on the latter almost carinate. Head rounded in front ;

the tylus very narrow at the tip which reaches the juga, margins slight-

ly reflexed: pronotum ciliated on the sides and on the surface near the

margin at the anterior angles; hemelytra much ciliated on the mar-

ginal side, with 12-13 piliferous points: membrane short, brown: feet

black; tarsi pale; anterior tibise with eight spines on the external side

1887. ] EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 49

and four on the internal side: second joint of the antenne much longer

than the third: rostrum reaching the intermediate feet: ostiolar canal

ending in the middle of the episternum, much rounded at the tip which

is curved back beneath, with a valvular emargination: the episternums

with three small dull plates (plaques mates), that of the mesosternum

occupying the entire internal angle along the coxa and continued on the

suture up to the border ; the lower, or that of the metasternum, occupying

only the space above the extreme lobe of the ostiolar canal (Sign.) Hasily

distinguished by its abundant punctuation and the form of the ostiolar

canal. Long, 6; broad, 33 mill.

Reported from Khandalla (Bombay ?).

43. AitnHus mAuRUS, Dallas.

Zithus maurus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 118 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158

(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 26 (1876) ; Distant, Scien. Res. 2nd Yarkand Miss. p. 3

(1879).

$, ¢%. Black somewhat shining, very thickly and finely punctured :

head as long as broad, with the anterior margin semicircular, very

faintly notched at the tip, juga not passing the tylus: ocelli not very

large, red: thorax with a faint punctured transverse furrow about the

middle, the anterior and lateral margins, and the portion of the disc be-

hind the transverse furrow, very thickly and finely punctured: scutel-

lum rather elongated, very thickly and finely punctured. Coriaceous

portion of the hemelytra pitchy castaneous, finely and rather thickly

punctured, the punctures closer on the line of the veins, near which it

is darker than on the rest of the surface; membrane brownish, trans-

parent: abdomen very thickly and finely punctured on the sides, the

middle of the disc, smooth, shining, impunctate ; the posterior margins

of the segments very minutely denticulated: legs pitchy black, with the

tarsi ferruginous: rostrum ferruginous: antenne ferruginous brown

(Dallas). Long, 6} mill.

Reported from India ?

Genus Cypnus, Fabricius.

Pt. Syst. Rhyng. p. 184 (1803) : Cydnus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 110, 120 (1851) :

Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 164.(1867) : Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 18, 19 (1864) ; En. Hem.

v, p. 20 (1876) : Sign. pt. A. S. HE. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 145 (1882). Includes Brachypelta,

Am. & Sery., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 89 (1843). 3

Body oval: head produced, semicircularly rounded at the apex and

slightly emarginate in the middle, juga longer than the tylus, contiguous

at the apex, margins reflexed, remotely ciliated ; buccule rather elevated,

higher posteriorly than anteriorly : first jomt of rostrum not extending

50 HE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

beyond the buccule posteriorly : antenne 5-jointed, first joint not reach-

ing the apex of the head: the lateral margins of the thorax ciliated :

scutellum broader than long, narrow at the apex: frena extended almost

to the apex of the scutellum : costal margin of the hemelytra remotely

ciliated, apical margin waved: prosternum longitudinally excavated :

feet robust, tibie spinose, first pair compressed, upper margin spinosely

pectinated (Stal). Signoret’s diagnosis slightly differs as he makes the

tylus and juga usually equal in length and bases his differentiation from

Aithus on the ostiolar canal having at the tip a free lobe, more or less

elevated, horn-shaped and more or less flattened on the sides.

44, CYDNUS VARIANS, Fabricius.

Cydnus varians, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 187 (1803): Sfal, En. Hem. v. p. 26

(1876) ; Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 155, t. 6, f. 92 (1882).

Aithus varians, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868).

Cydnus cyrtomenoides, Dohrn, Stettin Ent. Zeit. p. 40 (1860).

3, ¢. Black-piceous or piceous, basal margin of thorax and feet,

paler : membrane sordid whitish : tarsi piceous-whitish : head anteriorly

very finely and remotely punctulate: thorax and hemelytra distinctly

punctured. In stature like Athus indicus, Westw., but differs in its

much smaller size, head more obtuse, anteriorly very obsoletely and

remotely punctulate, tylus very slightly narrowed forwards, antennz

much shorter, ocelli situate nearer to the eyes, thorax more narrowed

anteriorly, punctuation on thorax, scutellum and hemelytra finer, first

pair of tibie with fewer spines but apparently longer and the venter

remotely sprinkled with fine, obsolete, small punctures (Stal). Long,

4; broad 24 mill.

Reported from Bengal, Bombay, Ceylon.

45. CyYpNUS ATERRIMUS, Forster.

Cimee aterrimus, Forster, Nov. Spec. Ins. p. 71 (1771).

Cimex niger, De Géer, Mém. iii, p. 269 (1773).

Cimex tristis, Fabr., Syst. Ent. p. 716 (1775) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 124 (1794).

Cydnus tristis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803) : Hahn, Wanz. Ins. i, p. 161,

t. 25, f. 83 (1831).

Brachypelta tristis, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 90 (1843).

Cydnus carbonarius, Fourcroy, Ent. Paris (1785) : sec. Sign.

Cydnus spinipes, Schranck, Enum. Ins. Austr. p. 275 (1781).

Brachypelta elevata, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Sci. Phil. p. 222 (1860) ; Cydnus id, Stal,

En. Hem. v, p. 20 (1876)

Var. (b). Cydnus sanguinicollis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803).

Var. (c). Cydnus brunnipennis, Fabr., 1. c. p. 185 (1803).

Brachypeltus aterrimus, Signoret, A, 8, E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 358, t. 9, £. 186 (1883.)

eet ee

1887. ] HK. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, dL

Cydnus aterrimus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 12 (1851) excl. syn. pt.; Walker, Cat

Het. i. p. 164 (1867) : Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 19 (1864) ; Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868) ;

En, Hem. v, p. 20 (1876).

Black, somewhat shining, densely and distinctly punctulate : mem-

brane whitish hyaline, margined black at the base: thorax in ¢ an-

teriorly intruded and slightly transversely elevated in the middle (Stdl.)

$, $, long, 9-13; broad 5-6 mill.

Var. b. has the antenne, and basal limbus of thorax yellow-cas-

taneous. ¢, long 12; broad, 6; mill.

Var. c. has the antenns, corium and clavus, yellow castanéous, the

corium and clavus infuscate at the base. o&, long, 9; broad 5 mill.

Oval, elongate, deep black, finely punctured: base of vertex, an-

terior disc of the pronotum, two basal angles of the scutellum, smooth,

the last a little elevated: beneath smooth, shining in the middle, the

sides more or less granulated or punctured : feet smooth, shining, some-

times of a lighter colour, femora with several rows of spinose hairs, an-

terior and middle pair with two spines at the tip: anterior tibis strong-

ly amplified, the end having eleven strong spines on the external side

and four on the internal side and at the tip, several others on the an-

terior and posterior disc: trochanters, rostrum and antenne, piceous.

Head longer than broad, margins much raised in front, without hairs on

the border and shining only those proceeding from the piliferous points on

the vertex and those anterior below the head which spring from each side of

the base of the rostrum: the tylus strongly inclosed by the juga: eyes

small, without a spine at the base: ocelli very small nearer to the eyes,

than to the median line: rostrum short, stout, scarcely extending be-

yond the anterior coxe, first joint entirely hidden by the rostral ridges

which are rather raised ; the second joint stouter, equal to the third, the

last one-third less than the preceding: first joint of the antenne short-

est, the third less than the rest, second, fourth and fifth almost equal :

anterior border of pronotum strongly emarginate and showing behind

the indentation an impression, very strong in the g and less so in the

¢: scutellum triangular, the side hardly shorter than the base, tip

angular: hemelytra with 1—3 hairs, external margin very narrow : mem-

brane almost as long as the corium and extending by one-fourth beyond

the abdomen, dull plates (plaques mates) with the angles rounded and

weakly grooved; the glossy parts and grooves closely punctured : ostiole

ending in a broad, tumid, smooth, shining plate with the posterior con-

vexity circular (Sign.). Long, 10—13 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, India: specimens from Hardwar

Ciew. P.).

Add perhaps

52 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

Cydnus nigritus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 123 (1794); Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 8.),

i, p. 147, t. 6, f, 85 (1882). Reported from China, Cochin-China, Europe.

Cydnus laticeps, Sign., 1. c. p. 162, t. 7, f. 98 (1882). Reported from Hong-

Kong.

Genus Gampsotes, Signoret.

A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 243 (1882).

Stenocoris and Gampsotes differ from the other genera of Cydnina

in the length of the rostrum which reaches the tip of the second seg-

ment of the abdomen. In Stenocoris, the third joint of the antennz

is much smaller than the second, and the 4-5 joints equal or almost so,

whilst the base of the second joint moves in a median groove on the

mesosternum. In Gampsotes, the second joint of the antenne is longer

than the third, the third is shorter than the fourth which itself is almost

as long as the second : the base of the second joint is free, crosier-shaped

and slender, further the first joint is only partly hidden by the rostral

ridges which leave the apical half of the joint free (S7gn.).

46. GAMPSOTES PARALLELUS, Signoret.

'Gampsotes parallelus, B.S. E. F. (68.), i, p. xxix (1881) : ii, p. 243, t. 8, £. 103

(1882).

Two and half times longer than broad, parallel, piceous: antenns

especially the joints, and the tarsi ferruginous; rostrum of a lighter

colour. Head longer than broad between the eyes, finely punctured, a

little ciliated : second joint of the antenns: hardly less long than the

third, fourth and fifth longest, the latter longer than the fourth: ros-

trum very long, reaching the third abdominal segment, second joint

arched and somewhat crosier-form at the base, third joint shortest,

equal to the first, the fourth slender and long, equal to the second :

pronotum strongly emarginate in front and punctured, except on the

anterior disc and at the posterior margin, weakly ciliated on the

sides: scutellum very long, rounded at the tip, much punctured, except

at the basal angles: hemelytra very long; membrane yellow hyaline,

extending slightly beyond the abdomen, with four obsolete veins ; corium

convex at the tip, much punctured, cubital portion with two almost

complete rows of points and a third smaller towards the scutellum: feet

comparatively short, normally ciliated and spinulose; anterior tibiee

much dilated: ostiolar canal ending in an irregular tuberculous lobe:

dull plates (plaques mates) occupying almost the entire meso- and meta-

thoracic space and weakly striated: abdomen very rough on the sides

and smooth in the middle (Sign.). Long, 53; broad, 2 mill.

Reported from India.

1887. } K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 53

Genus Macroscytus, Fieber.

Eur. Hem. p. 83, 362, (1861): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 19, 23 (1864) ; En. Hem.

v, p. 18 (1876): Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 465 (1882).

Body oval, depressed, ciliated with rare or very rare hairs: head

flat, semicircularly or somewhat obtusely rounded; juga and tylus of

equal length; bucculse continued through : antenne 5-jointed, moderate,

filiform, second and third joints somewhat equal, somewhat longer than

the basal: scutellum triangular, longer than broad, the frena continued

almost to the apex: corium longer than the scutellum, exterior apical

angle acute: prosternum longitudinally impressed : feet moderate, tibiz

slender, first pair somewhat compressed, upper margin pectinated with

remote spines, last femora beneath armed near the apex with a spine

or tooth. Closely allied to Mthus, Dallas, differs in having the body

very remotely ciliated, margin of the head always without small spines

and especially in its habit (Stal). Signoret makes the distinguishing

characters the large scutellum and especially the presence of a spine at

the tip of the posterior femora.

47. Macroscytus roveouus, Dallas.

Aithus foveolus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 113 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 157

(1847) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 25 (1876).

Macroscytus foveolus, Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 472, t. 12, £. 131 (1882).

$. Head rather small, with the anterior margin rounded, entire, the

juga not meeting beyond the tylus; pitchy brown, with the margins paler

and fringed with fine bristles: ocelli very large, red: thorax pitchy

brown, with the posterior margin castaneous, anterior margin with a

faint, finely punctured, transverse fovea; lateral margins finely and

thickly punctured, and fringed with long, stout, bristles: posterior

portion of the disc finely and sparingly punctured: scutellum pitchy

brown at the base, becoming castaneous-brown towards the apex, rather

strongly but sparingly punctured ; the tip with a distinct fovea. Cori-

aceous portion of the hemelytra bright castaneous-brown, thickly and

finely punctured; membrane brownish, semi-transparent : abdomen

beneath pitchy, very smooth, shining, with the disc impunctate, the sides

thickly and finely punctured: pectus pitchy, thickly and finely punc-

tured: anterior legs pitchy red ; four posterior pitchy, with the coxe

reddish ; all the tarsi ferruginous: rostrum pitchy red, with the apex

pitchy : antenne ferruginous, dusky towards the base (Dallas). Long,

BES mull.

Reported from N, India.

54 HK. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 1,

48. MAcROSCYTUS BRUNNEUS, Fabricius.

Cydnus brunneus, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803). Tanger.

Aithus brunneus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 149 (1867) excl. syn. Syria.

Cydnus prozimus, Ramb., Fauna Andal. p. 112 (1839). Spain.

Athus badius, Walker, Cat. Het. p. 159 (1867). India, Ceylon, N. China.

Var. (b.) thus opacus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A., Férh., p. 214 (1853) ; Macros-

cytus id, Hem. Afric. i, p. 26 (1864) ; En. Hem. v, p. 19 (1876). Caffraria.

Var. (c.) Cimex spinipes, Fabr., Spec. Ins. ii, p. 360 (1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p.

172 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 124 (1794). Cen. Africa.

Cydnus spinipes, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 186 (1803): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 25

(1876).

Macroscytus brunneus, Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 362 (1861) excl. syn. pt. ; Muls. and

Rey, Pun. Fran. ii, p. 32 (1866), Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p, 6 (1868): Sign. A. S. EH. F.

(6s.) ii, p. 477, t. 14, f. 136 (1882).

Stature and size of OC. aterrimus, Forster, but entirely brunneous

and more flat, thorax not retuse nor impressed with a median Stria:

antenne 5-jointed: feet spinose: last pair of femora inwardly dentate

(M. brunneus, Fabr.).

Oval: of a more or less deep brown; the varieties brunneus and

opacus, black and spinipes more or less finely punctured: corium some-

times glossy: rostrum, base of antenne and the tarsi, yellow. Head

rounded circularly in front; tylus as long as the juga which have 5-6

hairs along the margin: vertex scarcely carinate: ocelli approximate

to the eyes: rostrum reaching the tips of the intermediate coxze: two

first jomts of the antenne, yellow; the third shorter than the second,

the fourth and fifth the longest: pronotum convex in front, transversely

flattened without an impression; borders slightly margined and with

several hairs: scutellum long, reaching three-fourths of the abdomen,

angular at the tip which is sloped, convex at the base and on the sides,

very finely punctured on the disc: hemelytra almost flat, finely punc-

tured, the radial veins scarcely prominent, the marginal side with 3-6

piliferous points; membrane short, white, hyaline, veins clouded brown :

feet obscure, more or less deeply coloured, the tarsi yellow, all the

femora spinose beneath, the posterior femora with two stouter spines

at the tip which causes the posterior tibise to become somewhat distorted

at the base, this portion is reddish and glabrous: abdomen black and

smooth with some hairs on the margin: ostiolar canal grooved ; the tip

with two lobes having a broad irregular valvule in the posterior indenta-

tion; the dull plates (plaques mates) finely striated, the upper rounded

at the anterior angle. and between it and the mesosternal groove a

smooth space which extends to the level of the tip of the ostiolar canal.

In var. opacus, there is a weak punctuation in the smooth space of the

metasternum (Sign.). Long, 8; broad, 45 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, Asia: China, Ceylon, India.

1887, ] KR. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 55

49, Macroscyrus Expansus, Signoret.

A. S. EH. F. (6 s.), ii, p. 479, t. 14, f. 138 (1882).

Body oblong, oval, of a blackish-brown: rostrum, base and tip of

the antenne and the feet of a lighter colour: tarsi, yellow: hemelytra

light brown; finely punctured on the posterior disc of the pronotum,

the scutellum and the hemelytra. Tylus on a level with the juga which

have six hairs; vertex weakly furrowed: third joint of the antennz

shorter than the second: pronotum with 1LO—11 hairs on the lateral

margins ; behind the emargination the points are very obsolete: scutel-

lum smooth at the base, sparingly punctured on the disc, tip angular :

membrane hyaline ; abdomen smooth in the middle, with very fine small

strie, on the sides: the mesosternal dull plate (plaque mate) finely

striated, rounded at anterior angle, separated from the mesosternal

groove by a broad glossy band which is punctured and furnished with

small strive, that of the metasternum is finely striated and punctured :

the ostiolar canal ends in a two-lobed part of which the external lobe is

broadly dilated and there is a broad rounded valve in the indentation.

Possibly only a local variety of M. brunneus, Fabr., from which it differs

in its appearance but especially in the form of the tip of the ostiolar

canal which is here much dilated and is confused with the thickened fold

of the mesosternal groove (Sign.). Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from Bombay.

Genus Grotomus, Mulsant & Rey.

Pun, France, p. 34 (1866) ; Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.), iii, p. 33 (1883),

Differs from Cydnus in the absence of small spines on the head.

The rostrum is short, usually not extending beyond the intermediate

trochanters which distinguishes it from Gampsotes : the anterior border

of the pronotum is not margined which separates it from Pangeus:

the absence of the tumidity on the lateral angles of the disc of the

pronotum which conceals the real angle as in Macroscytus and the

posterior femora being spinose at the tip give sufficient characters for

distinguishing it. Moreover the ostiolar canal is terminated by a reni-

form or cornet-shaped lobe (Sign.).

50. Grotomus pramaus, Dallas.

Aithus, pygmeus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 120 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158

(1867); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 26 (1876).

Cydnus rarociliatus, Ellenr., Nat. Tijd. Ned. Ind., xxiv, p. 139, f. 7 (1862)

Vollen., Faun. Ent. Ind. Neerl. p. 18 (1868).

Cydnus pallidicornis, Vollen., 1. c., p. 17 (1868).

Cydnus apicalis, Horvath, Hem. Het. récoltés en Chine, p. 3 (1879).

56 HE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

Athus palliditarsus, Scott, Hem. Japan, Trans. Ent. Soc. iv, p. 309 (1880).

Geotomus jucundus, F. B. White, A. M. N. H. (4:8.) xx, p. 110 (1877).

Geotomus subtristis, F. B. White, l. c., p.111 (1877).

Geotomus ? minutus, Motsch., Sign., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. xvi, p. 650 (1880).

Geotomus pygmeus, Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 51, t. 3, £. 160 (1883).

?. Elongate-ovate, black, shining: head with the juga sparingly

punctured ; ocelli red; thorax smooth, somewhat quadrate, transverse,

with a short line of fine punctures close to the middle of the anterior

margin, a line of similar punctures across the middle, and a few scattered

punctures on the sides, scutellum long, rather thickly and finely punc-

tured, with the base impunctate. Coriaceous portion of the hemelytra

pitchy, very thickly and finely punctured, the punctures larger along

the veins; membrane whitish; body beneath, black; abdomen thickly

and finely punctured on the sides; the disc smooth: legs pitchy ; tarsi

pale orange; antenne pale brown, with the tips of the fourth and

fifth joints paler or testaceous (Dallas). Long, 31—4; broad, 13—2

mill.

Reported from India, Sumatra, Java, New Caledonia, Japan, China,

Hawaii.

51. GxotTomUS ELONGATUS, Herrich Schiffer.

Cydnus elongatus, Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 97, t. 27, f. 546 (1839).

Cydnus oblongus, Ramb., Fauna Andal. p. 115 (1839); Fieber, Hur. Hem. p. 364

(1861).

Aithus elongatus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 148 (1876).

Geotomus elongatus, Muls. and Rey, Pun. France, ii, p. 35, 38 (1866); Sign. A.

S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 212, t. 5, f. 176 (1883).

Body oblong, elongate, parallel on the sides: black-brown, corium

a little lighter: rostrum, antenne and feet, yellow-brown ; tarsi yellow :

punctured on the head, the posterior disc and the sides of the pronotum,

the scutellum (except the basal angles), and the hemelytra. Head

rounded in front, tylus as long as the juga and presenting two hairs at

the tip, the juga with 4—5 hairs: second joint of the antenne as long as

the third, the fourth and fifth longest: rostrum reaching the base of the

intermediate coxe: pronotum slightly impressed, punctured on the

posterior disc, also on the lateral margins and behind the anterior in-

dentation ; 7—8 piliferous points on the sides: scutellum long, punc-

tured, angular at the tip, witha longitudinal impression, basal angles

smooth: hemelytra punctured, a single piliferous point on the marginal

side: membrane white hyaline: abdomen black, smooth in the middle,

sides punctured: mesosternal plate extending to the lateral margin,

metasternal plate separated from the smooth space which has two rows

of dots, by an almost straight line, concave above, convex below : ostiolar

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. o7

canal very rough, narrow at the base, very broad at the tip which forms

a much rounded lobe presenting behind a strong excavation in which is

hidden the ostiole (Sign.). Long, 4; broad 2+ mill,

Reported from Europe, Asia, Africa.

52. GEOTOMUS ABDOMINALIS, Signoret.

A. S. E. F. (6 s.) iii, p. 219, t. 9, f. 184 (1883).

¢g. Oval, elongate: pitchy brown, the hemelytra of a lighter

colour. Head rounded in front; the tylus broader in the middle than

at the tip, as long as the juga and having two hairs at the tip, the juga

with five hairs on the margin: vertex finely punctured: the second

joint of the antenne longer than the third: rostrum reaching the level

of the intermediate coxe: pronotum strongly impressed in front behind

the anterior indentation and finely punctured in that space also on the

transverse line and along the lateral margins; the transverse groove,

absent in the middle, is visible on the sides below the piliferous points ;

lateral margins with five hairs: scutellum long, narrowly rounded at

the tip, finely punctured on its disc, basal angles smooth and very

convex: hemelytra punctured, corium more sparingly: membrane

slightly smoky, hyaline, projecting beyond the abdomen which is smooth

in the middle, strongly punctured on the sides: meso- and meta-sternum

without dull plates (plaques mates), and both sparingly but broadly

punctured : ostiolar canal, broad, short, ending in a broad ear or cornet

(Sign.). Long, 3}; broad, 2 mill.

Reported from India.

Genus CuiLocoris, Mayr.

Verh. Zool. Bot. Gess. Wien, xiv, p. 907 (1864); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 170

(1867): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Sign., A. S. E. F.(68.) iii, p. 517 (1883).

Includes Amnestoides, Sign., B. S. EH. F, (5 s.) ix, p. viii. (1880).

Margin of head with erect spinules: tylus as long as the juga:

eyes prominent, ocelli distinct : antenne 5-jointed, second joint scarcely

half as long as the third: margin of pronotum anteriorly and on both

sides, elevated ; scutellum short, triangular, reaching the base of the

fourth abdominal segment: odoriferous orifice with a long furrow, with

a rounded elevated lobe at the apex: first pair of tibie gradually

broader towards the apex, externally spinosely pectinated: tarsi in-

serted at the apex of the tibie (Mayr.)

53. CHILOCORIS NiITIDUS, Mayr.

Chilocoris nitidus, Mayr, Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gess. Wien, xiv, p. 907 (1864) : Walker

Cat. Het. i, p, 170 (1867); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc

p. 415 (1883) ; Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 518 (1883).

58 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

Shining, piceous-black: posterior margin of the pronotum, heme-

lytra, antenne, rostrum and feet, rufous castaneous: head strongly, pos-

terior part of pronotum and hemelytra finely, and the apex of scutellum,

punctured ; membrane hyaline: abdomen smooth (Mayr). Long, 5 mill.

Reported from Kashmir.

54, CHILOCORIS PICEUS, Sign.

A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 518, t. 15, £. 261 (1883).

Blackish-brown, lighter on the corium and on the lateral and pos-

terior margins of the pronotum. Head broad, eyes very stout; ocelli

nearer to the eyes than to the median line; vertex with a longitudinal

impression ; the border of the head, margined ; tylus broader in the

middle than towards the tip: pronotum strongly margined in front with

a longitudinal line and impressions ; anterior disc smooth, shining, not

punctured (except on the sides which are finely punctured), transverse

groove very distinct, with a line of dots; posterior disc weakly punc-

tured: seutellum blunt at the tip, sparingly punctured on the disc,

more so but more finely on the lateral margins: hemelytra strongly

punctured along the cubital veins with two rows of lines on the clavus,

the corium very finely punctured at the tip, almost smooth at the base :

membrane hyaline yellow: meso- and meta-sternum dull: ostiolar canal

very long but not extending beyond the margin, ending in a lobe trun~-

eated at the tip, rounded behind, with a median canal which disappears

towards the terminal lobe (Sign.). Long, 35; broad 12 mill.

Reported from India. Possibly same as preceding.

55. CHILOCORIS PARUMPUNCTATUS, Sign.

A. 8. E. F. (6 s.) iii, p. 520, t. 15, f, 202 (1883).

This species is distinguishable by the serrated margins of the

pronotum and of the base of the hemelytra from the teeth of which

issue hairs, nine on the pronotum and six on the hemelytra. Light

chestnut brown, shining, weakly punctured on the head; tylus very

convex and much amplified in the middle, narrow at the tip and on the

vertex much broader than the juga: pronotum strongly margined in

front, with 3—4 stout points behind the anterior indentation, the anterior

disc smooth, shining, longer than the posterior, very convex, and se-

parated from the latter by a strong punctured impression ; beyond the

groove on the posterior disc are some twelve stouter pomts and on the

groove on each side of the eyes, 3—4 stout points: scutellum blunt,

rounded at the tip, sparingly and strongly punctured on the disc, a

little more abundantly on the sides: hemelytra sparingly punctured

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 59

on the corium which is almost smooth, more abundantly along the

cubital suture, the clavus showing a complete line along the suture and

a half-line near the scutellum; a second line of punctures on the

external radial vein and a strong impunctate line, not extending beyond

the middle of the hemelytra, on the internal radial vein: membrane

hyaline, extending beyond the abdomen which is smooth and shining:

meso- and meta-sternum entirely dull: ostiolar canal very long, extending

beyond the mososternum, stout at the source; then narrowing and

ending in a rounded lobe which points backwards; in the middle, a

narrow groove gradually widened until it is lost in the rounded lobe

(Sign.). Long, 22; broad, 1 mill.

Reported from India.

Sec. II. Sentripus Signoret.

A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 26 (1881) ; iii, p. 521 (1883) :—Sehirida, Stal, Hem. Afric.

i. p. 27 (1864).

Without piliferous or setigerous points or dots on the vertex and

pronotum in front near the anterior margin and on the disc near the

transverse impression and above. ‘These characters are, however, so

weak and variable that Stal was probably right in sinking the divisions

into Cydnida and Sehirida made by him in 1864 and including the

whole as one sub-family of the Pentatomide in 1876 (En. Hem, v. p.

17, 1876).

Genus PeEttoxys, Signoret.

B.S. EH. F. (5 s.) x, p. xxxiii (1880); 1. c. (6 8.) iii. p. 522 (1883). Includes

Legnotus, Stal (nec Schiédte), Hem. Fabr. p. 7 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 22 (1876).

Scutellum short, sides almost equal at the base, tip acuminate ;

membrane very large, but not projecting beyond the abdomen: ros-

trum short, scarcely extending beyond the anterior feet: intermediate

femora ciliated and with four short spines at the tip; anterior tibia a

little dilated, the posterior tibie straight: ostiolar canal broad, long,

with an opening of one half its size (Sign.).

56. PELTOXYS BREVIPENNIS, Fabricius.

Cimex brevipennis, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 536 (1798).

Cydnus brevipennis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 187 (1803).

Aithus brevipennis, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158 (1867).

Legnotus brevipennis, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 8 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 22

(1876).

Peltoxys pubescens, Sign., B. 8. HE. F. (5 s.) X, p. xxxiii (1880).

Peltowys brevipennis, Sign., 1, c. (6 3.) iii, p. 522, t, 15, f, 203 (1888),

60 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 1,

¢. Black, shining, above and beneath very densely and distinctly

punctured : first joint of the antenne and the rostrum, piceous: tarsi

pale yellow piceous. Tylus remotely punctured towards the base, im-

punctate before the middle, transversely rugose: thorax in the middle

almost twice longer than the head, convex towards the sides, behind

the middle, and anteriorly transversely slightly depressed, somewhat

convex before the middle, this convex part somewhat depressed in the

middle, anteriorly somewhat sloped: clavus with two rows of punc- .

tures: corium in the interior part behind the middle with four rows

of punctures, towards the base, and on the exterior part sparsely punc-

tured : membrane fuscous, (Stal). Long, 43: broad, 2 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, India, Saigon.

Genus Tritomeacas, Amyot & Serville.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 92 (1843): Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 s.) iv, p. 50 (1884).

Second joint of the antenne much smaller than the third : plaques

mates of the episternums small : lobes of the head, unequal or equal which

causes the anterior margin to appear more or less emarginate: tylus

almost as long as the juga. Head slightly reflexed on the margins and

appearing impressed or more or less emarginate in front: pronotum ap-

pearing flattened in the margins although really possessing a marginal

ridge: median angles of the prosternum less pronounced than in the other

genera of this section and therefore the median groove is not so deep:

mesosternal ridge indistinct, metasternum smooth: ostiolar canal with

an ear-shaped small tongue very distinct, the dull plates (plaques mates)

weakly developed above and below the mesosternal groove (Sign.).

57. TRITOMEGAS BICOLOR, Linneus.

Cimex bicolor, Linnzeus, Faun. Suec., No. 936 (1761); Syst. Nat.; (ed. 18) p.

722 (1767); De Géer, Mem. iii, p. 268 (1773); Fabr., Syst. Rhyng., p. 176 (1803 :

Wolff, Icon. Cim. p. 63, t. 7, £. 69 (1801): Stoll, Pun., p. 126, t. 32, £. 224 (1788).

Cyduus bicolor, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. i, p. 192, t. 31, f. 99 (1831).

Cydnus nubilosa, Harris, Exp. Eng. Ins. 90, t. 26, f. 8 (1776).

Sehirus bicolor, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 129 (1851).

Tritomegas bicolor, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 98 (1843) Schlb. Mon.

Geoc. Fenn. p. 21 (1848): Sign., A. S. E. F. (6s), iv, p. 50, t. 2, £. 217 (1884).

More or less oval: bluish-black, shining, punctured, spotted

white; two irregular spots on the anterior angles of the pronotum,

two others at the external base of the hemelytra and two not so large

at the external angle of the corium: usually also two small white dots

at the external angle and at the base of the pronotum as in the type,

white: head indented in front, juga with a channeled rim: feet blu-

sh-brown, with a more or less broad white ring at the base of the tibie:

TO EE a

1887. | G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. 61

antenns brown, second joint shorter than the third, the latter some-

times twice as long as the former: dull plates (plaques mates) less

developed with some strong, deep points, especially in the mesosternal

angle: ostiolar canal very long, projecting beyond the transverse two-

thirds of the metasternum (Sign.). Long, 5-7; broad, 23-5 mill.

Common in Europe and Asia.

IV.—A second series of New Species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By

Grorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. 8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Calcutta.

[Received March 28rd ;—Read April 6th, 1887. ]

Since reading my paper before this Society ‘‘ on some new species

of Ficus from New Guinea,” in January last, I have received from the

distinguished botanist and explorer, Signor Beccari of Florence, materials

which enable me to describe seven additional new species from that

island. The whole of these species were collected either by Sig. Beccari

himself, or by his companion Count D’Albertis. These seven species

all belong to the third of the sub-groups defined in my paper just re-

ferred to, namely, the group characterised by having “ unisexual flowers,

the males and galls being in one set of receptacles and the fertile female

flowers alone occupying another set of receptacles.” In this group these

seven species are distributed amongst the sections Sycidium, Covellia,

Husyce, and Neomorphe, for the distinguishing characters of which I must

refer to the paper already mentioned,

SycIDIUM.

Ficus conspicabilis, King. A tree (?) the young branches and leaf-

buds covered with short deciduous yellow hairs; leaves broadly ovate or

elliptic, the apex acute or shortly acuminate, the edges entire; the base

broad, slightly unequal, sub-cordate, 7-nerved ; primary lateral nerves

about 6 pairs; secondary nerves sub-transverse, little curved; lower

surface pubescent especially on the midrib and nerves, reticulations

minute distinct ; upper surface minutely lepidote ; length of blade about

8 inches ; petiole ‘8 in.; stipules densely covered with long, yellow, silky

hairs. Receptacles large, shortly pedunculate, axillary, solitary, de-

pressed-turbinate, both base and apex very concave, the surface

wrinkled, rough, minutely tuberculate, deciduously hispid-tomentose ;

length from base to apex 1:1 in.; breadth 1:6 in.; umbilicus much

62 G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. [No. 1,

depressed, large, with numerous scales; basal bracts 3, broadly triangu-

lar ; pedicel ‘2 in. long, hispid ; female flowers sub-sessile or pedicellate,

perianth of three distinct dark-coloured pieces; ovary ovoid, smooth ;

style terminal, longer than the ovary in the sessile, shorter than the

ovary in the pedicellate flowers.

New Guinea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Beccari, P. P. No. 651.)

Ficus mespiloides, King. A tree; the young shoots with long, tawny,

adpressed, rather stiff hairs which are ultimately deciduous ; leaves hard

and rather harsh to the touch, sub-coriaceous, petiolate, elliptic, in-

equilateral, the apex shortly cuspidate ; the edges, entire, recurved; the

base narrowed, cordate or emarginate, sometimes oblique, 5 to 7-nerved ;

primary lateral nerves about 6 pairs, prominent beneath and minutely

adpressed-pubescent as is also the midrib; the rest of the under surface-

puberulous and obscurely and minutely tuberculate; upper surface

minutely lepidote, glabrous, rigid; length of blade 5 to 7 in.; petiole

scurfy and with a few scattered adpressed fulvous hairs; 4 in. long;

stipules ovate, acute, pilose externally, ‘4 in. long. Receptacles sessile,

axillary, solitary, sub-globose (the base and apex truncate), the surfaces

with many faint vertical ridges especially towards the apex, slightly

verrucose, when young scurfy pubescent, when mature nearly glabrous ;

1 in. long by 1:3 in. broad; the umbilicus large, wide, surrounded by a

rigid but in no way projecting annulus; basal bracts 3, leaving an annu-

lar scar where they fall off: fertile female flowers ellipsoid, rather flat,

smooth, the style long, terminal ; perianth of 3 lanceolate, dark-coloured,

free pieces ; male and gall flowers unknown.

New Guinea on Mount Arfak: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Beccari, P. P.

No. 962.)

CovELLtiA.

Ficus conora King. A tree, all the young parts softly pubescent,

the young branches pale-coloured; leaves petiolate, membranous, elon-

gate-lanceolate, slightly inequilateral, the apex acuminate, the edges

entire, the base narrowed, 3-nerved ; primary lateral nerves 5 to 8 pairs,

slightly prominent beneath and, like the midrib, tomentose; the rest

of the under surface pale in colour and (in the adult state) very shortly

hispid and minutely papillose (the papille white); upper surface co-

vered with very minute white dots but no hairs; length of blade 4 to 7

inches; petioles 35 in. long, tomentose ; stipules lanceolate, pubescent

externally, ‘6 in. long. Receptacles borne on long, thin, flexuose, leafless,

nearly glabrous, branches which issue from the base of the stem, soli-

tary, long pedunculate, turbinate, the apex very broad and depressed,

the sides faintly ridged, scurfy-pubescent, and with numerous flat

1887.] G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. 63

smooth warts, 1 in. across when ripe; umbilical scales large and thick ;

basal bracts none; peduncle thick, pubescent, bearing 3, small, broadly

triangular bracts at or below the middle, varying in length from ‘5 in.

to 1°25 in.; fertile female flowers pedicillate or sessile, the ovary sub-

globular, smooth; style elongate, subterminal; receptacular hairs few,.

pale, long: male and gall flowers unknown.

New Guinea, Ramoi: Beccari (Herb. Bece. P. P. No. 388).

Ternate, Acqui-Conora: Beccari.

The receptacles are often either partially or entirely covered by the

soil.

Ficus Arfakensis, King. A tree, the young shoots scurfy and softly

pubescent ; leaves petiolate, sub-coriaceous, lanceolate, acute, gradually

narrowed to the faintly 3-nerved base, edges entire; primary lateral

nerves 6 to 8 pairs, obsolete on the upper, prominent on the lower sur-

face, and like the midrib and secondary nerves adpressed pilose, the

rest of the lower surface minutely covered with white tubercles, sparse-

ly pilose; upper surface sparsely covered with adpressed whitish hairs :

length of blade 4°5 to 7 inches; petiole pilose, 6 in. long; stipules linear-

lanceolate, glabrous, nearly 1 inch loug. Receptacles borne on long,

ramous, slender branches which emerge from the base of the stem and

apparently creep on or beneath the surface of the ground, pedunculate,

ovoid, scabrid, slightly verrucose, °45 in across; umbilical scales nu-

merous, prominent; basal bracts 3, triangular.

Mount Arfak in New Guinea, at from 5000 to 7000 feet above the

sea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Bece. without number). ,

The receptacle-bearing branches often carry towards their extre-

mities small leaves and modified stipules.

Eusyce.

Ficus Comitis, King. Young branches glabrous; leaves mem-

branous, elliptic, the apex shortly and narrowly cuspidate, the base

broad, 3-nerved ; primary lateral nerves about 8 pairs, diverging from

the thick strong midrib at a wide angle, prominent on both surfaces

but especially so on the lower which is thickly dotted with minute

white tubercles; glabrous except on the midrib and primary nerves

which are densely and softly puberulous, reticulations minute, very

distinct: upper surface glabrous, thickly dotted with tubercles like

those on the under surface, but slightly larger; length of blade 4 to 6

inches; petiole from ‘75 in. to 1°75 in. Stipules lanceolate, °6 in. long.

Receptacles pedunculate, axillary, in pairs, sub-globose or sub-pyriform,

the umbilicus rather prominent, gradually narrowed to the peduncle,

adpressed-puberulous, slightly verrucose; about °25 in. across; basal

64 G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. [No. I,

bracts none; pedicel ‘3 in. long, bearing 3 minute bracteoles below its

middle.

New Guinea, Andai: D’Albertis (Herb. Beccari, P. Papuanae

No. 531).

This has been collected only by Count D’Albertis. Its affinities are

with F’. chartacea, Wall.

NEOMORPHBE.

Ficus grandis, King. A tree; the young branches deciduously

hispid-tomentose ; leaves large, membranous, petiolate, ovate-elliptic,

the apex acute, edges irregularly and coarsely crenate-dentate, the base

rounded, not cordate, 7-nerved (2 being minute) ; primary lateral nerves

about 8 pairs diverging from the midrib at rather an acute angle; the

under surface finely reticulate and with numerous minute white papillae,

rather softly and minutely pubescent especially on the midrib and

nerves; upper surface scabrous from rather minute sub-adpressed

hairs; length of blade 10 to 13 inches; petiole deeply channelled,

pubescent, rather stout, 2°5 to 3°5 inches long; stipules ovate-acumi-

nate, smooth inside, puberulous outside, about 12 inches long. Recep-

tacles on short, thick, multibracteate, tubercled, leafless branches from

the main stem, on long thin peduncles, depressed-globular or shortly

pyriform, the surface slightly verrucose and scurfy but without hairs,

red when ripe; 1'4in. long and 2 inches broad; the apex very broad,

flat, slightly depressed ; umbilical scales numerous, prominent; basal

bracts 3, large, ovate-triangular, acuminate, glabrous; peduncles

nearly 3 inches long: male flowers with 1 or 2 stamens ; anther ovate, on

a thick filament; perianth of 3; obcordate, inflated, hyaline, pieces:

gall flowers pedicillate or sessile, the style sub-terminal, perianth absent ;.

fertile female flowers unknown.

New Guinea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Becc. No. 601).

This vies with F. Roxburgh, in having the largest leaves and re-

ceptacles of any Asiatic member of the genus Ficus.

Ficus D’ Albertisii, King. A tree; the young branches with an-

nular swellings at the nodes, completely covered with closely adpressed,

minute, rusty, pubesence; leaves broadly ovate or elliptic, sometimes

obovate-elliptic, the apex acute, shortly cuspidate, the edges minutely

dentate or sub-entire ; base rounded, emarginate, or sub-cordate, some-

times unequal, 5-nerved; primary lateral nerves about 7 pairs; both

surfaces closely covered with very minute adpressed hairs, the upper

surface slightly harsh, the lower soft; length of blade about 9 inches,

petiole about 1‘5 in., pubescent, swollen at its insertion on the stem ;

stipules ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, adpressed-pubescent externally,

1887.] G.King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. 65

1:5 in. long. Receptacles in small clusters from leafless ebracteate

tubercles on the stem, pedunculate, pyriform, the sides with numer-

ous vertical ridges and clothed with short adpressed, apparently deci-

duous, scurfy pubescence; length 12 in., breadth 1 inch; the umbilicus

large, closed by 5 broad, rounded scales; basal bracts 3, ovate, decidu-

ous; peduncle stout, glabrous, *75 in. long; female flowers sessile or

pedicillate, slightly rugose, the style long, terminal, hairy: male and gall

flowers unknown.

Fly River, New Guinea, D’Albertis: (no number). Sumatra,

Beccari: (Herb. Beec. P..S. No. 736.)

V.—On some New Species of Ficus from Swmatra.—By Georee Kine,

M.B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent, Botante Garden, Calcutta.

[Received April 1st ;—Read April 6th, 1887.]

Amongst the collections of dried plants made by Mr. H, O. Forbes,

during the journey in Hastern Sumatra of which an account is given in

his interesting volume entitled, ‘A Naturalist’s Wanderings in the

Eastern Archipelago,’ I find four undescribed species. Three of these

belong to the section Covellia, and one to Husyce. They are as follows :—

CoveELiia.

Ficus brachiata, King. A tree, the young shoots adpressed-pilose :

leaves thinly coriaceous, inequilateral, elliptic-lanceolate, the apex acute

er shortly acuminate, the edges entire or sometimes irregularly and

- minutely undulate; base acute, obscurely 3-nerved ; lateral primary

nerves 8 to 10 pairs, sub-horizontal, rather prominent beneath and

adpressed-pubescent, as are the midrib and secondary nerves, the rest of

the lower surface puberulous or glabrous, the reticulations minute, indis-

tinct ; upper surface glabrous; length of blade 4 to 5 inches; petiole

°> in. long; stipules 1 in. long, glabrous. Receptacles borne on long

Jeafless, glabrous, very ramous. branches which issue from the stem near

the ground, pedunculate, turbinate, verrucose, puberulous, about °5 in.

across ; the umbilical scales numerous and prominent ; basal bracts 3,

broadly ovate; peduncle °35 in. long; male and gall flowers not seen :

fertile female flowers mostly sessile, without perianth, the style elongate,

terminal and,straight in young, lateral and curved in old, ovaries.

Mount Dempe, Eastern Sumatra, at elevations of about 4500 feet :

Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. No. 2313).

This approaches F’. Miguelit, but has smaller, narrower leaves; the

receptacles are also smaller and borne on much longer branches.

66 G. King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. [No. 1,

Ficus Forbesit, King. A tree, the young branches, petioles and

midribs of the leaves covered with dense short tawny tomemtum ; leaves

thickly membranous, shortly petiolate, elliptic or obovate-elliptic, the

apex suddenly and shortly cuspidate; gradually narrowed from above

the middle to the blunt, 3-nerved base; the edges entire; primary

lateral nerves 12 to 20 pairs, prominent on the lower surface as are the

midrib and straight transverse secondary nerves, the whole of the rest

of the lower surface sparsely covered with stellate tawny hairs; length

of blade 12 to 15 inches; petiole stout, -25 in. long. Receptacles in lax

umbels from long, leafless, glabrous, little divided branches which issue

from the stem near its base, pedunculate, globose, glabrous, ‘25 in.

across, slightly umbonate at the apex, the base constricted into a short

stalk at the junction of which with the peduncle proper are 3 ovate

acute bracts ; male and gall florets not seen; female flower without obvious

perianth ; ovary obovate, about half as long as the style.

Sumatra, Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. Forb. without number).

The receptacular branches ramify very little ; at their apices there

are whorls of stipule-tike, lanceolate, bracteoles. The stellate pubescence

is very peculiar. This species comes very near F’. ribes, Keinw., from

which it differs chiefly in its leaves. The female flowers of this

are exactly like those of F’. ribes. I have been able to find no male flowers,

and I think it probable that, like rzbes, this species is practically

dioecious, male flowers occurring only in the receptacles of certain indi-

vidual trees. The species is known only from Mr. Forbes’s specimens,

which were probably all collected from one tree.

Ficus dimorpha, King. A small tree, the young shoots deciduously

hispid-tomentose; leaves petiolate, sub-coriaceous, inequilateral,

elliptic or obovate-elliptic ; the apex acute, shortly cuspidate; the edges

rather remotely dentate ; the base rounded, slightly auricled on one side,

3-nerved, with an additional minute nerve on the auricled side ; primary

lateral nerves 6 or 7 pairs, not prominent; the under surface dull,

harshly pubescent, especially on the midrib and nerves, the reticulations

indistinct ; upper surface glabrous and shining; length of blade 4°5 to

6 inches ; petiole *5 to °75 in., pilose ; stipules ovate-lanceolate, slightly

pubescent externally, ‘7 in. long. Receptacles pedunculate, in small

fascicles from the stem and larger branches, of two forms (a) those

containing gall and male flowers which are pyriform, truncate at the

apex, gradually constricted at the base into a long, thin, stalk at the

union of which with the peduncle proper are 3 deciduous bracts,

wrinkled, verrucose, pubescent; total length 2°5 inches, of which the

stalk forms more than half; breadth at apex 1 inch, peduncle proper

5. in., male flowers numerous under the bracts of the mouth, stamen 1;

1887.] G. King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. 67

perianth of 3 concave pieces; gall flowers elongate, with a short, sub

terminal style; perianth 3-cleft; (6) those containing female flowers

which are turbinate, the apex concave and the umbilicus depressed, the

base constricted into a stalk “4 in. long, length 1 in., breadth 1:3 in., pe-

duncle proper ‘2 in. long; fertile female flowers pedicillate, the achene

ovate-rotund, perianth undivided or splitting irregularly.

Mount Dempe, in EHastern Sumatra, at an elevation of about 3000

feet ; Mr. H. O. Forbes, Herb. No. 2175.

The elongate receptacles occur mostly on the stem, the globular on

the branches. The former contain perfect male flowers, scales with

rudimentary anthers, and gall flowers: the latter perfect, fertilised,

female flowers.

Eusyce.

Ficus dumosa, King. A shrub 3 to 9 feet high ; leaves long-petiolate,

membranous, from ovate-elliptic, acuminate, (rarely sinuate) to palmate,

with from 3 to 5 deep acuminate lobes, edges of all the forms irregu-

larly dentate, the apices of the lobes cuspidate, base cordate or rounded,

sometimes sub-auriculate, 5 to 7-nerved ; upper surface scabrid-papillose,

each papilla bearing a stiff hair, the nerves tomentose, hispid; under

surface more sparsely hispid, hirsute on the nerves; lateral primary

nerves 5 to 6 pairs; reticulations distinct; length of blade 5 to 9 inch-

es; petioles slender, hispid, from 2 to 4°5 in. long; stipules lanceolate,

hispid at first, subsequently glabrous, about *8 inch long; receptacles

axillary, sessile, in pairs, depressed globose, with a small few-bracted

umbilicus, sparsely hispid when young, smooth, scarlet to lake red

when ripe, and from ‘5 to 1 in. across; basal bracts 3, minute,

ovate, spreading; male flowers on the receptacles with the gall

flowers and near the mouth only, the perianth of four broad dis-

tinct pieces, stamens 2 perfect, or sometimes only, perfect stamen with

a rudimentary pistil: gall flowers pedicillate or sub-sessile, the peri-

enth of 5 lanceolate, free pieces; ovary globose, smooth; style short

lateral, stigma infundibuliform ; fertile female flowers in distinct recep-

tacles, sub-sessile or pedicillate, perianth as in the gall flowers ; achene

obliquely ovoid, slightly viscid, minutely tuberculate, the style elongate,

lateral: stigma pyramidal.

Kaiser’s Peak, Mount Dempe, and other hills in Eastern Sumatra

from 2000 to 6000 feet, Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. No. 2291).

This is closely allied to F. alba, Reinw., but it is well distinct,

differing from typical alba by its larger receptacles, longer petiolate,

thinner, leaves, which are sparsely hispid on both surfaces and not tomen-

tose below. I have not been able to find male flowers,

68 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

V1I.—On the Mammals and Birds collected by Capratn CO. B. Yarn, ©.8. 1.

of the Afghan Boundary Commission.— By J. Scunty.

[Received May 30th ;—Read June 1st, 1887.]

Mr. Wood-Mason has asked me to contribute a paper-on the collec-

tion of mammals and birds made by Captain C. E. Yate in Northern

Afghanistan and presented by that officer to the Indian Museum; the

following notes are the result. The collection, I understand, was made

after the departure of the Naturalist of the Commission, so it may possi-

bly include some forms not secured by him, and doubtless additional

localities will now be made known for many of the species previously

obtained.

The collection contains 13 species of mammals and 110 species

of birds, those comprised in the first class being particularly interest-

ing. I have carefully examined every specimen entered in the follow-

ing lists, and the identifications are as accurate as I can make them

with the rather limited means of effecting comparisons. The localities

and dates are carefully entered by Captain Yate on every ticket and

most of the specimens of birds are sexed also; but I have found so

many errors in the sexing of the birds that I have thought it best to

omit this part of the record. When I havé noted the sex, I am respon-

sible for the entry.

Ihave to express my thanks to Mr. Wood-Mason for giving me

access to the collections under his charge atall sorts of unofficial hours,

for permitting me to take most of Captain Yate’s collection to my house

for identification, and for procuring for me from many quarters sundry

works for reference.

MAMMALIA.

1. ERinacrvs ALBULUS, Stoliczka.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, May 23.

2. Badghis, Herat.

This Hedgehog agrees well with typical examples of the species to

which I have referred it, from Yarkand. The fur on the whole lower

surface of the body is white, the head and cheeks are pale rufescent

fawn, the ears pale isabelline behind and white in front; the hands and

feet are brown above; with a few white hairs intermixed. There is no

nude area on the vertex ; the spines measure 0°8 to 0°9 inch and have two

dark and two pale bands, the tip beimg pale. Length of ear in front,

from orifice, 1°45; fore foot 0°85, with claws 1:02; hind foot 1.4, with

claws 1:53; tail 0°8. Teeth: ‘2 half the sizeof + 3, _c. has two fangs

(1887. | Birds from. Northern Afghanistan. 69

anterior and posterior, pm.1 two distinct fangs, pm. 2 three fangs, two

buccal and one palatine. H. albulus seems quite distinct from FH. awritus

with which I have compared it.

2. FELIS caupata (Gray).

1. Maimanab.

A flat skin, without skull. Nose to insertion of tail about 29°5 inches,

tail about 13, hairs at tip of tail 0°7, ear from orifice at front 2:2,

longest whisker 3°5, palma 3°2, planta 1-4. The ears are pointed, witha

small tuft of hair at the apex measuring about 0°25. The general co-

lour of the fur is, above, a pale yellowish grey with dusky streaks mainly

along the centre of the back from nape to root of tail. Below, the fur is

ereamy white with dusky spots showing through here and there. The

fur is soft and moderately long, grey at the base all over the body, then

isabelline, and, where dark markings appear on the surface, the tips of

the hairs are blackish. The head is grizzled grey, darker than the back,

_ the sides of the nose pale fulvous, the cheeks white. The ears are pale

isabelline behind, brown at the tips, and inside the hairs are whitish.

The limbs are pale yellowish grey in front, with faint dusky markings

near the body ; inside whitish except the plantar and palmar surfaces,

which are brownish black. Tail above on proximal half fulvous grey

with dusky dashes resembling the back, below whiter and almost free

from dark markings like the belly; rest of tail greyish white with four

black rings and a black tip linch long. This specimen is closer to F.

caudata than to any other species with which I am acquainted, but from

want of specimens for comparison, and in the absence of the skull, I~

cannot feel certain that the identification is correct.

3. Canis Lupus, Linn.

1, Afghan Turkistan.

A flat skin, without skull. Nose to root of tail 37°5 inches, tail 12,

hair at end of tail 2-5, ear from orifice in front 3:8. There is no black

on the ears or the hind limbs; the fore limbs have a narrow black

stripe down the front, ending about six inches above the point of the

toes. Down the middle line of the back and along the upper surface of

the tail the hairs are mainly black, and the tip of the tail is quite black.

4, VULPES MONTANA, Pearson.

1,2. Afghan Turkestan.

These are again two flat skins without skulls. From nose to root

of tail they measure about 29 and 31 inches, tail 15°5, hairs at end of

tail 2°5. The face is rufous with the usual dark patch below the eye,

70 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

the ears are wholly black behind, the ordinary dark cross on the shoul-

ders is present, and the tail tip is white. One skin has the greater por-

tion of the front of the fore limbs black ; in the other this part is rufous ;

in both specimens the underparts are grey. In the larger animal,

probably a male, the fur is much longer and softer, and the tail more

bushy than in the other ; and the claws, which in both are unusually large,

curved, and sharp-pointed, are more powerful. Both these skins can be

fairly matched in the large series of V. montana which I collected in

Gilgit, and to that species I accordingly refer them.

5. SPERMOPHILUS BACTRIANUS, sp. nov.

1. 9 Khamiab, Afghan Turkestan, June 12.

Ear conch rudimentary, soles of hind feet densely haired, tail short,

not longer than hind foot, hair on body harsh, very short, unicolor.

Head and body (from skin) 9°5 inches, tail 1°5, with hairs at end

included 2°2, fore foot without claws 1°25, hind foot without claws 2°25.

On the head and whole body above and below the hair is very short,

harsh, closely adpressed, and of the same colour throughout from

base to tip. Upper parts nearly uniform pale fawn, the head slightly

darker and more brown, and the rump more tinged with rufous; a pale

isabelline band, from nostril toeye. Tail like the ramp with a black

subterminal ring and pale fulvous tip. Edges of lips, chin, throat, and

whole lower surface, including inner aspect of limbs, creamy white.

Outer aspect of limbs bright fulvous ; upper surface of fore and hind

feet pale isabelline, below to root of digits covered with creamy white

hairs. The outer toe has a long pencil of whitish hair on its under sur-

face which exceeds the tip of the claw by about half aninch. The

vibrisse are long, fine, and mostly brown ; and a pencil of long glistening

white hairs grows below the chin. The claws are black with pale horny

tips. There are three pairs of mamme. The skull is imperfect behind

and its total length cannot be given ; the posterior end of the nasals

extends further back than the termination of the premaxille :—

Inch.

Greatest breadth of zygoma,.. es baslgaliogs

Breadth of brain case behind PO i Ho processes,... 0°78

ASSEN Ot MOBS |). bse Fakes sy Baoslds Weheies sx saasan potent eoame

Breadth Jeg UPS MATING, #4 vs rasks Seee eager es ows oda ae ae Om

. sy 9 - AAP ONG, 1, 0, cohen cess onseseler tovdieteseeeee eae

Premolar to symphysis of nin bow iwis Gt eRe Ba

Posterior margin of palate to InCisOrs, ........eceeeeeeee O'98

Breadth of palate between pm. 2, ‘de pdeinesneeoemaeey lO

Length of mandible, condyle to HPO hy Feige whey ee

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 71

From the characters already given for this souslik, it could not be

referred to any species of Spermophilus belonging to the section in

which the hind feet are not haired below, e.g., S. fulvus, S. rufescens,

S. erythrogenys, S. brevicauda, 8. mugosaricus, S. concolor, or 8. musicus.

Of the section having well-haired soles, S. eversmanni and allies are also

excluded by the length of the tail ; Middendorff gives the length of tail

in S. eversmanni as 4°2 inches, with terminal hairs 5°5. Of the short-

tailed sub-section, S. cztellus, S. dauricus, 8S. guttatus, S. eanthoprymnus,

and S. mongolicus are excluded for various, but good and sufficient, reasons

which to enumerate would be long. The only likely species that re-

mains is S. leptodactylus of Lichtenstein, and, to it, I was at first dis-

posed to refer the specimen collected by Captain Yate. The position of

Lichtenstein’s species is, in the first place, involved in doubt : it was dis-

tinctly described as having the hind feet haired below, but, according to

Brandt (Bull Acad. Sc. St. Petersburg IT, p. 359), Eversmann proved

to his satisfaction that 8. leptodactylus was the same species as S. fulvus,

which has the soles bare.. However this may be, I have carefully com-

pared Lichtenstein’s detailed description of his Citillus leptodactylus

(Saugethiere, Tab. XXXII.) with the specimen under notice and can

only come to the conclusion that the latter is perfectly distinct, even if

the question of hair on the soles be left out of consideration. In de-

‘scribing this species as new I have not overlooked Brandt’s caution

about the young of bare-soled sousliks having sometimes that part to-

lerably well covered with hairs.

6. GERBILLUS, sp.

1. 3 Balkh, Afghan Turkistan, July 4.

Head and body about 5:4, ear at front from orifice 0°6, fore-foot

0°38, with claws 0°45, hind foot 1:2, with claws 1:3. Fur long, fine, and

very soft. Bright rufous brown or fawn colour above, many of the hairs

black tipped, the basal parts of the hair leaden grey ; below the hairs

white throughout their length. Lars fairly well haired, fawn-coloured

behind with a white margin, in front with scanty white hairs at the

margins; whiskers white. Fore limbs white above and below, the palms

naked; hind feet isabelline above, with whitish hairs on the the soles,

including the toes, except part of the hinder portion of the tarsus. The

tail is imperfect, but its basal part for about 2°5 inches is coloured like

the back above, and is slightly paler below.

The upper incisors are well grooved, the enamel folds of the upper

molars are completely united in the middle, exactly as in G. hurriane,

and the hinder molar has not a vestige of any posterior talon—the

outline of the crown as seen from above being simply a narrow oval,

72 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

with the points of the oval buccal and palatine. The following are the

principal measurements of the skull :—

Inch.

Total longth, .....cccccocssccgnevvcccccasccssevesevevcnvessces LG

Breadth of zygomatic archy,....cccccosccsssccccsessesessese O'8D

af of brain-case at posterior root of zygoma,... 0°69

Length of palate to imcisors, ...s.scccssecsvesccesseevcesee 'O269

yy SE TRI ao Fa HUSK EN ves wad aes WC hien'se yaa Oaos ae

Mandible, condyle to sciaseeilinatta. Quaateoass 0°78

Although the upper molars agree best wath thee: of G. hurriane,

this specimen is quite different in character and colour of fur and in

shape of skull; neither can it be referred to G. erythrurus with which I

have compared it. It possibly represents a new species, but, as the

tail is imperfect, I do not propose a name for it.

7. Mus sacrrianus, Blyth.

1. g¢ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.

This specimen agrees fairly well with typical examples of M. bac-

trianus, but the tail is shorter than the head and body, though this is not

of importance in a skin. In comparing this specimen, I have had occa-

sion to examine many specimens of M. pachycercus Blanford, from

Yarkand, and I may note that that species is quite distinct from M. bac-

trianus and has been happily named.

8. ARVICOLA GUENTHERI, Danford and Alston.

1. Afghan Turkestan.

Head and body 4-4 inches, hind foot 0°77, ear at front 0'4. The

external form and colours agree well with the original description of

the species from Asia Minor (P. Z. S. 1880, p. 62), except that in this

specimen the rudimentary thumb of the forefoot has a small nail,

The pattern of the molar teeth is very similar to that of A. guenthert,

with the following aunts _—

In this specimen ~~ *has not the rudimentary 4th sheesh on the

inner side so prominent ; it is barely indicated. On m2: however, this

posterior inner angle is distinct and must be counted, although in the

original description above cited it is omitted. 5 has the posterior lobe

less prolonged backwards and tends less to form an angle on the out-

side than in the Asia Minor species. %, 1 too has the anterior lobe more

compressed laterally in the present specimen. The following table

exhibits the molar pattern according to the usual mode of counting :—

(1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 73

Spaces, External angles. Internal angles.

Paredes ; Peet 3 3

eee 4 3 tier ee

Se ecneans eons BS Mad oe

ae ae ee aed tree ys 5

~ ae 5 Bie i ace e

Btabhes.. Sire ROY SBM 3

9. ELLOBIUS INTERMEDIUS, sp. nov.

1. Bokun, Murghab, Herat, May 10,

2. Kila Wali, ditto ditto May 14.

3. Ditto dittc ditto May 26.

Head and body (from skins) 45 to 5 inches, tail 0°4 to 0°45, hind

foot 0°8 to 0:9, forefoot 0°55 to 0°67. Colour above, and on sides of head

below the zygomatic projection, bright pale yellowish red (or bright rust

colour). Head dark brown. Below greyish white throughout. Tail

pale fulvous, the terminal hairs at tip white. Fore and hind feet whit-

ish. Fur short (about 0°35 on hinder part of back), very soft and fine

dark grey or leaden at the base, except on centre of belly, where it is

white throughout its length. The bright colour of the upper surface

being due to the short pale coloured tips of the hair, any abrasion of

these gives the animal a dark leaden grey colour above.

Skull :— Inch. mm,

Breadth across hinder part of zygomatic arches,..... 1:05 27

- of interorbital GONBEVICTION, | elvdies eatleeve 2) 5'5

, of brain-pan behind iSieee comsthnbigt a:

PR COU, cco Sedadews Hoe! gideSeaek ea taaceiite? or ae Ee

Length from anterior molar ‘a INCISOLS, rece COA CIA

EPP OL WPPON MOLAM-SOTIES, 0 seo ted cecwsecansccacaacsscer OD 8

Meewor palate tO MCISONS, Cis. ievdecisscacaseccsceseas SOO 22°65

Breadth of palate between anterior molars, ......... ‘14 4

* Length of lower jaw, condyle to pe tegen ener ai ore Oo “Ze

5 Of lower molar Series, .......+600s Mesias Lilies 8°5

The nasals are shaped somewhat ate a wine-bottle bent in at the

sides, their external margins being nearly straight behind, then convex,

then strongly concave, and finally convex again at the front end; the

posterior ends are pointed, not truncated. The posterior ends of the

premaxille extend quite 3°5 mm. behind the ends of the nasals and the

game distance beyond the origin of the zygomatic arch. The zygomatic

aich is high throughout; the maxillary process does not reach the

74 J. Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

squamosal along the lower margin, a square process from the malar

interposing itself and forming the lower edge of the arch for a length of

15 mm.

The skull differs from that of H. fuscocapillus in having the nasal

portion shorter, the distance from anterior root of zygoma to symphysis

of premaxillaries being 15 mm. in LH. fuscocapillus against 12 mm. in the

present species ; the zygomatic arch is quite differently shaped, being

higher throughout, and the malar bone forms part of the lower margin,

while in H. fuscocapillus the maxillary and squamosal processes meet

along the lower margin, so as to exclude the malar; and the anterior

palatine foramina are much smaller and narrower.

From FE. talpinus, the skull of the present species differs completely

in the shape of the nasals and in the extension backwards of the end of

the premaxille ; the shape of the zygoma presents even a greater diver-

gence than from FE. fuscocapillus, but the arrangement of the bones in the

arch are closely similar in HL. talpinus and EH. intermedius ; the anterior

palatine foramina are very much smaller than in EH. talpinus, and there

are other differences which will be apparent on studying Mr. Blanford’s

very clear account of the contrast between the skulls of H. fuscocapillus

and LE. talpinus in J. A. 8. B., vol. L, pt. II, 1884, pp. 122 —123.

Teeth. The incisors are very long and pure china-white. The

molar pattern is as follows :—

External angles. Internal angles.

mm. 3 3

Mm. 2 3 9

*_3 3 * 2

ut sesh BAN hie: os

Cr eres ea Te ‘oacivewe $B

m, 3 3 8

m 1 ongd™— do not differ from the corresponding teeth in Z. fus-

cocapillus and EH. talpinus in any important particular. m 8 differs

markedly from the corresponding tooth in L. fuscocapillus and resembles

that of EH. talpinus in wanting a posterior lobe behind the hindmost

outer angle; both the internal angles too are less prominent in the

present species, the last angle being much rounded.

In ——. the anterior lobe is less developed than in HL. fuscocapillus,

but still there are 4 external and 5 internal angles, not 3 and 4 as in

E. talpinus.

1887.)

Birds from Northern Afghanistan.

The three species of Hllobius may be thus contrasted :—

E. talpinus.

1. Base

black.

2. Zygoma low, malar in-

terposed between maxil-

lary and squamosal pro-

cesses in lower margin.

of fur almost

3. Nasals convex exter-

nally.

4. Premaxille terminate

posteriorly opposite end

of nasals.

5. ™> has no posterior

lobe behind last outer

angle.

6. 57 angles 3—4.

E. intermedius.

1. Base of fur dark or

leaden grey.

2. Zygoma high through-

out, malar interposed be-

tween maxillary and

squamosal processes in

lower margin.

3. Nasals bottle-shaped, or

external margin alter-

nately convex and con-

cave.

4. Premaxille prolonged

behind hind end of na-

sals.

5. ™% has no posterior

lobe behind last outer

angle.

6.° | 7 angles 4—5 a

E. fuscocapillus.

1. Base of fur light grey.

2. Zygoma high in mid-

dle, maxillary and squa-

mosal processes alone

form lower margin.

3. Nasals bottle-shaped,

or external margin alter-

nately convex and con-

cave.

4, Premaxillz prolonged

behind hind end of na-

sals.

6: (2:2 hase: prominent

posterior lobe behind

last outer angle.

6. 37 angles 4—5.

For the comparison of the three specimens collected by Capt.

Yate, I have Mr. Blanford’s very full description of a skin and skull of

Ei. fuscocapillus (with figure of skull and teeth) in the paper before cited,

and three skins and a skull of the same species in the Indian Museum.

Ihave no specimen of ZH. talpinus for comparison, but Mr. Blanford

has so clearly and, Iam sure, accurately given the differences between

that form and FH. fuscocapillus that [ have no hesitation in deciding that

Capt. Yate’s specimen must be referred to a new species. The only

known locality for H. fuscocapillus is Quetta, and the Russian HL. talpinus

is recorded by Severtsoff from Western Turkestan ; so that the present

species is intermediate in its habitat, as well as in ils distinctive charac-

ters, between the two better known species of the genus. Severtsoff

calls his Turkestan specimens FH. talpinus, var. rufescens, and these may

prove to belong to the species I have described.

Capt. Yate notes on the ticket of one of the specimens, ‘ Hyes

scarcely visible ; caught by day.”

10. Lacomys RUFESCENS, Gray.

1. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, August 2.

2. Ditto ditto ditto, August 6.

The above two examples belonging to a well marked and well

known species need no extended notice; they agree perfectly with spe-

cimens collected by Blanford in Persia. The species was originally

described from a specimen obtained in Afghanistan.

76 J. Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

11. Lepvus tenmannt, Severt.

1. Hindu Kush, Afghan Turkistan.

This specimen is not in very good order, and I refer it rather doubt-

fully to the species described by Severtsoff (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

1876, “The Mammals of Turkistan”), with which on the whole it seems

to agree best. So many species of Asiatic hares have been described

which differ only in minute particulars as to make the task of identify-

ing a particular specimen difficult and uncertain; for the number of

nominal species probably greatly exceeds the constantly distinguishable:

forms. In the specimen obtained in the Hindu Kush the ears measure

from orifice in front about 4°3 inches, at back 4°8, greatest breadth about

2°7. The anterior external part of the ear is coloured like the back ; the

posterior part being pale isabelline, black at the tip and partly down the

posterior margin.

The general colour above is mixed pale fawn and black. The chin

and belly are white and the throat and breast pinkish isabel. The basal

part of the fur above and where coloured on the limbs and breast is

grey; on the belly the fur is white throughout its length.

The premaxillaries end behind on a level with the nasals, the latter

bones having the posterior end sloping inwards and the junction of

their outer and hinder margins slightly rounded.

The mandible from condyle to symphysis measures 3°4 inches.

12, GAZELLA SUBGUTTUROSA, Guldenst.

1. o& Badghis, Herat.

Head and horns, with skin of head preserved. . Band from between

horns to nostrils rufescent fawn. A pale isabelline band outside this

from level of inner canthus of eye to upper lip. A dark rufous fawn

stripe from eye-pits to commissure of lips. The ear measures about

5°25 inches in length from orifice to tip in front. The horns from the

base curve outwards, forwards, then backwards, and at the tips they

curve inwards and forwards. There are 20 ringson each horn, and these

end about 2°5 inches from the tips. The horns measure 14°7 inches

in length along the curve in front, the distance of the tips apart is 6°9,

the greatest distance apart 7'5, and the girth at the base about 4°5,

13. CERVUS CASHMIRIANUS, Falconer.

1. Banks of Oxus near Balkh, Afghan Turkistan.

This is a cast left antler of an elaphine stag about which Capt.

Yate gives the following information, ‘“ This was a horn from the banks

of the Oxus near Balkh and will help to determine the identity of the

1887. | Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 77

deer found in the jungles along that river.” The antler is not perfect,

as the beam is broken above the royal, so that the form of the crown

cannot be ascertained ; the following are the measurements :—

Inches.

Length from burr to broken end of beam along curve inside, 17°8

Sry. OF DROW Title, ADOUL, cc... .cascecescce tes cesesdsenapdveteveers 0

GE Oe MG, ADOWU, civare dencvsccdssevispersvausqivecvesenser 0h

= of royal tine along curve, about, iiciseessereseessesuee FE

5, of beam above upper angle of royal,........0.cercscesees 69

Viewed in front, the beam is nearly straight (though of course in-

clined outwards) as far as the royal, where it begms to curve inwards.

Viewed from the outer side, it curves slightly back from the bez and

forwards to the origin of the royal ; above the royal, it curves gently

back and then forwards and inwards. The brow tine is straight and

directed somewhat upwards: the much longer bez is directed outwards

and upwards, and towards its tip it has a slight curve inwards; the

royalis directed first outwards, then it curves at about 3 inches from

the beam strongly upwards and inwards, the point being well inside

the line of the broken end of the beam. Without measurement, the bez

looks longer than the royal, and the middles of the bez and brow tines,

measured. along the middle line of the beam, are 2°5 inches apart, or

from upper margin of brow to lower margin of bez at junction with

beam about 1°7 inches.

It is quite clear I think that this antler agrees better with that of

C. cashmirianus than with that of any other deer to which it could be

referred. It is quite distinct from C. maral, as figured by Sclater in Trans.

Zool. Soc., Vol. VII. I may mention that Mr. Wood-Mason, who examin-

_ed this horn before I saw it, came to the conclusion that it must be

referred to C. cashmirianus. Of course the evidence of such a fragment

is not conclusive proof that the stag of the Oxus basin is really identical

with the Kashmir species; complete specimens are necessary for the

settlement of that point.

AVES.

1, Circus cyanevs, (Linn.).

1. ¢ Zulfikar, Badghis, Herat, November 25.

2. o Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 1.

3. @ Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 13.

4, o& Maruchak, ditto ditto March 10.

The males are in immature plumage ; one is noted as having the

iris yellow. A female, not adult, had the irides dark brown.

78 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

2. Crocus macrurus, (Gmel.).

1. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.

Adult, wing 13:7, iris yellow.

3. Crrcus cINeRACEUS, (Mont.).

1. o& Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 17.

In adult plumage, but with chestnut streaks on belly and flanks.

4. CIRCUS @RUGINOSUS, (Linn.).

1. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 12.

2. o& Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, April 16.

3. § Kila Wali, ditto ditto, May 18.

5. SCELOSPIZIAS BADIUS, (Gmel.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 13.

In immature plumage; wing 8°75 inches, tail 5:6, tarsus 1°52,

mid toe s. uw. 1:32; seven bars on the tail.

6. AccIPITER NisuS, (Linn.).

1. Hauz-i-Khan, Badghis, Herat, December 6.

In rather dark plumage; four bands on tail; wing 9°4 inches, tail

7, tarsus 2°35, mid toe 16. The specimen is marked male on the ticket,

and, if correctly sexed, may be referable to subspecies A. melaschistus.

7. Buovseo rrrox, (Gmel.).

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Mainmanah, January 27.

Zig Mainmanah,

3. @ Chahar Shamba, ditto. February 4.

4, ¢ Kara Bel, ditto. March 10.

In all, the tarsi are scutellate in front, the bare portion measuring

from 1°8 to 2 inches; the males have the wings 15°9 and 16°5 and the

females, 17°L and 17°8; in the four specimens, the tarsi measure 3:2 to

3°3 and the mid toe 1°6 to 1°6.

8. Mitvus micrans, (Bodd.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.

2. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 9.

3. Ditto ditto ditto, April 9.

The wings measure 17 and 18 inches.

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 79

' 9. TINNUNCULUS ALAUDARIUS, (Linn.).

1. Jan. 21; 2. Feb. 4; 3. Feb. 7; Chahar Shamba, Maimanah.

10. TinnuncuLus cencuris, (Naum.).

ite

Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 21.

Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 9.

These two specimens are alike ; the wing coverts are mostly rufous,

and there are a few small black spots on the abdomen and lower flanks.

Wing 9 and 8°9 inches, tail 5°6 and 5°75, tarsus 1°23 and 1°25.

11. Asio orus, (Linn.).

1. Kara Baba, Maimanah, March 10.

12. Carine BACTRIANA, (Hutton).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 25.

2. Ditto ditto ditto, February 4.

13. Merops Apraster, Linn.

1, 2, 3, 4 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 29 to May 1.

5, Minar Shadian, Afghan Turkistan.

No. 5 is a young bird with the back green, but the throat coloured

as in the adult.

14. CoractaAs GaRRULA, Linn.

1, 2, 3 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 30 and May 1.

4. Min Darakht, ditto, June l,

15. CAPRIMULGUS EUROPAUS, Linn.

1, 2, Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 12.

3. Afghan Turkistan.

The pale eastern form separated as C. unwini.

No. 3 has rufous

bars on the wing where 1 and 2 have large white spots.

16. CypseLus apus, (Linn.).

1. Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 12.

2. Ditto ditto ditto ditto, April 17.

3. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat May 13.

17. CyPsELUS MELBA, (Linn.).

1. Murghab, Herat.

Wing 8°5 inches, tail 3°35.

80 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

18. Upvura Epops, Linn.

1. Maimanah Chul, March 6.

19. JiANIUS PH@NICUROIDES, Severt.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 20.

2. Khwaja Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.

3, 4, Darband-i-Kil Rekhta ditto ditto, May 18. .

5. Maruchak, Badghis, ditto, May 18.

All these specimens fall under section B of the rufous-tailed

shrikes as characterised by me in the Ibis, 1881, p 433. Nos. 3 and 4

are in full adult plumage, having the head very rufous, the bill, the

whole lores, and the post-ocular stripe black, and the lower surface of

the body white. Nos. 1, 2 and 5 are in immature plumage with bars on

the breast, but the head is distinctly darker than the back. In all, the

second primary is either intermediate in length to the fifth and sixth, or

equals the sixth. In all stages this species seems to me readily distin-

guishable from LZ. isabellinus, Hempr. and Ebr.

20. ERryTHROSTERNA PARVA, (Bechst.).

1, ¢ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 29.

21. Pratincona caprata, (Linn.).

1. o& Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 19.

2. o& Karawal Khana ditto ditto, April 9.

a oS Ditto ditto ditto, April 19.

4. § Kila Wali, Murghab ditto, May 18.

22. PRATINCOLA MAURA, (Pallas).

1, 2, Kara Baba, Maimanah, March 6.

3. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 18.

4, Ditto ditto ditto, March 24, 4

5. Khwajeh Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.

G6. Karasval Khana, Badghis, ditto, April . 9.

93. SyiviA AFFINIS, Blyth.

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.

2. Ditto ditto, May 1.

24. SyiviA MINUSCULA, Hume.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 13.

1887.) Birds from Northern Afghahistan. 81

25. SyLvIA MYSTACEA, Ménétr.

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.

2. Jalaiar, Maimanah, June 2.

This is the species well described and figured by Blanford in his

‘ Zoology of Eastern Persia’ under the name of Sylvia rubescens. Its

occurrence in the localities above cited is of much interest, as the distri.

bution of the species is thereby considerably extended to both north and

east of its previously known range.

26. SyLvVIA FAMILIARIS, Ménétr.

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.

2, Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, ditto ditto, May 18.

27. Hyponais pALLiIpA, (Hemp and Ehr.).

1. Jalaiar, Maimanah, June 2.

2. Ditto.

28. Hypouais rama, (Sykes.).

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.

2. Ditto ditto, May 13. ©

3. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, ditto ditto, May 18.

29. ACROCEPHALUS STENTOREUS, (Hempr, and Ehr.).

1, 2, Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 15,

30. Crrria ceTt1, (Marm.),

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 20.

ae Ditto ditto, February 22.

31. MervuLa vuiearis, Selby.

1. g Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 2.

Brn? Ditto ditto, February 12.

These examples belong to subspecies M. maxima, the male having

the wing 5°6 inches and the female, 5°25.

32. Merv.a atricuLaris, (Temm.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 25.

2,3. Ditto ditto, January 28.

4, - Ditto ditto, February 22.

5. Ditto ditto, April 4.,

2 and 3 have the lores, chin, throat, and breast quite black,

J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammats and

33. CYANECULA sUECICA, (Linn.).

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, Mareh 18.

2. Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, March 24.

3. Ditto ditto ditto, April 9.

4, Yedikul, Maimanah, May 31.

34, MontTicoLa cyanus, (Linn.).

1. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab Herat, May 18.

2. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 12.

3. Ditto ditto, Sept. 1.

Nos. 2 and 3 are in immature plumage.

35. RUTICILLA. RUFIVENTRIS, (Vieill.).

1. Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, October 8.

In female plumage.

36. RUTICILLA ERYTHRONOTA, (Eversm.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, March 3.

2. Andkhui, Maroh 20.

37. SaxicoLA morio, Hemp. and Ehr.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 18.

2. Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, April ip

3. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 9.

No. 3 is a nestling.

38. SAXICOLA OPISTHOLEUCA, Strickland.

1, Maruchak, Badghis. Herat, March 20,

39. SAXICOLA DESERTI, Temm..,

1. Maruchak, Murghat, Herat, March 19.

[No. I,

An adult male, wing 3°55 inches, black on lateral rectrices 1°7 ;

white edge on inner web of primaries not extending to shaft of feathers.

Second primary intermediate in length to fifth and sixth.

40, SaXICOLA FINSCHII, Heng].

1, Kara Bala, Maimanah, March 14,

41. SAxICOLA ISABELLINA, Riipp.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.

2, cs ditto, April 17,

3. Khwaja Gogirdak,

The black on the lateral tail feathers measures 0'95 inch.

1887.] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 83

42. CINCLUS ASIATICUS, Bechst.

Ly’) -dskar; Afghan Turkistan, Oct. 5.

2&3 Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, Oct. 8.

No. 1 isa grey, spotted, young bird.

43. Hirunpo rustica, Linn.

1. 2, Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 12.

44. CoTyLE RIPARIA, (Linn.).

1. Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 14,

45. CoryLE RUPESTRIS, (Scop.).

1. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18.

46. 'TROGLODYTES PARVULUS, Koch.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 26.

2. Ditto ditto, January 28.

3. Ditte ditto, February 1.

Rather deeply coloured wrens, reddish brown above, the throat

grey, and the general barring not so prominent as in T. nipalensis.

47. Sirra syrraca, Ehr.

1. 2. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18.

The wings measure 3°45 and 3°4 inches, tail 2°15, tarsus 1 and cul-

men 1 and 1:02.

48, Moracitia apa, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, December 15,

2. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, March 3.

3. Ditto ditto, April 4.

49, Moracinta MELANOPE, Pall. |

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.

50. BupyTEs MELANOCEPHALA, (Licht.).

1. g Khwaja Gogirdak, Murghab, Herat, Mar. 27.

This example is in full spring plumage.

51. Bupyres citReoua, (Pall.).

1,2, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28,

84,

J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

52. ANTHUS BLAKISTONI, Swinhoe.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 3.

2. Ditto ditto, _ February 7.

3. Ditto ditto, February 8.

4,5. Ditto ditto, Februsry 22.

53. ANTHUS ROSACEUS, Hodgs.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 10.

In winter plumage.

54. ALAUDA GuTTATA, Brooks.

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat.

Wing 3°6 inches, culmen 0°65, hind claw 0°5. Tertials 0°6 short of

longest primary, breast finely streaked.

5d. ALAUDA CRISTATA, Linn.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 4.

2. Ditto ditto, January 26.

The wings measure 45 and 4'0 inches, culmen 0°85 and 0°75.

56. CALANDRELLA BRACHYDACTYLA, (Leisl.).

1,2 Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 17.

3. Khwajah Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.

57. MBLANOCORYPHA BIMACULATA, (Ménétr.).

1, 2,3. Hauz-i-Khan, Murghab, Herat, Dec. 12. |

58. CARDUELIS CANICEPS, (Vig.).

1. Andkhui, March

59. ERYTHROSPIZA OBSOLETA, (Licht.).

1, 2, Khwajah Gogirdak, Murghab, Herat, March 27,

Both examples have the bill black.

60. Passer montanus, Linn.

Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 29.

61. Passer 1npicus, Jard and Selby.

1, 2,3, 4. g Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 15.

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 85

62. PassER HISPANIOLENSIS, Temm.

1. Kara Bel, Maimanah, March 10,

2. Yulla Chashma, Murghab, Herat, March 10.

3,4, Khwajah Gogirdak, ditto, ditto, March 27.

5.6, Karawal Khana, ditto, ditto, April 12.

No. 5 is a young bird.

63. EMBERIZA PYRRHULOIDES, Pall.

| ae Maimanah.

2. ¢ Chahar Shamba, ditto, February 1.

64, EmprrizA SCH@NICLUS, Linn.

1. | @ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 20.

2, ay Oo Ditto ditto, March 3.

4, @ Kara Bel, ~ ditto, «, March 10.

5, _$ Gulla Chashma, Murghab(Herat) March 10.

65. EmBeriza FucaTa, Pall.

1. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 17.

In immature plumage with dark rufous patches appearing on

breast. The feet are very pale and the claws pale horny.

66. HuspizA LUTEOLA, (Sparrm.).

1,2, #@ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.

a) 2 Ditto ditto, April 30.

4. 9 Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 12.

5. of juv. ditto ditto, May 13.

67. Corvus FRUGILEGUS, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 19.

2. Ditto ditto, March 23.

68. Corvus moNEDULA, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.

2 Ditto ditto, March 21.

3. Karawal Khana, ditto, April 15.

4. Maruchak, ditto, Dec. 25.

69. Pica rustica, (Scop.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 3.

2. Ditto ditto, February 7.

70. Srurnus vuLtGaris, (Linn.).

1. Chahar Shamba, February 11.

86 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

71. STURNUS POLTARATSKYI, Finsch.

1,2 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 11.

3. Ditto ditto, February 14.

72. Pastor noseus, (Linn.).

1, 2, Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 14.

73. CoLUMBA INTERMEDIA, Strickland.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 22.

74, CoLUMBA EVERSMANNI, Bonap.

1. Min Darakht, Maimanah, June I.

75. TURTUR AURITUS, Gray.

1. Chilik, Afghan Turkistan, July 2.

76. PTreEROCLES ALCHATA, (Linn.).

1.2 #@ Kham-i-ab, Afghan Turkistan, June 18.

Bi dO An ditto

77. PHASIANUS PRINCIPALIS, Sclater.

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 10.

2. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 10.

38.. oc Ditto ditto, March 20.

4. 2 Ditto ditto, March 26.

5. 2 Ditto ditto, Dec. 25.

This fine pheasant has lately been described as new, from specimens

obtained in the basin of the Murghab river by officers of the Afghan

Boundary Commission. It is very like Phasianus shawi of Hastern

Turkistan, but is fairly distinguishable from it by apparently constant

characters. I have examined some half dozen males of this pheasant,

and I note that the variation between individuals is very small; one,

however (No 1) above has a distinct wash of green on the rump and

upper tail coverts, and a small snow white spot on one side of the hind-

neck, marking the position of a demi-collar. On the characters and dis-

tribution of P. principalis, P. shawt, and other allies of P. colchicus, Mr.

Seebohin’s interesting paper in the Ibis for April 1887, p. 168 may be

consulted.

78. THTRAOGALLUS HIMALAYENSIS (Gray).

1, Dhap Darah, Hindu Kush, Turkistan, Oct. 7,

1887.]

79.

80.

81.

82.

83.

84,

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

Birds from Northern Afghanistan.

Corunix communis, Bonn.

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.

2. 2 Karawal Khana, Murghab Herat, April 19.

3. & Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, May 6.

AQGIALITES CURONICA, Gmel.

1, 2, Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 10.

CHETTUSIA VILLOT#&I, (Audouin).

1, 2, Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

VANELLUS CRISTATUS, Meyer.

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 11.

SCOLOPAX RUSTICULA, (Linn.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 3.

GALLINAGO soLiTaRiIA, Hodgs.

1. Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, October 8.

GALLINAGO scoLoPactNnus, Bonap.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 5.

MAcHETES PUGNAX, (Linn.).

1. #@ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 19,

a © Ditto ditto April 4.

ToTaNus OcHROPUS, (Linn.),

1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 14.

TRINGOIDES HYPOLEUCUS, (Linn.).

1, Darband-i-Kel Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18,

2. Maruchak ditto ditto, May 22.

HIMANTOPUS CANDIDUS, Bonn.

1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan

2, Kham-i-ab, ditto ditto, June 12,

OTIS TETRAX, Linn,

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 12.

2, Chaman-i-Bed, Badghis, ditto Dec.

RALuus Aquaticus, Linn.

1, Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, Dec. 23.

92,

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and Birds, Sc.

PoRZANA MARUETTA, Leach.

1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April Be

2. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 30.

PoRZANA BAILLONI, (Vieill.).

1, 2 Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 24.

CREX PRATENSIS, Bechst.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, May 7.

FunicaA ATRA, Linn.

1.. Andkhui, March

LARUS RIDIBUNDUS, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.

STERNA ANGLICA, Mont.

1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan.

2. Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

Sterna MinutA, Linn.

1. Kham-i-ab, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

PHALACROCORAX CARBO, (Linn.).

1. & Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 19.

A fine example in full breeding plumage.

100.

101.

102.

103.

104.

ANAS STREPERA, Linn.

1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 16,

ANAS ANGUsTIROSTRIs Ménétr.

1. Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12,

ANAS CREECA, Linn.

1. &# Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Jan. 25.

2. 9

ANAS PENELOPE, Linn.

1. & Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 15.

Funiauta cristata, (Linn.).

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 20.

[No. I,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 89

105. Funiauna nyroca, (Giild.).

1. &@ 2% Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, March 5.

E> Maruchak, Badghis, ditto, March 16,

106, CianGuLa GLaucion, (Linn.).

1. @ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah Feb. 12.

2, Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 15.

2 ae Ditto ditto, March 20.

107. ErisMATuRA LEUCOCEPHALA, Scop.

1. Maruchak, Afghan Turkistan, March 21.

108. Mercus auspetius, (Linn.).

1. g& Adult, Maimanah, Feb. 10.

2. g jno. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 12.

he: se Ditto ditto, Feb. 17.

No. 1 is in fine black and white plumage.

109. TaporRNA VULPANSER, Flem.

1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, Feb.

110. Casarca Rutica, Pall.

1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 10.

VII.—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak.—By Groras

Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S8., Superintendent of the Royal Botanic

Garden, Calcutta.

[Received 29th March 1887 ;—Read 4th May 1887.]

Prior to the date of the punitive expedition which was despatched

to Perak some years ago, that province was practically an unknown

country. One of the results of the expedition just mentioned was the

location in the state of a British Resident. And as the office of Resident

has, fortunately for the interests of science and civilization, been held,

almost from its first institution, by Sir Hugh Low, we are now in pos-

session of the materials for obtaining some knowledge of its natural

history. During the past few years considerable botanical collections

have been accumulated by the Rev. Father Scortechini (now, alas! no

more) who collected on behalf of the Perak Government, and by Mr.

H. H. Kunstler, who collected for the Calcutta Botanic Garden. From

the materials brought together by these gentlemen and which have come

90 G. Kinge—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

into my hands, I propose to draw up, as time permits, lists of species al-

ready described, together with descriptions of any which appear to be new.

And I now begin the series by an enumeration of the species of Loran-

thus indigenous to the province.

The list which follows contains in all twenty-five species, of which

eleven are described for the first time. At the end of the list I have

appended descriptions of two new Sumatran species collected by Mr.

H.O. Forbes. The genus being rather large and polymorphic, it has been

divided into sections. In the following enumeration, I follow the

sectional divisions adopted, in their Genera Plantarum, by Sir J. D.

Hooker and and the late Mr. Bentham.

Section I. EvLORANTHUS.

1. DZ. Lobbit, Hook. fil. Flora Brit. India, V, 204.

The commonest species in the province ; growing on trees of various

species, at elevations of from 500 to 4000 feet ; found also in Penang and

apparently also in Borneo. This species approaches very closely the

Sumatran species L. awanthus, Korth.

Section II. PH@NICANTHEMUM.

2. DL. pulcher, DC. Prod. ITV, 295; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V,

205; DL. speciosus, Wall. Cat. 518; L. coccineus, Hook. Bot. Mise. t.

58; Dendrophthoe pulcher, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, pt. 1, 821.

Common ; but scarcely ascending so high as the last. This varies

greatly as to the breadth of its leaves which in some plants is as much

as 3 inches, while in others it is barely 1 inch. Found also in Penang,

and represented in Tenasserim by the closely allied species L. Parishit,

Hook. fil., and in Java by L. Lyndenianus, Zoll.

3. L. pentapetalus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I, 553, Hd. Carey and Wallich,

II, 290.; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V. 206; DC. Prod. IV, 295; Wall.

Pl. As. Rar. iti, t. 225, and Cat. 503; Kurz For. Flora Burmah, ii, 322 ;

Griff. Notulae, IV, 617, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t. 624, 625; Korth. Verhand,

Loranth. 66; Blume FI. Javae Loranth. 39, t. 14 and 23 A.; Phan.

pentapetalum, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, p. 823: Dendrophthoe penta-

petala, G. Don. Syst. ii, 419.

This is not very common in the province. It is a widely distribut-

ed species, being found in India from Nepal, along the outer and lower

Himalaya, to Sikkim ; thence through Assam, the Khasia Hills, Chitta-

gong, to Burmah: it extends also to the Andamans, Penang, Malacca,

Banka, Java, Sumatra, Borneo, and probably to other islands of the

Malayan Archipelago. Sir J.D. Hooker reduces to this species L

polycarpus, Wall, Cat. 540, and L. erythrostachys, Wall. MSS.

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 91

4, It. coccineus, Jack in Mal. Mise. I, 8; Hook. Bot. Mise. i, 278 ;

Hook, fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 206; Roxb. Fl. Ind. Ed. Carey and Wall. ii,

215; DC. Prod. IV, 296; Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 68 ; Griff. Notul. IV,

620, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t. 626. LD. racemiferus, Wall. Cat. 539; Pha-

nicanthemum coccineum and Bennetianum, Miq. FI. Ind. Bat. I, pt. 1.

825, 826; Dendrophthoe coccinea, G. Don. Syst. ii, 419.

At low elevations: not common in the province: is found also in

Pegu, Tavoy, Malacca, Singapore, and Penang, and extends to India

(Cachar) and to some of the islands of the Malayan Archipelago.

Section III. HetTERANTHUSs.

5. Di. heteranthus, Wall. Cat. 537; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 208 ;

DC. Prod. V. 306; L. eleutheropetalus, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng.

1871, ii, 64, and For. Flora Burmah, ii, 321; Dendrophthoe macrocalyz,

Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I. Pt. 1, 821.

Found in this province only in Laroot.. This species extends as

far northwards as Chittagong, where it was once collected by Mr.

Lister. Wallich and Brandis found itin Burmah. Southward it ex-

tends to Java and Borneo.

6. Li. crassipetalus, nov. spec. Glabrous in all its parts, except the

bracteoles and calyx-tube which are puberulous; branchlets thick,

striate, polished, the bark dark coloured ; leaves coriaceous, rigid, petio-

late, scattered, broadly ovate-oblong, rarely ovate-elliptic ; apex obtuse ;

base attenuate ; shining on the upper, dull on the lower, surface ; nerves

invisible when fresh, obscure when dry, midrib slightly prominent:

length of blade 1-5 to 2 in. (in the ovate-elliptic leaves as much as 2°5 in.) ;

breadth about 1 inch, rarely 1°5 in.; petiole ‘25 in. long, stout; racemes

longer than the leaves, stout, rigid, erect, axillary, sparsely many-flowered ;

pedicel thick, :15 in. long, bearing at its apex a single broad, cochleate,

bract, bracteole 0; calyx-tube cylindric, the limb wide-spreading, trun-

cate, cup-shaped ; corolla straight, narrowly conical, petals, 5, thick,

distinct to their bases, smooth and yellowish externally, ridged and of a

bright red internally, ‘75 in. long; anthers linear, half as long as the

petals, basifixed : style filiform, stigma minute.

Perak, on Gunong Idjou. Scortechini, Nos. 363 and 521.

7. lL. productus, nov. spec. Quite glabrous ; branches long, straight,

strongly 4-angled, slightly flattened especially at the nodes, the bark

polished and dark in colour; leaves coriaceous, petiolate, opposite,

elliptic-lanceolate or ovate-oblong, gradually narrowed to the sub-acute

or obtuse apex, narrowed rather suddenly to the petiole at the base ;

nerves obscure even when dry, midrib slightly prominent; length of

blade 3°5 in. to 5 in.; breadth 1°5 in. to nearly 2 in. ; petiole about ‘5 in.

92 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

long; flowers crowded in small, sessile, axillary clusters; bract 0 ;

bracteoles cohering into a short, cylindric, obscurely 2 to 4-crenate tube

which, in the unfertilised flower, envelopes the whole of the calyx

except its limb; calyx-tube shorter than the cylindric, truncate limb ;

petals 4, distinct, fleshy, linear, *35 in. long, retlexed from about the

middle; anthers linear, basifixed, nearly as long as the filaments, curved

when mature; style shorter than the petals; stigma small, truncate ;

fruit ‘3 in. in diameter, globular, smooth, crowned by the rather long

cylindric calyx-limb and enveloped at its base by the persistent brac-

teolar cup.

Perak, at elevations of from 3000 to 3600 feet; Scortechini, Nos.

391 and 581; Kunstler (King’s collector) No. 3240.

A remarkable species ; with long, slender, polished branches which

are almost black when dry. From the flower-bearing axils there often

arise short, leaf-and-flower-bearing branches ; and as the leaves on these

(in herbarium specimens): usually fall off, they assume the appearance

of long-peduncled cymes. This is clearly a Heteranthus ; but it does

not quite conform to the definition of that section given by Mr. Bentham

and Sir J. D. Hooker in their Gen. Plantar. (111, 208), inasmuch as there

is no bract present, and there are bracteoles which form a cup almost

entirely enveloping the calyx in the flower, and persisting even in the

ripe fruit.

I have named this species from the length of its branches.

Section IV. CrcLhaNnrHus.

8. LL. scurrula, Linn. var. obtecta, Kurz For. Fl. Burm. ii, 3)9;

Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 209: ZL. obtectus, Wall. Cat. 534: Z. concavi-

folius, Griff. Notul. IV, 615.

Very common at low elevations; Scortechini, Nos. 3110, 4210.

The typical form of this species occurs throughout the whole of

British India; its other varieties, as defined in the Flora of British

India, viz., bengalensis, laevigata, and graciliflora having each a more

circumscribed distribution.

9. LL. ferrugineus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I, 551, ii, 188; DC. Prod. IV,

299; Wall.. Cat. 500; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V. 210; Jack in Mal.

Mise. i, 9, and in Hook, Bot. Mise. i, 279, t. 59; Dendrophthoe ferruginea,

G. Don Gen. Syst. iii, 420 ; Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 812.

Not uncommon at low elevations ; Scotechini, Nos. 630b, 2099.

Very common in Malacca, Singapore, and Penang: found also by

Kurz in lower Burmah. Distributed also in Sumatra and Java. A

specimen in the Calcutta Herbarium and named by him L. Oortianus

Korth, is the same as this: and, if Junghuhn’s identification is correct,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 93

Korthal’s name, as being the older, must supplant Roxburgh’s. Den-

drophthoe ignea, Scheff. from Banka, according to the specimen in

the Calcutta collection, is also the same as this. J. Schultesii, BL, (FI.

Jay. Loranth, t. 2) appears to me referable to LZ. scurrula, Linn. rather

than to this.

10. LD. Malaccensis, Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. India, V, 210.

On high trees, at elevations of from 3000 to 4000 feet. King’s

Collector (Kunstler) No. 6286: found also at Malacca by Griffith.

Section V. DeENDROPHTHOR.

ll. ZL. grandifrons, nov. spec. Young branches rather thin, terete,

little swollen at the nodes, the bark dark-coloured, lenticillate: leaves

sub-opposite or alternate, rarely exactly opposite, coriaceous, petiolate,

broadly ovate or ovate-oblong, the apex sub-acute, the base rounded or

emarginate ; main nerves 4 to 6 pairs, ascending, prominent (as is the

midrib) especially on the lower surface; both surfaces dull, sparsely

pulverulent ; length of blade 5 to 8 inches, breadth 3 in. to 4°5 in.;

petiole “6 in. to 1 inch: the whole inflorescence covered with minute

pulverulent, sub-deciduous, tomentum ; racemes solitary, axillary, or from

the older leafless branches, woody, erect, or slightly curved, 2°5 in.

long, about 30-flowered, pedicels short; bract® small, thick, clawed ;

calyx-tube cylindric, inflated at the base, the limb much longer than the

short, sub-globose, ovary, 5 or 6 toothed; corolla-tube 3 inches long,

cylindrical, 5 or 6-striate, slightly inflated towards the limb; lobes of

limb ‘5 in. long, reflexed, linear; anthers basifixed, linear, about ha!f

as long as the lobes; style filiform, a little longer than the stamens;

stigma small, sub-globose.

In the low country, not very common. Scortechinit, No. 926;

Kunstler, Nos. 786 and 2067. Found also in the Lampongs, in Sumatra,

on trees by the edge of heavy forest. H.O. Forbes, No. 1665.

When young the whole exterior of the corolla is tomentose like the

calyx, but when fully expanded it occasionally becomes sub-glabrous.

The base of the corolla is whitish; the upper part pink. In advanced

bud some of the corollas are constricted at the apex and inflated towards

the middle; but when fully expanded the corolla is tubular, gradually

widening towards the mouth. This fine species comes near pentandrus

as to technical characters: but in general appearance it somewhat

resembles L. longiflorus, Desr. It is, however, well distinct from the

latter by its differently shaped, more distinctly nerved leaves; and

by its more erect, rigid, and scurfy inflorescence.

12. LZ. pentandrus, Linn. Mant. 63; Bl. Bijdr. 661; Hook. fil. FI.

Brit. Ind. V, 216; DC. Prod. IV, 305; Kurz For. Fl. Burmah, II, 320;

94 G. King—QOn the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

Wall. Cat. 514: Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 80; Blume FI. Javae, Loranth.

33, t. 10: L. farinosus, Desr. in Lamk. Encycl. iii, 597; Roxb. Fl. Ind.

Kd. Carey and Wall. ii, 221; Griff. Notul. IV, 616, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t.

620, f. 1, 2; Dendrophthoe pentandra and farinosa, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I;

pt. 1, 818, 819; Hlytranthe farinosa, G. Don. Gen. Syst. IV, 427.

Very common in all parts of the province at low elevations (Kunstler,

Nos. 4931, 7538, 7767; Scortechini, No. 605); distributed northwards

through Burmah and Chittagong as far as Sylhet, and southwards in the

Malayan Peninsula and Archipelago generally. Sir J. D. Hooker reduces

to this species L. rigidus, contractus, and Finlaysonianus, Wall. Cat.

Nos. 531, 6864, and 6871.

13. L. Scortechinii, nov. spec. Glabrous, the young branches thick,

terete, scarcely swollen at the nodes, the bark reddish; leaves coria-

ceous, petiolate, in verticels of about 6, oblong-lanceolate or oblong-

elliptic, the apex shortly caudate-acuminate, the base attenuate ; mid-

rib prominent on both surfaces, nerves invisible in fresh, obscure in

dry, specimens, about 15 pairs, sub-horizontal; length of blade 7 to 8

inches; breadth 2°25 to nearly 3 inches; petioles stout, 1:25 in. ;

racemes with a thick, pitted, woody axis little more than 1°5 in. long,

axillary; flowers numerous, crowded; bract minute, cochleate, clawed;

calyx tube cylindric, the limb irregularly dentate ; corolla curved, tubu-

lar, slightly expanded upwards and 6-angled near its junction with the

6-cleft limb; lobes of limb linear, slightly expanded at the base, about

a fifth of the length of the tube; anthers linear, obtuse, about half as

long as the lobes; style as long as the stamens; stigma globose,

small; corolla tube 4 in. long, limb 1 inch.

At elevations under 1000 feet, not common: Sortechini, No. 900;

Kunstler (King’s collector), No. 6020.

This is a fine species, and is distinguished amongst Asiatic Dendro-

pthoes by its large, verticillate leaves. The corolla is of a pale yellow,

the lobes of the limb being tinged with green: the stigma is red.

14. L. Duthieanus, nov. spec. Young shoots terete, not swollen

at the nodes, bark pale pinkish, sparsely lenticellate; axis of inflores-

cence and bracts minutely pubescent ; other parts quite glabrous; leaves

coriaceous, alternate opposite or in verticels of 3, petiolate, oblong-elliptic

or elliptic-lanceolate with sub-acute apex and attenuate base, midrib

and nerves invisible in the fresh, slightly visible in dry, specimens ;

length of blade 2°5 to 3 inches, breadth °75 in. to 1 in., petiole ‘4 in.

long ; racemes slender, axillary, shortly pedunculate, about 6-flowered ;

bract small, cochleate, clawed; bracteoles 0; calyx-tube cylindric, the

limb, short, truncate, waved; corolla tubular, bright red in colour,

curved, inflated upwards, constricted at the base and at the apex when in

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 99

bud, 6-striate, limb about one third of the length of the tube ; the lobes

6, linear, sub-spathulate, thickened at the tips, reflexed ; anther linear,

about half as long as the lobes, basifixed ; style filiform, as long as the

stamens ; stigma small, globular.

Collected only once by the late Father Scortechini, the exact loca-

lity being unknown.

A species allied to curvatus, Bl., but with a hexamerous, glabrous

corolla, which is moreover wider and of a different colour from that of

curvatus ; also with narrower and more irregularly disposed leaves than

in that species. Named after Mr. J. F. Duthie, Superintendent of the

Botanic Garden, Saharunpore.

Section VI. LoxaANnTHERA.

15. L. speciosus, Bl. Fl. Jav. Loranth. 15, t. 20, and 23 fig. C.

Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 822.; L. coccineus, Reinw. MSS. (not of

Jack) Bl. Bijdr. 664; L. Reinwardtianus, Schult. Syst. DC. Prod. LY,

706: L. lorantherus, DC. 1. c. p. 316.

Apparently not common in the Province ; Scortechini, No. 1328 ;

on the banks of the Kinta river (Kunstler, No. 767.) There isa single

specimen in the Calcutta Herbarium from Malacca. The species is

found in Sumatra (Forbes No. 3234a) and in Java.

Section VII. Macrosouen.

a. longiflorae.

16. Z. formosus, Bl. Bijdr. 664 and Fl. Jav. Loranth. t. 15; DC.

Prod. IV, 297; Kurz For. Flora Burmah ii, 317; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind.

V, 220; Macrosolen formosus, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 827; Hly-

tranthe formosa, G. Don Gen. Syst. 111, 426.

At elevations of from 3000 to 4000 feet, Kunstler, Nos. 2170 and

6264: found also in Java, and, according to a single leaf specimen in

the Calcutta Herbarium (Griffith, No. 2729), also in Burmah.

17. L. Kunstlert, nov. spec. Quite glabrous ; young branches stout,

terete, the bark pale; leaves coriaceous, sub-sessile, opposite, ovate-

oblong, gradually narrowed to the sub-acuminate apex, the base rounded,

not cordate ; midrib and nerves prominent on both surfaces (when dry)

but especially on the lower; primary lateral nerves about 6 pairs,

secondary about 8 pairs; length of blade 8 to 10 inches, breadth 3 in.

to 4°5 in.; petiole very stout, about ‘15 in. long; racemes very short,

from the axils of the leaves and also from the old wood; bracteoles 3,

minute, broad, united by their bases; calyx-tube cylindric, smooth, the

limb truncate, slightly wavy; corolla clavate and boldly 6-angled in bud,

96 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. I,

slightly curved, tubular, inflated at the base of the limb, lobes of the

limb 6, reflexed, sub-spathulate, keeled externally, the tips thickened ;

anthers half as long as the lobes, linear, basifixed, with a slight process

at the union with the filament ; style filiform, as long as the stamens;

stigma truncate; berry ‘5 in. long, ovoid, bright yellow at first, black

when ripe; length of corolla-tube 2°5 in., of limb ‘6 in.

At elevations under 500 feet, H. H. Kunstler (King’s collector),

Nos. 2669, 2760, 6009, 8460.

This comes near L. formosus, Bl., but has much larger leaves, which

have rounded (not acute) bases as in that species. The corolla also

differs. Mr. Kunstler describes this as a very handsome species, the tube

of the corolla being of a rich yellow, the hmb bright green externally

and dark red inside. Itis a large species, plants of it often reaching 8

to 10 feet in length.

18. LZ. dianthus, King and Scort. MSS. Quite glabrous, the young

shoots terete, thin, scarcely swollen at the nodes, the bark pale; leaves

thinly coriaceous, entire, shortly petiolate, opposite, exactly lanceolate

rarely ovate-lanceolate, the apex acuminate ; midrib and primary nerves

slightly visible when fresh, rather distinct when dry ; length of blade 3 in.

to 5 in., breadth ‘75 in. to 2°5 in.; petioles slender, ‘2 in. long; cymes

axillary, sessile, 2-flowered ; bracts at base of cyme 2, decussate, ovate-

acute; bracteoles of the individual flowers united into a short, thick

annulus which surrounds the base of the flower; calyx-tube smooth,

cylindric, the limb short, truncate; corolla narrowly tubular, inflated

and boldly 6-angled just under the limb, clavate in bud; limb with 6

twisted, reflexed, oblanceolate or sub-spathulate lobes which are keeled

and inflated at the base; anthers basifixed, linear, one-third of the

length of the lobes of the limb; style filiform, as long as the stamens ;

stigma small, capitate: fruit globular, smooth, ‘5 in. in diam., crowned

by the calyx-limb ; length of corolla tube 2°5 in.; of limb °75 in.

At elevations under 500 feet; Scortechini, Nos. 76 and 604a;

King’s Collector, Nos. 1870, 6446.

This species comes near formosus, Bl., from which the sessile, 2-

flowered cymes, single, decussate pair of bracts, the annulus formed of

the united bracteoles, and the globular berry are the best characters to

distinguish it. This also must be near JL. meluitangensis, Korth., of

which I have seen no specimen. The tube of the corolla of this species

is described as scarlet, and the lobes of the limb as green, with purple

edges and a pale line along the anterior surface. The late Father

Scortechini left a drawing of this species, to which I have added the

details. Heleft no MSS. name for the species, but, from a note on

the drawing, he appears to have considered it to be L. formosus, Bl. or

near it.

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 97

19. ZL. evenius, Bl. Fl. Javae Loranth. t. 16; D. avenis, Bl. Bijdr.

663.; Korthals Verhand. Loranth. 85; DC. Prod. IV, 397; Hlytranthe

avenis, G. Don. Syst. 11, 426.

Found only once in Perak by Father Scortechini: extends also to

Sumatra.

20. L. platyphylius, nov. spec. Quite glabrous. Young branches

4-angled ; leaves opposite or sub-opposite, thinly coriaceous, subsessile,

broadly ovate-rotund or sub-orbicular, edges entire or unequally and’

remotely crenate, the apex obtuse, the base cordate; primary lateral

nerves about 4 pairs, curving, somewhat distinct on both surfaces, the

midrib rather prominent; length and breadth of blade about 4°5 in. ;

petiole less than ‘15 in. long, stout; racemes very short, axillary, about

4-flowered ; bract single, bracteoles minute, coalescing into a sinuate-

edged cup less than a quarter of the length of the cylindrical, truncate,

calyx-tube ; corolla large, curved, tubular, expanding slightly upwards,

6-angled and inflated below the apex, clavate when in bud; limb 6-

cleft, the lobes spreading, linear-lanceolate or sub-spathulate, blunt and

inflexed at the tips, each with 2 ridges on the inner surface, inflated

and keeled at the base; filaments adherent to the tube; anthers linear,

basifixed ; tube of corolla 3°5 in. long; limb ‘8 in.; style filiform, as

long as the stamens; stigma small, sub-capitate ; fruit unknown.

Found only once by Scortechini, who has not noted the exact

locality.

A species recognisable at once amongst the Asiatic species of Ma-

crosolen by its large sub-sessile, nearly orbicular leaves.

b. racemulosae.

21. DZ. ampullaceus, Roxb. FI. Ind. I, 552, ii, 189, and Ed. Carey and

Wall. ii, 209 ; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 220; DC. Prod. IV, 296 ; Kurz

For. Fl. Burm. u, 316; Wall. Cat. 502. DZ. swb-umbellatus, Bl. Bijdr.

662 and FJ. Jav. Loranth. t.18; ZL. sphaerocarpus, Bl. Bijdr. 661 and

Fl. Jay. Loranth. t.17; DC. Prod. IV, 297; Macrosolen pallens, sphae-

rocarpus and oleioides, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. i, Pt. 1, 830, 831; Hlytranthe

spheeroidea, Don. Gard. Dict. IV, 127. |

On Ulu Bubong, at elevations from 500 to 1000 feet: Kunstler,

Nos. 7866 and 10697. This species, as limited by Sir J. D. Hooker

in his Flora of British India, is distributed from Bengal, Assam, and the

Khasia Hills to Penang, Malacca, and Singapore. I agree with Hooker

in considering it as probably a mere form of ZL. globosus, Roxb.; and,

if this view be correct, the synonymy of globosus should be reduced

here. The Wallichian species pallens (Cat. 523), carinulatus (529),

sub-globusus (538), olerfolius, (524), viridiflorus, (512), are all forms

of the same widely distributed and therefore variable plant.

98 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

22. L. Lowi, nov. spec. Glabrous everywhere, except the peduncles,

pedicels, and bracteoles, which are puberulous ; young shoots thin, terete,

slightly swollen at the nodes, the bark pale brown; leaves rigid, co-

riaceous, ovate-lanceolate, or elliptic-lanceolate, gradually tapering to

either end, the apex acute or acuminate, the edges recurved when dry ;

nerves invisible, midrib visible only on the pale, dull, under surface ;

length of blade 1°5 in. to 2in.; breadth ‘6 in., rarely *8 inch.; petiole stout,

"15 in.; racemes umbellate, in clusters of 1 to 3, in the axils of the

leaves, on short pedicels, 2 to 4-flowered; bract and bracteoles minute,

broadly ovate, acute, the latter united by their bases into a3-toothed

cup: calyx tubular, smooth, the limb very short, truncate, waved;

corolla about 1 in. long, the tube slightly curved, 6-angled and slightly

inflated at the junction withthe limb; lobes of the limb sub-spathulate,

thickened at the apex, reflexed, about a third as long as the tube;

anthers about a third as long as the lobes, linear; style filiform, nearly

as long as the stamens; stigma small, sub-globular.

Found only once in the province (by Fr. Scortechini) and the

exact locality not noted.

A species, in the texture of leaves and in inflorescence, approaching

L. retusus, Jack; but very distinct from that and from the other

Malayan species of Macrosolen. Named in honour of Sir Hugh Low,

British Resident in Perak.

Section VIII. ELyrrantHe.

23. L. albidus, Bl. Bijdr. 665, and Fl. Jav. Loranth. (sub Hlytranthe)

t. 22; Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 87; DC. Prod. IV, 299; Hook. fil.

Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 222; L. lecucosiphon, Griff., Notul. IV, 623, and Ic. PI.

Asiat. t. 619-623: Hlytranthe albida, Miq. FI. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 832.

Not common ; Scortechini, Nos. 428 and 626. This extends north-

wards to lower Burmah, and southwards to Malacca, Java, Sumatra, and

Borneo.

Section IX. LEPIOSTEGERES.

24, DL. Beccarwi, nov. species. Glabrous; the younger branches

quadrangular (at least when dry), the older branches terete; leaves on

rather long petioles, opposite or sub-opposite, thinly coriaceous, entire,

from ovate-lanceolate or ovate-oblong to sub-orbicular, very variable

even on the same plant, the apex sub-acute or obtuse, the base cuneate

or rounded, midrib prominent, especially on the under surface; primary

nerves about 6 pairs, slightly visible on the under surface (when dry) ;

length of blade 3°5 in. to .5in., breadth 1°5 in. to nearly 3 in. ; petiole

‘75 in, to 1:25 in. long ; capitula from the old wood, 20 to 30-flowered,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 99

sessile, sub-globose when young, afterwards strobiliform and much elon-

gate; the bracts large, numerous, imbricate, coloured, from oblong to

semi-orbicular, obtuse, the inner 2 to 3 inches long, the outer gradually

shorter, all empty ; calyx short, cylindric, truncate; corolla, 3 to 3:5 in.

long, the tube splitting into 6, very narrow, linear segments which are

united for about ‘5 in. at the base, and then again slightly just below

the twisted, reflexed, linear, obtuse segments of the limb; anthers

linear, pointed, basifixed, *5 in. long: style filiform; stigma small,

rounded, exserted slightly beyond the anthers ; fruit sub-angular, globose,

‘3 in. in diam.

Rare in the province; occurring at elevations under 2000 feet.

Scortechini, 1208; King’s Collector, Nos. 5793 and 7956. Found also in

Borneo by Sig. Beccari (Herb. Becc. P. B. 1171).

This is the finest of all the Asiatic species of Loranthus. The enor-

mous bracts are of a pale red colour; the tube of the corolla is of a

deep claret purple, while the reflexed limbis yellow. The whole in-

florescence is about 6 inches long and forms a most striking object.

25. Loranthus Kingii, Scortechini MSS. Young branches pale,

terete, swollen at the nodes, slightly lenticillate when young, otherwise

quite smooth; leaves coriaceous, petiolate, opposite, exactly ovate-

lanceolate, smooth and with the nerves invisible on both surfaces, the

midrib prominent below ; length of blade 3 in.; breadth 1°25 in. to 1.5

in.; petiole about ‘5 in.; capitula sessile, axillary, strobiliform, 4 to 6-

flowered ; bracts large, empty, coloured, keeled., in two series, an outer

and an inner ; the outer of 6 to 7 decussate pairs, the uppermost of which

is linear-oblong, obtuse, 1°5 in. long, the lower pairs gradually smaller

and more or less acute; the inner series of a single lanceolate pair ;

bracteoles round each individual flower 4, linear-lanceolate, about *75

inch long; calyx very short, 6-toothed; corolla narrowly infundibu-

liform, curved below the middle, 1°75 in. long, split nearly half-way

down on ove side, and cleft at the apex for about one-fifth of its entire

length into 5, lanceolate, acuminate, reflexed teeth ; anthers basifixed,

linear, subulate, with a slight process at their bases; style filiform,

about as long as the stamens ; stigma small, sub-capitate: fruit elongated

ovoid, crowned by the remains of the calyx-tube.

* Perak; Scortechini, No. 1251.

The late lamented Father Scortechini left only a single specimen of

this with me. It appears, however, to agree with an imperfect specimen

in the Calcutta Herbarium from Malacca (Herb. Maingay No. 695).

* * % * * %

I take the present opportunity of describing two new species col-

lected by Mr. H. O. Forbes in Sumatra—both handsome plants, be-

longing respec tively to the sections Lovanthera and Lepiostegeres.

100 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

Loranthus (Sect. Loxanthera) Lampongus, nov. spec. Branches terete,

scurfy when young, as are the peduncles, ultimately all parts glabrous :

leaves thickly coriaceous, opposite or sub-opposite, entire, petiolate, ovate-

oblong to broadly ovate, apex sub-acute, or acute, base rounded, rarely

sub-acute, the midrib very prominent and the nerves very indistinct

on both surfaces, length of blade 4 to 5 inches: petioles stout, about

‘75 in. long; flowers in pairs on crowded short, stout, bifurcate axil-

lary peduncles; calyx tube short, cylindric, the lmb truncate, irre-

gularly and obscurely sinuate, sub-crenate ; corolla nearly 1°5 in. long,

clavate in bud, the cylindrical tube slightly inflated about the middle,

cleft at the apex to about one third of its length into 6 linear-lanceolate

lobes ; stamens 6, the filament arcuate, dilated at the apex, and at-

tached to the back of the linear anther below its middle; style fili-

form; stigma minute, clavate: bracteole short, broad, minute.

Lampongs, Sumatra: H. O. Forbes, No. 1737.

The curved filaments and dorsifixed anthers put this unmistakeably

into the section Lowanthera. That section, however, as at present de-

fined, is 5-merous. The definition of it must therefore be altered.to 5 or

6-merous. .

Loranthus (Sect. Lepiostegeres) Forbesit, nov. spec. Glabrous; the

branches terete, with pale bark, swollen at the nodes; leaves coriaceous,

petiolate, entire, opposite, ovate-oblong, sub-acute, the base rounded, or

slightly cordate; midrib thick, prominent on the under surface; the

nerves about 6 pairs, indistinct on both surfaces when fresh, slightly

distinct on the upper surface when dry; length of blade 4°5 in. to 5°5

in.: breadth 2 in. to 2°5 in.; petiole stout, *75 in. long; capitula 4 to 6-.

flowered, axillary, sessile, strobiliform, the bracts large, coloured,

keeled, in two series, an outer and an inner; the outer series of 5 or 6

decussate pairs of which the upper pair are 2°3 in. long, the second

pair about half as long, and the outer pairs gradually shorter, all ob-

tuse ; the inner series of 2 pairs, narrower than the outer, acuminate ;

each flower surrounded by 4 linear-lanceolate, keeled bracteoles about

1 inch in length; calyx tube very short, 6-toothed ; corolla tubular,

slightly widened above, the tube 6-angled, cleft for about one third of

its entire length into 6, lanceolate, acuminate teeth: filaments flattened,

grooved, adnate to the corolla-tube ; anthers linear, subulate, with a pro*

cess at their bases: style filiform, as long as the stamens ; stigma small,

cylindric. ‘al

Sumatra, near Kepala, at an elevation of 1200 feet. H. O. Ferbes,

Herb. No. 2844.

Mr. Forbes found this superb species growing on a Legummous

tree. The bracts he describes as being scarlet, and the corolla of a

brilliant lake colour.

Oe et di i ee ee ee ee

EEE —

1887. | E, Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale. 101

VIII.—E’fude sur les Arachnides de? Asie méridionale faisant partie

des collections de Indian Museum (Calcutta). Par M. E. Simon,

de Paris —Communicated by Tue SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN

Museum.

[Received December 30th ;—Read June 1st, 1887. |

ARACHNIDES RECUEILLIS A Tavoy (TENNASSERIM) PAR Moti Ram.

Ordo ARANE AL.

Fam. Attide.

1.—Prexippus cunicivorus, Doleschall, Tweede Brjdr. etc., 1859,

p- 14 pl. IX, f. 5. (Attus).—

Menemerus culicivorus, Thorell, Rag. Mal. etc., I., p. 227; III, p. 508.

Kgaya, Tavoy.

Répandu a Java, aux Célébes, et 4 Amboine.

Fam. Lycoside.

Cette famille est représentée par deux espéces dont 1’ habitat est trés

étendu. Hippasa greenallie Blackw. est répandu dans toute I’ Asie

tropicale, dans 1’ Indoustan’ jusqu’ a Ceylan, et dans |’ Indo-Chine

jusqu’ 4 Malacca; nous |’ avons indiqué nous-méme de Birmanie, de

Pondichéry, et de Wagra-Karoor dans le centre du Dekkan. Ocyale

atalanta Sav. est encore plus remarquable par sa distribution: cette

espéce, trouvée pour la premiére fois en Asie, est répandue dans toute

l’ Afrique tropicale du Sénégal 4 Mozambique et jusqu’ 4 la Méditerranée

par la vallée du Nil. :

2.—HIipPAsa GREENALLIAZ, Blackw, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867 (Lycosa).

Priata agelenoides KH. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. XX, 1884, p. 234.

Hippasa greenallie K. Sim., Bull. Soc. Zool. Fr., 1885, p. 31.

Tavoy.

3.—OcYALE ATALANTA, Aud. in Sav., H’g. 1825-27, Ar. XXII, p. 149,

wt IV., f. 10.

Dolomedes ocyale, Walck., Apt., I, 1837, p. 253.

Lycosa virulenta, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L., 1876, p. 600.

Ocyale atalanta, E. Sim., Ann, Soc. ent. Fr. 1885, p. 258.

Tavoy. —

102 E. Simon—Arachnides del Asie méridionale [No. 1,

Fam. Sparasside.

4,.—HETEROPODA VENATORIA, L.

Pour la synonymie cf. H. Sim., Rév. Sparass., 1880, p. 48.

Tavoy.

5.—HETEROPODA LANGUIDA, sp. nov.

Ceph.-th. long. 10 mm.; lat. 8,9 mm. Abd. long. 13 mm. Pedes I

long. 36, 5 mm.; IL 40 mm. IIL 33 mm.; IV 37, 5.

Cephalothorax evidenter longior quam latior crassus sat convexus

laete rufo-castaneus cervino-pubescens, postice in declivitate testaceo-

marginatus, stria thoracica longa. Oculi anticiin apicibus lineam rectam

formantes, medii lateralibus fere duplo minores inter se quam a latera-

libus paulo remotiores sed spatio diametro oculi paulo angustiore sejunc-

ti. Oculi postici in linea evidenter recurva, medii lateralibus saltem

% minores et a lateralibus quam inter se paulo remotiores. Medii aream

non multo longiorem quam latiorem sed antice quam postice multo

angustiorem occupantes, subaequales, antici vix minores. Clypeus sub«

verticalis planus oculis lateralibus anticis latior. Sternum coxe et

lamine rufo-castanea, pars labialis infuscata sed apice anguste testacea.

Abdomen oblongum antice obtuse emarginatum fusco-lividum. Pedes

mediocres sat robusti rufo-castanei, Scopule sat dense in metatarsis

anticis basin attingentes sed in posticis partem apicalem tantum occu-

pantes. Tibia IV cephalothoraci circiter aequilonga in parte secunda

aculeo dorsali munita. Plaga vulve antice depressa foveolata et longi-

tudinaliter carinata postice valde convexa semicirculari sed sulco

angusto et profundo longitudinaliter secta.

Tavoy.

H. mediocri BH. Sim. valde affinis, sed differt praesertim area oculo-

rum mediorum breviore et sulco plage genitalis multo angustiore

sublineari.

6.—HETEROPODA FERINA, sp. nov.

&, Ceph.-th. long. 7,6 mm. lat. 7,2 mm. Pedes I 39, 4 mm.; II

43,6 mm.; III 33,6 mm.; IV 37 mm.

Cephalothorax vix longior quam latior parum convexus obscure

fulvo-rufescens postice in declivitate et antice in clypeo testaceo-margi-

natus, supra lineis radiantibus obscurioribus notatus, stria thoracica

longa. Oculi antici appropinquati in linea recta, medii lateralibus plus

duplo minores et inter se quam a lateralibus remotiores spatio diametro

oculi vix angustiore sejuncti. Oculi postici in linea evidenter recurva,

medii lateralibus saltem 4 minores et a lateralibus quam inter se remo-

tiores. Medii aream longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice

angustiorem occupantes, antici posticis minores. Clypeus oculis latera-

1887. | faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewn. 103

libus anticis paulo angustior. Sternum fulvo-testaceum. Abdomen

ovatum lurido-testaceum lurido-pubescens parcissime et inordinate fus-

co-punctatum et in parte apicali linea fusca transversim arcuata notatum,

venter immaculatus. Pedes longi parum robusti fulvo-rufescentes

femoribus dilutioribus sed supra levissime fusco-variatis. Scopule

long parum dense tarsos et métatarsorum extremitates tantum occu-

pantes. Tibia IV cephalothorace multo longior aculeo dorsali in parte

apicali sito munita. Pedes-maxillares fulvi tarso leviter infuscato,

femore supra ad apicem 4—1 aculeato, patella paulo longiore quam

latiore convexa utrinque uniaculeata, tibia patella longiore et graciliore

prope basin aculeis longissimis quinque instructa apophysa apicali arti-

culo multo breviore crassa antice directa nigra supra leviter rugosa et

impressa ad apicem excisa, breviter emarginata et minute bimucronata

(mucrone superiore altero longiore incurvo et acuto) infra in carinam

obliquam producta, tarso angusto longissime producto in parte apicali

teretiusculo, bulbo ovato simplici longitudinaliter sulcato.

Tavoy.

7.—Patystes Kocut, E. Sim., Rév. Sparass., 1880, p. 45.

Nous ne connaissions jusqu’ ici que la femelle de cette espéce.

&. Ceph.-th. long. 9 mm. Abd. long. 11mm. Cephalothorax humi-

lior quam in femina et paulo brevior quam tibia 4i paris, fusco-rufes-

cens flavido-pubescens, linea media nigra exillima longitudinaliter sectus.

Sternum coxe oris partes venterque lete rufo-brunnea vel livida. Ab-

domen supra fulvo-cervinum. Chelarum margo inferior dentibus sat

parvis quatuor lo singulariter posito reliquis subcontiguis, lo majore 20

et 40 minutissimis. Pedes multo longiores quam in femina fulvo-cer-

vini femoribus infra rufulo-tinctis scopulis nigro-sericeis. Pedes-maxil-

lares fulvi femore compresso Jeviter arcuato supra in parte apicali 4—1

aculeato, patella longiore quam latiore utrinque uniaculeata, tibia patella

longiore terete prope basin et intus aculeis longissimis 4 vel 5 armata,

extus apophysa apicali oblique divaricata sat valida valde uncata atten-

uata sed obtusa, tarso longe ovato supra cervino-piloso sed in parte

apicali vitta fusca densius pilosa ornato, bulbo rufulo longe ovato apice

depresso et processu membranaceo oblique munito.

Mita, Tavoy ; collines séparant la Birmanie de Siam.

Cette espéce a été découverte a Singapore.

8.—THELICTOPIS CANESCENS, sp. nov.

¢@. Ceph.-th. long, 9 mm.; lat. 7, 4mm. Abd. long. 12 mm. ; lat. 7,

5mm. PedesI 24mm.; Il 23,6 mm.;TII 19 mm.;IV 24,3 mm.

Cephalothorax niger laevis pilis albidis pronis, praecsertim antice

setis nigris mixtis, dense vestitus, crassus et convexus fronte lata, stria

remota sat brevi sed profunda. Oculi antici in linea leviter procurva,

104 EK. Simon—Arachnides del Asie méridionale [No Ag

medii lateralibus circiter } majores a lateralibus quam inter se multo

remotiores inter se spatio diametro oculi evidenter angustiore sejuncti.

Oculi postici in linea levissime procurva, medii parvi spatio diametro

eculi saltem.quadruplo latiore sejuncti, laterales mediis paulo majores

leviter prominuli. Area mediorum latior quam longior et antice quam

postice angustior. Clypeus oculis mediis anticis haud vel non multo

angustior. Chel robustissime ad basin valde geniculate nigro nitide

parce setose. Partes oris sternum coxeque nigra. Abdomen sat late

ovatum postice valde attenuatum et prope mammillas stria annulari pro-

funde constrictum fuscum, fulvo-cinereo pubescens. Pedes breves et

robusti femoribus atris reliquis articulis fusco-ravidis nigricanti-lineatis,

tarsis dilutioribus, albo-cretaceo pubescentes et nigro-setosi. Tibia cum

patella 41 paris cephalothorace paulo brevior. Tuibiz cunctz aculeis

dorsalibus carentes, quatuor antic aculeis inferioribus 5—5 sat brevi-

bus munite sed lateralibus carentes, postice aculeis inferioribus 3—3 et

utrinque lateralibus bine munite. Patelle mutice. Scopule sat breves

dense basin metatarsorum sex anticorum attingentes sed apicem metar-

sorum posticorum tantum occupantes. Plaga vulve oblonga multo

longior quam latior nigra rugosa et pilosa sulco medio lato rufulo et

depresso longitudinaliter secta.

¢. Ceph.-th. long. 8 mm; lat. 7,2 mm. PedesI 27, 7 mm; IT

28 mm.; III 23,2mm; 1V 28, 7 mm.

Femine subsimilis sed cephalothorace paulo latiore, pedibus paulo

longioribus, tibiis anticis aculeis inferioribus et utrinque aculeis latera-

libus binis instructis, metatarsis anticis aculeo laterali subbasilari et

tibiis cunctis aculeo dorsali submedio instructis. Pedes-maxillares ob-

scure fusci breves et robusti, femore brevi supra in parte apicali 3—1

aculeato, patella paulo longiore quam latiore convexa aculeo interiore

unico tantum armata, tibia patella breviore extus apophysis duabus

longis subsequis et teretibus insigniter armata, tarso magno late ovato

ad marginem exteriorem prope basin ample dilatato, bulbo rufulo con-

vexo valde complicato.

Collines séparant la Birmanie de Siam.

T. severe L. Koch affinis differt imprimis oculis inter se distanti-

oribus, plaga genitali longius ovata, etc.

Fam. Epeiride.

Les trois espéces qui représentent a Tavoy le groupe des Gastera-

canthine existent également dans le Cambodge et la Cochinchine.

9.—ACTINACANTHA PROPINQUA, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L., 1879, p. 288;

pl. XXVIL., f. 16. (Gasteracantha).

OE = ee

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de ? Indian Musewm. 105

id. K. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Berd., 1886.

Tavoy,—commun.

On peut ajouter 4 la description du Rev. O. P. Cambridge: Ster-

num nigrum dense et grosse nigro-granosum antice linea transversa

Seepe in medio interrupta utrinque maculis binis subrotundis ad apicem

macula elongata flavo-opacis levibus decoratum. Pedum coxe I et IV

fulve ad basin fusco-notate, sed coxee II et III omnino nigre. Scutum

ad marginem posticum punctis ocelliformibus decem (haud octo), sed

punctis IT et III conjunctis punctis mediis minutissimis. Longitudo

spinarum valde variabilis.

10.—GASTERACANTHA FRONTATA, Blackw., A. M. N. H., ser. 3, vol.

XIV, 1864, p. 40.

id. Cambr. P. Z. 8S. L. 1879, p. 2383., pl. XXVI, f. 9.

ad. EK. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.

Tavoy: Mita, Egaya (trés commun).

Collines entre la Birmanie et Siam, ete.

11.—GAsTERACANTHA ANNAMITA, E. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.

Kgaya. Tavoy.

12.—EHPEIRA MASONI, sp. nov.

$. Ceph.-th. long. 9,1; lat. 8, 3 mm. Abd. long. 14, 5; lat. 12,

5mm. Pedes I long. 33,4; II long. 32,4; III 19,5; IV 29 mm.

Cephalothorax niger parce et inaequaliter granulosus crasse et sat

longe flavo-pilosus, parte cephalica lata subparallela sat convexa prope

medium impressione transversa vix expressa notata postice striis

obliquis angustis discreta. Oculi medii valde prominuli aream obli-

quam paulo longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice paulo

latiorem occupantes, medii antici posticis plus duplo majores, spatium

inter medios posticos diametro oculi paulo angustius. Oculi laterales

a mediis latissime remoti prominuli haud tuberculati antici pdéstico

majores, spatio dimidio diametro oculi angustiore sejuncti. Oculi quatuor

antici lineam leviter procurvam formantes sed in medio clypeo area

ocularum paulo angustiore. Sternum nigrum immaculatum haud ru-

gosum flayo-hirsutum. Chele nigre sublaeves. Abdomen crassum et

altum sed supra deplanatum obtusissime triquetrum, supra atrum lon-

gissime et crasse flavo-hirsutum immaculatum vel macula anteriore

Simplici aut duplici albo-opaca notatum. Venter niger pone plicam

vitta transversa prope medium maculis transversis binis obscure tes-

taceis ornatus. Pedes robusti et longi nigri vel obscure fusco-ravidi

femoribus anticis infra cyaneo-tinctis, tibiis metatarsisque annulis sat

angustis albo-cinereo pilosis ornatis, patellis tibiisque supra deplanatis

et distincte bisulcatis, aculeis parum longis numerosis fulvo-rufulig

ad radicem nigris. Vulva uncus sat longus subparallelus et obtu-

106 E. Simon—Avrachnides de V Asie méridionale [tac els

sus supra marginatus prope basin leviter convexus parce rugosus et

pilosus.

Tavoy.

Ep. de haant Dolesch. sat affinis differt imprimis area oculorum

mediorum longiore, oculis mediis magis inaequalibus, lateralibus haud

tuberculatis, abdominis angulis humeralibus obtusissimis, vulva haud

foveolata unco longo et parallelo munita.

Pedes 41 paris ut in H. de haani paulo breviores quam anteri-

ores.

13.—EHPEIRA SUBMUCRONATA, sp. nov.

@. Ceph.-th. long. 8,5; lat. 6,7 mm. Abd. long. 13, 2; lat. 11 mm.

PedesI long. 24; II 23,2;III 14,7;IV 24, 8mm.

Cephalothorax ut in precedenti sed densius granulosus et impres-

sione cephalica majore et profundiore, obscure fusco-rufescens, parte

cephalica breviter albido-pilosa thoracica utrinque longe et crebre

flavo-hirsuta postice in declivitate glabra. Oculi medii valde prominuli

aream subverticalem haud longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam

postice non multo latiorem occupantes, medii antici posticis evidenter

majores, spatium inter posticos diametrum oculi fere equans. Oculi

laterales a mediis longissime remoti sub tuberculo infulo conico et

divaricato impositi subaequales et spatio dimidio diametro oculi angus-

tiore sejuncti. Oculi quatuor antici lineam evidenter procurvam for-

mantes. Clypeus in medio area oculorum latior. Sternum obscure

fuscum immaculatum flavo-pilosam grosse parce et inordinate granulo-

sum. Chele fulvo-rufescentes apicem versus sensim obscuriores. <Ab-

domen crassum et altum sed supra deplanatum triquetrum angulis

humeralibus acute productis angulo apicali tuberculis tribus contiguis

uniseriatis medio reliquis majore instructo, supra fulvo-cervinum parce

setosum et brevissime fulvo-nitido pubescens, antice in declivitate

fusco-piceum lineis transversis exillimis albo-pilosis transversim sectum

linea prima inter tubercula humeralia ducta integra aliis (2 vel 3) in

medio late interruptis. Venter obscure fuscus utrinque fulvo-margina-

tus pone plicam vitta transversa prope medium macula magna sub-

quadrata obscure fulvis ornatus. Pedes robusti et sat longi obscure fulvo-

ravidi, femoribus anticis infra cyaneo-tinctis, fulvo-pubescentes meta-

tarsis anticis annulo medio exili tibiis metatarsisque posticis annulo

basilari late albido-pilosis ornatis, patellis tibiisque supra deplanatis et

distincte bisulcatis, aculeis numerosis parum longis testaceo-pellucenti-

bus. Vulva antice fovea subquadrata postice tuberculo mediocri semi-

circulari piloso apice breviter et acute uncato munita.

Var. (2 junior). Cephalothorax fulvo-rufescens impressionibus

cephalicis fuscis. Abdomen fulvo-cervinum linea media longitudinali

1887. faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 107

et utrinque lineis transversis fuscis notatum. Pedes fulvi femoribus

infuscatis tibiis metatarsisque posticis fusco-annulatis.

Tavoy. Egaya.

Ep. de haani et E. caput-lupt Delesch. valde affinis, differt prae-

sertim oculis lateralibus longius tuberculatis, apice abdominali trituber-

culato, ete.

Vulva fere ut in Hp. de haant.

Pedes 4i paris ut in Hp. caput-lupi longiores quam pedes quatuor

anteriores.

14.—CH#ROSTRIS PARADOXA, Dolesch., Tweede Budr. Kenn. Arachn.

Ind. Ar., 1859, p. 37, pl. IX, f. bl. et ph. X, £. 8. (pera).

Mintas et Mita, Tavoy.

Espéce répandue en Malaisie et dans |’ Indo-Chine.

15.—Nepuiva macunata, Fabr., Wnt. Syst., II, 1793, p. 425 (Aranea).

N. fuscipes, C. Koch, Ar., VI, 1839, p. 186, f. 528.

(Pour la synonymie cf. Fhorell, Rag. Mal. etc. III, p. 145).

Tavoy ; Mita, Tavoy.

Répandu dans toute l’Asie méridionale, la Malaisie, les Philippines,

et l’ Australie septentrionale.

16.—NEPHILENGYS MALABARENSIS, Walck., Apt. II, 1841, p. 103

(EHpeira).

Epeira anama, Walck., ft. c., p. 103:

Hpeira rhodosternon, Dolesch., Tweede Bijdr. etc. 1859, p. 40.

Nephila rivulata, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L.,1871, p. 517, pl. XLIX, f. 1-2.

Nephilengys hofmanni, L. Koch, Ar. Austr., 1872, p. 145; pl. XI, £.8

Nephilengys malabarensis, Thorell, Simon, tite

Egaya, Tavoy.

Espece répandue dans presque toutes les régions chaudes du

globe: en Afrique, en Australie, et en Amérique ; indiqué de Siam par

Thorell et par nous-méme.

17.—Mora rasticiata, E. Sim., Ann. S08: ent. Fr. 1877, Dil tos

Meta fastwosa, Thorell, Rag. Mal. ete., I, 1877, p. 413.

Meta fastigiata, EH. Sim., Act. Soc. Iann. Bord., 1886.

Tavoy ; Mintas, Tavoy.

Répandue aux Philippines, aux Célébes, et A Siam.

Fam. Pholcide..

18.—Puo.cus uLoNGATUS, Vinson, Ar. Ldéwn. etc. 1864, p. 135, pl. III,

E. 5.

P. phalangioides, Dolesch., Tweede Bijdr. etc. 1859, p. 47.

108 E. Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale [No. I,

P. tipuloides, L. Koch, Ar. Austr., 1872, p. 281, pl. KX XH, f. 5.

P. distinctus, Cambr., J. L. S. Z., X, 1876, p. 380, pl. XI, f.

28-30.

_ P. margarita, Workman, A. § M,N. H. 5th ser. t. II, 1878, p. 401,

pl. XVIII. f. 1-2. |

P. elongatus, V. Hasselt, Tijdr. v. Ent., XX, 1877, p. 53.

id. Thorell, Rag. Mal. etc. II, 1878, p. 162.

Egaya. Tavoy.

Répandu dans presque toutes les régions chaudes, probablement

importé.

Fam. Drasside.

Subfam. Clenint.

19.—LEPTOCTENUS TUMIDULUS, sp. nov.

¢ (pullus). long. 15 mm. Cephalothorax ovatus antice parum

attenuatus fronte lata postice valde convexus et stria profunda sec-

tus, obscure fulvo-ravidus fulvo-pubescens, parte cephalica utrinque

lineolis fuscis obliquis parte thoracica linea marginali et vittis dor_

salibus latis pallide fuscis dentatis et lineis radiantibus obscurioribus

sectis notatis. Oculi fere ut in LD. denticulato sed area mediorum

latius transversa et oculis lateralibus seriei 2c a mediis latius re-

motis. Clypeus oculis anticis haud latior retro obliquus. Abdomen

sat late ovatum fusco-testaceum fulvo et albido-pubescens parce et

inordinate fusco-punctatum in parte anteriore punctis majoribus bi-

seriatim ordinatis notatum. Mammille inferiores fusce, superiores

flave. Sternum fusco-rufescens albido-setosum. Chele subnigree

nitide subtilissime vix conspicue transversim rugate, margine in-

feriore sulci quadridentato dentibus 1 et 2 reliquis paulo majoribus.

Pedes sat breves et robusti fulvo-ravidi confuse olivaceo-annulati.

Tibiee antics infra 5—5 aculeate (aculeis 3i paris reliquis longiori-

bus) metatarsis aculeis similibus 3—3. Tuibie posticew aculeis late-

ralibus inferioribus atque aculeis dorsalibus 3 uniseriatis instructs.

Patellee posticee utrinque uniaculeate. Tibia cum patella IV cephalo-

thoraci fere equilonga. Tarsi cuncti metatarsique quatuor anteriores

breviter et sat dense scopulati.

Tavoy.

L. denticulato KE. Sim. affinis, differt imprimis cephalothorace pos-

tice convexiore, pedibus brevioribus, etc.

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewm. 109

Fam. Avicularide.

Sect. 1. Trionichi.

Genus ATMETOCHILUS nov.

Cephalothorax ovatus plus ¢ longior quam latior pubescens parte

cephalica lata modice convexa, fovea procurva semicirculari profunda,

parte thoracica humili postice attenuata et truncata. Area oculorum

compactilis circiter triplo latior quam longior utrinque subparallela

(oculorum series postica paulo angustior quam antica). Oculi quatuor

antici maximi subaequales fere aeque et sat anguste separati (intervalla

dimidio diametro oculi vix latiora) in linea modice procurva. Oculi

postici subaequales anticis multo minores utrinque approximati. Oculus

lateralis posticus antico fere duplo minor et ab antico spatio diame-

tro oculi paulo angustiore sejunctus. Chele robuste supra vise sat

breves intus ad apicem leviter convexe, rastello ex dentibus numerosis-

simis inordinatis iniquis et parum robustis composito. Pars labialis

paulo longior quam latior leviter attenuata et obtusa immobili a sterno

stria snperficiali vix expressa discreta mutica. Coxe pedum-maxillari-

um ad basin denticulis paucis armate. Sternum ovatum antice atte-

nuatum impressionibus magnis confluentibus antice foveam magnam

transversim semicircularem formantibus. Pedes robusti sat longi, me-

tatarsi quatuor anteriores tibiis circiter aequilongi, metatarsi postici

tibiis multo longiores. Tarsi metatarsique quatuor anteriores et tarsi

pedum-maxillarium scopulis parum densis setis intermixtis vestiti, tarsi

postici infra dense setosi. Metatarsi antici aculeis paucis instructi.

Ungues tarsorum cunctorum dentibus paucis basilaribus ad marginem

exteriorem muniti et ungues tarsorum anticorum dente minutissimo

submedio ad marginem interiorem tantum armati. Mammille superiores

articulo basilari crasso et sat longo, medio breviore, apicali medio

longiore basilari fere equilongo angustiore recto et attenuato.

Gen. Cystauchenio Th. sat vicinum differt oculis anticis magnis

sequis et parum disjunctis, sterno late foveolato, parte labiali ad basin

vix discreta, metatarsis anticis pluriaculeatis, mammillarum articulo

ultimo longiore et acuminato, structura ungium tarsalium, ete.

20.—ATMETOCHILUS FOSSOR, sp. nov.

2. Ceph.-th. long. 20; lat. 14,2 mm. Abd. long. 22, 5; Jat. 16,

5mm. PedesI 44,6; II 40,5; II 34,7; 1V 48,8 mm.

Cephalothorax sublevis sed opacus late fusco-rufescens pilis longis

pronis sericeis setis nigris mixtis parum dense yestitus. . Oculi quatuor

110 KE. Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale [ Now ds

antici maximi subequales, medii rotundi, laterales ovati et obliqui, medii

a lateralibus quam inter se vix remotiores spatio dimidio diametro oculi

evidenter angustiore sejuncti, medii postici subrotundi levissime angu-

losi, laterales late ovati mediis vix majores et lateralibus anticis multo

minores. Chele nigree subleves valde et inequaliter crinite. Abdo-

men convexum late ovatum atro-sericeum tenuiter et parce setosum in

lateribus inordinate testaceo-striolatum infra obscure fulvum. Mammille

fulve. Sternum lete fusco-rufescens postice dilutius leve. Pedes-

maxillares pedesque subnigri coxis femoribusque infra dilutioribus et

rufulis, patellis tibiisque supra vittis duabus latis glabris et rufulis

ornatis. Tibie antice infra aculeis apicalibus binis et aculeis exteri-

oribus uniseriatis 3, metatarsi aculeis apicalibus binis et exterioribus

binis armati. Tibize posticee parce metatarsi numerose aculeati.

Tavoy.

Sect. II. Dionichi.

91.— ? Puricrus rnavopitosus, H. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., XX,

1884, p. 358.

Tavoy.

Je rapporte avec doute a cette espéce quelques jeunes individus en

mauvais état. .

P. flavopilosus a été découvert en Birmanie.

Genus CyYRIOPAGOPUS nov.

Gen. Selenocosmie affine. Cephalothorax oblongus multo humilior

subplanus fovea sublineari leviter procurva (haud semilunari), Tuber

oculorum parum convexum magnum saltem duplo latius quam longius @

margine antico spatio diametro oculi lateralis antici latiore sejunctum.

Oculi antici in linea parum procurva (margo anticus mediorum ante

centrum lateralium situs) subequales fere equidistantes spatiis diametro

oculi evidenter angustioribus sejuncti. Medii postici multo minores

quam medii antici et laterales postici late ovati recti. Laterales postici

anticis minores atque ab anticis spatio diametro minore oculi haud

latiore sejuncti. Pedes parum longi robustissimi extremitates versus

parum attenuati omnino mutici. Patella cum tibia IV evidenter longior

quam patella cum tibia I. Scopule densissime, in metatarsis sex anteri-

oribus basin articuli attingentes, in metatarso 4i paris partem apicalem

tantum occupantes. Scopule tarsorum cunctorum et metatarsorum

sex anticorum integra sed scopule metatarsi postici linea setosa anguste

sectee. Cetera ut in Selenocosmia.

a ————_ I _E _ E e —

. — —

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewn. Li

Gen. Phrycto sat affine imprimis differt scopulis tarsorum integris

et linea oculorum anticorum magis procurva.

22.—CYRIOPAGOPUS PAGANUS, sp. nov,

@. Ceph.-th. long. 14 mm; lat. 11, 5 mm. Abd. long. 21 mm.

Pedes-max. long. 21mm. PedesI 39mm; II 36mm; III 32,2mm;

IV 43,6 mm.

Cephalothorax humilis subplanus obscure fusco-rufescens sat longe

et adpresse fulvo-cervino-pubescens. Area oculorum magna trans-

versa. Oculi quatuor antici subequales, medii rotundi, laterales longe

ovati equidistantes et spatiis diametro oculi paulo angustioribus separa-

ti. Medii postici late ovati subrecti, laterales postici longe ovati mediis

duplo majores sed lateralibus anticis minores. Abdomen oblongum

nigricans ferrugineo- pubescens et longe setosum. Pars labialis subplana

haud striata nec depressa in parte apicali minute et crebre spinulosa.

Chele sternum pedes-maxillares pedesque nigella ferrugineo-hirsuta,

tibiis metatarsisque supra ad apicem pilis albidis paucis angustissime

cinctis. Pedes breves et robustissimi. Tibia cum patella I breviores

quam iidem articuli IV (circiter ex 3 patelle). Metatarsus IV tibia

haud vel yix longior.

Tavoy. Heaya.

Ordo PEDIPALPI.

23.—THELYPHONUS FoRMOSUS, Butler, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872,

p. 208, pl. XIII, f. 4.

La forme remarquable de la patte-machoire indiquée dans cette

espece par Butler (J. c. f. 4) est un caractére sexuel propre au male.

Chez la femelle la patte-machoire est de forme normale et se rapproche

beaucoup de celle de 7’. assamensis , Stol.; le trochanter offre également

cing dents au bord supérieur.

Les deux especes different par les caractéres suivants :—

In T. formoso trochanteris dentibus acutioribus tribus interioribus

subsimilibus (in assamensi dente basali obsoleto) pedum-maxillarium

articulis cunctis supra omnino levibus (in assamensi trochantere et

femore parce granosis) oculis mediis minoribus spatio subplano diametro

oculi saltem haud angustiore sejunctis (in assamensi spatio angustiore et

convexo), tarsi pedum li paris articulis cunctis muticis I et II subsequis

IJI—VII brevioribus et inter se subequis ultimo tereti recto preceden-

tibus duobus simul sumptis haud longiore (in assamensi articulis TV NG

VI, et VII intus ad apicem breviter dentatis et articulo V. reliquis

longiore).

Tavoy.

Déja indiqué de Tennasserim par Butler.

112 EK. Simon—Arachnides de lV Asie [No. ],

Ordo SCORPIONES.

24,.—Isomurrus varius, C. Koch, 1845.

Tityus varius, C. Koch, Ar. XI, p. 29, f. 864.

Isometrus varius, H. Sim., Ann. Mus. civ. Gen., XX, 1884, p. 363.

Tavoy.

Nous I’ avons déja indiqué de Birmanie. I] est en outre trés répandu

en Indo-Chine, 4 Siam et a Saigon, et en Malaisie, 4 Sumatra et 4 Java.

25.—PALAMNZEUS BENGALENSIS, C. Koch, 1842.

Buthus bengalensis, C. Koch, Ar. IX, p. 3, f. 696. .

Palamneus bengalensis, EH. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., XX, 1884,

p. 360.

Tavoy.

Trés répandu en Birmanie.

26.—ScORPIOPS ANTHRACINUS, sp. nov.

Long. trunci 25,5 mm. Candee 22, 5 mm.

Nigro-opacus corpore subtus coxis tarsisque dilutioribus et rufes-

centibus. Cephalothorax segmentis caude I, II, et III anterioribus

simul sumptis non multo brevior, supra fere planus subparallelus antice

parum attenuatus, ad marginem anticum profundissime et obtuse ex-

cisus et utrinque in lobum attenuatum et obtuse truncatum productus,

supra granulis grossis inequalibus inordinate conspersus, ante tuber

oculorum sulco lato profundo carinis granulosis limitato impressus pos-

tice sulco longitudinali angustiore et sulco transverso recto sed utrinque

antice flexuoso munitus. Tuber oculorum longe ante medium situm

ovatum leve subtiliter sulcatum spatio inter oculos diametro oculi haud

latiore seu paulo angustiore. Oculi laterales sub carina granulosa siti

in linea recurva I et II equales tertio minor. Segmenta abdominalia

supra grosse dense et inordinate granulosa, segmenta III—VI antice

leviter impressa et carina media longitudinali debili notata, segmentum

VII parcius granulosum et carinis granulosis binis subrectis munitum.

Seomenta ventralia levia nitida sed ultimum subtiliter coriaceum et in

parte apicali carinis quatuor debilibus sublevibus instructum. Cauda

sat debilis minute et parce granulosa, segmenta I—IV carinis octo in-

ferioribus sublevibus superioribus dentatis, carine dorsales in segmento

II, et imprimis in segmentis III et IV alte cristatis et dente apicali

fortiore instructe. Segmentum Vm segmenta III et IV simul sumptis

longitudine sequans, carinis septem minute et regulariter dentatis muni-

tum. Vesica longe ovata segmento caude Vo vix brevior subtiliter

coriacea et infra prope basin minute et parce granulosa, aculeo yesica

multo breviore. Pedes-maxillares longi et parum robusti femore et

1887.) faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 113

tibia deplanatis et supra et infra carinis dense granulosis munitis supra

parce granulosis infra sublevibus, tibia intus dentibus validis sequis

binis subbasilaribus instructa infra prope marginem exteriorem punctis

impressis piliferis XIX uniseriatis munita, manu tibia non multo latiore

sed multo longiore parallela subtiliter granulosa subangulosa et costis

granulosis latis munita digiti mobili manu postica paulo longiore.

Dent. pect. 10—11.

Tavoy.

A S. Hardwicki Gerv. et solido Karsch differt manu angusta et cari-

nis dorsalibus segmentorum caude# dente apicali reliquis dentibus

multo validiore; 8. montano Karsch valde affinis sed differt imprimis

cephalothorace grosse granuloso, digito mobili pedum-maxillarium manu

longiore, dentibus pectinum 10—11, etc.

27.—LIOCHELES AUSTRALASIAZ, Fabr., Syst. Hnt., 1775, p. 399.

Ischnurus australasie, H. Koch, Ar. IV, p. 71, f. 294.

Ischnurus pistaceus, EH. Sim,, Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1876,

Hormurus australasie, Thorell, H’tud. Scorpiol., 1877, p. 177.

Tavoy.

Trés répandu dans la Polynesie, la Malaisie, les Philippines, la

Cochinchine, etc.

A L. complanato C. Koch differt cephalothorace impresse punctato

in medio subtiliter rugoso haud granuloso, segmentis caude I et

presertim II et V infra valde dentatis, etc. A L. neocaledonico,

H. Sim. differt cephalothorace haud granuloso, caude segmento V infra

dentato, manu impresse punctata et granulis humilibus ornata, etc.

Le genre Liocheles Sundevall (Conspectus Arachnidum, 1833, p. 31)

correspond au genre Hormurus Thorell, comme |’ a démontré le Dr.

Karsch (Zettschrift. f. ges. Naturwissenschft. 1880, t. LILI, p. 480).

Ordo OPILIONES.

Sub-ordo OP. MECOSTETH I.

28.—MARACANDUS RETICULATUS, sp. nov.

sé. Long. 5, 8 mm; Lat. 4, 3 mm.

Scutum dorsale paulo longius quam latius antice obtuse truncatum

postice sensim ampliatum et recte sectum supra fere planum vix con-

vexum haud striatum nec impressum subtiliter coriaceum haud granu-

losum fulvo-olivaceum confuse fusco-retriculatum et transversim linea-

tum ad marginem anticum tuberculo medio minuto et utrinque (supra

radicem pedum-maxillarium) tuberculis albis binis longis et teretibus

114 E. Simon—Arachnides de lV’ Asie méridionale [No. 1,

munitum, in regione abdominali tuberculis nigris sex in series duas

parallelas ordinatis (anticis quatuor minutissimis granuliformibus ulti-

mis longis erectis et acutis) instructum. Tuber oculorum maximum

ovato-transversum haud sulcatum supra tuberculis parvis et obtusis

biseriatis (2-2 vel 3-3) notatum. Abdominis segmenta posteriora libera

et ventralia brunnea mutica sed serie granulorum minutissimorum

munita. Coxe fulve confuse fusco-atomarie, posticae ad marginem

posteriorem pone spiraculum tuberculis crenulatis paucis munite reli-

que coxe utrinque obtuse serrate et antics serie media grossius gra-

nulosa ornate. Chelee modice fulve leves nitide articulo basali con-

vexo subgloboso. Pedes-maxillares fulvi plus minus fusco-variati cor-

pore breviores, femore compresso infra tuberculis parvis obtusis et

ineequalibus uniseriatis munito atque intus ad apicem tuberculo paulo

longiore et acuto instructo, patella saltem triplo longiore quam latiore

basin versus longe attenuata supra leviter convexa infra plana, ad mar-

ginem interiorem fere mutica ad exteriorem tuberculis parvis et obtusis

4-5 munita, tibia patella saltem ¢ breviore subparallela infra plana ad

marginem interiorem aculeo subapicali acuto diametro articulo breviore

ad exteriorem aculeis similibus binis instructa, tarso tibia breviore sat

late ovato valde attenuato utrinque aculeis binis sat parvis munito,

ungue gracili tarso haud breviore. Pedes fulvo-olivacei plus minus

fusco-retriculati et sublineati sat longi et valde inequales antici reliquis

multo breviores cuncti cylindracei et mutici, tarsus I 9-articulati, tarsi

II 19, tarsi III 11, tarsi IV 13-articulati. Ungues mutici.

2. Long. 8 mm, lat. 5, 2 mm.

A mare differt corpore crassiore et convexiore brunneo-rufescenti

leviter et parce fulvo-variato, tuberculo frontali erecto multo longiore

et tuberculis obtusis binis apicalibus oculorum tuberis validioribus, re-

gione abdominali tuberculis quatuor ad basin crassis granulosis et

nigris ad apicem acutis et albidis anticis posticis minoribus, pedibus-

maxillaribus brevioribus tuberculo femorali interiori minutissimo aculeis

tibize et tarsi brevioribus, pedibus multo brevioribus fusco-rufescenti-

bus apicem versus sensim dilutioribus, tarso I 8, tarso IT 13—14,

tarso III 9, tarso IV 10-articulatis.

Tavoy.

Nous ne rapportons qu’ avec doute cette espéce au genre Mara-

candus; elle différeen effet des espéces types* par le scutum dorsal

sans stries transverses, le tubercule oculaire non déprimé, enfin par les

stigmates bien visibles—caractére exceptionnel dans la famille des

Phalangodide.

* M. macei E. Sim. du Bengale et M. mouwhoti H. Sim. du Cambodge, ef.

Ann, Soc. ent. Belg., 1880,

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 115

Sub-ordo OP. PLAGIOSTETHI.

Genus GAGRELLA, Stoliczka.

Ce genre est représenté dans la région de Tavoy par les espéces

suivantes.

Conspectus specierum.

1.—Tuber oculorum omnino leve et muticum longi-

tudinaliter sulcatum, corpus Benes scuto abdomi-

nali vittis flavis quatuor ornato,. sip sthersspardargrecn GUAArWiLlAlG.

Tuber oculorum tuberculis At yee eeenecce

ordinatis instructum,.......... he 2

2.—Corpus fulvum, scuto Siiominat, oe. Face con-

fusa notato, infra omnino subleve,........c.secceceeeee CCTUINA.

Corpus nigrum postice flavo- ftaeeels sare: infra

subtiliter coriaceum et in processu sternali parce

QTATLOSTM, 0... ceerseccvavvarecvccsescecesstesnesssasvarvavenve binotata.

29.—GAGRELLA CERVINA, sp. nov.

Long. 6—8 mm.

Corpus brevissime ovatum valde convexum crebre et sat tenuiter

coriaceo-rugosum fulvo-cervinum, parte thoracica dilutiore et flavida

sed utrinque impressione obliqua infuscata notata, scuto abdominali in

parte prima vitta media lata fusca confusa notato, tubere oculorum

saltem supra et spina abdominali nigris. Pars thoracica ad marginem

mutica. Tuber oculorum altum supra visum subrotundum et tubercu-

lis parvis equis in series duas antice divaricatas parum regulariter

ordinatis instructum, intervallo oculorum diametrum oculi circiter

equanti. Spina abdominalis longa verticalis acuta usque ad basin sat

gracilis parce rugosa. Corpus infra subleve pallide flavo-testaceum,

coxis minute et parcissime granulosis sed utrinque crebre nigro-serratis.

Chele et pedes-maxillares omnino pallide flavi. Chele leves mutice.

Pedes-maxillares femore infra patella supra minutissime et inordinate

spinulosis, tibia patella haud longiore parallela. Pedes longissimi

cylindracei fusco-rufescentes trochanteribus nigricantibus femoribus

patellisque sat remote tibiis remotissime et minutissime spinulosis.

Mita, Tavoy.

30.—GAGRELLA BINOTATA, sp. nov.

Long. 8 mm.

Corpus breviter ovatum convexum omnino crebre et valde coriaceo-

116 E. Simon—Arachnides de V Aste méridionale, Sc. [No. 1;

rugosum, nigerrimum, parte thoracica ante tuber lineis binis exilibus et

utrinque supra foramen margine tenui obscure rufulis parum distinctis

notata, scuto abdominali antice utrinque spatio magno obscure rufulo et

postice maculis binis transversis levibus lete flavis ornato. Pars

thoracica ad marginem mutica. Tuber oculorum sat altum supra

visum subrotundum tuberculis parvis squis biseriatim ordinatis muni-

tum, intervallo oculorum diametro oculi non multo latiore. Spina

abdominalis verticalis mediocris acuta usque ad basin sat gracilis parce

granosa. Segmenta abdominalia infra subtilissime coriacea et in medio

granulis minutissimis paucis munita fusca ad marginem posticum et

utrinque dilutiora et rufescentia, processu sternali fusco sat remote

granuloso. Coxe nigricantes densius granulose utrinque serrate.

Chele leves mutice nigre, digitis dilutioribus. Pedes-maxillares nigri,

femore infra patella tibiaque intus minutissime et sat crebre spinulosis,

tibia patella vix longiore angustiore et parallela. Pedes longissimi

cylindracei nigri tarsis leviter dilutioribus femoribus minute et sat

’ remote spinulosis.

Tavoy.

31.—GAGRELLA QUADRAVITTATA, sp. nov.

Long. 8, 5 mm.

Corpus breviter ovatum convexum in medio prope spinam abdomi-

nalem grosse et crebre granosum antice posticeque sensim levius,

nigerrimum, parte thoracica ante tuber vitta media flava prope margi-

nem linea nigra exili secta postice secundum tuber crasse bifurcata,

pone tuber utrinque maculis binis transversis, scuto abdominali vittis

flavis quatuor integris dorsalibus duabus antice ampliatis et utrinque

marginali angustiore apicem haud attingente. Pars thoracica ad mar-

ginem mutica. Tuber oculorum sat humile supra visum paulo latius

quam longius omnino leve et muticum sed sulco longitudinali divisum,

intervallo oculorum diametro oculi multo latiore. Spina abdominalis

mediocris ad basin crassa et valde granulosa ad apicem subacuta.

Corpus infra subleve obscure testaceum segmentis transversim fusco-

vittatis et processu sternali infuscato. Coxe fusce presertim antics

sat dense granulose utrinque crebre serrate. Chele leaves mutics

nigre digitis dilutioribus. Pedes-maxillares obscure fusci femore infra

patella tibiaque intus minutissime et inordinate spinulosis, tibia patella

vix longiore angustiore et parallela, tarso longissimo compresso apicem

versus leviter et sensim incrassato. Pedes longissimi cylindracet

fusco-rufescentes trochanteribus femoribusque basin versus nigricanti-

bus femoribus minutissime (vix perspicue) et remotissime spinulosis.

Tavoy.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Hquation of a Trajectory. 117

G. signate Stol. sat affinis differt corpore in parte granuloso (in

G. signata omnino granulosa) et scuto abdominali flavo quadrivittato

(in G. signata tantum flavo-marginato).

IX.—On the Differential Equation of a Trajectory. By AsutosnH MvuKno-

papHyAY, M. A., F. R. A. S., F. R. S. BE. Communicated by THE

Hon’sie MAHENDRALAL Sarkar, M. D., C.I. E.

[Received April 28th ;—Read May 4th, 1887.]

§ 1. The problem of determining the oblique trajectory of a

system of confocal ellipses, appears to have been first solved by the

Italian Mathematician Mainardi, in a memoir in the Annali di Scienze

Mathematische e Fisiche, t. 1, page 251, which has been reproduced by

Boole (Differential Hquations, 4th edition, pp. 248-251). Representing —

half the distance between the foci by h, and the tangent of the angle

of intersection by n, we obtain for the equation of the trajectory,

h? rit J? 5

oy a

— 2n tan (=7-1)+ les =O @e00 eee concen (1)

«M

4 14/1 -=

where C is the constant of integration, and M is given by the quadratic

(aw? +y2+h?)M=a (M2+h?2)..c.csccecees (2)

Now, this form of the equation is so complicated that it would be

a hopeless task to have to trace the curve from it; indeed, it is so

unsymmetrical and inelegant that Professor Forsyth in his splendid

work on Differential Equations (page 131) does not at all give the

answer. In the present note, the curve is represented by a pair of

remarkably simple equations which admit of an interesting geometrical

interpretation.

§ 2. Assume then

xM =h*cos*d

C= 2nr

where A is a new constant. Substituting in (1), we have

1—- 4 ts =

log =§ —————- = 2nd 2nd.

-M

yy see

118 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. [No. 1,

1 ae erie:

v an(a +)

1 a 14e2mla +)

See

—

‘oa “i 1 an(A+)

—_— —_ — e

§ xv

M er an(At+)\ 2

2 Tie Tt

a 1 ps 2

pao <a) he? MA +9)

an(A + $) = { ae) 2

But, M=— cos*h

*. Substituting in the above and extracting the square root, we get

gn +¢)

2 cos i) = 14e (r+)

1 an(At ¢)

*.%=h cos 6 —— ar

=h cos pE{mrthy. wren? }

— h cos ¢. cosh n(A+4). |

Again, substituting the value of M in (2), we have

(a? +y?+h?) — he = ccs = x (a a +n)

"ae +y?+h? =h? cos*p+a2? sec*p

oy? +h? sin’? = a? tan?p

o2 2

$ h® cos?? h? sin®??

and, since we have shewn that

x=h cos >. cosh n(A+ ),

we see at once that

y=hsin®? . sinh n(A+?).

Therefore, the co-ordinates of any point on the trajectory may be

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. 119

expressed in a very neat and symmetrical form, in terms of a parameter

> viz., we have

«= h cos ¢. cosh n(A+$). ite

y=hsin >, sinh n(A+?).

§ 3. The equations (A) admit of a very simple geometrical inter-

pretation.

Let A’A be the line joining the

foci of the system of confocal ellipses,

so thatOA=h. On A’A as diameter,

describe a circle having its centre at O.

Draw any radius OB, making the angle

AOB=?; draw BC perpendicular to

OA; then, we have OC=/h cos $, BC

=h sin?. Construct a hyperbola

CM, having its centre at O, and its

transverse and congugate axes equal

to OC, BC respectively; then, of

course, BC is a tangent and OB an asymptote to this hyperbola. Take

a point M on the hyperbola, so that the area of the hyperbolic sector

OCM may be n(A+ ) times the area of the triangle OCB: then, I assert

that M is a point on the trajectory, viz., the co-ordinates of M are

2=h cos $. cosh n(A+?).

y=h sin >. sinh n(A+?).

To see how this is, drop MN perpendicular on OA. Then, writing

for the moment OC=h cos $=a, BC=h sin $=, the hyperbola is

and, any point (z,, y,) as M on this hyperbola is obviously satisfied by

2, =a cosh y, y, =f sinh ¥. Now, the area of the portion CMN is given

vy B vy A

by oun = [ yde = B [ a/ a? —a2da

a ava

=F Sa/e —a? —a? log (w+a/ x? —a?) yose

a 2=o

a { a* cosh y sinh p—a? log very tae

2a a.

[<° @ = ereoshak}

B |

= 5- a” cosh y sinh yy — a’?

120 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. ['No. 1,1887,

= a8 cosh w sinh y — i ay

=1 ON. NM—1 a8 = ONM — 1afy

“. OCM = taBy = OCB. yw.

But, ex hypothesit, OCM = OCB. n(A+¢)

.w=n(A+ 9),

which shews that the co-ordinates of M are given by

=acosh y=/h cos $. cosh n(A+?)

= B sinh W=/h sin #. sinh n(A+?),

and, anes M is a point on the trajectory. We thus see that not

only are the co-ordinates of M expressible in a very simple form, but

also that the position of M can be determined geometrically, correspond-

ing to any position of B on the circle; hence, the curve can be com-

pletely traced. It is easy to remark that whatever may be the value

of the arbitrary constant A, the point M lies on the hyperbola CM,

for a given value of ?. Finally, a geometrical relation is worth notic-

ing, viz., since the circular sector AOB = th?¢, we have from

OCM = n(A+?) OBC,

the equation

OCM = nA OBC+2n ——

OAB OBC

or, OCM = nA OBC +2n —. a

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—@—

Part II—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. II.—1887.

X.—On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bismuth on the Ductility

of Silver.—By Surcron-Masor J. Scutty, Assay Master, Calcutta.

[Received June 13th ;—Read July 6th, 1887. ]

Tt is well known that alloys of silver and bismuth, in certain propor-

tions, are brittle. In Dr. Percy’s valuable work on Metallurgy (Silver

and Gold—Part I), it is stated that alloys of silver with bismuth, in the

proportion of 50 per cent. and 33 per cent. of the latter metal, are brittle ;

while an ore of silver and bismuth, called Chilenite, in which bismuth

occurs only to the extent of 14°4 to 15°3 per cent., is said to be malleable.

The least amount of bismuth, however, which will injuriously affect the

ductility of silver, for example, in such an operation as the lamination of

silver bars for coinage, does not, so far as I am aware, appear to have

been experimentally investigated. It may here be mentioned at the

outset that an alloy of silver and bismuth may, by careful hammering, be

extended considerably, so as to pass muster as malleable; although, if

subjected to lamination by means of steel rolls, the same alloy will

crack at the edges and thus show a deficient ductility, as compared

with pure silver or some silver-copper alloys. It is to the deficiency in

ductility, as tested by rolling, of silver containing only very small

proportions of bismuth that I here wish to call attention.

My attention was first prominently directed, about two years ago, to

the injurious effects caused by small quantities of bismuth in silver by

122 J. Scully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

the circumstance that some silver bullion, in the shape of English re-

fined bars of as high a fineness as 990 per mille, proved so brittle as to

be unfit for mintage. Attention was first attracted to this matter by

the peculiar behaviour under assay of the granulated samples taken

from this silver after melting. The appearances noticed under assay

will be referred to presently, but they led to the bullion being at once

tested for brittleness. A bar, about 21 inches long, 2°25 broad, and 1

inch thick, was hammered out at one end without cracking, but on

being passed through the rolls it cracked badly at the edges and was

pronounced to be “ brittle,’’ in the Mint sense of the term. The bullion

was then remelted in five plumbago pots, and a partial refinement of it

attempted in the ordinary way with nitre, about eight to ten pounds of

this salt being used for each pot. The resulting silver bars were not

appreciably improved by this treatment; hammering again proved an

inconclusive test, but a bar of the size I have mentioned broke in two

by merely dropping on the floor of the melting room.

In the meantime the assay had shown that the brittle bullion con-

tained bismuth, and that this was the only substance present likely to be

the cause of brittleness. The Indian process of assaying silver has been

described by Dr. Busteed in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal (1870, Part II. p. 377); and a brief abstract of this paper is given

on p. 292 of Dr. Percy’s work before mentioned. The main features of

the process may here be briefly recapitulated for the purpose I have in

view. A fixed weight of the silver bullion to be assayed is dissolved in an

assay bottle, by means of nitric acid aided by heat ; the solution is diluted

with water and an eacess of hydrochloric acid is added, to precipitate all

the silver present as chloride. The silver chloride having been caused

to aggregate and settle by vigorous shaking, the bottle is filled up with

water and the supernatant fluid is subsequently syphoned off, to remove

all the now dissolved matter which may have been contained in the

bullion. Under these conditions of solution, precipitation and dilution

with water, chemists will readily understand that even a small trace

of bismuth, if it be in the silver, will reveal its presence by the

partial formation of insoluble oxychloride of bismuth. Now, in the

assay of the brittle bullion under consideration, solution in nitric

acid had been readily and completely effected by the aid of heat:

antimony and tin were consequently absent. Afterthe addition of water

and hydrochloric acid, however, the solution in the assay bottles could

not be cleared by shaking; the bulk of the silver chloride collected at

the bottom of the bottles, but the supernatant fluid remained turbid.

Tin and antimony being excluded, only two metals could produce this

result in the wet assay of silver, namely, mercury and bismuth. To

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 123

determine which of these is the interfering metal it is only necessary to

note the effect of solar light on the silver chloride formed ; when mer-

cury is present the silver chloride maintains its pure white colour un-

altered, while in the presence of bismuth the chloride immediately ac-

quires the well known purple colour under the influence of daylight.

Our assays, then, being turbid after precipitation and yet the silver

chloride blackening readily under the influence of daylight, it was evi-

dent that bismuth was present. The turbidity produced was due to the

partial formation of bismuth oxychloride ; and this compound diffusing

itself in its characteristic manner through the solution had broken up

part of the silver salt into very fine powder, so that some hours had to

elapse before the supernatant fluid cleared by the gradual subsidence of

both bismuth oxychloride and the finely divided silver chloride. The

assay was of course thus rendered unreliable, since the silver chloride to

be weighed, and on which the calculation of the fineness rested, was

contaminated with bismuth oxychloride. A cupellation assay of this

bullion was at once had recourse to for ascertaining its fineness.

So far, then, this tender of silver bullion seemed to establish the

following points :— |

1. Silver bullion of as high fineness as 990 per mille is rendered

unfit for coinage purposes by an amount of bismuth which, in this par-

ticular case, could not possibly have exceeded 1 per cent., and was proba-

bly less than that proportion.

2. Hammering a bar of silver bullion is not a good test for de-

tecting brittleness, as far as mint purposes are concerned. .

3. The toughening of silver bullion 990 fine, and containing only

a small amount of bismuth, by the aid of nitre in plumbago melting

pots, is not readily effected.

4. The presence of a trace of bismuth in silver of high fineness is

immediately detected in the ordinary course of assay by the Indian

method, but this bismuth interferes with the perfect accuracy of the

results obtained by that process.

A comprehensive research seemed therefore called for to elucidate

the whole subject, and the necessity for this investigation has since

been emphasized by the fact that silver bullion contaminated with bis-

muth has frequently found its way to the Mint since its first discovery

here. The points to be investigated seemed naturally to group

themselves under the following heads :—

I. Is our ordinary wet assay of silver susceptible of such easy

modification as will enable us to obtain perfectly accurate results by it,

in presence of bismuth, without having recourse to the confessedly less

accurate assay by cupellation? And, how may small quantities of bis-

124 J. Scully—On the Hifects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

muth in silver be readily estimated with the despatch indispensable for

mint operations P

II. What is the smallest amount of bismuth in silver that will

render it unfit for coinage, when present in bars of the Indian standard

fineness of 916°6 P And, what is the amount of bismuth that may be

tolerated in such bars without materially injuring their ductility P

III. How is silver bullion containing bismuth which may be

tendered to the Mint, to be dealt with, supposing that establishment

accepts any metal that is brittle; and how is the presence of bismuth

in refined bars to be accounted for ?

I. As the purity of the bismuth to be used in the experiments

now to be detailed was a matter of first importance, I may briefly men-

tion the steps taken to ensure the purity of the metal. Refined bis-

muth was dissolved in nitric acid, precipitated as basic nitrate by dilut-

ing largely with distilled water, the nitrate digested in solution of

caustic potash, and then well washed, dried, and reduced by heating

with charcoal in a clay crucible. A series of synthetical assays, made

by dissolving together pure silver and pure bismuth, the latter in the

proportion of from 1 to 5 millitmes, showed that our ordinary process of

assay, under such conditions, gave unreliable results, there being a sur-

charge, or higher report than should have been obtained, which varied from

0°7 to 2°7 mill. when the proportion of bismuth was from 3 to 5 milliémes.

A. modification in our process of assay was. evidently required if it were

to be used for determining the fineness of silver bullion containing bis-

muth ; and the necessary steps to this end were, after repeated experi-

ment, found to consist in adding the smallest possible amount of hydro-

chloric acid for the precipitation of the silver, and increasing the amount

of nitric acid in which it was first dissolved. _We use ordinarily for the

precipitation of an assay pound of silver 54 cc. of hydrochloric acid of

sp. gr. 1075, but 2°5 cc. of acid of this strength suffices for the complete

precipitation of an assay pound of even fine silver; so that we have here

at once a means of diminishing the tendency of any bismuth in the silver

to form insoluble oxychloride. If in addition to diminishing the amount

ef hydrochloric acid we added a considerable excess of nitric acid to the

solution (which acid would not in any way interfere with the silver

chloride formed), all risk of the partial formation of insoluble bismuth

salts seemed removed. This in fact has proved to be the case, and the

successful modified process for the assay of silver containing bismuth is

as follows :—

The assay pound of silver bullion containing bismuth is dissolved in

5:5 ec. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1200, with the aid of heat, about 5 ounces of

water are added and then 10 cc. of nitric acid sp. gr. 1320. The silver

1887. | Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 125

is now precipitated by the addition of 2°5 cc. of hydrochloric acid, and

after vigorous shaking the supernatant fluid will be found perfectly

clear; and it will remain so when the bottle is filled up with water, all

the bismuth present being in solution. Whenever samples of silver

now show the presence of bismuth during the assay, a fresh set is taken

up and worked by the modified process, the delay thus caused not

amounting to more than a few minutes. It may be mentioned here that

all our assays are reported to one-tenth of a milliéme (0'1 per mille).

Having thus ascertained the presence of bismuth in silver bullion

and put in practice a modification of the assay process which renders us

indifferent to its presence, it is still of importance to ascertain the

exact proportion of bismuth which is present in the bullion ; and, to be

of practical use for mint work, this determination must be effected

rapidly and as simply as possible. The ordinary directions given for

the separation of bismuth in the presence of silver, by first removing the

latter as chloride and then precipitating the bismuth as carbonate, do

not, I find, give accurate results when silver is present in such over-

whelming proportions as obtain in the cases under consideration.

I have therefore adopted the following plan, which a number of syn-

thetically prepared solutions have proved to give quick and good results,

though sometimes the amount of bismuth present is very slightly un-

der-estimated. The ordinary silver assay having given a rough visual

estimate of the amount of bismuth likely to be present, enough of the

bullion is taken to yield a fairly weighable amount of bismuth oxide in

the final result. The bullion is dissolved in agsmall amount of nitric

acid, the solution carefully diluted, and an excess of ammonium carbo-

nate at once added, the precipitation being aided by heating. The

carbonates of silver and copper at first formed are re-dissolved, and the

carbonate of bismuth after a time settles completely at the bottom of

the beaker. The contents of the beaker are then passed through a

filter, of which the weight of ash yielded by incineration is known, and

the carbonate of bismuth on the filter washed quite free of all traces of

silver. The filter is then dried, its contents transferred to a porcelain

crucible for ignition, the filter paper being ignited separately, treated

with a drop or two of nitric acid to re-oxidise any bismuth oxide reduced

by contact with the carbon of the filter, and the ash added to the cruci-

ble. From the weight of bismuth oxide thus found, after deducting

the weight of the filter ash, the amount of metallic bismuth present in

the sample of bullion taken for analysis can be at once found.

There are only two metals likely to interfere with accuracy of the

process here described, namely, cadmium and lead ; the carbonates of both

these metals being as insoluble in excess of the precipitant employed as

126 J. Scully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

bismuth carbonate. Cadmium is very unlikely to be found in silver

bullion and its consideration may be neglected, but if the presence of

lead is suspected the carbonate filtered from the silver solution is dissolv-

ed in nitric acid, evaporated down with the addition of sulphuric acid,

and the lead sulphate formed (if any) collected and weighed in the usual

way. The bismuth is again precipitated as carbonate and treated as be-

fore directed. Many experiments have been made with synthetically

prepared mixtures of silver, copper, lead, and bismuth, the latter two

metals being in very small proportion to the silver, so as to imitate the

composition of some refined bars. Ullgreen’s plan for the separation of

the carbonates of lead and bismuth, by dissolving them in acetic acid

and then precipitating the bismuth by means of a lead rod, does not work

satisfactorily and requires too long a time for the precipitation.

II. As it seemed likely that a large number of experiments would

be required to determine accurately the smallest amount of bismuth

that would injure the ductility of our coinage alloy, and the still smaller

proportion that would not sensibly affect this ductility, it was deter-

mined to begin the enquiry by a number of laboratory experiments on

small bars of silver; before trying the effects of bismuth on ordinary

coinage bars and with the procedure for lamination carried out in

the Mint. These laboratory experiments were made in the following

way: Pure silver prepared for assay check purposes, or an alloy of

silver and copper of which the exact composition had been determined

by assay, was melted in a clean plumbago crucible under charcoal.

When the metal was infusion the necessary amount of bismuth was

rolled in a piece of paper, carried down at once to the bottom

of the silver bath, and then thoroughly mixed with the silver by

stirring. The calculated composition was confirmed by assay of the

silver. When this mixture had been accomplished, the contents of the

crucible were poured into an open iron ingot mould, and after cooling,

either quickly by plunging the casting into water or slowly in contact

with the mould, the bar so cast was tested for brittleness by hammering

and rolling. The bars cast were of two sizes, one set being 3°75 inches

long, 1:125 broad, 0°375 thick and weighing about 6°2 troy oz.; and

another set 2°69 inches long, 1:125 broad, 0°25 thick and weighing

about 4°1 troy oz. When reduced to the fullest extent by rolling, these

bars were converted into straps about 0°015 in thickness. In laminat-

ing them they were twice annealed, first after having undergone four

pinches in the rollers, and again after the tenth pinch from the beginning

Similarly shaped bars of silver, without bismuth, were occasionally lami-

nated in the same way to obtain a sure means of comparison. Before

any result was accepted as to brittleness or its absence, the bar under

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 127

experiment was always remelted and tried at least a second time. The

number of experiments in this series amounted to fifty-three, and the

following is a summary of the results obtained.

Fine silver when alloyed with only 1 per mille (one thousandth

part of its weight) of bismuth, and the casting rapidly cooled by

plunging it into water as soon as it has set, has its ductility, as tested

by lamination, sensibly but slightly impaired, the straps resulting from

rolling having slightly jagged edges. When the proportion of bismuth

is increased to 2, 3, 4.and 5 per mille, the plan of cooling remaining the

same, the raggedness of the edges of the straps was somewhat increased

but not very markedly. If, however, the casting was allowed to cool

down completely, but very slowly, in contact either with the mould or a

stone floor, the results were very different. Under this condition of

cooling, a bar composed of fine silver with 4 per mille of bismuth was

completely brittle; it was readily broken and its fracture was strongly

crystalline. On laminating it, small cracks appeared all over the sur-

face on the second pinch, the bar emitting a crackling sound under the

rolls, much like the ‘‘ cry ” of tin, and on the 4th pinch the bar cracked

deeply at the edges. This remarkable effect on the molecular structure

of this alloy of silver and bismuth, as due solely to the mode of cooling

the casting, was repeatedly verified on the same metal by remelting and

cooling rapidly and slowly alternately. The case seems analogous to

that of bronze, where slow cooling of the alloy after casting is said to

make it hard and brittle.

Fine silver with 6 per mille of bismuth, rapidly cooled, was dis-

tinctly cold-short and crystalline on fracture; the bar cracked on the

surface at the 4th pinch. With 7 per mille of bismuth these evidences

of diminished ductility were slightly more pronounced. With 8 per

mille of bismuth the silver was still more brittle, the bar broke readily

when hammered, and cracked all over the surface on the 4th pinch from

the rolls. With 9,10 and11l per mille of bismuth, the bar of silver

could be readily broken in two by merely striking it against the edge of

an anvil, the fracture was coarsely crystalline, and the bar, in one case,

proved to be very red-short, a mere tap from the tongs sufficing to

break it in two when heated for the purpose of annealing. Although

these bars were so very brittle, it was still possible to roll them into

thin straps after careful annealing ; but the edges of the straps so pro-

duced were deeply jagged and indented by cracks. These bars also all

emitted the peculiar crackling noise under the rolls which has before

been mentioned.

An alloy containing 990 parts of silver and 10 of copper then had

added to it successively 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 per mille of bismuth, the cast-

128 J. Seully—On the Hffects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

ings being rapidly cooled. The remarks already made with reference

to fine silver alloyed with the same proportions of bismuth would apply

here almost exactly, that is to say, the bars were rolled out to a thickness

of 0°015 with somewhat ragged edges, so that, although ductility,

as thus tested, was impaired, it was only slightly so. With 6 per mille

of bismuth (fineness of metal on assay 983'9) the edges cracked a little,

and, after annealing and rolling out, the strap had decidedly jagged

edges and was split for some distance at one end. The bars containing

4, 5 and 6 per mille of bismuth were now remelted and allowed to cool

slowly and completely in the mould. They were all found to be highly

brittle, broke easily under the hammer—the fracture being granular

and not crystalline—and on being rolled they cracked badly, all over

the surface and at the edges, on the lst or 2nd pinch; in one

case the bar broke in two on the 2nd pinch. That these very different

results were again solely due to the manner of cooling was proved by

remelting and rapidly cooling the castings, when the same metal proved

comparatively ductile, as first stated.

Silver of the Indian standard of 916°6 per mille (the rest being

copper) to which 2 per mille of bismuth was added, gave on lamination

straps with slightly jagged edges and proved to be red-short. With 4 per

mille of bismuth the bars showed a few surface cracks on being rolled, and

the resulting straps had decidedly jagged edges. Slow cooling of these

castings did not affect their ductility, thus showing a marked contrast

to what had been observed in the case of fine silver and the alloy con-

taining only 10 per mille of copper. _When the amount of bismuth was

increased to 5 per mille, the copper present remaining at 83°4 per mille,

the bars were decidedly brittle and cracked readily on hammering—the

fracture being again granular, and not crystalline as in the case of fine

silver. On lamination both surface and edge cracks developed after

four pinches from the rolls, and in annealing one of these bars the

whole surface blistered considerably, no doubt owing to the temperature

having been carried a little too high. Standard silver with 10 per

mille of bismuth, reducing the fineness as ascertained by assay to

906°6, was very brittle, the bars breaking easily under the hammer, and

on the 4th pinch from the rolls splitting and cracking all over the sur-

face. In the course of these latter experiments it was ascertained that

with from 83°5 to 70 per mille of copper present slow or rapid cooling

of silver alloys containing bismuth made no appreciable difference in

their ductility.

The foregoing experiments having furnished some information as

to the amount of bismuth that might be expected to injure our coinage

alloy, it was now decided to test that point practically, by operating on

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 129

coinage bars subjected to the regular procedure for the manufacture of

rupees in the Calcutta Mint. The experiments made in this connection

were fourteen in number. The bars used here for coinage weigh about

253 troy ozs. and are about 20 inches long, 2:25 broad, and 1 inch thick ;

they are cast in vertical iron moulds. In lamination they are first re-

duced by 11 pinches to a thickness of 0°23 in.; they are then annealed

and finally reduced by 12 additional pinches to a thickness of 0:06 inch,

A number of bars, poured from a pot of which the contents had proved

on assay of a granulated sample to be 916°6 fine, were selected for the

experiments, and asa preliminary step one of the bars was laminated

to test its ductility. It rolled out with smooth “ wire” edges, and in-

deed its ductility was beyond suspicion asit resulted from a melting of good

coins. Another bar of the same batch was now melted and 1 per mille

of bismuth added to it, the result of the addition being checked, in this

and all following cases, by the assay of a granulated sample of the

metal, taken after thorough stirring. At the 8th pinch both edges of

the lower half of this bar began to crack, and at the 11th pinch these

eracks extended towards the middle line of the strap for about a quarter

of an inch, and occurred at about every half inch of the edge. After

annealing, and in the subsequent lamination toa thickness of 0:065 inch,

these cracks increased considerably in number, but did not become

sensibly deeper. The strap as finished was pronounced unfit for coin-

age purposes; for although two blanks conld have been cut from its

width, the edges were too jagged to admit of the blanks being obtained

exactly along the line from which it was desired to cut them—this posi-

tion being attained by means of a fixed lateral guide against which the

edge of the strap had to be maintained in cutting. With 2 per mille

of bismuth the results obtained on rolling were not much worse than

with 1 per mille. But the side cracks opened out more, and here again

it was noticed that the lower portion of the bar (upper and lower here

haying reference to the casting in upright moulds) was somewhat less

ductile than the upper part.

With 3 per mille of bismuth (fineness on assay 913°8) the bar

began to crack on both edges at the 9th pinch; at the 11th pinch there

‘were many cracks quite a quarter of an inch deep, aud after annealing

the bar these cracks increased at every pinch, so that at the 21st pinch

the strap was cracked all along both edges very badly. It would only

have been possible to obtain one blank from the width of this strap.

As it was perfectly clear that no further experiments were re-

quired with larger proportions of bismuth, the subsequent trials were

made on coinage bars containing 0°5 per mille, 0°25 per mille, and, by

dilution of the latter bars with standard silver, to even half and a quarter

130 J. Seully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of _ [No. 2,

of the lesser proportion just stated. Here the results were rather discor-

dant; they appear to have been somewhat influenced by the state of

different rolls, and by quick or slow annealing. The general outcome

of the tests, however, was that although some of the straps, containing

the proportions given of bismuth, were jagged at the edges, and so would

have yielded a diminished percentage in outturn of good blanks, others

were not materially worse than the average of straps without any bis-

muth at all. Asa result of this part of the enquiry, it may, I think,

be fairly concluded that if our coinage bars contain less than 0°5

per mille of bismuth their ductility will not be materially affected. It

must be borne in mind that these results only apply to bars of the size

and shape of those experimented on, and with the particular treatment

in lamination above detailed. With thinner bars and a different me-

thod of rolling, different results may be expected. The system of cut-

ting out blanks has also to be considered, for in some mints straps with

saw edges are not so prejudicial as in others.

III. We have now to consider the best way of dealing with jive

tendered for coinage which is proved to contain bismuth; and a few

remaining points. |

The only experiment on a large scale for refining such silver saad

as far as I know, has already been described. The want of success which

attended it seemed to be due to the very small amount of base metal in

the bullion, for the formation of a slag in which the bismuth oxide

could be entangled and removed by skimming; and possibly the reducing

action of the plumbago pots used may have pated to the difficulty. As

it seemed certain, however, that nitre would effect the desired oxidation

of the bismuth, some experiments were tried in this direction on a small

scale. About 20 troy ozs. of silver containing 2°5 per mille of bismuth,

and no other metal in appreciable quantity, was melted in a clay pot and

repeatedly treated with nitre and borax, the bath being skimmed from

time to time. After prolonged treatment in this way, the fineness of

the silver being three times tested by a dip assay, the report on the

silver was raised from 997°5 to 999:2; so there can be no doubt that

bismuth may be removed in this way. But the process, as several ex-

periments showed, is tedious; and of course is attended with a loss of

silver which in large operations would be of notable amount. Consider-

ing therefore that silver containing bismuth has hitherto only been met

with at the Mint in bars of high fineness, and that these are not readily

refinable by the ordinary process, it would seem as well, if such silver be

accepted at all, to deal with the bismuth init by the plan of dilution.

The proportion of bismuth any silver contains being ascertained, it may,

if convenient, be mixed by melting with sufficient silver free from bismuth,

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 131

and with copper, so as to reduce the proportion of bismuth in the coin-

age bars to less than 0°5 per mille; and thus neutralize its injurious

effects on the ductility of the bars.

The explanation of small quantities of bismuth being found in re-

fined silver, ¢. e., silver which has undergone parting for the extraction

of the gold which was contained in it, seems sufficiently indicated in the

following extract from Dr. Percy’s work (Silver and Gold, Part I,

p- 474), where that author is referring to the experience of Dr. Rossler in

parting silver: ‘‘ Bismuth has been found in nearly all kinds of silver ;

but in parting by sulphuric acid itis lost partly in the fine silver and

partly in the slags.” The italics are mine. That small quantities of

bismuth adhere very tenaciously to silver, when once mixed with that

metal by melting, is shown by the following experience. A quantity of

silver containing bismuth, which had accumulated from the laboratory

experiments before detailed, was melted, granulated, dissolved in nitric

acid, and the silver precipitated as chloride. The silver chloride, after

repeated washings, was reduced by heating in a plumbago pot with

chalk and charcoal. The resulting ingots, on assay, showed at once that

bismuth was still present in them in very appreciable quantity.

It may here be of interest to mention that I have found about 0°7

per mille of bismuth in some old Hindu punched coins, forming part of

of a treasure trove which was found at Chaibassa, in the Singhbhum

District,

The following is a summary of the main results detailed in this

paper :—

1. The Indian assay process for silver bullion is, incidentally, a

delicate qualitative test for the presence of bismuth in such bullion.

2. The assay process can be readily modified so as to give accurate

results in the presence of such proportions of bismuth as are likely to

be encountered in practice.

3. Fine silver when alloyed with only 1 per mille of bismuth has

its ductility sensibly impaired thereby; and 1 per cent. of bismuth is

snfficient to render fine silver, or alloys of it with copper down to 906

fine, extremely brittle.

4, Fine silver alloyed with small quantities of bismuth, and silver-

copper alloys down to 980 fine when containing small proportions of

bismuth, have the remarkable property of being more ductile when

rapidly cooled in water after casting than if allowed to cool very slowly,

thus resembling bronze in this respect.

5. Coinage bars such as are used in the Calcutta Mint, and with

the procedure there adopted for rolling, are quite unfit for coinage

132 J. Scully—On the Hffects produced by small quantities of — [No. 2,

owing to brittleness, if they contain only 3 per mille of bismuth ; while if

the latter metal forms less than 0°5 per mille of the whole mass the

ductility of the bars is not much affected.

In conclusion, I have much pleasure in recording my appreciation

of the services of Messrs. J. R. L. Durham and E. Hood, Head and Se-

cond Assistants in the Assay Office, in carrying out under my directions

many details of the experiments recorded in this paper.

Calcutta, March, 1887.

P. S.—June 10th. The experiments detailed in the foregoing paper

were completed early in November 1886 and it was proposed to embody

the conclusions formed in an official report to be submitted this year.

It was suggested to me, however, that the subject investigated might be

of general interest, and I had determined to publish this paper when

I noticed in the Chemical News of March 21st, 1887, (p. 187), a short ab-

stract of a paper on “ Silver containing Bismuth” by Messrs. Gowland

and Koga of the Japan Mint. I have delayed presenting this paper

until I had read the full text of the communication from Japan (Journal

of the Chemical Society No. CCXCIV, May, 1887, p. 410), and I may

now make a few remarks upon it in connection with what I have

advanced.

Messrs. Gowland and Koga’s very interesting paper to a great extent

covers ground which I had not investigated, viz., the want of uniformity

in composition of silver bullion containing bismuth. This part of the sub-

ject was suggested to me for experiment, as some of my results seemed

to show that bismuth mixed with silver by melting and careful stirring

does not diffuse itself evenly throughout the solidified mass. But that

fact, now proved by Messrs. Gowland and Koga, was of no practical impor

tance to us in the assay aud valuation of bullion, seeing that it is an

invariable rule now inthe Calcutta Mint to premelt and assay by a

granulated sample every kind of bullion tendered to the Mint—from refined

bars 999°5 fine to Mexican Dollars. The well-known want of homogeneity

in solidified silver-copper alloys, and other contingencies to which

silver bullion is subject, render this course imperative for purposes of

valuation on any extended scale. The cutting of samples from silver

bullion for assay, even if the spot where such samples should be cut has

been determined after. most laborious investigation, can at best give

merely approximate results ; as indeed our authors admit for the case of

silver containing bismuth.

With regard to the toughening or refining of silver containing

bismuth, Messrs. Gowland and Koga mention that this operation is

successfully performed in the Japan Mint by prolonged exposure of the

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. | 133

molten metal to the oxidising action of the air, aided in some cases by

the use of nitre. This may seem at variance with our experience here,

but is probably not so after all. The brittle bullion treated in Japan

evidently contained a considerable amount of base metal in addition to the

bismuth ; the slags formed in the early stages of the melting consisting

chiefly of litharge, &c. What we had to deal with was refined silver

990 fine, and in this case of course it would be more difficult to free the

bullion from bismuth than if lead and other base metals were present in

sufficient quantity to form a copious slag. But in any case (without,

however, venturing to give any authoritative opinion on the subject) I

doubt whether the Indian Mints would willingly undertake any con-

siderable refining operations on bullion. The conditions under which

these Mints receive bullion are very different from those obtaining in

the case of the American and Australian Mints, and the Imperial Mint

of Japan. In those countries encouragement has to be given to native

_mining industries, and hence a good deal of work in the way of

purification and separation of metals is undertaken by their mints.

In India practically all the bullion is imported by banks and merchants,

from Europe, America, and elsewhere, and tendered to the Mints for

coinage at a fixed charge. The Indian Mints may therefore, as in the

ease of the Royal Mint in London, very properly require that all

bullion tendered to them shall be free from taint of brittleness, and

so far fit for coinage. It is for the importers to make sure that their

purchases are satisfactory in this respect.

As to the amount of bismuth that will render silver brittle, my re-

‘sults seem to be substantially in accord with those of Messrs. Gowland

and Koga. They found that pure silver alloyed with only 5 per mille

‘of bismuth was very brittle; the casting, I suspect, was allowed to cool

slowly. Coinage bars of 900 fine, containing nearly 14 per mille of

bismuth, were brittle and altogether unfit for coinags, as I should have

‘expected. But by special treatment in the way of repeated annealings,

some of these bars were rolled down successfully without cracking, al-

though they still could not be used for coinage.

In the other matters treated of in my paper the results obtained will

‘supplement those of my confréres in Japan.

134 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

XI.—On Monge’s Differential Equation to all Conics.—By AsvtosH

Moxuopapuyay, M. A., F.R.A.S., F. B.S. E., Communicated by

Tue Hon’sne Manenpratat Sircar, M. D., C. I. EB.

{Received June 30th ;—Read July 6th, 1887.]

§. 1. Introduction.

The present paper relates to the general differential equation of all

conics, which was first published by the French mathematician Gaspard

Monge in his memoir “Sur les E’quations différentielles des Courbes

du Second Degré,” (Corresp. sur l’E’cole Polytech. Paris, 1809-13,

t. II, pp. 51-54, and, Bulletin de la Soc. Philom. Paris, 1810, pp. 87-

88). The subject seems to have attracted the notice of English mathe-

maticians, from the following statement made by Boole in his Differ-

ential Equations, pp. 19—20:

‘““Monge has deduced the general differential equation of lines of

the second order, expressed by the algebraic equation

ax? + bey+cy? + ex+fy=1.

d®y\2 dey d®y dy dty dsy\3_

(a a ees abr age ( ae

But, here our powers of geometrical interpretation fail, and results

such as this can scarcely be otherwise useful than as a registry of inte-

grable forms.”’

It will be noticed that Boole adds no specific reference; and as

the equation was not found, even after diligent search, as well in the

printed works of Monge as in his manuscripts, it was at one time

believed that Boole had made a misquotation, till Professor Beman

pointed out the source of Boole’s statement (Nature, t. XX XIII, pp.

581-582). But I remark that the matter could have been settled in

no time, by a reference to the Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific

Papers, where Monge’s memoir is actually mentioned (see Vol. IV,

p. 441, tit. Monge, No. 22).* Lastly, it is to be noted that the subject

has been very recently considered by Professor Sylvester, in his bril-

liant Lectures on the Theory of Reciprocants, which have been reported

with commendable promptitude by Mr. Hammond in the American

Journal of Mathematics (See, in particular, Vol. IX, pp. 18-19).

§. 2. Derivation of the Mongian.

We shall first consider the question of deriving the Mongian from

the equation of the conic; the known methods are more or less lengthy

It is

* Monge’s Equation was also noticed by Lacroix; see his great work Traité

du Calcul Différentiel et du Calcul Intégral, Paris, 1810—1819, t, III, pp. 698—699,

as a note to § 634, t. II, pp. 371—372; I may add that Lacroix gives the reference

to Monge’s original memoir.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conices. 135

and tedious; the easiest way known is that of Professor Michael

Roberts, who gave the following theorem in the Dublin Examination

Papers for 1876 (p. 269, Ques. 6) :

‘“ Prove that

d*y\3 (< Agi A (>! ?

(=) ae <1) a =)

where c, c’ are arbitrary constants, is a second integral of the dif-

ferential equation of the fifth order which represents a conic section.”

For Professor. Wolstenholme’s solution of this question, as well

as for the method of obtaining the Mongian by twice differentiating the

above equation, see Educational Times Reprint, Vol. XXIV, pp.

104-106, Question 4821; see also, Professor Burnside’s Question

7104, in Vol. XXXVIII, p. 71. The method which I propose is as

follows:

Let the equation of the conic be written in the standard form

(1) au? +2hay + by? +2ge+4 2fy+c=0.

Solving this as a quadraticin y, we have (ef. Salmon’s Conics, p. 72,

Ed. 1879)

(2) by=— (het f)t | (2 —ab)x* +2 (hf — bg)e-+ (f?— bc) } 2

which may be written, ;

(3) y=Pet Qtr Az? +2H2+B.

‘ ; aN?

Operating on both sides with (—) , we have

ary LON Ae Se 2

pertat (=) [(Av? +2Hz+B)*]

nes oe pee as hs 3.

~ ~ (Av? +2Ha+B)”

Therefore,

2 — ae ;

(2) ~* = +(AB—H2) *(Ae*4+2He+B).

Operating with (=). we have

d\ 8 (d?y\ — 37 _

Ge) (a) “J =6

which is accordingly the general differential equation to all conics;

if we write it in its developed form, after performing the operations

indicated, we have

2 2,5 2 8 4 3 3

(5 ) I A Bc 10 (4) =

da?) da® dx? dx? dx*

which is exactly the equation of Monge who wrote it in the now familar

form

9q?t — 45qrs+40r5 =0,

136 A. Mukhopadhyay— Differential Hquation to all Conics. [No. 2;

It may not be altogether uninstructive to point out that the ease

with which the Mongian is derived above is simply due to the fact

that, instead of differentiating (as other writers have done) the equa-

tion (1) which is an implicit function of # and y, we first express

y as an explicit function of x in (3), and then proceed to the differentia-

tion. ; .

It is interesting to investigate the differential equations of all

parabolas and circles by the above process. If the curve is a parabola,

we have h? =ab in the general equation (1), and (2) reduces to

by = — (haf) # } 2(f—dg)at (f2— be) b4,

which may be written

y = Pat Q +/ Ret.

Operating on both sides, as before, with (3): we get

d?y (=) =

ae a

da? 7 \da [(Re +8) ]

Boy lee

= +- — 3.

A (Re+S8)*

Therefore,

d*y — 2

(Ge) = ttm,

so that

(2)T(C)-"]=0

daz} -\dx? 4

which is accordingly the general differential equation of all parabolas.

When developed, this may be written |

d?y d*a _ P (2)

da? dx* das} ’

which equation was given by Professor M. Roberts in the Dublin

Examination Papers for 1875, (p. 277, Question 3).

If the curve is a circle, we must have a = b, h = 0 in the general

equation (1), so that (2) becomes | :

ay=—ft | at — 2age+ f? — ac | z

which may be written,

y= Q 3 /— «x? + 2Hx+B,

which leads to

dx ~~ (_9242Hx+B)?

dty | _—(B+H®)

le? - Aa : a

(— «? + 2H« +B)

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Hquation to all Conics. 137

From these, we have

Re pe 2

dx —«#?+2H«+B

and

d°y

dx?

= Constant,

i+(2))}

whence the differential equation of all circles is

d?y

G) [i+ aon =

But, ee, from the above values of © = lt we may derive

oe leat

dy\ ee = Jaane. |

‘28 : ay ~ (B+H2)””

; he

a aya ® _ dae

whence ee

@G) /d?y\3

= i

d®y\* d’y , dy /d'y dy d?y d*y

= ° =) ae oe da (4) ee doc dx? dx*’

and this would also be the differential equation of all circles. But,

then, if we examine this equation for a moment, we see that it con-

tains and, therefore, the integral equation corresponding to it

da*’

contains four arbitrary constants; hence the equation not only includes

all circles, but something more, viz., it denotes a certain family of

conics which include all circles. In fact, if we integrate the equation,

the result comes out in the form

Aw? + By?+2Gxe+2Fy+C = 0,

which represents conics referred to the centre.

§. 3. First Method of integrating the Mongian.

We shall next procéed to integrate the Mongian equation by

ordinary methods. As far as we are aware (and the same view is

apparently held by Boole and Sylvester), no direct integration of the

equation has as yet been performed, except Professor Sylvester’s

solution by the Theory of Reciprocants (Amer. Jour. Vol. IX, pp. 18-

19).

138 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Diferential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

d2 .

If we assume —! = z, the equation reduces to

da?

ge — 452 4-40 (F =) =0.

As this is homogeneous in z and its differential coefficients, if we put

| ud

the equation is transformed into

d?u du

eae = pee

9 Pe 18u ant AM 0

As this involves only the differential coefficients and the dependent

du d?% ~~ dv dv

1 1t7 ; 1 t —_ = — — pees

variable, a legitimate transformation is to pu 7), = = 2 oe

which give

9v ke — 18w+4u3 = 0.

To separate the variables, assume

v = (At3)u’,

dv dx :

whence rea a aah 2u(A+2).

Substituting and simplifying, we have

dN 2—6A?

idl | Wp BN

where the variables are separated,

' du 14+3A 1 6

Uhr Ge a aoe \-+ia fo

Integrating,

2 log ku = log X— 2 log (1— 3A),

where & is the constant of integration.

Therefore k?u?(1— 3A)? =,

which is the complete primitive required. It now only remains to

express wu, A in terms of x, y; for this purpose, it will be convenient

to enumerate the successive transformations we have used, viz.,

From these we get

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conies. 139

which, being substituted in the equation k®u?(1—3A)?=A, transform

it into | k?(2u? — 3v)? =v — >

which may be written

27h?o? — 3(14+ 12k'u?) 0+ w72(14+12k'u?) = 0.

Solving this as a quadratic in v, we have

18k?» = (14+ 12h?u2) + (14 12K) 3,

Introducing a new constant m, such that 124%m*?=1, this may be

written

= = = | (u? +m?) + m(u? +m”)? ;

which gives

2dax — evel We a eee

a (a Em?) + m(u +m)?

Let w= m tan ¢,

Therefore

bo gOS ide

eee m(1+ cos cos $)

Ee fae Sa ap TE

Peleg Se cee »?

2 cos 3 2 sin 5

Integrating,

2mx p p

me 7% = tan 5 OF) — cot 3°

But

2 tan p 2 cot —

u 2

— = tan p = Se OR, ———

b tan* © eee,

2 2

aay

1- (=+ n)

Hence,

hay sae

ag z fuse = =m (= ay

=~ log p mes n) |

140 . A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

Therefore

me 2 eo;

grep . 1— (= + ) ae

2 3 —_—

and , a Ale?-+2H'04 B! 2

whence, by two simple integrations, we easily pass to

y = Px+Q tr/ Ax? + 2Ha+ B, |

which at once leads to

aa*® + 2haey + by’? + 2gx+2fyte = 0,

the general conic-primitive sought. |

§. 4. Second method of integrating the Mongian.

We shall next proceed to shew how the Mongian equation may be

integrated by means of an integrating factor. The equation being

written, as before, in the form

8 2 3

gt D8 — 45g 22 140 (=) =0,

das da da

aia.

if we multiply this by the integrating factor z ° , it may be written,

—5 dz —Sdzd*z 40 —412 sdz\3

3 ee aa == 3 (/—) =

é da ae dc dx? i Ties &

By the application of ordinary methods (Boole, pp. 222—2z226.

Forsyth, pp. 82—85), the left hand member is seen to be a perfect

ditferential, and, integrating, we get

—5 dz —& ,dzy*

pe Syne ah

da * (az aren

which may be written

d —$ dz

os eae =-—3,,

ist

whence wei S = = — 3c, 44 3c.

Integrating again,

2 ° =¢,0°—Wrtc,,

d*y —#

whence oe a (c,x* — 2cga-+o3) *,

and the solution may be completed as before by two simple integrations.

eit

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. 141

It is worth noting that though this second method is apparently

much shorter than the first method, it may seem to be rather artificial

in the absence of any clue to the discovery of the proper integrating

factor ; the process, however, has the merit of furnishing an immediate

proof of Professor Roberts’ theorem, quoted above in §. 2. Thus, since

— i

eS = = — 3¢,%+3¢,,

we have

= 9¢,(c,2? — 2cov +063) +9(co”— C13)

= 9,2 5 4.9(c,?—c,c,).

Beer He:

gs (zz) =.9¢, %2* — 18¢,¢,2+ 9c,"

aris 2

Multiplying both sides by 2°, and then substituting z = as

9c, =c, and 9(c,?—c,c,) =c’, we get

dy § (eS ag (Ey

gaat) Naas), = Yael

which is exactly Roberts’ theorem quoted above ; and this not only

shews that the Mongian can be derived from this equation, but also

that it is a second integral of the Mongian.

§. 5, Permanency of Form.

Professor Sylvester has remarked that the Mongian equation has

permanency of form, that is to say, if we seek the transformation of

the Mongian when y is the independent and « the dependent variable,

the required formula is obtained by interchanging « and y in the

Mongian ; this theorem, which is proved from the properties of pro-

jective reciprocants, may easily be established as follows. Correspond-

ing to the integral equation

(4) ax*®+2haey+by?+2gx+2fyte = 0,

we have Monge’s differential equation. If we interchange w#, y, we get,

corresponding to the integral equation

(5) ay?+2hyx + bx’ +2qy+2fe+c= 0,

the differential Reese

d® x da d'a d*x dx \%

©) 9 (Gp) age ap age age + (a) =°

But the equation (5) represents a conic, and as all conics are repre-

sented by the Mongian, the Mongian corresponds to (5); but, as (6)

also corresponds to (5), we see that the Mongian and (6) are identical,

or mutually transformable, which establishes the theorem in question,

142 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

By a similar reasoning, we can prove that the equation

dx* dx* dx}?

which denotes all parabolas, the aes

ote ee. aoe 3 dy Py dry

(a) a +*Z (as) ~8 dea

which represents all conics pie to co-ordinate axes through the

centre, the equation

ab) ve 3 dy

*(z, a Y da dx’

which represents all conics referred to eit axes through the centre,

the equation

dy dy d’y

(eZ ee oe

which represents all parabolas referred to two tangents as axes, and

the equation

déy dy (2

| rik 2) dx® Pe da \da” =),

which represents all circles, have permanency of form. Of course, by

actual calculation we can establish that, if in each of these equations

we make y the independent and « the dependent variable, we have

‘simply to interchange x and y. We subjoin below the formule neces-

‘sary for such a verification.

dy had

dx da

d2x

dy dy?

da wae dx\*

day? dx dx

dsy (ae) dy dy?

das ay

dx da d® dx\* d* ad? xy 5

dey _ ay ap gt Nay) yp (ie)

dn* (F)

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Diferential Equation to all Conics. 143

da? pei

dey 109 = a) ae = (F ee

da — ign em ae

é a

day* ( , d'x d* 3 x0 \? dxy* d°x

A nan fash ag ae

+ men Oa a SIRT Uno Te

(zy

From the character of these formule, it must be evident that con-

siderable calculation is unavoidable even in the simplest cases of

verification.

§. 6. Geometrical Interpretation.

We shall, in the last place, refer to the geometrical signification

of the Mongian equation. It will be seen from the passage quoted

above (§. 1) from Boole, that he regarded this as a case where our

powers of geometrical interpretation fail. With respect to this pas-

sage, Professor Sylvester, in his Lectures on the Theory of Reciprocants

already mentioned (Amer. Jour., Vol. IX, p. 18), remarks, ‘“‘ The theory

of reciprocants, however, furnishes both a simple interpretation of

the Mongian equation, and an obvious method of integrating it”;

and the geometrical interpretation which the learned professor arrives

at, is that the differential equation of a conic is satisfied at the sextactic

points of any given curve. With regard to this geometric interpre-

tation, it may be remarked that it was not necessary to call in the

aid of the theory of reciprocants to establish this theorem. The

theorem is self-evident from the very definition of a sextactic point

as one where an infinite number of conics can be drawn having five-

pointic contact with the given curve; the integral equation of a conic,

with its five available arbitrary constants, denotes a determinable conic

for any given values of the constants, while the differential equation,

being free from constants, appropriately and adequately represents all

conics; and, as an infinite number of conics may be made to pass

through a sextactic point, the Mongian must be satisfied at sucha

point. But, apart from this, and with all deference to the opinion of

Professor Sylvester as that of one of the greatest of living mathematicians,

I believe that his geometrical interpretation is not the one contemplated

by Boole. A careful examination of the section on ‘“ geometrical

illustrations’’ (Boole, pp. 18—20) will make it clear that, by the

process of the geometrical interpretation of the differential equation

of a curve, Boole meant the determination of some particular geometri-

144 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

cal property which belonged to every curve of the system covered by

the differential equation, and the inherence of which property was

adequately represented by the equation; take, for example, the case

of the circle, of which the differential equation is

fat (Hy poe 3% (TY) =o,

Boole points out that this equation represents in an “absolute

character’ the geometrical fact of the invariability of the radius of

curvature of all circles; in fact, I may remark in passing that this

equation represents the vanishing of the angle of aberrancy at every

point of every circle; for, if 6 be the angle of aberrancy, and, p, g, 7,

- the first, second, and third differential coefficients of y in regard to «,

we have the formula

tan 6 = p

(See Salmon’s Higher Plane Curves, p. 369, Ed. 1879). Hence,

when the angle of aberrancy vanishes, we have

(1+p*)r = 3p¢’,

which is the differential equation of all circles. We see, then, that the

differential equation of a circle is the “‘ absolute ” analytical representa-

tion of some geometrical property which belongs to all circles, and

the existence of which is manifested by the differential equation. But.

Professor Sylvester’s interpretation of the Mongian equation is of an

entirely different character ; it does not furnish us with some property

common to all conics; it is simply regarded as the representative of

a sextactic point on any curve. What Boole wanted was some intrinsic.

property, that is, a property belonging to the curve whose differential

equation we are interpreting; what Professor Sylvester arrives at,

is, if J am allowed the expression, an extrinsic property, that is to say,

a property belonging not to the curve in question, but to some evtra-

meous curve which has six-point contact with the given one. If

Professor Sylvester’s interpretation were the one contemplated by

Boole, nothing would be easier than to interpret a differential equation.

Thus, for example, with reference to the differential equation of a circle,

we might simply say that it is satisfied at a quadruple point on any

curve. Again, the equation

d*y d*y set dy 2

reer ahd Bed

when integrated, is found to represent all parabolas; but would it be

a sufficient geometrical interpretation to say that the equation is

satisfied at a quintic point on any curve? The whole point of the

1887. ] H. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. — 145

matter is, it seems to me, that the property discovered must belong to

the curve with which alone we are concerned, and must also be repre-

sented by the differential equation to be interpreted. We miss the

mark, if we bring in any other curve which is totally foreign to our

purpose. I believe, then, that though the theorem enunciated by

Professor Sylvester is perfectly correct, it is not the geometrical inter-

pretation of the Mongian equation as contemplated by Boole; what

Boole sought for in vain, has yet to be discovered. |

26th June 1887.

XII.—Notes on Indian Ruyncnota, Hetrroprera, No. 2.

By E. T. Atkinson, B. A., PRESIDENT.

[Received May 25th, 1887j:—Reed June Ist, 1887. ]

Fam. PENTATOMIDS..

Subfam. Scure.ierina, Stal.

En. Hem. i, p. 4 (1870) ; iii, p. 3 (1873) :—Scutellerides, Pachycorides, Tetyyrides

and Eurygastrides, pt, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. pp. 25-51 (1843) :—Praan-

guli pt, Amyot, A. S. H. F. (2s.) iii, p. 401 (1845) :—Pachycoride and Eurygas-

tridw, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 3, 43 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 1, 61 (1867) :—

Scutellerida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 32, 33 (1864) ; Hem. Fabr. i, p. 9 (1868).

Primary and subtended veins of wings distant, including a broad

area in the middle: hamus present: scutellum very large, without

frena.

Div. Envisurarti, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum with two high wrinkles or ridges, those on

the former higher forwards: thorax and scutellum at base, together

gradually convex; thorax, at base, produced hindward between the

basal angles of the scutellum: second joint of rostrum much shorter

than the two apical joints taken together, and a little longer than the

apical joint: venter furrowed, without stridulatory strigose spots, in-

cisures gradually curved on the disc.

Genus Oxyprymna, Stal.

En. Hem. iii, p. 5 (1873):—Elvisura, Stal (nec Spinola) Hem, Afric, i, p. 35

( 1864.)

Venter with a distinct broad furrow continued through it: seutellum

with a small spine at the apex. In Hlvisura, the spine is wanting,

146 KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2

58. OXYPRYMNA SPINOLA, Sign.

Elvisura spinolle, Sign., A.S. HE. F. (4 8.) i, p. 55, t.2, f. 5 (1861); Walker

Cat. Het. i, p. 61 (1867).

Oxyprymna spinole, Stal, En. Hém. iii, p. 5 (1873).

Black shining : the head, pronotum, scutellum and especially the

abdomen, covered with a grey, powdery, pubescence: pronotum and

scutellum with round yellow spots. Head stout, rounded in front, the

tylus not extending beyond the juga; the lateral margins weakly

sinuate ; eyes a little prominent ; ocelli equally distant from the eyes and

the median line and somewhat near the posterior border; entire head,

above and below, except some weakly convex portions, covered with a

greyish pubescence which when removed discloses an extremely fine

punctuation: anterior border of pronotum straight, sides scarcely

sinuated, posterior border strongly rounded, and extending over the

scutellum ; posterior angles obtusely rounded; near the anterior border

are some depressions in which is the grey pubescence, also on the sides

and behind the posterior angles; on the disc are some small, round,

yellowish marks: scutellum acuminate at the tip, reaching the end of

the abdomen, and furnished with a strong median ridge; on each side,

near the lateral borders, are depressions clothed with the grey pubes-

cence, andon the disc 6-7 small yellowish patches like those on the

pronotum, and towards the second-third a punctured, yellowish band :

hemelytra extending weakly beyond the scutellum: abdomen with a

strong median groove and covered with a silken grey pubescence,

very abundant: feet short, stout, covered with the same pubescence.

(Sign.) Long, 16; broad 9 mill. Reported from India.

Genus SoLEeNOsTETHIUM, Spinola.

Solenosthediwm, Spinola, Ess. p. 360 (1837); Dallas. List Hem. i, p. 86 (1851)).

Solenostethium, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 26 (1843); Mayr, Reise

Novara, Hem. p. 13 (1866); Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 5 (1873). Includes Celoglossa,

Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 130 (1839); Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 59 (1839) ;

Stal, Hem. Afric. i, pp. 35, 52 (1864).

Body obovate: head a little convex, triangular, rather inclined and

flattened; eyes rather stout, globose; ocelli more distant from each

other than from the eyes; tylus longer than the juga; antenna, slender,

5-jointed, somewhat short, second joint shortest, 3-5 joints successively

increasing in length: first joint of rostrum not extending beyond the

lower surface of the head, fourth joint reaching the end of the rostral

canal, between the third pair of feet : thorax sexangular, basal produced

part truncate, basal margin straight, posterior and lateral angles round-

a ete Qeesp eee’ -

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 147

ed: scutellum very large, as broad as the abdomen: sterna and venter

furrowed, the sternal furrow ended on both sides by a high ridge, the

mesosternal ridges not produced anteriorly: venter in & with two

large, opaque, remotely somewhat-pilose spots : tibiss cylindrical, above

slightly bisubsulcate, furnished with a median ridge, margined on both

sides (Spin., Stal).

59. SOLENOSTETHIUM RUBRO-PUNCTATUM, Guérin.

Scutellera rubro-punctata, Guérin, Voy. Coq. Zool. ii. (2) p. 157 (1838).

Solenosthediwm rubro-punctatum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 7 (1851).

Solenostedium rubro-punctatum, Voll., Faune Ent. ? Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 4, t. 1,

f. 1 ( ") (1843): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 4 (1867).

Solenostethium rubropunctatum, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 6 (1873): Distant, A. M.

N. H. (6 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Head, thorax and scutellum of a rather deep reddish brown: head

triangular, immaculate, with a small longitudinal elevation in the mid-

dle ; antenne black: thorax sprinkled with numerous, very small, in-

distinct, green dots; three round orange spots on each side, of which

one on the anterior margin immediately behind the eyes, another in the

middle and a third near the posterior margin; anteriorly a seventh spot

in the middle: the scutellum is without green dots and has six orange

spots at the base at an equal distance from each other, and four in the

middle behind these, also at an equal distance from each other: body

beneath ferruginous yellow with a small black spot on each side of each

segment of the abdomen: femora reddish, with the tibie and tarsi

black (Guérin). Long, 13; broad 83 mill.

Reported from China, Java, Assam. The Indian Museum has

specimens from Naga hills, Sikkim. The ¢ has 10, the ? 8 spots on

the scutellum. 8S. chinense, Stal, is probably only a local variety, as the

links between it and S. rwbro-punctatum are nearly complete.

Div. SPH#ROCORARIA, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum without ridges, sometimes furrowed.

- Body above very convex, beneath very slightly so: head transverse,

very much inclined or perpendicular: thorax and scutellum at the base,

together, gradually longitudinally convex, basal margin of thorax ob-

tusely rounded towards the basal angles of the scutellum, posterior

angles usually obtusely rounded, not distinguishable as angles: second

joint of the rostrum much shorter than the two apical together: venter

without stridulatory, strigose spots, incisures gradually curved towards

the middle.

148 E. T. Atkinsen—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. |. [No. 2,

Genus Hyprroncous, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 615 (1870) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 7 (1878).

Body obovate, above much, beneath slightly convex: head much

inclined, triangular, with the eyes broader than long, very slightly con-

vex, lateral margins slightly sinuate near the eyes: rostrum reaching -

the apex of the third ventral segment, second and third joints almost

equally long, first and fourth shorter than them : antenne 5-jointed (?),

first joint not reaching the apex of the head: thorax sexangular,

anterior margin very broadly sinuate between the eyes, anterior lateral

margins subacute not retusely-sinuated before the lateral angles, basal

margin straight, posterior angles obtusely rounded: scutellum as broad

as the abdomen, gradually less convex towards the posterior part,

anterior margin of prostethium obtusely roundly-dilated towards the

coxe: mesosternum slightly sulcated: odoriferous openings continued

outwards ina long furrow: venter longitudinally, slightly furrowed

before the middle, sides flat, margins acute, incisures gradually curved

in the middle: feet somewhat shortish, tibiee furnished with two furrows

above. Differs from Spherocoris in having the anterior lateral margins

of the thorax not retusely sinuated at the lateralangles, the sixth

ventral segment in @ is roundly produced at the apex and covers the

genital segment and in @ is arcuately sinuate, leaving the genital

valvules free, also the tibize above are slightly somewhat 2-furrowed,

with a distinct wrinkle between the furrows.

60. HyYPERONCUS LATERITIUS, Westwood.

Spherocoris lateritia, Westw., Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 13 (1837).

Spherocoris lateritius, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 79 (1839) : Dallas, List Hem. 1,

p. 10 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 6 (1867).

Hyperoncus lateritius, Stal, Hn. Hem. iii, p. 7 (1873).

Obscurely rufescent, much punctured: pronotum with four dots

arranged in a transverse line; scutellum with twelve (six, four, two) ;

body beneath antenne and feet, rufescent ; abdomen with a large basal

spot (Westw.). Body long 11-113 millims.

Reported from China: there isa doubtful specimen in the Indian

museum from the Dikrang valley (Assam).

Div. Scutrennaria, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum without wrinkles or ridges, sometimes

furrowed : body beneath distinctly convex, generally above and below

equally convex or beneath more convex. Thorax at the base hind-

wards, scutellum at the basef orwards, more or less conyexly-inclined

1887, | KR. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. - 149

which is best seen from the side; thorax generally distinctly truncated

posteriorly before the entire base of the scutellum, basal angles general-

ly very distinct, situate before or outside the basal angles of the scutel-

lum: venter without stridulatory strigose spots, rarely in & with two

opaque spots, incisures gradually curved towards the middle: second

joint of rostrum generally shorter and often much shorter than the two

apical joints taken together. |

Genus Cantao, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 29 (1843) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 3, 17 (1851 ); Walker,

Cat. Het. i, p. 14 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric, i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii, pp. 8, 10,

(1873); Mavr, Reise Novara, p. 14 (1866).

Body narrowly obovate, elongate: head narrow, elongate, lateral

margins slightly sinuate ; rostrum not extending beyond the first seg-

ment of the abdomen: pronotum broader than long, basal margin

straight towards the sides, posterior angles very distinct, dentated, no

transverse furrow ; scutellum as broad as the abdomen, longer, distinct-

ly impressed at the base near the angles, somewhat truncate or flattened

at the tip; exterior margin of corium straight; membrane extending

beyond the end of abdomen; anterior margin of propleura entirely

obtuse, somewhat callous, posterior margin not sinuate at the angles:

venter without opaque spots, with a longitudinal groove in the middle,

sides more or less convex, genital segment in ¢ duplicate or divided

into two parts, the basal rounded at its tip, the other extremely trilobed

and truncate at the tip; vulvar plates in ?, narrow.

61. CantTao OcELLATUS, Thunberg.

Cimezx ocellatus, Thunberg, Nov. Ins. Spec. iii, p. 60, f. 72 (1784): Gmelin, ed.

Syst. Nat. i (4), p. 2183 (1788).

Cimex dispar, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 81 (1794); Donovan, Ins. China, Hem.,

t. 13, f£.1 (1798), sec. Dallas: Stoll, Punaises, p. 143, t. 37, f. 260 A. & B. (1788).

Tetyra dispar, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803); Schiddte, Kroyer’s Nat.

Tidsskr., iv, p. 281 (1842).

Callidea dispar, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 394 (1835) ; Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. iii,

p. 99, t. 105, f. 324 (1835).

Calliphara dispar, Germar, Zeitschr., i (i) p. 123 (1839).

Callidea ocellata, Westw., Donovan 1. c. p. 47, t. 20, f. 1. (1842).

Scutellera dispar, Blanchard, Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, p. 158, Hém. t. 8, f. 2 (1840).

Cantao dispar, Am. & Serv., Hist. Ins. Hém. p. 29 (1848).

Cantao rufipes, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 17 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.14

(1867).

Cantao ocellatus, Dallas, 1. c. p. 17 (1851); Vollen., Faune Ent. I’ Arch. Indo-

Néerl., i, p. 10 (1863) ; Walker, I. c., p. 14 (1867); Stil, Hem. Fabr., i p. 9 (1868) ;

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 616 (1870); En. Hem. iii, p.10 (1873): Distant, A. M.

N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

150 KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Orange yellow or carneous: head yellow, the base and antennso

ceerulean: pronotum and scutellum carneous, the former with some-

times many, sometimes fewer flavescent spots, some with a black point

scutellum large, with a small impressed moon-shaped black spot on

each side at the base, then three yellow rings marked with a black

point, the median larger, behind the middle are two small yellow

lunules spotted black and posteriorly rings with a black point in the

middle: pectus cyaneous: abdomen carneous with four cyaneous ma-

cular strie ; of which the median are larger: feet cyaneous, femora

rufous: varies with the sex, with thorax having on both sides a very

acute, incurved porrect spine, yellow at base, black at apex (C. dispar,

Fabr.). Long 14-23 mill. Very variable in the colour above, from a

pale sordid yellow toa deep rich orange-red, and in the spots on the

pronotum and scutellum, from almost immaculate with merely traces of _

spots, to the full number ; all these varieties occur in India.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Philippines, China, India. The

Indian Museum has specimens from Assam, Sikkim, N. India, Malabar,

Ceylon, China.

Genus Pacintocoris, White, Dallas.

Pecilochroma, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 84 (1842): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 11

(1873): Pecilocoris, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 100 (1848); List Hem. i, p. 4

(1851) ; Stal, Hem. Afric., i, p. 33 (1864); Mayr, Reise Novara, Hem., p. 17 (1866) ;

Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867). The name Pecilochroma was used by Stephens in

1829 for a Lepidopterous genus of Tortrices, and Dallas with White’s consent

changed the name of the Hemipterous genus to Pécilocoris in 1848 and described

it for the first time, so that for very good reasons, the new name must stand.

Body ovate, convex: head rather large, broad, the lateral margins

sinuated before the eyes: antenne about half the length of the body,

5-jointed ; basal joint short, robust; second, shorter and most slender ;

3-5 joints each as long as, or longer, than the two basal united, nearly

equal, compressed, broad and furrowed longitudinally on the sides:

rostrum usually extending beyond the second segment of the abdomen,

sometimes nearly toits apex: scutellum slightly truncated at the apex :

abdomen with a more or less distinct .furrow beneath ; the three penul-

timate segments in the 3 not bearing the dull space on each side which

exists in Tectocoris, Hahn, and the anal plate, in do, simple, formed of

one piece, sinuated at the tip and fringed with hairs (Dallas).

62. P@cILOCORIS HARDWICKII, Westwood.

Tectocoris Hardwickii, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 13 (1837).

Tectocoris affinis, Westwood, 1. c. p. 13 (1837).

Pachycoris nepalensis, Herr. Schaff. Wanz. Ins; iv, p. 1. t. 109, f, 339 (1839).

ESE OO

1887. | BE. T, Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 151

Scutellera Hardwickii, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 185 (1839).

Pecilochroma Hardwickii, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873); Distant, A. M. N. H.

(5 8.), iii, p. 44 (1879).

Pecilocoris Hardwickii; Dallas, Trans. E. S.v, p. 107, t. 13, f.8 (1848): List

Hem, i, p. 18, (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

3, 2. Ovate, convex, above yellowish orange or red, opaque, rather

finely and thickly punctured, head black, thickly and strongly punc-

tured; eyes and ocelli brownish: pronotum with the anterior portion

and two large spots on the disc, black: scutellum slightly wrinkled

transversely at the base; normally, with eleven black spots, placed,

three at the base of which the median one is large and elongated-tri-

angular, a small round one on each side of the apex of this, a transverse

row of four across the disc, behind the middle, the two intermediate of

which are the largest and the two smaller towards the apex; these

spots ar¢ generally more or less confluent or partially obsolete, forming

several varieties: margins of the hemelytra black piceous: abdomen

beneath orange-red, very faintly wrinkled, the basal segment entirely,

the second (except the middle), the third and fourth on the lateral

margins, the terminal segment, except its lateral margins, (and in the

3, the base) and the anal apparatus, violet-black; the penultimate

segment is entirely red: pectus black, tinted with violet, finely punc-

tured; the lateral angles of the prostethium and part of the antero-

lateral margins, red: legs violet-black: antennze and rostrum black.

Dallas remarks that in P. nepalensis, Herr. Schaff., the spots have be-

come confluent so that the general colour of the upper surface is black :

the pronotum is nearly covered by the two spots on the disc which ex-

tend forwards to the black anterior margin and posteriorly to the

hinder margin; the five spots at the base of the scutellum are united,

forming a large waved band across the base, from the middle of which

the apex of the triangular basal spot projects, while the two interme-

diate spots of the transverse row are joined to one another and to the

two subapical ones, forming a large, rounded lobate patch. In

P. afinis, Westwood, the two subbasal and the two subapical spots are

wanting and the two spots on the disc are sometimes obsolete. There

are numerous varieties between these, but all are distinguishable by the

uniform red colour of the fifth abdominal segment (Dallas). Body

long, 17-20 mill. a very variable species: insome the spots are large

and confluent so as to make the general appearance of the upper surface

of the scutellum black, and in others red is the prevailing colour. P.

nepalensis, Herr. Schaff., if not specifically different, forms a well mark-

ed variety. Obovate, moderately convex; black, shining, finely and

closely punctured, on the antenne, feet and the underside, bright shin-

152 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 2,

ing violet: the posterior greater part of the thorax (except two round

black spots), a broad transverse band above the middle of the scutellum

having forwards four and hindwards three obtuse teeth, and the apical

margin of the scutellum, sanguineous. In it, the subbasal spots on the

scutellum are confluent so as to forma black band more or less broad,

posteriorly dentate; whilst in 7’. affinis, Westwood both the sub-basal

and sub-apical spots are wanting. P. hardwickii in Dallas’ figure,

forms the mean between these two extremes.

Reported from India, Nepal, Silhat: the Indian Museum has spe-

cimens from the Khasiya and Naga hills, Sibs4gar and Sikkim.

63. Pacinocoris LAtus, Dallas.

Pecilocoris latus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 101, t. 18, f. 4 (1843) ; List Hem.

i, p. 12 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9 (1867).

Pecilochroma lata, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1878).

3, 2, Rounded-ovate, not very convex ; above yellow, clouded with

orange-red, thickly punctured : head violet, shining, thickly and strong-

ly punctured; eyes brown; ocelli red: pronotum thickly punctured,

somewhat rugose, with the anterior angles, and two large spots on the

disc, extending to the posterior margin, deep blue-violet: scutellum

thickly and finely punctured, slightly wrinkled transversely at the base ;

with a spot in each basal angle, a large, irregular, transverse patch in

the middle of the base, and a transverse row of four spots of which the

two intermediate are by much the largest, across the disc, behind the

middle, deep blue-violet ; the surface around all the spots clouded with

orange-red: margins of hemelytra, black: abdomen beneath red, im-

maculate, thickly and finely punctured, and slightly pilose, with a strong

median furrow at the base: anal apparatus reddish: pectus thickly

punctured, yellowish, variegated with blackish violet, the prostethium

pale red, with a violet-black spot at the base of the anterior legs:

femora testaceous, [sometimes violet-black] their apices with the tibize

and tarsi shining violet-black: head beneath yellowish in the middle,

with its margins violet: antennz black, the two basal joints with a

violet tinge: rostrum testaceous with the two last joints black, the tip

reaching the base of the fourth ventral segment. In some the fine

spots in the middle of the base of the scutellum are confluent but nor-

mally they are as in P. Drurci, Dallas. Body, long 19-21 mill.

Reported from China, Assam. The Indian Museum has specimens

from Assam. The variety with the five spots at the base of the scutel-.

lum confluent agrees with P. donovani, Burm. in this particular, and also

in the absence of the two subapical spots and the length of the rostrum,

but differs in form and general colouring.

1887. | EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 153

64. Pacinocoris orNATUS, Dallas.

Pecilocoris ornatus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p.15 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 9

(1867).

Pecilochroma ornata, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873): Scott, A. M. N. H. (4s.)

xiv, p. 289 (1874).

Above orange-yellow, finely punctured with black: head rather

short, the tylus considerably longer than the juga, with the apex slight-

ly turned up; vertex black, with three rows of golden green punctures

of which the lateral are broadest, and include the ocelli; front of head,

deep red, punctured with violet and green; the apex orange: thorax

with the anterior and lateral margins and two large spots on the pos-

terior margin, black, leaving only a narrow transverse band and a longi-

tudinal median line, orange; scutellum with fine confluent black spots

on the basal half, forming a broad, irregular W ; four others across the

middle, united in pairs; forming a band interrupted in the middle, and

two close to the apex; all the black spots are tinted with violet and

brassy green; abdomen beneath ochreous, very finely punctured, with a

large strongly punctured golden-green spot, on each side of every seg-

ment ; ventral furrow reaching the apex of the fifth segment; pectus

testaceous, variegated with golden-green: femora of the same colour

with golden-green reflections ; tibize brown, slightly metallic ; tarsi pice-

ous: rostrum yellowish-brown, with the tip black, reaching the middle

of the fourth ventral segment: antenne violet black; basal joint

orange-black at the tip (Dallas). Long 15—15% mill.

Reported from N. India, Japan.

65. PacrLocoris DRURaI, Linn.

Cimex drurei, Linn., Mant. PI. ii, p. 584 (1771): Drury, Ill. Ins. i, p. 94, t. 42,

f. 1 & 5, a,b (1770): Sulzer, Gesch. i, p. 95, t. 10, f. 5 (1776): Fabr., Syst. Ent.

p. 697 (1775) : Spec. Ins. ii, p. 339 (1781) ; Mant. Ins. ii, p. 281 (1787) ; Ent. Syst.

iv, p. 83 (1794) ; Gmelin ed. Syst. Nat. i(4), p. 2129 (1788): Stoll, Punaises, p. 147,

t. 37, f. 267 (1788). India.

Tetyra drurei, Fabr. Syst. Rhyng. p. 1382 (1803): Burm. Noy. Acta Leop. xvi,

Suppt. i, p. 287 (1834).

Scutellera drurei, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i), p. 135 (1839).

Pecilocoris drurei, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p.103, t. 13, f. 6 (1848) ; List

Hem. i, p. 12 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma drureig Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873); Distant, A. M.N. H.

(5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Scarlet: head and antenne black; antenne 5-jointed, a little

longer than the thorax, the two first joints, shortest: thorax convex,

the lateral margins slightly reflexed, two suboval spots which form an

obtuse angle with the head and are truncated on the sides, black :

154 KH, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

scutellum with two black bands formed of confluent spots [not always

confluent], the basal allowing two scarlet spots to be seen, that just below

the middle, irregularly indented on both sides and two round black

spots at the apex: hemelytra opaque, membrane fine and with the

wings semi-transparent: abdomen beneath scarlet, with an oblong

black spot at the anus, and four others on each side reaching the margin :

pectus, rostrum and legs blue-black (Drury). Long 18 mill.

Dallas remarks that the normal condition of this species exhibits

the typical colouring of the genus: in it the spots on the scutellum are

arranged,—five basal, of which the median one is somewhat triangular

and rather short, the two intermediate smallest ; two behind these, placed

opposite the intermedial basal ones, a row of four across the disc, rather

behind the middle and two towards the apex : the seven spots at the base

are frequently confluent, forming a large basal patch with three large

notches in its posterior margin (asin Drury’s figure) ; the row of spots

across the dise is also often united to form a transverse band. The

narrow basal segment of the abdomen and generally the second seg-

ment also, are violet-black; the stigmata of the other segments are

surrounded by spots of the same colour which generally occupy the en-

tire lateral margins of the segments and thus form a black border to

the abdomen; the terminal segment, except the posterior and lateral

margins, is black.

Reported from Hong-Kong, Silhat, Assam: the Indian Museum

possesses specimens from Sikkim and Assam.

66. PacriLocris OBSOLETUS, Dallas.

Pecilocoris obsoletus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 104 (1848) ; List Hem. i, p.

12 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).

3. Ovate, above bright velvety-red, thickly punctured : head and

eyes, black ; ocelli reddish : thorax with the anterior and lateral margins

smooth, shining, rather coarsely and irregularly punctured ; two indis-

tinct yellowish patches within the anterior angles, and faint indications

of two elongated violet spots on the disc: scutellum slightly wrinkled

transversely at the base, and with indications of eleven violet spots,

placed five at the base, two behind these, and four in a transverse row

across the middle; the apical portion orange, finely reticulated with

red; margins of hemelytra bright red, thickly and coarsely punctured :

abdomen red, shining, with a few scattered punctures, and a faint

longitudinal furrow at the base; the basal segment pitchy black, a

small spot around each of the stigmata, and a large crescent-shaped one,

on the terminal segment, black; anal apparatus red: pectus violet-black,

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 155

shining, finely and sparingly punctured, a dull space on each side of the

meso- and meta-stethium; the antero-lateral margins and the lateral

angles red: femora brownish, slightly tinted brassy, their apices, the

tibie and tarsi, brassy black; head beneath shining violet, punctured,

yellowish at the base: antennz black, the three basal joints tinted with

violet and brassy, the two apical covered with short greyish hairs ;

rostrum pitchy (Dallas). Long, 19 mill.

Reported from Hong-Kong: I possess specimens from Assam and

Sikkim. Dr. Stal united this species with P. druret, and, although

the indications of spots are arranged in exactly the same manner as in

P. drurei, the two subapical ones are generally wanting, whilst the red

colour of the margins of the hemelytra, the colour of the legs, the pecu-

liar texture of the margins of the thorax, and the clothing of the two

last joints of the antenne, mark it as a distinct species. In some, be-

neath, the colouring is exactly as in the preceding, whilst, in others, the

pectus and venter are entirely brassy green, and only the anal apparatus

and the antero-lateral and lateral margins of the pectus are red.

67. PaciLocoRis INtERRUPTUS, Westwood.

Tectocoris interrupta, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 14 (1837).

Scutellera interrupta, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i), p. 184 (1839): Herr. Schaff., Wanz.

Ins. v, p. 73, t. 172, f. 531 (1839).

Pecilocoris interruptus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soe. v, p. 102 (1848): List Hemi.

i, p. 12 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma interrupta, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

Broadly ovate, rather flat; above brassy black, thickly and finely

punctured: eyes pale brown, ocelli red: pronotum with the posteriot

margin and a curved longitudinal line on each side, within the lateral

angles, bright [orange] red: scutellum with a narrow, transverse line

on the disc near the middle, interrupted in the middle, and the apical

margin, bright [orange] red: margins of hemelytra brassy black, of

the abdomen black, variegated with bright red ; abdomen beneath, black,

shining, slightly brassy, the bases of 2-5 segments in the middle, and

a@ marginal spot on the junction of each segment, red: anal aparatus,

black, margined with red in the 9: pectus brassy black, thickly and

finely punctured : antenne, rostrum and legs, black (Dallas). Dallas

remarks that in a long series of this insect there is no indication of dis-

tinct spots, but it is probable that the anterior margin and two spots on

the disc of the pronotum are black, and that the spots on the scutellum

are arranged much as in P. hardwickwi. Body long 15-19 mill.

Reported from Nepal, India. The Indian Museum has a specimen.

156 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

68. P@cILOCORIS PURPURASCENS, Westwood.

Tectocoris purpurascens, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).

Scutellera purpurascens, Germar, Zeitschr. i. (i), p. 1385 (1839).

Pecilocoris purpurascens, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 103, t. 13, £. 5 (1848) ;

List Hem. i, p. 13 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867). - .

Pecilochroma purpurascens, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

3, 2. Ovate; above variegated with violet and black, thickly and

strongly punctured : head nearly smooth, shining, slightly wrinkled and

punctured at the base and the apex; eyes and ocelli brown: pronotum

with a small red spot in the middle of the anterior margin, a correspond-

ing one on the posterior margin and a small streak of the same colour

on each side towards the lateral angles: scutellum with a small trans-

verse streak on each side before the middle, a smaller longitudinal one

towards the apex and an oblique one on each side of this, on the lateral

margins, bright red: margins of hemelytra violet-black: abdomen be-

neath slightly wrinkled, shining brassy-green, the margins violet with

an irregular, transverse, red streak on each side of the 2-5 segments:

anal apparatus brassy black: pectus violet and green, shining, finely

punctured, with a dull black patch on the meso- and meta-stethium: legs

violet-black: head beneath violet and green, shining, punctured : an-

tenne and rostrum, black (Dallas). Dallas observes that the normal

arrangement of the spots (indicated by the strong violet tints on various

parts of the surface) is the same as in P. drurei. Body long 17—19

ndiHth dah,

Reported from Nepal, Sikkim.

69. Pacinocoris PuLCHER, Dallas.

Pecilocoris pulcher, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 105, t. 13, f. 7 (1848): List

Hem. i, p. 18 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Neéer. i, p. 5, t. 1, f. 2,

2a, (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma pulchra, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

3 Ovate, deep velvety purple, closely and finely punctured: head

above of a vinaceous purple, below violet and green, shining, orange at the

base, with four longitudinal impressions along the tylus and two oblique

dotted hollows at the inner side of the eyes, blackish along the margins

of the lobes: eyes brownish, ocelli small, reddish : 1-2 joints of antennee

violet, smooth, rest black, pubescent: pronotum broadly margined with

red laterally and anteriorly, and with a narrow, median longitudinal line

of the same colour, on the disc, reaching the posterior border: scutel-

lum deep purple with the base (irregularly), a transverse band across

the disc before the middle, and a narrow median line uniting these one

to the other, also a small spot on each side of the latter (sometimes

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. a

wanting), shining violaceous: margins of the hemelytra brownish pur-

ple: abdomen with a strong furrow at the base, bright red, with a

violet reflection, smooth, shining, very finely and moderately punctured ;

a black spot around each of the stigmata and a faint band of the same

colour across the terminal segment: anal plate red: pectus purple va-

riegated with violet and greenish tints, shining, thickly and finely punc-

tured, the antero-lateral margins and lateral angles, red: femora brassy.

purple ; tibiz, shining violet; tarsi black: rostrum brassy black, basal

joint pale pinkish violet. Spots as in P. drure@i except that the two

subapical ones are wanting, others easily traced in the violet tints of

the base, and the broad band across the middle of the scutellum.

(Dallas). Body long 18-19 mill.

Reported from Malabar, Sumatra.

70. PactLocoris CHILDRENI, White.

Tectocoris childreni, White, Charlesworth Mag. N. H. iii, p. 542 (1839).

Tectocoris (Pecilochroma) childreni, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 84, t. 7, f. 1

(1838). _

Pecilocoris childrent, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 106 (1848) ; List Hem. i, p.

13 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma childreni, Stal, iii, p. 13 (1873).

Head (including eyes, antenne, and rostrum) black, distinctly

margined ; ocelli yellow: thorax and scutellum yellowish-fulvous, the

former in front black, the black colour extending in a narrow line along

the slightly raised lateral margin, with four transverse black spots,

the two dorsal ones larger and rather quadrate: legs green: scutellum

obtuse, with eleven black spots, three at the base, the median one tri-

angular and largest, two behind these sub-rotundate, four in the middle

(the two inner largest) and two near the tip: hemelytra black, some-

what shining: body beneath, purplish black, sides of abdomen with

four transverse yellow lines, sometimes confluent at the base and form-

ing a yellow patch, end of abdomen green (White). Long, 18; breadth

of pronotum, 11 mill.

Reported from Nepal, Sikkim.

The spots on the scutellum are placed,—three basal, of which the

median one is large, triangular and produced on each side at the base,

in such a manner that it appears as though in the normal state there

would be an additional spot on each side, as in P. drurei; two behind

these, a row of four across the disc, rather behind the middle and two

‘subapical. Distinguished from P. drure@i by the broad, black anterior

margin of the pronotum and the black anal plates: from P. hardwickii

by the margins of all the segments of the abdomen being violet-black

158 BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

and from both, by the presence of four spots on the disc of the pronotum

and by the entire pectus being violet-black. It is possible that in the

normal condition the disc of the abdomen may be yellow or orange

margined with black (Dallas).

71. PacrLocoris opssus, Dallas.

Pecilocoris obesus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 18 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9

(1867).

Pecilochroma obesa, Stal, En. Hem, iii, p. 13 (1878).

Convex, rather short: above bright red, shining, very finely and

rather sparingly punctured, with the head, the fore-part of the thorax

and three or more less distinct spots at the base of the scutellum, brassy

green: thorax slightly excavated on the anterior margin, the impres-

sion strongly punctured and with a strong impression about the middle

of each antero-lateral margin: body beneath, antenne and legs bright

brassy green ; the antero-lateral margins of the pectus and a spot in

the middle of the abdomen, red: rostrum black, reaching the middle of

the third segment of the abdomen (Dallas). Body, long 133-14¢

mill.

Reported from Assam, N. India.

72. PM@cCILOCORIS RUFIGENIS, Dallas.

Paecilocoris rufigenis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 14 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9

(1867).

Pecilochroma rufigenis, Stal, En. Hem, iii, p. 13 (1873).

Above orange-yellow with violet reflections, thickly and finely

punctured: head purplish red with the base and the whole of the tylus

black: thorax with the anterior and lateral margins violet and with a

black spot within each anterior angle: scutellum with a narrow black

band across the base and a black triangular spot on each side before the

middle, touching the lateral margin, its base faintly wrinkled ; basal

angles strongly rugosely-punctate: margins of hemelytra, black : abdo-

men beneath and anal plate reddish orange tinted with violet, smooth,

shining, very faintly punctured, the terminal segment violet-black,

except its margins and a transverse streak of the same colour on each

side of the rest of the segments, except the basal one: ventral furrow

distinct, reaching apex of the fifth segment: breast shining violet, with

the antero-lateral margins, red: legs brassy black: rostrum black,

reaching the base of the terminal segment of the abdomen: head, be- |

neath red; with the rostral canal violet-black : antenne black (Dallas).

Long, 19 mill.

Reported from Assam.

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes ow Indian Rhynchota. 159

73. PM@cILOcoRIS ANISOSPILUS, Walker.

Pecilocoris anisospilus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9 (1867).

Black: head smooth, witha punctured furrow on each side be-

tween the eyes, and with another on each side in front: thorax bright.

red, with a black spot on each side on the disc and with a smooth

black band along the anterior margin which is largely punctured :

pectus with a lanceolate red streak along each side: scutellum bright

red, with three bands of black marks: the first band of five spots of

which the median is large and triangular reaching the fore border, the

inner pair are small and isolated, the outer pair large and lateral and

touching the anterior margin: of the second band of four black spots,

the inner pair are large, the outer pair, small and lateral; the third

band is composed of two black points : abdomen beneath red, black at

the base and at the tip (Walker). Rather shorter than P. dives,

Guérin; differs in the markings on the thorax and scutellum and the

abdomen beneath has no black spots on each side. Possibly only a

small variety of P. ornatus, Dallas. Long, 13 mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam).

Genus TETRARTHIA, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 3, 20 (1851): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii,

p. 8, 13 (1873): Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p.12 (1866): Walker, Cat, Het. i, p. 18

(1867).

Body elongate, sericeous: head rather long, convex, especially

anteriorly, lateral margins somewhat acute before the middle and

sinuated, no longitudinal impression near the eyes, tylus longer than

the juga: rostrum long, reaching the posterior margin of the fourth

ventral segment, first joint very short, second and fourth about equal

in length, twice as long as the first, second joint compressed, third

longest, about equal in length to the first and second taken to-

gether ; antennz 4-jointed, second joint about thrice longer than the

basal joint which does not reach the apex of the head: posterior angles

of thorax obtusely rounded, entire anterior margin of the profleura

obtuse, elevated, posterior margin straight at the angles: scutellum

rounded at the apex, covering nearly the whole of the hemelytra:

venter with a long furrow, sides flattish, anteriorly somewhat convex,

posterior margin of segments straight on both sides, the furrow of the

orifices long, straight or very slightly curved, abruptly produced for-

wards at the apex or emitting forwards a wrinkle or ridge: pectus

without a furrow for the reception of the rostrum or projecting flaps

covering the base of the antennze; legs moderate: tarsi 3-jointed,

second joint shortest (Dallas).

160 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

74, TETRARTHIA LINEATA, Walker.

Tetrarthia lineata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 18 (1867).

Ferruginous-red, fusiform, bright-red beneath: four stripes on the

head and beneath on both sides, five stripes on thorax, of which the

outer pair are oblique, its anterior and lateral margins, a dot on each

side of the anterior margin of the scutellum and two oblique streaks

which converge hindward and a broad stripe on each side of pectus,

emerald-green: antennz piceous, fourth joint pale yellowish towards

the base: scutellum with a luteous dot on each side at two-thirds of the

length: abdomen beneath with two rows of black spots on each side

and with a black subapical patch: legs pubescent; tibiee and tarsi

‘above and femora towards their tips tinged with green: wings brown :

costa of the corium purple. Var.? No emerald-green markings: head

bluish-black : thorax bluish-black in front and on each side: scutellum

with no luteous dot: pectus blackish (Walker). Long, 142 mill.

Reported from Hong-Kong ; variety from Burma.

75. TETRARTHRIA VARIEGATA, Dallas.

Tetrarthria variegvta, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 20, t.1, f. 1 (1851) ; Stal, Ofvers.

K. V.-A. Forh. p. 616 (1870) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873).

Tetrathria margine-punctata, Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 13,

t. 1, f. 6 a-b (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 508 (1868).

Tetrathria quinquemaculata, A. Dohrn, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxiv, p. 347 (1863).

Head black, with some scattered, coarse punctures, the lateral

margins and two parallel longitudinal lines brassy-green; eyes pale

brown ; thorax with a large, semicircular brassy green patch on the

disc, touching the posterior margin, and surrounded by a broad dull red

band which runs from one posterior angle to the other; four spots on

the disc, near the posterior margin, of which the two intermediate are

largest, and the anterior and lateral margins black: scutellum brassy

green in the middle, the margins dull red, punctured and thickly

clothed with fine golden hairs, witha large black patch in the middle

of the base, two small spots of the same colour immediately behind this,

and two large ones on the lateral margins immediately behind the mid-

dle; a large T-shaped black patch occupies the disc of the scutellum,

formed by a transverse band, before the middle, and a median longitu-

dinal one which reaches nearly to the apex, and is furcate posteriorly :

abdomen beneath red, with broad black margins: rostrum red: legs

black with the basal half of the femora bright red: antennee black with

the basal joint reddish and a pale band near the base of the fourth joint

(Dallas). Varies in having the scutellum and thorax rufous-testace-

ous: anal segment in 3 truncate at apex; finely erosulous and in the

middle with a somewhat prominent tooth. Long, 163 mill.

1887. | KE, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 161

Walker remarked that T. margine-punctata, Voll. was probably only

a variety of 7’. variegata, Dallas ; and it is now recognized as such. The

type of this variety has the borders of the body above and the entire

body below covered with a grey villosity ; head a little punctured, with

a glossy chocolate-brown line in the middle ; two longitudinal lines and

the border of the eyes, golden-green ; antenne pale brown, pubescent ;

base of fourth joint whitish: eyes brown, ocelli yellow: pronotum

punctured, with a row of deep dots on the anterior border, preceding a

transverse glossy space which is of a chocolate-brown, the border being

golden-green: dise of pronotum and secutellum purplish black with se-

veral obscure metallic-blue lines: border surrounded by a row of yellow

triangular patches: body beneath yellow with some golden-green lines

on the head and pectus: ventral borders marbled with brown ; 5th and

6th segments altogether brown; rostrum pale yellow, with the tip

obscure: coxee and half of femora of a pale yellow, other half deep

brown : tibie and tarsi, yellowish brown. Long, 15 mill. A Silhat

specimen is paler and has the border of the scutellum interrupted at the

tip.

Reported from Phillipines, Java, Tondano, Celebes, Silhat. The

Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sibsd4gar (Assam).

Genus Scure.uera, Lamarck.

Syst. p. 293 (1801): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 4, 18 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het.

i, p. 15 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 14 (1878) :

Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem, p.17 (1866). Includes Calliphara, Am. & Serv. Hist.

Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 30 (1843), nec Germar.

Body subsericeous or pilosulous, very oblong: head triangular, ob-

tuse, sloped: rostrum extending beyond the second ventral segment :

antenne 5-jointed, second joint not or only a little shorter than the first,

fourth the longest: pronotum with a transverse linear impression be-

fore the middle, generally strongly punctured, the base distinctly trun-

cated, posterior angles distinct, posterior margin of propleura generally

distinctly sinuated at the angles, anterior margin obtuse, thickened,

slightly amplified near the prosternum: the meso-sternum furrowed :

venter furrowed beyond the middle ; the furrow of the orifices very

long, gradually curved forwards towards the apex, the part of the me-

tapleura situate before the furrow, smooth, shining: feet rather long.

76. ScUTELLERA NOBILIS, Fabricius.

Cimesx nobilis, Fabr. (nec Linn.), Syst. Ent. p. 697 (1775); Spec. Ins. ii, p. 338

(1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p. 280 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 80 (1794): Gmelin, ed. Syst.

Nat. i (4) p. 2128 (1788); Panzer in Voet, Col. iv, p. iii, t. 47, f. 1 (1798); Wolff, Ic.

Cim. ii, p. 49, t. 5, f. 46 a-d, (1801): Stoll, Punaises, p. 8, t. 1, f. 1; p. 18, t. 2, f. 7,

and p. 20, t. 4, f. 22, 23 (1788).

162 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Tetyra nobilis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803).

Tectocoris nobilis, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. iii, p. 24, t. 81, f. 247 (1835).

Tectocoris perpleca, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. 1, p. 4 and 15 (1887).

Calliphara nobilis, Germar, Zeitschr. i, (i) p. 124 (1839): Am. & Serv. Hist.

Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 30 (1843).

Scutellera nobilis, Lam. Hist. Nat. iii, p. 491 (1816): Burm. Handb. ii, (i) p. 395

(1835) ; Blanchard, Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, p. 158, Hém. t. 8, f. 3 (1840); Dallas, List

Hem. i, p. 18 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 15 (1867); Vollenhoven, Faune Ent.

Y Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 11 (1863) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873) ; Distant, A. M.

N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Oblong; cerulean-golden, spotted black: beneath rufous, with

lateral bands shining blue and gold (C. nobilis, Fabr.).

Light metallic green, varying to deep blue or even purple: body

above and beneath and legs covered with a fine greyish pubescence

more abundant on the head and anterior part of pronotum, abdomen

and legs: eyes brown, ocelli red: rostrum reddish or brown: first joint

of antennee reddish brown, rest black: pronotum with a deep transverse

groove anteriorly, a row of excavated points on anterior margin, lateral

margins reddish brown, three irregular spots towards anterior margin,

a median longitudinal line, a spot on each side thereof and on the

humeral angles, black: scutellum with a median longitudinal line reach-

ing to about the middle and three spots on each side thereof, black, a

smaller sublateral spot on each side between the second and third pairs,

sometimes also a sublateral spot between the first and second pairs, and

sometimes all or some are more or less obsolete: body beneath red with

a purplish tint ; head beneath, patches on pectus, and oblique transverse

bands on abdominal segments, interrupted in the middle and not reach-

ing the margins, golden blue or green: coxe and femora red, tips of

femora, tibie and tarsideep metallic violet. Varies much in size from

14 to 21 mill.

Var.:—Head green with three black spots: first joint of the an-

tennee black not red: lateral margins of pronotum without a red limbus,

first third green, rest blue with traces of five black spots ; scutellum

blue with ten black spots: abdomen beneath golden green, shining,

with a large orange yellow patch on the disc, margin orange, crenulated

black: anal plate green (Voll.).

Reported from Bengal, Pondicheri, Assam (Silhat, Cachar), Burma,

Panjab, India, Siam. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from N,

India, S. India, Karachi, Sikkim, Assam, and Calcutta.

77. SCUTELLERA FASCIATA, Panzer.

Cimex fasciatus, Panzer, in Voet, Col. iv, p. 108, t. 46, f. 2 (1798): Stoll,

Punaises, p. 138, t. 36, f. 251; var. p. 34; t. 7, f. 49 (1788).

1887. ] EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota, 163

Tectocoris nepalensis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. 1. p. 14 (1837),

Calliphara nepalensis, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 125 (1839),

Calliphara amethystina, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 124 (1839).

Scutellera amethystina, Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch, Indo-Néer, i, p, 12

(1863) : Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 507 (1868).

Callidea lanius, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 231 (1854).

Scutellera lanius, Stal, 1. c. p. 51 (1856): Walker, 1. c. i, p. 15 (1867).

Scutellera fasciata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 19 (1851); Walker, 1. c.i, p.15

(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873).

Body fusiform ; pilose on the head; first third of pronotum, body

beneath and feet, purple: head wrinkled only on the margins, beneath

and two first joints of the antenne, violet: eyes brown, ocelli red :

rostrum, half red, rest black: pronotum deeply grooved and with a row

of excavations on the anterior margin, lateral margins greenish or

golden; two spots at the anterior angles and four near the base brown

or blackish: scutellum with three bands, often interrupted (especially

the first), and two small lateral and one large median spot of the same

colour, all of them are sometimes more or less obsolete: body beneath

red, pectus with several violet spots, venter with two rows of oblique

spots, alternately violet and golden: stigmata black: coxee and femora

red: tips of femora, tibie and tarsi, deep violet. (S. amethystina,

Voll.). Body long 18-20 mill. | |

Westwood describes his 7. nepalensis as cerulean-green, clypeus

golden, head with a median line and two oblique spots between the

eyes, black; sides of thorax golden-yellow; dorsum with three inter-

rupted longitudinal lateral lines ; scutellum with two round spots at the

base, a broad waved band before the middle, two round lateral spots

and two others much larger and confluent beyond the middle, and the

apex, black. Long19 mill. Stal makes his S§. laniuws from Java a

variety marked by its greater size, more robust, subsanguineous above,

slightly shining violaceous, spots unicolorous without the violaceous

tinge. Long, 22; broad 9 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Malacca, China, Burma, Assam,

Nepal, Sikkim.

Genus BRACHYAULAX, Stal.

Ofvers, K. V.-A. Férh. p. 616 (1870); En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 14 (1873).

Body very oblong, above slightly, beneath very convex, briefly

pilose, shining: head triangular, somewhat convex, sides very convex

before the eyes, lateral margins sinuate towards the base, rounded to-

wards the apex; buccule continuing through it, slightly elevated:

ocelli twice more distant from each other than from the eyes: rostrum

extending to somewhat behind the last coxe: antenne shorter by half

164 BE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

than the body, first and second joints short, the latter extending to the

apex of the head and a little shorter than the first, third somewhat

longer. than the two basal together, fourth and fifth longer than the

rest, fourth especially compressed, dilated: thorax sexangular, anteriorly

truncated, distinctly transversely impressed before the middle, ante-

rior lateral margins, obtusely sinuated, obtuse: scutellum covering the

entire abdomen: prostethium triangularly impressed, margins of im-

pression elevated, subdilated: mesostethium obtusely sulcate: odori-

ferous apertures continued outwards in an elongated furrow, slightly

curved and abruptly abbreviated : sides of venter very convex, incisures

gradually curved second segment broadly sulcate in the middle: feet

- moderate, tibiz distinctly suleate above. Differs from Scwtellera, Lam.

. in having the furrow of the odoriferous apertures shorter, less curved,

and the venter furrowed only at the base (Stal).

78. BRACHYAULAX OBLONGA, Westwood.

Tectocoris oblonga, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).

Calliphara oblonga, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 129 (1839).

Scutellera oblonga, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 19 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.

15 (1867).

Brachyaulaz oblonga, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873); Distant, A. M. N. H.

(5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Ovate-oblong, metallic bluish-green; head with three spots be-

tween the eyes; thorax with six, three by three, the posterior larger ;

scutellum with three small basal, two larger rounded, two lateral small,

two behind the middle, rounded, large, and one sub-apical spot, or ten

in all: body beneath cerulean-green, base of the abdomen in the mid-

dle and the sides irregularly fulvous; antenne black, feet green

(Westw.). Body long, 137 mill.

Reported from Java, Assam, China. The Indian Museum has a

specimen from Assam which differs from the type in having the large

median spots on the scutellum confluent, forming two waved transverse

bands (Dist.) and in some these are connected by a median, longitudinal

arrow-shaped mark.

Genus CaLLipHarA, Germar.

Calliphara, pt, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 122 (1839): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 16

(1873). Includes Calliphara, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) and Lamprophara,

1, c. p. 34 (1864).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genus amongst the

subgenera Lamprophara, Oalliphara and Chrysophara to none of which

does he assign the only species recorded from India. The third joint

of the antennze is over twice as long as the second: rostrum reaching

1887.] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 165

at least the middle of the second ventral segment: the ventral segments

(at least the last and the penultimate) furnished at the apical angles

with a small tooth or spine which is sometimes covered by the hemely-

tra and then with difficulty distinguished: the scutellum does not

cover the exterior margin of the connexivum (Stal).

79. CALLIPHARA OBSCURA, Westwood.

Tectocoris obscura, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).

Calliphara obscura, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 18 (1873).

Head and pronotum black-coerulean ; the latter with three posterior

spots ; scutellum green, with seven spots (two, two subconfluent, two

rounded beyond the middle, and one small, subapical) ; body beneath,

black-ccerulean, venter green, with black lateral spots ; femora luteous

at the base. Body, long 17¢ millims.

Reported from Nepal. Stal inquires ‘an potius Insule Philippine.’

80. CALLIPHARA NOBILIS, Linneeus.

Cimezx nobilis, Linn., Cent. Ins. i, p. 17 (1763) ; Ameen. Ac. vi, p. 400 (1763).

Cimex pustulatus, Panzer in Voet, Coll. iv, p. 111, t. 47, f.11 (1798).

Scutellera Buquetii, Guérin, Voy. Coq. Ins. ii (2), p. 159, 162 (1830).

Callidea nobilis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 25 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 32

(1867).

Calliphara buquetii, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitgschr. x, p. 153 (1866); Ofvers. K

y.-A, Forh. p. 618 (1870).

Calliphara nobilis, Stal, En, Hem. iii, p. 17 (1873).

Above light green, shining, in some specimens with violet reflections :

head rather small, triangular; eyes brown very prominent; in the mid-

dle, a small smooth green elevation, a little dilated hindward and bound-

ed by two small grooves: antenne in d', nearly half the length of the

head, in 2 a little shorter, black, with the joints flattened: thorax al-

most straight or only a little emarginate on the sides, punctured ; on

each side in front an impression, black at the bottom, placed obliquely,

and four small round black spots, a little beyond the middle; in some

specimens there is an oblong red spot between tho two anterior im-

pressions, in others there are only two spots on the sides: scutellum

slightly grooved at the base, much punctured, with a longitudinal line

in the middle having no punctures and feebly marked; three small,

round, black spots on each side, and a smaller in the middle and near the

tip: thorax beneath, red, with large green spots, confluent on the

sides; margin red, partly visible above: abdomen vermillion, sides

broadly bordered green and on their external margin are four large

black dots, and inwards four black patches less well defined, the extreme

external margin is red: rostrum black, red at the base: femora red,

166 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

tips partly green; tibie and tarsi deep green (S. buqueti, Guérin).

Long, 16—17; broad, 8—8j mill. at base of scutellum.

Reported from Philippines, Java, Timor, China, Burma.

Genus Curysocoris, Hahn.

Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 38 (1834); White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 85 ( 1841-43) ; Stal,

Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 18 (1873).

Includes Callidea, Am. & Serv. (nec Burm.), Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 31

(1843) ; pt. Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 22 (1850); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 25 (1867) :—

Eucorysses, Am. & Serv., 1. c. p. 31 (1848) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864); Mayr,

Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866) :—Galostha, Am. & Serv., 1. c. p. 32 (1843) :—

Cosmocoris, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) ; Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genus amongst the

subgenera Hucorysses, Cosmocoris, and Ohrysocoris, all of which are repre-

sented in India. Differs from Calliphara in having the scutellum co-

vering the whole connexivum, except the basal part. Body above

glabrous: the third joint of the antenne atleast twice as long as the

second : the three last joints of the rostrum unequal in length: lateral

margins of the head neither carinated nor reflexed, anterior margin of

the prostethium not callous behind the eyes, obtuse: meso-sternum, at

least anteriorly, somewhat sulcated, the furrow generally slightly

carinated on both sides: posterior margin of the propleura distinctly

sinuated at the posterior angles: the ventral segments, at least the last

or the penultimate, furnished at the apical angles with a small tooth,

often covered by the hemelytra and then difficult to distinguish.

Subg. Huconyssres, Am. & Serv.

Head somewhat large, not much inclined, sides not deeply sinuated :

anterior lateral margins of pronotum straight or somewhat so: basal

part of the scutellum not, or but very obsoletely, elevated: entire tibiee

above furrowed : sixth ventral segment in 9, as far as known, obtusely

or very obtusely angulately prominulous in the middle of the apex.

81. CHRYSOCORIS GRANDIS, Thunberg, Stal.

Eucorysses grandis, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 154 (1866).

Chrysocoris (Eucorysses) grandis, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 18, (1873): Scott, A. M.

N. H. (48.) xiv, p. 289 (1874) : Distant, 1. c. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879); J. A.S. Ben.

xlviii, (2) p. 37, (1879).

Var. a :—Cimex grandis, Thunberg, Nov. Ins. Spec. p. 31, t. 2, f. 46 (1783):

Gmelin, ed. Syst. Nat. i (4), p. 2133 (1788).

Calliphara grandis, Germar, Zeitschr. i (1), p. 128 (1839).

Callidea grandis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 23 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent:

VArch. Indo-Néerl. p. 18 (1863) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 32 (1867).

Eucorysses superbus, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 221 (1860).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 167

Callidea distinguenda, Uhler, 1. c. p. 286 (1861).

Var. b :—Cimesx baro, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 528 (1798).

Tetyra baro, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803); Schiddte in Kréyer’s Nat.

Tidsskr. iv, p. 279 (1842).

Calliphara baro, Germar, Zeitschr. i (1) p. 127 (1839).

Callidea baro, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 22 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26

(1867).

Tetrarthia tetraspila, Walker, 1. c. i, p. 19 (1867).

Var. c.:—Eucorysses pallens, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 31, t. 1, f. 4

(1843).

Callidea baro, Vollenhoven, 1. c. p. 17 (1863).

Head and spots on pectus at the coxe, flavescent, the head some-

times shining purplish, median streak and basal intraocular part, black :

rostrum reaching the middle of the third ventral segment.

Var.a. Large, elongate, tumid, glossy, violet beneath, sanguineous

above with black spots: head blue with the median line and antenne

black: pronotum sanguineous, much swollen, the anterior margin

fringed with violet, at the base, black: a dot on each side behind the

anterior angle and a large spot on the disc, black: scutellum sanguine-

ous, the black of the pronotum appears to extend over the base; five

black spots on the scutellum one rounded on the median line near the

base, two others costal appearing like a band interrupted in the middle,

another forms a band abbreviated on two sides and the fifth is near the

anal margin: a sanguineous spot sometimes occurs in the middle of the

venter: feet black (Cimex grandis, Thunb.). Body long, 25 mill.

Var. a. 2, sec. Stal :—Black, thorax, scutellum, spots on pectus at

cox and transverse median spot on 4—5 ventral segments, yellow-

testaceous: margins of thorax and of scutellum shining-violaceous :

entire narrow margin, discoidal spot and lateral angles of thorax, basal

limbus, spot near base, lateral transverse spot on both sides before mid-

dle, abbreviated band behind middle and obsolete subapical spot on

scutellum, black: spot on basal angles of ventral segments, yellow-

testaceous, much tinted violaceous.

Var. b.:—Body large: head pale; antenne, median line and

margin black-cyaneous: thorax pale, shining, with a large ovate spot

reaching anterior margin, cyaneous: scutellum large, smooth, pale,

shining, with three cyaneous-black spots, the median one cordate: pectus

cyaneous: abdomen pale with cyaneous bands: feet cyaneous (Cimex

baro, Fabr.) Stal describes this variety as flavescent or yellow-testace-

ous: antenne, rostrum, anterior spot on thorax, basal limbus and three

spots before middle of scutellum, pectus, lateral posterior band on seg-

ments, basal streak and apical spot on venter and the feet, black: six

spots on the pectus, three at the coxe and three at the lateral margins,

flavescent,

168 E. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Var, c.:—<c. Pale yellowish, shining above: head with a median

longitudinal line and its posterior part, shining black: lateral margins

of the pronotum slightly sinuate in the middle, a patch of shiningblack

rounded hindwards, touching the anterior margin: two oblong, black,’

transverse patches on the disc of the scatellum, its base having on

each side a similar black spot: body beneath shining black-bluish with

transverse lateral bands of a pale shining yellow which unite on the

two penultimate ventral segments: anal plate pale shining yellow, feet

black metallic-bluish: antennee black (H. pallens, Am. & Serv.),

Long, 25 mill.

All these varieties occur in India and are represented in the Indian

museum collection. Reported from Japan, China, Siam, Assam,

(Silhat), Bengal, Tenasserim, Java.

82. CHRYSOCORIS IRIS, Germar.

Calliphara iris, Germar, Zeitschr. i(i), p. 128 (1839): Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins.

V, p. 80, t. 171, f. 526 (1839). Bintam.

Callidea sexmaculata, Dallas (nec Leach), List Hem. i, p. 23 (1851); Vollen.,

Faune Ent. PArch. Indo-Néerl., p. 18, t. 1, f. 7 (1863): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 31

(1867). Java.

Chrysocoris (Eucorysses) iris, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 19 (1873).

Purpurascent, shining violaceous: antenne and feet black, three

spots on thorax also its posterior margin, and six spots on scutellum,

black (Germar). Schaffer observes that in the example figured by him

the ground colour appears to be brown, lighter posteriorly ; head,

thorax and base of scutellum of a rich violet with rosy red, turning to

green on the sides of the thorax and scutellum: feet and antenne

darker. His figure shows anterior and posterior margins of thorax

black, a median longitudinal streak proceeding from the anterior margin

and posteriorly behind the middle confluent with a short transverse,

streak, black: four spots on scutellum joining an arcuate interrupted

transverse band before the middle, and two larger oblong transverse

spots behind the middle. Long, 24 mill. It is like C. sexmaculatus,

Leach, but differs in its smaller size, body (especially the head) purpu-

rascent-flavescent, smooth head and shorter rostrum which somewhat

reaches the apex of the third ventral segment.

Body above purple with silvery blue reflections: head transversely

wrinkled at the apex, vertex of a bronzed blackish green; eyes brown,

ocelli brown-yellowish: beneath, the sheath of the rostrum of a metallic

ereen, labrum yellow: antenne black, second joint one-sixth of the

following : thorax punctured, most strongly in the middle of the ante-

rior margin which is of a bronzed green and on the disc, the space be-

tween these two is smooth ; a cordiform spot on the disc, an abbreviated

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhyuchota. 169

band along the posterior border and two small spots at the lateral

angles, black, these angles slightly, acuminate: scutellum punctured,

more strongly at the anterior angle, basal elevation smooth: two

‘bronzed-black spots behind the basal elevation, a black spot at each

anterior angle, another pair much larger, almost quadrate behind these

near the lateral margin, and a transverse band interrupted in the mid-

dle, black; hemelytra black, with the costal margin purple; pectus

varied with green, black and red: venter red with purple margins ; a

large basal spot, a smaller anal spot, an oblique stria on the sides, shin-

ing black: feet metallic black, pubescent(C. sexmaculata, Voll.). Body

long, 24 mill.

Reported from Java, Bintam, Singapore, Tenasserim.

Subg. Cosmocoris, Stal.

-Head somewhat large, not much inclined : pronotum with the ante-

rior lateral margins more or less distinctly sinuated in the middle, fur-

nished in the & anteriorly with a rather deep triangular impression,

scutellum transversely elevated at the base: tibie above towards the

apex somewhat flat or furrowed.

83. CHRYSOCORIS coxALIs, Stal.

Callidea coxalis, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4s.) iv, p. 47 (1864): Walker, Cat. Het. i,

p. 28 (1867). Tringany.

C. (Cosmocoris) coxalis, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 19 (1873).

? Brassy-green, shining, feet more obscure, of the colour of steel :

antenne and rostrum black; a small spot towards the ocelli and a me-

dian stripe on the head, five spots on the pronotum and eight on the

scutellum, subviolaceous-black ; disc brassy-black varying in breadth :

cox, trochanters and base of femora sordid yellow-whitish. Head

moderate, distinctly sinuate before the eyes : second joint of antennz one-

third shorter than basal, the fourth (in ¢& at least) dilated, furrowed ;

pronotum sparingly and finely punctured, disc before the middle a little

more distinctly punctured ; antero-lateral margins very slightly sinuate,

narrowly and distinctly reflexed, with two anterior transverse spots, one

orbicular on each side at the lateral angles, and three large median

elongate reaching the base, the median one in the form of a continued

stripe, the other two extended forwards beyond the middle of the pro-

notum: scutellum as broad as the abdomen, not so densely punctured,

slightly transversely elevated at the base, there smooth, with eight

spots, the subbasal median one formed like the letter T, the rest, trans-

verse, large: sixth ventral segment in Q, posteriorly obtusely sinuate

(Stal). Long, 13-15; breadth of pronotum, 7-8 mill.

Reported from Singapore, Tringani, Tenasserim (?).

170 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. (No. 2,

Subg. Curysocoris, Hahn.

Head somewhat small, bending much forwards, sides generally

strongly sinuated: thorax in & without an anterior triangular impres-

sion: basal part of the scutellum not or only slightly elevated : tibie

above towards the apex flat or furrowed. Stal still further divides this

subgenus into the sections Chlorolampra including C. germari, Esch. ;

Chlorochrysa, including C. stockerus, Linn. and Chrysocoris including C.

dilaticollis, Germar.

As the species of this subgenus are not readily distinguishable I

adopt the following scheme partly from Stal (Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11) as

some help to identification :—

1-2. Venter without any flavescent spot or mark.—C. cihventae

mihi.

2-1. Venter with disc, at least, flavescent.

3-17. Lateral margins of pronotum straight or nearly so.

4-16, Pronotum posteriorly with a single black spot in the middle,

sometimes wanting, the hs lateral margins entirely or nearly en-—

tirely reflexed.

5-9. Disc of venter flavescent, with four long rays occupying the

apical part of the segments, terminated anteriorly inwards by a black

transverse spot that reaches the base of the segments and is remote

from the black-irised spiracula.

6-8. Ventral limbus ccerulean or brassy-green: posterior margin

of pro- and meso-stethium concolorous: femora flavescent beyond the

middle.

7-8. Pronotum with ten black or black-ccerulean spots.—C. elatus,

Stal.

8-6. Ventral limbus, rufescent or purplish, rarely flavescent and

purple: posterior margin of parts of pectus, flavescent ; femora beyond

the middle, miniaceous.—C. patricius, Fabr.

9-5. Almost entire venter ora very great part of the disc flaves-

cent, with on both sides short rays that occupy the base and the apex of

the segments and are not terminated by a transverse black spot: scutel

lum typically with the apex black or obscurely violaceous, no sub-apical

rounded spot.

10-8. Posterior black spots on the pronotum remote from the

base, rather small; ventral limbus brassy-green, or ccerulean, or pur-

plish-violaceous.

11-12. Pronotum with 5or 7 black spots, that on the lateral

‘angles very small or wanting: femora beyond the middle, flavescent.—

CO. purpureus, Westw. O. viridis, mihi.

12-11. Pronotum with 7 or 8 black spots, the anterior median one

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 171

sometimes wanting, 3 large median posterior spots, reaching the base.—

C. stolii, Wolff.

13-12, Spots larger and broader, colour more purplish above.—C.

porphyricolus, Walk.

14-12. Pectus without flavescent spots and lines.—C. ornatus,

Dallas.

15-12. Scutellum broadly orange at the apex.—C. andamanensis,

mihi. |

16-4. Pronotum with 11 black spots and posteriorly in the mid-

dle with 2 oblong spots, antero-lateral margins somewhatacute poste-

riorly, and a little reflexed.—C. marginellus, Westw.; ©. pulchellus,

Westw.

17.3. Lateral margins of anterior part of the thorax, depressed,

flat, rounded.—C’. eques, Fabr. ; C. dilaticollis, Guérin.

84, CHRYSOCORIS ATRIVENTRIS, Atkinson.

Proc. A. S. B. p. 11, (1887).

Closely allied to C. hypomelena, Voll. from Borneo, differs in the

markings on the thorax and in the entire venter being almost wholly

deep black. Brassy-green, irrorated golden, shining, closely punc-

tured: head beneath and feet lighter brassy-green, very shining : venter

deep black, smooth, slightly shining. Head much inclined, obtus ely

triangular, rounded at the apex; except the tylus, irrorated golden :

eyes, ocelli, antenne and rostrum, black; 3-5 joints of antenne some-

what flattened ; rostrum reaching almost the apex of the second ventral

segment, extremity of tip brownish: thorax with three black spots

towards the anterior margin, the lateral subovate-oblong, transverse,

impressed, smoothish, the median irregularly triangular, smallest ; to-

wards the posterior margin three larger spots, of which the lateral] oblong,

longitudinal, and the median obtusely triangular, smallest; lateral

margins reflexed, a very small black spot on the slightly prominulous

posterior angles: scutellum with the basal elevation smooth, shining,

and with seven black spots; on each side three lateral, of which the two

first are ovate-oblong, transverse, and the third is somewhat rounded

posteriorly, also one subbasal median, obtusely-triangular, having its

apex pointing hindwards. Head beneath and pectus very bright, shining,

brassy-green; antenne black: entire venter intensely black, smooth,

slightly shining; barely traces, under the microscope in the sun, of a

slightly purplish limbus and a slightly brassy-green margin to the

stigmata: feet blackish, femora tinted brassy-green towards the apex ;

tibie finely ciliated, externally of a blue-steel colour. Long 14; breadth

of pronotum, 8 mill. .

Example from Delhi.

172 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. J,

85. CHRYSOCORIS ELATUs, Stal.

Callidea Stockerus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 114 (1839), excl. syn. 7

Chrysocorés elatus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11 (1868); En. Hem. iii, p. 20 (1873).

Thorax with ten bluish-black or black spots: discoidal spot on

scutellum narrow, linear or somewhat so; disc of venter flavescent with

four long rays, occupying the apex of the segments and terminated

anteriorly inwards by a black transverse spot that reaches the base and

apex of the segments, remote from the black-cinctured spiraculan,

ventral limbus ccerulean or brassy-black ; posterior margin of pro- and

meta-stethium concolorous ; femora flavescent beyond the middle.

Reported from India.

86. CuHrysocoris, Fabricius.

Cimex patricius, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 527 (1798) ; Stoll, Punaises, p. 125,

t. 82, £. 222A (1788).

Tetyra patricia, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 131 (1803); Schiédte in Kréyer’s Nat.

Tidsskr. iv, p. 286 (1842).

Scutellera patricius, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Ins. p. 159 (1830).

Callidea bengalensis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837); Germar,

Zeitschr. i (i), p. 118, (1839) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p.28 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het.

i, p. 27 (1867).

Callidea basilica, Germar, Zeitschr.i (i), p. 117 (1839) : Walker, 1. c. i, p. 28

(1867).

Callidea patricia, Germar, l. c. p. 121 (1839); Walker, 1. c. i, p. 2 8 (1867).

C. (Chrysocoris) patricius, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11 (1868) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 20

(1873).

Oblong, one-third the size of S. nobilis: head, thorax and scu-

tellum ccerulean blue: head shining, with a dorsal line and a spot on

each side at the base, black: thorax with a dorsal line and four spots on

each side, black: scutellum large, with nine spots arranged 3, 3, 2, 1,

black : body flavescent, marginal bands ccerulean, and the margin of the

abdomen, red : feet black, femora rufous (Fabr.). Dark greenish-blue ;

pronotum with seven spots, scutellum with eight large black spots ;

femora rufous, apex and tibisv green; trochanters whitish ; abdomen

palely luteous, margin purplish-rufous, with oblong, transverse, greenish-

black spots (0. bengalensis, West.), a somewhat ovate median oblong

spot, with a longitudinal row of three rounded spots on both sides and a

rounded spot before apex black. Pectus shining, sparingly punc-

tured, brassy-green or cyaneous, six spots at the insertion of the

feet and anterior and posterior margins of meso- and meta-sternum,

yellow ; posterior margin of pro-sternum, yellow, lateral margin and

posterior angles, red: lobes of anterior margin very short, truncate,

externally angulate. Hemelytra black-cerulean, internally fuscescent

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhyuchota. 173

their exterior margin yellow towards the base; membrane and

wings fuscous-black. Feet pubescent; coxe, trochanters and femora,

red, the femora cyaneous at apex, tibie with a small groove before

apex, cyaneous; tarsi-black: venter moderately convex with the

sides punctured, shining, yellow, margin above the black stigmata red or

luteous, a large quadrate spot occupying the middle of the three anterior

segments and another rounded on penultimate segment, black or fus-

cous; 2-5 segments with a brassy-green spot on each side: anal seg-

ment horizontal, enescent, thrice broader than length, deeply transverse-

ly impressed, the apex broadly emarginate.

@. The @ has the antenne more slender, shorter than head and

pronotum, two basal joints longer than the eyes, 3-5 joints with small

obsolete grooves: sides of pronotum more narrowly margined before

the eyes, margin not dilated in the middle: anal segment of venter

deep red (Schiddte). Long, 73-8 mill., humeral breadth, 43 mill.

The discoidal spot in the scutellum is broader than in C. elatus,

Stal, gradually amplified forwards before the middle: genitalia in ¢

more reflexed behind the middle than usual: subapical rounded spot

in the scutellum black.

Reported from Bengal, Tranquebar : the Indian museum has spe-

cimens from Calcutta and Ceylon.

S. Antenne a little longer than the head and pronotum together,

stoutish ; two basal joints much shorter than the head, scarcely as long

as the eyes, either black, or fuscous, or rufescent; second joint very

short, one-fourth the length of the basal; remaining joints black, pubes-

cent, almost of the same length, depressed, with a small groove on the

upperside; third thrice as long as the basal, fourth and fifth with a

deep groove on the lower side. Head deflexed much shorter than broad,

obtusely three-angled, anda little convex, smooth, shining, ccerulean

greenish or cyanean; clypeus obscurely cyaneous, at the extreme apex

ruddy ; eyes of moderate size, prominent; clypeus linear, obtusely pro-

minulous at apex; margins of the rostral groove, narrowly elevated :

rostrum reaching the base of the abdomen subcylindrical, piceous,

rufescent at base, second joint a little longer than the rest. Pro-

notum broader than long, convex at the base, as high as the scutel-

lum, more sparingly punctured, denser towards the somewhat ele-

vated humeri, anteriorly convexly sloped, smooth, within the apex

depressed and rather densely punctured ; entirely brassy-green or shin-

ing cyaneous, sometimes purpurascent at the sides, with three longitu-

dinal rows of black spots of which the median row is composed of two

large quadrate spots and the lateral rows of three smaller, rounded

spots: the humeral protuberances are also black and the lateral margins

174, K. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

before the obtuse-angled, rounded humeri somewhat straight. Scutel-

lum ovate almost twice as long as the pronotum, almost one-half longer

than basal breadth, shorter than abdomen, moderately convex, basal

semilunar elevation rather high, flatly inclined at the sides, posteriorly

convexly sloped, somewhat depressed and truncate at the extreme apex ;

densely punctured, basal callus smooth, shining ccerulean or cyaneous,

sides and apex more or less purple.

87. CHRYSOCORIS PURPUREUS, Westwood.

Cimex stockerus, Fabricius, (nec Linn.) Syst. Ent. p. 696 (1775); Spec. Ins. ii,

p. 338 (1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p. 280 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 79 (1794); Wolff, Ic.

_ Cim. ii, p. 47, t. 5, f. 44 (1801): Stoll, Punaises, p. 17, f. 15, 16A. (1788).

Tetyra stockerus, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 131 (1803).

Scutellera stockerus, Latr., Gen. Ins. iii, p. 181 (1807).

Callidea stockerus, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 894 (1835): Westwood in Donovan’s

Ins. China, p. 48, t, 21, f. 1 (1842). :

Callidea purpurea, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837): Germar,

Zeitschr.i (i) p. 115 (1839); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 26 (1851); Vollenhoven,

Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 31 (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26 (1867).

C. (Chrysocoris) purpureus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 10, 11(1868) ; En. Hem. iii,

p. 21 (1873): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Cerulean-purple: pronotum with 5 and scutellum with 6-7 spots,

antenne and tarsi, black; body beneath, luteous, margined purple and

with purple stigmata; anus golden ; femora luteous with apex and

tibie purple ; tarsi black (C. purpureus, Westw.) Stal notes that in his

examples the pronotum has only two spots anteriorly and the discoidal

spot on the seutellum is smallish and oblong. Vollenhoven gives the

colour above as deep blue, head slightly tumid, and transversely

wrinkled, eyes blackish, ocelli yellowish-brown ; antenne black, first

joint blue, orange at the base, second joint one-fourth the length of the

third in the 9 : basal half of the rostrum yellow, rest brown, reaching

second ventral segment: pronotum rather elevated, without a transverse

groove, strongly punctured, with five (2 and 3) black spots: scutellum

strongly punctured (except at the basal elevation which is almost

smooth,) with six black spots arranged in two rows and a median trian-

gular spot which is sometimes obsolete and is replaced by a green re-

flection : body beneath yellow or orange with the exception of the head

and the margins of the pectus which are violet, of the margin of the

abdomen which is purple and of a basal spot on the venter and small

stigmatal spots which are black: feet orange as far as two-thirds of the

femora, remainder violet, tarsi black. Body long. 15-17 mill.

Reported from Bengal, Bombay, Assam. Specimens from Assam

vary in colour from purplish to sanguineousabove. The Indian museum

has specimens from Utakamand, §. India and Bihar.

1887. | E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 175

88. CHRyYsocoris viripIs, Atkinson.

Proc. A. S. B. p. 12, (1887).

Allied to C. purpureus, Westw. Above light brassy-green, densely

punctured : antenne black, basal joint brown, rostrum almost reaching

apex of second ventral segment : head and pronotum irrorated golden, the

latter with a smoother transverse band close to, and parallel with ante-

rior margin, and bearing slight traces of three blackish spots also traces

of three median distant spots, lateral margins slightly reflexed, posterior

angles slightly prominulous: scutellum with a steel-blue, smooth, semi-

circular, basal elevation; on each side, three smallish black spots, the

basal resting on the basal elevation, no discoidal or apical mark ; beneath

very sordid flavescent turning into ferruginous, sides of pectus brassy-

green, stigmata black, irrorated green, base of anal segment slightly

black, no black spot on basal segment: feet somewhat ferruginous, apex

of femora, and tibis externally, brassy-green. Differs from C. purpu-

reus in colour and markings above, in the less-obtuse apex of scutellum,

. and absence of purple border and black basal patch on the abdomen.

Long, 15-16 mill.

From the Panjab,

89. CHRYSOCORIS STOLLII, Wolff.

Cimew stollii, Wolff, Ic. Cim. ii, p. 48, t. 5, £. 45 (1801).

Scutellum stockerus, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Ins. ii, p. 159 and 161 (1830).

Callidea stollii, Germar, Zeitschr.i(i) p. 114 (1839); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 26

(1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 27 (1867), excl. syn.

C. (Chrysocoris) stollii, Stal, Hem. Fabr.i, p. 11 (1868): En. Hem. iii, p. 21

(1878).

Antenne 5-jointed, black, first joint ferruginous: head, thorax and

scutellum coerulean: head very shining with a longitudinal streak and a

spot on both sides at the fuscous eyes, black; two small impressed lines

‘on the apex: rostrum 4-jointed, black, flavescent at the base: thorax

with six black spots, the anterior three small, the posterior three large,

oblong ; posterior angles rather prominulous, black: scutellum shining

greenish, margin and apex purple; with eight black spots, three on

each side, one in the middle oblong and large, and one at the apex

_ (sometimes obsolete) transverse: hemelytra black, shining ccerulean ;

exterior margin, rufous; interior margin broadly whitish: membrane

fuscescent, striated externally black: wings hyaline with a large black

spot on the apex: abdomen beneath flavescent, throughout very finely

impressly punctured, margin purple, on both sides with five black points

on some of which is a small line: pectus flavescent with three violaceous

spots on each side: anus with a black spot: feet unarmed; femora

176 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

flavescent, at the apex violaceous; tibie violaceous (Wolff). Long, 13;—

14 mill.

Reported from China, Cambodia, Siam, Tenasserim, Burma, Assam,

N. India.

Differs from C. purpureus, Westw. in its smaller, narrower body,

thorax more elevated posteriorly, scutellum deeply impressed at the

base and the number of the spots.

The discoidal spot on the scutellum is broadish and obovate.

90. CHRYSOCORIS PORPHYRICOLUS, Walker.

Callidea porphyricala, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).

Chrysocoris porphyricolus, Distant, J. A. S. Ben. xlviii (2), p. 37 (1879).

Gilded green, nearly fusiform, minutely punctured: head with a

blackish stripe which has on each side of it a blackish spot and is bor-

dered by two deep parallel furrows: pronotum with three longitudinally

elongated purple spots in front of which there are three transversely

elongated spots; a small cupreous spot on each angle near the hird

border; scutellum with three large purple spots on each side; a slight

transverse furrow which is curved to the anterior border on each side,

tip purple: abdomen beneath red with black dots along each side

of it and with a black subapical patch: legs red; femora towards their

tips and tibie purple; tarsi black. (Walker.) Body long, 15 mill.

Reported from India, the Indian museum has specimens from

Tenasserim and Sikkim: differs from preceding in the purplish tint

more or less throughout above and the larger size of the spots.

91. CHRYSOCORIS ORNATUS, Dallas.

Callidea ornata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 27 (1851).

C. (Chrysocoris) ornatus, Stal En. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Above brilliant golden-green, becoming purplish after death(?), thick-

ly and rather strongly punctured: head impunctate with a black spot on

the vertex: pronotum with three small black spots close to the anterior

margin, three large ones touching the posterior margin and one in each

lateral angle: scutellum with the basal elevation smooth nearly im-

punctate, with a large triangular black patch on the disc, a large oblong

black spot on each side of this, at the middle of the scutellum, and two

smaller ones towards the apex: abdomen bright orange-red with the

margins crimson; the stigmata and a large spot at the base and the

apex, black: pectus violet, tinged with golden green: legs, rostrum and

antenne black, the legs tinged with violet (Dallas). Body long, 133-14

mill,

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 177

Reported from China, Assam. Not strongly distinct from C.

stollii, pectus without flavescent spots and lines, entire feet coerulean-

black.

92. CHRYSOCORIS PULCHELLUS, Dallas.

Callidea pulchella, Dallas, List Hem. i p. 25 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26

(1867).

Chrysocoris pulchellus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873).

Closely allied to O. marginellus, Westw., but differs in its smaller

size, in having the antenne much broader and thicker and the second

joint smaller than in that species; the head, in addition to the median

longitudinal line has a small black spot on each side in front of the

ocelli; the black spots also occupy more of the surface than in C. mar-

ginellus and are arranged precisely in the same manner; namely, nine on

the pronotum of which three small ones on the anterior margin, one in

each lateral angle and four large oblong ones on the disc towards the

posterior margin ; eight on the scutellum, placed, two, close to the base,

forming an interrupted transverse band, a somewhat triangular one on

middle of disc, one on each side of this, two behind the middle and one

close to the apex: abdomen yellow with the margin crimson; stigmata,

black, with a row of golden green spots within them and within these,

another row of black ones; a black patch at the base and apex of abdo-

men: pectus violet and green: coxe yellow: femora red with their

tips, tibie, tarsi, rostrum and antenne black. (Dallas.) Body long,

125 mill.

Reported from India, Silhat.

93. CHRYSOCORIS ANDAMANENSIS, Atkinson.

Proc. A. S. B. p. 12, (1887):

Above deep blue turning into purplish or into green, or green,

shining, deeply and densely punctured : eyes and ocelli brown: antenne

black, basal joint flavescent (except the apex): rostrum flavescent,

reaching posterior coxe: thorax densely punctured, transversely sul-

cate before the middle, with a broad smooth band close to anterior

border, marked by three black, oblong, transverre spots, also between

the band and the base, three large, longitudinal, black spots of which

the median is triangular with its apex pointing forwards; margins

slightly reflexed, posterior angles slightly prominulous and blackish :

scutellum with a semicircular basal elevation, smooth, immaculate ; three

_ rounded spots on each side, of which the last is the largest, and a linear

longitudinal median basal streak, black; broad apical limbus bright

orange: body beneath flavescent, sides of pectus, stigmata, and trans-

378 EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

verse streaks therefrom on anterior margin of each segment on both

sides, apex of femora and tibie externally, steel-blue ; anal segment

violet-black. Hasily distinguished by its size and the broad, orange,

apical limbus of the scutellum. Long, 17; breadth of pronotum, 9

mill,

The Indian Museum possesses a long series from thc Andaman

Islands.

94, CHRYSOCORIS MARGINELLUS, Westwood.

Callidea marginella, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837): Germar,

Zeitschr. i (i) p. 117 (1839) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 25 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.

i, p. 26 (1867).

Callidea celestis, Stal, Ofvers. K.V.-A. Forh. xii, p. 181 (1855); 1. c. xiii, e hs

(1856) ; Walker, 1. c. iii, p. 510 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) marginellus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12 (1868); En. Hem. iii, p.

21 (1873).

Size of O. purpureus, Westw.: coerulean-green, thorax with twelve

spots, two intermediate, oblong; scutellum with nine, and an oblong

anterior median stripe, black: thorax beneath golden-green; abdomen

palely luteous with golden-greenish submarginal spots, margin broadly

purple, stigmata black; femora rufous-fulvous, apex and tibie green

(Westw.?. Body long, 18-14 mill.

3. Obscurely virescent-chalybeous ; thorax with 11 black spots;

scutellum densely and deeply punctured, with a basal transverse eleva-

tion, with 8 black spots of which the median longitudinal: pectus moré

obscure, yellow at the coxee; abdomen yellow, each segment having on

both sides a chalybeous-violaceous spot, last segment violaceous-black :

femora cinnabar, apex and the tibise chalybeous: antenne and tarsi,

black. Head green chalybeous, subimpunctate, shining, tylus more ob-

scure: antenne black, second joint very minute: thorax sinuate ante-

viorly, sides oblique, broadly obliquely truncate on both sides posteriorly ,

scarcely so anteriorly, posteriorly (especially on the sides) more punctured,

shining, chalybeous; adorned with eleven spots of which 3 anteriorly,

2 basal close together subelongate and 3 on each side placed triangular-

ly, black: scutellum flatly-produced at the apex, densely and roughly

punctured especially on the sides, transversely elevated at the base and

there impunctate, green-chalybeous, adorned with seven rounded spots

(arranged 2, 2, 2,1) and an elongate median spot sometimes dilated at

the base, black: pectus obscurely chalybeous-violaceous, yellow at the

coxe: abdomen roughly punctured on both sides, yellow, adorned with

a black basal spot and obscurely chalybeous, transverse, lateral spots,

last segment, violaceous-black: femora cinnabar, with apex and the

tibiz chalybeous: tarsi black. Colour sometimes somewhat golden »

AT ee CP

1887, | E. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 179

green, margin of abdomen, weakly violacescent (Stal). Long, 19;

broad, 9 mill.

Reported from Madras, Bengal, Bombay, Celebes, Borneo. The

Indian Museum has specimens from Chandbali (S. coast of Bengal).

95. CuHrysocoris EQUES, Fabricius.

Callidea eques, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i., p. 32

(1867).

Chrysocoris eques, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11, 12 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) eques, Stal, Hn. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Var. a. Cimex eques, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 79 (1794). Tranquebar.

_ Tetyra eques, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1803): Schiddte in Kréyer’s Tidsskr,

iv. p. 284 (1842). .

Scutellera eques, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii, p. 158 (1830). Philippines.

Callidea eques, Burm., Handb. ii {i) p. 394 (1835); Germar, Zeitschr. i (i)

p. 112 (1839): Voll., Faune Ent. ’ Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 27 (1863).

Galostha eques, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 33 (18438).

Var. b. Callidea schwaneri, Vollenhoven, Faune l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 26, t. 2,

f, 7 (1863) ; Walker, 1. c. iii, p. 511 (1868). Borneo.

Var. c. Var. nicobarensis, Atkinson, Proc. A. 8. B. p. 13, 1887). Nicobars.

Callidea eques, Mayr, Reise Novara, p. 24 (1866). Nicobars.

Var. d. Callidea formosa, Westwood. Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837) ; Germar,

Zeitschr. i (i) p. 113 (1839). China.

Callidea dorsalis, White in Gray’s Zool. Misc. p. 80 (1842).

_ Var.a. Body ovate, above green: a band on the head between the

antenne emitting a branch up to the base and two small spots, deep

black: dorsal line on thorax and four spots on each side (3,1) deep

black: scutellum large with eight deep black spots (2, 2, 2,1) and the

dorsal spot anteriorly bifid: abdomen black, margin green with black

points : feet ccerulean (CO. eques, Fabr.). Long, 11—13 mill.

_ Var. b. Head flat, smooth, green, with the ocular margin blue: the

eyes and ocelli brown: antenne black, very pubescent, the second joint

only one-fifth the length of the following: pronotum a little punctured,

except perhaps on the anterior angles; lateral margins much dilated,

green or blue, disc golden: scutellum very tumid without a basal eleva-

tion, much punctured, principally near the anterior angles, a little flat-

tened at the apex; colour green or golden red with a more or less large

black spot at the extremity: deep violet beneath, middle of the venter

black also the tarsi, or venter green with a large discal streak and small

marginal spots, black. This variety has the following subvarieties :—

1. Black spots on the lateral angles of the pronotum.

2. In addition, a black spot on the anterior margin of the pro-

notum,

180 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

3. a T-shaped spot or two small lines on the disc of the scutellum.

4. Seven rather indistinct spots on the pronotum, scutellum with a

small median line, two lateral and one anal spot.

5. Five rather distinct spots onthe pronotum and five larger on

the scutellum (C. schwanert, Voll.).

Long, 11-12 mill.: all from Borneo.

Var. c. nicobaricus, mihi, is represented in the Indian Museum by a

long series from the Nicobar islands.

Above shining green; eyes brown; antenne black: pronotum with

the lateral margins much dilated, semicircularly rounded, edged black ;

anteriorly with a transverse row of three black spots of which the

median is largest, triangular, having its apex pointing hindward ; three

black spots arranged in form of a triangle at the posterior angles, some-

times but two, and then with the basal margin black, on which rests a

median triangular spot with its apex turning forwards and meeting the

triangular median spot of the anterior row: scutellum without a basal

elevation, no discal spot, three black spots on each side andone at the

apex: body beneath entirely brassy-green, tinted violet or steel blue,

especially on the pectus, a small median transverse patch on the ante-

rior margin of each segment, also the stigmata and base of anal segment

violet black: feet of a steel blue, tibize internally sordid ferruginous.

Long, 11-12 mill.

Mayr describes what is probably the & of this variety, also from

the Nicobars, as having the pronotum anteriorly with three black marks

of which the median is largest, in the middle with two rounded black

marks and near the posterior margin three like them, of which the

median is connected by means of a black line with the median mark on

the anterior border: scutellum shining green, bluish on both sides

with three pair of blackish spots, of which the anterior and median pair

are rounded, the posterior transverse; the median \-shaped mark is

wanting and there is hardly any trace of the usual apical black spot:

the basal segments of the abdomen are for the most part violet and

somewhat green, the median are green with blackish-violet oblong

streaks, stigmata violet and base of anal segment black.

Var. d. Brassy-green, pronotum with the sides reflexed, broader

than the scutellum, spotted black and with two large, rounded dorsal

spots, sanguineous ; scutellum sanguineous; body beneath and feet

brassy, the former spotted black, the stigmata deep blue (C. formosa,

Westw.). Body long, 11-12 mill.

Reported from China.

Reported from Tranquebar, Malacca, Singapore, Banca, Sumatra,

Java, Borneo. The Indian Museum has a long series of variety ¢. from »

the Nicobar Islands.

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota, 181

96. CHRYSOCORIS DILATICOLLIS, Guérin.

Scutellera dilaticollis, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii, (2) p. 160, 164 (1830),

Chrysocoris stollii, Hahn (nec Wolff), Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 39, t. 44, f. 186 (1834).

Callidea abdominalis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837); Germar,

Zeitschr. i (i) p. 112 (1839).

Galostha stockerus, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 34 (1843).

Callidea dilaticollis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 28

(1867) : Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’ Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 28 (1863).

Callidea stockerus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 389 (1855).

Chrysocoris stockerus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12 (1868).

Var. Callidea swmatrana, Vollenhoven, 1. c. p. 28, t. 2, f. 9 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) dilaticollis, 8tal, En. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Above shining blue, more or less greenish: head broad, triangular ;

eyes prominulous ; median longitudinal line, black: antenne black, in

Sat least as long as the body, in @ shorter, two last joints compara-

tively stout: thorax anteriorly as broad as the head, abruptly produced

posteriorly in asmall, fine, rounded dilatation on each side ; no depres-

sion in front, broader than the scutellum and almost twice broader than

long, surface smooth or very weakly punctured ; with two rows of three

round, rather large black spots, and the lateral dilatation, also, black in

the middle: scutellum with seven round, black spots and a large trian-

gular spot towards the base, very broad in front, a little emarginate on

the sides and having in some specimens a small green line in the mid-

dle ; the posterior spot is placed in the middle and near the tip: thorax

beneath of a beautiful shining green, with small yellow lines, on the

sutures: rostrum green, with the base orange: abdomen bright orange

yellow, with a quadrate patch at the base and the anus black-blue ;

sides green with two rows of four black dots on each side: femora bright

orange yellow with their tips, the tibie and tarsi blue-green ( Guérin).

Long, 10—12 ; broad at the base of the scutellum, 53—6 mill.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Celebes, Timor, Malacca, Burma

India, China. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Arakan in

which the abdomen beneath is almost entirely dark brassy-green, the

disc of the last three segments alone being orange yellow and in this

respect approaches Var. swmatrana, Voll.

Genus Lamprocoris, Stal.

Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864); Mayr, Reise Novara, Hem. p. 18 (1866): Stal, En.

Hem. iii, p. 9, 22 (1873). Includes Sophela, Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 17 (1867).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genns amongst the

subgenera Lamprocoris aud Sophela, both of which are represented in

India. Third joint of the antenne longer than the second ; tibie cylin-

drical neither flat nor furrowed above: prostethium impressed behind

182 EK, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

the eyes within the anterior margin which is amplified betweeu the eyes

and the sternum: anterior margin of the basal angles of the scutellum

subreflexed ; ventral segments unarmed in the apical angles; near the

sides, anteriorly and posteriorly, somewhat convex or tumescent.

97. LAMPROCORIS LATERALTS, Guérin.

Scutellera lateralis, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii (2) p. 159, 160 (1830).

Callidea lateralis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 28

(1867): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’ Arch. Indo-Néerl. p. 32, t. 2, f. 11 (1863).

L. (Lamprocoris) lateralis, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 155 (1866); En. Hem

iii, p. 22 (1873).

Head rounded at the tip, triangular, punctured, with two longitudi-

nal grooves in the middle; green, shining, the sides and the space be-

tween the grooves of a rich Prussian blue: antenne black: pronotum

and scutellum bluish-green, the former very tumid and very broad be-

hind, punctured, lateral posterior angles rather prominulous ; above and

anteriorly, with two oblong black spots, placed transversely and trend-

ing a little obliquely, towards the tip of a median and longitudinal line

of which the extremity reaches their level and whioh ends at the pos-

terior margin; on each side of this line are three long oblique spots

which do not reach the posterior margin: scutellum punctured, with

three transverse rows of black marks, of which five are on the anterior

"margin in the form of a crescent, four towards the middle, of which the

two median are much the largest, three behind these, almost united by a

weak brown mark, two more behind these last and often a very small

transverse spot at the posterior extremity : body beneath is of the same’

colour as above: abdomen with a broad red band, commencing close to:

the base and ending near the anus, it occupies half the first segment, the

2-4 and half the fifth segment, and has four black-brown stigmatic dots.

on the margin: feet concolorous: hemelytra brown ; wings transparent,

tip alone infuscate (Guérin). Long, 9—10; broad, 6—6}; mill.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Assam. The Indian Museum

possesses a specimen from Sikkim.

98. LAMPROCORIS ROYLII, Westwood.

Callidea Roylii, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 16 (1837): Germar, Zeitschr.

i (i) p. 119 (1839): Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker Cat. Het. i, p. 28

(1867).

Var. Scutellera pulchella, Westwood, Royle, Ill. Bot. Him. p. liv, t. 10, f. 6

(1839).

Lamprocoris roylii, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.)

iii, p. 44 (1879).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 183

Rufous cupreous or golden, varied with black: pronotum with the

dorsal line, three spots on each side and the humeral angle, black :

scutellum with three basal and five apical spots, also a broad lunated

band in the middle, black, margined green: body beneath greenish ;

abdomen with black band and on the margins rufous spots (CO. Royliz,

Westw.). Body long, 95 mill.

Brassy or coerulean-black, shining: disc of pronotum anteriorly and

posterior margin tinted cupreous or brassy: scutellum, intensely green

and gold, a transverse basal band and another median oblique (inter-

rupted in the middle), and three rounded spots (posteriorly and ar-

ranged in form of a triangle), ccerulean black: scutellum covering

the abdomen : two basal joints of antenne short, equal, third almost

twice as long as the second, last longest of all. Long, 105; broad, 6}

mill, (S. pulchella, Westw.)

Reported frem the Himalaya, Bengal, Nepal, Assam. The Indian

Museum has specimens from Sikkim and Mussoorie.

99. Lamprocoris optusus, Westwood.

Callidea obtusa, Westw., Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 16 (1837); Germar, Zeitschr. i

(i), p. 119 (1839): Voll., Faune Ent. lArch, Ind. Néerl. i, p. 32 (1863): Walker,

Cat. Het. iii, p. 510 (1868).

L. (Lamprocoris) obtusus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1878).

Golden-green : two anterior spots on the thorax, a dorsal line and

four other oblique, black: eleven black spots on the scutellum : body

beneath and the feet, black with a golden tinge; margin of abdomen,

fulvous, stigmata black (Westw.). Long, 95 mill.

Reported from Java.

100. LAmPROCcORIS SPINIGER, Dallas.

Callidea spinigera, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 186, t. 19, f. 1 (1849).

Sophela spinigera, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 18 (1867).

Lamprocoris (Sophela) spinigera, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873): Distant, A. M.

‘N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Broadly ovate, rather convex; above brownish testaceous, with

violet or brassy reflections, very thickly and finely punctured: head

violet, shining, faintly punctured and transversely wrinkled, the tylus

darker in colour; eyes brown, ocelli red: pronotum faintly punctured

with the lateral angles produced into a small acute spine on each side,

the anterior and lateral margins and in the & the whole anterior por-

tion, cupreous or violet, shining: on each side, towards the anterior

margin, is a small transverse fovea, surrounded by a brassy green ring:

scutellum very finely punctured and faintly wrinkled transversely,

184. E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

especially at the base which is brassy, cupreous or violet : hemelytra

with the margins pale testaceous : margins of the abdomen projecting

slightly beyond the scutellum, bright red, crenated, each segment bear-

ing two small projections or tubercles; abdomen beneath, deep blue

violet, very smooth and finely punctured, with a strong brassy-greem

reflection ; a violet line on the margin of each segment, running be-

tween the red tubercles ; anal apparatus red, violet at base in & : pectus

shining violet, punctured; the antero-lateral margins and the promi-

nent lateral angles, reddish: legs shining violet, finely pilose; tarsi

black: antennze and rostrum black, the former covered with short

hairs. (Dallas.) &,long with membrane 15; 92,16 mill.

Reported from N. India, Assam, Sikkim (Ind. Mus.)}: varies some-

what in the colouring above and beneath : above often purplish nacreous,

beneath the disc of abdomen shining red.

Div. Teryraria, Stal.

En. Hem. iii, p. 3, 24 (1873).

Body beneath distinctly convex, generally above and below equally

convex or below more convex: thorax and scutellum at the base con-

jointly gradually longitudinally convex, very rarely slightly convexly

inclined, basal part of thorax somewhat produced backwards between the

basal angles of the scutellum or the thorax posteriorly gradually round-

ed between the lateral angles, basal angles very obtuse or rounded:

venter in both sexes with two stridulatory spots, longitudinally very

densely and very finely strigose, oblong or elongate, extended through

at least the fourth and fifth segments, sometimes difficult to distinguish,

intermediate incisures straight on the disc or biundated, abruptly and

obtusely subangulately curved at the sides of the disc: orifices very

distinct (Stal).

Genus Horna, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 41 (1843): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 5, 39 (1851): Mayr,

Reise Novara Hem. p. 15 (1866): Walker, Cat. Het., i, p. 55 (1867): Stal, Hem.

Afric. i, p. 35, 53 (1864) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 24 (1873).

Body nude, above and beneath convex: head altogether convex,

with a continued median lobe, bucculze rather elevated before the mid-

dle: second and third joints of the antennz subequal in length, or the

second a little longer than the third: thorax sexangular, anterior lateral

margins, distinctly sinuated, lateral angles produced, more or less acu-

minate, posterior angles rounded, posterior margin straight: scutellum

as broad as the abdomen, rounded at the apex, not produced: proste-

thium dilated anteriorly, covering the base of the antenne: sterna

ee a eee ee

1887. ] BK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 185

slightly sulcated: disc of venter with two sericeous-shining spots, last

segment sinuated at the apex: feet somewhat robust, tibize above flat

(Stal).

101. Horra curcuLionipEs, Herr. Schaff.

Pachycoris curculionides, Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins. iii, p. 106, t. 107, f. 331 (1835) ;

Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 106 (1839).

Pachycoris punctulatus, Germar, 1. c. p. 105 (1839).

Hotea curculionides, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 39 (1851); Walker, Cat. Hem. i p. 56

(1867) ; Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 37 (1863).

Hotea (Tylonca) curculionides, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 25 (1873) ; Distant, J. A. S.

B. xlviii (2) p. 37 (1879); A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Ochraceous, deeply and thickly punctured brown or black, except

on the vertex and anterior margins of the pronotum where the colour is

more yellow: head beneath black, except the borders of the rostral

groove: eyes and ocelli greyish yellow, the latter very small: two first

joints of the antenne yellow, the two next brownish and the last, brown :

the feet are even more punctured than the body: the tibiz reddish.

This species varies much in the depth of its brown colour and the punc'

tures more or less strong and black; Germar’s H. punctulata is of a

very deep brown; some specimens have three longitudinal lines on the

head and thorax less punctured and Ighter, and a zigzag transverse

band on the scutellum, from the most advanced portion of which proceed

three other light lines which reach the margins (Voll.). Long, 8—9 mill.

Schaffer’s figure shows the upper surface deep brown without spots.

The Calcutta form has four longitudinal patches of a deeper colour

proceeding from the anterior margin of the pronotum, the two median

are continued obliquely inward almost to the posterior margin where

they meet. The scutellum has on each side an oblique small oblong

spot near the base on each side, and a large subquadrate patch on each

side beyond the middle, and two at the apex, all of a darker colour.

Specimens from Tavoy and Assam have the same spots more or less

distinct.

Reported from Amboina, Java, Sunda, Celebes, Timor, Ternate,

Sumatra, Assam. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Tavoy,

Calcutta and Sikkim.

102. Horea nicrorura, Walker.

Hotea nigrorufa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 57 (1867).

Red, short-elliptical, thickly black-punctured, and with numerous

small irregular black marks: head with five irregular red lines, and

with two longitudinal furrows: antenne black; first joint red ; fourth

24,

186 E. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

red at the tip: thorax with a red longitudinal line; sides luteous ;

angles acute: scutellum with an apical patch, which is not varied with

black: abdomen luteous along each side: legs red, black speckled ;

tarsi black: hemelytra brown ; corium red, with black punctures: wings

cinereous. Var.a. body red, with the exception of the punctures.

Var. b. like var.a: punctures red, here and there black. (Walker).

Body long, 10$ mill.

Reported from India.

103. Horsa(?) pirrusa, Walker.

Hotea (?) diffusa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 57 (1867).

Testaceous, elliptical very minutely punctured: head slightly ros-

triform, with two black longitudinal lines, which in the forepart. are

accompanied by two slight furrows: thorax somewhat rounded along

the hind border, angular on each side, contracted in front ; two slight

and interrupted black lines; a transverse lanceolate ferruginous-border-

ed mark on each side near the fore border: scutellum with a short

longitudinal streak on each side, composed of minute black speckles.

(Walker). Body long, 93 mill.

Reported from India.

Div. OpoNTOTARSARIA, Stal.

En. Hem. iii, p. 4, 26 (1873).

Head longer than broad or equally long and broad : anterior lateral

margins of thorax anteriorly not, or but very slightly, rounded : pro-

pleura not, or but slightly, impressed near the lateral margins : orifices

not distinguishable : second joint of antenne straight.

Genus ALPHOcORIS, Germar.

Zeitschr. i, p. 58 (1837): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 5 (1851): Stal, Hem. Afric. i,

p. 35, 60 (1844): Mayr, Reise Novara Hem, p. 13 (1866): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 59

(1867).

Body stout, especially beneath convex, narrowly oval or oblong,

greyish-tomentose : head stout, not margined, very convex, bucculz

rather elevated : antenne short, somewhat longer than the head: thorax

sexangular, posterior angles obtusely rounded, lateral angles not promi-

nent, obtuse : scutellum a little produced at the apex, the produced part

sinuate or somewhat sinuate at the apex: prostethium somewhat dilated

at the apex: sterna deeply sulcate: ventral incisures curved (Stal),

1887. | H. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 187

104. ALPHOCORIS LIXOIDES, Germar.

Alphocoris livoides, Germar, Zeitschr. i, p. 59, t. i, f. 3 (1839): Am. & Serv.,

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 44 (1843): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 41 (1851): Stal, Hem.

Afric. i, p. 60. (1864): En. Hem. iii, p. 26 (1873): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 59 (1867).

3, 2. Oblong, narrow, yellow-testaceous, beneath with feet (ex-

cept ventral limbus) blackish: above, rather densely and distinctly

punctulate, with four obsolete fuscous streaks; apex of scutellum sub-

truncate or slightly sinuate : disc of venter sometimes yellow-testaceous

and adorned with two black streaks (Stal). Long, 95—10; broad,

3—33 mill.

Reported from North India, Senegal.

Div. EuRYGASTRARIA, Stal.

En. Hem. a p. 4, 29, (1873): Eurygastride, pt., Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 43

(1851).

Differs from Odontotarsaria, in having the orifices distinct: se-

cond joint of antenne somewhat curved.

Genus Euryeaster, Laporte.

Subg. id. Ess. Hém. p. 69 (1832): Eurygaster, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 61 (1864) ;

Eu. Hem. i, p. 18 (1870); iii, p. 29, 30 (1873). Includes, according to Stal ;—

Bellocoris, pt., Hahn, Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 42 (1834) :—Eurygaster, Spin., Hss. p. 365

(1837); Mulsant & Rey, Pun. Scut. p. 59 1865) :—Tetyra, Germar, Zeitschr, i, (i) p.

72 (1839): Herr. Schiff. Wanz. Ins. v, p. 48 (1839) :—Eurygaster, subg. Platypleurus,

Mulsant & Rey, Pun. Scut. p. 59 (1865).

Body oval or ovate, a little convex above and beneath: head flat or

very slightly convex; antennez short, slender: thorax sexangular :

scutellum with the sides parallel, much narrower than the abdomen,

leaving the entire costal part of the hemelytra free : abdomen with the

sides flattened broader than the thorax: orifices extended in a rather

long furrow, abruptly abbreviated ; sides of mesosternal furrow neither

carinate nor rugose; tibie furrowed above. In the section to which

E. maurus, Linn. belongs, the lateral margins of the pronotum are

straight or somewhat so; the scutellum is marked on both sides at the

base near the basal angles with an oblong callous spot and the smooth

longitudinal line is not callous (Platypleurus, M. & R.).

105. EURYGASTER MAURUS, Linneus.

BE. (Platyplewrus) maurus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 30 (1873).

Tetyra maura, Fallen, Hem. Suec. Cim., p. 12 (1828): Burm., Handb. Ent. ii, p.

390 (1835): Germar, Zeitschr. i, p. 73 (1839); Rambur, Fauna Andal. ii, p. 100

(1841).

188 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Eurygaster maurus, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 53 (1848) ; Dallas,

List Hem. i, p. 48 (1851): Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 370 (1861): Mulsant & Rey, Pun.

France, p. 59 (1865): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.66 (1867): Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12

(1868): Douglas & Scott, Brit. Hem. i, p. 65 t. 2, f. 5 (1865): Saunders, Trans.

Ent. Soc. p. 119 (1875): T. Sahlb., K. S. V.-A. Handl. xvi, 4, p. 14 (1878): Distant,

Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 415 (1883).

Var. a.—Cimex maurus, Linn,, Fauna Suec., p. 246 (1761): Fabr., Syst. Ent., p.

99 (1775) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 87 (1794).

Tetyra maura, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng., p. 136 (1803).

Thyreocoris austriacus, Schranck, Fauna Boioc. ii, p. 68 (1801).

Odontotarsus maurus, Spin., Ess. Hém. p. 363 (1837).

Eurygaster cognatus, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 11 (1837).

Var. b.—Tetyra picta, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 136 (1803).

Odontotarsus pictus, Spin., Ess. Hém. p. 363 (1837).

Eurygaster orientalis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 11 (1837).

This species varies much in size and colour from brownish tawny

without markings to luteous with stripes and patches of brown.

Var. a.—Greyish or fuscous, scutellum at the base with two white

spots (Linn.). Rufous-brunneous, punctured black: thorax with two

diverging streaks, somewhat fuscous: scutellum with two minute basal,

whitish spots, and an elevated median line, paler: beneath obscurely

luteous, with a black spot before the anus (H. cognatus, Westw.).

Long, 10§ mill.

Var. b.—Head and thorax obscure, a little irrorated with black:

scutellum large, obscure; with two callous spots asin 7. maura, two

spots in the middle and a dorsal line bifurcated posteriorly, yellow :

connexivum spotted fuscous on both sides (7. picta, Fabr.). Fuscous-

rufescent, punctured black, variegated paler; a slender line from the

head to the apex of the scutellum and two other oblique lines united to

it (having the appearance of a triangular scutellum) and a pair of

larger spots at the sides of the scutellum: beneath rufescent, punctured

black, especially in the middle of the abdomen (ZL. orientalis, Westw.).

Long, 9-10 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, India, Japan.

Div. OponToscELARIA, Stal.

En. Hem. iii, p. 4, 30 (1873).

Body setose or pilose: head transverse, somewhat semiorbicular,

thorax anteriorly broader than the head, anterior lateral margins dis-

tinctly rounded : the scutellum very broad: propleura deeply impress-

ed or excavated towards the lateral margins, the part lying beyond the

depression a little deflexed: venter without stridulatory strigose spots ;

orifices not distinguishable (Sta/).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 189

Genus Arctocoris, Germar.

Pt., Zeitschr.i (i), p. 46 (1839): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873). Includes,

Trochrotus, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 39 (1843); Fieber, Eur. Hem.

p. 86, 377 (1861) ; Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866).

Body thickly clothed with long hairs: lateral margins of thorax

incised or sinuated behind the middle, between the sinus a deep trans-

verse impression,

106. ARcTocoris INcISus, Stal.

Arctocoris incisus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873).

3. Narrowly subobovate, punctulate, black, turning above into

ferruginous, greyish-pilose and subtomentose: thorax before the mid-

dle slightly roundly-narrowed, transversely impressed very distinctly

in the middle, lateral margins very deeply incised in the middle, anterior

angles somewhat prominent forwards. The 3& has on the ventral disc

of 4th, 5th segments on both sides, a deep black opaque, subimpressed,

oval spot. Allied to A. lanatus, Pallas, but differs in being smaller,

narrower, subobovate, narrowed hindwards, thorax only narrowed at

the apex, lateral margins very deeply incised, not obtusely sinuated,

and with the buccule more elevated (Stal) Long 5, breadth of pronotum,

3 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

Species of uncertain position.

107. CALLIDEA FASCIALIS, White.

Callidea fascialis, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 86 (1842); Dallas, List Hem,

i, p. 28 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 27 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873).

Head short, in front rather blunt, with a large pinkish-violet

spot, on the side of the two impressed preocular lines, the space between

these, being green: first joint of the antennz testaceous at base, green

at the tip: rostrum reaching the posterior coxe, black at the tip, yel-

low at the base: thorax with seven black spots; two distant anterior

ones in front connected by a narrow slightly curved black line: five

posterior ones, the median, largest, and square, apparently connected

together at the base by an obscure band, which has a slight pinkish

hue on the posterior blunt angle of the thorax: legs yellow, femora at

tip, bluish green, tibiz rufescent, ciliated: scutellum convex, posterior-

ly bent down, blunt at apex, with a semicircular impression at the base,

deepest on the dorsum; at the base there is a narrow, transverse black

band, sinuated on the posterior margin ; a little before the middle there

is another transverse black band, broadest in the middle beyond which

190 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

are three spots, one of them subapical: abdomen beneath, yellow, sides

tinged with pink, each segment being marked laterally with a black

spot, the inner sides of which are tinged with green. (White). Body

long, 11 mill.

Reported from India, Assam.

108. CALLIDEA HISTEROIDES, Walker.

Callidea histeroides, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 28 (1867).

Blackish purple, short-elliptical, largely punctured: head with

two longitudinal furrows which diverge between the eyes, space between

the furrows somewhat ridged in front: antenne black; second joint

rather more than half the length of the first: thorax with two green

stripes, very thinly punctured ; punctures mostly along the fore border

and along a transverse antemedial furrow; a fusiform, transverse,

slightly depressed, ringlet on each side in front of the furrow : scutel-

lum with a green band bordering a transverse furrow which is curved

on each side to the fore border: abdomen beneath green, with a

purplish band along the fore border of each segment and with a deeply

dentate red stripe along each side: legs blackish green; tarsi black.

(Walker). Long, 8—9 mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam).

109. Cattipga GippuLa, Walker.

Callidea gibbula, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).

Purplish black, elliptical, thinly and roughly punctured : head with

two longitudinal furrows, which diverge on the vertex: thorax with a

very slight transverse furrow, which is curved on each side to the base :

abdomen beneath, greenish at the tip, and with two deeply dentate

lateral stripes, which do not extend to the base (Walker). Long, 8—9

mill.

Reported from the Panjab.

110. Catuipra scripta, Walker.

Callidea scripta, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).

Purple, short-elliptical, largely punctured: head with two longi-

tudinal furrows, which diverge towards the face and more towards the

hind border: antenne black; second joint nearly as long as the first:

thorax with two golden green stripes, which are much abbreviated in

front, and thence emit two oblique branches towards the hind angles ;

a fusiform transverse cupreous ringlet on each side in front : scutellum

with a transverse furrow which is curved on each side to the fore

1887. ] EH. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 191

border; four cupreous green-bordered bands: second, third and fourth

bands connected on each side ; second connected in the middle with the

third, forked on each side, fourth apical: pectus blue: abdomen beneath

blue; a purple band on the fore border of each segment ; a dentate

red stripe on each side: legs green; tarsi black (Walker). Long, 9—10

mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam), N. India.

111. Caniipea contraRiA, Walker.

Callidea contraria, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 30 (1867).

Gilded green, short, stout, nearly elliptical, rather thinly and

roughly punctured: head purple in front with two longitudinal fur-

rows which diverge on the vertex: antenne black; first joint purple ;

second more than half the length of the first: thorax with seven short

purple stripes, in front of which there is a transverse purple spot on

each side: scutellum with three purple spots near the base, and with

three purple bands of which the second is interrupted ; three hinder

transverse spots, one on each side and one subapical: pectus purple:

abdomen red; under side with a row of black dots along each side

with a purple disc: legs bluish green; tarsi black (Walker). Long,

10—11 mill.

Reported from N. India.

112. Fira arprens, Walker.

Fitha ardens, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 45 (1867).

Gilded green, elliptical, largely punctured: head with two longi-

tudinal furrows, which diverge between the eyes and converge slightly

on the hind border; vertex purple between the furrows: antennez

4-jointed (?), black ; first joint reddish at the base: thorax and scutellum

mostly brilliant reddish cupreous; the former with six purple spots ;

the latter with eight purple spots; three on each side; seventh elon-

gated, on the disc near the base ; eighth sub-apical : pectus with a trans-

verse yellow streak on each side: abdomen beneath with a bright pur-

ple stripe along each side, and with a yellow patch on the disc: legs

red; tibie and tips of femora blackish green; tarsi black: hemelytra

black ; space towards the base, except the costa, cinereous, nearly

hyaline: wings cinereous, nearly hyaline (Walker). Long, 83 mill.

Reported from India.

113. Camntya varioLosa, Walker.

Cenina variolosa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 82 (1867).

Aeneous: head with a pale yellow spot on each side: antenne

192 EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

yellowish, piceous towards the tips: thorax mostly yellowish, with a

pale yellow border ; an eneous band in front, containing two quadrate

whitish spots, behind which there is an seneous spot ; punctures eneous :

scutellum yellowish, excepting the punctures and a patch on the disc,

and three whitish spots on the fore border: legs whitish ; femora at the

base and coxe black : corium yellowish, with eneous punctures (Walker.).

Body, long, 2 mill.

Reported from Burma.

Subfam. Prentratomina, Stal.

Hem. Afric. i, p. 32, 76 (1864); Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. (3), p. 31 (1872); En.

Hem. v, p. 28 (1876).

(a). The primary and subtended veins of the hemelytra generally

close to each other and diverging at the apex, parallel or somewhat so :

hamus generally absent: scutellum varying in size, generally furnished

with frena: entire basal margin of thorax touching base of the scutel-

lum : rostral furrow anteriorly not or but very slightly narrowed.

(>). Rostrum extended behind the first pair of coxe, of variable

length, 1-2 joints elongate, the second entirely or to the greatest part

extended behind the buccule.

(c). Scutellum generally reaching or extending beyond the middle

of the abdomen, rarely short, and if so, narrow at the apex and only

slightly or very slightly produced behind the frena: membrane mode-

rate or small.

(d). Tarsi 3-jointed: tibiz generally furrowed above.

(e). Rostrum slender, more or less remote from the labrum which

is inserted below the apex of the tylus; rostral furrow anteriorly some-

times coarctate: buccule usually higher anteriorly, parallel, not united

posteriorly.

The divisons of this large sub-family are still only tentative

and cannot be satisfactorily arranged by any one working only in

India away from the types. I only give when possible what may be

considered a probable arrangement after consulting the very consider-

able literature on the subject.

Diy. Popoparia, Stal.

En. Hem. vy, p. 29 (1876).

Anterior lateral margins of the thorax produced in a tooth or spine

before the lateral angles which on this account appear as if sinuate or

emarginate: entire antenniferous tubercles or a great part prominulous

beyond the lateral margins of the head, generally acutely produced

outwards at the apex: first joint of the rostrum not extended behind the

1887, ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 193

buccule which are everywhere equally high or posteriorly higher:

eyes strongly prominulous or slightly stylate: frena sometimes occu-

pying one-third the length of the scutellum which generally reaches the

end of the abdomen,

Genus ScorrnopHara, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 502 (1867): En. Hem. vy, p. 33 (1876) ; Horvath, Wien

Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 165 (1883).

Body ovate: head somewhat convex, more or less sinuate before

the eyes; juga flattened, entirely distant, not narrowed before the

anteocular sinus, not converging before the somewhat elevated tylus,

rounded at the apex or roundly truncated: antenniferous tubercles

placed below the lateral margins of the head and entirely prominulous

beyond those margins, acutely produced outwards at the apex ; buccule

continued through, low, everywhere equally high: antennz somewhat

short, basal joint entirely visible from above, second joint distinctly shorter

than the third, fifth joint scarcely or only a little stouter than the fourth

elongate fusiform: rostrum reaching the last pair of coxe: thorax

transverse, furnished with a gular ring prominulous on both sides in a

more or less acute tooth, and armed before the humeral angles with au

acute tooth: scutellum large, longer than the corium, reaching the

apex of the abdomen, slightly narrowed behind the base, the basal

part with frena: prostethium furrowed, the furrow with elevated

margins: second genital segment in & entirely hidden, the third seg-

ment only yisible. (Horvath.)

114. ScormvopHara ArFrFinis, Haglund.

Scotinophara affinis, Haglund, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxix, p. 153 (1868); Stal, Eu.

Hem. vy, p. 33 (1876).

Q@. Fuscous-lurid, beneath blackish, densely and strongly punc-

tured ; rostrum, tibis (base excepted) and tarsi, rufescent ; pronotum

anteriorly with a very minute annulated tooth, sides subsinuate, lateral

angles very slightly emarginate: scutellum distinctly truncate at the

apex, extended to the apex of the abdomen. Closely allied to S. lurida

Burm. from which it scarcely differs except in the anterior tooth on the

pronotum being smaller, sides of thorax more distinctly sinuate, and

thorax somewhat more impressed. Rostrum reaching the last pair of

coxe: membrane almost hyaline, margin fuscescent: second joint of

antenne rufescent (Haglund). Long, 9; broad scarcely 5 mill,

Reported from Rangoon,

194 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

115. ScorTrnopHaRA LURIDA, Burmeister.

Tetyra lurida, Burm., Noy. Act. Ac. Cees. Leop. Car. Nat. Cur. xvi, Suppt. (i) p.

288 (1834).

Podops luridus, Germar, Zeitschr.i(i) p. 64 (1839); Dallas, List. Hem. i, p.

52 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).

Scotinophara lurida, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 33 (1876); Scott, A. M. N. H. (4s.)

xiv, p. 289 (1874) ; (5 s.) Distant, iii, p. 44 (1879) ; Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 415 (1883).

Fuscous: head small; eyes free, almost stylate ; clypeus produced

forwards, with a distinct groove on each side, in whichthe antenne lie :

antennez with 1-2 joints of equal length, half as long as the third, 3-5

joints of equal length, the last incrassate : pronotum narrowed forwards,

on each side on the anterior angle a small acute spine, a similar one on

each humeral angle, a weak, transverse furrow beyond the middle:

scutellum a little shorter than the abdomen: rostrum, tibiw, and feet

reddish. (Burm.) Long, 103; broad, 6; mill.

Reported from Canton, Japan, Assam.

116. ScoTINOPHARA BISPINOSA, Fabricius.

Cimex bispinosus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 530 (1798).

Tetyra bispinosa, pt. Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 1388 (1803).

Scotinophara bispinosa, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 21 (1868); En. Hem. vy, p. 33

(1876).

2. Blackish; thorax behind the middle, scutellum, hemelytra and

broad ventral limbus fuscous-flavescent, punctured ferruginous-black :

antenne, rostrum, tibie and tarsi greyish flavescent ; last joint of an-

tenne, fuscous: spine of antcrior and lateral angles of the thorax large,

black, pallescent at the apex. Readily distinguished by the great spines

of the thorax, almost equally long, pallescent at the apex and the

anterior lateral margins of the thorax being straight. Head with the

juga and tylus equally long, anteocular spine moderate: third joint of

antenne scarcely twice longer than the second: thorax slightly trans-

versely impressed between the spines of the lateral angles; anterior

angles with an acute spine turning outwards and forwards, subequal in

length to the first joint of the antenne; lateral angles with a spine

turning outwards scarcely shorter than the spines of the anterior angles ;

anterior margin depressed, anterior lateral margins straight, entire,

unarmed, somewhat callous behind the middle: scutellum reaching

apex of abdomen, about 4th basal part somewhat narrowed hindwards,

thence lateral margins subparallel, posteriorly rounded, apex obtuse,

subsinuate: tubercle of apical angles of ventral segments distinct,

pallid (Stal). Long, 8; breadth of pronotum, 43 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar.

1887. | KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 195

117. ScorrvopHara coarcrata, Fabricius.

Cimes courctatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt., p. 530 (1798).

Tetyra bispinosa, pt. Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 138 (1803).

£ Podops bispinosus, Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 45, t. 158, f. 496 (1839)

Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 53 (1851).

Scotinophara coarctata, Stal, Hem. Fabr., i, p. 21 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 33

(1876).

Body oblong, entirely obscure: very slightly shining; head and

anterior part of thorax, black: thorax on each side with two small teeth,

one towards the apex, the other towards the base: scutellum coarctate

on both sides in the middle (Fabr.).

3S Differs from S. bispinosa, Fabr. in having the thorax anteriorly

and the head more inclined, thorax scarcely transversely impressed in

the middle, teeth of its anterior and lateral angles minute, equal in size ;

anterior lateral margins straight, slightly rounded anteriorly (Stal).

Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Ceylon.

118. ScorinopHaRA TARSALIS, Vollenhoven.

Podops tarsalis, Voll, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 42, t. 3, f. 8 (1863) ;

Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 520 (1868).

_ Scotinophara tarsalis, Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 33 (1876); Distant, A. M.N. H.

(5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Body above rather deep brown, covered all over with an immense

number of small black dots which have the effect of making it appear al-

most black: head and pronotum covered with a weak yellowish pubes-

cence: tylus a little more tumid than the juga of which the further angles

are weakly prolonged : the spine on the sides of the head rather robust :

first joint of antenne of an obscure brown, the rest of a light brown:

eyes blackish ; ocelli rather small: pronotum emarginate anteriorly and

with two strong, broad spines at the anterior augles; lateral borders

weakly widened inthe middle, and the lateral angles end in an acute

point followed by a small notch: scutellum rather flat, a little narrowed

before the middle and oval at the apex, usually with two glossy yellow

spots near the basal angles: body beneath, black, punctured, with a

spare yellow pubescence: rostrum light brown: femora and four first

tibize black, posterior with half of the tibie light brown which is the

colour of all the tarsi: angles of ventral segments and margins are

nodulose (Voll.). Long, 6 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Assam. In Assam usually with legs

luteous punctured with black.

196 i. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

119. ScormnopHAaRA oBscuRA, Dallas.

Podops obscurus, Dallas List Hem. i, p. 52 (1851); Voll., Faune Ent. Arch.

Indo-Néer. p. 41, t. 3, f. 6 (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).

Scotinophara obscura, Stal, En, Hem. v. p. 34 (1876) ; Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.)

iii, p. 44 (1879).

Above brown, obscure, thickly and rather finely punctured; head

rather small, black, narrowed in front; juga longer than the tylus, but

not meeting infront of it, a small spine on each side in front of the

eyes: thorax blackish in front, with a short spine at each anterior

angle, the antero-lateral margins nearly straight, and the lateral angles

emarginate: scutellum reaching the apex of the abdomen, distinctly

truncated at the apex, constricted a little before the middle: body be-

neath pitchy black, very thickly and finely punctured and sparingly

clothed with short golden hairs: femora black with an indistinct pale

band near the apex: tibize and tarsi pale brown: rostrum and antenne

pitchy (Dallas). Long, 7—8 mill.

Reported from Assam, Tenasserim, Borneo, Java.

120. ScoTinoPHARA NIGRA, Dallas.

Podops niger, Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 53 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72

(1867).

Scotinophara nigra, Stal, En, Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Pitchy black, somewhat obscure, thickly punctured, sprinkled with

yellowish hairs: head rather long, with a strong spine before each eye ;

tylus as long as the juga, elevated into a tubercle about the middle :

thorax gibbous in front, with a faint furrow across the middle; the

antero-lateral margins reflexed, rounded; a long spine directed for-

wards, on each side at the anterior margin, and a small one at each

lateral angle; scutellum as long as the abdomen, contracted before the

middle, somewhat truncated at the apex, with a small pit in each basal

angle: outer margin of the hemelytra and the edge of the abdomen

pitchy red: legs concolorous; tarsi ferruginous: rostrum pitchy red,

with the basal joint black: antenne pitchy (Dallas). Long, 73-8

mill.

Reported from India P

121. ScorinoPHARA SPINIFERA, Westwood.

Podops spinifera, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p, 16 (1837); Stal, En. Hem,

y, p. 125 (1876).

Black, coarsely punctured ; head anteriorly attenuated, subtruncate

at the apex; a porrect spine on both sides before the eyes: pronotum

scabrous anteriorly, abruptly elevated, sides acutely serrate and furnish-

1887. | B. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 197

ed with a lateral tooth; posterior angles of the abdominal segments,

acute (Westw.). Long, 83 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

122. ScormopuHara timosa, Walker.

Podops limosus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).

Tawny, punctured, piceous beneath: head carinated: pronotum

with an obliquely porrect spine on each side in front; hind angles

forming two acute teeth: scutellum extending almost to the tip of the

abdomen, much narrower than the breadth of the abdomen which is

tawny along each side, beneath: femora piceous (Walker). Long, 6-7

mill.

Reported from N. India: the colour distinguishes it from S. nigra,

Dallas, with which it agrees in structure, |

Genus Stortuecoris, Horvath.

Wien. Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 296 (1883).

Body briefly oval: head transverse, slightly convex, gradually

dilated forwards before the anteocular sinus: juga flattened, entirely

distant, not converging before the somewhat elevated tylus: antenni-

ferous tubercles produced outward in a conical spine placed in the same

plane with the lateral margins of the head ; buccule continued through,

low, everywhere equally high: antennz shortish, basal joint altogether

visible from above, stoutish, second joint much shorter than the third,

fourth joint somewhat shorter than the third, fifth joint a little stouter

than the fourth, elongate-fusiform: thorax transverse, anterior lateral

margins acute, irregularly serrated, furnished with a process behind the

anterior angle, produced in an acutish tooth before the humeral angles,

disc transversely impressed in the middle, anterior lobe somewhat

rugose, furmished on each side with a transverse furrow behind the

anterior margin which gradually disappears towards the anterior angles

and there approaches the anterior margin: scutellum large, longer than

the corium, reaching the apex of the abdomen (<) or nearly reaching

it (@), slightly narrowed behind the base, thence slightly amplified ;

frena short: prostethium furrowed, furrow with moderately elevated

margins: feet moderate; tibie furrowed: second genital segment in &

entirely hidden, only the third genital segment visible (Horv.). Differs

from Scotinophara, Stal, in the shorter rostrum and the gular ring with-

out a tooth on each side: from Amauropepla, Stal, in the head not being

narrowed forwards before the anteocular sinus, in the tylus being

somewhat elevated, and in the rostrum being longer,

198 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

123. SroRTHECORIS NIGRICEPS, Horvath.

Storthecoris nigriceps, Horv., Wien. Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 297 (1883).

3, Q. Fuscous-testaceous, rather densely punctured fuscous : head,

pectus and a very large discal patch on venter, black: juga extending

distinctly beyond the tylus, gradually a little dilated before the middle,

obliquely roundly truncated at the apex: spine of the antenniferous

tubercles, robust, straight, obliquely turning out wards and subacute at

the tip: the anterior lateral margins of the thorax behind the triangu-

lar gular process, very slightly rounded and dilated, the obsolete intra-

marginal furrow parallel with the margins: the continued median line

more or less obsolete on the thorax and three callous basal spots on the

scutellum, pallid: scutellum truncated at the apex (<), or rounded @ :

membrane whitish-hyaline: lateral borders of metastethium and venter

broadly yellow-testaceous, punctured black; ventral spiracula and

small basal spots on the connexivum, black; rostrum, antenne and

feet, yellow-testaceous, variegated with black, sparingly greyish-pilose :

third joint of the antenne more than thrice longer than the second

(Horv.). Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from the Himalaya.

Genus AMAUROPEPLA, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 502 (1867); En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Differs from Scotinophara in having the head gradually narrowed

forwards before the anteocular sinus: the anterior lateral margins of the

thorax rounded and denticulate: head somewhat flat: tylus not

elevated.

124. AMAUROPEPLA DENTICULATA, Haglund.

Amauropepla denticulata, Haglund, Stettin. Hut. Zeit. xxix, p. 151 (1868): Stal,

En. Hem. vy, p. 34 (1876).

3. Oblong, above lurid, beneath black-fuscous, entirely densely

punctured black; rostrum and feet sordid flavescent ; membrane and

wings whitish-hyaline, external margin of membrane hardly flavescent ;

thorax with the sides serrate and lateral angles boradly emarginate.

Head with tylus shorter than the juga which are hiscent at the apex ;

bucculz elevated: eyes very prominent, almost pedunculate: ocelli

placed a little behind an imaginary line drawn between the base of the

eyes, twice more distant from each other than from the eyes: antenni-

ferous tubercles externally spinose, entirely visible from above: first

and second joints of the antennw subequal, one half the length of the

third: rostrum short, reaching the middle between the anterior and

1887. | H. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 199

intermediate coxe#: sides of thorax slightly rounded, irregularly ser-

rate or denticulate, transversely impressed on the disc; posterior mar-:

gin, straight: scutellum large, reaching apex of abdomen, spathulate,

with the sides sinuate, broadly rounded at the apex; frena short :

abdomen densely punctured; miuute tubercles behind the spiracula

less distinct : feet moderate, tibis hardly sulcate externally towards the

apex (Haglund). Long, 10; broad, 5; exp. hemi. 18 mill.

Reported from Rangoon.

Genus MenAnopHara, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 503 (1867); p. 152 (1868) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 34 (1876).

Differs from Aspidestrophus, Stal, in having the head very slightly

convex behind the middle, somewhat concave towards the apex, margins

acute; rostrum reaching the intermediate coxe ; body oval.

MELANOPHARA DENTATA, Haglund.

Melanophara dentata, Haglund, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxix, p. 152 (1868): Stal, En.

Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

@. Black, opaque, above finely, remotely, abdomen more densely,

punctured ; briefly, palely pubescent; rostrum and tarsi, obscurely

rufescent ; thorax anteriorly elevated and marked with gyrated smooth

impressions ; impressed. transversely in the middle; anterior angles

with a very minute tooth, sides rounded and furnished with four small

teeth, lateral angles with a large acute spine and behind it slightly

emarginate. Head anteriorly rounded, very slightly emarginate ; juga

longer than the tylus, contiguous: ocelli situate behind an imaginary

line drawn between the base of the eyes, twice more distant from each

other than from the eyes: antenniferous tubercles broad, externally

strongly dentate, altogether distinct from above: first and second

joints of the antennew equal, one half the length of the third: buccule

much elevated, continued through: rostrum reaching the intermediate

coxx, third and fourth joints equally long, second subequal to them :

thorax anteriorly with less distinct, smooth, gyrated or tortuous im-

pressions ; posterior margin, straight : scutellum broad, rounded at the

apex, not reaching the apex of the abdomen ; sides before the middle

slightly sinuated ; frena not reaching the middle; membrane slightly

fuscescent: spiracula and minute tubercles behind the spiracula, dis-

tinct; tibize externally distinctly suleate (Haglund). Long, barely 9 ;

broad, 43 mill. 7

Reported from Rangoon.

200 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Genus AspipEestRopHtus, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh., xi, p. 232 (1854): Freg. Hug. Resa, Ins., Hem., p. 219

(1859) ; Ofvers. 1. c., p. 503 (1867) ; En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Body somewhat broadly subovate, subpubescent: head subgua-

drate, rather convex, somewhat deflexed towards the apex, spinose on

both sides before the eyes; juga scarcely longer than the tylus, ob-

liquely truncate or sinuately truncate outwards at the apex, margins

obtuse: rostrum reaching the posterior coxe; antenne as long as the

head and thorax together: the thorax transversely, a little sinuate

anteriorly, subtruncate posteriorly, sides slightly rounded, crenated :

scutellum as long as the abdomen but half its breadth, slightly sinuate

on both sides towards the base, broadly rounded at the apex: feet mo-

derate, basal and apical joints of tarsi equal in length, the intermediate

very small (Stal).

126. ASPIDESTROPHUS MORIO, Stal.

Aspidestrophus morio, Stil, Ofvers. K.V.-A. Forh. p. 232 (1854); Free. Hug.

‘Resa, Ins, Hem. p. 219, t. 3, f. 1 (1859); Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-

Néer. i, p. 43 (1863); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 74 (1867). Stal, En. Hem. vy, p. 34

(1876); Distant, A. M. N. H. (6 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Aspidestrophus lineola, Vollenhoven, l. c. p. 44, t. 3, f. 10 (1863) : Walker, 1. c. iii,

p. 521 (1868).

Black-piceous, roughly punctured, sordid ochraceous pubescent and

silky ; an almost apical ring on the femora and the tarsi, sordid yellow-

testaceous (Stal). Long, 73; broad, 4¢ mill,

3. Head square, rounded in front ; head and pronotum punctured,

of a very deep brown with a yellowish villosity, rather close: antenne

of the same colour: scutellum contracted obliquely on each side to-

wards the base, pitchy brown, with a spare punctuation on the disc,

closer towards the borders, weakly yellowish pilose: hemelytra of the

same colour, rather strongly punctured, with some short, yellowish

hairs towards the base of the costal border: beneath of a pitchy colour,

the sternum with a yellowish villosity ; abdomen punctured, sparingly

pilose; each segment has a small round tubercle behind each stigma :

feet of the same colour as the body, except a small patch beneath almost

at the end of the femora, and the tarsi which are yellowish-white.

(Voll.). Long, 73 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Sumatra, Assam.

A. lineola, Voll. is smaller (6 mill.), of an almost black brown or

black and is not so pubescent. A small line on the pronotum, a semi-

circular subapical spot on the femora and apex of antenne, yellow,

1887.] EK, T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. | 201

Div. Hatyaria, Stal.

En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876) :—Includes Sciocorides and Halydes, pt., Am. &

Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 118, 103 (1843) :—Sciocoride and Halydide, Dallas,

List Hem. i, p. 130, 150 (1851).

Venter anteriorly on both sides with a short transversely rugose or

strigose streak or with the venter furrowed: head long, rostrum reach-

ing behind the last coxe: antennw remote from the eyes, third joint of

the rostrum much longer than the fourth ; eyes strongly prominulous.

Genus Mzcipea, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 139 (1851) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 79, 182 (1864); Ofvers. K.

V.-A. Forh. p. 58 (1872) ; En. Hem. v, p. 34, 37 (1876): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 179

(1867). Includes Cerataulax, Signoret, A, 8. E. F. (2 8.), ix, p. 335 (1851).

Body somewhat elongate, somewhat depressed: head oblong-trian-

gular, produced, somewhat convex, juga much longer than the tylus,

anteriorly gradually narrowed and converging, or somewhat hiscent,

lateral margins of the head not flattened; antenniferous tubercles en-

tirely visible from above: buccule slightly elevated: eyes globose,

rather prominulous ; ocelli large, on a line with the base of the eyes:

rostrum reaching the metasternum, inserted towards the apex of the

head, second joint much longer than the third, about as long as the two

apical taken together, third longer than the fourth: antenne 5-jointed,

stoutish, gradually stouter towards the base, first joint not reaching the

apex of the head, second joint as long as or longer than the others,

three-cornered and somewhat thickened towards the base, fourth joint

longer than the fifth: anterior lateral margins of thorax obtuse, some-

what entire or very obsoletely crenulated, slightly simuated: scutellum

triangular, much narrowed at the apex, frena extended to a distance be-

yond the middle: hemelytra scarcely narrower than the abdomen; mem-

brane with simple veins: mesosternum somewhat furrowed: feet mo-

derate, femora unarmed at the apex; tibie somewhat furrowed; tarsi

3-jointed (Sial.). ,

127. Mucipra inpicA, Dallas.

Mecidea indica, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 139, t. 3, f. 3 (1851); Trang. Ent. Soc.

(n. s.)ii, p. 9 (1852); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.179 (1851): Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 38

(1876).

2. Pale yellow, thickly and finely punctured; eyes black : gcutel-

lum very long: membrane transparent, whitish: ventral stigmata

brown: rostrum with the tip black: antenne with the second joint very

long, more than twice the length of the third, dilated towards the bage :

4-5 joints shorter than the second, but longer than the third ; fourth

202 BR. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

longer than the fifth: antenniferous tubercles spinous on the outside

(Dallas). Long, 105 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

Genus Datpapa, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 105 (1843); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 153 (1851) : Stal,

Hem. Afric. i, p. 80, 101 (1864): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 218 (1867): Stal, Ofvers. K.

y.-A. Férh. p. 508 (1867); En. Hem. v, p. 36, 43 (1876). Includes Udana, Walker,

1. c. iii, p. 549 (1863).

Body oval or ovate: head scarcely or only very slightly convex :

juga more or less distinctly sinuated at the apex outwards or obliquely

truncated: buccule reaching the base of the head, angulated anteriorly,

antenne 5-jointed, slender, the first joint not or only very slightly ex-

tending beyond the juga, not longer than the marginal space of the

head lying between the eyes and the place of insertion of the antenne :

eyes globose rather prominulous; ocelli in a line with the base of the

eyes: rostrum extending a little beyond the last pair of feet, first joint

not or only slightly extended beyond the buccule: anterior lateral

margins of the thorax crenulated: membrane with about six simple,

longitudinal veins: mesosternum carinated: venter slightly sulcated

at the base: feet somewhat long; tibie broadly furrowed above, first

pair sometimes dilated (Sia?).

128. Dawpapda ocunata, Fabricius.

Cimex oculatus, Fabr., Syst. Ent. p. 703 (1775) ; Spec. Ins. ii, p. 347 (1781);

Mant. Ins. ii, p. 285 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 99 (1794).

Halys oculata, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1808).

Dalpada aspersa, Ellenr., Nat. Tijdssk. v. Ned. Ind. xxiv, p. 140, f. 8 (1862).

Dalpada oculata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 218

(1867) ; Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 22 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 43 (1876); Distant, J. A.

S. B. xlviii (2), p. 37 (1879) ; A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

Grey: antenne usually as long as the body, fuscous, with two

white rings ; head, fuscous, immaculate; pronotum greyish or variegated

fuscous-testaceous, furnished posteriorly with a small, obtuse prominence ;

scutellum paler at the apex and at the base, on both sides with a very

glabrous yellow spot: hemelytra concolorous; wings black: beneath

yellow witha lateral line, fuscous, and the margins of the abdomen

variegated fuscous and ferruginous: femora scabrous, pallid, black at

the apex ; tibize black (annulated yellow), first pair dilated at the apex ;

tarsi pallid, black at the apex, four posterior feet pale, genicule black

(Fabr.). Stal observes that the specimens usually found in collections

are clouded with fuscous-zneous above, a large smooth spot at the

basal angles and nearly the third apical part of the scutellum, flaves-

cent, and the anterior tibie are dilated. Long, 15—18 mill,

1887. | BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 203

Reported from China, Siam, Cambodia, Tenasserim, Assam, Silhat

Malacca, Penang, Java, Borneo, Sumatra, Celebes, Bouru, Philippines.

The Indian Museum has specimens from Sikkim, Assam, Arakan,

Tavoy.

129. DaALpPADA vuRSICOLOR, Herr. Schaffer.

Halys versicolor, Herr. Schaff. Wanz. Ins. v, p. 76, t. 169 f. 520 (1839) ; vii, p. 60

(1844),

Dalpada versicolor, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.

220 (1876); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 43 (1876): Lethierry, Ann, Mus. Gen, xviii, p. 648

(1883).

Yellow-fuscous, variegated with bronze or steel-green patches :

head elongate, tylus extending beyond the juga which form outwards

two obtuse angles: eyes large: antenne slender: sides of pronotum

weakly serrated anteriorly, angles acute: two subminiaceous spots at

base of scutellum of which the apex is long and slender; membrane

with eight veins of which the outer on each side is indistinct: margin

of abdomen yellow-ochreous with steel-green spots: beneath pale

erange with greenish pulverulent outer border and a black longitudinal

spot posteriorly. Long, 14 mill.

Reported from Java, India, Burma.

130. DAupPapaA cLAVATA, Fabricius.

Cimez clavatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 532 (1798).

Halys clavata, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1803).

Dalpada clavata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p- 219

(1867). Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 22 (1868) ; Hn, Hem. v, p. 43 (1876); Distant, A. M.

N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

Head porrect, unidentate on both sides: thorax not serrated but

armed on both sides with a small dull-black clavate protuberance, two

white dots at the apex: scutellum cinereous at the apex: hemelytra

spotted fuscous: abdomen flavescent, margin black, spotted yellow

(Fabr.).

Closely allied to D. versicolor, H. S., head a little longer, lateral

angles of pronotum somewhat more obtuse, more thickened and flexed

upwards; without the somewhat large, smooth, spot on the basal angles

of the scutellum but at the base near the angles, a small smooth spot ;

dots more fuscous, less brassy (Stal). Long, 15—16 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Assam.

131. DaALpapa PiLicornis, Stal.

Dalpada pilicornis, Stal, En, Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).

&. Stramineous; head, pronotum, hemelytra, and pectus, distinct-

204: K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. LNo. 2,

ly and irregularly punctured brassy, an indistinct median streak and the

apex of the lateral angles of the pronotum less densely punctured, the

lateral angles of the pronotum rather prominulous, neither tumid nor

rugose; scutellum with a somewhat large, smooth, oval spot on the

basal angles, third apical part and discoidal streak somewhat smooth,

sparingly punctured; membrane greyish, veins fuscous: connexivum

aeneous, segments banded with yellow; venter testaceous, sparingly

punctured fuscous-aeneous, anteriorly subsulcate, extreme angles of

segments, acneous ; antenne, rostrum and feet pilose, the feet sprinkled

with fuscous ; second joint of the antenne shorter than the third : ros-

trum somewhat extended beyond the last coxe; tylus and juga equally

long. o& with the genital segment strongly tri-impressed, costate be-

tween the impressions (Stal). Long, 10; broad, 5 mill.

Reported from the Nilgiris (Madras).

132. Dapapa conctnna, Westwood.

Halys concinna, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 23 (1837).

Dalpada concinna, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876.)

Greyish-luteous, punctured with fuscous: two black lines between

the eyes; thorax anteriorly serrate; posterior angles prominulous,

black; basal angles of scutellum pallid; membrane hyaline, longitudi-

nal veins fuscous, with some oblong dots scattered between; feet con-

colorous: sides of abdomen with black spots, a single small white spot

in the middle. (Westw.). Long, body 14—143 mill.

Reported from China, India. Dallas unites this with D. clavata,

Fabr.

133. DALPADA NIGRICOLLIS, Westwood.

Halys nigricollis, West:, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 22 (1837) (0).

Halys obscura, West. 1. c. p. 22 (¢): Dallas, 1. c. p. 184 (1851).

Dalpada nigricollis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het., i, p. 219

(1867). Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).

Q. Greyish luteous, everywhere punctured with brassy-black:

slender, longitudinal, median line on the pronotum and four minute

dots, luteous ; sides of pronotum hardly serrate, posterior angles sub-

prominulous ; basal angles of scutellum, whitish: membrane pallid,

with six fuscous longitudinal veins and the same number of interme-

diate longitudinal fuscous dots: feet luteous, dotted black: base of

fourth and fifth joints of the antenne, white. (Westw.). Long, 17—18

mill.

Reported from Bengal.

3. Smaller than the ? : the head and the thorax, blackish : an-

tenue fuscous, second joint incurved ; sides of thorax entire, posterior

semantics tii limpet tasmanian

1887.) K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 205

angles subacute, prominulous, black: scutellum fuscous, punctured

luteous, basal angles luteous ; membrane whitish, the longitudinal veins

slender with several fuscous dots strewed between them: abdomen

fulvous with a broad lateral band fuscous, feet luteous, punctured

fuscous (Westw.). Long, 12—13 mill.

Reported from Nepal, India.

134. DaLPADA AFFINIS, Dallas.

Dalpada affinis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 219

(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).

Q. Closely allied to D. nigricollis, Westw.; body broader, head

longer, lateral angles of pronotum tuberculose, large, obtuse, whitish at

the apex: scutellum immaculate at the base, somewhat broad at the

apex: membrane fuscescent, veins more obscure: sides of the abdomen

variegated with fulvous and black: antenne fulvous, two last joints,

fuscous (Westw.). Long, 17—18 mill.

Reported from N. India.

135. DanpPapa vaRiA, Dallas.

Dalpada varia, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 220

(1867) ; Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 45 (1876); Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii, (2) p. 37 (1879) ;

A. M.N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

3. Greyish-testaceous, punctured black ; lateral angles of the pro-

notum subtuberculate ; head, pronotum, scutellum, corium and margins

of abdomen, variegated greenish-aeneous: scutellum with two whitish

spots at the base; corium rufescent at the apex ; membrane fuscescent,

subhyaline, veins fuscous and the basal spot black: abdomen beneath,

testaceous, sides punctured and subapical spot, black: feet and rostrum

testaceous (Westw.). Long, 18-183 mill.

Reported from Silhat, Assam: when the pubescene is removed the

apex of the scutellum is broadly luteous. The Indian museum has a

specimen from Tenasserim.

136. DALPADA ALTERNANS, Westwood.

Halys alternans, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 22 (1837).

Closely allied to D. nigricollis (2), Westw.: differs especially in

having the sides of the pronotum almost straight, oblique, posterior

angles not prominulous : membrane with six longitudinal veins, fuscous,

extended almost to the apex, the three internal connected at the base ;

internal space fuscous; feet with fuscous and luteous rings: sides of

abdomen with abbreviated transverse, black striz (Westw.), Long,

16—17 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

SP Ow"

206 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. _[No. 2,

XIII.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indion Marine Survey

Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CarprentTER, R. N,,

Commanding. No. 4. Description of a new Species of Crustacea be-

longing to the Brachyurous Family Raninide.—By J. Woop-Mason,

Esq., Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of Com-

parative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College of Bengal,

Calcutta. |

[Received and Read August 5th, 1885. |

(With Plate I.)

LYREIDUS CHANNERI, 0. sp.

Proc. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, August 1885, p. 104.

3. Carapace transversely moderately convex, longitudinally blunt-

ly carinate and slightly arched from near the posterior margin almost to

the level of the spines marking the commencement of the antero-lateral

margins, from which level to the end of the rostrum it is slightly con-

cave; its antero-lateral margins armed with two pairs of long slender

and acute outwardly and forwardly directed spines, of which the pos-

terior are nearly twice the lengthof the anterior pair (the left one of

which has been broken off early in life and is now only represented by a

tubercular scar) : its sides parallel from the larger pair of spines back-

wards to the insertion of the chelipeds, whence they gradually and re-

oularly converge to the rounded angles of the concave-truncate posterior

margin; and rapidly convergent from the same pair of spines forwards

to about the level of the middle of the 3rd joint of the external maxil-

lipeds, whence they suddenly run parallel to, or slightly divergent from,

one another to the ends of the extraorbital spines. The rostrum is

semi-oval, or, in other words, has the form of a triangle with the apex

rounded and the opposite sides slightly arched, and, like the eye-pe-

duncles, is surpassed by the long and acuminate extra-orbital spines.

Immediately in front of the two small crescentic muscular impres-

sions near the middle of its length, the carapace is crossed by a faint

depression, interrupted by the median carina and continued on the

sides, passing immediately in front of the junction of the finely beaded

postero-lateral lines with the linea anomurica some distance to the rear

of the hinder pair of antero lateral spines, and deepening as it goes, to

the buccal frame ; in front of this depression the puncture of the surface

is much coarser and thicker than behind it. The antero-lateral margin

is finely granulated and, with the contiguous subhepatic and anterior

pleural regions, slightly hairy. Two faint depressions, marking out a

cardiac region, pass off from the posterior ends of the crescentic im-

J. WOOD-MASON, Journ.Asiat.Soc.Bengal,1887, Vol LV. PtIl art.

Behari lal Das, del. West Newman &Co.imp. —

Parker & Coward lith.

1887. | J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. 207

pressions, extending rather more than half way to the posterior margin,

and slightly converging as they go; and two oblique elevations, situated

about midway between the median carina and the postero-lateral mar-

gins, with which they are parallel, are present on the posterior third of

the carapace.

The eye-peduncles have the same form as those of L. tridentatus,

and reach nearly to the level of the end of the rostrum, but the eyes

they carry are in process of reduction to the condition of those of so

many Reptant and Brachyurous Crustacea that inhabit the muddy depths

of the sea, and, moreover, are unequally reduced on the two sides of

the body, the left being represented by an oval and convex obsoletely

faceted, thick, and opaque-yellow cornea, situated, as in the typical

species of the genus, on the outer apex of the peduncles, with the

subjacent pigment showing through the integument at its base as a

dark lead-coloured circumferential band, while all that is to be seen in

the corresponding part of the right eye is a smooth and very slightly

convex area marked out by the transparence of the pigment of the

subjacent ophthalmic tract.

The propodite of the chelipeds is armed below with two acute

triangular spines, of which the distal is twice the size of the proximal ;

its low dorsal crest ends distally in a small tooth; the cutting process

of its inner edge is divided into five irregular tooth-like lobules;

and its tip is strongly hooked or incurved. The cutting edge of the

dactylopodite is obsoletely two-toothed. The only armature of the

carpopodite is a single long and acute spine, answering to the distal of

the two in L. tridentatus. The meropodite bears a sharp spinule in the

place of the tubercle seen in the typical species. The dactyli of the lst

and 2nd pairs of legs are shorter and broader, particularly those of the

former, and the crests of the two preceding joints in the former also are

all more lamellar, the dorsal ones being in addition distally produced to

sharp teeth. No direct comparison of the 3rd pair of legs in the two

species is possible, as these limbs are wanting in the only specimen of

the Japanese form available for comparision, but, judging from DeHaan’s

figure, the two last joints would appear to be much more expanded in

the Indian one. All the legs are slenderer.

The third and fourth abdominal terga each beara very sharp re-

curved spine in the middle line.

Dr. Giles notes that the animal was in life, “ except a little brown

tint in front, of a uniform salmon colour ;” and in the spirit-specimen

all the upper surface of the carapace in front of the transverse impres-

sion, with the exception of the lateral spines, is still darker coloured

than the rest of the body.

208 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. [No. 2,

The unique example from which the foregoing description has been

drawn up measures :—

millims.

Length of carapace from tip of rostrum to posterior margin ...... 25.0

5 53 $5 to the middle of a straight

line joining the bases of the posterior spines ......... 8.5

Length of carapace from the posterior margin to the same straight

Tami Ae a. Shed h oot alt eae

Breadth of exeupitd ia across dade: ianaMeIded satseat Vesaildvnpee)) aaa

Breadth of head between tips of extra-orbital seeneasuly.. ailisteecte iime

Distance between tips of posterior antero-lateral spines ............ 18.0

Length of posterior antero-lateral spines ..........ccscccessceseescseseees BAO

> 5s anterior antero-latéral (9%, 84.0, Whi Ue, Gee 3.0

, genital appendages .....c..esccees ae ee ay 5.5

», rostrum, measured from a Junin’ aie daha eahene

tially to the bottom of the supra-obital emarginations, 2.0

extra-orbital angles, measured from the same straight

HIRE; soe sen wt 3.4

This interesting Boson a may oie once he idiatinprielied from

either of the three previously described species of its genus (L. triden-

tatus, DeHaan, Faun. Jap. Crust. 1850, p. 138, tab. XX XV, fig. 6, 3,

I. elongatus, Miers, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1879, p. 45, both from the

seas of Japan, and DL. bairdii, 8.1. Smith, Proc. U. S. Nat. Hist. Mus.

1881, ITI, p. 420, from 100 fathoms, off the South Coast of New Eng-

land) by the conspicuous armature of its carapace, by its bispinose ab-

domen, and by its partially aborted eyes.

A single male only of it was dredged up in the trawl from a depth

of 405 to 285 fathoms with a bottom temperature of 48° to 50’ Fahr.

in the ‘ swatch-of-no-ground,’ a deep and narrow valley running north-

wards from the floor of the Bay of Bengal to within a short distance

of the shoals lying off the conjoined mouths of the Ganges and

Brahmaputra, in Lat. 21° 6’ 30” N., Long. 89° 20’ E

EXPLANATION OF Prate I.

“

9 9

Fig. 1. Lyreidus channeri, W.-M., &. Natural Size.

Orbital, antennary, and buccal view. x 2.

, 38. Four terminal somites of abdomen, seen from below as they lie closely

applied against the underside of the cephalothorax. x 3.

4, Dorsal view (to the right) of the abdomen, with side view (to the left) of

its spinigerous 3rd and 4th terga. x 3.

» », 5a. Outline views from above, or optic sections in the plane of the fringing

setae, of the left and right eye-peduncles respectively, to show (a.) the

sete that fringe their two margins up to the corneal membrane on each

(b.) the thickness and the relative deyelopment of the cornea,

side ;

Asiat.Soc.Bengal, 1387, Vol.LVI,Pt.I. P11

“& INES,Journ. :

ry . |

i Fae © i

<> = Ses Oa LY

She hy ey BING PZ

B.L.DaS, del. ef J-W.M, Photo.

te,

a Re RS Ue

fC oe re

1887.] E. J. Jones—On some Nodular Stones obtained by, §c., 209

which, opaque in both eyes, exhibits an obscure and degenerate faceting

in the left, but is devoid of all traces of facets in the right, the

shorter and the broader of the two; and (c.) the relative amount of

pigment, represented by the dark shading. x 12. Zeiss’ a*. Oc. 2. er

camera.

Fig. 6. The right chela. x 3.

» 7. Lyreidus stenops, n.sp., ¢. Dorsal view (to the right) of the abdomen,

with side view (to the left) of its spinigerous 4th tergum, x 2.

o 8. The carapace of the same in outline. Natural Size.

This species may at once be distinguished from its congeners by its narrow

metope, its unarmed carapace, and its decumbent abdominal spine. A single

specimen of it, with a male and two females of another species identical with

the specimen from Japan referred in the above description to L. 3-dentatus, has

been received by me from Hongkong from Brigade-Surgeon Hungerford, since this

paper was written.

eewNeow~nreees=<= 00 00 errs

XIV.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey Steamer

‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED Carpenter, R. N., Commanding.

No. 5. On some Nodular Stones obtained by tr wishin off Colombo

in 675 Fathoms of Water.—By H, J. Jonus, A. R. 8. M., Geological

Survey of India.

[Received February 2nd ;—Read March 2nd, 1887. ]

(With Plate IT.)

These nodules were forwarded to the Superintendent of the Indian

Museum, and by him passed on to the Director of the Geological Survey,

by whom they were subsequently entrusted to me for examination.

The results of this investigation, though owing to want of time in-

complete, are, as will be seen, of considerable interest ; and I hope at

some future time to be able to go into the subject more fully.

The nodules were obtained during a trawling operation off Colombo

in water of 675 fathoms, and are stated to have been found associated

with sand and mud, which formed a hard calcareous crust at the

bottom of the sea, and a small quantity of which was forwarded with

the specimens.

The stones are irregularly rounded, and vary in shape from almost

spherical to roughly cylindrical with rounded ends. The specimens re-

ceived varied in size from 1—4 inches in length and 1}—3 inch in thick-

ness. Externally, they are rough and mostly have one or two small

excrescences of the size of a pin’s head, and a few small pittings of about

the same size; the colour is dirty light grey.

210 E. J. Jones—On some Nodular Stones obtained by ([No. 2,

On breaking them open, the fractured surface has much the appear-

ance of an ordinary slate without the cleavage, and is of a much darker

colour than the exterior. Running along the central line of a long

cylindrical one which I broke open, there is a narrow vein of a brownish

colour.

A microscopic examination of a thin slice shewed merely a confused

mass of aggregates resembling in their structure that of spherulites,

such as occur in the so-called spheerulitic lavas, with the remains of

Foraminifera and Radiolaria disseminated throughout the mass. With

ordinary light, little is to be seen except more or less radiating fibrous

aggregates, but, as soon as the section is observed between crossed

Nicol’s prisms, the whole field is seen to be covered with little dark

crosses with their limbs parallel to the planes of the prisms, and, on

revolving the stage, the limbs of the crosses keep the same orienta-

tion whilst the section revolves.

It is when thus observed that the aggregates are seen to be entirely

distinct from one another, as each cross keeps to its own aggregate,

and the crosses do not overlap; so that, by revolving the stage, the limit

of each aggregate can be determined by tracing the path of the outer end

of one of the limbs of the crosses.

In the volcanic rocks in which this structure is known, it appears

to be due to incipient crystallization in a glassy mass; and at first it

might be supposed that these masses were of igneous origin. This idea,

however, is untenable on account of the remains of Foraminifera

(of several species, the most easily recognised of which are the

globigerine) and Radiolaria which are sparsely scattered through the

mass and, in some cases, enclose a spherulitic aggregate.

An indeterminate greenish substance, which probably consists of

glauconite, is also seen scattered through the mass.

The only difference that can be detected between the central vein

and the’ portion between it and the exterior is that the aggregates in

the central vein are much larger and the colour brown instead of

green, and that it is unacted on by hydrochloric acid, which dissolves

out some calcic carbonate from the other portion.

As mentioned by Mr. Daly in his letter forwarding the nodules,

these are very heavy, having a sp. ger. of 3°77 at a temperature of 30° C.

as against water of 4° C.

A qualitative analysis shewed the nodules to consist in great part

of baric sulphate together with small quantities of calcic and strontic

sulphates, small quantities of caleic and magnesic phosphates, aluminic

silicate, calcic carbonate, and traces of iron, sodium, and manganese.

Not having the time to devote to a complete quantitative analysis,

1887. ] trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water. 211

I made, in order to arrive at an approximate estimate of the propor-

tion of baric sulphate present, a determination of the sulphuric acid.

An average sample from two of the nodules powdered and dried at

100° C. gave 82°5 °/, of baric sulphate, the whole SO, Ho, being calcula-

ted as SO, Bao”.

This result is, however, of course too high, as asmall quantity of the

SO,Ho, is combined with Ca. and Sr. in the form of calcic and strontic

sulphates, though, from the results of the qualitative analysis, it is pro-

bably not much too high; and we may, I think, safely take 75°/, as the

percentage of baric sulphate present.

In order to see whether the material was derived from the mud in

which the nodules occur, and which also contained Foraminifera, I made a

qualitative analysis of the mud, and found it to consist mainly of alumi-

nic silicate, with small quantities of calcic carbonate, some iron, and a

trace of manganese ; there was also a trace of an alkaline earth which

was not removed by boiling with hydrochloric acid and subsequent

washing, but this, on spectroscopic examination, shewed itself to be

lime.

In spite of the negative result of the analysis of the mud, I am in-

clined to think, from the presence of the Foraminifera both in the mud and

enclosed in the nodules, that the latter have been formed at the bottom

of the sea either at the spot where they were found or at no great dis-

tance therefrom, though it is difficult to imagine how the material was

obtained, but it is possible that a careful analysis of a larger quantity of

the mud would reveal a trace of Barium, for sea-water contains a slight

trace of this element.

I cannot at present call to mind any instance of spherulitic

structure occurring without the aid of heat.

In volcanic lavas and in artificial glasses, it may be regarded as

concretionary, or as resulting from incipient crystallisation or devitri-

fication around certain points or nuclei. The nuclei when they exist

consist either of a granule or a minute crystal or crystallite, but most

commonly no nucleus is discernible.*

In this case, however, it would seem, that it must be due to slow

segregative action; and, baric sulphate being very slightly soluble in

water, the deposition would be very slow and may have been to some

extent crystalline, at any rate sufficiently so to produce the same effect

as incipient crystallisation from a glassy mass.

The execution of the accompanying plate has been kindly superin-

tended by Mr. J. Wood-Mason.

* Rutley’s Study of Rocks, p. 183.

212 G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

EXPLANATION OF Puate II,

Fig. 1,2. The external appearance, natural size, of some of the nodules.

Fig. 8. A thin slice treated with hydrochloric acid and seen between crossed

Nicol’s prisms ; shewing the dark crosses and radiating structure of the aggregates.

Fig. 4. A thin slice shewing some of the enclosed Foraminifera as seen by or-

dinary light; from a microphotograph (Smith and Beck’s 13” obj.) taken in the Bio-

logical Laboratory of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.

XV.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey

Steamer ‘ Investigator’, Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N., Com-

manding. No.6. On Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal.—

By G. M: Gitns, M.B., F. BR. C..8., Swrgeon-Naturalist to the

Marine Survey.

[Received and Read March 2nd, 1887. ].

(With Plates III—VIII.)

CoNntTENTS.

§ 1. A description of two new Species (i. Phronima bucephala and ii. Phron-

mella hippocephala) of the Amphipod Family Phronimide, with some Remarks on

the Genera of the Family.

§ 2. Rhabdosoma investigatoris.

§ 38. Amphipronoé longicornuta.

§ 4. Lestrigonus bengalensis.

§ 5. Eurystheus hirsutus.

§ 1. A Description of two new Species of the Amphipod Family Phro-

nimide with some Remarks on the Genera of the Family.

The genus Phronima of the division Hyperina and family Phroni-

nuide is a very limited and peculiar one. The species that belong to it

are remarkable for their bizarre form, and for the circumstance that

the head is considerably prolonged downwards, like that of a quadruped,

in a direction at right angles to the long axis of the body.

The number of joints in the legs appears to be less than the normal

seven. This is due, on the one hand, to the coxal plates being fused with

the pleuron of each segment, and, on the other, to the circumstance that

the dactylopodite is in most instances very small or reduced to a mere

rudiment. Spence Bate* gives as a generic character that the 6th

thoracic appendage (third pereiopod) has the dactylopodite fused with

the propodite. This is, however, I am inclined to believe, an error,

arising probably from the want of fresh specimens. Such also appears

* Catalogue of Amphipodous Crustacea in the British Museum, p. 316.

G.M.GILES, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal. 1887 Vol. LVL PtIL. Plt.

G.M GE ded. Autolype.

mC Ww YN Ww

3aALoinv

“003xX ©

Al'td ‘I 4d ‘IAT (9A ‘2897 ‘Te Buceg ‘00g "yeIsy “Utnop ‘gaya ToO' NO

G.M.GILES, Journ. Asiat.Soc. Bengal. 1887. Vol. LVI Pt. IL PLN

8 x 25.

GM.G. del. ; West Newman & CP amp

Perker & Cowara chr lith.

iba ae

West Newman & C¢ imp.

G.M.GILES, Journ Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1887. Vol. LVI. Pt. IL.

> — Same eT

G.M.GILE:S, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt.IL

PLVIL_

750.8

Boar

‘

z ; West Newman &C° imp.

‘duire5 7g weumen'{sey ; “UAT, preMopy sssred ‘TSP DOWD

THA ted TTI AT 1A 'LESL Te6ueg 00g yeIsy UaNoP “SHyTID NW’ a.

’ mm penny. e fie

Te CL APE Ea

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 213

to be the case not only in the sixth but in the two preceding appendages

of one of the species described below. A careful examination, however,

of various intermediate examples, furnished by the different appendages

of the two species that have come under my notice, has satisfied me that

the dactylopodite is neither absent nor fused with the propodite, but is,

in such instances, represented by a minute spine-like body articulated

to the distal extremity of the propodite, and usually flanked by a pair of

tiny hairs, which appear again in a more developed form in the similarly

placed “‘ dactyloptera’’ which Spence Bate (loc. cit.) describes on the

dactylo-propodital articulation of P. sedentaria.

Both my species were taken in the drift (surface) net,—the one that

has been named P. bucephala, off the Mutlah light in a depth of 15

fathoms, the other, Phronimella hippocephala, in somewhat shallower

water off the mouth of the Dhamra river on the Orissa Coast. Both

are perfectly colourless and transparent, so that most of the internal

organs, muscles, &c., can be seen with the greatest facility through the

integument. The circumstance of my only having obtained a single speci-

men of each in the surface-net appears to point to their not being nor-

mally surface organisms. While under observation, living in the tube

of the net, although perfectly capable of swimming with considerable

activity, they yet showed a tendency to sink to the bottom and rest

there. For these reasons, it is probable, that their true habitat is the

bottom in the localities and depths already mentioned.

In his recent monograph on the Phronimide,* Claus divides the

family into two sub-families—the Phrosinine and the Phronimine.

With the first we have nothing to do, as neither of the species to be de-

scribed can be referred to this subfamily. Of the Phronimine, he

enumerates four genera, of which Phronima Latr. is thus defined :—

“* Body produced, with much narrowed and elongated last thoracic

segment, with 3 pairs of styloid uropods.. Head short, but elevated,

with much produced vertico-oral axis. In the female the anterior an-

tennee two-jointed, and posterior antenne represented by a globularly

arched basal joint provided with a short bristle. The mandibular palps

are wanting even in the male. Maxillipedes strongly compressed with

lanceolate lamine and a conical “tongue” (Zunge). Both pairs of

gnathopoda slender, with weak, apposed subchele. The 5th pair of

thoracic appendages provided with slender apposed shear-like forceps.

Three pairs of gill-sacs on 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic segments.”

Now, the family, so far as it is known, is of such variable charac-

ter that each new addition to its numbers appears to require a genus to

# Arbeit. aus d. zool. Inst. d. Univ. Wien u. d. zool. Stat. in Triest, 1879, II, 1.

214 G.M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

itself; and to the genus, as thus limited, neither of my forms can be

said perfectly to agree.

To the less limited genus of Spence Bate, however, one of them

corresponds in every point, but it differs from the genus as defined by

Claus in the following points :—I1st., in my one female specimen, I can

make out no trace whatever of inferior antenne ; 2nd., the subchela of the

“5th” (6th) thoracic appendage cannot be said to be slender, the fixed

ramus being very stout and almost quadrate; 3rd., there are two extra

small gill-sacs on the 2nd and 3rd thoracic segments, a character ex-

tremely abnormal, but of the reality of which I carefully satisfied myself.

To avoid, however, the necessity of manufacturing a new genus, I

describe it as a member of the genus Phronima, as defined by Spence

Bate, under the name of P. bucephala.

With the second of the species to be described the case is differ-

ent, as it will not fit into any genus, whether the Phronima of Spence

Bate, or the genera distinguished by Claus, namely, Phronima, Phroni-

mella, Phronimopsis, and Paraphronima. Of these the species comes

nearest to the definition of Phronimella, which is thus given by Claus :—

“Body much produced, entirely transparent, with but two pairs of

style-shaped uropods, head short, with high-arched upper surface,

vertico-oral axis much produced. The two front segments united

without suture. Mandibular palps wanting even in the male. Tongue

(Zunge) of the maxillipedes reduced to a wart-like excrescence. Both

pairs of gnathopods slender with weak apposed subchele. The third

pair of thoracic appendages somewhat smaller, the fourth much pro-

duced. The fifth pair of legs with a much produced apposed pair of

subchele. Three pairs of gill-sacs on the 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic

segments.”

With this definition, the specimen agrees in the very important

detail of possessing but two pairs of style-shaped uropods, and in nearly

every other item save in this that, in our species, the “3rd” (4th)

thoracic appendages have the unfortunate peculiarity of being the longest

and almost the largest of the whole series, instead of being smaller. A

minor difference is that the two first thoracic segments, although united,

shew signs of a short, but perfectly distinct, suture between their pleura.

On this account, one is reduced to the alternatives of either widen-

ing the range of Phronimella by cutting out the character referring to

the third thoracic agpendage, or of making a new genus. The making

of new genera is an expedient which should, I take it, be avoided when-

ever possible, so that I prefer to adopt the former alternative and to ~

describe the species as Phronimella hippocephala.

I will now proceed to the description of the two species.

i ee

“=o

oe aF

OO ee eee Oe ee ee ee a eT

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sixv new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 215

(i.) PHRONIMA BUCEPHALA, n. sp., Pl. ITI, Figs. 1 & 2.

Head large, and broad at the top, which is almost completely

occupied by the regularly arranged series of components of the apical

eyes. These latter, though essentially paired organs, very nearly blend

in the middle line, so that only a small space in that situation is

unoccupied by their visual cones. The dorsal aspect of the head forms

a large, transversely oval shield, which is separated from the anterior

and lateral surfaces by a distinct horizontal fold. The portion of

the head below this forms a truncated cone, tapering from the shield

like vertex to the mouth, which is placed on the truncate (ventral)

aspect; the whole presenting a curious resemblance to the head of a

buffalo, which is further heightened by the circumstance that the

maxillipedes, lying along the posterior aspect of the truncated cone,

present an outline much like the large fleshy fold behind the lower jaw

of that animal. The lateral eyes are placed on the lateral aspect of the

head, immediately below the fold that separates the lower truncate

portion from the oval apical shield. Their component cones, like those

of the apical eyes, are regularly arranged, but are somewhat widely

separated, so that there is no true faceting, although a close approach

to the true compound faceted eye is attained.

The antennules are short and two-jointed; the first joint about a

quarter the length of the second, which is of clavate form, and termi-

nated by a tuft of fine, short hairs: the entire length of the organ being

a full third less than that of the conical portion of the head.

The antenne are obsolete.

The gnathites are somewhat small and are articulated to the in-

ferior or ventral aspect of the truncated cone. Only enough was seen

of them to establish their being quite of the usual type, without any

salient peculiarities, and that the mandibles are unprovided with any

appendage. An unfortunate lurch of the ship spilled the portion of the

dissection containing them as they were being separated for the pur-

pose of drawing.

The thorax, as seen from above, forms with the cephalic shield a

pear-shaped body ; its five anterior dorsally visible segments being very

broad, the penultimate tapering rapidly, and the last being very long and

narrow. The first two are short and hard to distinguish from each

other.

All the thoracic appendages, with the exception of the anterior

- gnathopoda, are provided with branchial sacs, but the last two of these

greatly exceed the rest in size. 1st gnathopod about one-sixth the length

of the body. The dactylopodite very minute and claw-shaped, its

216 G. M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

articulation with the propodite flanked by a pair of minute flattened

hair-like bodies. The propodite is simple, slightly falciform, its poste-

rior border fringed with fine, short, stiff sete. It forms, in conjunction

with the prolonged postero-inferior angle of the carpopodite, a somewhat

incomplete subchele. The meropodite and ischiopodite are short and

triangular, and the basipodite is stout and cylindrical, forming more

than a third of the length of the appendage. The 3rd thoracic append-

age, or 2nd gnathopod, is of generally similar form to the preceding,

but is longer and slighter, equalling a fourth of the whole body length.

The subchela, too, is even less perfect, the prolonged postero-inferior

angle of the carpopodite amounting to little more than a stout spine.

The 4th and 5th thoracic appendages, subequal and closely resembling

each other, just equal the combined head and thorax in length, the

anterior being slightly the longer and stouter. In both, the dactylopodite

is minute and claw-like, propodite and carpopodite subequal and

cylindrical, but stouter, and a third shorter than the two preceding

joints, the ischiopodite short and triangular, and the basipodite long,

cylindrical, swelling somewhat at its distal extremity, and forming

quite a third of the length of the whole limb. The 6th thoracic append-

age is by far the strongest of the series; it is, however, considerably

shorter than 3rd and 4th, being as long only as the thorax. The

dactylopodite is represented by a mere rudimentary spine. The propodite

forms a stout curved claw which, in apposition with the inferior border

of the carpopodite, forms a powerful subchela. The carpopodite is

triangular, its inferior border being nearly as long as the lateral. The

antero-inferior angle is prolonged into a powerful spine, and the inferior

border is armed with three dentations, between which are a correspond-

ing number of small, isolated tufts of hairs. The meropodite and

ischiopodite are short and quadrangular, and the basipodite, forming

fully half the length of the limb, is stout, cylindrical, and strengthened

along its posterior border by a narrow buttress. The 7th and 8th thoracic

appendages are alike in plan, the former being, however, decidedly

the smaller, especially as to the basipodite, which is much longer and

stouter in the 8th appendage. In both, the dactylopodites are minute

and claw-like, the propodites of an elongated pyriform outline. The

carpo- and meropodites cylindrical, the ischiopodites short and triangu-

lar, and the basipodites spindle-shaped.

Abdomen narrow, tapering, depressed rather than compressed,

the first three segments long, diminishing from before backwards, the

first nearly equalling the long last thoracic segment in length, the third

being but half its length. The last three together only equal the 2nd in

length,

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 217

The first three abdominal appendages are of the usual amphipod

type, the first and third being subequal, the middle one slightly the

longest. The last three abdominal appendages are alike in plan, and the

fourth is the longest. They consist of a long cylindrical basal joint

provided with a pair of lanceolate rami with serrate margins. The

penultimate pair are the shortest of the three and the last but little

inferior to the fourth in size. The basal joint of the fourth has the

appearance of being composed of two joints; such an arrangement is,

however, froma morphological point of view, so improbable, that,

although it is represented in the drawing, I have hesitated to describe it

as such. Both sides, however, appeared alike.

The telson appears obsolete.

The unique specimen is certainly a female, but the unlucky accident

to the dissection prevented my dissecting out the generative organs.

Its actual length was 5°75 mm.

(ii.) PHRONIMELLA HIPPOCEPHALA, n. sp,, Pl. III, Fig. 3.

The second species differs from the first in many important points,

Speaking generally, it is, both as to body and limbs, if I may use the

expression, a much more lanky species.

The head somewhat resembles that of a horse in shape, but the

resemblance is not nearly so striking as that of the first species to the

head of a bull. It is not so broad at the top, and no fold surrounds it;

so that the appearance of a cephalic shield is not produced: its dorsal

aspect is covered with a large, widely separated pair of apical eyes.

The lateral eyes are situated low down laterally, of medium size,

and of the same structure as in the first species.

Both antennules and antenneé are present; the former, much the

larger, consist of a three-jointed peduncle and a flagellum of eight

or ten short segments, total length equal to a third of the body exclusive

of the head. The first two joints of the peduncle are short, while the

third, of dilated spindle-shaped form, makes up more than half the

length of the organ. Near the distal extremity it is provided with a few

short, flattened hairs. The flagellum is quite naked with the excep-

tion of one or two small hairs on the last joint.

The antenne are little more than half the length of the antennules

and consist of a peduncle formed of three short joints and a naked

tapering flagellum as long as that of the antennule, the proximal arti-

culations of which are ill-marked.

Being unwilling to destroy my only specimen, the gnathites and

masxillipedes were not closely examined: they appeared to resemble very

clgegly those of the first species,

218 G.M. Giles—Sitw new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2

The thoraz is long, narrow, depressed rather than compressed,

the first two dorsally visible segments scarcely separable. The third

has the inferior angle of its pleuron produced into a sort of triangular

spine, overlapping the second. The fourth and fifth, of nearly equal

length, form the widest portion of the body; the sixth longer and

narrower than these; and the last, the longest and narrowest of all,

is provided behind with a spine on either side of the middle line and

has this posterior border considerably everted, so as to admit of

hyperextension of the abdomen on the thorax.

The 5th, 6th, and 7th thoracic appendages are avoided with

branchial sacs, the hindermost being the largest. In the gnathopoda, the

coxal extension of the pleura is considerable, and extends well below the

level of any of the rest. The gnathopoda are on the same general plan

as those of the first species, but are much longer and more slender, and

their subchele are far less developed, being represented, in the anterior

of the two, by a process some distance from the inferior extremity of the

carpopodite, and, in the posterior, by a small projection half way along

its length (this is if anything somewhat exaggerated in the drawing).

The 4th is considerably the longest of all the appendages. It is,

however, very slender, both the 5th and 6th exceeding it in stout-

ness. It equals in length the thorax and first two segments of the

abdomen, and to all appearance consists of but five joints, the dacty-

lopodite being represented only as a minute hair-like body. The

propodite is very long and tapering, forming nearly a third of the length

of the limb. The carpopodite, meropodite, and basipodite are long and

cylindrical, and the ischiopodite is short and quadrangular. The 5th

closely resembles the preceding, but is shorter than it by the length of

the basipodite, the carpopodite being less than half as long as that of the

3rd. The postero-inferior angle of its ischiopodite is prolonged into a

spine, and the posterior border of its much stouter basipodite is armed,

along the distal half of its posterior border, with three strong serrate

spines. The 6th is considerably the stoutest of the series, and equals

the thorax and first segment of the abdomen in length. The dactylopodite

is represented only by a minute hair-like body, the propodite, long and

falciform, the carpopodite, a long flattened body, the opposible inferior

border of which is but of small extent, is armed along its anterior

border with six powerful serrations, so that the extremity much more

resembles the sabre of a Squilla than a subchela. The mero- and ischio-

podites are short and triangular, each having the anterior border armed

with two serrations. The basipodite, cylindrical above, is three-sided

below, each border ending in a strong spinous process, in addition

to which the anterior border is armed with three stout, and the posterio

1887.] G.M. Giles—Siw new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 219

with two smaller, serrations. The 7th and 8th are alike in all respects,

Save size, the hinder being the larger. With the exception of the

short triangular ischiopodites, all the joints are cylindrical. The longer

of the two barely equals the abdomen in length. In both the dactylopo-

dites are minute and hair-like.

The abdomen is slightly shorter than the thorax, the segments

diminishing in length from before backwards. The anterior extremity

of the first segment, where it joins the thorax, is much constricted, the

broadest part of the region being across the secondsegment. The last

three segments together barely equal the third in length.

The three anterior abdominal appendages are of the usual type, the

middle one being the largest and the hindermost, the smallest. The

fourth consists of a cylindrical basal joint nearly as long as the third

abdominal segment. It is provided with two lanceolate entire-margined

rami, the outer of which is slightly the larger. The fifth is represented

only by a short bud-like rudiment. The last closely resembles the

fourth, but is somewhat shorter, and its rami are equal.

The telson is rudimentary.

A single specimen measuring about 7 mm. in length.

§ 2. RHABDOSOMA INVESTIGATORIS, n. sp, Pl. IV.

This species presents a close resemblance to &. whiter and BR.

armatum, forms which have recently been demonstrated to be male and

female of one species by Claus,* by whom, as also by J. H. Streets,f they

are well described. The two must accordingly now stand as &. armatum

(Milne-Edwards).

After comparing the present species with the above descriptions,

I am inclined tothink that it is a distinct form, more especially as

the animal was obtained, although at some distance from the land,

from the shallow muddy water about the Palmyrus shoals. Still, the

resemblances are so numerous that the shortest way of describing the

new species will be to enumerate the differences from the above quoted

descriptions of R. armatum.

Two specimens, one male and the se female, were obtained ;

the latter being that shown in the figure. It is probably an adult, as

the brood-pouch, although empty, is well-marked and of considerable

size.

The differences, described from the female as the more complete

specimen, are as follows.—l. The head is shorter, not equalling (rostrum

included) one half the total length of the body. 2. The mandibular

* Arbeit. aus d. zool. Inst. d. Univ. Wien. u. d. zool. Stat. Triest, 1879, II, 2.

t+ Proc. Acad. Sc. Phil., 1878, pp. 287—290.

220 G. M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

palp is longer, exceeding in length considerably the first joint of the

inferior antenne. 3. Spence Bate (Cat. Amphipodous Crust. Brit. Mus.

1862) describes R. whitei as “ having the coxa of first pair of gnathopoda

produced to an obtuse point”: this is wanting in our species. 4. All

three of the authorities agree in describing considerable differences

between the Ist and 2nd gnathopoda in size, length, and formation :

in the present species these are subequal and very closely resemble

each other. 5. Spence Bate describes the pereiopoda (last 5 thoracic

appendages) as gradually increasing in length posteriorly, the fourth

pair longest, the fifth obsolete. In our form, the third is longer than the

fourth, aud the fifth, although either obsolete or destroyed in the male, is

represented by a club-shaped basipodite in the female. 6. The same

writer also gives the last three abdominal appendages as differing con-

siderably in length, the last being the longest, while in our form they are

subequal, the first being a trifle the longest.

Length of male 2°5 c. m., of female 4°9 c. m.

The male differs further in the inferior antenne being much shorter,

and the mandibular appendage correspondingly diminished.

I append a table of measurements from Claus of R. armatwm; and

a comparison of the corresponding measurements of the present species

in an adjacent column is, I think, alone sufficient to establish the specific

distinctness of the two forms. The measurements are in millimeters.

R. investi-

R. armatum. gatoris,

ii 3 a = Sy oe ee

eS He |g

Length of rostrum (broken) .... |, 15 | 18 | 20 | 36 | 24 | 28 +| 10

9 ” Odd sSiwe sus esane eee 64 8 8 9 10 11 44 8

yy ong CNOLAK ceceve woes coe 6:4 8 9 9 1 | Fy 4 7

» 9», anterior abd. segs. Tal Ob el AO TBs di), rie 5 7

» 9» Ath abd. seg. ssssoere 3 4 f 8 al os SE

» 9» oth & 6th abd. segs. 33.1 43 | BR ae 2 33

” ” GEIGON csiscdie Hecvewes 6 9 8 10 18 234 32 6

» 9» Lst caudal style Sssi6 saa 6 8 72 | Seer tO. | ai 31 53

ee ee eae Mr 45 | 43) 54; 8 | — ae 52

3 i. i. OTe. 5, 99 eee 6 8 7 9 |;— |18 | — 53

In the male specimen of our species the rostrum is very much

broken, in the female it is nearly complete. The specimens are preserved

in the Indian Museum.

§ 3. AMPHIPRONOE LONGICORNUTA, n. sp., Pl. V.

Three specimens of the small amphipodous crustacean to be de-

scribed below were taken in the drift-net in the clear but shallow water

of the Mergui Archipelago.

It probably has its proper habitat at the surface, as it swims easily,

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 221

though with no great speed. Its most salient peculiarity is the immense

length of the rigid 5-jointed antenne, which are much longer than in

any form hitherto described, and are carried folded up and directed

obliquely downwards and forwards in front of it.

The total length of the body is 6°5 mm., and the animal is opaque,

of a pale pinkish brown tint, and plentifully sprinkled with deep mad-

der-brown pigment spots, which are most numerous on the pleura and

coxze of the thorax, and on the entire surface of the 2nd and 3rd

abdominal segments.

It is stoutly built, not markedly compressed.

The head is large, its length, depth, and breadth each equalling

rather less than 1th the body length; its entire upper and lateral

surfaces occupied by the large regularly faceted eyes, and its anterior

inferior aspect deeply hollowed for the reception of the antennules and

of the first joint of the antenne.

The thorax forms the broadest and deepest part of the body, but its

segments are short, so that its entire length is but 2th longer than

the head. The coxal plates are united to the pleura, without any very

obvious suture, and the first and the last two segments have their

terga ankylosed.

The antenneé and antennules are formed on almost exactly the same

plan as those of Rhabdosoma. On looking at the latter genus, one is in-

clined to be led to the conclusion that the curious antennsz have been

evolved to enable the animal to reach out beyond the enormously pro-

longed rostrum and cephalon generally, which latter formation together

with its generally slender form certainly suits the attainment of a high

rate of speed. The present species, however, demonstrates the danger of

such hasty deduction, as we have here the antenne of even greater

proportional length than in Rhabdosoma, while the head and body

generally are short and stout and the entire plan of its structure is

adapted for strength rather than speed.

The antennules, when at rest, are almost completely hidden within

the depression of the antero-inferior face of the cephalon, the tip

of the flagellum only being visible; they consist of a three-jointed

peduncle of peculiar form (Fig. 2.) and a three-jointed flagellum (Figs. 2.

& 3.). The basal jointis articulated to the recessed surface of the

cephalon, close to the middle line, at a point about even with the

middle of the eye. The first two joints are short and compressed

and quadrate, directed obliquely downwards and forwards; the third

joint is much larger, and is much compressed, so that, seen from

below, it appears merely slightly clavate, viewed laterally, it is seen

to be broad and of falciform outline, curving round, so that its distal

222 G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

border comes to be directed upwards and forwards. Its convex border

is thickly clothed with a multitude of very fine, soft, flexible hairs,

regularly arranged in distinct, but closely placed, transverse rows. The

body of the joint is filled up by a large ganglionic mass, which appears

to send off branches to the bases of the hairs. The flagellum (Fig. 3.) is

extremely small in proportion to the peduncle, and consists of three

joints, subequal in length, compressed, and diminishing progressively in

breadth, so that the last joint is cylindrical; the first joint is provided

with a circlet of soft clavate or spindle-shaped flattened hairs not so

long as, but considerably broader than, those of the distal joint of the

peduncles. The second has a similar pair of hairs springing from a de-

pression on its distal aspect, while the last joint, which presents two

slight constrictions in its length, is free from hairs, with the exception

of three stiff tapering auditory bristles at its extremity. The entire

organ is less than a millemeter in length and is so articulated as to be

capable of flexion and extension only, no lateral play being practicable.

The antenne take their origin a little behind, but much external

to, the antennules, so that their first joint is placed close to the wall

of the recess, and, in their habitual posture, they are completely hidden

from the outside. The first joint reaches quite to the front of the recess,

so that, to the casual observer, the second appears to be the first joint

of the appendage, and to take its origin considerably in front of the

antennules. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th joints are carried folded sharply upon

one another and the 2nd and 3rd of them are each half as long as the

animal exclusive of the last two abdominal segments; the fourth is

slightly shorter and the fifth very short: the proportional length of the

5 joints being as 25: 67:67:60: 3; and the whole length of the organ

being a little over 9 mm., or about 15 times the length of the body.

Each joint is thickly clothed with extremely fine short hairs, too small

to be visible except under very high amplification. The musculature of

their appendages is peculiar. In the first joint, a pair of powerful

muscles, flexor and extensor, are located in its proximal two-thirds, and

act by means of two distinct tendons on the second joint. In the re-

maining articulations, the muscles are confined to a small part of the

distal extremities, which are dilated for their reception, the muscles

in each case being in pairs so that no lateral motion is obtainable. .

The mouth-organs appeared to be very rudimentary, but were not

closely examined.

The 2nd and 8rd thoracic appendages (gnathopoda) are short and

stout and can scarcely be made out in the usual position of the animal,

being carried folded closely against the ventral surface of the body.

They closely resemble each other, differing only in the more anterior

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 223

being stouter with its basipodite shorter than in the hinder; they are

provided with a curious complex subchela (Fig. 7.). The dactylopo-

dite forms a stout sharp claw and is articulated to the propodite by

a movable joint acted on by powerful muscles. The propodite consists

of a stout cylindrical curved body so bent that its posterior border is

apposed to the prolonged inferior border of the carpopodite. This

posterior border is armed with a strong flat plate provided with a

toothed cutting edge. The carpopodite is stout, compressed, and

quadrangular, and has its infero-posterior angle prolonged into a sharp

process. The posterior half of this border is formed by a thin plate with

a toothed edge, opposable to the smaller plate on the propodite. In

extreme flexion, these two plates overlap each other, the carpopodital

plate passing inside that of the propodite; all the remaining articula-

tions are compressed, but broad and strong, the meropodites are short

and triangular, the ischiopodites short and quadrangular. The basi-

podite of the 2nd gnathopoda is as long as all the other articulations

together, while that of the first is but 3 as long; in both, the articu-

lations are curved forwards and extremely stout. A cord-like glandular

body runs through the middle of each of these appendages ending in

the base of the propodite. It is difficult to be certain as to the point of

exit of its duct, but this was doubtfully made out as opening near the

angle between the two limbs of the subchela. The muscles of these

appendages are large and distinct, each joint being provided with a

flexor and extensor; in the two distal articulations, the flexor is by far

the more powerful, but in the next the two are nearly of equal strength,

while, of the muscles contained in the basipodite, the extensor is the

more powerful, and its tendon, passing through the ischiopodite, is

inserted into the base of the meropodite, being reinforced by only a

small slip taking origin from the former joint, while only a small

accessory slip of the extensor contained in the basipodite is inserted

into the ischiopodite. The 4th and 5th thoracic appendages are cylin-

drical and of the usual ambulatory type; they are subequal, slightly

exceeding the thorax in length, but the fifth is slightly the stouter of the

two. The 6th and 7th are like the two preceding appendages, save that

their basipodites are strengthened by strong buttress-like developments

of their anterior and posterior borders ; the 7th but little exceeds the 5th

in length ; but the 6th is the longest of all the thoracic appendages, equal-

ling the thorax and the first abdominal segment inlength. The 8th tho-

racic appendage is peculiar, its basipodite is formed on the same plan as

those of the sixth and seventh, but is shorter, and if anything broader, so

that its outline approaches the circular, and its remaining joints are so

short that together they do not equal the breadth of the basipodite.

224 G.M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. (No. 2,

The first three abdominal appendages are subequal and are of quite

the usual amphipod type, but are rather short. The three remaining

(Fig. 8) abdominal appendages differ greatly in length; the lst has

the protopodite as long as the basipodite of the longest thoracic append-

age; its two rami are foliaceous, the inner. slightly exceeding the outer

ramus. The 5th is but half the size of the 4th, and the irregularity of

its rami is more marked, while the last appendage is but half the length

of the penultimate and has its inner ramus nearly twice as long as the

outer.

The animal agrees well with all the characteristics of the genus as

given in Spence Bate, though the 8th thoracic appendage would perhaps

be better described as stunted than as rudimentary.

§ 4. LeEsTRIGONUS BENGALENSIS, n. sp., Pls. VI. & VII.

In looking over the literature referring to the genera Lestrigonus

and Hyperia, it becomes increasingly apparent that Spence Bate’s

suspicion as to the doubtful value of the latter genus was well founded.

One after another species of Lestrigonus have been paired off as males

with Hyperia females, so that the latter genus must, in all probability, be

entirely abandoned, as its retention could only be justified by the dis-

covery of a form whose males retain permanently the character of the

genus.

The present species is one of the commonest surface organisms of

the Bay of Bengal, and is especially so in the more truly pelagic por-

tion of its area.

I was on this account able to obtain a large number of specimens,—

including (a) females of Hyperia form, but with rudimentary inferior

antenne ; (b) immature males of Hyperia-form; and (c) 9 mature males

of Lestrigonus form,—amongst which all stages between the two latter

conditions were observable.

I notice that the pelagic Lestrigoni are very generally credited with

being parasitic on meduse, &c. In the present species, this is not

the case. I have occasionally seen them ensconced in the cavity of a

Salpa, but believe this to have been an accidental circumstance, as by

far the larger number were captured swimming freely.

The specimen figured (Pl. VI.) was taken in the drift-net about

100 miles from land in the Bay of Bengal, the depth of the water in the

locality being 850 fathoms. Seven specimens were obtained on this

occasion and some hundreds have since been taken.

As all specimens of the Lestrigonus-form are of nearly equal size,

and all the appendages are fully developed, it is probable that they are,

in spite of their small size, adult animals. The greater part of the

1887.] G. M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 225

surface of the body and appendages is liberally besprinkled with patches

of black pigment, so that, seen in the water, they appeared of a dark

reddish grey tint. The pigmentation is deepest on the pleura of the

thoracic segments, on the basipodites of their appendages, and on the

abdomen. The lower part of the cephalon, too, including the gnathites,

is so deeply pigmented, that it is extremely difficult to make out the

arrangement of the parts, as they are almost opaque to transmitted and

nearly impossible to be illuminated by direct light. The entire length

of the animal is 2°5 m.m.

The only two of the members of the genus enumerated in Spence

Bate and elsewhere which approach it in size are DT. ferus and L. fuscus,

though both of these are considerably larger than any of my specimens.

Moreover, in the present species, the seventh thoracic appendage (fourth

pereiopod) is considerably larger than the preceding and succeeding ap-

pendages, whereas in DL. ferws all three are described as subequal, and

in L. fuscus the third pereiopod is stated to be longer than the fourth.

It differs also from the description and figures of these species in

several other particulars, I would, therefore, propose to name it D.

bengalensis.

In swimming, it progresses by a series of jerks, lying on its side and

moving in small circles.

The head is the broadest portion of the animal, the two immense

eyes projecting considerably beyond the very narrow thorax when seen

from above. The eyes are of large size and distinctly faceted, the anterior

faceted membrane being easily separable, and they cover the entire upper

and lateral aspects of the head, the anterior aspect of which is deeply

excavated for the reception of the antenne.

The thorax is composed of seven distinct, but very short, segments ;

the junction between the pleura and the coxal plates being hard to make

out, as also are the junctions of the terga of the first 5 thoracic segments.

The segments increase in length slightly from before backwards, but not

to any very marked extent; the entire thorax forming less than a third

of the entire length of the animal.

The first three abdominal segments are of very large size, especially

the first two, either of which is as long as any three of the thoracic

segments. The fourth abdominal segment is much shorter and narrowed

in front, so as to be freely movable under the much excavated posterior

border of the third. The fifth and sixth abdominal segments are very

small, and the latter is united without suture to the short, accurately

semicircular telson.

The antennules are as long as the entire body of the animal plus

the protopodite of the sixth abdominal appendage. Their peduncles

226 G.M. Giles—Sie new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

consist of three joints, of which the first is large and globular and filled

with a number of muscular bands, that are evidently capable of

moving its articulation with the second in all directions. It contains

also a small antennular gland. The second is extremely short, and the

third, which is pear-shaped, is provided, along its inferior border, with

a number of closely set exceedingly fine hairs. The flagellum consists

of between 20 and 30 long, narrow articulations, longest in the middle

of the organ, the first being exceptionally short. Hach joint carries

two or three exceedingly fine hairs, and the last, a pair of blunt, cylindri-

cal hairs of uniform thickness throughout.

The antenn@ are shorter than the antennules, equalling in length only

the head, thorax, and first two abdominal segments ; and, like these, their

peduncles are three-jointed, the third joint being considerably longer than

the two first. The flagellum is also closely similar, but differs in the first

joint being long and conical, and in the armature of the terminal joint,

which is provided with a pair of bifid (or, possibly, four) tapering hairs.

The dissection of the gnathites was attended with considerable

difficulty no less on account of their extreme minuteness than because of

their dense pigmentation, so that I am even now by no means satisfied

as to the exact relative position of the parts in this stage of the

animal. The mandibles (Fig. 6.) are stout and provided with a long

three-jointed naked palp. Their masticatory plate (shown separate-

ly in Fig. 7) is peculiarly well developed, being provided with several

rows of regularly arranged conical teeth. The maxille are liberally

toothed and the maxillipedes have one of their lobes terminated by a

biramous jointed appendage.

The second of the thoracic appendages is short and stout and pro-

vided with a somewhat incomplete subchela. The third, longer and

somewhat slighter, has the subchela very well developed, the opposable

prolongation of their carpopodites being distinctly hollowed out for the

reception of the cylindrical propodite. The remaining thoracic append-

ages are of the usual type, increasing regularly in size to the seventh,

which is largest; the sixth and eighth being subequal. The eighth hag

its posterior border provided with a strong buttress-like plate. Some

of the posterior thoracic appendages are provided with gill-sacs, but I

was unable to satisfy myself as to their exact number and position in

this stage of the animal, although they are probably identical with those

of the Hyperia-stage. a

The first three abdominal appendages are subequal, and on the

usual amphipod plan. The remaining three have long protopodites

and small equal rami, the first two being subequal, while the last is a

quarter shorter than the preceding two pairs.

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal 227

The form (the Hyperia-stage) figured on Pl. VI. was obtained on the

same occasion as the Lestrigonus bengalensis. The specimens were about

equally divided between the sexes; and I have little doubt that the

males (Fig. 1.) are merely a young stage of this species, as they agree in

all essential particulars save the smaller development of the flagella of

the antenne. Even here the difference lies only in the smaller length of

the individual joints and not in their number. Seen apart from the

more fully developed forms, they would certainly be assigned to the

genus Hyperia, especially some specimens, smaller than that figured, in

which the antenne are even shorter. If this supposition be correct,

distinctions between Hyperia and Lestrigonus can hardly, as already

advanced, be of generic value. Whether or not all male Hyperia ulti-

mately develop a long flagellum is of course doubtful, but there can be

little doubt that all Lestrigonus pass through an Hyperia-stage. Speak-

ing generally, the Hyperia-stage is shorter and stouter and more like

the female (Fig. 3.) described below. In this specimen, I could clearly

make out three gill-sacs attached to the 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic

segments. I was more fortunate, too, in the dissection of the gnathites

in the younger than in the adult specimen; and a glance at the in-

complete figures of those of the adult form as compared with those

of the more completely figured Hyperia-stage confirms the opinion as to

the identity of the two forms. With the exception of the antenng, the

appendages are practically identical in both, save that in the younger

form they are proportionally a trifle shorter than in the adult.

The female, in general form, closely resembles the young male; she

is, however, shorter, but more stoutly built, the very short thoracic seg-

ments being of remarkable depth. The principal external difference

between the sexes lies in the antenns, which, in the female, are

remarkably ill developed. In the antennules, there is a three-jointed

peduncle, practically identical with that of the male, but the flagellum

is reduced to a rudimentary first jot. The antenne are reduced

to a rudiment of the basal joint of the peduncle. All the females

collected carried in a well-developed brood-pouch a number (about 18

or 20) of largish (6°25 m.) ova, none of which had gone beyond the stage

of segmentation. The length of the specimen figured is 1°75 mm.

§ 5. EURYSTHEUS HIRSUTUS, n. sp., Pl. VIII.

The species described below was taken on the same occasion ag

Lestrigonus bengalensis. It is nearly transparent and, saving a few

scattered patches of reddish brown pigment, colourless. Only a single

specimen was obtained.

The animal is 4 m.m. long.

228 G. M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

The head is ths of the total length, irregularly quadrate and

smooth ; it is produced anteriorly into a small blunt rostrum, and the

small eye, which is pigmented red brown and consists of numerous

ocelli, is placed opposite to the root of the antennules.

The thorax and abdomen are of equal length and of nearly the

same depth and breadth throughout. In the thorax, the segments in-

crease regularly in length from before backwards, while the first two of

the abdomen are subequal to the hinder thoracic segments and the third

is much longer than any other segment, the last three decreasing rapidly

in length.

The antennules are rather more than half as long as the body; the

peduncle forms the larger half of their length and consists of three

stout joints, the distal two of which are fringed on their lower surface

by a number of very long flexible hairs, the proximal joint is beset

with extremely fine short hairs only, the secondary appendage is

small and consists of four short joints well provided with short stiff

hairs, and the flagellum consists of about eleven short articulations

liberally fringed below with short fine hairs.

The antenné are somewhat shorter, slightly less than half the body

length ; their peduncle consists of five joints, of which the first two are

extremely short, the second being armed with a strong downwardly

produced spine, the third joint is longer and stouter than either of those

of the antennules and the fourth and fifth subequal in length and consider-

ably longer; as in the antennules, the two distal joints are liberally

fringed below with long flexible hairs; the flagellum is short, barely

equalling the last joint of the peduncle in length; it consists of seven

short joints all well provided with hairs, the last joint carrying, in

addition, a pair of peculiar stout bifid hairs.

The gnathites could not be examined, with the exception of the

maxillipedes, which are remarkably long and pediform.

All the thoracic appendages are remarkably hirsute, being covered,

in addition to the large stout hairs, shewn in the figure, with a perfect

coat of fine hairs visible only under considerable amplification. The

second and third are very weakly subchelate, the propodites being merely

dilated and not produced into an opposible member. The first is much

smaller and slenderer than the second, but both are on the same general

plan, the dactylopodites being barely serrated and the propodites armed

only with one or two stout spines. The fourth and fifth are subequal,

the fourth slightly the longer and stouter; they slightly exceed the

second in length and are of the usual ambulatory type. The sixth,

seventh, and eighth thoracic appendages agree in having their basipo-

dites very large and strengthened by large anterior and posterior buttress-

_ NL Ol EE eee eee

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 229

like plates; they differ, however, considerably in length, the fifth being

the shortest of all the thoracic appendages, while the sixth and seventh

much exceed the anterior ones, the seventh being more than half as

long as the body, and the eighth even longer.

The first three abdominal appendages are rather long and slender,

but are quite of the usual type. The last three are short and cylindrical,

having both their protopodites and rami armed with a number of short

very stout spines; they decrease regularly in length from before back-

wards, the fourth being as long as the fifth and sixth together, and the

sixth, very short. The telson is a short compressed lamina armed with

a number of short tooth like spines similar to those on the posterior

abdominal appendages.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prate III.

Fig. 1. Phronima bucephala, n. sp., male. x 18. Fig. 2. Last three abdo-

minal segments of the same with their appendages. x 60. Fig. 3. Phronimella

hippocephala, n. sp. x 12°5.

PLATE IV.

Fig. 1. Rhabdosoma investigatoris, n. sp., female, as seen by dark ground illu-

mination. x 38. Fig. 2. Thorax with appendages of the same. x 14. Fig. 3.

End of an antennule. x 200.

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Amphipronoé longicornutus, nu. sp., male. x 17. Fig. 2. Antennule.

x 39. Fig. 3. Flagellum of antennule. x 180. Fig. 4. An antenna. x 7.

Fig. 5. First joint of an antenna. x 40. Fig. 6. Head seen from below (diagram-

matic). Fig. 7. 2nd thoracic appendage. x 110. Fig. 8. Last three abdominal

segments. x 25.

PuaTE VI.

Fig. 1. Lestrigonus bengalensis, n. sp., male. x 40. Fig. 2. Last joint of

antennule. x 400. Fig. 3. Last joint of an antenna. x 400. Fig. 4. Peduncle of

antennule. x 100. Fig. 5. Peduncle of antenna. x 100. Fig. 6. Mandible and

its appendage. x 200. Fig. 7. Masticatory plate of mandible. x 200. Fig. 8.

The maxilla. x 200. Fig. 9. Portion of maxilipede. x 100. Fig. 10. Last three

segments of abdomen with their appendages, seen from above. x 60.

PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Lestrigonus bengalensis, nu. sp., immature male. x 40. Fig. 2. Last

three segments, seen from below. x 40. Fig. 3. Lestrigonus bengalensis, female.

x 40. Fig. 4. An ovum from her brood-pouch. x 40, Fig. 5. Head of female,

front view. x 40. Fig. 6. Mandible and its appendages. x 200. Fig. 7. 1st

maxilla. x 200. Fig. 8. 2nd maxilla. x 200. Fig. 9. Maxillipede. x 200.

Puate VIII.

Eurystheus hirsutus, nu. sp. x 40.

ONIN NIN INI NIN INI NS wes

230 A. Carpenter—The Mean Temperature of the [No. 2,

XVI.—Natural History Notes from H. Ms Indian Marine Survey

Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED Carpenter, R. N,,

Commanding. No.8. The Mean Temperature of the Deep Waters of

the Bay of Bengal. By Oommander Carprnter, R. N., D. S. Oy

F. R. Met. Soc., F. Z. S.—Communicated by Tun SuPERINTENDENT OF

THE InpIAN Museum.

[Received August Ist ;—Read August 3rd, 1887.]

(With Plate X.)

The temperature curves of the deep sea at different points in the

Bay of Bengal vary but little at depths greater than 100 fathoms. The

larger number of observations have naturally been made in shallow

waters, that is to say, in less than 300 fathoms ; but, still, more than one

observation has now been obtained for every 100 fathoms down to 1900

fathoms. The greatest depth at which the temperature has been ob-

tained is 2,105 fathoms, off the east coast of Ceylon, at which depth a

Casella-Miller thermometer shewed 33°.7 Fahr. corrected for pressure,

the correction being 0°°8 subtractive. As will be seen by the following

example, the uniformity of temperature comes to be a check on the ac-

curacy of the thermometers and, vice versé,on the accuracy of the depth

found.

No. of | Depth | Correct-

Date. Thermo-| in Fa- | ed tem- Locality.

meter | thoms. |perature.

used.

Os A WBBD nyse 31478 675 41°'7 | Near the head of the Bay of Bengal.

ZOO LYV .. F886 75500 19042 675 421 | Hast of Little Andaman Island,

Boag Vs, 1886; sy. 32096

675 | 41°8 | Off Colombo, Ceylon.

Here we see only a variation of half a degree at the same depth in

widely different places, and the error of reading off absorbs quite half of

that. Unfortunately, the scale is not cut on the thermometer tube but

on porcelain at the side; and, as the bent tube of the Miller-Casella ad-

mits of a small movement, care has to be taken to hold the tube firmly

against the scale, so that both mercury ends shew similar readings, be-

fore taking the reading of the minimum index, which has been pushed

up the tube to some lower temperature whilst under water. The uni-

PU. X.

GARPENTER, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt. I.

Bay of Bengal.

Depth in Fathoms.

| |

sh ia 4 4 5

“paooeaao 7 BEER EE eee EEEEE EEE EE EEEEE PEFECH

3 a HI H

{ ct alata a re

i=} } |

2 3

nu t

3 ee :

$ | ro

fo} TI

| IS OOIS ao

SECC

& | jt o

g 7 H

EECo ae aa

° ia i 14 |

8 [

Ht a

ett Ht

a EEC fat] ai peat a je 4 a

fala tstalstetat stale in Ce

BEEEH ae fer f=iaha etal elo|isfst eal sltel attain ata oa sued Peo

El nlaletatataiate| EE ia o C] EERE EEE EEE EE F

9 im ime |

: ie , |

2 : ietaletabale H

Fe f I | | ET

HH ia rH “| f !

=} _| Lt t | | ABS

gssseetft fal Fltinasareaniiatize siititssectt ae

Ct iGOOE Sa fof 1 a ina a CI

2 conegammam EEE EEE EEL eH : BESS estes

5 ry a r a Eee | Ae

im EEE a8 cI Coo

3 ct oh HEH EEE

; in 1] al ial i] | + I jal

el mI a a Ce | | | i

sey aa Bae eee on EE nae = a He

a i aoe alm yia i

(sha

see : EEE mana Ht

atelet :

2 selalala eat ae aaa ah Co CARRERE EERE EEE EERE EEEEEEELE

SEEEEEET EEE zis HI Fre Ht stale

oH seg ggueeage saarerecet eee

PEE ; Hy + {-+

S tt t ct t cl co HI

x Bsial (alee abel aie tals etal) alata] [tal olel eh etel stata) etet alah sl an| asl efataletalfel ala: be) tsst ssa eats ota a eles

TI [| ia ID SESE a] at | fa ic a | mB Os L

aialetal SEE poSoeoe! ei si nae is ie i aa YL

oft ig x SHertts E iH [ i Ht PEPE EEE EEE EEE ne

PEPE ro

Boog 1

| [| a |e]

g | ooo

fo} tod

re) CT [

He :

Fi ERE EEE

g Poet

3 Saisie

[

fo}

lo}

3 im

Sa! im

i=}

°o

te}

°o

f=}

D-}

. a

is}

c-}

i=}

i—]

i=}

S qOSoS

4 1

3 g

i=)

ie}

cr)

Pas

of =

zl Paes alata alata

=| jt

=| as ee

* = t.

a | | i Ls —

: a - a Oo > <) 2a — aon oe FON 5 o ™= oO ag = 6

;. Beak ta Reourare ye rodune 1,

1887. ] Deep Waters of the Bay of Bengal. 231

formity of temperature also shows a uniform origin, for the change of

temperature in large bodies of water is slow. The submarine inflow

which must come from the southward to make up for the great eva-

poration of the bay, is therefore probably uniform in temperature and

widely spread. It should be mentioned, however, that the observations

have been entirely made in the fine season between November and May ;

and, although surface disturbance by wind would be unlikely to affect

deep currents, yet it is just possible that the great climatic difference

between the two monsoons may upset the balance in other ways and so

alter the rate of submarine inflow.

Slow-moving deep currents such as would exist at the bottom of

the Bay of Bengal cannot be accurately tested by any means yet de-

vised. It is true that the United States Coast Survey have lately de-

tailed a vessel specially to take the strength and direction of the Gulf

Stream in the Straits of Florida, and that a careful section was obtain-

ed, by means of special fittings, of the strength and volume of the

stream in that its narrowest portion. But even there, where consider-

able movement might have been expecied, it never exceeded one mile

an hour at the bottom, which was only some 400 fathoms deep. It is

then unlikely that the same instrument, ingenious as it is, would be of

any service at the greater depths owing to the far greater sources of

error and the very much slower movement.

Whatever current-meter is used will have to be very sensitive, and

must be anchored at the bottom for at least thirty hours, without being

fouled by fish or weed, to minimise errors of lowering it down, pres-

sure, hauling up, &e.

Surface currents are, however, guaged with comparative ease, and

the depth of these as yet found by the “ Investigator ” range from 80

fathoms to 175 fathoms in the open waters of the bay.

Off the Rivers Hughli and Ganges, a higher temperature was fre-

quently found at five to ten fathoms than at the surface, and this pro-

bably occurs when the fresh water of the rivers brings down a lower

temperature, and temporarily overlies the salt water.

Future observations of temperature will be unlikely to vary more

than one degree Fahr. from the mean curve given in the accompanying

plate for depths greater than 100 fathoms; but at depths between 10

and 100 fathoms they may vary 5° either way.

A remarkable verification of depth by aid of the thermal reading

was made in March last. When tabulating the mean temperatures

last January, I noticed that the temperature shewn at a cast of 1400

fathoms, made in 1885, in Lat. 19°.34' N., Long. 91°.07’ E., was far more

suitable to a depth of 1000 fathoms. Upon reference to the Sounding

232 <A. Carpenter—The Mean Temperature of the, &c. [No. 2, 1887.]

Record Book, it was seen that the cast was given a value of only “ fair,”

whilst a remark was made that “the wire appeared to have lain on the

bottom,” too light a weight having been used to shew the instant of

contact. The opportunity offered soon after of making another cast on

the same spot with an improved sounding machine, when a depth of

912 fathoms was obtained with a temperature differing only one degree

from that of the former cast.

Whilst taking some soundings east of the Andaman islands in

November last, I found that there were two abnormal temperatures,

one of 41°.7 at 782 fathoms instead of 40°.5, which is the mean at that

depth, and one of 41°.2 at 1010 fathoms instead of 37°.7. Both of these

temperatures point to the water having been warmed by passage over

some shallower ridge of about 740 fathoms (see accompanying plate).

If we look at a chart of the east side of the Bay of Bengal, we see

that there are three inlets into this partly enclosed sea. One is only

150 fathoms deep, viz., Preparis Channel; one is not marked with any

depth, viz., the Ten Degree Channel ; and one has 760 fathoms marked

nearly on the ridge between Acheen Head and Great Nicobar. The

two high temperatures at 782 fathoms and 1010 fathoms seem to prove,

so far as two observations can be a proof, that no greater depth than

740 fathoms exists on the ridges between Acheen Head and Great

Nicobar and in the Ten Degree Channel.

A glance at the curve will show that a striking change occurs at

150 fathoms, and that below that depth the diminution of temperature

is much more gradual.

This agrees with our observations of the depth of the surface cur-

rents, that is to say, of the quick-moving portion of this ocean. After

1200 fathoms the change of temperature becomes very slow. A line

joining Sandoway in Arrakan with Calingapatam on the Orissa coast

forms the southern limit of the 1200 fathom contour of the bottom of

the Bay. Down to 1200 fathoms the thermometer is a check on the

depth obtained, but deeper than that there is too little change.

The mean temperature of the first 150 fathoms being a moving

variable* may have some influence on the climatic conditions of the

Bay.

A warm surface current was met with in April in Lat. 17°.34' N.,

Long. 88° H., where the water down to 120 fathoms was all 4 to 7 de-

grees above the mean, the greatest difference being at 60 fathoms. It

was then setting to the H. N. H.

* By ‘a moving variable’ I mean that that portion of the ocean which moves

most rapidly has also the most varying temperature.

~—_erarrrern nanraeenneE—eeeeeee_<5uwrr eres _eee eee

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

——

Part II.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. II1I.—1887.

XVII.—On the Chiroptera of Nepal.— By J. Scuty.

[Received July 28th ;—Read Ang. 3rd. 1887],

The local distribution of our Indian Mammalian fauna is not only

of special interest to naturalists in this country, but is also important to

those who are mainly concerned with questions of general geographical

distribution. To be of real use, local lists should be founded on speci-

mens actually captured in the region under review; less direct evidence

should rarely be accepted. And nowhere, perhaps, in this great country

is greater precision required in assigning a station to the forms which

inhabit it than in the case of the Himalayas. For not only does the

fauna of these mountains differ markedly according to the elevation

above sea-level, but it also varies strikingly as we proceed from east to

west in them. We have, moreover, in the Himalayas a meeting ground

of Palearctic, Indian, and Malay forms; and, for the elucidation of the

complex questions of station and habitat of species, strict accuracy is

required in lists of forms inhabiting merely political divisions of the

Himalayas.

In view of the considerations above mentioned, the expression so

often affixed to a species of ‘‘ Habitat, Nepal”? might be only a degree

less vague than ‘“‘ Habitat, Himalayas,” were it not for what may be

called an accident. The term “ Nepal” may mean either the whole

State of Nepal, or a very small part of it, the Nepal Valley. The

State of Nepal is about 500 miles in length, and has an average breadth

of about 100 miles; part of this country differs in no way from the

234 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

adjoining plains of India, but most of it is highly mountainous, and

in it, indeed, is found the highest mountain in the world. The Nepal

Valley, the true “ Nepal” of the natives, is a small tract, some 20

miles in length by 15 in breadth, at an elevation of from 4050 to

4500 feet above sea-level, in which is situated the capital of the state,

Kathmandu. But the Nepal Valley is the only part of the state

which has been efficiently explored zoologically, and, consequently, we

may be pretty certain that, when the term Nepal only is used to denote

the station of a species, the Nepal Valley is what is really meant.

IT once lived for two years in the Nepal Valley, and while there

made large collections of zoological specimens. Amongst these, I pre-

served 40 specimens of bats, and, on my return to England, I spent some

time on a careful identification of them, by reference to published de-

scriptions and by comparison with specimens in the British Museum.

In this way, I ascertained that the whole of my specimens were referable

to only 10 species, and the next step was to find out whether the forms

I had secured were previously known to occur in Nepal. This task

proved much more difficult than the mere identification of the species ;

the information available about the species of Chiroptera actually in-

habiting Nepal being somewhat vague and confused.

In order to show why the matter lacks precision, it is necessary to

trace the source of our information on the subject.

Mr. Brian H. Hodgson, to whose labours zoological science is so

largely indebted, lived for more than twenty years in the Nepal Valley ;.

and during this time he made very extensive zoological collections, and

described many new forms. He discriminated altogether twelve species

of bats from Nepal, and to every one of these he gave a new scientific

name.-- Unfortunately, however, he did not describe all the species

whose names he published, and some of the descriptions he gave were

not sufficiently full to fix the species intended without doubt. Mr.

Hodgson presented most of his specimens from Nepal to the British

Museum, and he also gave a few to the Asiatic Society of Bengal. This.

led to Dr. J. E. Gray and Mr. Ed. Blyth identifying some of Hodgson’s

species with others previously named by different authors, andin some

cases to more extended description of the Nepalese specimens. Some

doubt and error were in this way introduced, as will be explained fur-

ther on ; the doubt hanging over the species named by Mr. Hodgson but

never described by him.

Mr. Hodgson left Nepal in 1844. He never returned to that

country, but, after a visit to England, he settled for some years at Dar-

jiling, in the Sikkim Himalayas east of Nepal, and collected zoological

specimens there largely. These spoils he also gave to the British

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 235

Museum and to the museum of the East India Company in London.

Mr. Hodgson’s name had, however, become so firmly connected with

Nepal in the minds of English zoologists, that some portion of his

collections in Sikkim were wrongly assigned by them to Nepal. So

that, mainly by Dr. Horsfield, Hodgson’s additions of Chiroptera from

Darjiling were published as coming from the former country. Owing

to this confusion, at least half a dozen species of bats frem Sikkim,

never obtained by Hodgson in Nepal, were credited to the latter country

on the strength of that naturalist having collected them.

In 1876 and 1878, Dr. Dobson’s two admirable works on the

Chiroptera appeared. The task this author had on hand was too ex-

tensive to permit his paying particular attention toa relatively small

question like the station of certain species in Nepal; he had, moreover,

to be guided to some extent by previous writers, and to rely on museum

labels, which are not always accurate. He has in consequence given in

his works some species as from Nepal which were not obtained there

by Hodgson or any one else, and has altogether omitted mention in his

synonymy of two names given by Hodgson to Nepalese species.

In short, without much balancing of evidence, it was impossible to

draw up a correct list of the bats of Nepal from the writings of the

authors I have referred to; and I consequently determined to investi-

gate the whole question with the aid of the specimens I had myself

collected. The result of my enquiry is set forth in this paper.

I have already mentioned Mr. Hodgson’s collection of bats from

Nepal. This forms the foundation of our knowledge on the subject,

and the subsequent additions of material can be readily indicated. In

1871, a collector of the Indian Museum obtained 3 specimens of bats,

representing two species, at Kathmandu; and the third and last collec-

tion of Nepalese Chiroptera is my own.

Mr. Hodgson named 12 species from Nepal, but some of his speci-

mens in the British Museum show that he really obtained 13 species in

that country. The collector of the Indian Museum did not, I think,

add anything to Hodgson’s list, although one of his specimens was

described as a new species by Dr. Dobson (see p. 253). Of the 10 species

which I obtained, no less than 5 were never secured by Mr. Hodgson in

Nepal. The inference I draw from this is that the list of species of

Chiroptera now actually known to occurin the Nepal Valley does not

completely represent the forms to be found there. A considerably

extended list must be the reward of future workers in that country.

As regards a list of bats inhabiting the whole State of Nepal, that

would certainly include a very large number of species not to be found

in the Nepal Valley ; for anything I know to the contrary nearly every:

936 J. Scully On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No 3;

species of bat found in India may occur in Nepal territory. That must

be mere matter of conjecture, for, as I have mentioned, we have only

certain knowledge of the majority of forms which occur in and near the

Nepal Valley.

In the following list reference is made under every species to the

ample descriptions given in Dr. Dobson’s works. Detailed descriptions

would therefore be quite superfluous in this paper; but I have endea-

voured to include such information as is available, from Indian sources,

regarding the habits of the animals. Itis matter for regret that our

knowledge of the habits of bats is so scant.

I, Preropus MEDIUs.

Pteropus medius, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. i, p. 176 (1827) ; Dobson, Mono-

gr. Asiat; Chiroptera, p. 18 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 51 (1878).

Pteropus leucocephalus, Hodgson, J. A. 8. B. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Mr. Hodgson appears to have obtained a number of specimens of

this bat in Nepal, as he presented four examples collected there to the

British Museum. The type of Pteropus leucocephalus measured, length

of head and body 10 inches, and expanse 46; the weight of the animal

was 22 ounces. Dr. Dobson mentions that all these Nepalese examples

have the head and under surface paler than usual, and that one speci-

men has an abnormal additional upper molar, immediately behind the

third molar.

Mr. Hodgson informs us that this species never appears in

the central region of Nepal save in autumn, when it comes in

large bodies to plunder the ripe fruit in gardens. So far as the

Nepal Valley is concerned, this remark hardly accords with my two

years’ experience of that portion of the country ; for I was never able to

obtain a specimen of Pteropus medius there. Of late years, at all events,

this animal can only be regarded as a straggler to the Nepal Valley,

and, whenever it does make its appearance there, I have little doubt that

it merely travels about a dozen miles from the low and hot valley of the

Trisul Ganga, immediately to the north-west of Nepal. Its route to a

point so far in the interior of the Nepal mountains would naturally be.

along the easy gradient offered by the valley of the Gandak river, and

its eastern-brauch up to Nowakot (or Nayakot).

An interesting note will be found in Dr. J. Andergon’s ‘ Catalogue

of the Mammalia in the Indian Museum’ (1881, p. 101) on some semi-

migratory movements of Pteropus medius, in immense numbers, during

autumn.

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 937

2. CYNONYCTERIS AMPLEXICAUDATA.

Pteropus amplexicaudatus, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. xv, p. 96 (1810).

Pteropus pyrivorus, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 29 (1876) ; Cat. Chir.

Brit. Mus. p. 72 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson’s description of his Pteropus pyrivorus from Nepal

leaves little doubt that he was referring to Cynonycteris amplexicaudata :

he gives, length of head and body 6 inches, tail 0°5, expanse 24; weight

5 ounces. And Dr. Dobson’s examination of the type specimen in the

British Museum settles the question. Mr. Hodgson says that these bats

only appear in Central Nepal in autumn, and at midnight, when they

come in large bodies to plunder the fruit-gardens. As the animal was

considered a perfect pest from the havoc it made among the ripe pears,

he called it pyrivorus. He adds that when these bats appear in Central

Nepal they must necessarily come from a very considerable distance,

and that in the plains it is noted of them that they will travel 30 or 40

miles, and as many back, in a single night, in order to procure food.

These remarks of Mr. Hodgson as to the habits of Pteropus pyrivo-

rus have been repeatedly misapplied to a totally distinct species of bat.

Dr. J. EH. Gray wrongly placed Pt. pyrivorus as a synonym of Cynopterus

marginatus in his List of ‘ Mammalia in the British Museum’ published in

1843. In 1844, Blyth confidently asserted that Pteropus pyrivorus was the

same as Oynopterus marginatus (J. A. S. B. XIII, p. 479) ; it does not

appear that he had seen an example named by Hodgson,but Gray certainly

had two Nepalese specimens before him which are still in the collection of

the British Museum. Horsfield, Hodgson himself, Hutton, and Dobson

followed suit in this wrong determination. Hutton (P. Z. 8. 1872,

p, 693), under the head of C. marginatus, quotes Hodgson’s account of

Pt. pyrivorws and makes some remarks about the (supposed) wonder-

ful feat accomplished by this bat in travelling from the plains to the

Nepal Valley, and back again, in a single night. Dr. Dobson gives

Pt. pyriworus as a synonym, and quotes a portion of Hutton’s remarks, in

his article on Cynopterus marginatus in the Monograph of Asiatic

Chiroptera (p. 26). But in the ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera in the British

Museum,’ published two years later, he finds that Pteropus pyrivorus is

undoubtedly Cyn. amplexicaudata, and gives Mr. Hodgson’s remarks

about its habits, correctly, under the description of the latter animal.

The proverbial immortality of error, however, asserts itself, for, in the

work last mentioned, we find the article on Cynopterus marginatus

transcribed from the Monograph without excision of the references to

Pieropus pyrivorus. The latter title is given as a synonym with a re-

238 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

ference to P. Z. S. 1836, p. 36 ; and, at page 83, Capt. Hutton’s misapplied

remarks about QO. marginatus being a perfect pest in Nepal &c. is re-

peated. It is easy to show that both these entries are erroneous. There

is no mention of any bat on page 36 of the Proceedings of the Zoologi-

cal Society for 1836; the page should be 46, and there will be found the

name only of Pteropus pyrivorus, whose characters have to be sought for

in the ‘Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,’ that is to say, in

Hodgson’s original description in Vol. IV, 1835. Moreover, Dr. Dobson

does not find any specimen of Cynopterus marginatus from Nepal in the

British or Indian Museums, Mr. Hodgson never having obtained any

example of it in that country. As to Captain Hutton’s remarks on the

habits of (so-called) Oynopterus marginatus in Nepal, that writer of

course knew nothing of the bats of Nepal beyond what he derived from

Hodgson’s published accounts, and he merely followed Blyth and others

in supposing that Pt. pyrivorus was a synonym of C. marginatus.

About the great distances supposed to be traversed by C. amplem-

caudata in a single night in search of food, I think there is a miscon-

ception—at least so far as relates to the Nepal Valley. At the

time Mr. Hodgson wrote his account of this species, he was probably

not familiar with the Nowakot (or Nayakote) district, about 16 miles

only ina direct line from Kathmandu. This part of the country, al-

though situated to the north-west of the Nepal Valley, is more than

2000 feet lower than the latter; one part of it, at Devighat, being less

than 2000 feet above sea-level. The climate, vegetation, and fauna of

this district naturally differ strikingly from those of the Nepal Valley,

and here certainly we may expect to find both Pteropus medius and

Cynon. ampleaicaudata quite at home. A glance at any recent large

scale map of India will show the broad valley of the Gandak river

stretching from the plains into the Nepal hills, and Nowakot in the

valley of the Trisul Ganga, the eastern affluent of the Gandak. Al-

though so far in the interior of the hills, it will readily be understood

that, in such hot malarious valleys, we have a direct continuation of the

climate and flora suited to 0. amplexicaudata. It is no wonder then

that this bat should stray from the Nowakot district into the Nepal

Valley in search of food, at suitable seasons ; and the supposition of its

travelling 40 miles in a direct line over hill and dale, to visit the Nepal

Valley at midnight, may be dismissed as improbable.

Three examples of this species, from Nepal, were presented by Mr.

Hodgson to the British Museum, and these were probably the only

specimens he obtained in that country.

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 239

3. CYNOPTERUS MARGINATUS.

Pteropus marginatus, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. xv, p. 97 (1810).

Cynopterus marginatus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 24 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 81 (1878).

I obtained only two specimens of this species in Nepal, one from the

Nowakot district about 16 miles north-west of Kathmandu; and another

just within the Nepal Valley, which had evidently strayed there from the

Nowakot district. The captures were effected on the 13th and 27th of July.

The first example obtained is a female, evidently an old animal, as the

molars are much worn, and the second is a male, apparently full grown,

but not old.

The following are measurements taken from these specimens after

preservation in alcohol :—

2 cy)

Length, head and Bai eee he ee corer be 3°6 3:2

ee sanereske ican’ Heaavs wees Geir 0°45 0°45

» head. 1:3 1°25

ikl ear (anteriorly ‘from notch) . 0-7 0:7

Breadth, ear ........ 0°47 0°45

Length, ear to tip of nostril . Ie] ig |

» eye to tip of nostril .. 0°5 04:7

» ‘forearm.. a 2°5 2°43

» thumb and claw.. 0-9 1:03

» third finger... 4°] 3°95

jt -ffth’finger... 3:1 2°9

Pee TIDID, . wie 0°95 0°86

foot and claws.. mits 0°6 0°55

Expanse.... Meee tviie trlctes ae ace eed cvcnvestaxvenervenaqunavaver |, eO 16:0

The dental formula of these two specimens is :—

Incisors #, canines 2, premolars 4, molars * = 30,

Ears margined with white; wing-membrane from basal half of

first toe ; fur olive-brown above, pale fulvous beneath. Claws black,

with white tips. Compared with specimens of C. marginatus in the

British Museum, I could not detect any difference except in size, the

Nepalese examples being decidedly small and having short ears. My

measurements accord best with those of CO. brachyotus, from S. Anda-

man Island, given by Dobson in the Monograph of Asiatic Chiroptera ;

but, as this variety does not even figure as a synonym in the Catalogue

of Chiroptera published by him later, it is to be presumed that C. mar-

ginatus must be regarded as a species which varies greatly in all

dimensions.

Mr. Hodgson did not obtain this species in Nepal, and, although it

has often been quoted as from that country on his authority, it has been

240 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. (No. 3,

shown, under the head of Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, that this was

founded on error. Consequently, the present notice is the first authentic

record of the occurrence of C. marginatus in Nepal.

4. RHINOLOPHUS LUCTUS.

Rhinolophus luctus, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. ii, p. 24 (1835); Hutton,

Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 694; Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 39 (1876); Cat.

Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 105 (1878).

Rhinolophus perniger, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. xii, pt. i, p. 414

(1843.)

There seems to be no doubt now that the species described by

Hodgson, from Nepal, under the name of Rhinolophus perniger is, as

Blyth first stated, the same as Rh. luctus, Temminck. Mr. Hodgson

gives the following measurements of the type of Rh. perniger, a female:

length of head and body 3°25 inches, tail 1°12, head 1°31, expanse 17,

ear from anteal base 1°68, ear from crown of head or posteal base 1°37,

radius 2°62, third finger 40, tibia 1°37, foot 0°81. Captain Hutton

gives, for Rh. luctus from Masuri, head and body 3°5 to 4'6 inches,

tail 1:95 to 2°12, ear 1:5, expanse 17:12 to 18°5, radius 2°75 to 3, third

finger 4°5,

Mr. Hodgson did not present any example of Rh. perniger to the

British Museum, but he gave a skeleton of the species to the Asiatic

Society in 1842, which is at present in the collection of the Indian

Museum. Dr. Dobson enters this example in the catalogue appended

to his ‘ Monograph of Asiatic Chiroptera’ (p. 194), and under the heading

of locality he puts ‘“ Nipal?’’ There can, however, be no doubt that

this specimen having been received from Mr. Hodgon in 1842 must have

come from Nepal and no other country. Ihave not been able to trace

any other authentic record of a Nepalese specimen of the species.

Concerning the habits of this bat in Nepal, Mr. Hodgson says that it

is shy and never approaches houses or cultivated country ; and that it

dwells in the deep forests and caves of the more precipitous mountains.

On this Captain Hutton remarks that such are not the habits of Rh.

luctus at higher elevations in the Himalayas further west than Nepal.

I am disposed to think that Hodgson’s observation is correct, so far as

Nepal is concerned. I never obtained a specimen in the valley during

my residence there, and, if it had anything like the habits of Rh. minor

or of the different species of Phyllorhina in Nepal, I could not have

failed to secure such a fine and conspicuous species as Ih. luctus.

As Mr. Hodgson obtained very few specimens of it in Nepal (per-

haps only one), and judging from my own want of success, I believe

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 241

this species to be rare in that locality. It probably affects higher ele-

vations than the Nepal Valley. Captain Hutton has given a very in-

teresting account of the habits of Rh. luctus ; this has been quoted in

Dr. Dobson’s Monograph and, being therefore readily accessible, need

not be reproduced here.

5. RHAINOLOPHUS MACROTIS.

Rhinolophus macrotis, Hodgson, Blyth, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. xiii, pt, i, p.

485 (1844); Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 699 ; Dobson, Mon. As. Chir.

p. 45 (1876), Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 110 (1878).

This species, which is only known with certainty to occur in Nepal

and Masuri, was first described by Mr. Hodgson from the former locality

in 1844. He presented a specimen of it to the British Museum, and

another to the Asiatic Society which is now in the collection of the Indian

Museum. These are the only two known examples of the species from

Nepal. Mr. Hodgson mentions that Rhinolophus macrotis has no pubic

false teats, and he gives the weight of his type specimen as one-third of

an ounce.

In the following table, measurements of examples of this species

from various sources are contrasted. In column I. are entered Mr.

Hodgson’s original measurements, II. contains those given by Mr. Blyth

of a female example sent by Mr. Hodgson to the Asiatic Society, ITT.

shows Captain Hutton’s results for recent examples captured at Masuri,

and IV. contains Dr. Dobson’s measurements of an adult male sent by

Captain Hutton from Masuri to the Asiatic Society. Dimensions in

inches.

ti EE bee ig

MPMMHTIG DOKY | 31... .c0scesccseessenna | 17 | 162°) 237 told | 17

SR SE FOOTE Li) ai daa fee sewice. | OFFS PHONED — 0:75

Har from anteal base... ....sereseeee | O'93 | 0°62 1:0 0°85

BrtOPUAL OF CATS... .cccccree sevaceccoees 025); — = ams

cas ses canere sevasestvuss,| Oro | O'S 0°87 0°8

ni dcccaclsvctteesscsssectse |) 0 — aoe we

etree, coy crsccecqecoesds || LO 1°62 re? 16

THA ANGE... ........0.scseseeeesssseees | B'S 2°25 2°37 oD.

I fl 5s Ue vsgiseaelevavawess ae | O°62)))) — < same

ado ha chciceycvevpesianeesyeestt O62 .- 0°63.) O°4:40.0°75 | -0°7

EE rire foc use nce teviesnare srscevece | DFO ae 9

os sig atneielessave vevcevaccsee | = | 0°37 oo 0°35

31.

242 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepai. [No. 3,

It will be seen that Captain Hutton’s dimensions considerably ex-

ceed those given by the other authorities. The most noteworthy di-

vergence is in the length of the head and body, but Hutton expressly

says that his measurements are taken from fresh specimens, so that part

at least of the discrepancy may be accounted for by the shrinking of

specimens preserved in ‘alcohol.

Mr. Hodgson does not give any particular account of the habits of

this species in Nepal. Hutton’s note about the manners of these bats in

Masuri is this, ‘They come out of the caves in the earlier twilight

hours, and may be seen flitting rapidly at some height in the air, chasing

the small flies and beetles which abound during the rainy season.”

Dr. Dobson mentions that the type of Rhinolophus macrotis is in the

collection of the Indian Museum. There are three specimens of this

species in that collection, an adult female in alcohol presented by Mr.

Hodgson in 1842, from Nepal, which has been mentioned above ; and two

adult males in alcohol from Masuri, presented by Captain Hutton in

1852. The Nepal specimen is therefore doubtless the type as under-

stood by Dr. Dobson, but this fact is not mentioned in the catalogue

appended to his Monograph, nor in Dr. Anderson’s ‘Catalogue of

Mammalia in the Indian Museum’ (1881).

6. RAINOLOPHUS AFFINIS.

Rhinolophus afinis, Horsfield, Zool. Research. Java, (1824); Dobson, Mon. As.

Chir. p. 47 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 112 (1878).

This species is entered here with considerable doubt. The only

ground for its inclusion is an entry in the ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera in

the British Museum’ of a specimen of Fh. affinis from “ Nipal,” pre-

sented by Mr. Hodgson. It is quite possible that the locality quoted

merely rests on the evidence of an erroneous museum label, and that the

specimen was really procured by Mr. Hodgson in Darjiling, where Rh.

affinis appears to be common. No synonym is quoted under the entry

of this particular specimen to show that it ever bore a name bestowed

by Mr. Hodgson; and specimens of V. mystacinus, Megaderma lyra, and

Plecotus auritus, certainly obtained by Mr. Hodgson in Darjiling or the

Sikkim Tarai, and never in Nepal, are in that work entered as from

Nepal.

A reference to the register of the British Museum would settle the

question ; for, if the specimen of Rh. affinis presented by Mr. Hodgson

vas only received in 1847, or on any subsequent date, it could not have

been collected in Nepal.

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepai. 243

However, the species is very likely to be found in Nepal, asit —

occurs both east and west of that country in the Himalayas, at Dar.

jiling and Masuri.

7. RHINOLOPHUS MINOR.

Rhinolophus minor, Horsfield, Zool. Res. Java (1824); Dobson, Mon, As, Chir.

p. 50 (1876), Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 114 (1878).

Rhinolophus subbadius, Hodgson, Blyth, Journ. As. Soc, Beng. vol. xiii, pt. i,

p. 486 (1844).

In a catalogue of the mammals of Nepal by Mr. Hodgson, printed

in Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. X. Pt. II, p. 909 (1841), a species called

Vespertilio subbadia is mentioned. The description of this form as

Rhinolophus subbadius only appeared three years later, as cited in the

above synonymy. Dr. Dobson does not notice the title of Rhinolophus

subbadius at all, either in his ‘ Monograph’ or ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera

in the British Museum.’ It will be useful to recall the descriptions and

measurements given by Hodgson and by Blyth of Rh. subbadius. The

account given by the former author is too vague to fix the species,

but he fortunately sent a specimen of it to the Asiatic Society, which

Blyth described in the paper in which Hodgson’s diagnosis appeared.

Hodgson says that, in his species, the ears are not longer than

the head, are truncated at the tip [or somewhat obtusely pointed],

and ovoid. Nasal appendage quadrate, not salient, with a transverse

bar nearly surmounting it towards the head. Blyth’s diagnosis is,

Anterior nose leaf very small, oblong, rounded above. Vertical mem-

brane conspicuously developed, and pointed posteriorly. Behind verti-

cal membrane a short and broad transverse membrane, divided into two

lateral lobes. Hindmost angular peak with sides slightly emarginated

towards the point. Nostrils not externally fringed with membrane.

Over the lip is the usual horse-shoe. The following are the measure-

ments given (a) by Hodgson and (6) by Blyth of this Nepalese

species.

(a) (0)

Length, head and body...... bg Ghee hae Say 3,

ETRE oo) OS SR ae en P25)". 3. O62

BID? Peel Pe Le CO O2 oo OR

AT Sa eae ene 0°62... O0*5

Ue Ror @eatens hoods 28s 1:25 ... 1:37

5 third finger ......... 2°25 ... 1°88

5) BUD, ah anGaercaaaiaet Noe tat Oe

FOSGHEE Se. 2 DAE LF Gad

ot EEE eRe Se ot: le

244 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [ No. 3,

No specimen of Rh. subbadius was presented by Hodgsou to the

British Museum; the example he gave to the Asiatic Society was en-

tered in Blyth’s Catalogue (p. 25) as No. 69 A. This number seems to

have been accidentally removed from the specimen, and it cannot now

be traced with certainty. I shall refer to this specimen later on.

I obtained an example of this species in the Nepal Valley which

gave the following measurements. Length head and body 1°65 inch,

tail 0°75, head 0°7, ear, 0°65, nose-leaf 0°44 x 0°28, forearm 1'4, thumb

0:23, third finger, metacarpal 1'1, first phalanx 0°43, second phalanx

0°65, fifth finger, metacarpal 1°13, first phalanx 0°36, second phalanx

0°45, tibia 0°62, foot and claws 0°3.

Kars subacutely pointed ; antitragus separated by a deep angular

notch. Posterior connecting process acutely pointed, considerably ex-

ceeding the vertical process of the sella in height. Terminal process of

posterior nose leaf narrow and emarginate. Lower lip with three verti-

cal grooves. Second lower premolar in the tooth row. Second upper

premolar rather widely separated from the canine, and the first upper

premolar standing in the tooth row. Wing membrane to tibia, 01

above ankle-joint. |

I have no doubt that this specimen represents Rh. subbadius of

Hodgson, and I thinkit is also certainly an example of the variable

Rh. minor of Horsfield. I have compared my Nepalese specimen with

examples of Rh. minor in the British Museum, named by Dr. Dobson.

The sella is exactly the same shape, but the ears are rather larger and

the horizontal nose-leaf, or horse-shoe, is slightly larger, and conceals

the lip more. These slight differences are not of much importance,

and I believe Rh. subbadius, Hodgson, may be safely considered a

synonym of Bh. minor.

With regard to the original specimen received by the Asiatic So-

ciety from Mr. Hodgson, I have already said that it cannot be traced

with certainty. In the catalogue of specimens appended to Dr.

Dobson’s Monograph, No. 69A of Blyth’s Catalogue is not accounted

for; but three specimens of Lh. minor are entered of which the locality,

date, and donor are unknown. These bats came to the Indian Museum

from the Asiatic Society, and of one of them Dr. Dobson notes that the

sex is undeterminable, and that it is in a dilapidated condition. It is

possible that this specimen is the type of Rhinolophus subbadius, re-

ceived from Mr. Hodgson in 18382. In noticing these three specimens

of Rh. minor, Dr. J. Anderson mentions that they are types (Cat.

Mamm. Ind. Mus. 1881, p. 110).

This species does not appear to be common in the Nepal Valley ;

I noticed it only on a few occasions, and Mr. Hodgson does not furnish

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 245

any notes about its habits. Captain Hutton records it from Masuri, but

the measurements he gives of his specimens are not reconcilable with

the known dimensions of Rh. minor. He gives the length of head and

body as from 3 inches to 3°25, &c. I think the specimens whose dimen-

sions he records could not have been Rh. minor.

8. RHINOLOPHUS FERRUM-EQUINUM.

Vespertilio ferrum-equinum, Schreb., Saugeth. i, p. 174 (1775).

Rhinolophus tragatus, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 699, (1835).

Rhinolophus ferrum-equinum, Dobson, Mon. As. Chir. p. 53 (1876); Cat. Chir.

Brit. Mus. p. 119 (1878).

This species is fairly common in Nepal. The following particulars

are extracted from Mr. Hodgson’s original description of his Rh. traga-

tus, obtained in the Nepal Valley :—Length of head and body 2°62 inches,

tail 1°87, expanse 15:5, weight 2 ounces. The pubic false teats are

strikingly developed, and have the same shape as the true pectoral teats,

bnt even exceed them in size. The ears are “‘ tremblingly alive all over ”

and capable of considerable movement and compression. ‘ So soon as it

is dark, they come forth from the cavities of rocks, in groups, to skim

the surface of standing crops, or to glide around and between um-

brageous trees, in search of nocturnal insects, which constitute their

sole food. They make their exit rather sooner than the true bats

| Vespertilionide], and always in considerable numbers. They are not

migratory, nor subject to hibernation. They breed once a year, towards

the close of summer, and produce two young, differing from the parents

chiefly in the very restricted development of the nasal appendages.”

These remarks on habits must of course be understood as applying

only to Nepal and regions having a similar climate. In Gilgit, for in-

stance, where the winter is much colder than in the Nepal Valley, Rh.

ferrum-equinum certainly hibernates [see my paper on the Mammals of

Oiew, P.Z.'S. 1881, p. 199].

9, PHYLLORHINA ARMIGERA.

Rhinolophus armiger, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 699 (1835).

Phyllorhina armiger, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 64 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 135 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson was the first to name and describe this bat, from spe-

cimens obtained by him in Nepal, of which he presented three to the

British Museum. This fine species is very common in the Nepal Valley

at all seasons. Owing to its large size and peculiar method of hunting

for its prey, its habits can be readily observed. In the following table

246 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

detailed measurements of eleven examples which I preserved are set

forth. It is somewhat remarkable that more than four-fifths of the

total number secured should have been females.

Ce tee ee ee | ul el ae | ¢

Length, head and a, eh AEN 4:0 |4'1 |3°8 |4°1 |3°65/3°63 '3°7 [3:9 [36 [40 [40

jy bAML Se sees cneeescsee | — [2°25 [2°85 [21 12-2 12-4 [O-4 [2-3 [2-4 [2-4 [1-9

. head.. $ woe [1°27 ]1°84 [1°34 /1°3 |1°384/1°3 1:3 |1°3 [1:3 11-28 1-4

os ear (anteriorly) . oo (ROLZ (115 [L1L7 [1-2 1B 111 [11 (1°15 11°16 [1°25 11-23

Breadth of ear (anteriorly). 0°94 /0°9 |0°95|I'1 0°95 | 0°94|0°93 |1°0 {0.96 |1°0 0

Length, forearm.... . . [8°45 |3°45 [3°5 [3'4 (3°5 | 3°43 [8°56 |3°6 (3°45 13'4 3°6

, thumb and claw... [0°47 [0°54 |0°55 [0°55 |0-54 | 0°55 |0:53 [0-55 |0'53 |0-55 [0-55

» third finger .. . |453|47 [47 153 [4°65 | 467/52 [49 14°75 14-65 14°95

o Afbirfinger .. sos +. 3°68 8 ‘7 |3-65|3°75 |3°8 |3°73 (38 |3°85|3°7 [3°65 3-85

ss CRUST ists anemia Yaiss ms aie 15 (L'4 [4514 [14 11°53 [1°42 |1°44 [1°43 (1°56

a calcanmeum .weccesee | — 0°87 |0°93 |0°82 |0°85 | 0°83 |0°8 [0°87 |0'8 0°82 |0°97

0°7 |0°7 10°72 10°65 | 0°73 |0°74 |0°73 |0°67 |0°65 |0°7

— |23°3 |21°5 [21:0 | 21°3 [22:0 |22°3 |21°5 [21-0 |2°02

c foot and claws.... |0°65

Expanse @eeeteaoeeosne@ eeeoer eee enve 21°4

In all the specimens the glandular frontal sac is distinct, but is

smaller in the females than in the males. The wing-membrane is at-

tached to the tibia above the ankle-joint, and the distal end of the cal-

caneum is distinctly marked in all. Pubic warts are present in six of

the females, but are absent in the three remaining examples of this sex ;

in one case a pubic wart measures 0°28 inch in length. Hodgson found

the weight of his type specimen (a male) to be 3 ounces; in the only

specimen I weighed, an adult female, I found the weight 1°5 oz. or just

half the figure Mr. Hodgson gives.

This bat usually harbours during the day in caves, or commonly in

lofts, out-houses, and sheds that are little used; in the latter localities

it suspends itself, by the claws of the feet, from the rafters. When at-

taching itself in this way to the edge of a beam or rafter, the animal

sways, pendulum-like, a few times until the impetus given during flight

is exhausted ; andit then hangs motionless with its wings folded close

to the body. If slightly alarmed by the opening of a door, or any un-

usual noise in the room it occupies, the head is thrust out and turned

carefully in various directions, asif for the purpose of finding out the

cause of disturbance. On such occasions I have purposely dropped a

heavy book on the floor so as to alarm the bat thoroughly. The animal

would at once fly off and either take several turns round the room, or

else leave it; but it invariably returned quickly and attached itself to

the spot it had previously oceupied.

It comes out for the capture of its prey about sunset, and its hunt-

ing grounds are gardens, orchards, cleared spaces in woods, or avenues

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 247

of trees ; somewhere near trees always. It is sometimes found flying on

a level with the tops of the trees, but more commonly nearer the

ground; a very characteristic movement it has is aslow but steady

sweep round a leafy tree, or clump of trees, in search of insects which

frequent the lower branches. While it was intently occupied in this

eircular flight I have been nearly touched on the face by this bat, as

I walked across the grounds attached to my house in Nepal. And in

passing so close to one it could be distinctly heard crunching the hard-

bodied insects it had caught, between its strong teeth.

Sometimes these bats seem to come out of their day retreat before

the insects they are in search of are to be found in plenty. On the 25th

August about 6 p. m., I noticed an example of Phyllorhina armigera

flying close to a tree. It circled twice round the tree while I was

watching it, keeping about three feet above the ground. Apparently

finding that none of the insects it wanted were about, it suspended itself

to asmall horizontal branch of the tree, just 3; feet above the ground,

and so remained for some time. It was probably waiting for a more

propitious hour. Whether this was really the explanation of the pause

in its flight or not, it seems certain that this bat does not ordinarily

remain very long on the wing. Ihave often observed that in the early

part of the night it alternated its pursuit of insects with short periods

of repose in an out-house. On one occasion, I observed a bat of this

Species return three times during the evening (from about 8 to 10 p. M.)

to a room I happened to be occupying; and curiously enough it always

attached itself to precisely the same part of the ceiling. That part of

the room, however, was the point furthest away from me, and my pre-

sence may have influenced the bat in its selection of the most quiet

spot.

On another occasion, one of these bats had suspended itself to the

ceiling of my study late at night, and it first attracted attention by the

pattering of its droppings on the floor. On being alarmed at some

noise I made in moving books, it quitted its perch and flew lumberingly

round the small room. It soon ended by knocking itself violently

against a wall and then fell on the floor, apparently exhausted and

stunned. When I approached it, however, it flew up and once more

hooked on to a beam exactly where it had been before. It does not

enter lighted rooms in houses so commonly ag so many other species of

bats do. Indeed, on the rare occasions when I have found it in this way,

its object in coming in was evidently for rest merely, either temporarily

or for the night.

When captured alive (a large butterfly-net answers for this pur-

pose), this bat has a fierce and forbidding aspect owing to its depressed

248 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

muzzle and prominent canine teeth ; the ears are kept in quick tremu-

lous motion, and there is also frequent but slight movement of the facial

erests. The animal is easily shot during its flight, and most of my

specimens were obtained in this way.

Hodgson says that Phyllorhina armigera breeds once a year, to-

wards the close of summer, and produces two young, differing from the

parents chiefly in the very restricted development of the nasal append-

ages. I made no observations on this point, but I note that in a female

specimen captured on the 27th July, the pectoral teats, which are

situated near the anterior margin of the axilla, are enlarged.

10. PHYLLORHINA FULVA.

Hipposideros fulvus, Gray, Mag. Zool. and Bot. ii, p. 492 (1838).

Phyllorhina fulva, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir, p. 71 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 149 (1878).

The following particulars are derived from three examples of this

bat captured in the Nepal Valley on the 21st and 22nd August, and the

10th of January :

2 g f

Length, head and body 2:0 21 1°99

Re tems sils, Biers ED «Ra S-? AS

CA AU Gand a Le: ae 07a" O70" “OTS

iY, WOR EA ie cere salar en 0°85 0°82 0-9

Pie wSpeawring 2. A. 2 16 1:64 16

» third finger..... 2°45 25 24

j, OM inger’.,. 35, 2:15 2:14 2:0

Bh dled OAR: ipa he scisleia as 0:73. 0°75: “072

PuLAIoanen, eno ae! 0°33 0°34 0:3

» calcaneum ...... 0°35 '".0:4'" O37

PU RAOUMISG Sei. g 5 ete vee 102 100 —

Nothing in the coloration of these specimens recalls Mr. Blyth’s

remark (J. A.S. B. XIII, Pt. i, p. 489, 1844) that this species is perhaps

the most vividly coloured of the whole class of mammalia. The fur is

long, dense, and soft, above smoky brown, the hairs white at their bases ;

below paler, especially on the throat. Ears and membrane dusky. Wing-

membrane from the tarsus.

These examples agree well with specimens of Phyllorhina fulva in

the British Museum, named by Dr. Dobson. That author considers

that Ph. fulva is only a variety of Ph. bicolor, and on this point I cannot

offer any useful opinion. But Ph. amboinensis, which he also regards as

a variety of Ph. bicolor, seems to me quite distinct from Ph. fulva.

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 249

This species is not uncommon in the Nepal Valley, although Mr.

Hodgson never obtained it. It often comes into lighted rooms at night

to hunt for insects. While being pursued in a room, it constantly flies

very low down, not more thana couple of feet from the floor. Itisa

permanent resident in Nepal and does not hibernate there.

1l. PHYLLORHINA AMBOLNENSIS.

Phyllorhina amboinensis, Peters, M. B. Akad. Berl. 1871, p. 323; Dobson, Mon.

Asiat. Chir. p. 72 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 150 (1878).

Phyllorhina micropus, Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 703.

I captured two specimens of this bat in the Nepal Valley on the

22nd of October; the animals had entered a lighted room on the

ground floor about 9 o’clock in the evening.

The following are dimensions of these examples—both females—in

inches :—

1 2

Length, head and ast mye 1°6 ig

seid ae ikea Kasse ye Opt tat

:, faad.. \rtcenen Sh . Sear gs 0'6o. ~ 0°65

Boon CAR itini ced cen qanel aavont 5% MACOS 0°62

Length, forearm... ............ 140 137

5 a. HIE DNASE... cy vccinc ee oO 2°1

eee Epil MATE vn cries wag EO 1:78

Bere ee GUAR oaurees si ate acca vote 0°58 0°57

big POO Ui. 6 ate tiaras | Woah are Oe

oY, Chleateunt, .. stvciwes O20 0:3

PPR BAMGO ack wae -ce cere icycbveos, POT 8°9

These specimens agree well with a bat in the collection of the

British Museum, from Lingasugur in the Deccan, which had been

compared with the type of Phyllorhina amboinensis in the Berlin

Museum by Dr. Dobson. Inthe Nepalese specimens the wing-membrane

is attached to the tarsus.

Mr. Hodgson never obtained this species in Nepal.

Captain Hutton observes that it occurs in the summer months both

in the lower hills near Masuri and in the Dehra Doon. He adds that one

was taken on a warm evening in September, having flown in to the lights

in aroom, and another was taken at the foot of the hills, in the same

way, in October; but that it is by no means common,

250 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

12. VESPERUGO NOCTULA.

Vespertilio noctula, Schreb., Saugeth. i, p. 166 (1775).

Vespertilio labiata, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Vesperugo noctula, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 88 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 212 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson appears to have obtained only one specimen of this

bat in Nepal, the type of his Vespertilio labiata, now in the collection

of the British Museum. In his description, he says that the colour of

the fur is saturate brown throughout and that of the skin, wherever

uncovered by hair, purpurascent. His measurements are, length of

head and body 3 inches, tail 2, and expanse 15.

I only secured a single specimen of Vesperugo noctula in the Nepal

Valley, on the 2nd of July, in the following manner. About 8 o’clock

in the evening, I heard the very shrill scream of some small animal in

my bedroom, and, on going into the room, I found this bat attached to

the mosquito-net covering my bed. In its flight, it had apparently

alighted on the net, and there got its claws so firmly entangled that it

could not escape.

The following are the measurements of this specimen :—length,

head and body 3:1, tail 2:1, head 0°9, ear 0°75 x 0°6, tragus 0°3 x 0°18,

forearm 2°05, thumb 0°34, third finger 3°65, fifth finger 2:2, tibia 0°75,

calcaneum 0°7, foot and claws 0°45; expanse 15:0.

The colour of the fur above is rich olive-brown, beneath paler

brown, and the fur on the membranes is buff. Ears and membranes .

dusky. |

Vesperugo noctula is, I think, not common in the Nepal Valley.

Mr. Hodgson says that it is found there throughout the year, does not

hibernate, and quests for food solitarily.

13. VESPERUGO ABRAMUS.

Vespertilio abramus, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. ii, p. 232 (1835).

Scotophilus fuliginosus, Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1845).

Vesperugo abramus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 97 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 226 (1878).

This is a very common species in the Nepal Valley, where it is to

be found at all seasons. It is very active in hunting over gardens and

woods, and its flight is quick. It often enters houses at night, in pur-

suit of insects attracted by lights. The breeding season would appear

to be in the cold weather; for none of the adult specimens captured

from May to August showed any sign of rutting, but a male secured

in November was evidently in rut,

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 251

The following are dimensions and some particulars of the speci-

mens preserved :—

Length, head andbody.... .... | 173 | 18 /18 /19 |18 | 1°79 | 1:82

rs cl 9k Se gic ee ea 1°5 1°63 | 1°55 | 1°37 | 1°55

-. head.. 0°6 0°64 | 06 0°63 | 0°65 | 0°63 | 0°63

3 ear. Leet aero 0°5 0°5 0°58 | 0°55 | 05 0°53

¥5 GERZURs «ac selene wjeteet|- O;2e | O'21))),0'22..) 0:25 +) Or21. | O23, 1), Oras

. PAD OREM ae". n'e., deiaipisas |) kOe | baty | Lo 1°3 1:3 1:28 | 13

MONOID sc lade eceeeees | O29) O25 OS 0°25 | 0°24 | 9°24 | 0°27

os third finger.... ...... | 2°35 | 2°4 2°4 2°55 | 2°45 | 2:3 2°5

ae mth finger ....0dca.e0 | 16. 17 7 E77 | E75 | 6s | bs

MME. ocaddicaesies deees 0°52 | 05 0°5 06 O’5I | 05 0°53

‘4 foot and claws ..ecce. . | O26 | O26 | 0:27 | 03 0°26 | 0°27 | 0°25

Expanse eeseeoven ereoe es 88008 eeee 8°8 9°0 10°0 10°1 9 0 89 9°7

Fur above dark olive-brown, below paler and rather rufous brown ;

basal part of fur above and below blackish. Membranes dusky. Ina

male captured on the 8th November the testes appear in the form of

oval bodies, 0°3 inch in length, placed on each {side of the base of the

tail, below, in a temporary scrotum. Iu this specimen, the colour of the

fur differs perceptibly from that of the other examples. The fur above

is arich brown, with awash of gold-colour in parts, due to the hairs

being pale-tipped ; below, the colour is sandy brown. The tips of the

claws are pure white. Oncomparing these Nepalese examples with

specimens of V. abramus in the British Museum, I could not detect any

appreciable differences in the shape or position of the teeth, or in any

other specific characters.

Mr. Hodgson presented five examples of Vesperugo abramus, ob-

tained in Nepal, to the British Museum; but he does not appear to

have discriminated the species, as he gave no name toit. The speci-

mens were entered in the Catalogue of Hodgson’s collection, by Dr.

J. E. Gray, as Scotophilus fuliginosus, with Vespertilio fuliginosus,

Hodgson, as a synonym. The latter title 1s really a synonym of

Miniopterus schreibersii, as is proved by Hodgson’s original description.

14. HARPYIOCEPHALUS LEUCOGASTER.

Murina leucogaster, Alph. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus, vii, Bull. p. 91

(1871); Mammif. du Tibet. p. 250 (1872).

Harpiocephalus leucogaster, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 157 (1876) ; Cat.

Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 283 (1878).

I obtained a single specimen of this bat in the Nepal Valley,

252 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

on the 2nd of September. It was found dead in my room, early

in the morning, and had probably killed itself by dashing against a

wall.

Length, head and body 1°85 inch, tail 1.4, head 0-7, ear 0°6, tragus

0°3, forearm 1°25, thumb 0°4, third finger 2°4, fifth finger 1°85, tibia 0°65,

foot aud claws 0°33; expanse 9°3.

Kars oval, broadly rounded above ; the inner margin convex, with a

distinct spur-shaped process near its base, which projects forwards

towards the posterior angle of the eye; outer margin convex.

Wing-membrane to base of distal phalanx of outer toe. Inter-

femoral membrane angularly emarginate at termination of calcaneum ;

extreme tip of tail projecting.

Fur golden-orange on head, the base of the hairs greyish; on the

back pale rufous brown, grey at the base. Fur on membranes bright

ferruginous, the upper surface of the interfemoral membrane and toes

being well covered. Beneath, the fur is white throughout on the chin

and throat, the rest of the lower parts having bicoloured fur—grey at

the base with white tips.

Upper inner incisor longer than outer incisor and not touching the

canine at the base; from the outer side of its base a cusp projects in-

wards. First upper premolar in the same plane as the canine.and se-

cond premolar, about equal to the latter in vertical height and about

three-fourths of its size in cross section.

Nose, lower lip, and sides of head to ears, nude and dark fleshy ;

membranes brownish black, but orange-coloured along forearm. Com-

pared with a specimen of JH. leucogaster in the British Museum, from

Tibet, the ears, teeth, and thumb and claw are of the same size and

shape. The only difference observable is in the colour of the fur,

which is very ferruginous above in the Nepal specimen and brown in

the animal from Tibet. As the two specimens must certainly be re-

ferred to the same species, it would seem that the colour of the fur is no

more a reliable character in this species of Harpyiocephalus than in

other Chiroptera (cf. Dobson, Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 284).

Mr. Hodgson did not obtain this species in Nepal. Of its habits

in the north-west Himalayas, Captain Hutton says that it occurs at an

elevation of about 5,500 feet, but does not appear to be common in the

hills, the Dehra Doon being probably its true locality there. An

example which flew into a room at Jeripani (below Masuri), at neght,

kept low down in its flight, instead of soaring towards the ceiling,

passing under the tables and chairs, as if afraid to emerge into the

broad glare of the lamps. ‘‘ This likewise is the mode of flight when

searching for insects in the open fields, where it skims closely and

1887.] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 253

somewhst leisurely over the surface of the crops and grass” (P. Z.S.

1872, p. 712).

15. VESPERTILIO NIPALENSIS.

Vespertilio pallidiventris, Hodgson, Calc. Journ. Nat. Hist. vol. iv, p. 286 (1844),

(name only) ; Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1846) (not described).

Vespertilio pallidiventer, Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. 2nd Ed. D2

(1863) (name only).

Vespertilio nipalensis, Dobson, Proc. Asiat. Soc. Beng. 1871, p. 214; Mon. Asiat.

Chir. p. 141 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 302 (1878).

The name Vespertilio pallidiventris first occurs in a list of the

mammals of Nepal by Mr. Hodgson, published in the ‘ Calcutta Journal

of Natural History’ in 1844, Although the name given by Mr. Hodgson

to this Nepalese species of bat appears in several lists subsequent to

that date, he never gave any description of the animal. As he did not

present any examples of it to the British Museum or the Asiatic Society,

I imagine that he only obtained one specimen, which must have been

lost, somehow, after it was figured. There is a well executed figure of

V. pallidwentris in the collection of plates of Mammals of Nepal pre-

sented by Mr. Hodgson to the Zoological Society of London.

In 1871, a collector of the Indian Museum obtained a bat in

Kathmandu, which Dr. Dobson described as a new species under the

name of V. nipalensis, the type and only known specimen being an adult

female example. preserved in spirit, and now in the Indian Museum,

Calcutta. I have carefully examined Hodgson’s original plate of V.

pallidiventris, with Dr. Dobson’s description and figure of V. nipalensis

before me, and, so far as any conclusion can be arrived at on such data,

I believe that both these names apply to the same species. The plate

of V. pallidiventris represents a true Vespertilio, as evidenced by the

shape of the ear and by the narrow, acutely pointed tragus; and the

whole lower surface of the animal is coloured pure white. This white

colour of the under-parts is perhaps the most marked feature in V.

nipalensis. And, Dr. Dobson’s type specimen having come from the

very place where Mr. Hodgson obtained his V. pallidiventris, there can

be no reasonable doubt about Hodgson’s title having priority. But as

the latter naturalist never defined his species by any description how-

ever short, or was helped toa definition by any writer before the name

V. nipalensis was published, V. pallidwentris must be regarded as a

synonym merely, under the accepted rules of zoological nomenclature.

Nothing is recorded about the habits of V. nipalensis. It appears

254 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No.3,

to be restricted to Nepal, and, from what has been said above, it would

seem that it is not common even in its only known habitat. A full de-

scription of the animal, with measurements of the type, is given in Dr.

Dobson’s works above cited.

16. VESPERTILIO FORMOSUS.

Vespertilio formosa, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Vespertilio formosus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 140 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 311 (1878).

In his original description of this species from Nepal, Mr. Hodgson

gives the following measurements of the type specimen: length of head

and body 2°5 inches, tail 2, expanse 12°5. He notes that the animal has

a sharp visage, and that the nasal bones are slightly convexed and

unite easily with a low forehead, in this respect contrasting with his

Vespertilio fuliginosa (Miniopterus schreibersit).

Of the habits of V. formosus in the Nepal Valley, Mr. Hodgson

merely records that it remains there throughout the year and does not

hibernate ; and that it quests for food solitarily.

In the Himalayas, this bat seems to be common at Darjiling, and in

Dehra Doon, and Lower Masuri; but I think it does not occur plenti-

fully in the Nepal Valley, as only one example appears to have been

obtained by Mr. Hodgson (the type, now in the British Museum), and I

never secured a specimen there.

17. VESPERTILIO MYSTACINUS.

Vespertilio mystacinus, Leisler, Kuhl, Deutsch. Flederm. Ann. Wetterau. Na-

turk. iv, p. 55 (1819) ; Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 133 (1816) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 314 (1878).

This is one of the commonest bats in the Nepal Valley. It may be

seen every evening throughout the year, flying rather high in the air ;

and it frequently enters houses at night for a short hunt near lamps or

other lights. On such occasions, two individuals are often found asso-

ciated. Ten examples were secured from June to November. Of these

eight are adult (53,39 ), and, though they were captured in the months

of June, July, August, September, and October, they do not show any

sign of breeding. In none of the males are the testes descended, and in

the females the mammez are not enlarged. An immature female was

obtained on the 30th June, and avery young male, just able to fly, on

the 3rd July. The following table shows the dimensions of the adult

specimens :—

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 255

ee | | |S | TT | LT

a" a" 4 ¢ ¢

Length, head and body ... | 1°9 1'8 a | 15 15 2°0 1°95 | 1°9

= Rl iris: Qeieiess del t ES 1°55 | 1°6 15 1°55 |-1°5 1°45 | 16

= DD ty cinuiaiie aes 1) Ono 0°6 06 0°58 | O06 0°63 | 06 | 0°61

= 2 ee Ne ied bat 05 O57 | 05 0-5 O51 | 0°53 | O52

Fl GFAGUS...6-- vee | O'27 | O23 | 0°26 | O25 | 0-25 | 0°24 | O24 | O26

= BOP ORI 6. wavelets a>) d SOs) WBA, |, beds 1°32 ) 1°35 | 1°4 1:35 | 1:43

ss BPN as pcs ws: ve, | OG | 0729 | O27 | O28 | O26 | 0°27 | 0°27 | O27

» third finger.. ...| 2°25 | 2:26 | 2:2 | 217 | 22 | 2:15 | 227 | 23

See iiia finger ccs. 0) 1°74 | 27 14% | 293 |17 |.1:75.| 1-75, 28

¥5 foot and claws .. | 0:3 O34 ' O37 | 074 0°34 | 0°37 | 0°36 | O04

* calcaneum...... | 0°6 0°6 ODF | O57 ft 05a" | Oa: 06 —

Rl... evarse (Oe | eo liSed | 9:3 | 95 195 | 97 | 100

Fur above dark brown; beneath ashy, the basal part of the hairs

being black. Muzzle, ears, and membranes dusky, with a purplish tint.

The specimen whose dimensions are entered in the third column above

differs from all the others in having the forehead rather abruptly

raised above the face line, the ears longer, and the third finger different-

ly proportioned. The metacarpal bone is longer than in any of the

other examples, but the first phalanx of the third finger is shorter,

measuring 0°4, while in the other specimens it varies from 0°5 to 0°55.

On a comparison of specimens at the British Museum, I find an ex-

ample of V. mystacinus in that collection with the third finger propor-

tioned as in this abnormal individual ; and all these Nepalese bats agree

perfectly with the common V. mystacinus in shape of ear and tragus,

and in other essential characters.

Considering how common this bat is in Nepal, it is very singular

that Mr. Hodgson never seems to have obtained a specimen of it there.

His first acquaintance with the species was made years after he left

Nepal, when he procured it at Siligori, in the Sikkim Tarai, and named

it Vespertilio siligorensis.

18. VESPERTILIO MURICOLA.

Vespertilio muricola, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. x, pt. ii, p. 908

(1841) (name only); Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1846) ; Dobson,

Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 134 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 316 (1878).

Vespertilio adversus, apud Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 710.

This is another species from Nepal which Mr. Hodgson named but

never described, He presented three examples of it, obtained in the

Nepal Valley, to the British Museum, and of these Gray noted in the

catalogue above quoted, “ Feet large, elongate, half free; tragus

elongate, lanceolate, subfalcate ;” no measurements or other diagnostic

particulars are given. It is difficult tosee how this can be considered a

256 J. Seully— On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [ No. 3,

definition of the species, and yet I believe it is the only description we

had of Hodgon’s V. muricola before the appearance of Dr. Dobson’s

‘Monograph.’ That author has satisfied himself that the title Vespertilio

caliginosus of Tomes, dating from 1859, as well as three or four other

defined names published before the appearance of his monograph, really

apply to the species named, but not described, by Hodgson as V. muri-

cola. Under these circumstances it seems. doubtful whether Hodgson’s

title can be retained for the species; but, as Dr. Dobson has used the

name of V. muricola in his two important works, and changes in

nomenclature are to be deprecated, I have here followed his

example.

On a comparison of specimens, V. muricola is readily distinguished

from V. mystacinus by the shape of the tragus. In the former, the

tragus is concave on its inner margin, and is decidedly inclined inwards

and rather forwards; while in V. mystacinus the tragus is more erect

and has a straight inner margin.

Nothing is recorded about the habits of this species in Nepal, but

Captain Hutton writes, ‘This is a common species at Mussooree and

in the Dehra Doon. It is early onthe wing, coming out of caves and

hollow trees, flying high, and is very rapid in its movements.” .

19. MINIOPTERUS SCHREIBERSII.

Vespertilio schreibersii, Natterer in Kuhl, Deutsch. Flederm, Wetterau. Ann. iv

p. 41 (1819).

Vespertilio fuliginosa, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, pp. 700 and

701 (1835).

Miniopterus schreibersii, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 160 (1876) ; Cat. Chir.

Brit. Mus. p. 348 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson, in describing his Vespertilio fuliginosa, says that in

size it is somewhat smaller than Vespertilio formosa, and with the ears,

lips, and muzzle as in the latter species. The face is sharp, but the

rostrum is somewhat recurved, owing to the concave bend of the nasal

bones which join a high forehead with a considerable curve. He notes

that the dentition of V. fuliginosa is a ees Meee thus differing

from V. formosa and V. labiata (= V. noctula),in which the molar series is

- The colour, he says, is wholly sooty brown.

This description is sufficient to show that Hodgson was referring to

Miniopterus schrevbersii. In Gray’s ‘ Catalogue of Hodgson’s collection

in the British Museum’ (1846, p. 4), six specimens of bats from Nepal

d 887. ] J. Seul'y—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 257

are entered under the name of Sooty Scotophile (Scotophilus fuliginosus),

with a remark that the feet are very small, in the wing to the base of

the toes. This attachment of the wing-membrane would not apply to

M. schreibersii, in which ‘that membrane only reaches the ankle; but

Dr. Gray appears to have suspected that he was including two species

under one name, for he adds, “a.—e. Specimens in spirit. f. A

Specimen with a rather larger tragus, without any small lobe at the

outer side of its base.” The last-mentioned specimen was probably the

type of Hodgson’s V. fuliginosa, and I am rather surprised not to find it

figuring in the list of specimens of M. schreibersit in the latest cata-

logue of bats in the British Museum. As has before been mentioned, the

first five specimens called by Dr. Gray Scotophilus fuliginosus are really

examples of Vesperugo abramus.

I obtained a single specimen of M. schreibersii in the Nepal Valley,

on the 8th of February, which gave the following measurements :—

Length, head and body 2°2 inches, tail 2°2, head 0°7, ear 0°52,

tragus 0°24, forearm 1:9,thumb 0°3, third finger 3°52, first phalanx of

third finger 0°45, fourth finger 2°6, fifth finger 2:1, tibia 0°75, foot and

claws 0°4, caleaneum 0°55; expanse 13°5.

The fur is rich alec brown above, and pale brown on the lower

surface; the basal part of the fur being everywhere blackish brown.

This example was secured in a curious way. I shot a crow (Corvus

splendens) one evening in my garden, and as it fell a bat dropped from its

claws, which proved to be M. schrevbersit. The bat had evidently just

been captured and killed by the crow, probably out of sheer mischief.

Mr. Hodgson says that this species remains in Nepal throughout

the year and does not hibernate, and that it is solitary in habit when

hunting for its prey. Captain Hutton mentions that in Masuri it is

found in caves and caverns, and even in crevices of rocks, and is occa-

sionally attracted to the lamps ina room. This no doubt means that

the light of lamps attracts insects, and in pursuit of these the bat en-

ters rooms. |

It will be seen that, in the foregoing list, 19 species of bats are ad-

mitted as occurring in Nepal. One of these (Rhinolophus affinis) is ins

cluded with doubt, the specimen of that species presented by Mr.

Hodgson to the British Museum having possibly been obtained in Dar-

jiling, and not in Nepal. Of the total 19 species, 3, namely, Pteropus

medius, Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, and Cynopterus marginatus, are

certainly not part of the fauna of the Nepal Valley. They have been

found there as mere stragglers from a neighbouring tract of the country

which differs essentially, in point of elevation and of fauna and flora, from

258 J. Scully-—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

our valley. These three bats extend all along the Himalayas, in the low

and hot portions adjoining the plains; and they only penetrate into the

hills for considerable distances, in suitable localities, up low-lying river

valleys.

Of the 15. or 16 species of Chiroptera properly belonging to the

Nepal Valley, only one (Vespertilio nipalensis) is, so far as known, pecu-

liar to this small part of the Himalayas. Another species (Rhinolophus

macrotis) is only known to occur in Nepal and at Masuri further west

in the Himalayas. All the rest have a more or less wide range in the

Himalayas, both east and west of Nepal.

A few words remain to be said about certain species which have

been hitherto wrongly attributed to Nepal by various authors. The

number amounts to six or seven, and these I will now briefly notice.

1. As already shown, Cynopterus marginatus has been included in

the Nepal list by many writers owing to a misidentification of Pteropus

pyrivorus, Hodgs.

2. Megaderma lyra is said to be represented by specimens in the

British Museum from Nepal, in Dr. Dobson’s ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera’

(p. 157). This is erroneous, as the specimens referred to were pre-

sented by Mr. Hodgson, and he first obtained the species in the Siligori

Bungalow, Sikkim Tarai, in 1847, long after he had permanently left

Nepal.

3. Synotus darjilingensis is given by Dr. Horsfield (P. Z.S. 1856,

p. 395) as from Nepal, under the names of Barbastellus communis and

Plecotus darjilingensis, Hodgs. This is clearly wrong, as the title given

by Hodgson sufficiently shows.

4. Plecotus auritus is indicated by Dr. Dobson (Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p.179) as from Nepal, on the evidence of the type specimen of

Plecotus homochrous, Hodgson. That type, however, was obtained by

Hodgson in Darjiling (Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863, p. 2), and he

never got the species in Nepal.

5. Dr. Horsfield states (P. Z. 8. 1856, p. 394) that Murina suillus

(= Harpyiocephalus harpia) was obtained by Hodgson in Nepal. This

is not so: the species was called Noctulinia lasyura by Hodgson,

and was obtained by him in Darjiling (Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863,

2).

d # Vespertilio mystacinus has been stated by more than one writer

to have been procured by Hodgsonin Nepal. This is a mistake: he

first obtained the species in the Siligori Tarai, and named it V. siligo-

rensis. Vespertilio darjilingensis is also attributed by Horsfield (loc.

cit.) to Nepal; it is probably the same as V. mystacinus, and if

Hodgson got it in Nepal he must have named it on the model of lucus

a non lucendo.

R. B. FOOTE, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt. II.

PLATE XI.

Ne vali % (ae

) heyrala YN ar AS

\ s ,

; inet m

aN “olay mp be giv Siggazen

} cf

ae '

\ okheal

Woe

Anjanvel

GohagarhY

Ty oat, subline

pweee eee

PNawndg

Jaigarh es 7 ~

190" >»

" : x

eS S Horte d

Rutnagher i "y yh 7 + x ne << «lit

ne subrikonda Ws

i Beret a &, 2

a / Th

Rajapur Wy \oDavankony la Vas

. J ‘ <a Y

Visiadrug G2 Sheen spney! 2 eS

Anarias of arses 2 We Miksa } ads ~ :

Bank Deano i Nisee B gaa wud 8 Wadyeihh \gvonpars é “Machurlea |

5 Teas Ss

Rafribiig?

Kalladgie’ 4

Gokak:

Malwan

Farle °

~~ {Masulipatan yg

Rum wet

mopapal

sjpEne

Mud gal aia

rn & 9 Ae \

Vingorla Adank 4

Darsi_ +S ly,

K'| j

Se x

Panj hy vs Sas Soa Naas Nanda

Marmagom B o& aig

Pande

nis thy RC

Padile

‘0

Koliger eX:

Lia ie Vil fs

ied

% oud 3 ‘5

eee

Sean K a ota te

\ ee } nicole

a ) argu

atthe Bi

eS are 4 l

€.

Koilfaurtlar

C.Ramas & Kalgh

Kaw ali

sie °

Nello?

Vinkataphelam|

Hollol 3 ae

Pym xy

Kanitiyhya

Dav fants

< Dodert

Dhak har %

/ Weta

\\ ; i E \ Kad:

\ Chit: ildpoog Coes ; ‘ Kadri wien

New Vidinal \ Feats eas? chai be

ys aN CON fete Ars hl Sak

CoORS, : § 5 \ er

nik

f eT 2 {

Cudiban da

_ sdlonyial

wun. vamlxonda

| Zeige g

| Koptttlipog 2 = Ne

| S Wade Ys intake Mdhanagel

| fee lapse "re

° OWN !

a 1

—2

K toNeg abe 2

1°

V ee hres me

mn Sa

VaTne

a OWEN, Matin a Sober ee

a tf luge

aa i oe oa KQasiicaanpye nde

\ Mulivurdiur

DP) jandutas, £)Singarikunda

Res

SFE amapamam

of SP Devi

Nizampugern

%, AS S

(0)

Irpmagham

‘oromandel

talikeat

12)

aah LAOoy a

vale ham Koogexc os Cheer 4

Pp Elifodlpeni Danke alica SY = a Faun f p | S

2 be Tatrupu SP ee \tranquebar a

Be i et ee

| F © Fee (races Nequpatam 4K

SOUTH INDIA = DM oe

i = a) 1 oy Rial = foe © Madarnium

: a se =, Bul Padukoire ») aN S

shewing the en § DiRtiaitubny A PRO) Palin

wk f Tripaturs \ a 4 one. 1 +t

oleae dan. 2

OHIEF LOCALITIES AT WHICH NEOLITHIC AND PALCOLITHIC Besser * — at

‘usual Vin de 2

gm °Shevagamy 4 » PB! Pedro

REMAINS HAVE BEEN FOUND Otay Gnmnaear

Vi, Upung oS

Middleburg

Deltt I

RO 9 Ko

4 Wipe }

Pa),

Scale 1 Inch = 64 Miles, or = 554+,5a0, |

0 0 a9 60 80 190 SS a0 200 Miles Ramesveram

ws Neolithic Settlements.

4 Other Neolithic finds.

4 Paleolithic finds,

| Madaw

Kavative!)\ ) ta pdndide

CLIT

Mocletivoes

“ly

L. epambul

‘eleyur S

Ly HFroneh Rocks \ == .

AREA hevari i

8 Nulkead

MYSORE -8 vr ty

9 = oCallega: pa

i i Tauangud, oManduy: se

« ~

erdacyilui =

ot ;

Deen

Printed from a transfer to stone.in the Lithographic Office, Survey of India Department, Calcutta, October 1887.

a Wa

a ae

7in, ¢

4 4

“

he ty

var 2

_ . '

Patel ty, é

ui Cig, bet 3 pts ‘

a. ‘ rene we Vg a

— x Ny . i :

Rae ue ney Sy een et arena ners niet Sy SeNMASS RB eK KIA AT pH ety

- 4 = Q Stle Aap.)

* " spy oe oe eh p

ot * or nutty } ve ~ ee

Ay had

at Posat~ ps.

2 lope ‘

\ b eS ;

= , ie ta)

re A: A J

Pan's AG,

‘As

Rte Ne

erent J ;

oe, RL RG Pe Bee ome RAT (Cap fais 41 tad ka gate oe

,? ; fis Tas Me ... Puy sa T as Pou by R j - oe

ad <5 & ° ri i

a Se fT ae | | |

* 7 ¥ ey | wiitteays é 1 ;

+f Se Meet ean a re Ve

he “hs

4 wie \ 4 ; ~

wr : piteervine he: pers ; aia =~ Pp. : , ; ving

‘ A q \ J

‘

1 887. ] R. B. Foote—On the Stone Age in South India. 259

7. Lastly, Nycticejus nivicolus Hodgs. is said by Dr. Horsfield

(loc. cit. p. 395) to be from Nepal. I am not certain as to what this

species really is ; itis possibly Harpytocephalus harpia, before mentioned,

but, whatever it may be, Hodgson did not get it in Nepal. The correct

locality for the type is, “‘ Sikkim Himalaya, northern region, near snow”

(Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863, p. 3).

Considering that the list of Nepal bats is a short one, the number

of errors that have collected about it is more than usually large.

' X VIII.—Notes on some recent Neolithic and Paleolithic Finds in South

India.—By R. Bruce Foorn, F. G. 8., Superintendent of the Geo-

logical Survey of India, Fellow of the University of Madras.—Com-

municated by THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN Museum.

[Received and Read August 3rd, 1887. |

(With a Map—PI. XI.)

ConTENTS.,

§ 1. Introduction.

. Earliest recorded finds in South India.

§ 3. Mr. Fraser’s discoveries at Bellary. Letter to the Geological Magazine,

1873. My finds in Bellary District and the South Mahratta Country,

exhibited at the Vienna International Exhibition and presented to the

Geological Survey Museum, 1873.

§ 4. Mr. Valentine Ball’s paper “‘ On the Forms and Geographical Distribution

of Ancient Stone Implements in India,” 1878.

§ 5. Finds in Salem, Tinnevelly, Madura, Trichinopoly, Nellore, and Kistna

Districts, and the Nizam’s Territory. Absence of littoral Kitchen-

middens of the Danish type.

§ 6. Collection of Celts from North Arcot District described by Mr. John

Cockburn.

§ 7. Cache of Neolithic Implements and Pottery at Patpad, Banaganapalle

State, Karnul District. Finds in the Yerra Zari Gabbi, in Billa

Surgam, and other Caves, 1883—85.

§ 8. The Neolithic Settlements of the Bellary-Anantapur Country, 1884—87.

| Slag and Cinder-mounds and Camps. Celt-factories. Selection of gra-

nite-gneiss hills for the great majority of the settlements. Varieties of

implements, &c. found. Varieties of stone selected for use. Pottery

and other implements. Connection of the Neolithic and Iron Ages.

§ 9. Paleolithic remains from the shingle-fans at base of the Copper mountain,

south of Bellary.

§ 1. So many communications have been made to this Society on

the subject of prehistoric stone implements of various ages, discovered.

in different parts of India and its dependencies, that I should hesitate

260 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

before making a further one, did I not believe that I have really fresh

matter of great interest to lay before you, having during the last few

years made various finds which determine the age of a hitherto uncer-

tain group of remains, and throw light on the connection of the Neolithie

and. Ivon periods. The mere discovery of important centres of manu-

facture of Neolithic or polished stone implements is by itself a point of

great interest, and I have the pleasure of informing you of the discovery

of several centres of the kind. j

Most archeologists regard it as a well-established fact that our

ancestors, to speak of mankind generally, passed through at least three,

and in some countries four, grades of progressive civilization indicated

by the character and material of their weapons and domestic imple-

ments.

In South India, up to the present day, three of these grades, or

periods, are known to have been passed through by the old inhabitants ;

the Rude Stone Period, the Polished Stone Period, and the Iron Period.

A Bronze or Copper Period has not, so far, been traced in the south, and

iron had been introduced among the people living in the Southern

Deccan, and was probably manufactured by them at the same time that

they were still using and making implements of polished stone.

I have used the terms Paleolithic and Neolithic not only because

they are extremely convenient, but because, so far as South India is con-

cerned, they are, so far as our present knowledge goes, very fit and suit-

able terms. Abundant geological evidence exists in the south that a

great period of time elapsed between the era of the old Stone-chippers

and that of the Stone-polishers.

Whether the latter were descendants of the former is at present

impossible to say, for no evidence has been yet found to prove or dis-

prove the idea.

§ 2. The former existence of the old Stone-chippers in South India

was unknown till 1863, when J had the good fortune to discover the first

chipped implement in a lateritic gravel at Palaveram a few miles south

of Madras. A few months later, Dr. King and I had the further good

fortune to come upon another lateritic gravel some forty miles north-west

of Madras, where implements, all made of quartzite, occurred in situ and

abundantly. A fine series of these, including many of the type speci-

mens figured in my papers in the Madras Literary Society’s Journal

and the volume of the Norwich Prehistoric Congress (1868), is now

in the Indian Museum.

At that time, no discovery of Neolithic or polished implements had

been published, nor, so far as I know, had any been made, and it fell to

me to make the first discovery of such during the course of the follow-

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 261

ing year, 1864, This find (a ring-stone) was noticed in my paper on the

Paleolithic implements published in the Madras Journal of Literature,

and is now in the Indian Museum. Not very long after, I found a good

celt near the Arconum junction of the Madras Railway, which was also

recorded in the same paper.

In 1865, it became known that celts of diverse shapes and sizes and

in large numbers were to be seen in little shrines, or stuck up on end

round the foot of sacred trees, close to many of the temples on the

Shevaroy hills in Salem District. Considerable numbers of these were

procured, and some found their way into the British Museum, but, so

far as I know, nothing was published about them. In the same year,

I found a small, but very well made, celt about eleven miles south of

Nellore.

A solitary celt was reported as found on a hill near Mercara in

Coorg, and the find, which was communicated to this Society in 1868 by

Mr. H. A. Mangles, has repeatedly been quoted by various writers, Mr.

W. T. Blanford, Mr. V. Ball, and Mr. John Cockburn amongst them, as

the first made in South India, my Arconum celt being ignored, though

published in 1865.

§ 3. The next Neolithic discovery in the south was made by the

late Mr. William Fraser, M. I. C. E., about 1872, when he was District

Engineer of Bellary. I first heard of his discovery from himself towards

the end of that year. He had found numerous celts and chisels in various

stages of manufacture and use, together with corn-crushers and mealing-

stones, and much broken antique pottery on two hills, the North Hill at

Bellary and the Peacock Hill five miles to the north-east. Mr. Fraser very

kindly took me to both hills, and afforded me the pleasure of finding

some specimens for myself, to which he added a few more from his own

small but choice collection.

On taking leave of him, I urged him strongly to communicate his

discovery to some scientific society, which he promised to do, but un-

fortunately never did. He died suddenly afew months later, and his

collection of celts was lost, probably thrown away in ignorance of its value.

It included some good celts and several remarkably good specimens of

the long narrow chisel type, a form which, so far as I know, has not

yet been found in other parts of India.

On my way from Bellary to Gadak, I passed a notable conical

mound of slaggy cinders which stands in the middle of a small pass,

the Budi Kanama, across a line of hills about sixteen miles west of Bel-

Jary, and has been described several times by various writers many years

ago, among them by no less excellent an observer than the late Captain

Newbold. It has been held to be of volcanic origin, and the natives

262 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

regard it as the funereal mound of some great Rakshas or demon. I

had only a few minutes to devote to looking over it, as I was on the

march and much pressed for time. Brief as my search was, I foand one

celt and some mealing-stones and corn-crushers in the little rain-gullies

cut in the sides of the mound, and on several lumps of slag found the

impressions of stalks of coarse straw; this sufficed to disprove the

volcanic cone theory, so I went on. At Hampasagra, sixty miles west of

Bellary, I found a good celt lying on the top of the bank of the

Tungabhadra. In the South Mahratta country, [ had made a few good

finds in the two previous years, the best being some seven or eight good

celts of medium size on the top of a small hill fifteen miles south-west of

Kaladgi. I did not publish any separate notice of these finds beyond a

brief reference to them in a letter to the Geological Magazine, in which

Talso drew attention to Mr. Fraser’s discovery. This letter appeared

in April 1873. Some of these (with my Bellary specimens and a

very fine collection of Paleolithic implements that I discovered in

fluviatile gravels in the banks and beds of the Malprabha river and its

main southern affluent, the Benihalla), I exhibited at the Vienna

International Exhibition in 1573. My collection was much admired by

the Austrian archeologists, and I was strongly pressed to sell it, but de-

clined, and afterwards presented it to the Geological Survey Museum, to

which it was sent from Vienna. In 1882, it was made over to the

Archeological section of the Indian Museum, together with all the

other collections of Paleolithic and Neolithic implements.

§ 4. Among the number of those who saw and examined my speci-

mens in the Vienna Hxhibition was Mr. Valentine Ball, then of the

Geological Survey of India, a gentleman who had made various com-

munications to this Society on the subject of stone implements in India.

In 1878, Mr. Ball read a paper before the Royal Irish Academy, with

elaborate tables showing the distribution, in India, Burmah, and parts of

the Indian Archipelago, of stone implements of all kinds. Mr. Ball

forgot my Bellary specimens, overlooked my letter to the Geological

Magazine, and ignored the various references to Neolithic finds made in

my various papers on Stone Implements in South India. The Shevaroy

hill celts he had not heard of, and he assumed Mr. Mangles’ Coorg celt to

be the only Neolithic implement ever found in South India. On this

very slender foundation, Mr. Ball built up a decidedly bold, if not

hazardous, theory that the occurrence of polished celts only in the

north-eastern quarter of India and in Burmah, of only chipped imple-

ments in the southern half of India, and of only cores and flakes in the

north-western quarter of the country, was due to the different im-

plements having been made by different races of men occupying these

1887. | Paleolithic Finds in South India. 263

three distinct provinces, which met and slightly overlapped each other

in Central India. Here and there, it was true, a few implements

characteristic of one province occurred well within the limits of another,

but such an occurrence was to be treated as what is geologically termed

an ‘outlier’, and held not to affect the general validity of the theory.

Mr. Ball rejected the terms Neolithic and Paleolithic for India as con-

veying erroneous ideas of progression. He says in the paper referred

to, ‘‘ The different forms of implements seem to be rather indices of

race than time.” The early inhabitants of South India, according to this

theory, attained only to a much lower platform of civilization than did

those of North-eastern India.* While passing his paper through the

press, Mr. Ball became acquainted with the collection of Shevaroy hills

celts in the British Museum, which seems to have staggered him some-

what, but he still stuck to his theory and merely added a note in the

press to this effect : “‘ If the locality ”’ (the Shevaroy hills) “is authentic,

we have another instance of an outlier. Such exceptions to the main

features of distribution will possibly be from time to time discovered,

but they must become very numerous before they can be considered to

outweigh the facts upon which the general conclusions in this paper

have been founded.”

Mr. Ball’s paper remained unknown to me for more than six years

after its publication, else I should have written at once to show how

ill-founded it was, in ‘view even of the knowledge of Neolithic remains

then existing. When I did become acquainted with it, rather more

than three years ago, I was making almost daily fresh discoveries of

Neolithic remains in the South, and had not time to write a paper in

reply, but mentioned it in a letter to Dr. John Evans, F. R. S., the

greatest living authority on stone implements, and he communicated

this letter and some others about my new finds to the Anthropological

Society, in whose Journal for August 1886 an abstract of them was

published.

§ 5. The Shevaroy Hill celts constituted the earliest Neolithic

find made south of the latitude of Madras, and twelve years elapsed

before any further discoveries were made in that direction. In 1878, I

found the cutting half of a small celt at Uta Kovil four miles north-east

from Arrizur in Trichinopoly District. Tanjore District yielded no

Neolithic implements, and Madura District was also very unprolific, the

only specimens found being two chert cores and a chert flake with a

serrated edge formed by 7 consecutive small notches in close apposition.

These were found on the surface of gravels of very recent formation.

* The question of the distinctness of the two stone ages will be referred to

again later.

264 R. B. Foote—Note on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

Of uncertain age, but probably Neolithic, is a carved bone pendant

that I obtained in 1883 out of the mud of a very interesting submerged

forest at the west end of Valimukkam Bay on the south coast of the

Ramnad zamindari. This is the only piece of worked bone that I know of

as having been found in South India, excepting some cut bones discovered:

in the ossiferous caves of Billa Surgam in Karnul District. The

pendant was in all probability used as an ear ornament. It is pierced at

the thinner end by a small well-drilled hole, and shows four incised lines

going clean round it, one a little below the perforation, the other

about +” above the round, thicker (lower) end. It was probably well-

polished, and, though weathered, is still smooth enough to be rather

glossy. J had hoped to find much of value in the Valimukkam sub-

merged forest, my first visit of afew minutes duration having given

me the bone pendant, but, on re-visiting it last year, I found that the ac-

tion of a small river which opens into the bay close by, combined with a

heavy surf, had covered over the greater part of the old forest area with

a broad sandbank, while the surf had removed a large number of the old

tree stumps which had been visible at low tide at the time of my first

visit. I had a long tramp about over the peaty mud flat still remaining,’

but found nothing more than a piece of old pottery too much rolled to

show its real character.

At my first visit to Cape Comorin in 1869, I was struck by the large

consumption of shellfish made by the fisher-folk living in the coast

villages, speculating that their ancestors might have had similar tastes,

and I hoped that an examination of the coast would show the existence of

middens, such as proved so wonderfully rich in prehistoric remains on

the coasts of Jutland and Schleswig. In 1881, 1882, and 1883, I carried

out the geological survey of South Travancore, Tinnevelly, and Madura,

but unfortunately found no true kitchenmiddens, and fear that none will

be found there, for my work, though not absolutely exhaustive, was very

close in many places where such remains might have been expected.

The remains of shellfish, chiefly of a large species of Mytilus, lie about

in great quantities in many places near the coast and, here and there,

at places far inland, but they do not occur in sufficiently great accum-

ulations to deserve the name of middens, or to hide any prehistoric

remains.

The Neolithic remains I obtained in Tinnevelly (in 1883) were cores

and flakes of a chert foreign to that part of the country. They were found

at the south end of the red sandhills forming the “teri”? west of Sawyer-

puram, a well-known station of the Gospel Propagation Society’s Mission,

eleven miles south-west of Tutikorin. The south end of the teri had been

largely denuded by wind action, which had removed the fixed red sand

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 265

toa depth of 15 or 16 feet, and exposed a dark red surface of hard

sandy loam over an area of several acres. On this surface, I noticed

some flakes of a brown chert I had seen nowhere in the South, and

these flakes led me to search closer, and I soon found several well-made

cores of the Jabalpur type. With the chert flakes were a few of limpid

quartz, also a foreign stone in that immediate neighbourhood. A

number of fragments, mostly small, of antique red pottery accompanied

the chert implements and showed strong signs of having had their edges

much worn by the action of “sand blast” at some previous time when

the teri* was in a moving condition.

The northern part of the Carnatic had previously yielded me a few

Neolithic implements, a small but perfect celt eleven miles south of

Nellore (1865) and half of a large ring-stone the drilling of which had

never been quite completed. This ring-stone, or perforated hammer,

was found in 1875 at Vemavaram ten miles north-east of Ongoze and

close to the northern boundary of Nellore district.

Some four miles to the east of the famous Amravati tope, I found

(close to the village of Vayikunthipuram, on the south bank of the

Kistna) what appears to be the body of a good-sized celt minus the

cutting edge. This was made of a buff and purple mottled sandstone of

upper Gondwana age. The only other implement made of this material

was a cylindrical fragment (wanting both ends) of doubtful use,

unless it may be regarded as part of a prehistoric “rolling pin.” This

I got on the site of a Neolithic settlement at Jerlacherru, nine miles

W. of Kammamet in the Nizam’s territory. The settlement had existed

between two granite-gneiss hills, and the fields all round were covered

thickly with fragments of high class antique pottery. I could only

mourn the hard fate which denied me time to examine this very pro-

mising locality.

Another Neolithic site, on the left bank of the Umni-ern, 3 or 4

miles south of Kammamet, that I could only pass by on the march

looked also very promising.

I must not forget to mention that I picked up the pointed end of

a celt just south of the village of Matur, 27 miles south-east of

Kammamet.

Proceeding westward, I came across a small hill of granite-gneiss

south of Poolloygooda (21 miles east by south of Bonagiri), where

were a considerable number of highly polished deep grooves worn into

the hardrock. From their shape and size, I inferred they must have been

* Teri is the name given by the Tamil people exclusively to the great drifts of

red sand which form so remarkable a feature along the eastern side of Tiinnevelly

District.

266 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

made in grinding the cutting edges of celts, and my inference has since

been confirmed by finding similar polished grooves on granitoid hills in

the Bellary country which were great centres of the celt manufacture.

The grooves were about 10 to 14 inches long, about 13 wide in the mid-

dle, and tapered off to a sharp point at either end. The greatest depth

of the groove was at the centre and varied from 1} to nearly 2 inches.

The polish was best preserved in the grooves that had been filled up

with soil washed in by rain.

A few miles west of this place, I came on a large dyke of very fine

grained greenstone, the surface of the western end of which, near the

village of Arur, had been considerably broken up and yet showed no

signs of ordinary quarry work ; a large quantity of débris of an uncommon

character lay about, which struck me as having possibly been produced

in the manufacture of stone implements; some of the fragments being

very shapely flakes. A few minutes’ search gave me a well-shaped celt

in the first or rough stage. Further search would I feel sure have pro-

duced more evidence as to this having been a celt factory, but I had

not the time to spare for it.

§. 7. In October 1883, I had the pleasure of making a very inter-

esting find at Patpad, a small village 4 miles west of Banaganpalli, in

Karnul District. The spot on which the find was made isa piece of

slightly irregular ground, triangular in shape, and enclosed between the

high road, the end of a small limestone ridge, and a small stream which

runs south-east into the Suru river, a confluent of the Penernu, or Northern

Pinakini. Near the centre of the ground, I noticed a few fragments of

bright red antique pottery sticking in the sides of a tiny rain-gully.

Being greatly taken up with excavations in a large cave some distance

off, I thought no more about them; but, a few days later, having found

some interesting prehistoric pottery at some depth in excavating in one

of the passages of my cave, and taken a great deal of trouble in getting

all the pieces and sticking them together, my head servant, a bright and

observant little Madrassee, excavated some of the broken pottery I had

seen in the rain-gully just referred to and pieced it together into a very

shapely bowl. After that, he dug over several square yards of the ad-

jacent ground, under my superintendence, and we unearthed a consi-

derable number of articles of pottery of various shapes and sizes, but all

broken more or less. They were buried only 5 or 6 inches below the

surface, and the place where they lay was justin the regular track of the

village cattle to their drinking place and thus crossed every day

several times by large herds. The wonder was everything had not been

reduced to powder.

The different vessels found are mostly of admirable shape, several

1887. ] Paleolithic Finds in South India, 267

of them really elegant. They are of the typical glazed red and black

earthen-ware so characteristic of the prehistoric graves of Coimbatoor

and the Nilgiris. Two forms are, so far as I know, peculiar to that find,

the one is like a flower-pot with an extremely small base, the other is coni-

cal with slightly excavated sides and no base, so that it must have been

perched on a ring-stand when in use, and not held in the hand. Several

such rings fitted for larger vessels were found there. In the soil which had

filled some of the vessels, I found several good agate and chert cores,

and afew iron implements of (with one exception) small size; long

arrow-heads with strong barbs, one of which is now in the Indian

Museum collection, and other forms. With these were several green-

stone corn-crushers, a large stone pestle with polished sides, and a highly

polished slyking-stone, or slickstone, made of a hornblendic rock. There

were also a small number of point bones too much broken to identify.

In addition, I found a small white bead made out of some shell, a human

premolar, a shell-scraper made by grinding away the lower half of

one valve of a unio shell, and, lastly, a pottery spindle-whorl. The sur-

face of the ground afew yards to the east, which was freely scattered

over with broken antique pottery, yielded a good number of agate and

chert cores and flakes, all of the Jabalpur type, also a variety of larger

flakes, and several small but well worked scrapers. One of these latter

is an exact match to an old flint scraper from Yorkshire which I

have in my collection. A large quantity of mostly bright-coloured

pieces of chert, agate, jasper, quartzite, and lydian stone was also collected

on the same bit of ground; having doubtless been brought there to be

used in making flakes; all these stones are foreign to that immediate

neighbourhood, and the agates and lydian stones must have come from a

distance of 40 miles at the very least. Some of the pottery found in the

Yerizari-gabbi (cave) is ornamented in precisely the same way as the

large fragment of a pot (found lately at Quetta together with a very fine

ringstone and a jasper corn-crusher) which Mr. Wood-Mason is exhibit-

ing to-night.* No celts were found at Patpad, but I got a broken cylin-

drical hammer on the path leading to the Yerrazari-gabbi, and, as I

shall show presently, cores and flakes and the prehistoric red and black

glazed pottery occur largely, together with celts and a variety of other

typical Neolithic implements, in various places to the west of Patpad ;

such being the case, I do not hesitate in regarding the Patpad find as

late Neolithic overlapping into the Iron Age. The whole find was pre-

* Pottery with the same peculiar ornament has also been found on the North

Hill Bellary and at Palavaram close to Madras.—Identically the same ornament

appears also on pottery figured by Sir William Dawson from the old Red Indian

city of Hochelagas in Canada.

268 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

sumably a cache rather than a burying place. A very fine chert flake,

with an excellent core of the same material, was found at Paspalla, a

village some 9 miles west of Patpad.

§ 8. I come now to the most interesting and important part of my

subject, the occurrence of numerous Neolithic settlements in the Bellary-

Anantapur country, to which I proceeded at the end of 1884 to take up

the geological survey of that region. Hver since my expeditions with

Mr. Fraser to the North Hill and the Peacock Hill, I had been longing to

revisit that quarter, and my desire had been much increased by my great

find at Patpad.

I was most anxious also to settle if possible the real nature of the

great cinder-mound at Budikanava which I have already referred to

above.

I revisited the North-hill at Bellary with much success and initiat-

ed a friend, Mr. Justin Boys, the Agent of the Madras Branch Bank at

Bellary, into the delights of celt-hunting, which he has since followed

up with a very satisfactory result, namely, the discovery that the north

and east sides of the Bellary Fort Hill were also at one time inhabited

by the Stone-folk.

At the first possible opportunity, I revisited the Peacock Hill, or

Kapgallu as it is called by the country people. Mr. Fraser had taken

me up and about the southern side of Kapgal, and we had secured but a

small quantity of implements, mostly celts and chisels, but noticed no

special signs of manufacture. On my second visit, I explored the

whole hill, and, on the northern side, near the summit, found abundant

traces of the manufacture of implements and of the residence of the

manufacturers. Kapgal had evidently been a settlement of the Stone-

folk for a considerable period and an important centre of celt manufac-

ture. The traces of residence were very numerous in the shape of

small terraces revetted with rough stone walls, great accumulations of

made ground full of ashesand broken pottery and containing many im-

plements of all sorts, a large proportion of them damaged, many so

much so that they had evidently been rejected as useless. Bones of

bullocks, chiefly broken, occur pretty numerously and especially in the

ashy parts of the made ground. Other traces of residence were small

tanks made by damming up the little stream which drained the northern

side of the ridge. Large blocks of the local granite-gneiss had been

hollowed for some purpose or other and so well worn by use, or purpose-

ly fine-tooled, that their inner surface was all but polished. A number

of these had evidently stood close to the structures that I assume to

have been tanks. Some still remain there as if ready for use, but many

have been broken, and their fragments lie close by. These block

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. | 269

troughs were not deep enough to hold any quantity of water, but may

very likely have been used for mixing some kind of dough, for which

they were very well adapted. A few blocks showed very shallow hol-

lows, and such hollows are very common on rock surfaces, both in the

open and under rock-shelters. Some of these I believe to have been

mealing-troughs in which the grain the people used was finely mealed

with mealing-stones after having been roughly bruised with smaller and

lighter corn-crushers. Both of these kinds of implements are met with in

great numbers here and in almost every one of the many settlements of

the folk that I examined in the Bellary-Anantapur country, and are

especially numerous where great accumulations of ashes and other

kitchen stuff are met with.

The signs of manufacture of implements I found on Kapgal con-

sisted of large numbers of unfinished celts in all possible states of com-

pletion and great quantities of flakes struck off from the selected frag-

ments of rock in the process of fabrication. In the case of Kapgal

settlement, the stone to be worked was procurable on the hill. Itisa

fine grained pale greenstone (diorite ?), which occurs here and there in

irregular bands of some thickness within the mass of a huge dyke of

coarse black diorite that runs along the northern slope of the hill

parallel with its axis. In other settlements, the celts were found to be

made from pieces of greenstone of convenient shape collected from dykes

which in many cases occurred only at considerable distances ; and, in

these cases, the makers often worked up pieces whose exterior was

greatly pitted by weather action and did not take the trouble to remove

the weathered part except where the cutting edge was made. In some

few instances, pebbles were selected and so chipped as to utilize one or

other of them naturally. At Kapgal, this was not the case, and conse-

quently the celts there found have a much more recent look than those

from many of the other settlements.

There is a great variety also in size and shape among the celts and

chisels, especially the former. This was doubtless intentional to suit

special purposes, but to some extent the makers evidently accommodated

themselves to the shape of the rough stone selected for treatment. This

cannot fail to strike the eye when a large series of the implements is

examined. Great differences in skill, in taste, and in patience must

have existed among the workers; the beauty of shape and finish of the

implements varying so very greatly. Some are really elegant in shape

and others downright clumsy. The stages of manufacture through

which the more or less carefully chosen rough stones passed were cer-

tainly four in number, — chipping and picking, grinding and polishing.

The first stage, the chipping, was in all probability done by means of

270 R. B. Foote—WNotes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

stone strikers, hammers, in fact, without handles, of which large num-

bers of all sizes and weights occur in all the settlements in which the

manufacture was carried on. Inthe second stage, the surface of the

chipped implement was picked or “ pecked ” over with a sharp-pointed

striker (by which all the little ridges between the numerous chipped out

surfaces were broken down and the surface rendered approximately

even), and great labour saved to the grinder, who put the implement

through the third stage of progress, and gave it a good sharp and even

cutting edge. The fourth and final stage consisted in polishing the

implement all over.

The grinding and polishing was done by rubbing the implements

backwards and forwards on the surface of the granite rocks, or of big

blocks, which became worn into the shallow elliptical troughs above

referred to, and of which several were met with on the Kapgal hill; on

some of the other settlements, these are very numerous and occur in groups

where the grinders had sat together sociably over their work. On the

Budihal Hill, in Anantapur District, 8 miles south-east of Bellary, are

several remarkable groups of these polishing places. They are placed

on high rock terraces, regular coigns of vantage commanding good

views over the country where the operators could work and watch with

great ease. On one rock terrace, twenty are to be seen in a space just

15 yards square. Other polishing troughs are found well under cover of

great rock shelters, or in small caves, where perfect shade was obtainable

during the heat of the day. .

The implements lay about exposed on the surface or partly im-

bedded in the made ground, and some were found at a depth of 2 or 3

or more feet, where rain-gullies had cut deeply into the made ground.

In every case in which I obtained numerous implements, the quantity

of broken pottery was also very great, and I hardly ever got the one

without the other; and now, whenever I come across fragments of

antique black and red pottery, I make a special search for implements,

and very rarely fail in finding something of interest.

The most numerous implements are strikers and corn-crushers, next

to them numerically come the mealing-stones, then celts and chisels, the

last being very rare. Less common than celts, but less rare than

chisels, are worked scrapers of the Esquimaux type! Cores and core-

flakes are also rare, but I imagine many more would be found, if regular

excavations of the made ground of the built, or natural, terraces were

carried out and the material all carefully sifted. This I had no oppor-

tunity of doing in any case, as my geological work did not admit of my

devoting sufficient time for close research. In many of the settlements,

numerous small stones differing in kind from the local rock were found,

1887. | Paleolithic Finds in South India. 271

such as agates, chert, jasper, lydian stone, and quartz of different kinds ;

these had doubtless been collected to be converted into flakes and

small scrapers, or, possibly, simply because of their bright and pleasing

colours. In three places, stone beads of good workmanship were found ;

of these two were of reddish carnelian, two of delicate green quartzite

of extremely fine texture, and one of shell. Lastly, I must not omit to

mention several pieces of tolerably soft deep red hematite which had

been rubbed down to smooth surfaces on one or more sides and in all

probability been so rubbed down to furnish a pigment for decorative

purposes, very likely as rouge for the cheeks of the Neolithic ladies.

The North Hill at Bellary yielded several of these, and I noticed other

pieces of hematite which had evidently been brought from a distance

for some similar purposes, but had never been used.

Of the dwellings of the Neolithic folk, no positive traces remain ;

from which it may reasonably be inferred that they were of rather

perishable character, like the thatched huts with mud walls of so large

a proportion of the lower classes among the present inhabitants of the

Southern Deccan. It is useless to speculate about what they may have

been like. Small roofless huts, with rough mud and stone walls, exist

in plenty at some of the many settlements, but in each case there were

manifest signs of comparatively recent occupation of the place, and in

no case did I find any implement or fragment of antique pottery inside

such huts, although I carefully searched many of them.

Mr. Fraser discovered two settlements of the Neolithic people, those

of the North Hill at Bellary and the south side of the Peacock Hill; and,

since December 1884, I have found over forty others, large and small. Of

these, I have prepared a list, which will be found further on. I have

indicated the principal ones on the map accompanying this paper, from

which will be seen how they cluster together chiefly in the neighbourhood

of Bellary. Of the forty odd I have enumerated, ten, judging them

by the number of implements they yielded, may be reckoned as first class,

eight, as second class, and the remainder, as third class.

The respective positions of these different settlements are of im-

portance and show that the old Stone-folk had a very decided preference

for occupying commanding positions which were defensible against

their enemies. These they seem to have found preferably on the granite-

gneiss hills so numerously met with in the Bellary-Anantapur country.

Not a single one of their settlements is found on the non-granitoid

hills in the immediate neighbourhood, though many of these are as lofty,

or much more so. I have given much careful consideration to this

important point, and think that four good and sound reasons appear to

have prevailed with the stone-folk when selecting the sites for their

272 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

settlements. Doubtless, other considerations may have influenced them,

but they are not so obvious. The four which seem to have mostly in-

fluenced them were:—l. The more perfect isolation of the granite-

gneiss hills, which mostly rise singly out of the plains, or, if in clusters,

are yet individually detached and therefore more suitable for defence

than posts on continuous ridges, such as are generally formed by the

schistose rocks. Some of the granite-gneiss hills are nearly perfectly

castellated by the disposition of the rock masses. 2. Rock shelters of

great efficiency and comfortable terraces are to be found in numbers

on many of the granitoid hills, but hardly ever on the schistose hills.

3. The collection of rain water and its storage would, from the nature

of the ground, be much easier on the average granitoid rock than on the

average schistose hill. 4. The schistose hills are, in very many cases,

generally, in fact, surrounded by a heavy and broad talus most detri-

mental to easy agricultural work. The granitoid hills, on the contrary,

- form, as a rule, no great talus, but rise up straight out of the great cot-

ton-soil plains, so that the Neolithic field labourers could have been

quite close to places of refuge in case of attack from other tribes, and

yet have been able to carry on their agricultural work.

I only know one bond fide settlement situated on the schistose

rocks, and this is in the open plain far away from any hill. This is near

Sanawaspuram 16 miles N. by EH. of Bellary.

Yet another reason in favour of the granitoid hills is that, from the

many bare sheets and scarps of rock which they show, they do not bear

continuous slopes of long grass capable of being burnt over, as are the

uninterrupted slopes of the schist hills. The absence of these great

grass spreads was a great element of safety for the thatched huts on

the hills.

I referred above to the remarkable mound of slaggy cinders occur-

ring on the Budi Kanama pass, 16 miles west of Bellary, which mound

had been described by various writers 40 or 50 years ago, one of them

supposing it to be a voleanic ash cone! Captain Newbold, the most

eminent amateur geologist and archeologist that South India has

known, was another of these writers, and he favoured one of the native

theories accounting for the origin of the mound, namely, that it was the

result of a great funeral pyre on which all the dead killed in some great

local battle had been cremated. Another native legend ascribes this

mound to the death of Hdimbassurah, a great Rakshas, or giant,

killed by Bhimasainah, one of the Panch Pandus. Captain Newbold

rather opposed. another hypothesis that the mound might be due to the

celebration of some great holocaust of animals offered on the occasion of

some great religious celebration, The proper way to test the real

1887. ] Pal@olithic Finds in South India. 273

origin of this much debated mound would of course be to cut a section

through it, a work which ought to be executed by the Archxological

Survey. The mound is certainly not the product of one huge burning,

the cinder occurring in distinct layers 2’—4’ thick with thin layers of

made ground between them. It was from these that the celts and

various mealing-stones and corn-crushers I found there were washed

down by action of rain. I noticed no other traces of residence, nor any

at all of a manufacture of celts. I cannot help inclining to the holocaust

theory, for, in other cases (notably at the important settlement on Kuri

Kuppi hill and at the quadrangular cinder camp west of Sanawaspura 61

miles N. by E. of Bellary), the number of mealing-stones and corn-

crushers was very large, many of them being imbedded in the cindery

mass. Bones of animals, too, mostly bovine, occur frequently. Frag-

ments of pottery too are very numerous. Many of the marrow bones

had been broken as if to extract the marrow. I did not notice a single

human bone in any one case, or any evidence pointing to a ceremonial

cremation.

The cinder mounds at Sanawaspur, and the larger of the two west

of Halakundi and near the foot of the Copper Mountain, form quadran-

eles about sixty yards square by external measurement, the sides

making a low breastwork much trodden down and cut by rain action.

I do not think they exceed 5 feet in height above the general level, for

T noticed no places that I could not overlook.

Except in the absence of the signs of manufacture of implements,

these two quadrangular camp-like piles of cinder showed much the

same style of things as occurred on many of the larger ash-covered

terraces in the typical hill settlements. Celts and chisels were proba-

bly less numerous in the camps than on the hill terraces, but mealing-

stones and corn-crushers are quite as common, and broken pottery is

not rare. At the Sanawaspuram camp, I obtained fragments of two

small bottle-shaped earthenware vessels.

At the North Hill, Bellary, and several other settlements, I found

numerous lumps of hematite which did not appear to have been collected

for conversion into any implement, for which purpose they were evidently

unfit either from their small size or softness, and with them, here and

there, were pieces of iron slag, which may not improbably be traces of the

local manufacture of iron. Similar indications of an iron-smelting in-

dustry were found in considerable quantity by my friend Mr. C. Cardew,

Superintendent, Locomotive Department, Bellary-Kistna State Railway,

in the great Neolithic settlement which formerly existed on the high

ground south-west of the Guntakal Railway junction. Strongly con-

firmative of the existence of the iron industry at Bellary is to my ap-

274 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

prehension the existence of a small brown earthenware tuyere which I

found on the east side the Fort Hill at Bellary among a large quantity

of broken pottery. This tuyere is now in my collection.

Of special interest are two implements found respectively by my

friends Messrs. Boys and Cardew, the first a ring-stone found on Bellary

Fort Hill, the second a wooden comb excavated from a thick bed of pure

white ash in the Guntakal settlement.

The ring-stone, of which Mr. Boys found one half, was a very large

one of rather oval shape externally, but the well-drilled central hole is

perfectly circular.

A very fine collection of celts in various stages of manufacture

and of other implements was made by another friend, Mr. Henry Gom-

pertz, Deputy Superintendent, Madras Revenue Survey, on the north

side of the Bellary Fort Hill, and on the Sangankal hills between the

Bellary hills and Kapgul Hill.

Up to the present, no celt has been found in South India which has

been drilled for the insertion of a handle, as were many European-made

axes and hammer-heads. A very fine celt (in my collection) which was

found on the Shevaroy hills shows, however, the commencement of a drill-

hole on each of the broad sides. These holes are exactly opposite each

other and an inch or more from the middle towards the cutting edge of

the implement. The Celt-folk were, however, well acquainted with the

art of drilling small objects in hard stone, as is shown by the well executed

perforations of the carnelian and quartzite beads already mentioned.

A specimen (also in my collection) from one of the Bellary settle-

ments shows the general outline of a typical celt, but the broad end has

been left quite thick instead of being ground to an edge, while the

pointed end has been ground to a narrow chisel edge transverse in

direction to that which should have been the broad cutting edge. There

are no signs of use on this specimen, which, so far as I know, is quite

unique ; and I am unable to imagine for what special purpose it may

have been prepared.

A few specimens of whetstones, or hones, have been found in the

Bellary settlements, which may perhaps have been used to give the last

final edge to specially choice celts. I have two such in my collection

which show strong marks of use. The marks are rather semicircular,

and just such as would be produced by whetting the rather rounded

edge of a celt. Mr. H. Gompertz found such a stone of rather flat

shape lying on a piece of rock under a good rock shelter on the north

side of Bellary Fort Hill. On the whetstone lay a small celt exactly

as if it had been put down suddenly and never taken up again by the

workman,

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 275

At Koganur, 7 miles E. S. EH. of Davangere in Mysore, I pick-

ed up from the surface a large lump of stone (quartzite, if I re-

collect right) one end of which had been deeply ground into with such

semicircular strokes. The stone had also been very well drilled right

through the centre with a narrow hole a little more than an inch in

diameter. No other traces of Neolithic remains accompanied this

hammer, which, if fixed to a strong handle, must have formed a most

formidable weapon, as the head weighs several pounds. By whomsoever

it may have been made, the artificer had a very good knowledge of the

manner in which to drill a very hard stone.

A remarkable fact with reference to the varieties of weapons and

tools made by the Neolithic people of South India is the absence hitherto

of any traces of their having manufactured stone arrow-heads, such as are

frequently found in other countries occupied by tribes who had attained

to a very similar grade of civilization. It is hard to imagine that the

Neolithic people of the Deccan were unacquainted with the use of the bow

prior to the first introduction of iron. That they used brass after be-

coming acquainted with iron is clearly proved by the discovery of un-

questionable iron arrow-heads in the Patpad cache and in many pre-

historic graves in the South. With an abundance of stone, such as

agate, chalcedony, lydian stone, jasper, and chert, fit for making arrow-

heads, it is certainly most remarkable that no true worked arrow-heads

have yet been found, and it is most desirable that all prehistoric explorers

in India should pay special attention to this point. I have found some

few flakes of chert and jasper that might have been used to tip an arrow,

but I have found and seen none that were obviously prepared for that

purpose.

I give here a list of the localities in the Bellary-Anantapur country

at which the Neolithic folk have left traces of their residence and modes

of life.

List of Settlements with their direct distances from Bellary Fort.

First Class. )

1. Kapgal, N. side of hill... 5 miles N. EB of Bellary.

2. Guntakal Junction ...... Se E. of de

ee emda” TAD igs cov anes cas ate EOF » do,

4, Iddapinkal Fort Hill ...... TD 5; saa, OF "do.

D. Wino Mam Hall. 18... S.E:. of .da

O. Lompadury Hill ..c.i.cccis 20m yo ue. Of doe

7. Daroji Hill ......cceeessseeeee 18° 5, N.W. byW.of do.

276

R. B. Foote— Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

EO.

12.

38.

39.

Kuri Kuppa Hill ......... 18 miles W. N. W. of Bellary.

Gadiganur Hill, foot of 213, W.N. of do.

Latwaram Hill,,........... 28 , SH.by H.of do.

Second Class.

Bellary North Hill ...... — ~- — _

Bellary Fort Hill.......... _ —

Saudamma Konda (hill) 33 ,, N.E.

Sanarasama Konda (hill) 32 ,, N. HE. of "do:

Ram Durg Fort and Hill 24 ,, E

Karamukalu Hill ......... 183 ,, 8

Third Class.

Kapgal S. E. side of hill 5 miles N. H. of Bellary.

Halakoté N. Fort Hill... 314 ,,° N. of ido!

Ditto South Hill ...... 1 Mle Aa of “dae

Manakurti Hill i... 80) IN. B.S None

Hospett Hill (Alur Taluq) 26 ,, N.E.5°N.of do.

Hatti Bellagul Hill ...... 24 ,, N. H. of ~ “do:

Nagaradoni fort Hill...... 29° ,, ‘Es N. E. oF sae

Chippagwi Bil otis ve 2755 ES by NS sok

Yerragudi Hallyn ik 42 5, E.by 5° S.0f —do:

Wajra Karur (low hill)

WV MOR ask eisieas tesieretes Ola by. 2, Oy eo” Okan

Hill east of great dyke

east of Urava Konda 32 ,, S.E.byH.of do.

Urava Konda (hill) ...... 265 ,, ‘8S. Eby Es oP aio:

Koté Koté West Hill’,,. 163° ,, Hy 8S. ED “of “aor

Beder Bellagal Hill ...... 6 , W.by 5°S.o0f Sag

Kolagal East Hill..,...... 33 ,, N.W. of do.

Ditto, West Fide ssccs (... 55...IN. We of do.

Hill N. of Badanhatti... 13. ,, N.N. W. of “de:

Higunda Bin. 24 4, 8.8, Boor

Rupangudi Fort Hill ... 13 ,, S.E. of do.

List of Cinder Mounds and Camps.

Budi Kanama or Budi-

punts, s,s re05 L3G miles W. 5°. of Bellary,

Hala Kandi Camp and 1

TUOMAS Ai stevens dovere . Or ysz/ >, > DY SOL mee

Sanawaspuram Camp... 20 ,, N.5°E. of do,

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 277

Smaller Cinder heaps.

40. Rocks S. of Kapgal...... 43 milesN.E. of Bellary.

4\.° Korikuppa Hill. iig. 12 5, OW NA ok ao

42. Kakballa hill fort of °

43. Ditto: — do, Snddle { 20. ip Nhs oe Ae

Captain Newbold mentions some cinder mounds on Kapgal Hill

which if still in existence escaped my attention. The great cinder

mound at Nimbapuram a little to the N. HE. of the ruins of Hampi

(Vijayanagar), I have not yet visited. Like the Budikanama mound, it

is regarded by the natives as the cremation heap of one of the great

Rakshasas. It is singular that Newbold, though so keen an observer in

many branches of science, should have so completely overlooked the

celts and many other Neolithic implements lying so freely scattered

about on Kapgal Hill and not unfrequently at Budikanama. It is more

than probable, from his descriptions of the geology of the Bellary

country, that he must have examined pretty closely many of the other hills

in that quarter where the Neolithic settlements now referred to occur.

Only one explanation seems possible to account for so able an archeologist

missing these finds, namely, that, his eye being untrained and his atten-

tion not being awake to this class of prehistoric facts, he passed them

by unheeded. It was not till many years after his time that the great

stir in the scientific world caused by the recognition (by Lyell, Prestwich,

Evans, Falconer, and the great leaders among French and German

geologists) of the true value of Boucher des Perthes Paleolithic finds

extended to India, and was followed by the discovery of the Paleolithic

quartzite implements of Palavaram and the Attrampakkam nullah,

which really started prehistoric research in this country.

The following list enumerates the varieties of implements made of

stone which have been found in the Bellary-Anantapur Neolithic settle-

ments.

1. Celts...... a body narrow and round—butt end pointed.

Bei do. do. and do. do. blunt.

E24. - do, do. and flat do. broad.

d. do. broad and round do. pointed.

és) Ao: do. and flat do. broad.

f. battle-axe type do. blunt.

g. cutting edge, an abrupt wedge.

h. do. a rounded wedge.

a whole body worked square.

2. Chisels... a. body long and narrow.

b. do. much wider than cutting edge.

do. increasing backward to a thick butt; edge

transverse to general plane of body.

278 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

3. Hammers a. round,

b. square.

4. Ring-stones. |

5. Pestles.

6. Corn-crushers, . globular, 13”—2%" diameter.

7. Bone-crushers, do. 35”—5” do.

8. Strikers, .. a thick type.

9. Mealing-stones, . bv. flat type.

10. Slyking-stones, . (slick-stones).

11. Sharpening-stones,... (hones).

12. Scrapers, . a. heavy.

b. light.

e. circular.

13. Worked flakes.

14. Unworked flakes, .,. triangular, “knife type,” &c., &c.

15. Cores, small, . Jabalpur type.

16. Flakes from small cores.

17. Beads.

18. Reddle-stones.

19. Stone vessels, ..» bowl-shaped.

20. Mealing places, deep, on rocks or detached blocks.

21. Polishing places, do. do.

22. Edging grooves, do. do.

The variety of stone selected for different purposes was consider-

uble as will be seen by the following lists.

Varieties of stone selected for use.

Granite

one ee eevesee see seeees

Granite QNEISS... 1. ween 99

Epidote granite... ......40

Gneiss (ZEON) .1+ seesee eve

Greenstone of Chaat

a is

VATED G cence ces. senses

Quartz very rarely used...

Siliceous breccia of

Dharwar age, vey ij

rarely USCC ....s.seeeee

for mealing-stones and corn-crushers.

mealing-stones, mealing-troughs, polish-

ing and edging places on the.rocks,

deep troughs for water.

these were evidently very

,, corn-crushers fayourite stones and

,, mealing-stones often fetched from long

distances.

corn-

crushers, strikers, hammers, pestles,

celts, scrapers, mealing-stones,

| flakes.

,», corn-crushers and scrapers.

mealing-stones.

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 279

celts of the flat type, very commonly —

Hornblende schist sf for | at Gadiganur, elsewhere very rarely.

very silky variety)... Bhatia!

tite ee Sag ae stones, mealing-stones, beads

(very rarely).

Heematite, jaspery,... ... », mealing-stones, corn-crushers.

JASPST, VOC. ..v.ciesrsvsveess 5, COVES (rare).

Heematite, earthy aoe »» pigment.

Agate... Gs cxsvesiesecny <p Cores and flakes,

Gustin. Sih ot ais ww 5, beads.

ey Lower , cores, flakes, flake knives, scrapers, strikers.

Vindhyan age... ...

Lydian stone. .» 4, flakes and scrapers.

The bulk of the neolithic pottery is of very high class for Indian

pottery, for, though it will not at all compare with Htruscan and Greek

pottery, yet many specimens have been met with showing great elegance

of form with very superior quality of the clay worked. As it is impos-

sible to enlarge intelligibly on such subjects, unless they could be illus-

trated by well-executed illustrations, I will make my remarks on this

subject very brief, reserving a full account of my pottery finds till

some future time when I shall have had them built up into shape and

figured. The quantity of broken pottery found lying about in the old

settlements is very great, and affords in many cases abundant proof either

that the population was very large, or else that the period of residence

represented was of great duration. I thinkall the pottery collected or

examined by me at the different settlements was wheel-made. In point

of size and shape, the articles found can only be described as legion.

The patterns of ornament employed were also extremely numerous. I

have lately begun to collect fragments of sufficiently large size to show

the special patterns ornamenting them, and I can only express my sur-

prise at the great variety of patterns the old potters had invented. It

is the exception rather than the rule to find the same pattern used twice

over. Many of the patterns are so pretty as to cause very great regret

that they are known from fragments only.

None of the vast number of specimens I have examined belonged

to angular mouthed vessels ; all without exception were round, but, with

that limitation, they represented all possible varieties of shape, from

extremely shallow plates up to rather elongated oval vessels of great

size and thickness of walls, and to narrow-necked bottles.

I noticed no vessel with handles either external or internal,* but

* The internal handles for suspending vessels over a fire without risk of the

flames touching the suspending ropes, such as were used by the North American

280 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

a tolerable number were found which were furnished with legs, probably

three or four in number. In many settlements, I found fragments of

flat saucer-like vessels perforated with many holes placed close together.

These had evidently constituted strainers of some kind.

I found several small, rather rudely circular, flat discs of pottery

about 2 inches in diameter, the edges of which had been coarsely ground.

These were very probably lids to lay upon the mouths of vessels re-

quiring to be closed; such discoid lids are used occasionally now-a-days

for the same purpose.

The pots ornamented with a raised fillet marked with impressions

greatly resembling those to be made by a human finger* found in the

Yerra Zari Gaffi (Cave) struck the diggers whom I employed as very

strikingly different from the pottery made locally at the present time,

and they remarked upon this very intelligently. Indeed, the new and

strange patterns of the old pottery called forth many more remarks

than any of the other finds we made in that quarter.

In no case did I find any sign of the localities where the potters

had followed their trade. These were probably well removed from the

settlements (whether the latter stood on the hills or in the plains), near

to the rivers, where suitable clays would be likely to be found.

§. 9. While camped at Halakundi 5 miles south of Bellary along

the Bangalore road in December 1884, I obtained some 20 or 30 chipped

Paleolithic implements made of jaspery hematite schist; they are all

of rather small size but of the typical shapes, oval, pointed oval with two

or three of the square-edged hatchet-shape so specially characteristic of

the south of India. They were collected from the surface of a ploughed

field which lies on a great fan or cone of dejection of detritus (chiefly hema-

tite and hornblendic schists) formed by one of the numerous torrents

coming down from the north-eastern flank of the Sugadevi belta or

Copper mountain, the highest part of the band of Dharwar rocks lying

south of Bellary. Jam unable to offer any- further evidence as to their

origin at present, but they are in type utterly different from the rudest

of the Neolithic implements, and they do not occur intermixed in any

place that came under my notice. ;

Similar implements occur at distant intervals in the talus fans

along the Copper mountain ridge westward. Two good specimens were

Indians, have not yet been found by me, but they may have been used. I have one

piece of thick pottery which might have served in sach capacity. It would be most

interesting if it were to be established that the old potters of the two continents

had both hit on this most ingenious expedient.

* IT am doubtful whether the impressions in question are really those of human

fingers, for in none could I detect the impression of the edge of the nail,

1887. ] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 281

obtained at Joga, a small village at foot of the northern ridge of the

Sandur basin, 24 miles west of Bellary. The majority of the specimens

‘ have been a good deal worn by rolling. I have had no opportunity of

studying the circumstances under which they occur in the gravel fans in

question, and merely wish to record the finds.

The theory has been advanced that the implements of rude Palzo-

lithic type are really the agricultural tools of the people, who, for other

domestic or warlike purposes, manufactured the various wholly or par-

tially polished implements generally classed as Neolithic. This theory

will, however, not fit in with the facts observed in the Neolithic settle-

ments above described. Nearly all the implements of Paleolithic type

found in the Bellary country consist of jasperyhematite, only a very

few of quartzite. Implements of these materials and of the older type

are extremely rare in the various settlements I have searched; only

two or three inall were found to the hundreds and hundreds of specimens

of the newer types. It is impossible that the manufacture of hema-

titic jasper and quartzite implements should have been carried on to

even a very moderate extent without leaving behind piles of splinters

and flakes of the red and purple and brown stones of which they were

made. These flakes and splinters would be quite as conspicuous on the

granitoid hills as the green and black ones left in the preparation of

the celts, chisels, and hammers made of greenstone of different kinds.

The latter kind of splinters and flakes occur very largely, the former not

at all. Furthermore, if the hematite and quartzite implements of the

so-called Paleolithic type were the agricultural tools of the Neolithic

people, how comes it that the former are not found largely in broken or

at least used condition around the hills inhabited by their makers? It

is most unlikely that the people left the rich black soil tracts around

their strong places uncultivated, and yet, if these were cultivated by

the particular form of tools they are assumed to have used, remains

of the latter must assuredly be met with here and there near the

strong places in question. As a matter of fact they have not been

found in such localities, and, from their absence, only one inference

seems reasonable, namely, that they were not used as supposed by the

Neolithic people, but belonged to another and older race. In none

of the different lateritic gravels and other deposits which have yielded

typical Paleolithic implements in the South has the faintest trace of

any polished implement of any kind, or of any pottery, however coarse,

been found. While the deposits in which the Neolithic remains occur

cannot by any possibility be treated as geological formations—they are

all of them manifestly accumulations of matter entirely due to direct

human agency,—and, geologically speaking, date only from yesterday.

36 |

282 KE. Simon—F’tude sur les Arachnides de Asie méridionale [No. 3,

To my mind nothing can be clearer than the existence of a great break

in time between the Paleolithic and Neolithic Periods in South India.

Whether this great break will ever be closed in by future archeological ©

discoveries remains to be seen.

PN NN es OO"

XIX.—LH'tude sur les Arachnides deV Asie méridionale faisant partie des

collections de V Indian Museum (Calcutta).—Par M. E. Simon, de

Paris. Communicated by THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN

MusgumM.

[Received September 22nd ;—Read November 2nd, 1887].

LT.

ARACHNIDES RECUEILLIS AUX Ings ANDAMAN PAR M. R. D. OLDHAM.

Fam. Attide.

1.—CyYT#A ALBOLIMBATA, sp. nov.

@. Long. 7mm. Cephalothorax crassus convexus postice attenua-

tus levis, niger, in medio dilutior et rufescens, obscure rufulo-pubescens,

vitta marginali latissima postice interrupta crasse albo-pilosa cinctus,

parte cephalica in medio fulvo albidoque pilosa et parte thoracica vitta

media postice abbreviata et acuta alba notatus. Oculorum pili supra

fulvi infra oculos albidi. Pili clypei crassissimi albidi. Oculi antici

parum disjuncti in linea parum recurva. Oculi ser. 2 vix ante

medium (inter oculos laterales anticos et medios posticos) siti. Oculo-

rum series 3a cephalothorace haud vel vix angustior. Abdomen oblon-

gum, supra nigrum et squamulis micantibus parce ornatum, in parte

basilari sinuosa albo-marginatum et lineis mediis quatuor albidis sinuosis

et fere inordinatis notatum et pone medium linea transversa alba valde

dentata sectum, venter simpliciter fulvo-pubescens. Pedes, preesertim

antici, breves et robusti, fulvo-ravidi, femoribus tibiisque ad basin atque

ad apicem, patellis metatarsisque ad apicem nigro fulvove annulatis,

partibus fulvis crasse albo-pilosis, tibiis anticis patellis non multo

longioribus, aculeis validis et numerosis: patellis cunctis biaculeatis,

tibiis metatarsisque anticis aculeis inferioribus et lateralibus instructis.

Chele robuste fusco-rufule, leves, albido-hirsute, margine inferiore

sulci dentibus geminatis binis instructo. Vulve plaga antice fovea

parva semicirculari, postice plagula rufula levi et plana, recte transversa

et utrinque rotunda notata.

Port Blair.

0. sinuate Dolesch. et OC. alburne Keys. sat affinis, differt cephalo-

1887.] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 283

thorace crassiore pube ad maximam partem simplici, pictura cephalo-

thoracis et abdominis, etc.

Nora.—Le genre Cyte@a Keyserling (in L. Koch, Arachn. Austral.,

1882, p. 1380) se rapproche des genres Huryattus Thorell, Sccea UL.

Koch,* Hasarius E. Sim. (emend. H. adansoni), Ptocasius H. Sim.,

Ascyltus Karsch, Oocalus C. Koch, par l’armature de la marge inférieure

des chélicéres, qui offre deux dents géminées ou mieux une dent trés

comprimée cariniforme et échancrée au sommet avec les angles formant

deux pointes aigués.—I] se distingue du genre Huryattus Th., par l aire

oculaire parallele, nullement dilatée en arriére, des genres Scea L. K.,

Hasarius et Ptocasius H. §., par sa pubescence squameuse et la marge

Superieure des chélicéres pourvue de 2 ou 4 dents, tandis qu'elle n’ en

offre que deux chez les genres cités.—I1 différe du genre Ascyltus Karsch,

par le céphalothorax non dilaté ni conique aux angles antérieurs et les

tibias antérieurs pourvus d’ épines dorsales et latérales externes. Enfin,

il se distingue du genre Cocalus C. Koch} par les yeux antérieurs en

ligne recourbée, les yeux de la 3¢ ligne évidemment plus petits que les

latéraux de la premiére, les chélicéres médiocres et verticales dans les

deux sexes. ,

Indépendamment des espéces decrites par Keyserling dans I’

ouvrage de L. Koch, le genre COytea renferme encore le S. sinuatus

Doleschall, classi par Thorell dans le genre Plexippus, le Plexippus laticeps

Thorell, et peut-étre aussi les P. expectans, ruber (Walck.), argentosus,

severus, nimbatus, frontaliger, ochropis, pupulus Thorell (Rag. Mal. etc.

111) de Nouvelle Guinée, |’ auteur ne décrit malheureusement pas pour

toutes ces espéces |’ armature des chélicéres.

2.—CYLLOBELUS[ MINIACEOMICANS, sp. nov.

@. Long 56mm. Cephalothorax niger pube subsquamosa pallide

* Scea L. Koch 1879, nom préoccupé que nous proposons de remplacer par

celui de Servea.

+ Le type du genre Cocalus est le C. concolor C. Koch, de Malaisie, qui nous

parait étre la méme espéce que le Salticus (Attus) forceps Doleschall ; cet auteur a bien

figuré la bifurcation de la dent principale des chélicéres. Le Pleaippus erythroce-

phalus C. Koch, de Java, appartient probablement au méme genre, le Cocalus

cyaneus C. Koch, de Surinam, pour lequel C. Koch a plutard proposé le genre Psecas

s’ en éloigne au contraire beaucoup et parait plus voisin des Mevia.—Plusieurs des

espéces décrites par Thorell sous le nom generique de Cocalus sont trés douteuses

pour le genre (C. salaz), par contre plusieurs de ses Plexippus pourraient lui ap-

partenir (P. aper, catellus).

t Pour le genre Cyllobelus, cf. H. Sim., Ann. Soc. ent. Fr. 1885, p. 390. Le

Salticus collingwoodi Cambr. (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1871, p. 621, pl. xliv f. 5)

de Labuan, appartient peut-étre 4 ce genre ; il serapproche de C. miniaceomicans par

son systéme de coloration.

284. BE. Simon —Arachnides de 1 Asie méridionale [ No. 3,

cinereo-viridi nitida obtectus, parte cephalica inter oculos posticos vitta

transversa lata leviter arcuata, parte thoracica maculis binis latis

obliquis et vitta submarginali lata postice interrupta lete miniaceo-

pilosis ornatis. Oculorum pili faciei supra aurantii infra oculos albidi.

Clypeus subglaber paululum retro obliquus et in medio depressus, oculis

anticis tantum % angustior. Oculi antici contigui, in linea recta. Oculi

ser. 2 fere in medio inter laterales anticos et posticos siti. Oculorum

series postica cephalothorace haud augustior, Abdomen ovatum, postice

acuminatum, splendide viridi-metallico squamulatum, antice maculis

binis magnis, pone medium vitta transversa latissima medio triangula-

riter dilatata miniaceo-pubescentibus et vittis transversis angustioribus

pallide cinereo-viridibus decoratum. Venter antice et in medio sub-

glaber utrinque et presertim postice squamulis splendide violaceo-

micantibus ornatus, Sternum nigrum albo-squamulatum. Pedes longi

fulvi, valde nigro-lineati, femoribus anticis fere omnino nigris. Pedes-

maxillares luridi, femore infuscato.

Port Blair.

Fam. Lycoside.

3.—SPHEDANUS* MARGINATUS, sp. nov.

@. Long. 195mm. Cephalothorax oblongus fusco-rufescens, pilis

plumosis fulvis albisque mixtis vestitus, vitta submarginali latissima

valde flexuoso-dentata atque in parte cephalica lineis trinis (media

recta lateralibus arcuatis) albo-pilosis ornatus. Oculi medii subsquales,

aream evidenter longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice

angustiorem occupantes. Oculi quatuor antici appropinquati subzequales

lineam leviter recurvam formantes. Clypeus oculis anticis non multo

latior. Abdomen longe oblongum fuscum, supra pilis plumosis fulvo-

nitidis subtus pilis simplicibus albidis dense vestitum. Chelz fulvo-

rufescentes albido-setose#, margine inferiore sulci dentibus equis trinis,

superiore dentibus trinis medio majore instructis. Sternum olivaceum

albo-pilosum. Pedes lutei, aculeis nigris longis et numerosis ut in

S. undato Th, valde instructi (vulva haud plane adulta).

Port Blair.

A S. undato Thorell praesertim differt cephalothorace longiore et

albo-variegato, area oculorum mediorum evidentius longiore, etc.

Fam. Epeiride.

A.—GASTERACANTHA ANNAMITA, E. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.

Commun aux Iles Andaman: Port Blair, Havelock.

* Sur le genre Sphedanus, cf. Thorell, Studi s. Ragni Malesi et Papwani, I,

p. 182, Génes, 1877.

1887. | faisant partie des collections de ? Indian Museum. 285

Nota.—Stannedclavis canningensis Stol., qui m’ a été communiqué en

méme temps que le précedent par |’ Indian Musewm, parait tres commun 4

Barren Island (Baie de Bengale). Contrairement aux conclusions que

nous avons donnée précedemment, cette espece pourrait n’ étre qu’ une

variété de S. brevispina Doleschall. Les caractéres que nous avons

indiqués pour séparer les deux formes s’ effacent considérablement

chez les exemplaires du Barren Island.

5.—CYCLOSA ALBISTERNIS, sp. nov.

2. Long. 75mm. Cephalothorax pallide luridus, longe albo-pilosus,

anguste nigro-marginatus, parte cephalica postice maculis geminatis

binis divaricatis albo-opacis notata, ovato-elongatus, parte cephalica

parum convexa haud constricta. Area oculorum mediorum longior

quam latior, oculi postici majores juxte contigui, antici anguste separati.

Oculi laterales a mediis sat late remoti utrinque contigui et subzequales.

Clypeus oculis mediis anticis haud latior. Abdomen altissimum, oblon-

gum, antice valde prominens, simpliciter et obtuse acuminatum, prope

medium obtusissime vix distincte bituberculatum, postice attenua-

tum et sat longe productum, apice obtuse trifidum, mucrone

medio reliquis longiore et graciliore, testaceum pallide flavo-

aureo-guttulatum, utrinque leviter nigro-variagatum et striolatum.

Mammille nigre. Sternum albo-opacum. Oris partes pallide testacez.

Chele fulve. Pedes breves, luridi, femoribus annulo submedio angusto

et macula superiore subapicali, tibiis metatarsisque annulo apicali

angusto nigricantibus notati, tibiis aculeis brevibus paucis munitis,

metatarsis muticis. Vulve uncus rufulus acute triquetrus, supra ad

apicem sulcatus, scapum fuscum transversum utrinque rotundum, in

medio depressum et plagula media rufula cordiformi notatum.

3. Long. 46mm. Cephalothorax paulo latior et humilior, fuscus,

parte thoracica in medio late dilutiore et rufula, subtiliter coriaceus,

parte thoracica in medio depressa et sulco longitudinali abbreviato secta.

Abdomen minus et presertim angustius, postice breviter productum et

simpliciter obtusum, fusco-olivaceum, in parte fasali lneis longitudinali-

bus albis quatuor, medianis rectis postice divaricatis, lateralibus arcuatis,

in parte apicali punctis albidis biseriatim ordinatis ornatum. Venter ni-

gricans. Sternum fusco-rufulum, maculis marginalibus dilutioribus orna-

tum. Pedes, presertim antici, longiores, coxis anticis fuscis, patellis fuscis,

reliquis articulis luridis, annulo medio angusto et annulo apicali lato

fuscis ornatis, tibiis metatarsisque anticis parce aculeatis. Tibia paris

Qe tibia paris le leviter robustior et levissime arcuata, intus aculeis

robustioribus et brevibus biseriatis 6—4 armata (serie inferiore dimidium

apicalem articuli tantum occupante). Pedes-maxillares breves et robusti

fusco-rufuli, bulbo maximo, transversim late ovato, apice apophysibus

tribus munito, apophysi superiore depressiuscula late rotunda, media

gracili sed obtusa, inferiore styliformi longe bifida.

Var. 2. Abdomen supra vitta longitudinali rosea anguste argenteo

fuscoque marginata lete decoratum.

Port Blair. Havelock.

C. anseripedt Walck. affinis, imprimis differt in femina cephalo-

thorace lurido sterno albo, oculis lateralibus a mediis remotioribus,

pedibus anticis brevioribus angustius annulatis, vulve unco acutiore et

rufulo, ete. |

Nora.—nous possedons aussi cette espéce de Ramnad (Hindoustan

méridional).

6.—TrTRAGNATHA GRACILIS Stoliczka, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng.

XXXII. Pt. II, 1869, p. 244, pl. XTX, f. 2 (sub meta).

Saddle Hill (North Andaman Island) ; Havelock.

Paraitcommun. Décrit par Stoliczka des environs de Calcutta sous

le nom générique de Meta.

Fam. Avicularida.

Genus SatTzicus nov.

Cephalothorax humilis subplanus haud vel vix longior quam latior

sed antice valde attenuatus et. fronte angusta, fovea thoracica pone

medium sita valde recurva. Area oculorum a margine antico parum

remota, saltem 4 latior quam longior. Oculi quatuor antici in linea

validissime procurva semicirculari, medii lateralibus saltem duplo

majores et a lateralibus quam inter se remotiores. Oculi postici mi-

nutissimi utrinque contigui atque a mediis anticis parum distantes.

Spatium inter oculos laterales anticos et posticos iatissimum. Chelee

parves, subverticales, mutice. Pars labialis coxeque omnino mutice.

Pars labialis paulo latior quam longior. Sternum sat latum sed antice

valde attenuatum. Pedes (co) sat longi 4, 1, 2, 3, aculeis paucis

gracilibus muniti, tarsis metatarsisque anticis longe sed parum dense

scopulatis, posticis setosis sed tarsis cunctis fasciculis unguicularibus

validis munitis. Ungues bini graciles et (saltem posteriores) mutici.

Patellz anticz tibiis non multo breviores. Trochanter paris 4ee longus et

teres, coxa non multo brevior. |

Generi Sarpedoni Cambr. (gen. mihi ignoto) sat affinis, differt im-

primis oculis mediis anticis lateralibus saltem duplo majoribus (in

Sarpedone paulo minoribus) et fovea thoracica valde recurva (in Sarpedone

recte transversa).

Nora.—Le genre Sarpedon Cambr. (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1883,

p- 358), qui nous est inconnu en nature, a été comparé par I’ auteur au

1887, ] faisant partie des collections de? Indian Museum. 287

genre Moggridgea, dont il parait cependent différer grandement, ce

dernier appartenant a la série des Avicularide trionichi.

Tl est selon nous beaucoup plus voisin du genre Leptopelma Ausserer ;

P auteur ne parle pas des chélicéres, qui d’aprés la figure (loc. cit., pl.

xxxvi, f. 1) paraissent mutiques.

7.—SATZICUS ANDAMANICUS, sp. nov.

So. Ceph.-th. long. 5 mm.; lat. 48 mm. Pedes I 15-7 mm.; III

15:2 mm.; IV 17:3 mm.

Cephalothorax fulvo-rufescens sublevis fulvo-nigroque longe se-

tosus, area oculorum nigra. Abdomen breviter ovatum, fusco-test-

aceum longe et crebre fulvo-sericeo hirsutum. Chel, sternum, pedes-

maxillares, pedesque fulva, pedes extremitates versus obscuriores. Pedeg

1 tibia patella non multo longiore haud incrassata, intus prope apicem

calcare unico simplici ad basin crasso ad apicem abrupte graciliore,

leviter uncato armata, inferne ad marginem exteriorem aculeis trinigs

gracilibus uniseriatis munita. Metatarso mutico. Pedes postici fere

mutici.

Port Blair.

Un seul exemplaire male en trés mauvais état auquel manquent les

pattes-machoires et les pattes de la troisiéme paire.

Nota.—La collection renferme en outre un certain nombre de 7 jeunes

araignées, qui ne sout pas en état d’ étre décrites. Ces espéces appar-

tiennent aux genres Homalattus Wh., Oxyopes Latr., Argiope Sav.,

Nephila Leach, Hpewa Walck., Meta C. Koch, » (Hortttia Sav., Chira-

canthiwm C. Koch.

288 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

XX.—A Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry.—By Asutosh MuxKnopa-

pHyay, M. A., F. R. A. S.,, F. BR. S. E. Communicated by Tus

Hon’siueE MAnENDRALAL Sircar, M. D., C. I. EH.

[Received October 27th ;—Read November 2nd, 1887. |

(With three Wood-cuts.)

CoNnTENTS.

§. 1. Introduction ; object and scope of the memoir.

§. 2. Basis of analytical geometry ; relation between analysis and geometry.

§§. 3—5. The Right Line:

(§. 3). The Line at Infinity.

(§. 4). Coordinates of intersection of two lines given by the ge-

neral equation of the second degree : the Point-function.

(§. 5). Area of triangle formed by any line with two lines given

by the general equation.

§§. 6—7. The circle.

(§. 6). Meaning of the constants in the equation of a circle.

(§. 7). Chords and tangents of circles and conics; geometrical

meaning of Burnside’s Equation.

§§, 8—15. The general equation of the second degree in Cartesian coordi-

nates.

(§. 8). Preliminary remarks on the general equation.

(§. 9). Transformation of the equation; the Asymptotic Con-

stant.

(§. 10). Invariants and Covariants of a single conic.

(§. 11). Lengths of axes and area of a conic.

(§. 12). Asymptotes of the conic.

(§. 13). Equations for the eccentricity of the conic.

(§. 14). The Director-circle in rectangular and oblique coordi-

nate-axes.

(§. 15). Reduction of the general equation to the asymptotes as

coordinate-axes.

§§. 16—20. Laplace’s linear equation to a conic.

(§. 16). Genesis of Laplace’s equation.

(§. 17). Meaning of the constants.

(§. 18). Elliptic motion.

(§. 19). Geometric interpretation.

(§. 20). Eccentricity from Laplace’s equation. .

§. 21. Area of triangle formed by two tangents to a conic and the chord of

contact; various applications.

§§. 22—23. Theorem on the inclination of tangents.

(§. 22). Formula for the inclination of tangents to conics and of

their chord of contact, to any line.

(§. 23). Applications of the theorem ; verification.

§. 24. Generation of similar conics.

§. 25. Onasystem of three parabolic envelopes,

1887.) A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 289

§§. 26—27. Reciprocal polars.

(§. 26). Reciprocal of central conic.

(§. 27). Reciprocal of evolute of certain curves including conics.

§§. 28—29. Theorems on central conics.

(§. 28). Properties of the ellipse.

(§. 29). Properties of confocals.

§§. 30—31. Theorems on the parabola.

(§. 30)... A dynamical problem.

(§. 31). Applications to the parabola.

§. 32. A geometrical locus.

§. 1. Introduction.

§. 1. Object and Scope.—It is my object in the present

paper to bring together a number of theorems in plane analytic geome-

try which have accumulated in my hands during my study of that

subject. Some of the simpler of these theorems have already been

given in my Lectures on Plane Analytic Geometry, now in course of

delivery at the Indian Association for the Cultivation of Science;

a few have been enunciated elsewhere without demonstration; most

of the propositions, however, are here published for the first time. I

believe that either the theorems themselves, or the methods of estab-

lishing them are original; and, except in a very few instances where

I have inserted well-known results for the sake of avoiding disconnect-

edness, I have considered them either for the purpose of giving a proof

simpler and more complete than that usually given, or with a view to

throw light on the connection between the various parts of the subject.

As the different sections of this paper are, to a great extent, practically

independent of each other, for the sake of facility of reference, an

outline of the principal topics discussed is added above.*

§. 2. Basis of Analytical Geometry.

§. 2. Analysis and Geometry.—The notion of either space or

number, or of both, les at the root of every department of mathematics.

Analysis is the science of number; geometry is the science of space ;

but, as space is homogeneous, and, as every homogeneous substance

can, by the choice of a unit, be represented by a number, space can be,

for mathematical purposes, represented by numbers; hence, the possi-

bility of applying analytical methods to geometrical investigations, and

of founding a science of analytical geometry. This possibility was

first realized into practice by the illustrious French mathematician René

Descartes, who invented the method of coordinates. With respect

* For a full analysis of this paper, see the Proceedings for 1887, pp. 232-235,

290 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

to this method, there are two points which ought to be most carefully

noticed. In the first place, to determine the position of any point,

we must choose an origin, and, then, fix the position of the point by

its coordinates, which may be defined to be independent quantities of

the same order which fix the position of a point; we see, then, that the

two essentially distinct ideas of origin and coordinates are fundamental

in this theory ; and, if we consider the matter for a moment, we find

that the same two ideas are ever present in every system of coordinates

that we may choose. Thus, looking to a comparatively modern part of

the subject, the theory of Elliptic Coordinates, we see that the posi-

tion of any point is determined by the lengths of the semi-axes of the

conics which can be drawn through that point confocal to a given Gonic,

called the primitive conic ; here, then, the point-origin of the Cartesian

system has been replaced by the fundamental conic, and the ordinate

and abscissa have been replaced by. the semi-axes of two conics.

Hence, we conclude that in every system, we must have an origin,

which is, as it were, a unit or symbol of reference, and which may be

a point or a conic, or any other figure, according to the system we

choose ; and, having fixed our origin, we determine the position of a

point by coordinates, which may be lines straight or curved, or any

other geometrical figure; the only essential ideas being those of a

symbol of reference, and of the independence of the quantities which

fix the position of the point relatively to that origin or symbol of

reference.

Having thus fixed the position of a point, we next consider how

to represent a curve. A curve is defined to be an assemblage of points

arranged according to a definite law ; the equation of a curve, therefore,

is the analytical representation of that geometrical relation which must

subsist between the coordinates of a point, in order that that point

may be on the given curve. In other words, the equation of a curve

may be defined to be the analytical representation of some geometrical

property of the curve; and, as a curve has an infinite number of geo-

metrical properties, the question naturally suggests itself whether the

analytical representation of each of these properties will give a different

equation of the curve. Asa matter of fact, we do know that, in what-

ever way we may derive the equation of a curve, we are led to equations

which are apparently different from each other, but which are really

not distinct, and which may all be made to coincide by suitable trans-

formations. Indeed, if the reverse had been the case, it would have

been manifestly impossible to create a science of analytic geometry ;

and the reason why all the equations of a curve are really identical

is a simple outcome of the fact that all the innumerable geometrical

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay— Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 291

properties of any curve are dependent on each other: the truth of any

one being assumed, the others can be deduced from it as necessary

mathematical consequences. We see, therefore, that though a curve

has an infinite number of geometrical properties, it can have only one

equation, and this accords with the great Law of Nature that, in

every natural system, there can be only one relation between the component

parts. This, then, is the second fact which made possible the very

existence of Analytical Geometry.

From what has been pointed out above, it is evident that the

equation of a curve is, as it. were, a conyenient repository of all theorems

connected with it, and all its properties may be established by algebraic

transformation of the equation. From this, as well as from the funda-

mental relation between analysis and geometry noted above, it is clear

that, to every algebraic transformation, there corresponds a geometrical

fact, and vice versd. Take, for example, the subject of the transforma-

tion of coordinates. We all know that transformation is of two kinds ;

it may be a change to new axes, parallel to the old ones, through a new

origin, which may conveniently be termed Translation-transforma-

tion ; or, again, the transformation may be to new axes, inclined to

the old ones, through the old origin, which may be called Rotation-

transformation ; if, in any case, both these kinds are combined, we

may call it Compound-transformation ; and from the known alge-

braical formule for compound transformation, it is clear that this

geometrical process is nothing but the exact counterpart of the alge-

braic process of linear transformation. Similarly, it may be re-

marked that the problem of inversion is a case of quadric transforma-

tion.

Sok Ee Bight ine.

§. 3. The Line at Infinity.—The equation of any line being

ee a

a of

where a,\\b are the intercepts on the co-ordinate axes, the equation of

the line which is at an infinite distance from the origin is obtained by

substituting herein

C=),

which gives T— 0;

Without any real change of generality, we may write this

A=0

where A is any constant; this, then, is the equation of the line at in-

finity ; it will be of use in determining the asymptotes of the conic given

by the general equation of the second degree (§. 12), |

292 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

§. 4. Coordinates of intersection of two lines. The following

method of investigating the condition that the general equation of the

second degree

ax? + 2hey +by? +2gx+2fytc=0

may represent two right lines, is shorter than the proofs usually given,

and has, besides, the advantage of furnishing at once the coordinates

of the point of intersection of the lines represented by the equation.

Let (#’, y’) be the point of intersection of the lines; removing

our origin to this point, the equation becomes

av® +2hay+ by? +29'%+2fy+c’ =0 ssebeVueneeke 4p

where g' =ax'+hy'+9,

| f = ha! +by' +f,

o! = ax! +2haly!+by! +20! +2fy' be.

But the equation (1) now represents a pair of lines through the origin,

and, as such, it ought to be homogeneous in the second degree ; therefore,.

each of the quantities g’, f’, c’ must vanish separately, which gives

ax'+hy'+g=0 ececce serene (2)

ha’ + by’ +f=0 eoe cre eee coe (3)

ax! +2hely! + by! +2ge!+2fy'to=0 veces (4)

Multiplying (2) by #’, (8) by y’, and subtracting the sum of the pro-

ducts from (4), we get

ga’ +fy'+e=0 Rpcresde COD

From (2) and (3), we have

ed gO

gee 8 Gb he

which are, accordingly, the coordinates of the point of intersection

of the lines represented by the given equation. Eliminating 2’, y’,

from (2), -(3); (5), we have the condition that the discriminant must

vanish in order that the equation may represent two right lines, viz.,

dsiaeet(e)

a h g

h b fi =O Adena yy

g f ¢

As the equation

an + 2Qhay + by? + 2ga+2fy+c=0

is transformed to

ax*® +2hay + by? =0

when the axes are removed to the point of intersection of the lines, it

follows that, as the angle between the lines is not altered in magnitude

by the transformation, the angle between the lines given by the general

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 293

equation of the second degree is the same as that between the lines

ax? +2hay + by? = 0.

The quantity c’, which occurs in this investigation, may be called

the point-function of the conic.

Definition.—The point-function of any curve with respect to

any point is the function which is obtained by substituting the coordi-

nates of that point in the expression the vanishing of which gives the

equation of the curve. It is clear that the point-function with respect

to any point on the curve itself is zero, while the point-function with

respect to the origin is the absolute term in the equation of the curve.

§. 5. Area oy a Bogus —If the general equation of the second

degree ss

ax? +2hey+ by? +24 2fytcHO ——— esecvecseeee (8)

represents a pair of right lines, to investigate the area of the triangle

formed by these two lines with the line

le+my =n. : ececadeae” CO)

Remove the origin to the point |

‘laa y fiat

which is the point of intersection of the pair of lines represented by

(8). The two equations then become

axv® + 2haxy + by? =0 iasterantete it GLO)

and |

hf — bn) ( hg —af\ _

(a+ = ee y+ apa) =

= a

ey = Unf — 10S bo) $mChg— an Ad) (12)

Now, suppose that the lines in (10) are made up of the two

yo me w= 0, YM BHO, “Aasieiseves--Clo}y (14)

so that ;

Mm, +m, sie iy 000000000000 (15) =

my, Ms = , eee osesevece (16)

4h? —2

whence m,*+m,? = b2 ap Bee eve ccecce (17)

The. coordinates of the point. of intersection of (11) with (13) are

294 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

given by

~ l+mm,

If, therefore, 5, is the length of the line intercepted between the

new origin (which is the point of intersection of the pair of lines) and

the point of intersection of (11) with (13), we have

_p?d+m,*)

‘iain. )? sraatoacveeve (lo)

Similarly, if 8, be the length of the line intercepted between the new

origin and the point of intersection of (11) with (14), we have

2h Utm,*)-

2 — (l+mm,)? eoeocee oes een (19)

Hence, from (18) and (19), we get

pt {14 (m,2+m,%+m,%m,? |

o45;% = ——————— Ee ::

: { 19 +m(m, +14) +m*mym,

Therefore, substituting for m,, m, from the system of equations (15),

(16), (17), we get

p?/ pt a/ | air +(a- by» }

Perorms -Zhmi+bl= 090 000.006 000 (20)

But, if ¢ be the angle between the lines given by (10), we have

o/h — ab

tan o= — ey 5 7

Qn/ h? — ab

J {4+ (a—2) |

so that age area of the triangle in question is

= 29,0, singh

pia —ab

_ am? — 2hml-+ bl? bi?

{ (hf — bg) +m(hg — af) +n(h? — ab)

(h? —ab)® (am? —Qhml+ 1?)

by substituting for p from (12). Hence, finally, using the determinant

notation, and altering the sign of n, we have the general

Theorem.—If the general equation of the second degree

ax? + 2hay + by? +2gx+ 2fy+e=0

represents a pair of right lines, the area.of the triangle formed by this

6,5, =

whence sin d=

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memioir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 295

pair with the line

An+py+v = 0

a h A}?

h b pe

g f v

| a h els h r

7 7 0

The length of the portion - Ax+py +v=0 which is intercepted

between the pair of lines is also easily found ; for, from (12), the per-

pendicular from the point of intersection of the pair of lines on

Ax +eryt+v=0

is at once seen to be

a h rX

h b ph

ne tae ie v

SG 2 ad)(A* +n)! bt

Hence, the length of the intercepted portion is

200 pee oot eee (22)

P a h r

os al h b yn

pe. A g f v

2 eae : a 23

a h a h r

r pe 0

The product of the two sides is, by a glance at (20), written down.

to be

‘ a h AA?

2h a—b)’ |h b pe

b—a 2h g i Vv

h - ; i. b pe ves (24)

b h a h r

r 0

As an application of the formula in (21), we can find the area of

the parallelogram formed by the two lines

ax? + 2hay+ by? ree te ene 0

with ax? + 2hay+ by? =

which are two lines through the origin parallel to the first pair. By

subtracting the equations, we see that

2gu+ 2fy+o= 0

296 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

represents that diagonal of the parallelogram which does not pass

through the origin. The area of the triangle formed by this diagonal

with the first pair is

{ 29 (lif — bg) +2f (Tig — af) — 0 (* — ad) }*

4(h* — ab)? (af? — 2fgh-+ bg?)

and that formed with the second pair is

a pe — ab)?

4(12 — ab)* (af = 2fgh+b9*)

But, since the discriminant vanishes, it is clear that

2g (hf — bg) +2f (hg — af) — 2c (It — ab) =0

af’? —2fgh+bg?=c (ab—h?).

Hence, adding the above expressions, the area of the quadrilateral in

question is found to be

1 c

2 / ih? — ab

It may be noted that this expression is only apparently independent of

Ff, 9, for the vanishing of the discriminant shews that a, b, c, h are

functions of f and g. |

§§. 6—7. The Circle.

§. 6. Meaning of the Constants in = ghedabs of a Circle.—

The equation of a circle

a? + y? +29x%+2fy+c=0

being thrown into the form

(e-—g)! + -fY =o tf —4,

the quantities — g, —f are seen to be the coordinates of the centre, while,

if r be the radius, we have

rP=gPtf—c.

To determine the geometric meaning of c, let 5 be the distance of the

centre from the origin, and ¢, either of the tangents drawn from the

origin to the circle; then,

8 = 7? +H

and, also, O° = f?+ 9%

r = fi+g?— C

which give a ae senateard aye. Coe

circle. We thus infer that, if the equations of a system of circles agree

in either f or g, the locus of their centres is a right line parallel to a

given line at a given distance from it, and their common chords are

parallel, being all perpendicular to this given line; if both f and g are

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 297

the same in all the equations, the system is concentric ; if ¢ alone is

the same in all the equations, the circles are such as can be intersected or-

thogonally by a circle of radius a/c, described round the origin as

centre; and this shews at once that as a system of co-axal circles can

be orthogonally intersected, their equations must necessarily be of the

form

x+y? —Qkaem + 0,

where 4 is constant, but & variable.

The geometric meaning of ¢ also furnishes the length of the tang-

ent drawn from any point to a circle, for, the equation of the circle

being |

x + 4?+ 29x +4+2fy+o= 0,

and the point from which tangents are drawn being (a’, y’), remove the

origin to this point; then, the new absolute term is clearly the point-

function of the circle with respect to the point (w’, y’), and this,

therefore, is the length of the tangent sought. It follows as a conse-

quence of this, that the geometric meaning of the equation of the

circle is that, if the length of the tangent drawn from any point to a

eircle yanishes, that point must be on the curve itself.

§. 7. Chords and Tangents of Circles and Conics.—The fol-

lowing equation of the chord joining the two points (#’, y’), (x, y”,) on

the circle

e+y=r sna ven dU LAS)

is due to Professor Burnside, (Salmon’s Contes, §. 85, Ed. 1879, p. 80),

(a= we) (a we") + (9 YY my’) SOPH Y? HT, coc yescecsess (27)

It is easily verified that this is actually the equation of the chord ; the

following geometrical interpretation, however, shews the genesis of the

equation, )

On the line joining the points (#', y'), (x, y”) as diameter, describe

a circle; any point (x, y) on this circumference is such that the lines

joining (z, y), («', y'), and (a, y), (#, y"), include a right angle; this

condition, expressed analytically, gives for the equation of the circle

ee aes ey ey YO coerce ass (29)

The chord in question may now be regarded as the common chord of

the two circles represented by (26) and (28); and then, from the ele-

mentary principle that S+S’=0 represents any locus through the

common points of S=0, S’=0, we at once write down Burnside’s

equation (27), the proper value of & being easily seen to be given by

14+4=90.

The generalisation to the conic given by the general equation

ax® + Qhay + by? +2ge+2fyt+cH=O ssecvvescees (29)

298 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

is easy, viZ., uta

a («— 2") (% — #") + 2h(e — “!) (y—y') +009 Sey y= 0 (30)

represents any conic through («#’, y'), (2, y'), which may, it is useful

to notice, satisfy three other conditions: and the chord in question,

being the common chord of (29) and (30), must have for its equation

a (%— x!) (« — x”) +2h(e—2')(y—y") +by—y)Y—-y")

= ax*+2hey+by?4+2ge+2fyto - tine oes SBE

I have not, however, been able to find if the conics (29) and (30) are

connected by any very special or peculiar relation: their centres are

not coincident; the centre of (30) is not on the chord whose equation

is required ; their asymptotes, however, include equal angles, and their

axes are parallel; in fact, they are similar and similarly situated, and,

therefore, necessarily equi-eccentric.

The equation of the tangent at any point may be deduced, as usual,

from the equation of the chord; or we may first obtain by Joachims-

thal’s method the equation of the pair of tangents from an external

point, and thence obtain the equation of the tangent at any point of

the curve. The same equation, however, may be obtained by transform-

ation, if we know the equation of the tangents from the origin; thus,

the conic being

ase® + 2hacy + by? +2gx+2fy+te=—0

and («', y’) the external point, remove the origin to this point, so that

the conic becomes

ax’ +2haey + by? 4+2q’«+ 2fy+e' =0, |

where the values of /’, g’, c' are the same as in §.4. If now y= mzx be

any line through the new origin, it will touch the conic if the quadratic

in x, )

(a+ 2hm-+ bm?)x? +2(9’+f'm)«+c' =0,

has equal roots, which condition gives |

c'(a+2hm+ bm?) = (9'+f'm)?,

and by substituting |

pags

we have for the equation of the tangents, referred to the new origin,

c'(aa* + 2hay + by") = (gatfiy)’,

which may be written

c' (ax?+ 2hay + by? +29'x+ 2fy +e’) = (g’x+fyt+c’)*.

Reverting to our old axes, we have at once the equation in the form

(Conic) x (Point-function) = (Polar)’,

which is, of course, the same equation as that obtained by Joachims-

thal’s method.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 299

§§. 8—15. The General Equation of the Second Degree.

§. 8. Preliminary.—The discussion of the general equation of

the second degree deservedly occupies an important position in the

application of analytical geometry to the theory of lines of the second

order; for, in analytical geometry properly so called, the question of

degree or class is of fundamental importance, and the curves of the

second degree should be called lines of the second order, and not conic

sections, the proper point of view from which their properties ought to

be studied being the fact that the equation representing them is of the

second degree, and not the other fact that they are sections of a cone

and have foci and directrices. The truly logical order of treating the

subject is first to have a chapter on the equation of the first degree,

containing the properties of right lines, then a chapter on the general

equation of the second degree, and, as distinctly subsidiary to this,

chapters on the circle, the ellipse, and the other conics. We proceed,

then, to give the barest outline of such a systematic discussion as is

indicated here. It may usefully be noted that the object of the dis-

cussion is twofold, viz., in the first place, the problem is how to trans-

form the equation to its simplest forms, and thus to classify the

different kinds of conics; in the second place, we obtain some general

formule for such properties as are common to all conics.

§. 9. Transformation of the Equation.—The general equation

of the second degree being

S = ax? + Qhay + by? + 2ge+2fyto=0, ..ccseseeeee (32)

first change the origin to («’, y’), so that the equation becomes

an” + Qhay + by’? +29’e+ 2f’y+c' =0

where

g ae es" ee he

YS y’

c = Point-function.

If, then, we make g’=/’=0, that is, if we have for the coordinates of

the new origin

Dace hf — gap

fa a4 =o, OBB BAN

the transformed equation is

aa? + Qhay + by? +

ab—

where A is the discriminant (§. 4). In order that this transformation

may be real and possible, we must have (ab—h”) different from zero,

300 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The first point of departure, then, in the classification of conics, depends

on the equation

ab—h’ 7 or 290.

The case in which k?=ab does not admit of the above transformation,

and it must be treated separately (see Carr’s Synopsis of Pure Mathe-

matics, §§. 4430—4443). In the case where (ab — h?) does not vanish,

we proceed further, as follows. Turn the axes about the new origin

through an angle 6, where @ is given by

tan 20= aunt wweeveverove (56)

and the new equation becomes

2 2 iy 24, WQ¥

| Ax’? +By conn nig Pees Totes

where A, B are certain constants to be determined hereafter. This

equation may be put into the form

~ Ba eae oak (38)

; 1. A i._B we,

if Ba RTT Grete BI), GO)

ond Q=—>.. joo | los ahaa

Definition.—The quantity which we have denoted here by Q, we

will call the Asymptotic Constant, the reason for which name will

appear in §. 12. The quantities a, P are called the semi-axes of the

conic.

§. 10. Invariants.—In the last section, we transformed the ge-

neral equation of the second degree to its simplest form (38); but, we

did not calculate the quantities a, 8 which depend on A, B. Asa rule,

the calculation of these quantities in every particular case is a laborious

task; we, therefore, find out some functions of the coefficients which

remain unaltered by transformation, and which are, accordingly, called

Invariants of the conic. These invariants may be of different classes ;

thus, there are certain quantities which remain unaltered for a transla-

tion-transformation, and which may appropriately be called Transla-

lation-invariants ; to this class belong a, h, b. Again, there are

certain quantities which remain unaltered for a rotation-transformation,

and which may, accordingly, be called Rotation-invariants ; thus,

the absolute term is a rotation-invariant; but the most important of

these invariants are embodied in Dr. Boole’s theorems that the quanti-

ties

a+b —2h cos w ab — h?

. 3 .

sin?w sin?w

anteca (G2) aa

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 301

belong to this class (Salmon’s Contes, §. 159, Hd. 1879, p. 159). Again,

as we have seen that a, b, h are translation-invariants, it follows that

a+b—2h cos w ab — h?

sin*@ sin?@

are invariants for the compound transformation as well, and may, accord-

ingly, be called General Invariants. We shall now proceed to investi-

gate, by a process analogous to that employed by Dr. Boole, certain in-

variants which include as particular cases those noticed above.

Suppose that by a rotation-transformation the equation

at? + 2hey+ by? + 2ge + 2fy+o=O0

assumes the form

AX? 4+2HXY+BY?+2GX+2FY+4+C=0,

Then, by the same transformation

ev +y?+2xy cos w

is altered into

X?+Y?+2XY cos &,

because each of these expressions denotes the distance of the same

point from the fixed origin. Hence, we have

(a +A)a* +2(h+rAcos w)xy +(b+A)y? +2ge +4+2fy +c

= (A+A)X?4+2(H+A cos 8)XY+4(B+A)Y?42GX+42FY+4C.

Kach side of this identity will resolve itself into linear factors for the

same value of 4; hence, equating the discriminant of each side to zero,

we have the two equations

c sin’, A?+ | Cab — 2h cos w) — (f?+ 9? — 2f9 cos w) r

+ abe+ 2fgh —af? — bg? — ch?=0

C sin’. 2+ | C(A+B—2H cos @) — (F?4+G®—2FG cos 8) r

+ABC+2FGH — AF? — BG?— CH?=0.

As these quadratics in A must be identical, we have, by equating the

coefficients of corresponding terms, the two relations

at+b—2hcosw f?+9°—2fg9 cos

sin*w c’sin*w

A+B—2H cos Q _ ¥’+G?* — 2FG cos 8 AA

zo sin? C sin? Q sb siecle

abe+2fgh —af?—bg’?—ch*? ABC+2FGH — AF’ —BG*’— CH?

ee ee Oe es

c sin*w C sin* 8

If f=0, g=0, these equations furnish Dr. Boole’s invariants, As we

have noticed that c is a rotation-invariant, these results shew that the

functions

o(a-+b — 2h cos w) —( fg" —2fg cos «) > sino sscsce. (46)

302 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

A . |

eon esecvesecse (40)

are rotation-invariants.

In order to see if any of these is a general invariant, we must

examine whether they are translation-invariants. It will be found on

examination that the first is not a translation-invariant, while for the

second we know that, by a translation-transformation, the equation

| ax* + 2hay + by?+ 2gx+2fy+c¢=0

is transformed into : .

a’ x? + 2h’ xy +b'y? + 2q’x+ 2fy+e’ =0,

where

ee) e 2a, RH hb S48,

which, by the way, shews that the part of the second degree in the

general equation is a covariant for translation-transformation,

and g =ax'+hy'’+9 .

f = he! +by' +f

e’= Point-function,

from which, by actual calculation, we find that the coefficients of x, ay,

y*, #, y in :

a'b’c’ + 2f"9'h’ — a’f’ — b'g*—ch"

all vanish, and the absolute term is A. Hence, we infer that A isa

translation-invariant, and so also is

sin’w’

since w is unaltered by translation-transformation ; thus, from what

precedes, we have finally that

sin?w

is a general invariant of the conic. To sum up, we enumerate below

the principal invariants of the general conic.

I. Translation-invariants.

(aiog. (i). Gi), b.@ (iv). A.

II. Rotation-invariants.

a+b —2h cos w

i) Absolute term. ii

(i) solute term (31) =r

a Ob

_ sin?w

Gi) a+b—2h cosw f +9%—2fy COS w

ge sin?o c sin’w

. fo +9" —2fy cos »

(v) sin’w Cr ¢ sin*w

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 303

III. General invariants.

. atb—2h cosa .. ab—h?

Ge 1

(ii)

It is clear that since any function of an invariant is an invariant, various

invariants may be deduced from these by combining them in different

ways or by imposing limiting conditions on them. Thus, for rectangular

axes, A is a general invariant ; and, if we examine the equation

ax® + 2hay+ by’ + ofy = 0;

which denotes a conic referred to a tangent and normal as coordinate-

axes, we see that it has the three general invariants, (a+b), (ab—h?),

af*. :

We have shewn above, by actual calculation, that the discriminant

is a translation-invariant ; it is interesting to note that the same result

may be obtained as an illustration of Dr. Boole’s method. Thus, if

by translation-transformation the equation

ax” + 2hay + by’ +2gx+2fytc=0

is transformed into

a, X°+ 2h, XY+b,Y°+29,X+2f,¥Y +c, =0,

the same transformation changes

a+ y?+ 2ey cos w

sin*w sin?w

sin?w

into

(X — #,)?+ (Y—y,)'+2(K — «,)(Y —y,) cos a,

whence we have

au’ + zhay + by® + 2ga+ 2fy+c+r(x?+y?+2xy cos w)

= a,X?+2h,XY+6,Y?+29,X+2f,Y+c,

+2{ (K—a,)*+(Y—y,)* +2(K — 2, )(¥ -y,) 008 w t

Equating the discriminant of the left hand side to zero, we have

— e sin?w, A? + { (a+b — 2h cos w) — (af? + bg? — 2fg cos w) ‘ r

+A=0 vevnvearotty (45)

If we equate to zero the discriminant of the right hand side, the equa-

tion in A apparently comes out to be a cubic ; but the coefficient of A

is found on calculation to be zero, while, in the coefficient of A%, the

is ¢ sin? ; hence the equation may be written

c sin?w, A?7+RA+A, =0. aincideeteaiian CAG.

Therefore, equating coefficients, we have

which shews, as before, that A is a translation-invariant. It may be

304 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,

noted that, from a comparison of (48) and (49), it is clear that the value

of R in (49) is

1 c(a+b— 2h cos w) — (af?-+bg* — 2fg cos w) ;

as, indeed, may be verified by direct calculation.

§. 11. Lengths of axes and area of conic.—We have shewn

above that the semi-axes a, 8 of a conic are given by (39) and (40), viz,

Re a eae

a7" G B=

and, from the theory of invariants explained above, we have further

b— 2h b-- h?

Pye ees SuSE [es TOME CT

sin?

sin20

Hence, if p be a semi-axis, we have

at — (at +89 )o* 470? 0. ica ssachser Auep

where

a ee

a*+B%=—Q (<+ a} a? B? = AB:

Substituting in (52) from (50) and (51), and putting from (41)

e= 3 -- h2’

we get

of A(a+b—2hcosw) , , A?® sin*w By, en (53)

(ab—h®)?— ? * (ab —h2)?

which is, accordingly, the equation furnishing the semi-axes of the given

conic ; and, as it is a quadratic in p?, it shews that there are four semi-

axes, which may be grouped into two pairs, the two axes in each pair

being equal in magnitude but opposite in direction. It follows from

(53) that, if p,?, p,? be the roots of the quadratic in p?, the area of the

conic is

7 Asin w

TPP, = ar Muu Coa

(ab — h?)?

Again, it is clear that A and B will have the same sign or different signs,

according as AB is positive or negative, that is, according as AB is

greater or less than zero; hence, since A and B in the equation (37)

2 oF ci A

A il Cale

are connected by the relation (51)

it follows that A and B, and thence necessarily a?, 6* in the equation (38)

Re 2

pa + x = 1,

a® B32

1887.} <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 305 -

will have the same sign or opposite signs, according as (ab — h*)7 or

20, or according as the curve is an ellipse or hyperbola. This com-

pletes the classification of conics. (§. 9).

§. 12. Asymptotes.—In the ordinary text-books (cf. Smith’s

Oonics, §. 174, Ed. 1882, p. 187), the method of finding the equation of

the asymptotes of the general conic is given as follows: it is first proved

that the asymptotes of the conic in the particular case

ae bt :

are given by

“ey?

a were

and thence it is inferred that, in the general case, the equations of the

conic and asymptotes must differ only by a constant; the logic of this

reasoning is, to say the least, hardly satisfactory ; the following method

is both easy and rigorously logical.

The asymptotes being tangents to the conic at infinity, they may

be regarded as a pair of lines passing through the points of intersection

of the conic and the line at infinity. Now, the equation of the conic

being

S=ax? + 2hayt by? +2gx+2fy+c=0,

and that of the line at infinity having been shewn (§. 3) to be

A=0,

any conic through their common points is

S+A=0;

and, in order that this may be a pair of lines, its discriminant must

vanish, whence, as usual,

A=-Q=- eae

and the asymptotes are given by

S=Q, |

which shews that the asymptotic constant in (41) is a constant which

must be equated to 8, to furnish the equation of the asymptotes.

The above process may be represented in a modified form as fol-

lows ; the conic

ax* + 2hey 4+ by? +29x%+2fy+c=0

being transformed to the centre, becomes

ax® + Zhaey + by? Jigga =e

whence it at once follows that the quantity to be added to the right

hand side of this equation to give the asymptotes is the asymptotic

constant. Now, if we transform back to our old axes, the left hand

306 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memovrr on Plane Analytic Geometry. (No. 3,

side becomes

ax® + 2hay + by? + 2gx+ 2fyt+e,

while, A and (ab—/h*®) being translation-invariants, the right hand side

remains unaltered, and the equation sought is accordingly

= ne sts Seaaep sor LODE

It follows from (6) that the point of intersection of the asymptotes in

(55) coincides with the centre of the conie, and that, accordingly, the

centre is the pole of the line at infinity. It is also clear that the asymp-

totes will be at right angles to each other and the conic will be a rec-

tangular hyperbola, if (a+b)=2h cos ow, in oblique coordinates, and

(a+b) =0 in rectangular coordinates.

§. 13. Eccentricity—The eccentricity may be calculated in

different ways according to the definition we employ.

First method.

8 — B

De tgere er

where a, B are the semi-axes of the conic. We have

24. G2

2—e8&= +8 3

fez

1 — e2 = ee >

which give

(2—e)? _ (2+ f2)2

1) ee”

and this, by substitution from (39) and (40), becomes

(2—¢)? (A+B)?

But, from the invariants (42) and (43), we have

a+b—2h cos w

A+B=— - 9 rY

s1n°w

ap e

s1n*w

so that equation (56) becomes

oe en ore A

—e (ab— h*) sin*w

which is the familiar equation. It is clear from (57) that (1 —e*#) and

(ab —h*) are simultaneously positive, zero, or negative; hence, we have

even ik

according as

1A Love F00b,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 307

or according as the conic is an ellipse, a parabola, or an hyperbola.

In the equilateral hyperbola, we have

a+b—2h cos o=0,

whence e= ae 2.

Second method.

where ¢ is the angle between the asymptotes. The equation of the

asymptotes from (55) being

we have

2 sin o. r/ hk? —ab

= ee ee as Aves. 468

snd a+b—2h cos w (8)

But sec’ = (2c0s a — 1) ‘i

a aa

sec® 5 of

i af

sec 5)

whence we have

tant ¢ = sect @ —1=(

e )- pee = 1)

2— ~ (2-2)?

Therefore, from equation (58),

&— 1a) Ge eb) cinta

(2—6)2 (a+b—2h cos we

which is the same equation as (57).

Third method.

The eccentricity may be defined to be the ratio of the distance of

any point on the conic from a focus to its distance from the correspond-

ing directrix ; the calculation on the basis of this method will come in

most appropriately when we presently deal with Laplace’s Linear HEqua-

tion of a Conic (§§. 16—20; see, in particular, §. 20).

§. 14. Director-circle—The director-circle of

S=ax? + 2hay + by?+ 2gx+ 2fy+e=0

being the locus of intersection of orthogonal tangents, its equation in

rectangular coordinates is known to be

(ab— h) (2 +y%) + 2(yb — fh)w-+ 2( fa — hg)y

+c(a+ b) —f2—g?=0, — ssoseesessee (59)

which may also be written in the form

D=(a+b)S — (axthy +g)? — (hat byt+f)®?=0 wrcasessese. (60)

308 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The centre of the director-circle is seen from (59) to be the point

een

ab—h® = ab—h?

which coincides with the centre of the conic; and, if R be the radius,

we have

pe = hab" | Chg af) _ clatt) = (+e)

(ab—h*)* (ab —h*)? ab — h?

-. = (a+6) A

Gb — we”

which shews that in rectangular axes the square of the radius of the

director-circle is equal to the sum of the squares of the semi-axes of the

conic given in equation (53).

That the same propositions hold for oblique coordinates may easily

be shewn, viz., the equation of the tangents to the conic from (#’, y’)

being

(ax®+ Qhoy + by? + 2qx+2fy +c) X

(aa! + Qhae'y! + by! +2ger’ + 2fy’ +c)

= { (ax’ + hy’ +9) 2+ (ha' + by’ +f)yt+ge +fy' + ; ;

the condition that these lines may include a right angle, gives for the

locus of («’, y’) the circle

(ab — h*) (a® + y*+ 2xy cos w)

+2 \ (gb —fh) + (fa — gh) cos w } x

+2{ (fa—gh) +(gb—fh) cos w } y

+c(a+b) — (f?+9*) +2(fg —ch) cos o=0

Comparing this with the standard form

(w—a)?-+2(a@ —a)(y—B) cos w+ (y— By =7%,

or (a%+y?+2ay cos w) —2(a+f cos w)#—2(B +a cos w)y

+a%+ 62+ 2a8 cos w—7r?2= 0,

we have at once

fh—bg ,_hg—af

ba a ae ab — h®

which give the same coordinates of centre as before, while we have for

the radius

7% = a2 + 2aB8 cos w+ B?

c(a+b) —(f? +9") +2(fg — ch) cos w

>. ab — 1? paar

= | (fe bg)? + (hg — af)® — (ab — h*) c(a+b) — (f#+ 9?)

+2 | (fh — bg) (hg — af) — (fg — ch) (ab — h@) i cos | (ab ae

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 309

= [- (a+b) A +2h cos w. A]|+ fe ey

_ —(a+b—2h cos w) A

‘ (CLES | JL

which, by a glance at (53), is seen to represent, as before, the sum of

the squares of the semi-axes. From the value of the radius given above,

it is clear that, when the conic is an equilateral hyberbola, the radius

vanishes, and the director-circle is a circle of infinitesimal radius, viz.,

it is the centre of the conic itself, and the asymptotes, therefore, are

the only tangents of the equilateral hyperbola which are at right angles

to each other.

§. 15. Hyperbola referred to the asymptotes.—In this section,

we purpose to investigate what form the general equation assumes when

the axes of coordinates are transformed to the asymptotes ; two methods

will be given, the first very direct and elementary, the second partly

geometrical and requiring a knowledge of the invariants given above.

First method.

Let the general equation of the second degree be

ax*® + 2hay + by? + 2gx+ 2fy+c=0.

Transfer the coordinate axes to the centre of the conic, which is also

the point of intersection of the asymptotes ; the conic then becomes

ax® + 2hoy + by? +

0 vreeee (61)

and the asymptotes are given by

ax®+ 2hay + by? = 0. dev'ves Yeowse (02)

Now the equation of either asymptote may be taken to be y= mz, so

that the two values of m are found, by substitution in (62), to be the

roots of the quadratic

bm?+2hm+a=0. emeatate COO)

Hence, if a, B be the angles which the two asymptotes make with the

axis of x, both tan a and tan 6 must satisfy (63), so that we have

b tan?a+ 2h tan a+a=0

or b sin’a+2h sina cosa+tacosta=0 14... (64)

and similarly,

b sin?B+2h sin B cos B+a cos*B=0 — aseseesersee (65)

Now, the angle between the original axes being w= 5 the ordinary

formule for the transformation of coordinates (Salmon’s Conics, §. 9,

Hd. 1879, p. 7) become in this case

y sin w= X sin a+ ¥ sin B.

x sinw=X cosa+Y cos Bp.

Substituting these in (61), and arranging, we have for the equation of

the conic

310 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

(a cos*a+2h cos a sin a+b sin®a)X?

+(a cos*8+2h cos B sin B+) sin?B) Y?

+2| a cos a cos B+/h.sin (a+ f)+) sin a gin B)XY

But, by (64) and (65), the coefficients of X? and Y? vanish, and the

equation becomes

2H ay + ——,_ aaa Seo wos vou aciis ual OOM

where H is the quantity to be calculated. For this purpose, we note

that, if m,, mg be the two roots of the quadratic in m given by (63), we

have

ata Mm Ms = e

Now, we see that

H= cos a cos B jah (tan a+tan 6)+6 tan o tan p}

=” ” cos a cos B,

where

cos®a cos®6 = \ (1+ m,?)(1+ m,*) ‘ -) om = tan a, my = tan B.

| Com + mis)*-+ (I — My ms)? | as

~ (a—b)? +4?

— fe

Therefore, H= + calla

a, | (a —b)*4+ 412 |

and, finally, the equation (66) becomes

ientan ov [@-d bye an |

ame aN fab — eye?

which is, accordingly, the equation of the hyperbola referred to its

asymptotes, which was sought.

Second method.

The same result may also be obtained as follows. The equation of

the conic, referred to its centre, being, as before,

ax* + 2hay + by? + ——- aes vial Nevicuveiee, UO)

and remembering that the absolute ee is a rotation-invariant, we sce

1887.) A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. BLL

that, when referred to the asymptotes, the equation must assume the

form

Ax* + 2Hay + By? +——, abu hi eathiny naperieents” (Om)

Now, in this equation, the axis of x being an asymptote, one value of #

must be infinite, and, therefore, in this equation, r regarded as a quadratic

in x, we must have A=0; similarly, the axis of y being the other

asymptote, we must have B=0; so that (69) reduces to

2H xy +——; ora ==, meeicdecnieat, CEO)

To calculate H, we remark that, since the original axes are at right

angles, we have o= z and, ag also A=0, B=0, the invariant relation

ab—h? AB —H?

sintw sin? Q_

reduces to

— H? = (ab—h?) sin? QO, secseeeee (71)

ax*® + 2hay + by* = 0. sewuinaeae’ (ba)

But, a, B being the angles which the asymptotes make with the axes,

we have Q=a—f, and, from equation (72),

Bi Se

im, 0 = 2M ab

a+b

Qf h®—ab

el ge a—b)e+410

gan Oo ———

so that (71) becomes

He ee ee

(a — b)®? + 4h?

and (70) gives for the required equation

as { Ga byt aI F

ae (ab — h2)2 ae?

which is the same result as that obtained before. It may be noted

that the value of H might have keen obtained with equal ease by using

the other invariant relation

a+b—2hecosw A+ B—2H cos 2

sinto sin? Q

The geometrical meaning of this equation of the hyperbola is easily

seen, viz., taking p,*, p,* for the squares of the semi-axes of the conic, and

remembering that our original axes were rectangular, we have from (53),

wy=t

312 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

py + po? = mor —

pi a tabs (ab — h?)®’

so that (p,2- as = (p+ pq”)? —4& py? py’

A? (a—b)e+4i8 |

¥ (ab — he)

The equation (67), therefore, may be written

wy =z (Difference of squares of semi-axes),

which is a well-known result.

If the conic had been originally referred to axes inclined at an angle

w, the equation of the hyperbola referred to the asymptotes would have

been

aoe = Aab = cam | @- b)? + 4h? — 4 cos w 5 (0+ 0)=a0 anol]

and the right hand side may be proved to be the difference of the squares

of the semi-axes | given by (53).

§§. 16—20. Laplace’s Linear Denciton

§. 16. Genesis of Laplace’s Equation.—The theorem that

p=Aa+ By+C,

where p is the distance of any point on the curve from a fixed coplanar

point, represents a conic is first due, substantially, to Laplace (Mécanique

Céleste, Ed. 1878, t. I. p. 177). In integrating the equations for elliptic

motion, he gets

dr = dx + ydy,

which leads to

Laplace then explicitly adds that ‘Cette équation, combince avec

celles-ci,

2=ax-+ by, pe ne

pe une équation du second degré.”’ It is proposed to examine here

the geometrical meaning of the arbitrary constants in what I have

called Laplace’s Linear Equation to a conic.

§. 17. Meaning of the Constants.—That this equation represents

a conic may be shewn in various ways, and some additional information

regarding the constants may be gained from each standpoint of view.

Thus, squaring the equation and putting

paw die

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—WMemoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 313

we see that it is the equation to a conic which is an ellipse, a parabola,

or an hyperbola according as

A?+B* Z=7 1.

Now, knowing that the curve is a conic, we may next compare its equa-

tion with the focal polar equation

l=p (1+e cos 8).

Remembering that p is a function of x and y, we conclude that the

absolute terms in the two equations must be identical, whence

C=l=semi-latus-rectum.

Again, as the equation may be written in the form

=a . ae k/ AE BR,

/ AP +B? |

where p is the distance of any point on the curve from a fixed point, and

Azx+By+C

VJ Ait BP

is the perpendicular on the line Ax +By+C=0, we see, by attending to

the focus-directrix method of generating conics, that the curve is a conic

of which the directrix is

Axvx+By+C=0,

and the eccentricity is given by

e& — A?4+ B®,

§. 18. Elliptic Motion.—In order to represent these properties

geometrically, and to shew their relation to elliptic motion, it is con-

venient to begin with the following method of integrating the equations

of motion. We have, as usual,

dx px

Now = = cos 6, ~=sin 6;

dé

therefore e. (=) = — sin 6. —= — - h,

1 @

whence pa eat (=),

and, similarly, == -— (“).

314 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The equations of motion, therefore, become

dao pd sy

Integrating, we get

dt T

‘ dy da

and since on eae h,

we have

which leads to

Up = i + Ax + VY;

which is Laplace’s equation. Comparing this with the form

p=Axz+By+C,

we find, as it ought to be,

h2 !

= = semi-latus-rectum.

This shews why, in integrating the equation

dr=Xdx + ydy,

h? :

Laplace at once puts ma for the constant of integration.

§. 19. Geometric interpretation—The subject may be made

still clearer by the

help of a diagram.

The ellipse is ori-

ginally referred to

rectangular axes

through the focus

S; suppose that the

coordinate axes re-

volve round the

origin, making an

angle XS«# (=6@)

with the former po-

sition. Then, we

have

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 310

6. PM = PS,

whence

e?, PM?= PS? = SQ?4 QP?

= a? +y?*,

But, as PM is parallel to SZ, we have

PM=p-— x cos 6—y sin 6,

which gives

(ep—ex cos O—ey sin 6)? = x? + y?,

as might also have been obtained, but not so easily, by putting

x= Xcos6+Y¥ sin 6

y= —X sin 6+Y cos 6

in the equation

Comparing this with the equation

(C +Axe+By)?= p= x+y,

we get

C=ep, A= —e cos 6, B= —e sin 8,

whence, as before,

e? = A?+ B?

Also tan 0=-F,

and aed 2

fk IOVS Se

Now, when 6=0, the new axis of X coincides with tlie major axis of the

ellipse ; but, when 6=0, we have also B=0, by virtue of the relation

tan 6= at

therefore

(C+Az)? = a? + y2,

and, putting x=0, this gives, as before,

y= O= Ly

Again, the equation of the directrix is

| x cos 6+y sin O=p,

which, by substituting for @ and p, gives

Ax+By+C=0,

and this agrees with our previous result.

It may be noticed that Gauss uses this form of the equation of a

conic, and calls it the “characteristic equation” (Theoria Motus, §. 3),

Tt is easy to see that when B=0, we have A=e, and

316 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

p=C-+ ex, |

which is the form finally adopted by Gauss. Since «=p cos 6, we have

oT cos 6”

which is the ordinary polar equation. If A=B=0, we have

aa a

which is the circle. The whole theory of lines of the second order may

be based on the form

p=C+ex,

and, by means of this equation, Gauss has deduced the most complicated

properties of elliptic motion with remarkable ease and elegance,

§. 20. Eccentricity.—If we square the equation

p= Ag+ By +C,

and compare the result with the standard form

ax® + 2hay + by? +2gx+ 2fy+c=0,

we have, by equating coefficients,

a A?’—-l1 h AB 6b Bt-1

— ee — eee immed

c co’ es Ct’ oo: Ge

Therefore

(a— bet ah? _ Olea ide 4A2B2 (A2+4B2)2 et

erry ae ACO ec ae

and ;

ab—h*® (A*—1) (B*—1)—A?B2 1-¢&

ere one mG

which lead to

ee — ae Tye 0,

and this is the well-known equation for the eccentricity (§. 13).

The value of the eccentricity in oblique axes may also be obtained

from Laplace’s equation ; for, if p be the perpendicular on the directrix

from any point on the curve

p=Ax+By+0O,

we have p= ep,

_(Ax+By+C) sin sin gah

= eS Ua: A24 B2—2AB cos a. o,

whence

A?+ B?—2AB cos w

RE seeasnetnnes (73)

Now, squaring Laplace’s equation, and substituting for p*, remembering

that in oblique axes

ee =

p* = x* + y2+42zry cos w,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 317

we get

- (A2—1) «242 (AB—cos o) ry+(B?—1) y24+2ACr%+2BCy+C?=0,

a comparison of which with the standard equation

ax® + 2hay + by? + 2gx%+2fy+ce=0

gives

ee Ee) h_ AB—coso 6 B?—1

oe EO) ee eS

whence

a+b—2hcosw _ A2+ B?— 2AB cos w— 2 sin®w

iP HILy é a C2 Tr Gay

_ (2 —2) sin*w

= cen

and

ab—h* sin®w — (A2+ B2—2AB cos o)

ree — ————F TT a

_ (le?) sin*o

= Gee

by substitution from the value of e? in (73). These lead to the familiar

result

(e?—2)? (a+b—2hcos w)?

1-2 ~ (ab—h®) sintw *

§. 21. Area of a triangle.

§. 21. Triangle formed by two tangents.—We now proceed

to investigate the area of the triangle formed by two tangents drawn

from any point to the general conic, and the chord of contact. For this

purpose, we will first confine our attention to the simple case when the

tangents are drawn from the origin, and then an easy application of in-

variants will smoothly lead to the solution of the general problem.

The tangents which can be drawn from the origin to the conic

S = aa*+ 2hay + by*+29¢+ 2fyt+c=0

are given by (Salmon’s Conics, §. 147, Ed. 1879, p. 149)

(ac — 4?) «+2 (ch—gf) ay+ (be ~f2) y®=0, ..+ (7A)

and the chord of contact being the polar of the origin is

gx +fytc=0. et ee ae i 59.

The area of the triangle formed by the intersection of the lines in

(74) and (75) is at once written down by substitution in (31), viz.,

1 =O Loft by o18 = Bh = abe)

an aft = Bg igt

which may be written

Area = te 78) noe von eed GZOD

318 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

Now, if the tangents are drawn from any point (2’, y’) to the conic S,

we may make that point our new origin, and by this transformation we

know that c is changed into the point-function 8’, while A and (ab—h?),

being translation-invariants, remain unaltered by the transformation ;

hence, as a generalization of (76), we are able to enunciate the following

general |

Theorem.—If from any point (a’, y’), tangents are drawn to the

conic

ax® + 2hay + by? + 2ga+2fy+c=0

the area of the triangle formed by the two tangents with their chord of

contact is

Sif a

pe a eae (77)

where A is the discriminant and S’ the point-function of the conic.

A variety of particular theorems may be deduced from this general

formula; thus, if the curve is a parabola, the area in question is

S’

and, if, further, the point from which the tangents are drawn be the

origin, we have the theorem that, if the general equation of the second

degree represents a parabola, and two tangents be drawn from the origin

to the curve, the area of the triangle formed by the two tangents and

the chord of contact is

pare a

Ja = g/d

Again, the chord of contact being the polar of («’, y’) with respect

to the conic, has for its equation

(aa’+ hy’ +g) 2+ (he + by +f) y+ge’+fy'+c=0,

and, therefore, if p be the perpendicular let fall on this chord from

(x’, y'), we have easily

S’

8”?

tees oa! gh ES SOE og BREF SD

P= (al + hay + 9)? + (ha + by +f a SS

But, if D = O be the equation of the director-circle of the couic, and,

therefore, D’ its point-function, we have from (60)

(azx’ + hy’ + 9)?+ (ha’+ by’+f)?=(a+b) S’—D’.

Hence (78) gives

soe oe 79

p [+h pe — Dr pececs coe ove fi ).

It is now easy to find the length of the chord intercepted between the

points of contact of the tangents, for if A be the length sought, we

have

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 319

yi 2(Area of triangle)

a Ee) Sf ek Loe

which, by the help of equation (77), reduces to

D 2/{a) S’D’— (a+b) as}

- SF pe eee

Hence, we have the

Theorem.—If from any point («’, y’) two tangents be drawn toa

conic given by the general equation, the length of the chord of contact

2/{A8'D'- (att) 483}

(ab—h*) S’— A ,

where 8’, D’ are the point-functions of the conic and of its director-

circle, respectively.

Various particular cases may be deduced from the general formula

in (80). Thus, if the tangents be drawn from any point on the director-

circle, that is, if the tangents be orthogonal, the length of the chord of

contact is

. (80)

28'n/— (a+b) A

(ab—h?) S’— A"

Again, if two tangents be drawn from the directrix of a parabola to the

curve, the length of the chord is

of: a+b Wet fae

2S _ a 2S

/ 2 ae ang OO: b

If the curve is an equilateral hyperbola, the director-circle degenerates

into the centre of the conic, and the chord in question, being the line at

infinity, is of infinite length; this also follows from (80), for in this

case

=0,S'=— a = ag ere 0,

so that the numerator becomes es square root of a zero-quantity, while

the denominator also vanishes, and, therefore, the limiting value of the

apparently indeterminate expression is really infinite.

Again, we can easily find the area of the triangle formed by the

chord of contact with the lines joining the centre to the points of con-

tact. For the chord of contact, being the polar of (#’, y’), is

(aa’ + hy'+9)«2+ (he + by +f)y+ge' +fy+co=0, .. (81)

and the centre being

(= bg hg-y

ab —h® ab—12/)?

the perpendicular from the centre on the line in (81) is given by

320 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

{ (ax + hy’ +9) hf — bg) + (hen' + by’ +f) (hg — af) + (ge +fy'+¢)(ab— I?) }

+ (ab—h?) { (ase’ + hy’ +9)®+ (ha’+ by +f)?}. f

If, therefore, p, be the length of the perpendicular in question, this

reduces to

(ab—H?) a/ { (a+b)S’—D'}

Hence, as the length of the chord is given in (80), the area of the

triangle is written down to be

ne me (7 ae (83)

2 Pi eee oesoce

(ab— h?)§ (ab— h2) 8’ — a}

Tt must be carefully noticed that the two triangles whose areas are given

in (77) and (83), being on opposite sides of the chord of contact, are

affected with opposite signs; hence their algebraic sum establishes the

truth of a property enunciated by Prof. Nash, viz., we have the following

Theorem.—lIf two tangents are drawn teen any point (@, y’) to

the conic )

n= mre sts

ax®+ 2hay + by? + 2gu+2fy+c=0,

the area of the quadrilateral formed by the two tangents and the two

lines joining the centre to the points of contact 1s

/ — As’

ab Te”

where §’ is the point-function of the conic.

It is easy to remark that the geometrical meaning of the equation

of the conic is that, when the area of the quadrilateral vanishes, the

locus of the point must be the curve itself. Again, since we know from

geometry that the area of the quadrilateral is real or imaginary according

as the point is outside or inside the curve, we infer from (84) that any

given point is inside or outside the curve according as AS’ is positive or

negative, which is equivalent to the statement that the point is inside

or outside according as the discriminant and the point-function have the

same or different signs, and the same result, of course, also follows from

the formula in (77). Here we may add that if from any point two

tangents be drawn to a conic, the angle between the two tangents will be

real, only if a certain relation holds amongst the coefficients in the equa-

tion of the conic ; thus, first taking the simple case when the tangents are

drawn from the origin, we have the tangents given by equation (74), viz.

(ac — g*)x*+ 2(ch — fg)xy +(be—f*)y*= 0,

and clearly the angle between these two lines will be real, if

(ch — fg)? 7 (ac— g*)(be — f*)

A 2%.

tery

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay— Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 321

Hence, remembering that the discriminant is a translation-invariant, we

can at once generalize the theorem to the case where the tangents are

drawn from any point, viz., the angle between the tangents is real, if

the discriminant is negative ; but we have shewn that, if the tangents

are real and the point outside the curve, the discriminant and the point-

function must have different signs, so that, as the discriminant is negative,

the point-function must be positive; hence, finally, we have the very

simple

Theorem.—Auny point is outside a conic, on the curve, or inside it,

according as the point-function is positive, zero, or negative.

§§, 22—23. Inclinations of tangents to conics.

§. 22. Theorem.—We shall now prove a theorem which shews

how some well-known properties of the circle and the ellipse are corre-

lated.

Consider the conic

x2 2

+= 1 iets ci (OD)

where b? is essentially indeterminate in sign and value. The tangents

at any two points (a, ¥1), (#2, Y2) are

Le, YY

at ag ae HO ee ce

ae 79

and their chord of contact is

@ (%+ 2%) dint +42) 2 = i ed en, (88)

-) ae aan

Hence, if 0, , w be the angles of ane of the two tangents and of

their chord of contact to a directrix, we have

Soe

tan 0= ae soestat annem ee)

a® Yo

tan p= ae bes Hstetened COU)

a® YW+Yo

tan w= — 5: ers. (08)

Substituting for y,, yg from (89) a (90) in

aren ie ae 1

abe ae oe

we have

a? a2

=a... (92), (93)

= aS —. % ——

J/ 2 +0? tan? @ ee tan? lan? ¢ rs

322 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

But, substituting for y,, y. from (89) and (90) in (91), we have

x, tan 6+, tan >

t — A a Dis same x Deb oeeeesn nee z

an wy Ppa (94)

Now, assume

a® + b2 tan? pa Ns

. Cos

2 2

a2 +52 tant g = —

cos? P|

so that

= 1 —e? sin? 6, p2 = 1 = e? gin? $,

a cos 6 a@ Cos

and vy ee Ho — a pee

be <

Substituting these values in (94), we arrive at the following symmetrical

theorem, viz., if 6, >, y be the angles of inclination of any two tangents

to a conic and of their chord of contact to a directrix, we have

A cos 647! cos >’

where the eccentricity of the conic is given by

ee ae ee pe

~ gin?@ ~ gin2”

(See Hducational Times, November 1885, my Ques. 8337).

§. 28. Applications.—To verify the truth of this theorem, we

proceed to some applications. In the parabola, e=1, so that

A= cos 6, n= cos #,

e2 —

which give

2 tan w/=tan 6+tan 9,

a result which can be proved independently, and is often useful in the

elementary theory of projectiles. The particular case of the circle is

specially interesting. _Here e=0, and A=u=1, whence

a2 sin sin 6+sin ? Bea wie

cos 6+co0s ¢ ade

and 2~= 6+,

or y—O=o—ywW.

To see the geometric meaning of this analytic condition, observe that,

in the circle, the foci coincide with the centre, and the position of the axes

becomes essentially indeterminate, while the directrix is situated at an

infinite distance. Now draw any two tangents OA, OB toa circle, and

let OA, OB, BA intérsect the line at infinity in the points C, D, E;

ZOCD=6, ZODC= —¢?, ZBEC=y, ? being taken negative as it is

measured in a direction opposite to that in which 6, y are measured ;

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 323

hence we have

ZLOAB= ZCAE = 0- an

ZOBA=y- 9.

Therefore ZOAB= ZOBA, and OA= OB, just as it should be, so that

the geometric meaning is the equality of two tangents to a circle drawn

from any external point. Lastly, if we draw any two tangents OA, OB

to any conic, and, if OA, OB, BA intersect a directrix at C, D, H, we

have as before

ZOAB=6-y, ZOBA=y- #.

Now draw through the centre two radii-vectores of the curve (pj, po),

making angles 6, with the conjugate axis ; then, from the polar equation

to the curve, we have

am b2 b2

eos ae ‘sin2@’ pa? = 1—é& sin*p’

so that

b b

Py aoa. we

which furnish the geometrical meanings of the symbols A, w in the

statement of the theorem. Substituting for X, w in our original equation,

we have

py; Sin 6+ pp sin $

t =

aay p, cos 6+ p, cos ¢”

whence

| Pe sin Cy — PY o>

pg sin sin (0 - Wp) zapyi

and this asserts that the tangents OA, ark are proportional to the central

radii-vectores which are obviously parallel to them. In the case of the

circle, the indeterminateness in the position of the axes makes all the

radii-vectores equal, so that, as shewn before,

OA=OB, ~y—?=6-Yy.

It may be remarked that we might have started from the polar instead

of the Cartesian equations, as just shewn, and thus worked up to the

value of tan w given above; it is also useful to notice that, though the

theorem was obtained from a very particular form of the equation of a

central conic, it is perfectly true for the general conic, inasmuch as

the eccentricity only appears in the final result.

§. 24. Similar Conics.

§, 24. Generation of Similar Conics. Given any conic, any other

conic which is concentric with it, and similar and similarly situated,

may be generated as the locus of a point through which any two chords

of the conic being drawn at right angles to each other, the sum of the

324 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memovir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

reciprocals of the rectangles under the segments of each chord is constant,

the variation of this constant furnishing the different members of the

family of similar conics.

Let

ax* + Qhay+ by? +2qxe+2fytAcH=O — ssesresrese (95)

be the primitive conic, and («’, y’) the point through which the chords

are drawn at right angles to each other and whose locus we seek.

Transferring the origin to this point, the conic becomes

ax? + 2hay+ by®@429'e+2fyto’ =O vrecsceseeee (96)

where c’ is the point-function. The polar form of this equation is

(a cos? 6+ 2h cos 6 sin 6+6 sin? @) p?+ 2(g’ cos +f" sin @) p+c’=0 ... (97)

Hence, if p,, pp be the segments of the chord drawn through the new

origin, inclined at an angle @ to the axis of a, and pz, p, the segments of

the chord at right angles, we have, from (97),

Pi Pa =F cos? 0+ 2h cos 6 sin O-+0 sin? 6’

—— ————— C —EE

P3 Pa @ sin? — 2h sin 0 cos O+b cos’d

so that

which shews that the sum of the reciprocals of the rectangles is im-

dependent of the direction of the chord, and for any given value of this

sum, say —, the locus of (a’, y’) is given b

Y in Y ef Ad

OA Dil

which may be written

ax*+ 2hay + by? + 2aet+ 2fyAc=k* (A+D) seccsecseeee (98)

and this, of course, represents a conic concentric with the primitive one

given by (95), and similar and similarly situated; and we get a

family of similar conics by assigning all possible values to &. It

is interesting to remark that the property established here is general

in a twofold sense, viz., if the sum of the reciprocals of the rectangles

under the segments is to be constant, the point may be any point on the

conic given by (98), and the chords may be inclined at any angle to the

axis of #, provided they include a right angle. The same results, of

course, could have been obtained by applying the process to each of the

conics separately, viz., if we have the central conic

gel eas

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 325

the value of

1 ]

: P1 P2 P3 P4

is found to be

and the locus in question is

Similarly, if we have the parabola

y* = 4azx,

the value of

1 1

Pi Po P3 Ps

is ae Se

y?—4Aax! f

and the locus sought is

y*® —Aax= k*,

Lastly, as in the equilateral hyperbola, we have (a+b) =0, the required

conic-locus is the given conic itself, and we have the following

Theorem.—If through a given point P in the plane of any conic,

any two chords be drawn mutually at right angles, the sum of the

reciprocals of the rectangles under the segments is constant; and, for

different values of this constant, the locus of P is a family of concentric,

similar and similarly situated conics, which, however, all merge into the

primitive conic when it is an equilateral hyperbola. (Cf. Salmon’s

Conics, §. 181, Ex. 2, Hd. 1879, p. 175).

§. 25. Theory of Envelopes.

§. 25. On Three Parabolic Envelopes.—As an illustration of the

theory of envelopes, we proceed to discuss the envelopes of the sides of

all equilateral triangles inscribed in a given triangle.

Let ABC be the given triangle, and

A'B'C' an equilateral triangle inscribed in

it; let r be the side of this equilateral

triangle, and let LAC'B' =5+46, so that

ZA'C'B =e — 6, ZBA'C' = = +0 iB.

326 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,

Zap = pus 6—A. Then, in order to find the envelope of B'O’, take

AC, ABas oe axes of « and y respectively, so that the equation of B’C’ is

see es |

AB’ iG — eve (99)

Now, we have from the geometry of the figure

AC’ =——sin (F-9-A}, OOD eee 608 coe (100)

a i acs

AB! = sin (+9), cnet Mie ci

while | |

c=AB=AC'+C’'B

gives

sin (F-9- A) sin (F+9-B)

[ere oo ss aes

[ sin (= — A) sin (= _ B) |

= a 3 9

Pecks > “eineA + an B iy

{ cos (=- B) cos (= - os

} 5 i siti Bcioy ay isin A si

which may be written in the form

-=P Cos d6+Q sin 0, 090000 oo ve0 (102)

where

P= ee (opti eob BY iuxsstsevsye 08)

Ge =e Ce) ca 69 2) (104)

The equation of B/C’ in (99), therefore, reduces to

| sin A sin A ;

Sie Qa

sin (E+ é) sin (= — §— — A)

which may be written

| @ sin (S-A)+y sin 5 cos 6+ | y cos 5 — a cos (F-4) sin @

= sa sin (5-+6) sin (=-46-a)

== | cos (5 = pg A)+oos a },

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 327

and this may be written

r { cos A+ cos (= —-A— 20) } =E cos 6+F sin 6, ... (105)

where

E=2 sin A} a sin (=- )+y sin 5 | ait tee chal BOK)

F=2sin A y COS 37 # COS (F-A) Sesriem CLO)

Eliminating r between (102) and (105), we have

J . as :

2c cos A+ cos € — A —26)

= PE, 2 cos? 6+ QF. 2 sin? 6+ (QE+PF),. 2 sin 6 cos 6.

Assuming, therefore, 20=$, this may be written

ef |

2c cos A-+2c cos (G-A — 2)

= PE+ QF + (PE —QF) cos $+(QE+PF) sin ¢

Expanding cos (¢ —-A= ¢), and arranging the coefficients of sin ¢ and

cos ¢, this may be written I 30

M sin ?+N cosP?=K sti vad mien (108)

where

M = QE+ PF — 2¢ sin (F- A) sti idee H@QQ)

N = PE — QF—2c cos (=- A) sci (110)

K = 2¢ cos A—PE-—QF O00 ee0 cov nce (hEY)

The envelope of (108) is obviously

M?*+N2= K2,

and this, being written in the form

M*=(K+N)(K—-N),

leads, on substitution from (109), (110), and (111), to the equation

(QE + PF)? —4c sin @ tb A). (QE+ PF) +40? sin? (= oF A)

= Ac? cos? A — cos? G — A)

— Ae { [cos A — cos ( = A) PE +[ cos A +cos (= - A)] QF } '

+4 PQEF,

which may be written

328 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

(QE — PF)? — 4c [ Q. sin (F—a)+P cos (=-a) —cos A |e

—4e [P sin (= - A) ar {cos (— A) +005 A}] F+4c? sin? A=0.

As E and F are linear functions of # and y, while P and Q are constant

quantities, it is clear that this equation of the required envelope

represents a parabel, and a diameter of this parabolic envelope is given

by ) QH= PF,

which is equivalent to

{P. cos (F-a)+Q sin (F-4)}o- {P cos Q sin 3h y=0,

or, since

< T

sin (5 +B)

P cos ere) os a

3 3 sn B ’

the equation of the diameter may be written

x sin (E+ C) —y sin (7-+B) =0

The diameter can be geometrically constructed as follows, viz., on BC

describe externally an equilateral triangle BDC, and join AD; then AD

is the diameter ; for, if the point D be (a, y); we have

DC sin A DB sin A

wee OE oe cr

= ) = ?

4 sin(G+C) * sin G+)

so that the equation of AD is

which is also the equation of the diameter.

Again, if we consider the envelopes of the other two sides, they also

will be parabolas, and their diameters will be obtained by joining B and

C to the remote vertices EH and F of the equilateral triangles described

externally on the opposite sides ; and, since, from elementary geometry,

AD, BH, CF intersect in a point, it can easily be shewn, from Hue. III. 22,

and

that the acute angle between any two of them is 5 Thus, finally, we

have the

Theorems.—The envelopes of the sides of the equilateral triangles

which can be inscribed in any given triangle ABC, are three parabolas ;

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 329

the acute angle between every pair of the three axes is 33 if, through

the vertices of the given triangle, diameters of the parabolas be drawn,

they intersect in a fixed point which may be determined geometrically,

viz., if equilateral triangles BDC, CHA, AFB be described externally on

the sides, the lines AD, BE, CF are diameters of the enveloping para-

bolas and meet in a point, the acute angle between each pair being z

§§. 26—27. Reciprocal Polars.

§. 26. Reciprocal of Central Conic.—It is well-known that the

first focal pedal of a conic, being the locus of the foot of the perpendicular

dropped from a focus on any tangent, is, in the case of central conics,

the circle described on the axis-major as diameter ; hence, as the reciprocal

of any curve is the inverse of its pedal, it is clear that the inverse of

pedal of the first focal pedal of any central conic is the reciprocal polar

of a circle, which reciprocal is known to be a conic; hence it follows

that the second pedal of a conic with respect to a focus is the inverse of

a conic whose position and magnitude may be determined geometrically.

For we know that the reciprocal of a circle of radius a, with respect to

a circle of radius 4, is a conic which is an ellipse if the origin of recipro-

cation lies within the given circle, the focus of the conic is at the origin

: . yer

of reciprocation, the semi-latus-rectum is —, the eccentricity is —, where

a : a

c is the distance between the centres of the given circle and the circle of

reciprocation, and the directrix is a line at right angles to the central

i ke ue F

line drawn at a distance — from the origin of reciprocation. Now, in

the question under consideration, we have to find the reciprocal of the

circle described on the major axis as diameter, with a focus as origin of

reciprocation ; hence the conic is an ellipse, a focus of which is the

é : ; Ae is

focus of the given conic, the semi-latus-rectum 1s —, the eccentricity is

equal to the eccentricity of the given conic, and the directrix is a line at

right angles to the axis-major of the given conic, at a distance — from

the given focus.

These results are easily verified analytically, for the given conic

being

a alia Cary

remove the origin to the focus, say the negative one; then the conic is

330 A. Mukfiopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

and the first pedal, being the circle on the major axis as diameter, 1s

(x ow, ae)? + y? = a*,

the coordinates of any point on which may be expressed by means of a

single parameter, v7z.,

x=a (e + cos #),

y=asin >,

and hence the equation of any tangent may be thrown into the form

(2—ae) cos? + y sin =a.

A line at right-angles to this through the origin (which is now the

focus) is

x sin ?—y cos $=0,

and, as the second pedal of the conic, or the first pedal of the cir cle, is

the locus of the intersection of the two lines, we have, by solving for

sin ? and cos ,

pt ay a an

sai a + y? — at a2 +2 — aew’

where (a, y) is, of course, a sith on the pedal, viz., the actual equation

a (a* +4") = (a? + — aex) ,

which quartic, therefore, is the second pedal of the given conic with

respect to a focus. ‘To see that this is the inverse of a conic, we have

only to take its inverse, viz., substituting for w and y

hPa key

Bry Bae

respectively, the second-pedal-quartic is seen to be the inverse of

a® (a*+y?) = (k® —aex)?,

which is, of course, a mg viz., this may be written

en en 2kPew

be a®b® ab?

which is equivalent to

b2 bf

It may be noted that any two conics having a common focus have two of

their common chords passing through the intersection of their directrices ;

in the present case, therefore, two of the chords of intersection of this

conic and the given conic are parallel to the directrices; one of these

chords is found, by subtracting the equations of the conics, to be the line

"ke — 8

ae ie

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 331

§. 27. Reciprocal of Evolute of Conic.*—We now purpose to

investigate the reciprocal polars of evolutes of conics; but as all central

conics are included in the equation

eles (Y=, sieGanie sestiagl Le)

we will discuss the problem with regard to this general case. Since the

reciprocal is the inverse of the pedal, and as the pedal of the evolute is

the locus of the intersection of the normal and the line drawn at right

angles to it through the origin, it is clear that the reciprocal polar of

the evolute is the inverse of the locus of the point of intersection of

the normal at any point of the curve, and the right line dropped per-

pendicular to it from the origin. Now, the normal at any point («, y)

of the curve in (112) is

BEY gmc? (Si a

a \a

where X, Y being the current coordinates, the equation may be written

m—1 m—1 m — 2 m— 2

ee y Kay (2 ad f pre (113)

q’” pir a” bm |

The straight line through the origin at right angles to this, is

m—1 4m 1

Saye ee ~ hehe e cess JOLLA)

es a”™

At the common point of intersection of the two lines given by (113)

and (114), we have

2(m—1) 2 (m—~—1) m—1 ypm— 2 m— 2

— + lx ( ) G ——* (115)

qu p2m pm a pm

r 2 (m—1) 2(m—1)) m—1 m— 2 m— 2

x y a x x y

i + Tee di wy rs )( ace hn ; (116)

If (€, ») be the inverse of the point whose coordinates are given by

(115) and (116), and /? the constant of inversion, we have

keX hey}

a aye If mB ym—2\ see peepee (117)

a b ( qi” oe bm )

* The theorems established in this section were discovered by me about three

years ago, and were, on the 29th August, 1885, communicated to Mr. W. J.C. Miller,

Mathematical Editor of the Educational Times, with a view to their publication in

that journal. They have since been published as questions 8571, 8707, 8773, 8993;

9049, 9074, 9148, 9162, 9163, 9204; but, while some of these questions have appeared

under my name, the others have been, for reasons best known to Mr. Miller himself,

ascribed to different gentlemen who had, perhaps, just as much to do with the

theorems with which they have been credited, as the proverbial man in the moon.

332 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

ke Y he, m2

1 Saye eae im 8h Boe srt ccecve (118)

ay. ai ( = Y

a 5™

Tf, now, we eliminate w and y between the equations (117) and (118) by

virtue of the relation

we shall obtain the equation of the locus sought. For this purpose, we

find that

ue Ks

and

a1 A gets doy RNS ie RE LOE EN

ro k | m2 ym 2 f eveere screen (120)

j abay | ea} A

bv a’ be J

Therefore, finally, replacing (€, 7) by (a, y), we find from (119) and (120)

the

Theorem.—The reciprocal polar of the evolute of

@" +0)"

is the curve

Ta ae

er er]

1 1

=) (2) 4a(4Y, mit <a

where & is the radius of the circle of inversion.

A host of interesting results may be obtained by assigning particular

values to m and & in (121); a few are noted below.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 333

If m= 2, k?=a*®¥ b®, we see that the reciprocal polar of the evolute

of the conic

with regard to the circle described on the line joining the foci as diameter,

is the curve

a® bo?

ate +—=1] evo eve a8

oeoe (122)

which, when the hyperbola is equilateral, becomes

}. Sh ook

xe ye ae eereee concen (123)

Again, if m= 2, k=1, we see that the reciprocal polar of the evolute

of the hypocycloid

is the curve

a y®P yeh aft

(5+5) = (= a7, i) ) 200090200 b60 (124)

the radius of the circle of inversion being unity; if a=, the polar

equation of the reciprocal polar becomes

T= Qa SEC 26. 000 e00 coc one (125)

Again, since the evolute of the conic

me pp

(;) +(3) =

where

we see, by putting m=2, k®=a*%—b?, that the reciprocal polar of the

evolute of the evolute of the conic

) ip :

a® 02

with respect to the circle described on the line joining the foci as

diameter, is the curve

a2 b2\° Q

(5.45) OS orate Cate C18)

Again, by putting m=-— 2, and attending to equation (122), it is

clear that the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the reciprocal polar of the

334 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

evolute of the conic

with regard to the circle described on the line joining the foci as

diameter, is the ourve

=(7 Ss 2) (127)

(3) + HOO -OOS

Here we may remark in passing that since the reciprocal polar of the

evolute of the reciprocal polar of any curve can be geometrically proved

to be the locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent, it is clear that

the curve in (127) is the locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent

of the evolute of the conic :

2°, 3

age

a2 2

a2 aa

Hence, transforming to polar coordinates, we have the

Theorem.—The locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent of

the curve

Pay } sin O\F

-) =\a a, cs he

which is, of course, the evolute of the gies is the curve

(5-2) b= (22)'+ (SY) fx

fc 2 Shes 8

. cos 6\3 sin 0\3 ;

5 — t Coe vee eee ave

oe ( ; ) an 6 ( : ) ) (128)

which is, of course, the polar dorm of the equation (127).

Again, by putting m= 3, k®=ab, we find that the reciprocal polar

of the evolute of the parabola

(:) +() =

with respect to a circle of radius r/ ab, is the cubic curve

ya-y .% bah

Oe eas Bi). * sgaievbeetee (129)

By the application of the same process to the parabola, a variety of

new theorems may be obtained, viz., taking the parabola of the un‘

degree,

y= As”, epaies's vealed Clee

the normal at any point (#, y) is

dag SS ge Mara lle eye TD iene GY

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 335

while the line at right angles to this through the origin is

Y¥ —Ans™ *X=0 Mika

so that, at the point of intersection of the lines given by (131) and (132),

we have

1 + d2nra2(™—D) Y = dna”, ow. (14 Anyx"—*), — saveee (133)

1 + A2n2z2(™—1) xa. ax (1+Anyx™—*), 1... (184)

and the inverse of the X, Y is given by

k2 X ke

SS ee ee oe Pe SS ae ee eee ccrececce 135

: XP4+ 8 (1+ Anya”—*) eit

12 ¥ he. Ana}

= —__. — —_____——_—. cibhateenaed ft OO

Po + YY? x ele Anya"—?) or

where £, 7 are the coordinates of a point on the locus sought; hence,

eliminating x, y between the equations (135) and (136), by virtue of the

relation in (130), we have, after replacing €, 7 by x, y respectively, the

Theorem.—The reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola of

the n*” degree

y= Ax

is the curve

1 ae n—l1

yar ( +. 4) = Nek) pe cges (137)

where k is the constant of inversion.

As before, by assigning particular values to A and » in this equa-

tion, we may deduce various theorems.

Thus, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola

y* =4az,

with regard to a circle whose diameter is equal to the latus-rectum, is

the cubic curve

r (cos? 6 + cot? 6) = 4a cos 8, keene Loo)

of which «= 2a is an asymptote.

Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola

y* = 4ax,

with respect to a circle of radius a, is the cubic

a> = y? (a— 2x), iscuwsscee (Loo)

of which «= 5 is an asymptote.

Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola

y’ = 4a (x4 a),

the focus being now the origin, with regard to a circle whose diameter

is equal te the semi-latus-rectum, is the curve

r cot d=a sin 6, ieomcts CRU

336 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

which represents a circular cubic, of which «=a is an asymptote, and

the point at infinity a point of inflexion.

Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the evolute of the

parabola

y’ = 4a (x«+2a),

the origin now being the centre of curvature at the vertex, with respect

to a circle of radius a, is the quartic

y” (3x74 2y*) = a? a, seecmnebe nets CAGES

Similarly, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola

y? = 4a (a+ 2a),

with respect to a circle of radius k, is the cubic

ax? = k*y?,

It is useful to notice that if we are given any curve

L=f 1s, Ga 0, bie ssspanions, (iaiay

the normal at any point (#, y) is

(Y —y) qn SX -*) 4 svebsecenens (148)

while the line at right angles to this through the origin is

At the common point of intersection of these two lines, we have

be > (=) \x= i a (rae 7) deosesaese (les

du\* a “( du du

{ (=) +(7) Y= (yee) coe 146)

whence it follows that if (, 7) be the point inverse to (X, Y), the

coordinates are given by

oo eR a dy

f=, yao ie’. du _ du BOO bee vet ace (147)

Y dx 4 dy

12 ¥ Ny da

| X?+ Y’ du du Bee oreseeese (148)

y dx i dy

Therefore, the equation of the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the

curve given by (142) is obtained by eliminating x and y from the three

equations (142), (147), (148); and, the general theory being thus given,

the question is reduced to one of elimination.

It is interesting to note that if the coordinates of any point on the

given curve can be expressed in terms of a single variable parameter ¢,

1887.]| A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 337

the coordinates of the corresponding point on the reciprocal polar of the

evolute, may be similarly expressed. For, remembering that

da Say

du dx’

the formule in (147) and (148) may be written

=k". : = h? at

dy dy dx

ya te Y 6 +a ap

dy dy

eet eo

dy 4 oy

Yoel 9 Og TS ap

so that, if the coordinates of any point on the given curve be given by

v=f, (P)

y=fo (P),

we see at once that the coordinates of the corresponding point on the

reciprocal polar of the evolute are given by the system

ee SA Qt ore

fi %) f'1 ) +h ) fe (P)

F's (P)

2= Ph.

fi O fi @) +h2 O) fo (9)

It is clear that the coordinates of any point on the n” “ reciprocal polar

of evolute”” may be obtained from this system; and the coordinates of

points on the curves given above may also be expressed by means of a

single variable parameter.

§§. 28—29. Theorems on Central Conics.

§. 28. Properties ofthe

Ellipse.—In this section we

shall investigate the truth of

some theorems on the ellipse.

I. Let? be the eccentric

angle at any point P on the

ellipse

atpah

so that, if A, A’ are the vertices

and S, S’ the foci, the coordi-

338 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

nates of A, A’, S, S’, P are (a,o0), (—a, 0), (ae, 0), (— ae, 0), (a cos >,

b sin p), respectively. The equations to PA, PS, PS’, PA’ are easily

found, viz.,

x—acos? acos?—a,

Ae eee Peer?

or | yo Pg et tnsiigrusacee, AD

or yer een ee me a |

or yar oe “Ne prrrerre s

pain Faget sam tits

or yore pee Salen (152)

Let p, q be the intercepts made by PA, PA’, and 7, s those made by

PS, PS’, on the minor axis. Then we have

a b sin > ey b sin >

~ l—cos?’ 1=Ty cos ¢

ag be sin > _ be sin ?-

p= , sa |

e—cos > e+cos $

so that we get

2b ee oR 2

Pr SG pqy=0’," Sa ES 5

x 2be? sin > ie be? sin? Ll 1 2

Tes e? — cos? ?’ TAS Com @ 7's basin?

This shews that the sum of the reciprocals of the intercepts made by

PA, PA’ on the minor axis is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of the

intercepts made by PS, PS’ on the same axis; it also follows that, since

pq = b*, the rectangle under the intercepts made by PA, PA! is always

constant and equal to the square of the semi-axis-minor. Again, p, q are

the roots of the quadratic

z* — 2b cosec ?. z+b?=0. sha do vicsviege ae

Similarly, 7, s are the roots of the quadratic

2° —2b dA? cosec P. +027 A7=O —reeaceeseeee (154)

where A? satisfies the equation

nas cs sin? f .

e? — cos? >

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 339

which is equivalent to

| sin?? =?

Again, since the equations of all the four lines PA, PA’, PS, PS’, are

known, the angle between any two of them may be found, viz.,

2 ab

i. ne

tan APA’ = ia e ekasicncexs” (2088

p mue sin $

1 2

cot SPA = —2.o+* | tan §— sin ¢ | Be: (157)

cot S’/PA! = -. te: cot an = sin $ » (188)

We have shewn above that

telidss Aignd 2 2

g r ee s bsin¢? ordinate of P’

whence the ordinate of P is a harmonic mean as well between r and s

as between p and gq. Again, it is evident that the theorem holds, even if

S, S’ are not the foci, but any two points on the major axis equidistant

from the centre ; for, in that case, instead of putting OS=ae, we have

to put OS = ak, where is a certain constant ; thus, we have the theorem

that the ordinate of any point P is a harmonic mean between the in-

tercepts made on the minor axis by the two lines joining P to two points

on the major axis equidistant from the centre.

In order to see whether the formule

1 i_it_2

C4 Cr se

pq=F’,

hold for any curve other than the conic, let us take the inverse question

in a more general form, viz., take O as the origin of coordinates, and

BOA, OQP any two lines through it, A, B being fixed points; then,

if BQ and AP intersect in R, required the locus of R, when

aims bt Sole stolid Male

Po oe 9 te

pg=*,

where OP=p, OQ=q. Let a, P be the coordinates of R; OA=a,

OB= —b; then

340 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

But, since OP = p, OQ =4q, we have

whence

panty ee BE ose vovwsad.n BO

so that

Hence the theorem that the ordinate is a harmonic mean between the

intercepts holds only when a=, that is, when the line on which the in-

tercepts are made is equidistant from the fixed points; thus, we have the

Theorem.—Given two points and a line equidistant from them ;

then, taking for axes the given line and the line joining the points, the

ordinate of any point is a harmonic mean between the intercepts which

the lines joining the point to the given points make on the given line.

Again, if pg =k’, we must have, changing a, B into a, y in (159) and

(160),

Sl? € 1

ee 7-7) e=1,

shewing that the theorem holds only when P les onaconic. In the

particular case when the given line is equidistant from the given points,

we have a= J, and the conic is

x? y?

lf the two lines are also at right angles, they are the axes of the conic,

and. the given constant /; is the semi-axis-minor.

II. To determine the position of a point P on an ellipse such that,

if the normal at P intersects the minor axis produced in G, the polar of

G may subtend a right angle at P.

Using the same diagram, let the ellipse be

>=tTta=1,

and P the required point where the eccentric angle is ¢, so that the

coordinates of P are a cos ?, b sin ?. Then the normal at P is

ax by ner

—-—- 3 eae by)

cos? sing f

(o, Ae Cc = *). |

so that G is

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir om Plane Analytic Geometry. 341

Let CD be the polar of G with respect to the conic, so that CD is parallel

to the axis-major and has for its equation

4 I= ~~ @sin ¢

Transfer the origin to P, and take the new axes parallel to the old;

then the ellipse is

(at+acos?)* (y+b sin >)?

oe ee

a* b@

ae yy? 22cos¢ 2 sin ? |

or ata fee haar aa Oe isatsgire (LOE

The line CD is

y+b sin $= Bars yr

or Te ew icin La ot (162)

ae 2 gin? 2 eos?

where pee ene (a® sin? 94-0? Cos? p)'o wisi.es séc0! C163)

Now, PD, PC are two lines through the new origin, and through the

intersection of the conic with the line; their equation, therefore, must be

z* y* 2cos? 2 sin

ae b2 Xa xY + Aun. y2=0 aielotela oasiatevaiets (164)

These will be at right angles, if

tl 2nd

ag at serge

Substituting for A from (163) and simplifying, we have

sat we: ( i 3)( +d = itary (165)

which determines the value of $, and, therefore, of P; it is remarkable

that the result is dependent simply on the eccentricity.

III. A very interesting point arises, if we seek the envelope of the

sides of any triangle PSS’ having its vertex P at any point on the ellipse,

and its base-ends any two points 8, 8S’ on the axis-major, equidistant

from the centre, so that OS =OS'’=. Then, from (150), the equation

of PS is

Pn bk sin $

~ a’ cos 9—k * 5) Gos ¢—h’

which may be written

(ba — akb) sin $— ay cos $=— aky,

and the envelope of this for different values of $ is

(ba — akb)*?+ aty? = athty?, Per ahe AO dt CLES)

which is equivalent to

b? (4 — ak)*=a* (k*®— 1) y? dev ene sangre OROA)

or b (a—ak)=+ar/k—1ly;

342 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

apparently, therefore, the envelope is a pair of right lines passing through

the fixed point (ak, 0), and real only if k is greater than unity, that is,

if the point S is outside the ellipse. But, looking to the geometry of the

figure, it is clear that the envelope must be the given point 8S, so that

the analytical solution furnishes, apparently, a whole line for the

envelope, while geometrically only one definite point on that line satisfies

the demand of the problem; the discrepancy, however, is only apparent,

viz., the equation (167) may be written

b® (a — ak)? +a? (4/1 — k)* y2=0,

so that this must be equivalent to

) x= ak

y=0 } ;

which is, of course, the point in question. Such instances of degenerate

envelopes are by no means rare.

§. 29. Properties of Confocals.

I. Given a system of confocal ellipses, to find the locus of points

where the tangents cut off a constant area from the axes.

Any conic of the system is

ue y? :

Ce ae 1, eee cvescecce (168)

where, for the moment,

A? = a?+)2, B?= b?+ 2, c? = A? — Be = a? — D?.

Take a point (€, 7) on this ellipse where the eccentric angle is $; the

tangent is

x °° a4 pn m= 1,

and the intercepts made on the axes are

A B

cos ?’ sin ?’

so that, if h® be double the constant area in question, we have

sin ? cos eoevee cence (169)

Hence we get the system

&2 = A cos? $= (a? +A?) cos? $, lide oe ae

1° = B* sin? > = (b?+A*) sin? , ova eee lee

and from (169)

(a* + d*) (b? + d2) = h* sin? $ cos? 9. bere laa es

The elimination of A, ¢ from these three equations will lead us to the

equation of the locus. For this purpose, observe that from (170) and

(171),

£2 y2 = (a+ A?) (b? + A*) sin® p cos* ? = h* sin* > cos* ,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 343

so that

En =h? sin? > cos? >. devine ved de fe)

Again, from (170) and (171),

= eS giles, ee

ae ante ete

, ‘ c® én

or & gin? p — y? cos? $= c* sin? > cos? $= =a

(]

from (173).

This may be written

# sin? 9 — a? (1—sint 9) = 5 &,

whence

2 2

cannery Wer Oh hi

mesa otpage co OM)

2 2

paecees 0 eee dui)

Bie hata

Substituting for sin ? and cos ¢ from (174) and (175) in (173), and

simplifying, we have

(PE + W2q) (MRE — cq) = 18 (E+ a?)

which is the equation of the locus in question. Hence, we have the

theorem that the locus of points on a system of confocal ellipses where

the tangents cut off a constant area from the axes is the bicircular

quartic through the origin

(cP + h?y) (hea — cy) = h? (ar +y?)*, — seeseeseesee (176)

where c is half the distance between the foci, and h? double the given

constant area.

It is not difficult to see that this quartic-locus is the inverse of a

central conic, for, substituting for # and y

ks key

apy? OM Beye

respectively, we find that the bicircular quartic is the inverse of the conic

(ca + h@y) (h?x — cty) = h? k4, rapes Mak ble 8

where & is the radius of inversion; it is easy to see that this conic is an

equilateral hyperbola concentric with the confocal ellipses, and, if 6 be

the inclination of its transverse axis to the line joining the foci of the

confocal family, we have

tan 26=1 (; —_ a)

which furnishes for tan 6 the two values

h?—c® c#+h2

h? +62? (& — he

344. A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

II. To investigate the locus of points on a system of confocal

ellipses, where the eccentric angle has a constant value.

Let any one of the confocal system be

2 a

at R

where A? = a?+A*, B’=b?+2’; then, if > be the eccentric angle at any

point (€, 7), we have

. € = A® cos’ ? = (a?+A?) cos? 9,

7’ = B’ sin? ¢= (b? +A?) sin? ¢,

so that the locus in question is the hyperbola

2 2

a ¥ a o a — B=, ssesseeseese (178)

and this is evidently a member of the confocal family ; hence it follows

that, given a system of confocal ellipses, the locus of points where the

eccentric angle has a constant value is one of the confocal hyperbolas

which intersect the system orthogonally ; in other words, given a confocal

system of ellipses and hyperbolas, each hyperbola intersects the ellipses

at points where the eccentric angle has a constant value, and, by varia-

tion of this constant value, we get all the hyperbolas of the system, and |

from a known theorem, the envelope of all these hyperbolas is an

imaginary quadrilateral.

Similarly, if we have the hyperbola

P) ee

a ae

which is one of a confocal system, and $ the eccentric angle at any point

(€, 1), we have

&% = (a’+A*) sec? ¢,

n°? = (b? +2’) tan? 9,

so that, if the eccentric angle has a constant value, the locus is

2 2

ago page wee Fisamturere ew

and the envelope of this, for different values of the eccentric angle, is

the parallelogram formed by the four lines

(e242 — a2) = 4e?y?, ii aveskow BOP

viz., the four lines are

—e+ty+xe2=0, c—ytu=0, cty—x%=0, cty+e=0.

§§. 30—31. DLheorems on the Parabola,

§. 30. A Dynamical Problem.—Take the parabola

y? = 4ax,

which, when the origin is removed to a point on the principal axis at a

distance na from the vertex, becomes

y = 4a (a@+na). ‘itsssiener (LOND

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 345

Imagine a particle to describe the parabola under the action of a force

directed to the new origin as centre; and suppose it to be started from

the apse with the velocity in a circle at the same distance. Then

2y ot — da =,

and (2) +y TY 2 =

But x ay = ,

so that oF ay _

whence (x+2na) ot —h.

Therefore oe —P v — 2a. P. =,

where P is the central force.

This may be written

h? P P

mn A, Bic ne

(a+2na)?~ 7 (y*? — 2ax) = = 2a (x+2na),

which gives

h? ,

—5.7,.-o.0\3" eeaseecvseaes 182

- 2a (a+2nqa)? (182)

But a +y? nel 2

y? =4a (x+na).

Eliminating y, this gives a quadratic for x, whence we derive

x+2na=2a (n—1)+ r+ 4a? (1 —n)} -

Substituting in (182), we get

“La r

on a Se

{ a (n=1) 4/1 +4a* (l—7n) ;

which gives the law of force in terms of the radius vector. For an

interesting discussion of a kinetic difficulty in connection with this

dynamical problem, see a note by Dr. Besant in the Quarterly Journal of

Mathematics, t. XI, 38.

§. 31. Geometrical Applications.——Thus far we have solved a

purely dynamical question; we now proceed to obtain some interesting

geometrical properties of the parabola. We have

pa=P=-55(5)

pdr RB ar \pry

Siheee GAG

346 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,

Hence, from (183), we get

a neti

a at i (n= 1+ /[ 194 4a An) | t*

If, therefore, we take p for all values of r from+oo to— 0, we have

on rdr

(a) | Taeome raw)

To evaluate this definite integral, let us first take the indefinite form.

Put

v* = 4a* (1 — n) tan? ¢,

r=24 re 1l—n tan ,

dr =2a /1—n sec? > d,

r+ 4a* (1—n) = 4a? (1—n) sec? 9.

If, therefore, I be the indefinite integral, we have

I- 4a* (1—n) tan > sec* ¢ dp

rs (n—1) +20 4/T=n sec $ |

= _ 4a* (1—n) sin ¢ dp

~ 4a* (l1—n) sin > db

4 (1—n)* {1—4/T=n cos # |"

Sas) 1 d (cos ?)

Y tae f Tame"

1 1

Now, sec? $=1+ tan? ¢=1+4 day from (185).

pee ve (185)

Therefore

4a* (1—n)

ao —

ie Pe at dae (l—n)’

and, when r= na, this gives

4, (1 eos n) |

and, when + = 00 :

cos *#¢=0,

These give the limits of the transformed integral; if, therefore, Q be the

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 347

value of the definite integral, we have

I 2

a3 (-5)=20 ~~ and?

1 2

3 _) oh ee eee (187)

Hence we have the theorem that, if we take any point on the axis of a

parabola whose distance from the vertex is na, the sum of the squares of

the reciprocals of all the perpendiculars dropped from this point on

whence, finally,

It is obvious that

successive tangents to the parabola is equal to —.

these perpendiculars are the radii-vectores of a pedal of the parabola ;

hence, the following theorems may be enunciated.

Theorem I.—A is the vertex and 8, the focus of a parabola whose

latus-rectum is 4a; points So, Ss, ...... Sg are taken on the principal

axis such that AS, =S, 8,=...=a;. the sum of the squares of the

reciprocals of the radii-vectores of the pedal of the parabola with regard

to Sn is aya (188)

Theorem II.—The sum of the squares of the reciprocals of the

radii-vectores of all the pedals of the parabola with regard to §,, Sg... Sop is

a ee 1 (z\'

=— (a+ sat we) =5 (=) reese cles)

Theorem III.—If we take only the odd pedals, the sum of the

squares of the reciprocals of all the radii-vectores is

Oy ae 1 (z\?

=i (atgte~)=a(%) eed sO

Theorem IV.—If we take only the even pedals, the sum of the

squares of the reciprocals of all the radii-vectores is

261-1 1 (z\*

=" (= +t vu) =5 (=) ered)

§. 32. A Geometrical Locus.

§. 32. General Theorem on Conics.—If from any point P two

tangents be drawn to the conic

ie tieasate cen CORT

to investigate the locus of the middle point of the chord of contact when

348 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

P is constrained to move on any curve

iis, 4) = 0. eit eee

Let 6, be the eccentric angles at the points of contact of the tangents ;

then the tangents are

a b

= cos 644 sing =1,

a b

aud, if X, Y be the coordinates of P, we have

If, further, € 7 be the coordinates of the middle point of the chord of

contact the locus of which is sought, we have

f=5 (cos 6+cos ¢) Site Ce

hee:

n=5 (sit Oe IO) ein say inv chs (195)

The locus is obtained by eliminating 6, between these and

6+ . O+¢

sin Toe

COs aoe

FE Os Se =

_o-# b __o-$ 0. Tey Ges)

2 2

From (194) and (195), we have

é = COS cos ee

a 2 2

east ood saat

b 2 2

whence, squaring and adding,

=> &

cos* pate ee (197)

Also, by division, from (194) and (195),

ie ee

2 bE

whence

sin ae as ee ve NTS Ee Ties (29S), GSD)

2 J/ PE + aty® 2 A/ bee arn?

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 349

Substituting from (197), (198), and (199) in (196), the equation of the

locus sought is found to be

arbre a*b2n

F (aoa wars) = hs” i destawiwweye CROC)

We have, therefore, the

Theorem.—If from any point P, tangents are drawn to the conic

=-—+ a =.0,

and P is constrained to move on any curve

F (a, y) = 0,

the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to S is

= y

cae 1+8

Similarly, if we consider the parabola

y* == Aan,

any two points on the curve are

(a tan? 6, 2a tan 6), (a tan* ¢, 2a tan ?),

so that the coordinates of the point of intersection of the tangents are

given by

X=a tan Otan >

Y=a (tan 6+tan ),

and the middle point of the polar chord is given by

f=5 (tan? 6+ tan? ?),

n= a (tan 0+tan ?).

These give

a 2s

j= — +2 tan @ tan ®,

a a

whence a

_ 2a Z me

Hence, substituting in F (a, y) =0, we have the

Theorem.—If from any point P tangents are drawn to the parabola

y* = Aax,

and P is constrained to move on the curve

F (a, y) =9,

the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to the

parabola is

r (! — y)= 0.

We will here simply add that the result obtained above in equation

(200) is an immediate consequence of a new method which we propose

to call the Method of Elliptic Inversion.

26th October, 1887.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 349

Substituting from (197), (198), and (199) in (196), the equation of the

locus sought is found to be

arheé aby

F (sap oe Re Oh) Sh gaeinesoo)

We have, therefore, the

Theorem.—If from any hours P, peat are drawn to the conic

sS= “at ag yf —l1=0,

and P is constrained to move on any curve

F (@, y) =0,

the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to 8S is

x Y

F { ——, —— }=

es =)

Similarly, if we consider the parabola

y® Es Aan,

any two points on the curve are

(a tan® 6, 2a tan 8), (a tan? >, 2a tan $), .

so that the coordinates of the point of intersection of the tangents are

given by

X=a tan 6 tan >

Y=a (tan 6+tan 9),

and the middle point of the polar chord is given by

é=5 (tan* 0+ tan? ?),

n= a (tan 6+ tan 9),

These give

“pig Oe

aa —-+2 tan 6 tan ¢,

whence

2 <a .

x7 2a ZI ¥2%

Hence, substituting in F (a, y) =0, we have the

Theorem.—If from any point P tangents are drawn to the parabola

y* = Aas,

and P is constrained to move on the curve

F («, y) =0,

the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to the

parabola is

y2 — 2ax

a i)

We will here simply add that the result obtained above in equation

(200) is an immediate consequence of a new method which we propose

to call the Method of Elliptic Inversion.

26th October, 1887.

350 A. Barclay—List of the Urediner occurring [No. 3,

XXI.—A Descriptive List of the Uredinex occurring in the Neighbourhood

of Simla (Western Himalayas) —By A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal

Medical Service.

[Received 7th October ;—Read November 2nd, 1887.]

(With Plates XII.—XvV.).

The neighbourhood of Simla is particularly rich in species of

Uredines ; and, as I have paid much attention to them during the last

four years, it has been suggested to me that a descriptive list of them

might usefully be recorded for the use of future workers in this very

interesting field of cryptogamic botany. I have acted on the sugges-

tion after much hesitation, for, with the very limited leisure at my dis-

posal in the course of an active official life, I cannot hope to make the

list a complete one, nor, indeed, can the descriptions of many of those I

notice be as complete as might be desired. N evertheless, so far as they

go, my statements may, I hope, be accepted as correct in every respect,

for every one of them has been made after careful and repeated observa-

tion. I may, therefore, be permitted to hope that the list may serve

some useful purpose, more especially as no such attempt has ever before

been made in India, so far as I am aware.

With regard to the order in which such a list should be given, I

have determined, after some hesitation, to bind myself by no very strict

rule, but, in general, to enumerate, first, all those Species which bear

aecidial fructification and, then, to go on to those which are at present

known to me only in the teleutosporic stages. With reference to the

eecidium-bearing species, I may note that I have described them ge-

nerally as they occur in seasonal sequence, beginning with those which

appear earlest in spring, and ending with those which disappear last

towards autumn. The only exception I have made in following out this

plan is to withdraw from the general list all those forms which occur

on the Coniferw, as I thought it better to enumerate the characters of

these few well defined species together, rather than to disperse them

among the others, which occur_on hosts having no special relationship

with one another.

In the present contribution, I will confine myself to the ecidial

forms with which I am acquainted on hosts other than the Conifere ;

but, before proceeding to a description of them, I may draw the atten-

tion of the reader to one or two points of special interest concerning

them.

A. BARCLAY, Journ Asiat.Soc.Bengal 1887, Vol.LVI.Pt.Il.

A.Barclay, del. ; West, Newman. &C? chr.imp.

Parker & Coward, lith.

PLAUL

A BARCLAY, Journ.Asiat.Soc. Bengal, 1837. Vol CYL. Poedt.

i\)

——— \

Ki \

a i}

Tai

SSK

We ey:

Lill

Wid NG

A Barclay, del. West, Newman &O° chr.inip.

Parker & Coward,hith.

PL.XIV.

Ses

eas

RSENS

A ._BARGLAY, Journ. AsiatSoc.Bengal 1887, Vol.LVI.Pt.1L.

West Newman kC? chr.imp. ~

Parker & Coward lith

A. Barclay, del

West Novaman&C° chr. imp.

IVE ES:

eee

887.V

ae ab

Bardlay, del

A.BAROLAY, Journ Asiat.Soc. Beng

Parker & Coward, lith.

, 7 a i — _ .

a — of —. 4 al — wT. , —— oe " iv — _ =~ a eS ee eee —_— .- — = + ee

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 351

In the first place, it will be observed that I have related several of

them with a mark of interrogation to species already described as

- occurring in Europe. Until the complete life-histories of these are

known, it is impossible to state definitely whether they are correctly so

related or not. They are probably all varieties of, or identical with,

the European forms with which I have associated them. In only one

case (that of cidiwm Urtice, Schum.) has the life-history of the

Indian variety been fully traced.

Five of the species described are I believe quite new, in only one of

which (Acidium Strobilanthis) have I been able to trace the whole life-

history. That on the wild strawberry (Fragaria vesca) appears to be a

complete autoecious Uredine, but I have unfortunately not been able to

prove this by actual experiment. And, in this connection, I would

again draw attention to the inconvenience caused by the system of

nomenclature now adopted of naming species of Uredines after their

teleutosporic forms, an inconvenience which it appears to me will

increase as our knowledge of this family is extended, for it sometimes

happens that a host bearing an ecidium bears also a teleutospore,

which, however, has no relationship whatever with the ecidium. For

example, according to this principle, I have been obliged to name the

Afcidium which occurs on Valeriana Wallichi Uromyces Valeriane,

although I have abundant evidence that the teleutospores have no

genetic relationship whatever with the Aicidium. In all probability,

future investigation will show that the Uromyces. borne on this host is

related to some other A‘cidium on an entirely different host, whilst

the teleutospores borne on some other host are related to the Aicidium

on the Valeriana in question. In the cases of Strolilanthes Dalhou-

sianus and Urtica parviflora, which bear Aicidia whose complete life-

histories are known, teleutospores (puccinia) are also borne, which,

however, have no relationship with the Alcidia.* The Acidium

on Jasminum revolutum presents no unusual features, but those on

Huphorbia cognata and Andrachne cordifolia display aberrant features

of great interest. Indeed, these two Atcidia differ so markedly from all

others that I have regarded them, provisionally, and until I shall have

had further opportunities of working out their complete life-histories,

as belonging to a new genus, which I propose calling Monosporidium.

With these introductory remarks I shall pass on to a description of

the several species.

* See “ Scientific Memoirs by Medical Officers of the Army of India,” Part IT,

Calcutta, 1887.

352 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [No. 3,.

Y.—AICIDIAL FORMS.

1.—ANcIpIuM SANICULA, sp. nov.

Sanicula (Europza, L. P)

The earliest Aicidium which I have observed in Simla is that

which occurs on Sanicula Huropea. Towards the latter end of March,

some of the earlest leaves of this plant which are being unfolded in

spring may be found attacked by this parasite. It is by no means an

uncommon fungus. The invaded areas of the leaf are usually small,

and generally convex below, where the aecidial cups are usually borne,

though a few may open also on the upper surface of the leaf. The

eecidia discharge their spores through a porous like opening at their

summits, 2. e., the peridium does not open widely as in most cases with the

fragments of the torn tissue forming a stellate opening. The petioles

are also frequently attacked and at such places they are thickened and

often bent. A single leaf blade may present from one to three patches

of invasion, these patches being slightly paled in colour as seen from

the upper surface.

Acidiospores—The moistened ecidiospores measure on an average

25°4 x 19°4 uw, the measurements exhibiting extremes of 26 mw in length

and 20 win breadth. The epispore is finely punctated and contains

from two to three germ pores. The endospore is very fine and not

readily distinguishable from the epispore (Fig. 1, Pl. XII.). The spores,

when placed in water under suitable circumstances, readily germinate,

throwing out long curved tubes measuring 6 to 7 «in diameter. Only

one germinal tube is produced by each spore. ‘The peridial cells mea-

sure about 30 x 22 pw (Fig. 2, Pl. XII.).

Remarks.—This ecidium is, I believe, a new species ; but may be com-

pared with that which I have described below on Pimpinella diversifolia.

2.—Uromyces VALERIANZ, Schum P

Valeriana Wallichii, D. C.

Next to the foregoing A‘cidium one on this plant is among the

earliest of these parasites to be found in spring. Towards the end of

March, some plants may be found in initial stages of attack; but it is

towards the latter part of April that it is seen in its fullest develop-

ment. This Alcidium is one of the most common and abundant in

Simla, and individual plants are often so extensively affected in blade

and petiole as to be completely destroyed. The affection is usually

confined to the blades and petioles of the radical leaves, but may

also be found on the upper leaves of the flowering stalks and even,

though rarely, on the bracts of the flower heads. When a leaf is ex-

tensively affected, it is considerably distorted, and the parts actually

ee a a

1887. | in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 353

invaded by the mycelium are considerably thickened. At an early

stage of the affection, patches of pale yellow discoloration may be ob-

served on the leaf blades, which are usually convex above. On this

upper convex surface, a few spermogonia may be seen, whilst the eci-

dial fructification usually emerges from the lower or concave side. The

ecidia consist of short tubular peridia filled with reddish yellow

spores bursting at their summits in a stellate way.

The spermoginia are remarkably few and their mouths are sur-

mounted by a tuft of paraphyses.

The ecidial affection above described is met with abundantly

throughout the time the plants are in flower, but, as soon as the seeds

are being matured, towards the middle or end of May, this affection

disappears entirely. After an interval of some weeks from the time

the ecidial parasite has entirely disappeared, these plants are seen to be

attacked by a teleutospore-bearing mycelium also mainly on the radical

leaves, though occasionally also on others. This affection always ap-

pears on leaves which bear no trace of formerly having borne the

zecidial parasite. The spores are extruded from dark brown pustules

of minute size, which usually occur in great numbers on each affected

leaf. Hach pustule is surrounded by a zone of yellow discoloration.

At first, these spores are extruded only from the upper surface of the

leaf, but later also from the lower surface, exactly opposite the site of

the upper spore bed and therefore from the same mycelium. The

lower pustule is usually smaller than the upper. At first, when a spore

pustule exists only in the upper surface of the leaf, the affected area

bulges upwards (convex upwards) with a corresponding concavity

below; but this disappears when the lower surface is also involved in

spore extrusion.

Afcidiospores—These are abstricted serially from basidia arranged

on a flat hymenium. They are pale orange-yellow round or oval bodies

measuring, when dry, 17 x 15 y and, after lying some time in water,

22 x 20m (Fig. 12, Pl. XII.). The epispore is smooth and unmarked.

They do not germinate readily in water (Fig. 10, Pl. XIII.). The peridium

consists of a layer of single cells.

Teleutospores.—These are brown single-celled bodies—Uromyces—

borne singly on stalks (Fig. 13, Pl. XII.). They are somewhat pear-shaped,

measuring when moist 20 x 22 pw, and the stalks bearing them are

about twice the length of the long diameter of the spore. The spores

are readily detached from their beds without any portion of the stalk

adhering to them. The epispore is firm and resistant and a little

thickened towards the base, where it joins the stalk. It is sparsely

beset externally with tubercles. A few fine paraphyses usually occur

354 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

among the spores. Most spores exhibit a nuclear space or body in the

centre. Although I placed them in several nutritive solutions and in

water, I never observed them germinating.

Remarks.—I have made very numerous experiments with the view

of tracing the life-history of this very common Aicidium, but without

success. JI am quite convinced that the teleutospore-bearing fungus

has no connection whatever with that bearing the ecidium, not only

because many carefully conducted experiments failed to establish any

such connection, but also because a considerable interval elapses, as I

have already noted, between the complete disappearance of the Aici-

dium and the appearance of the teleutospores. I have also attempted

to reproduce the Acidium by inoculating leaves with almost every

teleutospore with which I am acquainted, and most of which I hope to

describe later in this series.

This fungus may be identical with Uromyces Valeriane, Schum, in

which the ecidiospores are stated to measure 17 x 24 mw and the

Uromyces spores, 20 to 26 by 15 to19. The latter fungus, however, also

possesses uredospores, which are entirely absent in the Himalayan

species.

3.—Puccinia Viota, Schum P

Viola serpens, Wall.

An Aicidium of a very destructive kind is extremely common on

Viola serpens in spring (April) and occurs simultaneously with that

described on Valeriana. As a rule, large areas of the leaves become

affected and very frequently the petiole also is extensively involved.

Sometimes there is scarcely a portion of the whole leaf, blade and stalk,

which is not involved, and, in such cases, the whole leaf speedily suc-

cumbs to the parasite. In such extreme cases, the blade of the leaf is

crumpled up almost beyond recognition, while the affected stalk is bent

in various directions and considerably hypertrophied. Limited patches

on the leaf blade are generally round and very deeply bulged down-

wards, 7. e., with a concavity upwards. The ecidia are borne most

usually on the under surface of the leaf, but a few burst forth also

from above. But little discoloration is caused by the mycelium on the

upper surface of the leaf, which is only slightly paled.

Later in the season, about the beginning of June, when the eci-

dial fungus has disappeared, the new leaves of the violet are often at-

tacked by another puccinia-bearing parasite. Many leaves may now be

found, in the same localities where formerly the ecidial parasite was

common, studded with numerous dark brown or black pustules of the

size of a small pin’s head, mostly on the under surface. These pustules

are irregularly scattered over the leaf blade, bursting through the epi-

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 355

dermis (after having raised it considerably) by a clean rent. Opposite

the pustules, on the upper surface of the leaf, small greenish yellow

spots may be seen. Although the greater number of pustules emerge

from the lower surface, yet many also burst forth from the upper sur-

face, especially when the leaf is very largely attacked (Figs. 4 & 5,

Pua.) |

It has been stated above that these puccinia-pustules are usually

borne on newly unfolded leaves, but, in one or two instances, I found the

dried up remains of ecidial patches on the petioles of leaves which

bore these teleutospores. This observation naturally led me to think

that the two forms were genetically related, and I accordingly made

numerous attempts to establish the relationship upon experimental

grounds, but always without success. I am therefore inclined now to

regard the two parasites as entirely distinct, and I am supported in this

view here, as in the case of Valeriana above, by the fact that, as a rule, a

distinct interval of about a month or more elapses between the complete

disappearance of the ecidium and the appearance of the teleutospores ;

and it is quite exceptional to find any trace of old ecidia on plants

bearing the puccinia-producing mycelium. I may here note that I have

made numerous attempts during the last two years to connect the

Afcidium on the violet with several teleutospores occurring on various

plants in Simla, but, as in the case of the even more common Valeriana

Ajcidium, always without success.

Aicidiospores.—When well moistened in water, the spores measure

21 x 18 p, but, when dry or immediately after immersion in water, they

measure on an average 19 x 14-8. They readily germinate in water,

throwing out a single more or less sinuate tube measuring about 6 y» in

diameter (Fig. 6, Pl. XII.). This germ-tube has a tendency to throw

out short lateral branches. The orange-red contents of the spore

wander into the furthest end of the tube. The spores appear to have

3 to 4 germinal pores, but only one germ-tube is formed by each.

Teleutospores—These are dark brown puccinia easily detached

from their beds without any portion of the stalk remaining adherent

(Fig. 7, Pl. XII.). When dry, these spores measure as follows :—whole

length, 30,; length of upper cell, 14; length of lower cell, 164;

breadth at septum, 18 w. The spores are somewhat thickened ‘at their

free ends, sometimes to the extent of 4. Among these puccinia-spores,

a few single-celled spores were often found which may have been

either uredospores or a second form of teleutospore. They are brown

bodies with thick resistant walls covered externally with prominent

tubercles. They measure, when dry, 20 x 18 won an average: I never

observed their germination. Some freshly collected spores were

356 A. Barclay—Jist of the Uredines: occurring [No. 3,

placed in water in a growing cell on the 20th March, and they germi-

nated freely, although some spores preserved in botanical drying paper

since the previous autumn had lost vitality (Figs. 7 & 8, Pl. XII.). The

promycelium from the upper cell emerges from the apex, whilst that

from the lower cell emerges from a point close to the septum. The

promycelium produces four sporidia from four cells into which the

end of the promycelium is divided, the most distant one being produced

upon a sterigma arising from the very apex of the germ-tube

(Figs. 7,8, 9, Pl. XII.). The sporidia are oval, measuring from 6 x 4 mw

to7 x 5p (Fig. 10, Pl. XII).

ftemarks.—It is possible that this fungus is identical with, or, more

probably, a variety of, Puccinia Viole, Schum., although the measure-

ments of the latter given by Winter* do not agree with mine very

nearly. Winter’s measurements are as follows :—ecidiospores 16 to

24 «by 10 tol8 yp (average 20 x 14) against my measurement of

21 x 18; uredospores.19 to 26 w in diameter against my measurement

of 20 x 18»; teleutospores 20 to 35 w by 15 to 20 w (average 27:5 x

175) against my measurements of 30 x 18 y. The characters of the

teleutospores as given by Winter agree with those of mine.

4.—Puoccrnta PiMprneLLa, Strauss.

Pimpinella diversifolia, D. C.

The next ecidium which attracts attention 1s not so common as

those above described, and occurs on Pimpinella diversifolia. This

parasite may be found in certain localities towards the end of April or

the beginning of May, and is very soon after that missed again. Indeed,

towards the end of May, it has already become very scarce. The fungus

usually attacks the first leaves that are unfolded of this plant, these

being simple leaves of the shape of the common violet leaf. The

compound leaves later unfolded were very rarely found attacked. The

invaded areas of leaves are discoloured, becoming pale yellowish green,

and the ecidia are borne almost wholly on the under surface, though a

few occasionally break through the upper surface.. The ecidial fruit

consists of tubular peridia measuring about 2 to 2°25 m.m. in length

which burst at their summits in a stellate manner. In addition to the

leaf blade, the petiole is not unfrequently attacked, and here the peri-

dial tubes are somewhat longer than they are on the leaf blade.

Several distinct patches of ecidia sometimes occur on a single petiole,

but in such cases the blade is also largely affected. At these places

on the petiole the tissues are somewhat hypertrophied. The leaf blade

also where invaded is thickened, the depth of the laminal tissues at

* Die Pilze Deutschlands, &c. Von Dr. George Winter.

1887.} in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 357

such places being about 0:44] m.m., whilst the normal thickness is about

0:239 m.m.

A little later, towards the end of May, when the ewcidial parasite is

becoming rare, some of the compound leaves (never the. simple ones)

may be found attacked by.a separate mycelium bearing uredospores.

This uredospore-bearing mycelium is never found on the same leaf

bearing ecidiospores, and itis therefore quite probable that the two

mycelia are in no wise genetically related to one another, The uredo-

pustules are minute, circular, and saffron-coloured, mostly on the upper

surface of the leaf, though by no means infrequently also on the lower.

Sometimes the upper surface of a leaf may be seen to be densely covered

with these uredo-pustules.

Again in autumn, about the end of September and October, the

same plant may be seen largely affected by a puccinia-bearing fungus,

a distinct interval having elapsed since the disappearance of all trace

of the uredo-bearing fungus. These puccinia-pustules are minute and

round, like the uredo-pustules, but black, and occur both on the upper and

‘lower surfaces of the leaves, sometimes in great profusion. The stem

is also often affected; the pustules here are linear, their long axes

corresponding with the long axis of the stem.

The «cidiospores are reddish yellow with very thin walls, the

epispore and endospore not being distinguishable from one another :

they are round, oval, or somewhat fusiform (Fig. 14, Pl. XII.). The round

spores measure 20 to 21 win diam., the oval about 32 x 20 yw, and the

fusiform about 38 x 14 pw, shortly after being wetted with water.

The spermogonia are likewise situated on the under surface of the

leaf: they measure about 0163 m.m. in depth and 0.189 mm. in

breadth. Their mouths are beset with paraphyses projecting about

0.063 m.m. The spermatia are round or oval and measure 4 x 3 pm.

The peridium consists of elongated cells, very unlike those of the

ecidium on Sanicula described above, measuring about 60 x 20 p, and

easily detached from one another by teasing (Fig. 15, Pl. XII.).

Uredospores—These are reddish yellow round or oval bodies with

coarse tubercles on the surface of the epispore. On an average, the

moistened spores measure 22 x 183 pw. They germinate readily in

water. (Fig. 3, Pl. XII.). .

Teleutospores.—These are brown two-celled bodies (puccinia) readi-

ly detached from their beds with avery small portion of the stalk re-

maining adherent to them. In each cell, a clear nuclear body or space

may be seen. The epispore is marked externally by fine ridges. They

are not thickened at their free ends. As with the uredospores, I never

succeeded in getting them to germinate in water. Their measurements

358 A. Barclay—Tist of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

are as follows :—whole length of spore 30m; length of lower cell 13 p

and of upper cell 17; breadth at septum 23 w; extreme breadth of

upper cell 24 w and of lower cell 22 yu.

Remarks.—At first it seemed extremely probable that all the three

forms above described were phases of one fungus, and I attempted fre-

quently to establish a relationship between them by experiment, but

always without success. This alone, however, does not justify me in

definitely denying a relationship between them, since it is quite possi-

ble that some condition of my experiments militated against the mani-

festation of a relationship. However, the experiments were carefully

conducted and often repeated. I also attempted to reproduce the ecidium

by laying the teleutospores found on several grasses in the neighbour-

hood on the young leaves; but in these attempts also I failed.

This parasite is probably identical with Puccinia Pimpinelle,

Strauss, in which the ecidiospores are said to measure 18 to 35 pw long

and 16 to 21 » broad (average 26°5 x 18°5 »), the uredospores, 23—32 pw

long and 19 to 24 mw broad (average 2775 x 21°5), and the teleuto-

spores, 26 to 35 pw long and 17 to 26m broad (average, 30°5 x 21°5).

The only feature in which this fungus differs from that which I have

described is in the characters and size of the uredospores. In Strauss’s

plant the uredospores are said to be pale brown, while in mine they are

reddish yellow and smaller.

5.—PvUcCcINIA CORONATA, Corda P

Rhamnus dahtricus, Pall.

The Aicidium which occurs on this plant is not very common, al-

though occasionally an attacked tree or bush is very extensively affect-

ed. The fully ripe ecidium may be found as early as the latter part

of May, but it is more usually met with about the middle of July. The

fungus attacks leaves, young stem (igs. 1, 2,3, Pl. XIII.), and drupes,

the last sometimes very extensively indeed. When the leaf is attacked,

the invaded areas are usually small, and generally only one patch occurs

on each leaf. These patches are dark reddish brown above, surrounded

by a halo of pale yellow (Fig. 2, Pl. XIII.), and the orange-yellow ecidia

are borne on the lower or concave surface of the leaf, opposite the dark

central part seen above (Fig. 1, Pl. XIII). The red colour of the

patch is due especially to discoloration in the palisade cells, and the

abnormal thickness to hypertrophy of the spongy tissue, the palisade

cells retaining their normal dimensions and characters. The tissues —

in the areas invaded are very extensively permeated by hyphex, and

many cells are destroyed. While the thickness of the leaf blade

is normally 0°126 m.m.,it is about 0440 m.m. in patches bearing ripe

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 359

eecidia. A patch of ordinary size measured 1 c.m. in total diameter,

the central reddish brown part measuring 6 m.m. in diameter. The

patches are sometimes considerably larger, however, and more irregular

in shape. The ecidia are tubular structures, very deeply sunk into the

laminal tissue, measuring about 1:75 m.m. in length, and therefore re-

sembling in some degree the Alcidium on Pyrus variolosa described

below. With very few exceptions, the ecidia burst from the lower

surface of the leaf. These patches on the leaves are often placed near

the margin of the leaf, and are usually between and not over the princi-

pal veins; but when a vein is involved it is considerably thickened.

When the stem is attacked, which occurs but rarely, it is considerably

swollen. The drupes when attacked are often densely covered with

zecidial tubes, set at right angles, all over them.

The spermogonia are formed on both the upper and lower surfaces

of the patches, and may often be found ripe when the ecidia on the

same patches are also fully developed. They are inserted between the

cells of the single layer of palisade cells when situated on the upper

surface. They have a tuft of paraphyses protruding through their

mouths, and measure about 0:°107 m.m. in depth and breadth.

The ecidiospores are round orange-yellow bodies of very uniform

size measuring 23 » in diameter when recently wetted with water

(Fig. 5, Pl. XIII.). The peridial cells are roughly hexagonal, adhere very

firmly to one another, and measure about 26 x 16 py. The centre of

each cell contains orange-yellow matter like the contents of the zci-

diospores (Fig. 4, Pl. XIIT.).

Remarks.—There can be little doubt that this _Aicidium is caused by

a Puccinia, with all the characters of Puccinia coronata, which occurs

on Brachypodium sylvaticum in Simla, but unfortunately I have not had

sufficient opportunities of verifying this. So far as my insufficient

experiments go, I have always obtained negative results. I am also not

quite sure whether this A’cidium does not also occur on Sageretia

oppositifolia.

6.—PucciniA FRAGARIZ, nov. sp.

Fragaria vesca, Linn.

During May, and just before it flowers, the Wild Strawberry, Fra-

garia vesca, may in some years be seen attacked by an ecidial fungus.

This parasite is, however, a rare one, and I found it on two occasions only

in 1885 at localities distant a few miles from one another, and on each

occasion only a single affected plant was found. Alcidial fructification

was found both on the petiole and on the leaf blade. It is somewhat

curious that the same leaf bore simultaneously uredo and teleutospore

pustules, but all the three forms of spore-pustules were quite distinct

360 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

from one another, with green normal tissue between them—at least, I

could not trace any mycelial connection between them. The ecidial

fructification consists of groups of e«cidia on the margins of the leaves.

The portions of the leaf blade bearing these quickly wither and dry up

after the ecidia ripen. The ecidia break through both the upper and

lower surfaces of the leaf, but more frequently from the lower. Sper-

mogonia of the usual form are frequently present, especially on the

petiole when this is affected, and they are placed usually close by the

side of the ecidia.

The ecidiospores are pale yellow and very irregular in size and

shape, varying from round to oval, often faceted and irregularly

angular. Their average measurements when moistened are 22 x 15°8 p-

The epispore is finely punctated (Fig. 6, Pl. XIII.). Placed in a decoction

of cow-dung (Brefeld) several in 24 hours threw out short germinal

tubes of an average diameter of 53 yp, but the greater number of

Spores would not germinate.

The wredospores are oval or pear-shaped and pale yellow in colour

(Fig. 7, Pl. XTII.). They are produced in little circular yellow pustules,

which are situated on both surfaces of the leaf. The external surface

of the epispore is beset with prominent tubercles. The moistened

Spores measured on an average 21 x 17. Placed in a decoction of

cow-dung, only two were found to have germinated on the 5th day,

whilst those placed in water did not germinate at all (Fig. 8, Pl. XIII.).

The teleutospores are contained in little black pustules situated close to

the eecidial fructifications. They were produced on both the upper and

lower surfaces of the leaf blade, but more frequently on the lower sur-

face, as in the case of the ecidia. Thespores are dark brown, two-

celled bodies, puccinia, easily detached from their beds, breaking off

with only a small fragment of stalk adhering (Fig. 9, Pl. XIII.). The

average measurements of these spores when moistened were as fol-

lows :—whole length 31°7 »; length of upper cell 15°8 w, and breadth of

same 22°4 »; length of lower cell 15°8, and width of same 2] p. The

stalks bearing these spores are from 2 to 25 times the whole length of

the spore. Amongst these teleutospores a few uredospores occurred of

the characters above given. The teleutosporeS’ were sown in a decoc-

tion of cow-dung, as well as in water, but they did not germinate. On

one occasion, in autumn (November), I found a single leaf of this plant

plentifully covered with teleutospore-pustules. I did not succeed in

getting them to germinate.

From want of sufficient material, I could not experimentally de-

termine a genetic relationship between these different spores, but the

close proximity of the teleutosporic sori to the ewcidial fructification and

1887.] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 361

the occurrence of uredospores in the teleutospore-pustules lend some

support to the view that we have here to do with a complete autoecious

Uredine. However, in the absence of experimental evidence, this remains

@ mere presumption.

Remarks.—I believe that this is an entirely new species, and I have

therefore named it Puccinia Fragarie, in accordance with recognised

precedent in nomenclature, although I should have preferred naming it

Meidium Fragarve.

7.—/NcIDIUM LEUCOSPERMUM, D. C. P

Anemone rivularis, Ham.

This fungus is remarkably localised. During the last three years,

although I have looked for it everywhere about Simla, and the host

may be found everywhere, I have found itin only two localities, one in

Simla (Annandale), the other in a forest (Cheog) about 14 miles distant.

In these localities I have found it in June, July, and the beginning of

August, before the plant flowers. The most striking peculiarity of this

vecidium is that it is white. The whole leaf is often involved, though

generally only well-defined portions are, and frequently the margin of

the leaf (Fig. 11, Pl. XTIL.). The sxcidia break out almost entirely from

the under surface, though a few may occasionally be seen on the upper

surface. When a young immature leaf is attacked, as is often the case,

there is a striking arrest of growth, the leaf never attaining the usual

size shown by sister leaves of the same plant which are not affected—

indeed, a fully affected young leaf is often only one quarter the normal

size. The petioles were never seen to be attacked. Sometimes every

leaf of a plant was found attacked. The attacked areas after the

ripening of the ecidia quickly turn brown and wither.

The ccidiospores, when just wetted, are round or oval and measure

on an average 17-7 x 15:6 uw. The epispore is beset with very minute

tubercles (Fig. 12, Pl. XIIT). I never succeeded in getting them to

germinate in a growing cell. The peridial cells measure about

18 x 16 p.

The spermogonia, formed only on the upper surface of the leaf,

measure about 80 pw in depth and 120 yin breadth. They are very

superficially situated, having their bases sunk only through the epider-

mis and resting on the palisade cells. A tuft of paraphyses projects

through their mouths about 40 to 50 yw in length.

Remarks.—Puccinia Anemones, Pers., occurs on A. nemorosa and

A. ranunculoides, forming powdery masses of teleutospores (without

uredospores) on the under surfaces of the leaves. Hach of these hosts

also bears an Aicidium, that on A. ranunculoides (Alc. punctatum,

Pers.) having violet-brown ecidiospores and that on A. nemorosa

362 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

(4c. leucospermum, D. C.) having white spores. Although I have

carefully searched for teleutospores on A. rivularis in Simla, I have

never found them, and I am therefore constrained to call this A‘cidium

4c. leucospermum in the meantime. Schrodter, I understand, thinks

the teleutospores on A. nemorosa are related to the Aicidium borne on

the same host, whilst Fuckel relates the Aicidium on A. ranunculoides

with the teleutospores borne on it. The Himalayan Acidium would

appear to throw some doubt on the connection between their teleutos-

pores (Puccinia fusca, Relhan) and the two ecidia, or, at any rate, if

that be indisputable, the Himalayan Acidium must be entirely different,

being most probably a heteroecious Uredine.

8.—Aicipium THALICcTRI FLAVI, D. C. ?

Thalictrum Javanicum, Blume.

The Acidium on this plant, as in the case of that just described

on Anemone, is remarkably localised, although the host is widely

diffused. It is therefore a rare parasite, although, in the localities in

which it is found, it occurs abundantly enough. It is met with during

the rains, in July, while the plant is flowering. Only the leaf blades are

as a rule affected, but occasionally the petiole is also attacked, when it is

considerably hypertrophied and distorted. Fig. 1, Pl. XIV. represents

the petiole attacked in two places: in both cases it will be seen that

the petiole has become considerably elongated and in one case also bent

completely round through 360°. When the parasite attacks the leaf

blades, little reddish yellow spots are formed as seen from above,

measuring ordinarily from a minute point to 4 or 5 m.m. in diameter.

Sometimes, however, the patches are much larger—in one case 1 c. m. in

diameter—and then the leaf is considerably distorted, especially when

a main vein is involved. These larger patches are reddish brown

above. The attacked areas are generally convex above at first, but

often, as the area becomes larger, the converse obtains. The patches

are frequently placed over a prominent vein, which is then, within the

affected area, considerably swollen. The number of patches on a single

leaflet varies from one to twelve or perhaps more. These attacked

areas on the leaf blade are considerably thickened: the normal thick-

ness of these delicate leaves is 0°095, m.m., whilst near a young still im-

mature ecidium it was found to be 0°410 m.m.

Spermogonia are formed abundantly both on the upper and lower

surfaces, and to the naked eye appear as minute pellucid reddish yellow

spots. They are of the usual structure, measuring about 63 to 80 mw in

depth and 75 to 94 » in width. These structures are well sunk into

the leaf tissue. Their mouths are surmounted by a tuft of paraphyses

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 363

about 60 to 65 win length. The tissues of the leaf are not so greatly

hypertrophied in the spermogonial stage as they afterwards become,

the depth of the laminal tissues near a ripe spermogonium being 0°189

m.m. in one case.

The peridium (Fig. 13, Pl. XIIT) consists of a single layer of angular

flattened cells measuring from 31°5 or 37°8 » in length by 16 to 31 pin

breadth, or on an average 33°6 x 23°21 pw, shortly after immersion in

water. It opens stellately. The ecidiospores are oval or round (Fig. 14,

Pl. XIII.) reddish yellow bodies with a smooth epispore. The contents

are either homogeneous or granular, more usually the latter. When

just wetted, they measure about 25 » in diameter, and the epispore is

about 1°5 w« to 2 in thickness. They are given off serially as usual

from basidia, but there are intermediate cells between succeeding spores

Grae. FS, Pl. XITT.).

Remarks.—It may not be out of place here to refer to a very fine

Aicidium on Thalictrum minus, Linn., which I found on the 7th May

1884 at Urni, a village on the Hindustan-Thibet road about 126 miles

from Simla towards the “ Interior.” It is quite possible that this is

the same species as that which I have just described as found in Simla,

but it gives rise to very considerably greater distortions and hypertro-

phies in its host. The attacked plants were indeed extremely distorted :

sometimes a whole flower head exhibited a mass of small eecidial tubes

(Fig. 16, Pl. XV.), and individual leaflets when largely invaded exhi-

bited the most curious forms (Fig.17, Pl. XV.). In this form, sometimes,

though not very frequently, the stalk also was affected. The ecidio-

Spores are orange-yellow, and measured, when dry, 19 x 16monan .

average, but, when well moistened, 22 x 18 p.

It is possible that both these forms are identical with, or varieties

of, Meidium Thalictri flavi, D. C., the ecidiospores of which are said

to measure 17 to 28 uw long and 14 to 20 » broad.

9.—icip1um JAsMINI, nov. sp.

Jasminum humile, Linn.

An Aicidium may be found on this plant during July and August,

but is decidedly uncommon. The parasite attacks both leaf and petiole,

but more commonly the leaf blade, giving rise to an irregularly circular

patch, slightly paled above, greenish yellow and brownish red below.

These patches vary in size, but are usually about 8 m.m. to 1 ¢. m. in

diameter. The involved areas of the leaf are slightly thickened. The

eecidia burst out exclusively from the under surface of the leaf, so far as

my observations extend. They contain brilliant orange-yellow spores,

the peridium, a short tubular structure, bursting at the summit in a

364 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinesx occurring [No. 3,

stellate manner. Spermogonia exist only on the upper surface, pre-

ceding the appearance of the ecidia by a very short time—indeed,

while ripe spermogonia exist on the upper surface of a patch, young

unopened ecidia may also be found on the lower surface of the same

patch.

The mycelium, which ramifies between the parenchyma cells, is

colourless. The bases of the spermogonia extend to the inner level of the

palisade cells, and the bases of the ecidia from the other side reach

down to the same point. The spermogonia measure about 126 win

depth and 157 mw in breadth, and have a tuft of paraphyses projecting

from the mouth to about 63 p.

The peridium consists of a single layer of flat cells, more or less

hexagonal and measuring about 26 x 22 pw (Fig. 2, Pl. XIV.). These cells

are thick-walled and contain some yellow oil globules in their

cavities.

The ecidiospores, after lying a few minutes in water, measured

26°2 x 20°2 onan average. Their contents are of a brilliant orange-

yellow colour, and they have a thin epispore without any markings

(Fig. 3, Pl. XIV.). I did not succeed in observing their germination, as

they steadily refused to grow in water. The only other species of Jas-

mine common in Simla is J. officinale, L., but this host nevers bears an

Aicidium, although the closely related J. grandiflorum, L., which grows

at considerably lower elevations, harbours a yery distinct and peculiar

one, which I hope to describe later,

10.—Monosporipium EupHorsiz, gen. et sp. nov.

Euphorbia cognata, Klotzsch.

Towards the end of July and during the first half of August, a very

peculiar Aicidium on this plant presenting some very unusual charac-

ters is not uncommon; and some individual plants are very extensively

attacked. Only the leaf blades are attacked, so far as I have observed,

and a single leaf may exhibit from one to six patches of invasion.

These patches are circular and rosy red above with a broad and irre-

gular halo of paled yellowish tissue around them, the paling increasing

in area as the patch grows older (Fig. 4, Pl. XIV.). On the under sur-

face the patch is quite white and cushion like (convex). When very

young, this cushion on the lower surface of the leaf is uniformly con-

vex, and with a field lens a few pellucid spots may be seen in its centre,

which are spermogonia. Later, as the spermogonia wither, a very dis-

tinct pit or depression is formed in the centre of the cushion, and, while

this central pit enlarges in area, so the circular cushion surrounding it

becomes more and more prominent and whiter. At last the central pit

a a ee ere SS rE, me

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 365

is very distinct with now black points, the dried up spermogonia, over

it (Fig. 4, Pl. XIV), and then the epidermis covering the surrounding

cushion tears circularly near the external margin of the cushion and curls

up inwards towards the centre disclosing a bed of white secidiospores (see

left-hand patch in Fig. 4, a. and b.). The spermogonia, which are extremely

superficially placed (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.), are thus situated on the under

surface of the leaf only. They are of the usual form and structure with

a tuft of paraphyses protruding through the mouth. The whole organ, ex-

cluding the paraphyses, measures about 50 » in depth and 100 » in breadth.

The ecidiospores, when just wetted with water, measure from 22 x 20 uw

to 19 x 18 p, the average of several measurements being 21 x 19-2 pu.

The spores are colourless and almost round (Fig. 5, a. Pl. XIV.) with an

epispore densely studded with minute tubercles. The distribution of

the myceliwm is peculiar and deserves description. In a section of a

leaf passing through the ecidium, it will be seen that the mycelium

lies mainly in two strands, one under the upper epidermis, between it

and the palisade-cells, the other and larger under the lower epidermis,

between it and the spongy cells (Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.). Moreover, the charac-

ter of the layer of hyphe under the upper epidermis is of a somewhat

looser, more pseudo-parenchymatous character, than that under the

lower epidermis (Fig. 7, Pl. XIV.). It should be noted that these

layers of mycelial filaments are composed solely of hyphe without any

part of the host tissue being involved within them, and thus resemble

strikingly the non-algal parts of lichens. The palisade-cells and spongy

. tissue between the two layers of mycelium are indeed extremely little

affected or altered in any way. While in unaffected normal places the

length of the palisade-cells is about 60 p, and the depth of the spongy

tissue layer about 50 p, these measurements within attacked areas are

about 56 » and 36 pw, thus showing some diminution in size, especially

in the spongy layer. The lower mycelial layer is about 50 w in depth and

the upper layer only 24. The ecidial fructification is, as it were,

inserted within the lower mycelial layer (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.), some

strands passing above it and some below it. The peridiwm consists of

a layer of cells about 32 x 30 pin size, forming only a roof to the

extremely large circular ecidium (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.). These cells

are very loosely attached to one another, readily becoming isolated. Such

an isolated cell is shown in Fig. 5, b. Pl. XIV; and this figure also shows

that it is beset externally with tubercles. The scidiospores are given

off in rows from a pseudo-parenchymatous hymenium without any well

defined basidia, and have no intermediate cells between successive spores

(ea 6, Pl. XTV.). The eecidiospores, aS Seen in rows in sections of leaves

that have been hardened in absolute alcohol, are cubical (Fig. 6, Pl. XTV.).

366 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

The germination of these scidiospores is very peculiar and un-

like that of any other species with which I am acquainted, with

the single exception of the ecidiospores of the Adcidium on another

Euphorbiaceous plant (Andrachne cordifolia) described further on. I

have not here, unfortunately, access to special memoirs on the develop-

ment of individual Uredines, so that I am unable to state definitely that

the mode of germination of these spores is altogether unknown, but, so

far as I have been able to consult the works of others on this subject, I

have not seen this mode described. The spores germinate fairly readily

in water, throwing out the usual single germ-tube, measuring 5 pw in

diameter (Fig. 7, Pl. XV.). After a time, from 24 to 48 hours, a secon-

dary spore (sporidium?) is formed at the end of the germ-tube, not

upon any sterigma, but simply separated from the tube by a septum

(Fig. 9, Pl. XV.). This secondary spore is round or oval, is double-

contoured, and contains well defined granules in a mass of proto-

plasm (Fig. 9, Pl. XV.). They measure as a rule 14 win diameter. The

day after the formation of this secondary spore, it germinates while

still attached to the primary germ-tube, throwing out a secondary

germ-tube which soon takes on a spiral form (Fig. 8, Pl. XV.). After

this, the whole structure perishes, and I have not been able to deter-

mine its future history.

Remarks.—This Aicidium is evidently not Mc. Huphorbic, Gmelin,

(or Uromyces Pisi, Pers.), as in this species the mycelium is described

as pervading the whole plant or shoot, deforming all the leaves and

preventing the formation of flowers on the shoots attacked. In the

Aicidium above described, only local and well-defined areas of the leaves

are attacked by the mycelium; the leaves are not altered in general

shape, and the shoots bear flowers as usual. For much the same

reasons this Alcidium is not Uvromyces scutellatus, Lév., which also

markedly deforms the leaves. It remains to consider its affinities with

the genus Endophyllum and especially with H. Huphorbice silvatice,

D. C., on Huphorbia amygdaloides, which is said to cause a well defined

alteration in the leaves of the host, rendering them shorter and wider

and somewhat fleshy, and discolouring them to a pale yellowish green

colour. Moreover, this parasite has orange-yellow spores 16 to 26 p

long and 12 to 18 » wide, whilst in the Simla Avcidium the spores are

colourless or pale brownish and measure, as stated above, 22 x 20 p to

19 x 18 p. Moreover, the germination of the ecidiospores of the last

mentioned Alcidium is different from that described in the case of

Endophyllum, which is essentially of the nature of the germination of

teleutospores. There is, however, some resemblance between the two

AXcidia in this respect, for we may consider the secondary spore of the

1887. ] “an the Neighbourhood of Simla. 367

Simla Aicidium to be of the nature of a sporidium, and then the only

difference that exists between them is that, whilst in Endophyllum

four deciduous sporidia are formed on sterigmata, in the Simla parasite

only one non-deciduous one is produced directly at the end of the pro-

mycelium instead of at the end of a sterigma. But these differences

are still great enough, I think, to entitle the species to be regarded as

the type of a very distinct group of the Alcidiomycetes having its

closest affinities with the genus Endophyllum. The only other Aici-

dium with which Iam acquainted that would find a place in this new

group or genus would be that which I have described further on on

Andrachne cordifolia. I would define the characters of this new

(provisional) genus as follows :—

MonosPoRIDIUM, gen. nov.

Spore layer very like, or identically the same as, that of the Aici-

dia of Puccinia and Uromyces. The spores are abstricted in rows, but

behave in germination somewhat like teleutospores in that the germ

tube (promycelium?) produces a secondary non-deciduous spore

(sporidium ?) directly at its extremity without the intervention of a

sterigma.

11.—Puccrnia Graminis, Pers.

Berberis aristata, D.C.

During August, the Barberry may frequently be found attacked by

an ecidium-bearing parasite. Only the leaves are attacked, and, on

them, circular patches are formed, almost crimson-red on the upper

surface with a narrow halo of pale yellow-green (Fig. 3, Pl. XV) and

pale rosy red below with pale yellow ecidia thickly strewn over it.

A single leaf may contain from one to six oreight such patches. A

medium-sized patch measures from 4 to 5 m.m. in diameter (including

the halo of yellow), but sometimes the patches exceed 1 c. m. in

diameter. With a field lens, numerous spermogonia may be seen on the

upper red surface, but also afew in the centre of the lower surface,

around which the ecidia are arranged. ~

The ccidiospores, when just moistened, measure from 22 x 17 u

to 20 x 18 p, or, on an average, 20°8 x 17:8 uw. The contents are bright

orange-yellow, and usually on one side of the spore a colourless space is

left filled apparently with colourless protoplasm (Fig. 8, Pl. XIV) giving

a characteristic appearance to the spores. The peridial cells are gen-

erally square in outline and measure about 20 x 18 yu (see Bigs 9 PE

XIV.). They are thick-walled, thicker on one side (Fig. 10, Pl. XIV.),

and contain orange-yellow matter in their centres.

When invaded by mycelium, the leaf is generally considerably

368 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [No. 3,

thickened, and the cells of the host are filled densely with starch grains.

The spermogonia are situated mostly on the upper surface of the leaf,

though some are borne also on the under surface. They are of the

usual structure, well sunk into the tissue of the host, and with a tuft

of paraphyses protruding from their mouths. These organs generally

measure about 0198 to0'151 mm. in depth and 0138 to 0.126

m.m. in width, the tuft of paraphyses measuring about 75 p in length.

Remarks.—There can be no doubt, I think, that this is identical

with Puccinia Graminis as described by De Bary, although I have not

confirmed its genetic relationship with the Puccinia on cereals which

occurs very abundantly in all the fields around Simla. I am also not

quite certain that all the three forms of Berberis which occur in Simla

(namely, B. vulgaris, L., and B. Lyciwm, Royle, in addition to that al-

ready mentioned) bear the same species of Aicidium. The subject is

one which requires further investigation and I will therefore leave it at

present an open question.

12.— _ Aicrp1um Urtica, Schum., var. HIManayeEnse.

Urtica parviflora, Roxb.

T have described the life-history of this remarkable and very com-

mon Atcidium elsewhere,* so it is only necessary here to state briefly its

characters. The parasite gives rise to remarkable hypertrophies of the

tissues of the host invaded, usually the leaves and petioles, though fre-

quently also the stems. When attacking the leaves, it has a special

proneness to invade the main veins; and, by causing very great hyper-

trophy in them, gives rise to remarkable contortions. When it attacks

the stem, it usually produces well defined comparatively large tumours or

excrescences. The parasite is usually found in its fullest development

during July. The hypertrophy of the parts invaded is due mainly to

the increased size of the parenchyma cells, which are stored with nu-

tritive material, and, to a very subordinate extent, to mycelial invasion.

The mycelium penetrates some of the parenchyma cells forming haus-

toria of the branched type.

The spermogonia measure about 0178 m.m. in depth and breadth

with a tuft of paraphyses 68 p long.

The wcidiospores are contained in a peridiwm of a single layer of

flattened polygonal cells measuring on an average 20 w in diameter.

The ecidiospores are given off in long rows from basidia arranged

very regularly on a level base. They are yellow round bodies with

finely granular contents and beset externally with minute deciduous

* “ Scientific Memoirs by Medical Officers of the Army of India,’ Part II.

Calcutta, 1887.

1887. | in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 369

tubercles. The moistened spore measures on an average 15°6 x 13:1 p.

The life-history of this ecidium is completed on Carex setigera, Don.

The uredospores on this second host measure from 19°8 x 13°5 p to

192 x 128 py. The teleutospores (puccinia) are 56 w long by 15 ps

broad on an average. The upper cell measures 24 to 20 » in length

by 12 to 17 » in breadth, whilst the lower cell varies from 20 to 14 pin

length and 12 to 14m in breadth. In germinating, each cell forms a

promycelium which divides at its end into four compartments each

forming a sporidium atthe end of a slender sterigma. The sporidia

measure 12 x 8yu. For further particulars I must refer to the paper

already alluded to.

13.—Acip1um SrrRopILaNntuls, Barclay.

. Strobilanthes Dalhousianus, Clarke.

The Aicidium which occurs on this plant is probably the most

common and widely diffused in Simla. I have described its life-history

fully in a paper in “ Scientific Memoirs by the Medical Officers of the

Army of India”*, to which I would refer those who desire further in-

formation, while here I will only note its main characters. The para-

site may be found abundantly during July and August attacking only

the leaf-blades and very rarely indeed the petiole. The leaves are

often found very extensively bespattered with circular discoloured

patches, yellow or yellowish green above and rosy or purplish or yellow

below. The patches usually measure about 4—5 m.m. in diameter, but

sometimes more, and are usually slightly concave above. The sper-

mogonia are borne on the upper surface and may be recognised as minute

points. The ecidia are borne on the lower surface. The invaded

areas are considerably thickened, the thickening being due mostly to

hypertrophy of the spongy cells and toa lesser extent to that of the

palisade-cells. The mycelial filaments are of the usual characters and

form here and there simple tubular haustoria.

The peridiwm consists of a single layer of flattened angular cells

measuring on an average 163 x 116 w. The ecidiospores are given

off in rows, as usual, without intermediate cells. They are irregularly

round pale orange-yellow and measure, when just moistened, 18 x 16 pm.

The spermogonia measure about 100 win depth by 94 » in width.

They are formed both on the upper and on the lower surface of the leaf,

but more frequently on the upper. They have a tuft of paraphyses

protruding through their mouths about 80—90 wm.

This fungus completes its cycle of development on Pollinia nuda,

* “ Scientific Memoirs by the Medical Officers‘of ihe Army of India,” Part II,

Calcutta, 1887.

370 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

Trin. The uredospores on this last mentioned host measure, when just

wetted, 21°6 x 20°24. The teleutospores (puccinia) on the same mea-

sure 36 w in length by 16m at the septum. The septum divides the

spore into two equal halves. The promycelia from each cell divide at

their ends into four cells, each of which produces a sporidium at the

end of a slender sterigma. The sporidia measure from 10 x 6 p to

12 we 4 pee

14.—GYMNOSPORANGIUM CLAVARLEFORME, Jacq. ?

Pyrus variolosa, Wall.

An Aicidium (Roestelia) on this single species of the several mem-

bers of the Pomacezw in and about Simla is fairly common from May to

August: but I have observed in this case, as in several others, that in

some years it is more common than in others. For example, in 1885, I

found no difficulty in obtaining as many specimens as I desired: in

1886, I experienced the greatest difficulty in finding a very few, while

now, in 1887, it is again fairly common, though not so common as in

1885. It attacks only the leaf-blades and no other parts, so far as my

observations have extended, forming well defined patches, orange-red

above and yellowish below, the upper surface being densely studded

with spermogonia. Generally the fully developed older dark green

leaves bear these ecidial patches, the younger paler leaves being only

exceptionally attacked and these late in the season, namely, in July,

The area of the leaf blade invaded varies in extent from a few milli-

meters in diameter to 1 c. m. or even a little more, and is considerably

thickened. While the thickness of the normal leaf blade is about 0°170

to 0190 mm., the attacked parts when ecidia are developed measure

about 0°880 m.m. The thickening of the leaf blade is due mostly to an

apparent proliferation of the spongy tissue cells, which are also altered

in form, becoming long palisade-like cells instead of irregularly round

as under normal conditions. The true normal palisade-cells are about

44 yin length, whilst the transformed spongy cells are 63 to 107 » in

length. The mycelium ramifies throughout the cells of the attacked

areas. ;

The ecidia are very deeply sunk, long tubular structures, the

portion sunken beneath the level of the epidermis being about 0°756 m.m.

in length and about 0°190 m.m. in diameter. Hach ecidium is situated

on a minute papilla and is extruded only from the under surface of the

leaf, never from the upper. That portion of the ecidial fruit which

projects freely beyond the level of the epidermis is about 1 to 2 m.m.

in length.

The peridium consists of a single layer of cells, the lower ones

being more elongated than the upper. Those situated about the middle

le ee ace. SS

1887.] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 371

measure about 70 x 22 pw, and all are beset with prominent rod-like

excrescences (Fig. 5, Pl. XV.). When the ecidium is ripe, the peridium

bursts longitudinally in strips from summit to base.

The ecidiospores are round or oftener oval, measuring, when

just wetted, 286 x 246 mw onan average. They are pale brown in

colour and their surfaces are beset with minute tubercles (Fig. 6, Pl.

XYV.).

The spermogonia are formed only on the upper surface of the leaf,

and when ripe have a sticky clear fluid over them probably secreted by

the tuft of paraphyses, which, arising from the very base of the organ,

project considerably (about 50 to 60 w,) from the mouths. They are

well sunken into the tissue of the leaf, their bases pushing down and dis-

integrating the palisade-cells. They remain covered over by the cuti-

cle until ripe, when the cuticle is raised and opened by a porous opening.

The formation of the spermogonia precedes that of the ecidia by a

very considerable length of time. In the spermogonial stage, the hy-

pertrophy of the leaf tissue is not so great as it becomes later, the

thickness of the lamina being about 0°41 m.m. If sections of the leaf

through a spermogonium be stained with Spiller’s purple, it will be

found that, while the sterigmata are coloured blue, the spermatia are

coloured brick-red. The spermatia are oval and measure 8 x 4 p.

Remarks.—From the nature of the dehiscence of the peridium, there

can be no doubt that this Alcidium is identical with or allied to Gymno-

sporangium clavarieforme, Jacq., though in some respects it is not unlike

G. juniperinum, L., especially in the colour of the spores. JI made very

frequent and numerous attempts to reproduce this A’cidium with teleu-

tospores from a Gymnosporangium on Cupressus torulosa which is by no

means uncommon on the few trees which occur in Simla, but always

without result. Notwithstanding these negative results, 1 am still,

however, inclined to believe that this Gymnosporangium (the only one

I am acquainted with in these parts) is genetically related to the Aici-

dium just described, and I attribute my negative results to the influence

of some unknown condition attending my experiments, although I have

varied the conditions in every conceivable manner.

15.—Monosporipium ANDRACHNIS, gen. et. sp. nov.

Andrachne cordifolia, Mull. Arg.

During August, especially towards its latter end, an Alcidium

is not unfrequently met with on this host, which is common at eleva-

tions a little below that of Simla. It is not, however, a common

Aicidium. Only the leaves are attacked and on them circular

patches are formed by the fungus, red above with an irregular halo of

372 A. Barclay—List of the Uredineee occurring [No. 3,

yellow around it (Fig. 2, Pl. XV ) and pale rosy red beneath (Fig. 1, Pl.

XV.). The patch is concave on the upper or red surface, the under

surface being correspondingly convex, and on this latter surface only

are the Aicidia produced. Generally only one patch is to be found on a

single leaf, though I have seen as many as six. The patches are usually

very uniform in size, generally measuring about 6 m.m. in a diameter.

The centre of the under surface of the patch is occupied by a number

of spermogonia, while around it the ecidia are grouped more or less

irregularly. A few spermogonia, however, emerge from the upper

surface also. This Alcidium, therefore, in its general characters

already resembles that described above on LHuphorbia cognata, but

differs notably in the ecidia being isolated cups, whilst in Huphu-

bia we may imagine that the several cups have all fused together into

one large circular ecidial fruit. The peculiar arrangement of the

mycelium, however, in layers so characteristic of M. Huphorbiae

is not found here. The mycelium ramifies generally among the

cells as in other ecidia. The palisade-cells are not disarranged or

deformed in any way, but the spongy tissue cells are hypertrophied and

proliferated. The thickness of the leaf where invaded and where ripe

aecidia were borne was in one instance 0°334 m.m., whilst the normal

thickness was 01138 m.m. The spermogonia are very small and super-

ficial, as in M. Huphorbiae. They are insinuated between the epidermis

cells and measure about 44 win width and 25 to 30 mwindepth. The

zecidia when fully ripe measure about 0°265 to 0°248 m.m. in width and

0:233 to 0°217 m.m. in depth.

The ecidiospores are round, oval (Fig. 11, Pl. XV.), colourless, or very

pale brown, and measure, when just wetted, on anaverage 21°6 x 18°4 p,

varying from 20 x 16 to 24 x 204. They are given off in rows with-

out any intermediate cells. The peridial cells are flat and irregular in

shape, imbricate in arrangement, and measure from 18 to 24 m in

diameter (Fig. 10, Pl. XV.). They are beset with small ridges or

tubercles. The mode of germination of these scidiospores is exactly

like the peculiar germination of the spores of Monosporidium Huphor-

biae. The spores germinate very readily in water, throwing out a

long non-septate tube, when the empty spore wall is seen to be

beset very densely with minute tubercles. After lying in water 24 to

36 hours, a secondary spore is formed at the extremity of the germ

tube (Fig. 13, Pl. XV.) just as I have described it in the case of Euphor-

bia. This secondary spore or sporidium is separated off from the

germ tube by a septum, but never falls off altogether from the tube.

In a cultivation of 48 hours’ duration, I saw numerous secondary spores,

and several of them, while still attached, had commenced to germinate,

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 373

throwing out narrow tubes, which, though twisted a little (Fig. 14, Pl.

XV.), never became spiral as in the case of M. Huphorbiae, nor so long.

These secondary spores measure from 18 x 15 » to 22 x 16 wand on

an average 20°3 x 15. They are double-contoured and contain large

granules in their protoplasm.

16.—Aiciptum CompositTarum, Martins.

Myriactis nepalensis, Less.

I have never found this Alcidium actually in Simla, where the host

is common, but at Mashobra, a few miles beyond the Station, at about

the same elevation. It may be found there towards the end of August

and beginning of September. Only the lower leaves are affected, and

generally before the plant sends up its flowering stalk, though I found

one plant with three of its lower leaves affected while it was in full

flower. The patches are circular and usually single, but sometimes more,

on each leaf, and they are very large, measuring about 1‘5 c. m. in

diameter. The upper surface is pale yellow with a dark discoloured

centre as the patch becomes older, while the lower surface is very

pale yellow and here the ecidia are borne in great numbers thickly

set together. With a field-lens it may be seen that the spermogonia

are borne on the upper surface quite on the margin of the patch and not

within it.

The ecidiospores are irregularly round or oval, pale yellow, and,

when just wetted, measure from 14 x 14 to 17 x 12m and on an

-average 16 x 15:2 uw. (Fig. 15, a., b., Pl. XV.). The spores are given off

in rows as usual. The epispore is thin.

The peridial cells measure about 34 x 16 w to 42 x 20 wand are

arranged in an imbricate manner (Fig. 15, c., d., Pl. XV.).

Remarks.—The Aicidium not occurring actually in Simla, so far as

Iam aware, I have not been able to pay special attention to it. I

presume it may be included under Meidium Compositarwm, Martins,

although the measurements I give of the ecidiospores are smaller

than those given by Winter in the case of Puccinia flosculosorum, Alb.

& Schw., and Uromyces Junci, Desmaz. However, as I do not know of

any teleutospore belonging to this A‘cidium, I cannot do better than

refer it provisionally to A. Compositarwm, as recommended by Winter.

Concluding Remarks.——This completes the list of secidium-bearing

Uredines I have hitherto been able to examine in Simla, with the excep-

tion of the five which occur in Conifere, and which I hope to describe

in a future paper. Three of these (on Abies Smithiana and Cedrus

Deodara) I have already described. in this Journal.* The other two

occur on Pinus longifolia and P. excelsa.

* J. A. S. B. 1886, vol lv, pt. ii, pp) 1—11, pls. i—iii; pp. 140 - 143, pls. iii, iv ;

et pp. 223—226, pls. vi, vii.

374 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [Norte

In addition to these, I have seen Alcidia on a species of Geranium

(probably nepalense) and on Ranunculus diffusus, but in each case I only

once found specimens, and unfortunately in each case I was unable

to examine them. They are extremely rare about Simla. I may here

also note that a very interesting Alcidium occurs on Jasminum grandi-

Jlorum, L., whose life history I am now engaged in investigating, but it is

confined to the low-lying valleys near Simla and never appears in the

station, which is too high for the host. A nearly allied species (Jasminum

officinale, L.) which occurs abundantly in the woods about Simla never

harbours this parasite or that which I have described above on

Jasminum humile.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.

Plate XII.

1. Sanicula : wscidiospore, x 350.

2. Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.

3. Pimpinella : uredospore, x 350.

4. Violet : leaf, lower surface, natural size.

5. Ditto : leaf, upper surface, natural size.

6. Ditto : gecidiospore, 24 hours in water, x 250.

7a Ditto : promycelium, x 350.

8. Ditto : ditto.

9. Ditto : ditto: showing terminal sporidial formation, x 250,

10. Ditto : germinating sporidium, x 350.

oe, Ditto : peridial cells, x 400,

12. Valeriana : scidiospore, x 580.

13. Ditto : uromyces spore, x 580,

14, Pimpinella : wcidiospore, x 350.

15, Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.

Plate XIII.

1, Rhamnus: leaf, lower surface, natural size,

2. Ditto : ditto, upper surface, natural size.

3. Ditto : stem attacked, natural size.

4, Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.

5. Ditto : wcidiospore, x 350.

6. Fragaria : wcidiospore, x 350.

G: Ditto : wuredospore, x 350.

8. Ditto : germinating uredospore, x 350,

9. Ditto : teleutospore, x 350,

10. Valeriana: ecidiospore, x 400.

11. Anemone: outline of leaf showing attack: natural size.

12. Ditto +: wscidiospore. x 480.

13. Thalictrum: peridial cells, x 350.

14. Ditto : wcidiospore, x 350.

15. Ditto : basal cells of a row of zecidiospores showing intermediate

cells, x 480.

drake ia ek Ie

Thalictrum :

Jasminum

Ditto

Euphorbia

Ditto

Berberis

Ditto

Andrachne

Ditto

Berberis

Pyrus

Ditto

Euphorbia

Ditto

Andrachne

Ditto

Myriactis

in the Neighbourhood of Simla.

375

Plate XIV.

portion of shoot showing petioles attacked, natural size.

peridial cells, x 350.

gecidiospores, x 350.

a. leaf, natural size.

b. same somewhat enlarged.

a. vecidiospore, x 350.

b. peridial cell, x 350,

transverse section of leaf showing peculiar disposition of

mycelium and superficial nature of spermogonium.

a. layer of mycelial filaments on lower side of leaf ; b.

same on upper side, x 480.

zecidiospore, x 350.

peridial cells, x 350,

two isolated peridial cells, x 350.

Plate XV.

under surface of affected leaf, natural size.

upper surface.

upper surface of attached leaf, natural size.

peridial cells, x 350.

gecidiospores, x 350.

zecidiospore germinating, x 350,

germinating zcidiospore, showing formation of secondary

spore (sporidium) and its germination while in situ,

x 350.

secondary spore (sporidium), x 350.

peridial cells, x 350,

zecidiospores, x 350.

showing end of germinal tube (promycelium ?) of exci-

diospore with commencing formation of secondary

spore or sporidium, x 350,

completely developed secondary spore, x 350.

showing germination of secondary spore (sporidium) 350.

a. row of zecidiospores ; b. isolated spore ; c. and d. peri-

dial cells, x 350.

Flower head of Thalictrum minus completely involved and distorted by

the Aicidium, natural size, approximately.

Leaf of same.

covered profusely with ecidia outside with a few tubes also inside,

natural size, approximately.

Leaf deeply hollowed, much enlarged and thickened, and

376 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus gracilis. f

XXII.—Natural History Notes from H.M.’s Indian Marine Survey

Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,

Commanding, No.8. Description of a new species of the Brachy-

urous Genus Lyreidus from the Depths of the Andaman Sea.—By

J. Woop-Mason, Esq., Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and

Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College

of Bengal, Calcutta.

LYREIDUS GRACILIS, n. sp.

3. Very closely allied to ZL. channeri.* Body and legs slenderer.

Rostrum acutely triangular with straight sides. Extraorbital and

antero-lateral spines absolutely as well as relatively longer. The head

being narrower and more produced, its sides (between the extraorbital

and anterior antero-lateral spines) are less deeply hollowed out, and its

supraorbital borders, more deeply and narrowly emarginate. LHye-

peduncles and cornez equal and similar, apparently of the same form

and proportions as in the left eye of L. channert, the former reaching

to about the junction of the second with the apical third of the length

of the rostrum, the latter opaque yellow with the subjacent pigment

showing through the cuticle as a dark ring round their bases. Propodite

of the chelipeds armed below with three triangular spines. The mero-

podite bears two sharp erect spinules about the middle of the length of

its upper border. In all other respects much as in LZ. channert.

The unique example obtained measures :—

Millims.

Length of carapace, from tip of rostrum to posterior margin, ... 233

‘3 ¥ % o, to middle of a straight

line joining bases of posterior anterolateral spines, 1) oe

"5 from same straight line to posterior margin, 15:0

Bias of carapace, across the parallel-sided part, ... oo) Re

Breadth of head, between tips of extraorbital spines,... we, ae

Distance between tips of posterior antero-lateral spines, se JED

Length of posterior antero-lateral spines, fy 1s wee

Pine) amerion ped ee ne 3°7

» 9, rostrum, from a straight line inte to et bottoms of

the supraorbital emarginations, Ss ws 1h eee

» », extraorbital spines from the same tangent, he 4‘0

Locality. Off Port Blair; 271 fathoms; green ooze ; January

2nd, 1888.

* Supra, p. 206 et seqq, pl. i.

NPN eM Oe MOO NB OS”

EN 'D Besket

Names of New Genera and Species have an asterisk (*) prefixed,

PO ONS OO Oe Oe Sm

Abies smithiana, 373

Accipiter melaschistus, 78

13 nisus, 78

Acrocephalus stentoreus, 81

Actinacantha propinqua, 104

an compositarum, 373

3 euphorbie, 366

= fragariz, 361

yg jasmini, 363

5 leucospermum, 361, 362

= punctatum, 361

e » - : Sanicule, 352

strobilanthis, 351, 369

56 thalictri flavi, 362, 363

< urtice, 351

» var. himalayense, 368

Aigialites curonica, 87

.Alauda cristata, 84

» guttata, 84

*Amphipronoé longicornuta, 212, 220, 229

Anas angustirostris, 88

» crecca, 88

‘4, penelope, 88

», Strepera, 88

Andrachne cordifolia, 351, 366, 367, 371

Anemone nemorosa, 361, 362

+ ranunculoides, 361, 362

rivularis, 361, 362

Anthus blakistoni, 84

» rosaceus, 84

Aranea, 107

Argiope, 287

Arvicola guentheri, 72

Ascyltus, 283

Asio otus, 79

*Atmetochilus, 199

fossor, 109

Attus, ‘101

» forceps, 283

Barbastellus communis, 258

Berberis, aristata, 367

= lycium, 368

. vulgaris, 368

Brachypodium sylvaticum, 359

{ A complete Index to the articles on Rhynchota published in this volume will

Budytes citreola, 83

é melanocephala, 83

Buteo ferox, 78

Buthus bengalensis, 112

Cerostris paradoxa, 107

Calandrella brachydactyla, 84

Canis lupus, 69

Caprimulgus europeus, 79

unwini, 79

Carduelis caniceps, 84.

Carex setigera, 369

Carine bactriana, 79

Casarca rutila, 89

Cedrus deodara, 378

Cervus cashmirianus, 76, 77

» maral, 77

Cettia cetti, 81

Chettusia villotzi, 87

Chiracanthium, 287

Cinclus asiaticus, 83

Circus eruginosus, 78

» cineraceus, 78

5 _ cyaneus, 77

», macrurus, 78

Citillus leptodactylus, 71

Clangula glaucion, 89

Cocalus, 283

45 concolor, 283

~ cyaneus, 283

‘5 salax, 283

Columba eversmanni, 86

Pa intermedia, 86

Coracias garrula, 79

Corvus frugileeus, 85

»» monedula, 85

», splendens, 257

Coturnix communis, 87

Cotyle riparia, 83

» rupestris, 83

Crex pratensis, 88

Cupressus torulosa, 371

Cyanecula suecica, 82

= albisternis, 285

var., 286

” ”

be issued with the last of the series in a subsequent volume,

378

*Cyclosa anseripes, 286 |

presets, 283 |

miniaceomicans, 283

baeaee amplexicaudata, 237, 238,

240, 257

Cynopterus brachyotus, 239

marginatus, 237, 238, 239,

240, 257, 258

Cypselus apus, 79

3 melba, 79

Sty DOpArShaS 110

5 paganus, 111 |

Cystauchenium, 109 |

Cytza, 283 |

% albolimbata, 282

alburna, 282

» sinuata, 282

Dendrophthoe coccinea, 91

farinosa, 94

ferruginea, 92 |

ignea, 93

- macrocalyx, 91

pentandra, 94

pentapetala, 90

pulcher, 90

Delonas ocyale, 101 |

Ellobius, 75

fuscocapillus, 74, 75

intermedius, 73, 74, 75

talpinus, 74, 75

» var. rufescens, 75

Elytranthe albida, 98"

avenis, 97

farinosa, 94

formosa, 95

A spheroidea, 97

Emberiza fucata, 85

pyrrhuloides, 85

scheeniclus, 85

Endophyllum euphorbie-silvatice, 366

Epeira, 107, 287

anama, 107

caput-lupi, 107 )

dehaani, 106, 107

”

”?

ieee masoni, 105 |

ve rhodosternon, 107 |

- submucronata, 106.

Erinaceus albulus, 68, 69

” auritus, 69. |

Erismatura leucocephala, 89 |

Erythrospiza obsoleta, 84 /

Erythrosterna parva, 80

Euphorbia amygdaloides, 366 :

> cognata, 351, 364, 372

Kuryattus, 283 -

*Kurystheus hirsutus, 212, 227, 229

Euspiza luteola, 85

Felis caudata, 69 et a

Ficus, 61, 64, 65

> alba, 67

arfakensis, 68

brachiata, 65

*”

Index.

Ficus chartacea, 64

comitis, 68

conora, 62

conspicabilis, 61

dalbertisii, 64

dimorpha, 66

dumosa, 67

forbesii, 66

grandis, 64

mespiloides, 62

miquelii, 65

__ vibes, 66

roxburghii, 64

Fragaria vesca, 351, 359

Fulica atra, 88

Fuligula cristata, 88

3 nyroca, 89

Gagrella, 115

* binotata, 115

cervina, 115

quadravittata, 115,116 |

i signata, 117

Gallinago scolopacinus, 87

- solitaria, 87

Gasteracantha, 104

annamita, 105, 284.

pe frontata, 105

Gazella subeutturosa, 76

Geranium nepalense, 374

Gerbillus erythrurnus, 72

¥ hurriane, 71, 72

Gymnosporangium clavariesforme, 370,

371

juniperinum, 371

Harpyiocephalus, 252

a harpia, 258, 259

leucogaster, 251, 252

**¥ * KK XK KX X

”»

”

Hasarius, 283

. adansoni, 283

Hersilia, 287

ee oan ferina, 102

a laheuida, 102

” mediocris, 102

7 venatoria, 102

Himantopus candidus, 87

Hippasa greenalliz, 101

Hipposideros fulvus, 248

Hirundo rustica, 83

Homalattus, 287

Hormurus australasiz, 113

Hyperia, 224, 226, 227

Hyperina, 212

Hypolais pallida, 81

i rama, 81

Ischnurus australasize, 113

es pistaceus, 1138

Tsometrus varius, 112 :

Jasminum grandiflorum, 364, 374

humile, 363, 374

officinale, 364, 374 > °

BE revolutum, 361

Lagomys rufescens, 75

Index. 379

Lanius isabellinus, 80

5, Pheenicuroides, 80

Larus ridibundus, 88

Leptoctenus denticulatus, 108

+ pullus, 108

* 5 tumidulus, 108

Leptopelma, 287

Lepus lehmanni, 76

_uestrigonus, 224, 227

a poses re. 212, 224, 225,

227, 229

re ferus, 225

fuscus, 225

Liocheles, 113

a australasie, 113

? complanatus, 113

i neocaledonicus, 113

Loranthus, 89, 90, 99

= albidus, 98

se ampullaceus, 97

= avenis, 97

a axanthus, 90

* . beccarii, 98

es bengalensis, 92

5 carinulatus, 97

és coccineus, 90, 91, 95

- concavifolius, 92

55 contractus, 94

* * crassipetalus, 91

.* curvatus, 95

dianthus, 96

* 5 duthieanus, 94

7 eleutheropetalus, 91

0 erythrostachys, 90

Ps evenius, 97

Pk farinosus, 94

rf ferruginenus, 92

i finlaysonianus, 94.

* ‘5 forbesii, 100

# formosus, 95, 96

* globosus, 97

- graciliflora, 92

* x grandifrons, 93

_ heteranthusg, 91

fe kingii, 99

* a kunstleri, 95

Pa levigata, 92

* m lampongus, 100

3 lecucosiphon, 98

Le lobbii, 90

as longiflorus, 93

ed ‘le lowii, 98

PP loxantherus, 95

i lyndenianus, 90

¥ malaccensis, 93

bs meluitangensis, 96

obtectus, 92

:. oleifolius, 97

oa oortiauus, 92

ms pallens, 97

i parishii, 90

ie pentandrus, 93

eran na pentapetalus, 90

s platyphyllus, 97

- polycarpus, 90

* fe productus, 91

: pulcher, 90

. racemiferus, 91

Ss reinwardtianus, 95

“ retusus, 98

rf rigidus, 94

ii schultesii, 93

* - scortechinii, 94

s scurrula, 93

fe > var. obtecta, 92

* speciosus, 90, 95

5 sphaerocarpus, 97

be sub-globusus, 97

ss sub-umbellatus, 97

;, viridiflorus, 97

Lycosa, 101

» virulenta, 101

bys eidus bairdii, 208

ts channeri, 206, 208, 376

is elongatus, 208

es gracilis, 376

Bee. stenops, 209

tridentatus, 207, 208, 209

Machetes pugnax, 87

Macrosolen, 97

sf formosus, 95

BS oleioides, 97

.» pallens, 97

S sphaerocarpus, 97

Mevia, 283

Maracandus, 114

macei, 114

- mouhoti, 114

* - reticulatus, 113

Megaderma lyra, 242, 258

Melanocorypha bimaculata, 84

Menemerus culicivorus, 101

Mergus albellus, 89

Merops apiaster, 79

Merula atrigularis, 81

» maxima, 81

. vulgaris, 81.

Meta, 286, 287

ss fastigiata, 107

», fastuosa, 107

Milvus migrans, 78

Miniopterus schreibersi, 251, 254, 256,

257

Mogegridgea, 287

a 351, 364, 367, 371

andrachnis, 37 1

* AM euphorbiz 364, 372, 373

Monticola cyanus, 82

Motacilla alba, 83

P melanope, 83

Murina leucogaster, 251

» suillus, 258

Mus bactrianus, 72

»» pachycercus, 72

380

Myriactis nepalensis, 373

Nephila, 287

fuscipes, 107

maculata, 107

- rivulata, 107

Nephilengys hofmanni, 107

Rs malabarensis, 107

Noctulinia lasyura, 258

Nycticejus nivicolus, 259

Ocyale atalanta, 101

Otis tertax, 87

Oxyopes, 287

Palamneeus bengalensis, 112

Palystes kochi, 103

Paraphronima, 214

Passer hispaniolensis, 85

» indicus, 84

» montanus, 84

Pastor roseus, 86

Phalacrocorax carbo, 88

Phasianus colchicus, 86

* principalis, 86

5 shawi, 86

Phoenicanthemum bennetianum, 91

coccineum, 91

pentapetalum, 90

Pholcus “distinctus L108

» elongatus, 1C7, 108

» margarita, 108

» phalangioides, 107

Ws tipuloides, 108%

Phrictus flavopilosus, 110

Phronima, 212, 218, 214

% x bucephala, 212, 213, 214, 215,

229

sedentaria, 21

Phronimella, 214

As hippocephala, 212, 213, 214,

217, 229.

Phronimopsis, oi

Phryctus, 111

Phyllorhina amboinensis, 248, 249

»”

)

ns armigera, 245, 247, 248

oy bicolor, 248

is fulva, 248

micropus, 249

Pica rustica, 85

Pimpinella diversifolia, 352, 356

Pinus excelsa, 373

» longifolia, 373

Plecotus auritus, 242, 258

y darjilingensis, 258

a homochrous, 258

Plexippus, 283

3 aper, 283

argentosus, 283

» catellus, 253

a culicivorus, 101

9 erythrocephalus, 283

‘s expectans, 283

9) frontaliger, 283

” laticeps, 283

Index.

Plexippus nimbatus, 283

SS ochropus, 283

99 pupulus, 283

9 ruber, 283

severus, 283

Pollinis nuda, 369

Porzana bailloni, 88

ne maruetta, 88

Pratincola caprata, 80

maura, 80

Priata agelenoides, 101

Psecas, 283

Pterocles alchata, 86

Pteropus amplexicaudatus, 237

3; leucocephalus, 236

- marginatus, 239

3 medius, 236, 238, 257

by pyrivorus, 237, 238, 258

Ptocasius, 283

Puccinia anemones, 361

Pe coronata, 358, 359

e flcsculosorum, 373

Mesh. fragariz, 359, 361

7 fusea, 362

ns graminis, 367, 368

A pimpinelle, 356, 358

viol, 354, 356

Pyrus variolosa, 359, 370

Rallus aquaticus, 87

Ranunculus diffusus, 374

Rhabdosoma, 221

or armatum, 219, 220

* -. investigatoris, 212, 219,

220, 229

_ whitei, 219, 220

Rhamuus dahuricus, 358

Rhinolophus affinis, 242, 257

armiger, 245

Rhinolophus ferrum-equinum, 24:5

a luctus, 240, 241

i macrotis, 241, 242, 258

os minor, 240, 243, 244, 245

» perniger, 240

Pr subbadius, 243, 244

tragatus, 245

Ruticilla erythronota, 82

‘ rufiventris, 82

Sageretia oppositifolia, 359

Salticus collingwoodi, 283

ne forceps, 283

5 sinuatus, 283

» (Attus) forceps, 283

Sanicula, 374

europa, 352

Sarpedon, 286

*Satzicus, 286

Te andamanicus, 287

Saxicola deserti, 82

finschii, 82

isabellina, 82

= morio, 82

PA opistholenca, 82

Tndex. 381

Sceea, 283 Thalictrum javanicum, 362

Scelospizias badius, 78 minus, 363, 375

Scolopax rusticula, 87 *Thelictopis canescens, 103

*Scorpiops anthracinus, 112 ‘f severa, 104

* hardwicki, 113 Thelyphonus assamensis, 111

ms montana, 113 ¥% formosus, 111

a solidus, 113 Tinnunculus alaudarius, 79

Scotophilus fuliginosus, 250, 251, 257 cenchris, 79

Selenocosmia, 110 Tityus varius, 112

Serveea, 283 Totanus ochropus, 87

Sitta syriaca, 83 Tringoides hypoleucus, 87

Spermophilus, 71 Troglodytes nipalensis, 83

* 4 bactrianus, 70 A parvulus, 83

a brevicauda, 71 Turtur auritus, 86

s citellus, 71 Upupa epops, 80

. concolor, 71 Uromyces junci, 373

> dauricus, 71 5s pisi, 366

a erythrogenys, 71 4 scutellatus, 366

‘ eversmanni, 71 35 valerian, 351, 352, 354

2 fulvus, 71 Urtica parviflora, 351, 368

Re euttatus, 71 Valeriana wallichii, 351, 352

k leptodactylus, 71 Vanellus cristatus, 87

< mongolicus, 71 Vespertilio abramus, 250

% mugosaricus, 71 33 adversus, 255

A musicus, 71 %5 caliginosus, 256

% rufescens, 71 darjilingensis, 258

xanthoprymuus, 71 5 ferrum-equinum, 245

*Sphedanus, 284 os formosa, 254, 256

ns marginatus, 284 A formosus, 254

Ne undatus, 284: PP fuliginosa, 254, 256, 2

Stanneoclavis brevispina, 285 9 fuliginosus, 251

canningensis, 285 93 labiata, 250, 256

Sterna anglica, 88 * muricola, 255, 256

minuta, 88 9 mystacinus, 242, 254, 255,

Strobilanthes dalhousianus, 351, 369 256, 258

Sturnus poltaratskyi, 86 9 nipalensis, 253, 258

Sturnus vulgaris, 85 9 noctula, 250, 256

Sylvia affinis, 80 Hp pallidiventer, 253

ae tamuliaris, 81 P pallidiventris, 253

‘ minuscula, 80 on schreibersii, 256

ry mystacea, 81 sh siligorensis, 255, 258

rubescens, 81 subbadia, 243

Synotus darjilingensis, 258 Vesperugo abramus, 250, 251, 257

Tadorna vulpanser, 89 a noctula, 250

Tetragnatha gracilis, 286 Viola serpens, 354

Tetraogallus himalayensis, 86 Vulpes montana, 69, 70

hep

6 «

ee \

oie 1s rd

we ROoAgeie }

nla enekty

Ty Girl eel Ba pak vow

Pay madiiats hag shal as

nab Petey Rin, foe

ae Pebt iil) Me t)a ot Ge

Be 2 Flee 1 37a.

ee ee) si es | ‘sei t E

’ 5 So ee

oe Ay! pitas ‘

Gi. bali git

‘ i h j

SAN perce. Pwet soli

AtS tel ; sera y

Vee ‘ “2. if Fah? ¥

Uh se 5 P70 ey fair at

ae Spe gae .* it F

“a .Ria)"" prt t} ns ee ae

oi)! £98) er iwieltoe ¥.

GOES RAL PRAMS "

£ES) a cA yin ene “4

oi hee neta rei: fh

Tat Sat ¥ oS ok 7 et .

fp dae alee bi x

; teat HES UE *

‘2 / 3 mi ree et j 7 iy ’

rage ake

pk a): 7)

at SAT) aigen S7

J P ePeiay SLs us .

Pie etx be a y

ait TH bie “:

han tes We i

‘ : ’ ' z *

( Pan ane

: |

‘

ibe

‘

ae .

+ -

% .

| Ay a. yee a

; a) F we

Pee RE RP ON nah

j' ey : as

‘

A - '

a. an

ee ie ak) DY ee a ta

yt P AP mtv +s

tae eC >

t x

;

‘

‘ >

\ Uke Sh ge

| “a

‘ ; > #T vane. HOUR

Hoge Fa Piste

ee ae.

é ae oTy Sean bine "

P :

a] Met

Vo. ® “w

‘

~ _— < an: :

‘

;

. ¥ 7

vy tel

)

“a+ NEW SERIES. VOL. LVI. CCL RXV, 8

tn OO OOOO eacu33o mr eseee_5uoeG5o“Goeesee ee eee

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

* Vol. LVI, Part II, No. 1.—1887.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTURAL fiisToRY PECRETARY.

Oe a es ee ee

. ~~ - na rw q

;

’

sa AND PUBLISHED BY THE

b B META IE BA By

‘

otf >

z “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

| within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

» man or produced by nature.”—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 S§ 59, Ludgate Hill,

Bs CALCUTTA:

ee PRINTED BY }. W. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTisy Mission PRESS,

g j

JOURNAL |

| ASIATIC SOCIETY, 5j, PARK STREET, :

gS pr ee

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Bs. 1-8,

Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence.

Issued July 23rd, 1887.

—™

CONTENTS.

eed

I.—On the Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall.—By

Henny F. Buanrorp, F. R.S8., Meteorological Reporter to

the Government of India..

II.—On the changes observed in tthe Danity of ‘the Suniaee ome

water, coincident with, and due to Aerial Disturbances, and

consequent Alteration of Baric Pressure over adjacent Sea

Areas: and on the Usefulness of a more exact measurement —

of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water : more especially with

Reference tothe Waters near and about the Hooghly River |

Pilot Station.— By SAMUEL R. HLSON........sccecsccceecseevene

III.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota: Heteroptera, No. hee KE. T.

ATKINSON; ‘Bs As; PRESIDENTS oicae oe cece coy ae et

IV.—A second series of N ew Species of Ficus from New Guinea.—

By Gzorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. 1. S., = intendent

of the Royal Botanic Gar an Calsuitass ‘ :

V.—On some New Species of Ficus from Gisnatew: 3 y ‘Gudwen

Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent Botanic

Gardet, OUlewbtacis cig stesidart bivecd dowedat suns ea

eeecse

VI.—On the Mammals and Birds collected by Gustine 0. 3. ani |

C. S. I. of the tine ee Commission. —By J.

SovL.y... se

V1il.—On the Wipastes of Siccaptione be hana 5 ee ik a

Greorce Kinc, M. B., LL. D., F..8., Superintendent

of the Royal Botanic Cariion: Ouleutta ONE TY Pon ma

VIIL—E’tude sur les Arachnides del Asie méridionale faisant partie

des collections de ? Indian Museum (Caleutta). Par M. E.

Srmon, de Paris—Communicated by THE SUPERINTEN- —

DENT OF THE INDIAN Museum ..

municated by THe Hon’BLe MAnENDRALAL Srekar, M. D.,

C. ‘: K. (With a Wood-cut) ACO ROO ROO eek eee nee ete ake nares

IX.—On the Differential Equation a a Siaicotory, ay Agueoan ay ees

Mursopapuyay, M. A., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E. Oom- |

pecegee |

| Page :

Cbg

6838

BOE S

ay CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

Oe, No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

ie Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Suranon A. Bar-

. ciay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I, IL, and ITI.)

- Notes on dian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By H. T. Annet B.A. The

- Hive-Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee— —

oe J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected im Tavoy

a and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. H.

Heterocera.—By Waele Moorn, F.Z.8., A. L. S. Communicated by

He Naruran History Secretary. |

Pee No..2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in

Kwnaon.— By Wititam Dourrry, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by

_ Tur Narurat History Taz Szcrnrary. Ona second species of Uredine af-

Bt _— fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes—By Surezon A. Barcray, M. B., Bengal

e ae Medical Service (with Plates IV. and V.). Notes on Indian Hincheta:

| Need and Index.—By H.T. Atkinson, B. A. On a new

pes Seem of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surcnon A.

- Barotay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. With Plates VI. and VII.).

On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.

§. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life- History of cer-

tain Calcutta Species of ‘ates: with special reference to the Seasonal

| Dimorphiom alleged to occur in them. —By LioneL pe Nice’viuue, F. H.

Peay (With Plate XII.)

Fife As No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-

. um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prornussor Avcust Foren, Zurich. Com-

municated by Tue Naturat History Secretary. On some New Indian

aloe. - Butterflies. —By Lionen ve Nice’vitte, F. HE. S. (With Plate XI.).

Z oo Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies.—By Witt1am Dousr-

[ De: “TY, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Naturat History Srcre-

t MP, gARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By

_ GEorGE Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Oatéutia: (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect

Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By H. T, ATKINSON, .

zB. on

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1886). ~The Landshells of Perak.—By

O. F. vy. Mouienporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tuz Naturat History

Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad. —By Si

A. Huu, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and

its Rivers: an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupuam, A. R. Qt

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by

Mr. J. Woopn-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of x

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta;

and L. ve Nice’vinuz, F. E. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVIL.,

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guwinea.—By

Georce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent Royal Botanic

Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera |

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District—By

JoserH S. Bary. Communicated by Taz Natura History SECRETARY.

a a rn |

NEW SERIES, VOL. EVI. CCELXXVI_

OF THE |

Mor. owl. Part-ll No. Il aSse7:

EDITED BY

J HE NATURAL ftisTORY PECRETARY.

see Re =

eee

Ag ial ““The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

Rah cas within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

ea man or produced by nature.”’—S1r WILLIAM JONES.

Ruste *,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

PREC ee - to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

ee. bi don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Oo., 57 Sf 59, Ludgate Hill.

gs CALCUTTA:

‘ : PRINTED BY f, W. JHoMAs, AT THE PaPTiIsy MISSION PRESS,

+: Lanne AND PUBLISHED BY THE

R Bs m a #SIATIC SOCIETY, 57; PARK STREET,

e ,

se Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rs. 1-8,

oD ms Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence,

Issued November 2nd, 18877.

CONTENTS.

X.— On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bismuth on the

Ductility of Silver—By Sureton-Masor J. Scuniy, Assay

Master, Calcutta

XI.—On Monge’s Differential Hitiateon s all Contes. re Manette

cated by THe Hon’BuE eaten tis Srroar, M. D., C. I. HE.

XII.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, aha No. 2.—By H. T.

Atkinson, B. A., PResipnnt

XIII.—Natural History Notes from H. Mt? s Indian Marine Baktiey

Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,

Commanding. No.4. Description of a new species of Crane

tacea belonging to the Brachyurous Family Raninide.—By J.

Woop-Mason, Esq. Superintendent of the Indian Museum,

and Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the

Medical College of Bengal, Calcutta. (With Pl. I.) e

XIV .—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey

Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CarPentnr, R.N,,

Commanding. No.5. On some Nodular Stones obtained by

trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water.—By EH. J,

Jones, A. R. S. M., Geological a of India. (With

Pl. II.) ae

XV.—Natural History Notes Abn fs & M s dink Mari ime Siti

Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,

Commanding. No.6. On Sia new Amphipods from the Bay 7

of Bengal.— By G. M. Giuzs, M. B., F. R.C.S., Surgeon-

Naturalist to the Marine Survey. (With Pls. III.—VIIL.)...

XVI1.—Natural History Notes from H, M,’s Indian Marine Survey

Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALyrep Carpunter, R.N.,

Commanding. No.8. The Mean Temperature of the Deep

Waters of the Bay of Bengal. By Ooi nuinder CARPENTER,

R. N., D.S. O., F. R. Met. Soc., F. Z.8,.--Communicated by

Tue SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN Museum. (With Pi. X.)

Plate X. will be issued with the next Number.

Page |

121

134.

145,

206

200. wale

ale

230 * ah

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

‘ No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Surcron A. Bar-

onary, M.B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I., II., and III.)

- Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By H.T. Arxinson, B. A. The

_ Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—

J J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy

“and m Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. EH.

_ Proman, Esg., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.

aes scorn. —By Biepenie Moors, F.Z.8., A. L. 8. Communicated by

Tue Narvurat History SECRETARY.

a No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in

be _Kumaon. —By Witiam Douerty, Cincinnati, U.S. A, Communicated by y

E Tue Naturat History Tue Secretary. Ona second species of Uredine af-

+ ati ie =.

-fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surgeon A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal

_ Medical Service (with Plates 1V. and Vv. ). Notes on Indian Bheabheee

No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H.T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new

species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surczon A.

1 ‘Barctay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).

ie On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.

- §. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life etots of cer-

& tain ( Calcutta Species of Cees with special reference to the Seasonal

es Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lionen DE Nice’viiuz, F. EH.

4 oS. (With Plate XII.)

ae No, 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-

ee um, Oaleutta. No. 2.—By Prorzessor Avucusr Foret, Zurich. Com-

3 municated by Tue Natura, Hisrory Secretary. On some New Indian

a Butterflies. —By Lionsx pz Nice’vitus, F. E. 8S. (With Plate XI.).

“ Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Witiiam DouEr-

ia TY, Cincinnatr, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Naturat History Secre- |

ie “TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya. —By

P - Grorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

ee: Botanic Garden, Oitidta. (Witle Phas XIII. and XIV.). Insect

re ‘Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By EH. T. ATKINSoN,

pee A.

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By — '

O. F. v. Méutenvorrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tun Natura, History

Sucretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By §.

A. Hit, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and

its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupiam, A.R.S.

M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With a Map ; =

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by

Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of eae

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta; ars

and L. ve Nicr’vintx, F. E. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVID,

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from News Gwinea.—By -

Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent Royal Botanic ay

Garden, Calcutta. fay tne of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera a

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District. —By ;

JosepH §. Baty. Communicated by Tue Naruran History SucreraRy, =

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Inse oie F

collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum

Collector under C. 8. Prruan, Hsq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent t 4

Telegraghs. Part II. Rhopalocera.—By H. J. nara, F. Z. S., and L. DE

Nice’vitie, F. E. S. Communicated by Tux cer OF THE

Inpian Muszum. (With Plate XX.). Thtle-page, Index, a to the

Volume.

Correction.

In volume LIV, Part II, 1885, p. 125, in the ; Wasa on ila a

Swatch-of-no-Ground””. 4 lines from the top of the page for “ “ me

fathoms” read “1000 fathoms”; and for “60 miles o read ae

miles.” ia

rl Oe

iit ae

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LVI, Part II, No. III.—1887.

See Pee ee oe

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuURAL FIIsTORY PECRETARY,

~~~

. = pate TORT a: a

; i : \ aq = : iy ue 3 f: a HH fe z § te { if le \ { iE Fe

‘ y pa = = une = =e a == — =e Seah

aA cement |) (a aR — { ul ES "ee = Pe

: erp ae i es a ee — eee Ne

vain Le ie _ i fi = Wid A = tae Sky

, ha ee ee aN EN Ca

+. 7. aes ee EES HM 7 cs ANIA %, Pye) TA Hee ae

: “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

—————————

Ee === ee eS

ere

a = ¥

igs i

«Oe

"y ite

ace, 3 v2

— a

> -.

a s

yt a.

7 =)

7 =

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

‘man or produced by nature.’”’—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,* Communications should be sent wnder cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 ¥ 59, Ludgate Hill.

eV ater Pyaar Ie

4 : .

f .

Ss ) >

Reed 24 : eee

+ ee

? a ae

+ re -

- .

% z “

CALCUTTA:

| PRINTED By J, W. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTIsy MIssION PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

Dijana ere

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1888.

- Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rg, 1-8

SRE Coe Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence.

gee Ser Issued January 30th, 1888.

;

~ te

* a4 ©

‘ os

. ~ : -

3% / yh: a, ,,

ays * by by

us feels eae

até yi oe

> r 7 =p

‘ an te . . _

yf be BN 5

Ly Cabs. ale

« tat * $ _

f a : = |

a 2a ie ye Aen

[a ‘, f

. q

‘ mh *. * .

’ A vi

Fe f BA ed

P 5 Behn ta,

eo ne = ee

a8 ih FMS NGE

» ne oes >

’

XVII. On the Chiroptera a Nepat —y 3 Es Sova

| XVII

Masirist am inacnied oy Sait " SopHiivtENDast OF ot

Inp1an Museum (Witha Map—Pl. XI.) ee Be Ah a

hes

XIX. —E'tude sur les Arachnides del Asie bapeee eae hy

partie des collections de Indian Museum (Calcutta).

MM. E. Stony, de Paris. Communicated es Tue So :

| -TENDENT or THE Ixpran Museu e. vee (SAO Se

ee: by Tux Hon’ BLE Maxexpratan Sinan, M. De "0. I

pena yury ¢ Woodonts) .. reer Manette

mY es

. a ¥

c Ley

Le fo

aks

: is :

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

ve OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

RENO. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

| Bitiayon Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Surcron A. Bar-

- onay, M.B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I, II., and II1.)

iy Bee on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By EH. T. rea B.A. The

ne Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—

Me By J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy

and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. E.

or Pirman, Esqg., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.

Heterocera. —By aeieticn Moor:, F.Z.8., A. L. 8. Communicated by

es Tas Naturat History Secrerary.

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in

‘ mR maon.— By WiuL1amM DoueERTY, Cincinnati, U.S. A. Communicated by

‘Tue Natura History Tur Secrerary. Ona second species of Uredine af-

fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surczon A. Barctay, M. B., Bengal

A Medical Service (with Plates TV..anaV.). Notes on Indian Bhyaehats

No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By E.T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new

> ee

es :

ar heel r. one 7 2 > 7 aa Oe 7 7 c -, ~

are et in bt 4a) Kit Greet, oP ees > We. 2 . Py ves" ‘ < - or _

oo - 1 Sy a vd we ae ee aN si ee M a _. Ae :

> é ~ a b a. A _/ eo om ve” ~~

ey : is eet ae a Pe nae

ie ae ¢ tS ¥

ys cs

. "species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surcuon A.

aS e: ao 3ARCLAY, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).

5 ne oe:

On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.

aoe te (With Plates VIII., IX., and X.). On the Life- Hin of cer-

tain Calcutta Species of Shtprina with special reference to the Seasonal

~ Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.— By LionrL pe Nice’vitxe, F. E.

ae (With Plate XII.)

No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-

Se, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Proressor Avueusr Foren, Zurich. Com-

e Dic? -municated by Tue Narurat History Secrerary. On some New Indian

Butterflies—By Lionen ve Nice’vitte, F. HE. S. (With Plate XI.).

pe E Btdional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies.—By Witt1aAm Douer-

" me NY, Cincinnati, U.S. A. Communicated by the Natura, History Szcrs-

TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By

- Groce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Oalouttd. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect

a - Pests belonging to the CL ai ae Salad Family Coccide.—By EH. T. Atx1nson,

i 'B. A.

eos ee er ee ae

Se gt ane se Le

, be oS Nee ~%

ete g

Logs se

ot ee

ie 2

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By

O. F. v. Méutenporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tun Natura History

Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By S.

A. Hit, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and

its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.—By R. D. OLtpuam, A. R. S.-

M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With a Map

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by

Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera~—By J. Woop-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of —

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta;

and L. pe Nice’viis, F. B. 8. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVID,

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By

Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L. 8., Superintendent Royal Botanic

Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District.— By —

Josnrpn S. Baty. Communicated by Tue Natura, History SECRETARY. —

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Insects

collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum

Collector wnder C. S. Prrman, Hsq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of

Telegraghs, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Eiwes, F. Z. 8., and L. pz

Nice'vittz, F. E. S. Communicated by Tur SuperintTENDENT OF THE

Inpisan Museum. (With Plate XX.). Tutle-page, Index, &c. to the

Volume. | ay

i ee eS ee

ee a a ee

gcc Th e's es ee Raed

—S wee tS ee ee

NEW SERIES. VOL.LVI. CCLXXXE.

JOURNAL

OF THE

_ ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Volk. yV ijsrart IT, No. 1V:.=18e7.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuRAL ftisTORY SECRETARY.

ann oe eee

ae ReStELgy7 RAM OE MOTE 1A LS MBE Maher sea mean Be

pete PETTERS ETON TST ETETTS =e

<Sbepartatente

fi 34 9% WReENTLITE

oi : ! Bt

By ea

sage t=

5 Alla

“The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

) within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

‘man or produced by nature.”—Sir Wittiam JonEs.

6 hee He) we QR

ne *,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon.

don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 Sf 59, Ludgate Hill. j i

—— eee Ol eee ‘

CALCUTTA :

a : PRINTED By GF, iE, ROUSE, AT THE PAPTISF MMussIon PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1888.

raat Wea

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1—To Non-Subseribers Bs 1-8,

Bae aoa Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence,

r , Issued March | 19th, 1888.

hati oke fe sa Giessen. Bimatoye

_ M.B., Bengal Medical Service (With Plates 2

pe. 65) —WN atural ‘History Notes from H. M.’s Indi

Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED:

ornr, RL N., Commanding, No. 8. Deseription of a new sy)

of the Brachyurous Genus Lyreidus from the Deptie

Andaman Sea—By J. ‘Woop-Mason, Esq, Superi

the Indian ne pet Bes “6 o sa

hs : - aid # Pr PT ee

* t i " oa ut ne

‘ ’ " se ee

t:, . = ‘i MPSA > .

Sy . Jo . if Vt

. ged 2 = a

7 re. ee

= = :

\ ‘

, >

‘

= =

€

é Oy

=> +. —

Peat bash

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. 11.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

3 Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Sur@Eon A. Bar-

ouay, M.B., Bengal Medical Service.” (With Plates I., II., and III.)

Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By EH. T. Arxinson, B. A. The

Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—

By J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy

and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. EB.

Pirman, Esq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.

Heterocera.—By Freprrick Moors, F.Z.S., A. L.S. Communicated by

Tue NaturaL History SECRETARY, |

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A Inst of Butterflies taken in

Kumaon.— By Wiutam Douerty, Cincinnati, U.S.A. Communicated by

- Tun Natura History Secrmrary. On a second species of Uredine af-

fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surczon A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal

Medical Service (with Plates IV. and V.). Notes on Indian Rhynchota,

No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H.T. Atkinson, B. A. On a new

species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Suraxon A.

_ Barcray, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).

On three new Himalayan Primulas—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.

_ §. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life-History of cer-

ee tain Calcutta Species of Satyrine, with special reference to the Seasonal

-_- Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lionen pve Nicr‘viwue, F. E.

_§. (With Plate XII.)

No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-

um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prorsessor Avuaust Foren, Zurich. Com-

-—s municated by Tae Natura History Secretary. On some New Indian

Butterflies —By Lionen ve Nicwr’vitte, F. H. S. (With Plate XI.).

Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Wiut1am Douer-

ty, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Natura History SEcre-

TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By

Grorce Kine, M. B., LL.D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Calcutta. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect

Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By E. T. Atkinson,

eB. A. |

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak. —By

O. F. vy. Ménuenporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tur Narurat History —

Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad. —By

A. Hitt, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Ohanges in the Geography of the Punjab onde

its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupuaw, A. R.

M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With Ben?

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Unsects collected in Uachar by

Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera—By J. Woopv-Masoy.

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Frofessor of

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutt

and L. vu Nicn’vittz, F. HE. 8. (With Plates XV., XVI., XVI

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—

Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L.S., Superintendent Royal Botan

Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District —By if

Josupn §. Baty. Communicated by Tue Naruran History SucRETARY.

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Insee :

collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Musewm

Collector under CO. S. Pitman, Ksoq., C. 1. E., Chief Superintendent 0

‘Telegraghs, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Euwss, F. Z. 8., and L. pp

Nice'yituz, F. E. S. Communicated by Tue SuPERINTENDENT OF THE ¥

Inp1an Museum. (With Plate XX.). Title-page, Index, Rx to a

Volume.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LVI, Part II, No. V.—i887.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuRAL fiisTORY SECRETARY.

~—

Toa Md ee

rereereer Tie oes

ae Te ee 3

= cH ney

Be:

>),

= STE AE aI Ae -

= LF == SSeS ——— = = ae aoe

=== MUSEUM PA BIATIC. SOCIETY CALCU PTA™ aN, =

/ “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man or produced by nature.”’—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,.* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 gs 59, Ludgate Hill.

—_—a—o~-aeersees> eee se le ee_eeeereereeeesS>s rm”

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED By fF, fi. Rouse, AT THE PaPTisy MIssron PREsS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 5j, FARK STREET.

1888.

pssst Tam pace ees EOC WRT _ SETS

a eee Fe SE ee pote SETS eae

Bir i < \ i Lenn

if a te aia WU HE AL Al {

i ‘an Ge WM nati : i\ ! ie vi

ay ci A u es Heer 0 su

i : (=). Ties (iba nt — oy ae 1 a &

PA irc lt lhe me Wi , Re ise

a ee lESanht ft: BS hi RE Whe th Tite TM fi SH | he ae

PT 4; ;

p10 Ue

1) \) fet

ry ; =

udvenn j (ADA.

. aatet 4!

_ Price (exciusive of postagc) to Subscribers. Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rs. 1-8

x ; Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence

Issued Oct. 30th, 1888.

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. I.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

Rucioyan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes). —By Sureron A. Bar-

cLAy, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I., II., and III.)

Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By HE. T. Arxinsoy, B. A. The

Hive-Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—

By J. C. Dougras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy

and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indiaw Museum Collector under C. E.

Pirman, Esq, C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.

Heterocera.— By Fruprrick Moors, F. Z.8., A. L. 8S. Communicated by

Tae Narurat History SECRETARY.

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in

— Kumaon.— By Wititam Donerty, Cincinnati, U. S. A. Communicated by

Tae Nartourat History Secretary. On a second species of Uredine af-

fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surcron A. Barcray, M. B., Bengal

Medical. Service (with Plates IV.and V.). Notes on Indian Rhynchota,

No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H. T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new

species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, London.—By Sureron A.

~Barcuay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.)

On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.

8S. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life-History of cer-

tain Caleutta Species of Satyrine with special reference to the Seasonal

Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lione. ve Nicz'viniz, F. EB.

S. (With Plate XII.)

No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-

um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prorusson Avcust Foret, Zurich. Com-

municated by Tur Naturat History Secretary. On some new Indian

Butterflies —By Lionen ve Nice’vituz, F. E. 8. (With Plate XI.).

Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Witutam Doner-

ae os ty, Cincinnati, U.S.A. Communicated by the Naturat History Secre-

_—-TaRyY. On two new species of Lex from the Hastern Himalaya.—By

Gzorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Calcuita. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect

Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By EH. T. ATKinson,

B. A.

No. 4, (issuéd March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By 4

O. F. v. Monienporrr, Px. D Oommunicated by Tur Narurat History

Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By S.

A. Hitt, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Chanyes in the Geography of the Punjab and

its Rivers: an Historico-Geographical Study.—By R. D. Oupnam, A. RS.

M, Deputy Superintendent, Geographical Survey of India. (With a Map

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by

Mr J. Woop-Mason, Part Il, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason, —

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of.

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcut oo

and L. ve Nice'vitts, F. 8. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVI,

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By :

Georce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S, Superintendent Royal Botanie

Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District.— By

Joseen S. Baty. Communicated by Toe Narurat Hisrory Secretary.

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1837). List of the Lepidopterous Insects

collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum —

Oollector under C. S. Pirman, Esq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of

Telegraphs, Part 11, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Euwus, F. Z. S., and L. pp |

Nice'vitte, F. EK. S. Communicated by Tue SuperinrenpENT OF THB

Inpian Museum, (With Plate XX.). Title-page, Index, &c. to the

Volume.

* ~ -

See & oS eee oy

FOI POS nd) |

TS cee ee

ae ee a ee ae

. “~ ~>

‘ » ie

=~ i= 6 -4:0-3 ee

. © s ee es

- -*

‘ ~ s . = . * « . ee ee ee

oes 4?

v7?

i»

ose en aewes €@86 4

“eer eoweeeoee @ ee wm

* . . * © -

4539

we aeee

3 1853 10006

CALIF ACAD OF nT LIBRARY

. 7

fe re-F ee * 6

— £ > >-.-s ?

** & + ee eee s * @

mses b> > &

» . es -;*e2 s &

ee >» Pn a os

y 7 * . B®

se. > & > es

or vee **

o> €ese ok &

eese#te?ew»rs

eee Serr rrevrre: + Fs

es*epresh > & ®-) & fF 2 2

eer eaeerer eer er eer ee > &

“te -ee weer «es 2 PO e

. serfFfetetnovere s &

rr epekRes ee es 2-2- & a

5 Pr? oe hh Fe * @ Ff B

® + *®-? =a °

es Lenrerenr pr + eee &

ee -s+erers? «+ ee? ~~

> * e >wye &> eS > & > fe

ee es 3 per? s Oo

ona Me eo te seer ni eS

* $ ° + or reercrr er & +S 8

»2.e eee *

st Saor> >

~rerrer ee & ’ . a P

SFr a & O 2 ef ee ee Pe. a

se @

e 2 © 8

o-@-8-) 9-6

ea ** oe > »

Se, ° » *

r stove err’ >) 2 @ &

9-8 6 € oe - ss

. ¢ * a a

7 e :* 2 .

e -_* *F > &

. es

ss ses :

eerte

, >»

se * te © ee

a a _'"

sc me @& oer Ff

eo 0 6.0 .e 2.

. 2 ’

.* © eee 2

ao as

’ a s'e'e* eo"

+e . ©

ref .

2-2 -*

¢ e-e-¢ e-8

* « : s

2 * ;

--~4-e@-6 a ov et wreer ss > &

>) > SP & ? 2-O 2 f

ee ¢ f

”

‘9

‘ * . e&eP s

2 P ‘ +h ee

a -e-8 . - 2s > 2

es > 2 9) 3

. a+. eo . erste ve

9 . a-) 2 2 2 2? es

> ° ees err & er eS

an 4 e 2 eeteerprs t & eo

eo P ->oer ere * +

s Cr . err? +) +S 2 2 2 8

a -Se-g 6-6 ‘sere > 2 @ 2 2?

e-@ 2-2 &°-4-@ * ese? 2 2} 9-2 >

s*aeeeee +e > ess + > oS ff

. ’ ee ee Be AA AAA; 2.) 2 8

oe * >; » +

ewe . Le "> ee ,

o> @ @ . “ef? * = 2 - fF , = Fs

° —— -_*e. ee ee oe a of

e. 2 8 #2 ee > we fe * es ? &

aa 2 o—+.-» es ane are eof 8 ? @ ee oo 2

ce Rtas . » + Y r ros > fF

es : ? -

. e 9 ¢

» se?

ee 2 - + fF,

i AR $,*,°

e-* © , ,

‘ ea rs

e .* *

- , Sod

‘. Fons

oo-s #9 . » a 5

ee?

oe oP wee eS

elle